Full text of "A Practical Introduction to Latin Prose Composition"

See other formats

This is a digital copy of a book that was preserved for generations on library shelves before it was carefully scanned by Google as part of a project 
to make the world's books discoverable online. 

It has survived long enough for the copyright to expire and the book to enter the public domain. A public domain book is one that was never subject 
to copyright or whose legal copyright term has expired. Whether a book is in the public domain may vary country to country. Public domain books 
are our gateways to the past, representing a wealth of history, culture and knowledge that's often difficult to discover. 

Marks, notations and other marginalia present in the original volume will appear in this file - a reminder of this book's long journey from the 
publisher to a library and finally to you. 

Usage guidelines 

Google is proud to partner with libraries to digitize public domain materials and make them widely accessible. Public domain books belong to the 
public and we are merely their custodians. Nevertheless, this work is expensive, so in order to keep providing this resource, we have taken steps to 
prevent abuse by commercial parties, including placing technical restrictions on automated querying. 

We also ask that you: 

+ Make non-commercial use of the files We designed Google Book Search for use by individuals, and we request that you use these files for 
personal, non-commercial purposes. 

+ Refrain from automated querying Do not send automated queries of any sort to Google's system: If you are conducting research on machine 
translation, optical character recognition or other areas where access to a large amount of text is helpful, please contact us. We encourage the 
use of public domain materials for these purposes and may be able to help. 

+ Maintain attribution The Google "watermark" you see on each file is essential for informing people about this project and helping them find 
additional materials through Google Book Search. Please do not remove it. 

+ Keep it legal Whatever your use, remember that you are responsible for ensuring that what you are doing is legal. Do not assume that just 
because we believe a book is in the public domain for users in the United States, that the work is also in the public domain for users in other 
countries. Whether a book is still in copyright varies from country to country, and we can't offer guidance on whether any specific use of 
any specific book is allowed. Please do not assume that a book's appearance in Google Book Search means it can be used in any manner 
anywhere in the world. Copyright infringement liability can be quite severe. 

About Google Book Search 

Google's mission is to organize the world's information and to make it universally accessible and useful. Google Book Search helps readers 
discover the world's books while helping authors and publishers reach new audiences. You can search through the full text of this book on the web 



at |http : //books . google . com/ 



3 2044 097 063 416 



StancUvrd Classioal "Worlcs. 



Cicero de Ofltclls. With Eng^h Notes, moetljtranBUted from 
Zamp and Bonnell. By Tboxaa A. Thaohxb, of Tale College. 
12mo. 194 pages. 

Horace, Tbe UTorlu off. Witli English Notes, for the 
use (^ Schools and GoUegeSL By J. L. LnrooLV, Prof, of Latin Lan- 
guage and Uteratare in Brown Uniyy 12mo. 675 pages. 

IjlTy. Selections from the first flye books, together irith the 
twenty-first and twenty-second hooks entire. With a Plan of 
Borne, and a Map of the Passsge of Hannibal, and En^h Notes 
for the Use of Schools. By J. L. Lnroour, ProU of the Latin Lan 
goage and Literature in Brown Uniy'y. ISmo. 889 pages. 

<|iiliitna Cnrtina t Life and Exploita of Alexander the Great 
Edited and Ulostrated with English Notes, by Wiluax Hxrxt 
Gbosbt. 12mo. 865 pages. 

Sallnet'a Jnenrthm. and Catiline** With Notes and a 
Vocabulary. By Butlxk and Stuikgas. 12mo. 897 pages. 

It is believed that this will be found superior to any edition here- 
tofore published in this coontiy. 

Tlie Histories of Tacitns* With Notes for Colleges. By 
W. S. Ttlkb, Professor of Latin and Greek in Amherst College. 
12mo. 468 pages. 

Tacitus' Germania and Asrlcola* With Notes for Col- 
leges. By W. S. Ttlbb. 12mo. 198 pages. 

Tirffil's .Kneid** With Explanatory Notes. By Hxxbt 
Psiszi, Professor of Latin in the State Uniyeraity of Michigan. 
(Becently published.) 12mo. 608 pages. 

The type is unusually large and distinct The work contains 
eighty-five engravings, which delineate the usages, customs, weapons, 
arts, and mytholoey of tbe ancients, with a yivlduess that can be at- 
tained o^y oy pictorial illustrations. 



Greek Text-Books. 

A First Greelc Boole* and Introdnetory Reader. 

By A. Habkitkss, Ph. D., author of " Amold*s First Latin Book,** 
*- Second Latin Book,** Ac. (Becently published.) 12ma 
276 pages. 

tor SEB XND or THIS TOLXnCK. 



I 






PKACTICAL INTRODUCTION 



TO 



LATIN PEOSE COMPOSITION 



BY 

THOMAS KERCHEVER ARNOLD, M. A. 

BXCTOB or LTSDOV, 
AND LAra rSLLOW OF TBISITT COLLBOX, CAUBBIDGB. 

CAKEFULLT BEYISBD AKD COBRECTSD 

BY REV. J. A. SPENCER, A.M. 



THIRTIBTn AMEBIOAN EDITION 



NEW, YORK: 
D. APPLETON & 00., 443 & 445 BROADWAY 
186T. 



^fl . 




■'■' -< V' '^. Te<N«.«vur 



EsTKBBD, according to Act of Congresfli in the year 1848, by 

D. APPLETON AND COMPANY, 

In the aerk'8 Office of the District Ck>iirt of the United States !br the 

Southern District of New York. 



EXPLANATION OF ABBREVIATIONS, ftc. 



D^ Q., H., TL, R., Z., staDd respectively for DStUrum, Oroitftmd, Rabiekt^ 
KrUgtr Ram^wrrif and Zumpt, 

Numerals aboye the line refer to the TabU qf Difermeeag if followed \iy a 
evTM. to the Cauiiona. 

An accent after a word, thus (parent*) shows it to be somewhat emphaHe, 

Words printed in UaKes in the Exercises are meant to call attention to some- 
thing that has been said respecting them, or to some point which should be 
earef uUy attended to in connection with them. 

Two or more words connected together by hjrphens show that ihey are to be 
translated into Latin by one word; as " branchcs-of-loamlng," dwirinab \ "aa- 
mifably' skilled," pmKammui, Ac. 



PREFACE. 



TiiE present volume contains the First Part of Mr. Arnold's 
Practical Introduction to Latin Prose Ck>inpo6ition ; the introduc- 
tory portion of the Second Part (as published by the Author) on 
the Order of Words in Latin ; and nearly all the Longer Latin 
Exercises, Part L, a work which was published separately, but 
intended to follow immediately in order the use of the First Part 
of the Prose Composition. 

This arrangement was adopted for the purpose of embracing 
as much valuable matter as possible within the compass of a rea- 
sonably sized volume. The First Part is complete in itself, and, 
80 far as it goes, admirably fulfils the design of the author ; yet, 
as the Exercises consist of single, short, and unconnected sen- 
tences, it was deemed advisable to introduce other and longer Ex- 
crcises, in which the student should be taught practically how to 
arrange his ideas in passages of considerable length, and in which 
are involved most of the minutiss and intricacies of the Latin 
idiom. For this purpose Part IL of the present volume is most 
excellently adapted. The work on the Latin Particles, whiclv 
was published by the author as the Second Part of the Practical 
Introduction to Latin Prose Ck)mposition, is a production of much 
value and importance, and is devoted to a lengthened and full elu- 
cidation of the difficulties which stand in the way of one who 
would become a thorough and accomplished Latinlst. It is in- 
tended — should the classical public demand it — ^to issue this work 
at an early date. 

The principal advantages which the present volume offers over 
works of a similar kind are these. It contains a copious but con- 
cise illustration of Latin Synonymes drawn mainly from the 
standard treatise of Doderlein on this subject ; there is, through- 



Viii PREFACE. 

out| a careful and precise notation of the Differences of Idiom 
between the Latin and English languages ; a frequent calling 
the attention of the student, by way of Cautions, to nice points 
which might otherwise escape his notice ; and a constant repeti- 
tion, under new forma and combined with new matter, of what has 
gone before — ^the iterum iierumque of Virgil — till both the words 
and expressions, with their peculiarities, are fastened in the mem^ 
ory. In addition to this, the Exercises are wholly in English, 
that is. the English is given to be turned into the corresponding 
Latin ; and full and very carefully arranged Vocabularies pre- 
cede or accompany each Exercise. This plan is far superior** 
in the Editor's judgment — ^to the common mode of giving all the 
Latin words in the Latin order, simply requiring that the sentence 
be made grammatically correct by the use of the right cases, 
moods, tenses, dec. By such a course the pupil is not obliged to 
Ktudy and exercise his powers of reflection and observation to any 
great extent ; but only to be tolerably well acquainted with gram- 
matical forms and usages ; he learns to expect the helps of the 
Latin words ; he pays little regard to the peculiarities of the Latin 
order ; and is very apt to be sadly puzzled when an English sen- 
tence or passage is given to him to be turned into Latin. On the 
contrary, by using Mr. Arnold's method the student is compelled 
to examine well and constantly the mode which the Romans had 
of expressing their ideas, and in what respect it differs from our 
own, as well in regard to the choice as the collocation of words 
and sentences ; and almost of necessity his memory has to be 
stored with a large supply of words and phrases for continual 
use. 

Great care has been bestowed upon the volume, for the purpose 
of securing accuracy and clearness of arrangement ; and it is 
trusted that it will not be found inferior to any issues of the 
American press. 

J. A. o« 
Nbw-Yoek, March 16(ft, 1846, 



TABLE OF CONTENTS. 

PAKT I. 



iNTBODirOfOBT "RmfABim ON THE ABRANaKKEMT OV WOBDB IM ▲ 

Latin Ssntknoe. 18 

Nominative Case and Verb 18 

AoonBative with InflniUve 19 

Aoonsatiye with Infinitive continued 21 

Agreement of Acljeotive with Subetantive 22 

The Relative 24 

Infinitive used substantively. 27 

Relative Continued. (Fundamental Bule for the employment 

of subjimctive tenses.) 29 

Relative continued 31 

Relative continued. Rel. with Superlative : * The first uho ' • • 32 

17*1 9M, expresslDg a purpose » • « • - • • • 34 

172 expressing a eoTWtf^Tuenctf. Quo. NeprohibUive 35 

English infinitive translated by tU with subj. > ». 

[Vocabulary of Verbs followed by tU.] ) 

13. ITif, Ac continued. *TTuU nobody, Ac. > 

[VocaKofPhrasesfoUowedbyttf.] $ ^ 

14. Qttth after negative sentences. [Vocab. of Verbs, &c followed 

by ^n.] r. 41 

16. Quoifithtu. [Vocab. ofVerbs followed by guomlfiu*.] 43 

VI. 16. Interrogative Sentences 45 

17. Interrogative Words • • 45 

18. Dependent Q^uestions 46 

19. Double Q^uestions. iln in single questi<ms 47 

20. M^, eon, Ac as principal Verba* 49 

VIL 21. Apposition 52 

22. Nominative after the VerU AOraeHon of the Predicate. [Vocab. 

oiAppooUion Verba.']'. •> 64 

23. Dative after e»«-...*. 66 



I. 


SI. 


II. 


2. 




8. 


III. 


4. 


IV. 


5. 




6. 




7. 




8. 




9. 


V. 


10. 




11. 




12. 



X. 35. The 

troTU. 



I CONrEN-Ri. 

WOT. 'AOB 

Vni.24. TheGeniUve B8 

25. The Genitiye continued. Partitiyes. Genitivus Qualiiatu^ 

Opus est. 8ummu9 tnoriMj Ac. (64) • • • • 60 

26. The Genitlye after Adjectives 66 

27. The Grenitiye continued 69 

28. The Genitive continued ••• 70 

29. The Gtenitiye continued. InvpermmaU with gen. 74 

IX. 30. The Dative. [Vocab. of Adjectives vnth dat., Ac.] 76 

31. The DaUve continued. [Vocab. of Verbs governing the dcrf.] 79 

32. The Dative continued. [Vocab. of Compounds of ««•«•]••• ? g2 

[Vocab. of Verbs that take drrf. or aa. 84.] > 

33. The Dative continued. Verbs with two constructions* • • • 

[Vocab. of Verbs that take dai. of person, with ace. of 
Odngs or ace. of pers with abl. of ^tny.-— Vocab. of J- 86 
Verbs with difierent constructions in different mean- 
ings.] 

34. Verbs that take a second DaUve. Esimihinomm 88 

[Vocab. of Verbs followed by two DaUves.] 89 

Accusative. [Vocab. of transUvvt Compounds of in- ) qq 

tms. Verbs.] • • • • • • ^ 

The Accusative continued 93 

The Ablative 96 

The Ablative continued. [Vocab. of Verbs governing the abl. ] 99 

The Vocative. Attrorfion of the Vocative • 102 

The Passive Voice 104 

The Passive Voice continued • 107 

Time • ^^ 

Place. Space • 115 

Gerunds and Partic. in dus. [Epistolascribenda.] ^ 

[Vocab. of words following the constr. of the proper ^ 117 

names of places, 122.] • ^ 

Participles. Ablative Absolute 124 

Participles continued. Participles expressing n purpose 126 

Participles continued. The Supines 128 

Pronouns • 1^' 

Pronouns continued. Js, kicj istCyUle *• - 133 

Pronouns continued. On the translation of any 137 

Pronouns continued^ On the prefixes and affixes of the Inter- 

gatives 140 

Comparison * ™ 

Remarks on some of the Tenses 145 

Remarkson the Tenses continued 149 

Forms of Conditional Propositions (435) 152 

Conditional Propositions continued 156 

Conditional Propositions in dependent sentences 160 

On Oblique Narration •• 162 

Oblique Narration contiinued. Mood in subordinate Clauses. 

Dependence on an Infinitive ••• 1^5 





36. 


XI. 


37. 




38. 


XII. 


39. 


XIII. 


40. 




41. 


XIV. 


42. 


XV. 


43. 


XVI. 


44. 


XVII. 


45. 




46. 




47. 


XVIII 


48. 




49. 




50. 




51. 


XIX. 


52. 


XX. 


53. 




54. 


XXL 


55. 




56. 




57. 


xxn. 


68. 



CONTENTS. 



■XCT. 9AQm, 

XXIII. 60. Qui with Subjunctive. [Vocab. of phnuMS, Ac, with which 

^t takes the subj.] ••« 169 

61. Qui with the Shibjunctive continued • 171 

XXIY. 62. Qtttm with the Indicative ^ 

[Vocab. of ConjunctionB that govern the subj. 494.] . . . . ) ^^^ 

XXV. 63. AnUquam 9Sid Priugquam 179 

XXYI. 64. Dum, donec^ quoad, Ac [Vocab. of Adverbs with gen.] .... 181 

XXVII. 65. Quod 183 

XXVIII. 66. The Roman Calendar 186 

XXIX. 67. Connection of Propositions by the Relative, Ac. 189 

XXX. 68. On the Roman way of reckoning money 192 

69. On the division of the As, the method of reckoning^ac<um», 

inUrest, Ac. 194 

Tables for Reference. 

I. Grenders 196 

II. Formation of the Perfect and Supine 197 

Table of Differences of Idiom, Ac 201 

Questions on the CantSoos «.«.« 811 

Ctaestioiu on the Syntax. • Sl# 



INTRODUCTORY REMARKS. 



Gn the Arrangement of Wards in a Latin Sentence. 

1. The general distinction between the English and Latin ordei 
Isthb: 

2. 0^ In Latin the governed and dependent words generally 
stand before the words on which they depend; so that in simple 
sentences, the verb, when not particularly emphaUCf stands at the 
end of the sentence. 

3. Thus in simple narrative, afler the conjunction comes the 
subject (nom. case) ; then the governed cases with adverbs and 
expressions of Ume^ places manner^ dec, and last of all the verh. 

4. But if the verb is emphatic, it must be placed earlier in the 
sentence. — Quod non dedit fortuna, id non eripit. Mirabile 
videtur, quod non rideai haruspex, dec. Non inteWgunt homines, 
quam magnum, vectlgal sit parsimonia. 

For it must always be remembered that — 

5. 0^ The degree of prominence and emphasis to he given to 

a wordy is that which mainly determines its position in the sen* 

fence, — ^And, 

6. a) The ftoo en^i^^ofie positions in a sentence are the beginning vnA the endt 
" by the former our attention is exdttd, and on the latter it retfo." (Crom- 
bie.) 

b) Add to this, that the more vmmud a position is for any word, the more 
emphatic it is^ Oat word. Thus, "arbores seret dillgens agricola, 
quarum adspiciet baccam ipse nunquam,'* (Cic.) 

c) A word that generally stands close by another receives emphasis by 
Mparatian from it ; especially if it be thus brought near the beginning or 
end of a sentence. VobqOatem^ percepi maxiaum'. Propterea quod 
aimd iter haberent nullum^* JEdvi equUeM ad Cesarem onau^ rever- 
tuntur. 

i2) Another principle afficting the position of words is the hannontous 
arrangement of syllables ; the/oto of the sentence. 



14 INTRODUCTORY REMARKS. 

7. Geniiive. The genitive, whether dependent on a sub- 
stantive or adjective, stands first if it be the nvore emphatic ; i( 
not, not. But it is rendered more emphatic by separation ; 
see 6, c). 

a) It probably somewhat prefers the position before the govern 
ing noun, when that is not decidedly emphatic. 

h) When the governing substantive has an adjective with it, 
the order is generally adj., gen.^ suhst, (Vera animi magnitude.) 

8. Attribxttive and its substantive. Of these the more 
emphatic stands first. But see 6, c). 

a. A very short precedes a longer word : hence the demon^ 
stratives usually stand before their nouns, and monosyllable sub- 
stantives before their adjectives. 

9. Apposition. Here too the more emphatic precedes : but 
generally the word in apposition stands last. 

a. This is particularly the case with tiUeSy &c., in apposition to 
proper names. 

Q. Mucins Augur ; Agis rex ; Pythagoras PhUosophus. But, 
urbs Roma ; though Cyprus insulay Hypamsjlumus. 

10. Words dependent on Adjectives. Here too the more 
emphatic precedes, with something of a preference for placing 
the dependent words first. 

11. Ablative absolute. The mx)re emphatic first. 

12. Infinitive dependent on Verb. The more emphatic first ; 
generally the infinitive. 

a. Of two infinitives, the more emphatic first. 

13. Adverbs. Grenerally, immediately before the words they 
belong to. Quoque immediately after its word. 

14. Words that modify the meaning of an adjective are usually 
placed between it and the substantive. (Proelio magis ad eventum 
secundo, quam, &c.) 

15. Opposition and contrasted notions. 

a) A repeated word, or a word akin to a word already used in 
the sentence, is generally brought as near to that word as possible. 
l^mortimorem^eWiU NuWsl virtus virtuticontrBJidL est, Virtutum 
in aUd alius vult excellere. Aliis aliunde est periculum. 

h) Of two contrasted clauses or groups of words, of parallel 
construction, the order of the first is often reversed in the second : 



IMTRODUCTOBY REMA&SS. 11^ 

60 that two of the antithetical words are as far apart as possible 
Fragile cdrpus animus sempitemus movet. Batio nostra consen- 
tit ; pugnat oratio. Quae me moverunt, mxmsaent eadem te pro- 
fecto. * • 

0^ Enimj vero, autem, quoque, qyidem (with of ootiTBe the 
€nclitic8\ cannot be the first words of a clause. 



PRACTICAL INTRODUCTION 



TO 



LATIN PROSE COMPOSITION. 



The common concords are taken for granted ; that— 

(1.) A verb agrees with its nominative case in number 
and person. 

(2.) An adjective, pronoun, or participle, agrees with its 
substantive in gender, number and case. 

(3.) A transitive verb, whether active or deponent, takes 
afler it an accusative of the person or thing acted upon. 

(4.) Verbs of existence (such as bCy become, turn ota, 
&c.) ; passive verbs of being called, considered, chosen, 
&c., take a substantive or adjective after them in the nomi- 
native case. 

(5.) The thing by which stands in the ablative ; the 
person hy whom, in the ablative with the preposition a 
or ah. 

(6.) One substantive depending upon another is put in 
the genitive case. 



Obs. When a pronoun is the nominative case to a verb, it is 
not expressed in Latin; except for the sake of emphasis or 
particular distinction. 

(a) In the same way the poaaeat&ot pronoun is seldom expressed, 
when there can be no doubt as to tohou the thing is. See 3 (a). 

ifi) When there i» any distinction to be expressed, as, for instance, 
when J am opposed to yva^* the pronouns must be expressed. 



» Tlie pron. is expressed, even when the distinction is only between two ao- 
lioDS of the aotiM person. Ejed ega te aimatis hominibus, non d^^. 



16 IfOMINATlVS CASE AND VERB. [§ 1. 2-4 

I. 

§ 1. Nominative Case and Verb. 

2. (a) When two or more nominative cases singular come to- 
gether, they take a plural verb,* which agrees with the nominativA 
case of the mosi worthy^ person. 

(h) The verbs est and sunt are often omitted. 
8. (a) £t ego^ et Balbus sustuHmus manus, Both I and BaUnu 
lifted up our hands, 
(h) Amici veterrimi optimi, The oldest friends are the best. 

4. Vocabulary 1. 

And, et ; que endUic ; atque ; ac * 

l(, bL 

Botli— end, et— et. 

Hand, mXnus, (Is, /. 
Sister, , sbror, 5ris, /. 

Well, bens. 

Hunger ftmes, is, /. 

SaS^"^"^'} condimentum,i.n. 

Army, exercitus, (Is, m. 



•■ The verb is often however in the singular, agreeing with one of the nomi- 
uaClves, and being understood with the other. This is the common construc- 
tion with et—et; quumr^umf dc, when both the nominatives are aingukar^ and 
of the mme person, 

b The^ra^ person is said to be more worfhy than the second, the second than 
the third. 

• For "Balbus and /," the Romans, putting "J" first, said " Ego et BaOma, * 
Wh<Bn therefore Cardinal Wolsey said " Ego et Rex meus," he was a good 
(rrammarian but bad courtier. 

d Et joins words each of which is considered independenify^ and as of equal 
imporiance: ATavs ( ss adqae) or ac, which Is an abridged (and less emphatic) 
tbrm of the same word, adds a notion that is, if anything, of more importance 
than the preceding one (= <and also,' *aand mjoreaoen^) : qjm joins a word 
closely to another, as an appendage to it, as hdongingXO it, and often as forming 
one complex notion with it. 

When et connects prindpal cUmseSj suhordinaie ones and single words must 
be connected by qite, or (UnmUar notions) atgfue. 

Atque is used before vowels or consonants, but especially before vowels. 

Ae is used before conaorumis (though not very often before the k sounds) ; but 
not befiwe wwels or h, Mr. AUen shows that ac (though very rarely met with 
boioregf q) is not very uncommon in Cicero before e. So also Zumpt. 



( 3. 5-9.] AOCUSATIYE WITO INFINITIVB. 19 

War, bettmn, L n. 

AGauli GaUoSii m. 

Many, multi, e, a. 

Very many, permulti,* ib, a. 

Cesar, Cesar, Ceslris, m. 

To lift up, toUSre, susttfl, suUftt 

To wage (properly to carry), geitSre, gess, fast 

To conquer, vincCre, i^c, Tlct. 

Exercise 1. 

/ 5. If you and the army' are-in-good-health^ it is well (p. 14, 
Id)^tBoth you and Balbus lifted up (your) hands-t^Both yen 
and I (1 Ohs. fi) have waged many' wars^j^th you and Balbus 
have waged very-many' wars^^TDhe best' sauce (is hunger.) 
^The Gauls were conquered by Caesar, y^ands were lifted up 
both by you and by Balbus. ^f you ana your sister are-in-good- 
health, it is well. 



11. 
§ 2. Accusative with Infinitive. 

6. The infinitive takes before it not the nominative, but the 
accustxtive,^ 

7. Many sentences that in English are joined to a verb by the conjunc** 
tion < Oudy* are expressed in Latin by the accusative and mftnitwt. 

8. In turning such sentences into Latin ^Vtat* must be omitted; the 
English nominatvDt turned into the aceuaaHoeg and the English verb 
into the inJbuUive mood of the same tense. 

9. The accusative with the infinitive follows verbs {senHendi et deda- 
randi^ of feelmgt icnouing^ triahingj hearingi beiievingt thinkmgy dkc; 
and such expressions as, it is certain^ num^ut, true^ Ac, 



* Per in composition with an adjective, adds to it the meaning of * very* 
i Exercitusque. Q^e must always be appended to the latter of the two words 

connected by it. 
9 Tills idiom is not uncommon in English, though far less common taan !» 

Latin. 
<«Iordezed%tmfoZ>0<Kfm{*««l» (for < I ordered tMAeaAmi&i ftddtenteetf), 
" I saw him to he a knave" (for *I saw ihtu he was a knave*). 



90 ACCUSATIVE WITH INFINITIVB. [§ 2. 10-ia 

10. (a) Respondeo, placire et mihi locunty I answer that the 

place pleases me too. 

(b) Respondity placere et sibi locunif He ansnrered that ihs 

place pleased him too, 

(c) Sentlmus cdlire ignemy tuvem esse albam, dulce mel, 

We know-hy-our-sensesy that fire is hot ; that snow is 
whUCf honey sweet. 

11. Vocabulary 2. 

To answer, respondSre, respond, respons. 

To understand, intelligere, intellez, inteUect. 

To deny, negare, av, St. \ 

To siny« peccire, Sv, at. » 

I remember, mSmini, Jmper, memento ; pi, memeiitofb. ^ 

To know-by-th&>8en8e^ sentlTe, sens, sens. 

To injure, ofiend-against, vioI&td| &▼, at. 

Law, \ lex, legis,/. 

Cautions. ^ 

12. [C. I.] 0:^ Him, her, them (or Ae, she, they, when they are 

to be translated by the accttsative) must be trans- 
lated by the proper case of sui, when they and the 
nominative cf the verb stand for the sUme person. 

Also, in the same case, his, hers, its, theirs^ 
must be translated by suus. 

13. < He »ay9 that it pUaaet him. 
c He Kttd that it pleated him. 

In English the dependent verb (by a kind of aUracHon) assumes the 
paAform, when the verb it depends on is in a past tense. 
Hence 

0^ [C. n.] In a sentence with * that ' dependent on a past tense, 
the perfect is to he translated hy the present {and 
imperfect) infinitive, whenever the notion expressed 
hyitisnottohe described as over before the time of 
^ principal verb,^ 

0^[C. III.] * Should' after *that' w to be translated by the 
present infinitive, when it does not express either 
duty or a future event. 



h Thus " he aeM that it pleated him"— when 1 ai (he time of his Baying it 1 
tptacert) t btforethtHme of his saying iti (placuitee). 



§d. 14-17.] ACCUSATIVE WITH INFUfmyB 21 

Exercise 2. 

14/He answered that he*** had waged many' wan.^He 
denies that he has sinned (or : says that he has not sinxled).*f,^^e 
says that he does not* understand jytle says that Caesar will noi* 
offend-against the laws.{/lR,emember that hunger is the best sauce. 
^ He answered that he understood.'yHe answered, that both you 
and.Balbus were-in-good-health.^^oth you and Balbus haice 
sinned* 



§ 3. Accusative with Hyinitive continued^ 

15.N (a) After hope, promise, undertake, &c., the future infoutive* 
la used with the accusative of the pronoun ; and (^) after j^retendy 
the ace. of the pronoun. :, 

16. (a) Sperat plerumque adolescens diu se vicHarum (esse),^ 

A young man generally expects to live a hng time, 
(h) Simulat se furore, He pretends to he mad. 
(Hr [C. rv.] * Would/ < should,* ctfter a past tense are future 
forms : 
( He says that he wiU come. 
i He said that he would come. 

17. VOCABUULSY 3. 



Abttfliiiess, 


negotii2in,i,n. 


A journey, 


Iter, mnsiief, n. 


To hope, 


sperSre, av, at. 


To come, 


TSnire, vto, vent 


To promise, 


pollicSri, poUicitus; promittSre, piomi^ 




promiss.! 


To undertake, engage, 


redpere, io, recSp, recept 



• These Numerals, followed by a curve, refer to the CauiHanB. 
t These Numerals refer to the Thbie of Differtncea of Idiom. 
f For 'he promises fooonM^ = hepromises t/^ Ae witf eoms. 
He hopes to Hoe ^ he hopes thai ?tc thaU Uve, 
He pretends to he.mad =s he pretends ihaJt he i» mad. 
M With the compound InfinitiTes eeae is often omitted. 
1 Promittere (to give Uforik) is the general word for promieing^, whether good 
^T eoU. PoUiceri is to offer from one's own free-will and indinatlonsy used only 
of promising good. PoUiceor being used for fru and gradaw promises* 



29 AGSEEMENT OP ADJBCTIVB WITH SUBSTAMTITE. [§ 4. 18-21 



To finish, accomplish, 


conf xcgre, io^ conf^ confect. 


To pretend, 


sxmulare,»Sv, St 


To be mad,. 


fttxere, (neut. : noptiif, or tt^itne.) \ 


T6 (my, your, Ac.) satis- J 




* faction, 'satisfactorily, > 


ez sententia*. 


succesaftilly, ) 


.\ 



To have a prosperous voyage, ex sententi& naxigSre. 

Enkrdse 3. 

^18. Solon pretended to he mad.J^i will pretend tohemad^Qje 
promised to comej^ engage to finish the business to your aatufac- 
tum,^ hope that you will have a prosperous voyage, ^o'he business 
has been finished byBalbusyl hope to finish the business.^^e 
was pretending to he tnadf9l promised to finish the business. 
^^He answered, that Caius J&d had a prosperous voyage.JfRe 
answered that he tmmU^' finish the business^^^j^e says thai he 
will noi^ comey^EIe has accomplished his journey satisfactorily. 



III. 

^ 4. Agreement of Adjective mih Substantive. 

19. (a) When an adjective agrees with several singular nouns, 
it will be in the plural number, and agree with the most worthy. 

20. (h) If the substantives are things that have not Ufe, the 
adjective is usually in the neuter gender. 

21. (c) When the noun is * man^ ^ woman! * tMng,' it is seldom 
expressed in Latin. 

[C. v.] * Thing* should be expressed by * res* (fem.) when the 
adjective alone would leave it doubtful whether men 
or things were meant. 
Thus * qf many things^ not muUorwn, but muUarwn reman 



vramiUo would naturally be qfttn used of promising what has been requested. 

Hence 

IJUro polliceor ; pramtto OsspQ) rogatus : 
Nee mo/a polliceor, mala sed prcmitUre possum, 
n QuiB mm sunt Hmiuio ; qus3 mmt ea diBsimulaniur, 
B The pronoun should be expressed (ex m^eentenUA, Ac,) whenever to teavis 
It out, would cause an ambiguity. 



{ 4. 2S-25.] AGBSEMENT OF ADJECTIVE WITH SUBSTANTIVE. 23 

22. (a) Castor ei Pollux ex equispugnare otnsunt^ Castor and 
Pollux were seen Xofgkt on horseback, 
{h) Inter se contraria sunt benejicium at injwria^ A benefit 
and an injury are contrary to each other. 

(c) Boni sapientesqne ex civitate pelluntur. The good and 

wise are banished (literally, driven from the state). 

(d) PrcBterUa mutare non possCunus^ We cannot change 

the past. 

(e) Omnia mea mecum porto, I am carrying all my property 

with me. 

23. ObtA> The neuter plural without a tuVstantive is generally naed 
in Latin, where we use the nngidar. Thu s '^ ^ 

much, veryrmuhi everything, thepaat, 

multa, permulta, •„* omnia, preterxta, 

Ktti« (few things), ' very Utile, 

panca, perpauca. 

24. Obe. 2. The neuter adj. is used in Latin without a substantive, 
where we might substitute ^Oiinge* but really use some more appro- 
priate noun, as property, otjeete, poeeesHonM, peiformaneee, Ac. 

[C. VI.] Obs. Cum is written after, and as one word with, the 
ablatives me, te, &c. : mecum, tecum, secum, no* 
hiscum, vobiscum. 
2o. Vocabulary 4. 

Contrary, contrarius, a, um. 

(to each other, after contrary) inter se {hettpeen (henudves). 



Good, better, best, 


bttnus, melior, opttmus. 


Wise, 


sSpiens, tis. 


Dea^ 


surdus, a, um. 


Parent, 


parens, tis, com. gend. 


virtue. 


virtus, iitis, /. 


Vice, 


vitium, i. n. 


Blind, 


csecus, a, unu 


All my property, 


omnia mea^ 


To owe, 


debSre, debu, debit. 


To banish, 


pellSre ex civitate (peliCre, pSpifl, puls^ to 




drive). 


To be ignorant-of 


ignorare, av, at. (aoe.) 


To see. 


cemCre, crSv, crSt (properly to separate i 




hence, to distinguish ; to see deaiiy ; th« 




proper word to express the possession of 




dwafut Vfston). 



^ The other po^sessiveef, tuua, ouw, noeter, Ac., must be used for %« kU, our 
^., property. 



24 TSB RELATIVE. [§ 5. 26--80< 

To cany, 'portire, It. It 

To hear, aad&e, !▼. it. 

To speak, Ittqui, lociituB, or loquutus. 

To fight on horseback, ez eqno, or ez equisP pugnire. 

Exercise 4; 

26.x They ciz^ banishing the good and vnsej^^e are all 

ignorant-of many tMngs^Yirtne and vice are contrary to each 

other.^^ blind man does not see^^/Tniegood and wise have been 

banished.^A deaf man does not hear^^^ear much (23) ; speak 

little (p. 14. 15, h.)^^e shall carry all our property with us. 

^He spoke very Uttle./fioih you and Balbus are ignorant of many 

/ Hwags^fVLi^ says that he is no^ well,,^^hey will hear f^tM : 

they will speak mucA (p. 14, 15, h)^We owe very much to our 

parent^/ftRemember Uiat you owe very much' to your parents. 

/S^He says tnat he will nof fight on horseback. 



IV, 

^ 5. The Relative. 

27. The relative pronouns 

qui, quaUi, quantua, qwA^ 

answer respectively to 

i», ialSMt taanihUt toL 

28. In a relative sentence,^ 

t!ir Each clause has its own verb, and its own independent 

construction. 
29. A relative pronoun agrees with some coat of a substantive which is 

expressed in the preceding sentence. The substantive to which it 
thus rtfen is called its anUudmt {or fore-going substantive). 

The antecedent, in a sentence /uHy expressed, would be expressed 
twice ; and it sometimes w expressed twice in Latin : this, however, 
is but seldom the case, and the antecedent is generaity omitted in tho 
rdathe dauee. 

30. (c) Sometimes however the antecedent is expressed in the 



P Exeqm, if we are speaking of one person; ex equie, if of more. 
4 The clause in which the relative stands is caUed the relatiiveciauHf tha 
other, the princ^palt or anteeedeni clause. 



} 5. 31-33.] TUE RELATIVE. 25 

relative, and omitted in the principal clause ; and (d) when this 10 

the case, the relative clause is often placed first ; the antecedent 

being expressed in it, and represented in the principal clause 

^though not always) by the proper case of ' w' or * hie J 

31. The ' it/ however, is often omitted, especially when * man^ or ' tidn^ 

is meant, or, when the verbs govern the same case. 

If the antecedent would be in different caaa in the two clauses, 
^it' or *A*c* is but seldom omitted.' 

82. (a) Nullum animal, quod sanguinem habet, sine oorde esse 

potest, No animal that has hloodf can he without a heart, 

(h) Arbdres seret diligens agric6la, quarum adspiciet 

baccam" ipse nunquam, The industrious husbandman 

will plant trees, a berry of which he will himself 

never behold. 

(c) Accepi quas liieras ad me dedisti, I have received the 

letters which you sent me. 

(d) BestisB in quo loco natse sunt, ex eo se non commdvent. 

Animals do not move themselves from the neighbour- 
hood (place) in which they were bom. 
(C. VII.] Many English verbs become transitive by the addition 
of a preposition ; for instance, to smile at, &;c. 

It often happens that the corresponding Latin verb is cUready tranr 
mtivef so that the preposition is not to be expressed. To determine 
whether the preposition bdonga (as it were) to the verb, turn the sen- 
tence into the passive : when, if the preposition still dings to the veriA 
(adverbially), it is generally not to be expressed in Latin. 

Of course* a verb, compound or single, must be sought for, that is 
equivalent tcf the verb and preposition together ; as to deride = to 
laUgh at. 

33. Vocabulary 5.^ 

Obs. Substantives in tt«from the root of the supine (which end there- 
fore in iua or sua) are'of the fourth declension ; except,of course, those 
that, like legaiusy denote peraona. 



> It is, however, sometimes: 

Qixos cum Matio jnuroa miseram, epistolam mihl attulerunt. (Cic.) 
' Qme prime innocentis mihi defensio est oblata, suscepi. 
* A berry; any little round fruit, not a nvi; e,g, of the olioe, cedar^ juniper, «&o 
» Thus : 

' He laughs at Cassius.' 

' CassiuB is laughed alJ Therefore to laugh-at is virtually one verb 



26 THK SSLATIVB. [$S. 34 



THK 


KELATIVK. 1 


No, 


nulluB, a, um. Gm. nulHuBi 


Animal, 


animal, alls, n. 


Blood, 


sanguis, mis, m. 


Without, 


sine (governs ablai.). 


Heart, 


cor, cordis, n. 


Tree, 


arbor, bris,/. 


Fruita (of the earth, a crop), 


fruges, G. frugum, /. 


/«r *m^^» \ 


fructus, fls,» m. 
ager, agri, m. 


Field, 


In Tain, 


nequidquam, frustra.' 


Harvest, 


messis, is, /. 


Praise, 


laus, laudis, /. 


EasUy, 


facile. 


Not yet, 


nondum. 


Right, 


rectus, a, um. 


To tm, cultivate, 


colSre, colu, cult. 


To bear, produce, 


f 8ro, tWi, latum. 


To deserve, 


merdri, meritus. 


To deserve well, Ac, o^ 


de (with dblat., 


To praise, 


laudare, av, at. 


To believe. 


credere, credtd, credit {dot,). 


To deceive. 


decxpere, io, decSp, decept. 


To behold, 


adspicSre, io, adspex, adspect 



Self, myself, himself, dc, In nom., ipse (which stands for all these, the pro 

nouns ego, tu, Ac, not being ex- 
pressed.) 

OCT * What ' as a relative = that which ; those (things) tohkh* 

Exercise 5. 

^34. No animals, which have blood, can be without a heart. 
^^ Not every field which is sown, bears a crop. 3(^®) ^^^ easily 
believes is easily deceived.>JAVhat is right', is praised^/XThose 
things) which are right' are praised, ^oth you and P have been 
deceived.VT^raise what deserves praise./*(He) who does not till 
his field,^in vain hopes for^^ a harvest.^He says that he has nofi 
been deceived./}J[ shall not easily believe Balbus^/^albus has 



■ Frudtus arboribus, frugea nascuntur in agris. But this is only true of 
frugeat and of fructus^ as opposed to frugea. Frvjdua is the general name for 
vroduee^ and may be spoken oiland as well as of trees ; and in poetry we find 
frugUmB (Columella's poem on Gkurdening), and frugt (Hor.) of the fruit of 



▼ Nequidquam {to no purpoaty in vain), so far as nothing has resulted from a 
Wnf^ done :/ru«<ni (in vom), of a pmm who has not attuned his purpose- 9. 



§ 6. 86-88.] INFINITIVE USED SUBSTANTIVELY. 21 

deserved well of mev^The business which you promised to 
finishy* has not yet been finished.j;^ have planted a tree, the 
fruit of which I shall myself never^ beholdy^^e is pretending 
have firdshed* the business to his satisfaction.* 



§ 6. Infinitive used substantively. 

85. (a) Sometimes an infinitive mood, or a sentence, is the nonU. 
native case to a verh ; and sometimes it is used as the suhstantive 
to an adjective ; and sometimes as the antecedent to a relative : and 
in this case the adjective and the relative must be in the neuter 

gender. 

When an infinitive or sentence is the nominative to a verb, it gea 
erally foUowt it in English, and the pronoun *U* stands as its repr« 
sentative before the verb ; — as, " it is sweet to hear." 

Of coarse this <if' is not to be translated into Latin. 

36. (h) When the relative has a sentence for its antecedent, we 
often find id^ quod or qua res. (Here id and res are in apposu 
Hon to the former sentence.) 

87. (a) Turpe est mentiri, It is disgraceful to lie. 

(Jb) Multee civitates, a Cyro defecerunt ; qum ref multo- 
rum bellorum causa fuit, Many states revoked from 
Cyrus, B. circumstance which ufas the cause of many 
wars. " , * 

(c) Tim5leon, id* quod difficilius putatur, sapientius tulit 
isecundam quam adversam fortunam/TSmo/eoft, which 
is thought more difficult, lore a prosperous moA^msdy 
than an adverse fortune. 

88. Vocabulary 6. 

Pleasant, jncundus, a, um. 

Duty, offidum, 1, n. 

ikgainst, contra, (gov. oectit.) 

Promise, promissum, 1, n. 

Disgraceful, turpis, is, e. 

Easy facilis, Is, e. 



V invert these clauses : that is, put the relative clause first 
• The use of u2 quod for qmod only, adds emphasis to the relat dame ; which 
(hen generally precedes the principal clause, or is inserted in It 



28 UIFINITIYE USED SUBSTANTIVELY. [§6. 39 

One thing— another, aliud— alittd. 

Han, ^ htfmo, hotnlnis ; vir, virl.* 

To keep, * eervSre, av, at. 

Revile, maledicero^ dix, diet (dot,). 

To accuse, accusare, av, at 

To break one's word, fidem fall6re; fallSre, f^felli,^ falsum, 

deceive, beguile. 
To keep one's word, fidem pnestare ; prsstare, pre8tlti>, 

praestitum, et prsstatum. 
To He, mentlri, mentitus. 

To utter many felsehoods, multa mentlri. 

It is a breach of duty, contra officium, (it is against duty.) 

[C. VIII.] * JPor' before a substantive or pronoun followed by 
the infin., is not to be translated. The construcdon 
is the ace. with tn/E».* 

It is a sin \ ^^ * ^^ "^^ ^ ^^ ^^^ parents. 

X ihai a boy should not obey his parents. 

"Exercise 6. 

/ y/89. It is pleasant to be praised. 2Jtt is a breach of duty not to 
I keep promises. J It is a breach of duty to praise what [j[ilwr,^ is 
disgraceful^J^ hear that you keep your promises^ a thing which 
(37, c) all' good men do.^ hear that you are going to keep your 
word.^It is disgraceful to break one's word. 911 is one thing to 
revile, another to accuse.^ It is certain that"6albus has deserved 
well of me.^t is a breach of duty to lie^tjBoih you and Balbus 
have uUerm many falsehoods. /At is disgraceful to banish the 
good and wisey^t is easy (for me) to carry all my property with 
me.*j/i^t is a breach of duty for a man to revile mei^j^ have 
praised, not blamed you (note*, p. 17). 



> Homo is the general term for maUj i e, for a human beings distinguished 
from other living creatures. Vir is man as distinguished from ipoman. Homo 
Is often used contemptuously: wr, respecijuUy ; a man with a manly character. 
7 Distinction between./a22o and dedpio: 

NuUdfaUentia culpd BB&pisaimefaUor ; 
At quum dedpiar^ culpam aeceptor habebit. 
■ Cic. has prcBstaturus. 

* But we shall see below that if ^for* follows immediately after ^U it,' it must 
be translated by the genitive. 'Biojbrs^ rich man to do so and so;' aiviHi 



9 7. 40-44.] THE RELATIYB. 2D 

§ 7. Rehaive continued, (Fundamental Rule for the employ- 
ment of subjunctive tenses.) 

Wherever dependent verbs are used in the subjunctivei the following 
is the fundamental rule for the use of the tenses. 

40. 05r The imperfect and pluperfect of the subjunctive are 
the regular attendants of the past tenses of the indicative. 

But — ^the perfect definite^ (or perfect with * Jiave') is con- 
sidered a present tense. 

Hence the present, future, and perfect with *have? are followed by the 
present, or (for a completed action) the perfect of the subjunctive.* 

05* The future perfect is not a subjunctive tense, 

41. The only future subjunctive is the part, in rus with sim, essem, Ag. 
But where we use a future in a dependent sentence, the Romans often 
used the present or imperfect subjunctive. 

(On some English Relative forms,) 

42. * Thaf is often a relative pronoun. 

(Especially after superlaOves; the interrogative who; the same g and 
when both persons and things are meant.) 

43. (a) ' As' is often, in effect, a relative pronoun. 

The relative *at^ must be translated by qui after idems by qualU^ 
quantus, quot, after talis, tanius, tot, respectively. 

44. (1) « Buf is often, in effect, a relative pronoun, when it 
follows universal negativesy as nemo, nuUus, nihil, 

(2) The relative ' hut' is to be translated by quin with the 
subjunctive, (c) 

(3) When * but' might be substituted for a relative with 
notf the relative and not may be translated by quin ;^ 
if the relative is in the nom. (or even ace) case. 



b Tho perfect definite is used of actions done in some space of ttme, a part of 
which is still present. 

• Thus then the 

Present j r Present subj. 

Future i are followed by the < Perfect subj. (for a 

Perfect with * Jum^ j i completed action). 

Imperfect . C^^t'T^- ,f 

""P*^* ' ( thetiineH)okeiiof). 

* Vnth other cases than the nomtttoHtt and aceuioHve, the use of the rdatiM 



30 EELA.TIVB CONTINUED. [§ 7. 45, 4ft 

[C iz.] l^ *Aj^ md* hut' Bie often (in effect) rdoHtet. 

[C. z.] f^ * Such* in English is often used where nze is meant rat&et 
than qualiiif, * Suehf—at^ should then be translated into Latin by tanhti 
— quantuB; not talU—qualie. 

45. (a) TaZitf est, j^ttaZi^ semper fuit, He is such as Tie has 

ever been, 
{h) Idem est qui semper fuit, He is the same that (or as) 

he has ever been. 
(c) Nemo est, quin* te dementem putet, jH^re is no one 

but tAfnA:^ you mad (or, who does not think you 

mad). 

46. Vocabulary 7, 

The same, idem, eSdem, idem ; gen. ejusdem, Ac 

Rule, rSgula, ae^. 

Expediency, utilitas, atis,/. 

Expedient, utilis, is, e. 

Honor, the honorable, > honestas. atis f 

honorable conduct, i 

Nobody, no one, nSmo, inis ; nemo = ne hbmo. 

To think, deem, putSre, Sv, St. 

This, hie, hsc, hoc : g. hujus, &c. 

That, ille, ilia, Ulud ; g. illius, &c. 

Nearly, ftre, 

Another, alius, a, ud ; g. alius, D. aUi, Ac. 

Never, nunquam. 

Before, antea. 

To be able, can, posse, pUtui.f 

Wave, fluctus, lis, m. (See. 33.) 

(a) Sunt qui putent (Obs. 9ubj» after < mad quff ) there an tome uHm think 

Exercise 7* 

[C. XI.] 1^ < 7)^ when it stands for a substantive which has been 
expressed in the preceding clause, is not to be translated. 

i^ The Impafect and Plupeifect of the Suhjttnct. are the regular at- 
tendants of the poit tenses of the Indicative. 



with 7um is commonly preferred. Z. When qui run mwt be used will be ex« 
plained below. 

• Q,uin is qut Ta{ssut non).' The demoi^str. pronoun (which is the real 
Qom.) is sometimes expressed : as in 88, (a). 

r This verb is compounded of an old a4j. potiSf neut. pofe, with sum. * Pot? 
ts prefixed to the tenses of sum, ta being changed into m, and pot-esse, pot- 
essem shortened into posse, posaem (posses, Ac). The perfect tenses regiilar 
from potui ( s^potiafui). No impcrat. : the part, potaw is used as an adjectiva 



f^ 8. 47-51.] RELATIVE CONTimTED. 3i 

y^47. This is the same as that.^The rule of expediency is the 
same as that^^> of honour.^ This is nearly the same as anothef 
thing, i^ou are such as I have always thought you.tTlliere if 
jjohody hU knows, that the Gauls were conquered by CsBsar. 
There is no one who does not (45, c) understand, that you arc 
ppetending^^lThere^noone hut knows that the past {2Z, Obs, 1,) 
cannot be*^hanged,^Fhere is no one hut knows, that these things 
are contrary to each other. ^Both you and I are such as we have 
ever been./Sifrhe waves were sucV^^as I had never seen before. 
^ - T here are some who think you mad (46, a)^'^here were 
some who blamed me. 



^ 



§ 8. Relative continued, 

48. (a, h) When the relative connects (by means of to i^e or a 
verb of naming, &c.) two substantives of different genders, &c. 
it generally agrees with the latter, rather than with its ante- 
cedent. 

(This is the rules agreement with' the antecedent the exception, 
Z. K., &c.) 

49. But when the second substantive is a foreign word, the 
relative generally agrees with its antecedent. (Z.)f 

(Jovis steUa, qua ipotid-wy dicitur.) 

50. (a) Domicilia conjuncta, quas urhes dicimus, Contiguous 

dweUingSy which we call cities, 
(h) ThehtB, quod BoeotisB caput est, Thehes, which is the 
capital of Baotia* 

51. VOCABULAEY 8, 

Glory, gloria, ae,/. 

Honorable, htfnestus, a, um. 

Star, steUa, ae ; astrum, i, whien is properly 

a Greek word ; and eldns, Sris, n, a 



V Krvger approves of Zumpfie rule ; but thinks that we cannot go beyond 
Hum in determining when agreement with the antecedent should be preferred. 

Brernt says : " videntur id (pronomen) ad antecedens substantivum referre 
si ad vofolnUum respiciunt ; sin vero ad remj ad consequens." But Kriiger 
shows that even if this should explain Cicero's practice^ it is obviously al 
Tarianre with that of other writers. 



82 RELATIV£ CONTINUED. [§ 9. 52, 5dc 

constellation, and also^one of the greai . 

heavenly luminaries, e. g. the iud. 
• the ni6on, Sinus, &c. 

Perpetual lasting^ sempiteraus, a, um. 

Fire, ignis, is, m. 

Island, instila, ae,^. 

Sea, mSre, is, n. * ^ 

Ocean, oceanus, i, m^ 

As it were. quSsi. 

The world, orbia terrae, or terrarua ; orbis, is, m* 

Head, capital city, cSput, itis, n. 

To reject. .. repudiare, av, at. 

To admire, wonder at, admirari, admiratus. 

To be washed. circumfundi, circumfusus (literally, to 

be poured aroi^d ; and either the 

idcmd or sea is said cixcumfundi). 
To inhabit, incolSre, incolu, incult. 

To call (in sense of naming), YOcare,i> appellare, nominare, av, at. — 

Exercise 8. 

/ 52. He rejects glory, which is the most honorable fruit' of 
true^ virtue (Gen. before fructus),^Jle is admiring those perpetual 
fires, which we call stars.^,^he island is washed by the sea, 
which you (pL) call ocean.//We inhabit a great island, as it 
were,' which we call the world .^^TThere is nobody hu^^ thinks 
Rome the capital' of the world.J^^There is no one hut thinks 
that Balbtts has deserved well of us. y* T here are some who 
laugh jC^ There are some who laughed "(46, a). 



§ 9. Relative continued, — Relative with superlative : ^< The 
first who—" 

53. (a) When the antecedent has a superlative* with it, tho 
adjective is generally put in the relative clause. 



h Vocarej appeUare^ nominare are all to ca^i; but vocare has, beside thia, tho 
meaning of to call = aummon ; appellare^ that of appealing to^ of calling to for 
aid ; nominare^ that of namingj in the sense of appointing or electing. 

i Qtuui should stand between great and island, 

k Orbis terrarum, rather than terrcB, when there is a decided reference to 
offter lands. 

* The same rule holds good of other acyectivesand of appotUUmt, 



( 9. 54-57.] BELATIVB CONTIinrED. 33 * 

54. (5) To express *^ the first person who did a thing" the 
Romans did not use a relative sentence, hut made primus agree 
with the nominative of the principal verh. 

55. (a) Volsci civitatem, quam hahehant optimam, perdiderunti 

TheVolsci lost the bei9t city they had, 
(l) Primus mala nostra sensU, He was Ike first person who 
perceived our evils, 
Eng, He was the prst roho did this : (or,) He was the Jrti la 

dothU. 
Lai, He ihejirst did this. 

56. Vocabulary 9. 

Faithful, fidelis, is, e. 

Slave, serviis, i, m. 

God, Deusji i, m, et,/. 

Fire v = conflagration), incendium, i, n. 

To help, aper80ninperplexity,&c., subvSnire^ ven, vent™ (dot. of person). 

To lose, amittere, amis, amiss ; perdere,<> per 

did, perdit. 
An opportunity, occasio, 5nis,/. 

To lose an opportunity, occasionem amittSre. 

Now a= already, jam. 

Sitch is your temperance r quae tua est temperantia, 
WUh your usual tem- } quE es temperanti^^ 
perance ( pro tu& temperantilL 

As far as I know, quod sciam. 



Exercise 9. 



/ 



57. He was the first who promised to help^ me.^They will 
lose the best thing they have.^I will send the most faithful slave 
I havc^He was the first who denied that there are' gods.jThe 
fire is such^®> as I have never seen hefore. ^The constellations 
are the same, that they have ever been.f/^e was the first who 
undertook to finish' the business. /^ hope that you, such is your 
temperance, are already well.^ No one, as far as I know, has 



1 Deus, V. Deua, Plur. {Dei), Dii, Dt. Dat. (Dds), Diis, DU. 

B That is, to come under a thing; i. e. to support it. 

a AmUtert is simply to lose, Perdere is to lose actively ; t. «. by some exer* 
iion qf onds ovm will, Ac, Hence perdere is often to destroy, Aelhl perdo^ 
passhi amittere possum. 

• Or, cujus es temperanike. 



84 UT, NE. [§ 10. 58->J0 

said thifl^^estius was not come,p as far as 1 know/fL have 
lost no opportunity, as far as I ibuw.-74^There are some who 
have lost the opportunity (46, a). 



^ 10. Ut, Ne expressing a purpose. 

58. (a) ' Thd^ followed by may or ndght expresses a purpose, 

and must be translated by tU with the subjunctive. 
{h) * That^ followed by * notf* or any negative word (tlie 
verb having may or might for its auxiliary), must be 
translated by n6 with the subjunctive. 

59. VOCABULAEY 10. 

It is all over with, actum est de (with the ablat,). 

News of the town, resurbanae. 

To send or write news, perscrib^re, scrips, script, == to write 

fuUy. 

Courtesy, humanitas, atis, f. 

Courageously, fortiter. 

Virtuously, honorably, honeste. 

To cry out, clamore, av, at. 

To live, vivCre, vix, vict. 

To die, mori, ior, mortuus. 

To obey, pargre, paru, pant {dot.). 

To make the same promise, idem polliceri. ^ 

60. (a) Multi alios laudant, tU ab illis lauderUur, Many men 

prafse others^ that they may be praised by them, 
(h) GallinsQ avesque reliquse pennis fovent pullos ni 
frigore Jadantur^ Hens and other birds cherish their 
young with their feathers, that they may not be hurt 
hy the cold. 
[C. XIII.] OCr * To' is omitted after many verbs, which thus 
seem'i to govern two accusatives. 



TC. XXX.] f;:^ IniranntiDe verbs of motion often form their perfect aetioi 
with ^oMf* not 'kaoe,* Thus, am come^ wa» comej are the perfect and phtpcT' 
fed tkctive (respectively). 
9 Such verbs are : givCt vowhaafe^ aseign, grant, ecnd. 



§11. 61-66.] UT. QUO. NB. 85 

When a verb 9eem9 to govern two accusativei, try whether you caih 
not put in U^ before one of them. 

Exercise 10. 

y^61. That you may be able to die courageously, obey' the laws 
of virtue.^ He was pretending to be mad,* that he might noi bo 
banished.^ He cries out, that it is all over with the army,>^ou 
promised that you would send me all ike news of the town.^Thai 
you may die courageously', live virtuously [p. 14, 15, (&)].^He 
praises' Caius, that he may himself be praised by Caius. V'fie will 
praise' Caius, that he may be praised by Caius. ^^o one, as far 
as I know,^^ had praised^ Balbus, that he might himself be praised 
by Balbus.^ You, stick is your courtesy,^ promised to finish* the 
busifiesSv^T^ou, vritk your usual courtesy,^ made me ike same pro- 
mise^^ as before, yjf There were some who laughed. 



§ 10. Ut expressing a consequence. Quo. Ne prohibitive. 

62. (a) ' That ' after such, so, &c. must be translated by * ttf * 
with the stdjunctive. 

After these words, *tIuU* does not express a purpoBe, but a oim«0- 
qmtnees and the English verb will not have * may * or * might * with it 

63. (h) * That,' when the sentence has a comparative in it, is 
translated by quo ; which is equivalent to ut eo (* that hy this '). 

64. [ Not ' in prohOntianB is ne. 

65. (c) « Not ' therefore with the imperative, or subjunctive used 

i^erailvely, must be translated by ne. 

Obs. f;^ The tubjunctioe present ia m/ore commtmly tued than the 
impertUvce, 

6G. (d) * As ' before the'- injin,, and after so, such, musit be 
IranslRted by ut.* 

Except in this idiom (where 'as* expresses a consequence conceivod 
as resulting on a particular supposition), ut^ *aSf* goes with the 
Indicative. 



' ** He gave him a penny." What did he give 1 to whom 7 
■ It will be seen afterwards, that qui {-=. ut vt) i^ generally used in senteneei 
of this bind \ also that * oa not to . . . &c.' after a negative sentence is qidn, 85 



WJ UT. QUO. NE. [§11. 07-7C 

67. 0^ No ut or ne goes with the infinitive. 

08. (a) Tanta vis probitatis est, tU earn vel in hoste diligamua^ 

The power of integrity is so great, that ire love tl 

even in an enemy, 

(b) Medico puto aliquid dandum esse, quo sit studiosior, 1 

think that some thing should he given to the physician^ 
that he may he the more attentive. 

(c) Ne multa discasy sed multum. Do not learn many 

things, but much. 

(d) Nemo tam potens est, ut omnia quse velit efficere possii. 

Nobody is so powerful as to be able to perform all he 

wishes. 
69. Vocabulary 11. 

Daily, quotidie, indies, or in die8.t 

Even mind, reugnation, squus animus. * 

Young, jiivenis, junior =juvenior. 

Age, time of life, stas, atis,/. 

About, de (governs dblat.}. 
Agricultural operations or affairs, res rusticae. 

Of such a kind, ejusmbdi. 

Wind, ventus, i. m. 

Season, tempestas, atis,^. 

Multitude, multitudo, inis,/. 

To meditate, meditation, meditari, meditatus. ~ 

To leave, relinquere, rellqu, velicl. 

To learn, discere, didic 

To appear, seem, videri, visus. 

To govern = moderate, limit, moderari, atus (accua.). 

To number, numerare^ av, at. 

Exercise 11. 

y/ 70. Meditate upon'^> this daily, that you may leave life with 
an even mind^He told many falsehoods'^ about his age, that he 
might appear younger (than he is).^Do not learn many things, 



t From quot dies {aa many days aa there are) ; compare tlie Greek harintpai. In 
du8 {daily) = day after day^ day by day ; when, that is, we speak of a thing 
increasing pr diminishing daily. In ' in diea,* therefore, or m dies aingulos,* 
each day is considered as a term of a progressive series. QuoHdie is * every 
day, daily f* in both senses ; either, that is, when the Hmple repetition of an 
BCtioa is to be expressed, or it$ repetition combined wUh progrenvoa vnereoM 



d 12. 71-77.J UT WITH THE SUBJUNCTIVE. 31 

but useful things.^^e spoke much (23, 1,) that he might be 
thought wise^vT^gncultural affairs are of such a kiud that the 
winds and seasons govern them.* ^\ know that my father does not 
ieam many things, but much//l will live virtuously, that I may 
die the more courageously.^ ^He lived virtuously, that he might 
leave life with the greater resignation.^The multitude of stars is 
Buch^**^ that they cannot be numberecu-Tf^There are some who 
promise to help me. 



§ 12. English Infinitive translated hy *ut' toith the subjunctive. 

71. 0^ The Infin. never expresses a purpose in prose Latin. 

72. (a) The English Infinitive expressing a purpose may be 
translated by ut with the subjunctive. 

73. Whenever the English infinitive may be turned into in order thaJty oi 
ihat^ with may ox mighty it is to be translated by u/ with the avbjimdive, 

74 Thus, " I am arnit to see you" = " I am come in order that I map 

see you." Here my seeing you is obviously the purpose of my coming. 
But in many verbs this relation of the purpose is more obscure. 

For instance — 

I advise } to do it \^ advise or exhort you, in order 

1 exhort ) C that yoM may dsi ii, 

^^^ I youto<foit= \l a^y ox heg you, in order OuUytiH 

I beg^ &c. ) C may do It. 

I command you to do it = U command you, fa orrfcr flirt yo« 

i. may do it. 
I strive to do it = I strive in order that I m4xy do it. 
76. By *t*<* translate infinitive 

With a;^ command^ admsey and strive. 

But never be this rule forgot, 

Put *n3* for *trf* when there's a ^not? 

76. But of verbs signifying Ho command^ juheo takes ace. and 

infin, — [See however note'' 219.] 

77. (a) Romulus, ut civium numerum augeret, asylum pate- 

fecit, Romulus, to increase the number of his citizens^ 
opened an asylum. 

" i3P'iy is the proper pronoun for the third person^ when there is no 
iadmction to be expressed between a nearer and remoter object, and no refer- 
•nee to he strongly marked. 

▼ The lUfuJter of the comparative adjective is used for the comparative adveib. 



38 UT WITH THE SUBJTTNCTIVB. [§ 12. T8 

{h) Militibus imperavitf ut clypeos hastis peraUerenif He 

commanded the soldiers to strike their shields tnth 

their spears, 
(c) Enitar, tU vincatn^ I toiU strive to conquer. 
{d) Magno opere te hortor, ui hos de philosophic libros 

studiose legos, I earnestly advise you to read attend 

Hvely these hooks ahaut phUosophy. 

(e) Capram numet, ut in pratum descendat, He advises the 

she-goat to come down into the meadow* 

(f) Hoc te rogo, ne* demittas animum, I beg of you not 

to be disheartened. (Literally, no^ to depress your 
mind,) 
fC. XIV.] When ^that* introduces a consequence, Hhai not^ u 
ut non, not ne, 

That~-nat ^ot^ purpose ne. 

( — consequence. . .ut non» 
78. VocABULAEY 12. (Verbs followed by ut.) 

To ask, rbgare, av, St. 

To strive, niti, more commmly enlti, nlsus, gnd 

nizus. 

To advise, suaddre, suas, suae {dot, of person). 

To warn, . mon§re, monu, monit {cux, of person). 

To exhort, hortari, adhortari, tatus. 

To command, imperfire,^ £y, at (dot,). 

To charge or commission, mandSre, av, at {dai.). 

To direct, tell, when spoken of > p^^eipere, io, cep, cept. 

an instructor. > 



« For ne,utTuis found with no perceptible difference of meaning. Z. Groto- 
fcTid thinks that Cicero uses tUnein the following cases : (1) when the negativo 
does not so much belong to the whole ckaue^ as to a particular part of it, e, g, 
' the verb, or ^uif, qvad; (2) when a daMmxtrative pron. or pronominal adoerb is 
expressed or implied in the preceding clause ; (3) when without ut, ne would 
stand by a word to which ne is often appended, as non, an. He says that ut ne 
is found, though less commonly than in Cicero, in PlautuBi Terence, CMd, Ac. : 
hut four times (and that in doubtftd passages) in lAvj/, and notataU in Ctsear 
and Theiiua, 

V Juhere, to order, bid (with the notion of the thing being right, or of the 
person having a rigfU to order) ; imperare, to command with power; prcecipere, 
to dSreci, from being qualified to do so by superior knowledge ; mandare, to give 
a charge 9r eommieHon to a person ; edicere, to declare officially as a magistrate, 
to publish a proclamation. 



§ X3. 79, 80.] ^ UT WITH THB SUBJUNCTIVE. 89 

To order, by a proclamaUon, or > ^^ ^ ^^^ 

edict, to publish an edict, $ ^ 

To decree, decemSre, crftr, cr8f« 

Perseverance, perseverantia, ae,^. 

Fury, ftUror, 5ris, m. 

Senate, senatus, ts, m. 

Dress, vestitus, fls, m. 

To return, red&e* (re ami eo>. 

-To hold a levy of troops, to levy ) delectum habSro. 

troops, 1 
Consul, consul, consiilis, m. 

To assist, jQvSre, juvi, jGtum. 

To suffer, pati, ior, passns. 

To take by storm, per vim expugnare. 

By.letter, per llteras. 

Exercise 12. 

_ >^79. I ask you to do this.^ asked you to do this^^Strive fo 
assist meZ/He is striving to govern the winds and seasons. ^fHe 
warned Caesar not to heUeve the Gauls. ^Do not believe the Gauls. 
7T)o not lie.'/Tleligion warns men not to Ue.^t is certain, that 
the boy is striving to leam^dL will exhort the boy to Zeom^/We 
know that virtue and vice are contrary to each otherj^/^e pub- 
lished-an-edict, that the Senate should return to its (usual) dress. 

yjHe had charged Trebonius by letter not to suffer Marseilles^ to 
be taken by stom^/ij^is perseverance is as great as^^ his fury. 

^TThe Senate decrees, that the Consuls should levy troops.^^^here 
are some who lie. 



§ 13. Uty &c. continued. 

80. (a) In sentences where ' ut ' should be used (to express a 
purpose), if a negaMve follows, ne takes its place, and the qffirmO' 
live pronoun or adverb is used. Thus — 



s eo^i»i{h generally in the compounds),. Itum* Pros., eo, it, t^; fmui^ iUt^ 
ewnt. Imp. ibam, Fut ibo. Imperat. i, Subj. pres. earn. Imp. irem. Part 
Ctrw, atntiB. Ger . iwuU, Ac 

f Hasirilia. 



40 



UT. 



[§ 13. 81-83« 



not, but, 

thai nobody, ut nemo, ne qtds^ 

that nothing, ut nihil, ne quid, 

that no, ut nullus, ne uHus, 

that never, \ ut nunquam, ne unquam. 

81 . (6) But if the sentence is a oorueqiunec, then nt nemo, Ac, should be wed 

82. (a) Alexander edixit, ne quia ipsum alius, quam Apelles, 

pingeret, Alexander published an edict, that no other 
person than Apelles should paint him (Purpose), 
(b) Cimon fuit tantd liberalitate, ut nunquam hortis suis 
custodem imposuerit,* Cimon was (a person) of such 
Uherality, that he never appointed a keeper for his 
gardens {Consequence^ 

83. Vocabulary 13. 



It remains, 

It follows ; the next thing is, 



rehquum est, restat. 
sequitur.t 



That(a/l€r reUquum est, restat, )^ ^^^ ^^^^^^ 
and sequitur,) 3 



To desert, 

To make this request of you, 

To leave := go out of, 

City, 

Town, 

First, 

At first. 

For the sake ofj 

For my sake. 

Fear, 

Unwilling, 

Glad, joyful. 



desSrSre, seru, sert. 
illud te rogare. 
excedere, cess, cess {(Mai)' 
urbs, urbis, /. 
oppidum,> i, n. 
primum. , 

prime.* ^ 

causft. 
me& causd. 
timor, aris, m. 
invitus. a, um. 
laetus, a, um. 



{Lot,) He did it unioWing ; glad; joyful, 
{Eng,) He did ii unwillingly ; gladly; jinjfuUy, 



* The use of ihepeTfact 9ubj. in this example instead of the impetf, wiU be 
explained in another place [418. (a)]. It is not to be imitated in doing the 
exercises. 

t Abait vJt^ *6« U far from me* (as given in the earKer editions), belongs to the 
later poets and Appuleius. Instead of it we should use vdim hoc abntf or quod 
procvl abnit inserted parenthetically. 

■ " Oppidum proprie infra urbem est;" but all cities and towns came to be 
'^equently) denominated oppida except Rome. (Valla, quoted by Crombie.) 

• Prtmo is sometimes used for * first ' but not primum for * at firttJ C. 



^ 14. 84-88.] Quuf, 41 

Exercise 13. 

y 84. Religion warns (us) never to bieak our word.^The boy 
strives to learn nothing.^ I first make this request of you, to dd 
nothing against your vdll for my sake,J^Fhe Consuls publish-a. 
proclamation, that no one should leave the city.^^^ great was 
the fear of all men, that^'^ no one lefl the city.^The Senate 

. decreed that the Consuls should hold a levy.^itt remains that I 
should assist Balbus. J^There was no one bin exclaimed, that it 
was all aver vfith the army.^They had joyfully helped Balbus. 
-j^^There were some who assisted Balbusy^^here were some 
who denied that virtue and vice were contrary to each other^/^J* 
follows that you deny virtue and vice to be contrary to each other. 



§ 14. Quin tifter verbs of doubting, &c. 

85. (a) When ^ as not* with the rnfmUve follows *so' or 

* such * in a negative sentence, it is to be translated by * quin * with 

the subjunctive. ", 

X^ The sentence before quin is always negaHve, (An interrogans 
sentence that expects the answer * no^' Is in effect a rugaiive sentence.) 

86. {h) 'But,' 'but thai,' or Uhat,' after verbs of doubting, 
denying, restraining, &c., in negative sentences, must be trans- 
lated by quin. 

87. (c) Afte: negative sentences the par/iciptaZfu^ttoTt/tve governed by a pre* 

position (especially after the verbs mentioned in 86) should be trans> 
lated by quin, with subj, 

88. (a) Cleanthes negat ullum esse cibum tam gravem, quin is 

die et nocte concoquatur, Cleanthes says that no food 
is so heavy, as not to be digested in a day and a 
night. 
'(b) Negari non potest, quin turpius sit fallere quam fall!, 
It cannot be denied, that it is more disgraceful to 
deceive than to be deceived. 
(c) Nunquam adspexit, quin fratricldam compeUaret, SJie 
never saw him without calling him fratricide. 
Vix inhiberi potuit, quin saxa jaceret. He could 
scarcely hQ prevented from throwing stones. 



12 Qum . [§ 14. 8»-0a 

89. Vocabulary 14. [Of words, &c., followed by quin.'\ 

Not to doubt, non dubitare. 

There is no doubt, non est dubium (it is not doubtfol)« 

It cannot be but that, fieri non potest quin. 

I cannot refrain from, temperare mihi non possum. 

It cannot be denied, negari non potest. 
To leave nothing undone to, Ac, nihil prtetermittere quin. 

I am not ignorant, non ignoro. 

World, mundus, i, m. 

Design, consilium, i, n. 

Sometimes, interdum. 

Exercise 14. 

/ 90. Who doithts that virtue and vice are contraiy to each other ) 
^ It cannot he denied that it is disgraceful to lie.^Who doubts thai 
the world was made by design ?i^ don't doubt that both you and 
Balbus lifted up your hands^/Tle never sees Csesariw^^ou/ crying 
out that it is all over with the army.^I left nothing undone to 
finish the business^^^ cannot htU help Balbus.^ It cannot be 
denied that Caius has had a prosperous voyagcGl cannot refrain 
from leaving the city,47No one is so good as ndf sometimes to sin. 
// T here were some who left the city^^ am not ignorant, that 
Caius has lost the opportunity. 



91. Non possiimus, quin alii a nobis dissentianty recusare, We 

cannot object to others dissentingyrom us. 
Minimum abfuit (impers,) Octavianus quin periret, Oc^ 
tavUmus was very near perishing. (Or, But a little 
more, and Octavianus would have perished,) 

92, Vocabulary 15. (Words and phrases followed by quin.) 
Not to object, non recusare.b 

To be very near, to be within a 7 minimum abesse (to be used imper 

very little, 5 sonally). 

Not to be far from, haud multum aoesse, or baud procul 

abesse (impersonally). 
To kill, interficere, io, ftc, feet. 

Of iron, iron-hearted, ferreus, a, um. 

Children, libCri (plur.). 



b From re and eaumu 



( 15. 93-97.] 


QITO^INUS. 


To love, 


amare, Sv, At 


A letter, 


liters (plur.). 


Truly, 


vere. 


TheBOol, 




The mind,^ 


mens, mentis,*/ 


Immortal, 





48 



Exercise 15. 

y^93. He was vnihin a Utile of being killed Jtlt cannot be denied 
that it is disgraceful to break one's word.i|jIt cannot be denied 
that duty conunands us to keep (75) our promises^l am wihin a 
very Uttle of being most miserable.X^o one is so iron-hearted as 
not to love his own children. 4^ J cannot btU^* send you a letter 
daily.y^'hat you may be able to learn much, do not learn many 
things, ^^he truly wise man will never doubt that the soul is 
immortal.^ will not object to your banishing me.^!I will not 
object to your all leaving the city^4t cannot be denied that the 
rational-faculty should (debeo) command the heart^^^ cannot be 
that the mind is not immortal.'*^ 



§ 15. Quominus, 

94. Verbs of hindering are generally followed by quominus. 
This quo nUmu (by which the less) == ii< eo mimm {that the Uat hy iQ. 

95. With verbs of fearing, * that ' must be translated by, * ne ;' 
*1hat not' hy* utJ 

a) * Thai, not may also be translated by 'ne rum,* which is stronger 
than 'irf. 

96. [C. zv.] After verbs of ^eor^, the Eng.Juture and the participial 
nibstantive are translated by the pretend or trnpeifcd subjunctive with 
u< orna. 

97. (a) Quid obstat quominus Caius sit beatus ? What pre- 

vents Caius from being happy ? 

(Or, quid obstat Caio^ quominus sit beatus ?) 



c AnmOf the breath of life, the vital principle (common to all living things), 
dntmitf, * the •ovl} the mind with its passions, emotions, appetites, Ac, ' the 
heart,* Mens, the vntdUchuil fanUiy;ffu rational hicult^^ Hence animiw should 
be used for mind, when it means cUapoeiHon, apirit, Ac 

<t With qtdd obatat (especially when the person is represented by a pton, of the 
first ot oecond person), the dot. is generally omitted. Unless it be a pron., it 



44 • QUOMiNUS. J5 1^* 98-100 

(h) \ Vereor ne veniat, I fear that he will come. 

} Vereor ut veniat, I fear that he will not C4>me. 

98. {Eng.) What prevents Cslusfrom bting happy 1 

{Lai.) What prevents, by wMdi Caius should beihe Uaa happy 1 

99 YOCAVULABY 16. 

(Verbs that may be followed oy quimUmu,) 



To prevent, 


obstare, obstit, obstlt (dai.). 


To deter. 


deterrSre, deterru, deterrit 


To hinder, % 


impedire, Ivi, itum. 


It is owing tfi Cains that, 


per Caium stat quominus, <frc. 


To endure. 


sustinere, tinu, tent. 


To fear. 


*' vereri, veritus ; timSre ; metuSre, me- 
tui.« 
nihil {indedinable). 


Nothing, 


To obey. 


pargre, ui itum (dorf.). 


To increase. 


augSre, aux, auct, trans. ; cresc^re crdv. 




cret, (intrans.). 


By sea and land, 


terrft marique. 



Exercise 16. 

[Is quotidie or indies used of daily increase or decrease 7J 
/ 100. What prevents us from doing this J^^f^fothing prevents 
you from doing this.^jNothing deters a wise man from obeying 
the laws of virtue^i^Nothing deterred Caius from obeying the 
lawsiy/l fear that I shall not endure such"^ labours.^ I fear that 
he win not be able to endure such labours^Tl fear that I shall 
increase your labours./^ What prevents us from waging war by 
sea and land ?^What prevents you from carrying all your pro- 
perty with you Jf^o not pretend to be mad.V^tt cannot be de- 
nied that vice increases daily^^lfft was owing to Caius thai we did 
not wage war by sea and land. 



wiU then stand as nom, to the next verb. After deUr^ ^c, the ace. should be 
txpressedi unless it be a pronoun of the first or second person. 

• Timere, metuire, vereri, are all used for fear; but (1) if a reverential or 
humble fear is to be expressed, vereor should be used ; (2) if an anxious fear of 
a threatening evil, metuere. Metus is the/ear of the mind arising from a con- 
sideration of circumstances and appearances : timor, the fear that arises from 
the body ; from timidity. (See D. vSreri.) Vereor^ which expresses the least 
degree of actual/ear, should be used to express doubt or/ear about the happen- 
ing of such an event', or the truth of such an opinion. FormidUref * to dread,' 
oigreai and lasting fear 



§ 16, 17. 101-106.] INTERROGATIVE WORDS. 45 

VI. . 

§ 16. Interrogative Sentences, 

101. duestioiiB (when interrogaiiM pronouna or adverb* are not ateJ) w 
gaufnttty asked in Latin by interrogative particles. 

102. (a) Ne asks simply for information, (h) Num expects 
the answer * no ;' (c) wmne, the answer * yes.* 

103. N6 is endiiie; that is, always appended to a word, and written as its 
iaal tyllable, 

104. (a) Scribitnd Caius ? J« Cafu^ writing ? 

\b) Num putas . . . ? Do you think / ( = j^ou don't 

think, do you ?) 
(c) Nonne putas . . ? Don't you think / ( == you do 

tMnk, don't you ?) 
Quid ? nonnd canis similis est lupo ? IF%a< / Is not 

a dog like avoolft 



§17. Interrogative Words. 

105. Pr%o? (quis.) How? (qui, abl. : toi^A an adjective^ 
quam.) How does it happen that ? (qui fit ut . • ? with subj.) 
.^ ( cur ( = cui rei). 
**^y ^ I quare^ ( = quJL re). 
TFAen? (quando?) (Quum is never interrogative.) 
Wherey ubi, ) f ibi, 

undo, > relatives to < inde, hinc, 
quo, ) ( eo (hue, illuc). 

Exercise 17. 



Whence^ 
Whither, 



/ 106. Have not the good and wise been banished ^.^Are not 
virtue and vice contrary to each other |5 ^^ ^^^ govern the 



f Quare {wherefore) is only used when the eaute is decidedly asked : when, 
that iSj an annoer ia required. Cur is used whether an answer is required or 
not : hence it is the proper word in expo&hdatory and objurgatory sentences. 



46 DEPENDENT QUESTIONS. [§ 18. 107-115 

winds and seasons ? [No.l^hall we not all die ? ifWas not the 
world made by design "^Do we not owe very much to our parents 1 
y^as it not owing to you that we did not leave the city ?,/\Vas 
-^ not Caius within a very UiUe of being killed l^^^Were not the 
waves such**^ as you had never seen before ?/^Whence do you 
come ? (or, Where do you come from ?)//bid all promise to help« 
you ? [No. J^J3)id he not promise unwillingly to finish the busi- 
ness i^^o we not all hope to live* a long while p^/Elas he not 
finished the business satisfactorily ??</rhere are some who*®* 
deny that Caius has finished the businessy^^^There were some 
who reviled me. 



§ 18. Dependent Questions. 

1 07. A dependent question is one that is connected with a preceding word 
or sentence. 

108. Dependent questions /o2Zow and depend on such words as toaskf 
doubtf know, or nttt know, examine, try, Ac, 

109. (a) (b) (c) The verb in a dependent question must be m 
the subjunctive mood. 

110. In English, dependent questions are asked by whether ; or by inter' 
rogatioe pronoun* and adverbs. 

111. Since what and toho are also relatives, but the relative is in Latin a 
different pronoun, care must be taken to use quit, quid, (not qui, quod^ 
in dependent questions. 

112. [C. xvi.] OCT WJio, what, which, are often dependent 

interrogatives, especially after verbs of asking, 
knowing, doubling, dz;c. 

113. After most of these verbs the dependent sentence stands as the 
accusative to the transitive verb. 

114. The verb in an accusative sentence must be in the sub> 
junctive mood. 

115. (a) Dubito, num^ id tibi suadere debeam, I doubt whether 

1 ought to give you that advice. 



9 Obs. In a dependent sentence, num is * whether,* and does not DeceasarUsr 
Imply that ihe answer * no' is expected. If, however, the answer 'no' ts ex- 
pected, num should be used, not ve. 



} 19* 116-119.] DOUBLE QUESTIOnS. 47 

(b) Qusesieras ex me, nonne jnUarem, &c., You had VH" 

quired of me whether I did not think, &o. 

(c) Quis €3 ? — Nescio, quis sis, 

116. Vocabulary 17. 

To inquirei qiueiere, qumfiv, qosiSt. 

Of (after inquire), ez (with ablat.). 

To say, dicSre, diz, diet. 

Well = rightly, recte. 

Dog, canis, is, com. gauL 

Like, similifl, is, e {dai.). 

Woi^ liipus, i, m. 

1 don't know whether, I almost > haud scio an, or nescio an (wUh sub- 

think, I am not sure tliat— not, ) junet,). 
Dishonourably. turpiter. 

Exercise 18. 

y 117. Where do you come from Ijtl will ask him where he 
comes from.vf Ought I to do this ?4^ doubt whether I ought to do 
this.«01e asked whether a dog was not rery like a wolf^l 
donH know loheiher he has not said welhTfle said that he did 
not^ know.^^^^albus has not come, as far as I know .^^9 la it not 
better to die than to live dishonourably \^fl. will leave f(othing un. 
done to finish^^ the business to your satirfaciion,*//l will ask (him) 
how great the waves were^/^Who does not know how delightful 
It is to be praised by the good yQil will inquire of Balbus how 
many there wereyS^here are some who"' have inouired of 
Balbus. ^^ 



§ 19. Double Questions. Use of' wi' in single questions, 

116. (a) (b) In double questions 'whether* is to be translated 
by utrum, num, or the appended ne; * or ' by an. 

Num in direct questions is only to be used when the answer 'no ' is 
expected. 
119. (c) (d) (e) But in dependent questions 'whether* is 
often untranslated, and ' or ' translated by an, anne, or the ap- 
pended ne. 



48 DOUBLE QUESTIONS. [§ 19. 120-122 

M. (/) An is often found before single questions, but this was at least 
n9t a common practice with Cicero, &c. When an is so used, there is 
always an ellipse of the other possibilUyf which may generally be sup- 
plied without difficulty. 

(a) The supposition involved in the question is often obvUmsly abmtrd; 
so that assent is really demanded to the suppressed aUemative, The 
force of such a question may often be given in English by ' thmJ 

(fi) This use of 'an* is often found in replies ; between which and the 
preceding statement an expression of assent or dissent must be supplied. 

(y) There is the same suppression of the first supposition, in haud acio, 
or nesdo an; dubito an; incertum est an; qrjusro an; constUo an; for si- 
tan (fors sit an), <&c. {Hartung, Partikellehre, ii. 190.) 

^pr * Or ' in questions is to be translated by an or ne ; never by aiU in a 
proper double question; when, that is, one question is to be answered in 
the affirmative, the other in the negative. 

121. (a) Utrum ea vestra an nostra culpa est ? Is that your 

fault or ours ? 
{li) Permultum interest, utrum perturbatione aliqud, animi 

an consulto et cogitato fiat injuria, It makes a very 

great difference, whether an injury is done from 

some perturhaiidn of mind, or delibe?ately and pttr- 

fosely, 
{c) Stellarum numerus par an impar sit, incertum, 

Whether the number of the stars is even or odd, is 

uncertain, 

(d) Quteritur unusne sit mundus an plures, It is a queS' 

Hon whether there is one world or more, 

(e) Servi liberine sin^quid refert ? What does it signyy 

whether they are slaves otfre^ ? 
{f) An^ turn quoque est utilis (iracundia) ? Is (passion^ 
ateness) useful even then ? [Is it not then preju- 
dicial ?] 

122. VOCABULAKY 18. 

It makes a very great difference, permultum interest. 
What difference is there? what > 
difference does it make? \ quid interest? 



• In the following passage the suppressed alternative is so obvious, that w« 
"alight introduce the question by *or.* Cur misereare potius quam feras opem, 
si id facere possis? an sine misericordia liberales esse non possumus? Why 
thoM you piti/j rather than assia them if you can? Or, is ii impossibie for us to 
oe libera without piJtifing? 



§ 20. 12S, 124.] MAY, MIGHT ; CAN, C0T7LD. 49 

There is no difierence, nihil interest. 

Beasts (in their wild state), terw. 

To drink, bibSre, bib, biMt 

Wine, Yinum, i, n. 

Water, aqua, e, f, 

Death, mors, mortis,/. 

Sleep, somnus, i, m. 

Beginning, initium, 1, n. 

Another =: a second, one more, alter, altera, alteram, Om, alteifos, A& 

Or not (often without a verb, as ^ ^ ^^^ ^ ^^^^^ ^^,y ^^ ,jj^^ 

the second member of a dou- > ^^^^ ^ ^^^ qu^imM, 

ble question), J 

Exercise 19. 

123/AVhat difference does it make whether you drink wine or 
water f,.;2^^ether the Romans have conquered or are conquered, 
is uncertain.vJWas the world made for the sake of men or 
beasts 1^/h death an eternal* sleep or the beginning of another 
life \fTt makes a great difference, whether death be a perpetual 
sleep or the beginning of another life* ^Whether the Romans 
have conquered or not, is uncertain. 



§ 20. How to translate may, might ; can, could, 62c., when they 
are principal verhs. 

124. May ; perf. Might {permission). Licet,^ it is permitted. 



h By neene the questions are joined copukUvDdyt by an non adversativdy. In 
neene therefore the question is made, as it were, onef and no opinion of the 
speaker's is implied as to the thing's being so or not. In an rum the notions 
are opposed to each other, either simply^ or so that it is implied that the one is 
xnore probable than the other (ITancQ.— The verb is more frequently repeated 
with necnc than with awrum: the only instance of neeru in a direct question is 
Cic. Tusc. 3, 18. Sunt hoc tua verbal necne? (K.) Necne generally occurs in 
dependent questions. 

« ^temua^ without beginning or end, * eternal.* SempUemiu is ^e/ver- 
looting* ^perpetiud;* * eternal* in a looser sense, without reference to an 
eternity without either beginning or end. SempUemiu is therefore thd right 
word here. - 

d Licet, U is permitted, or lawful, by human law (positive, customary, or 
traditional): fas est, U is permiUed by divine law (inclndicg the law of 



50 MAY; MIGHT J CAN, COULD. [§ 20r 126| 120 

Pees. (miM) ire licet, I may go. 

{tUn) ire licet, thou mayest go. 
&;c. 
Peef. {mihi) ire licuit, / might have gone* 

(tihi) ire licuit, thou migklest have gone. 
&c. 

125. Can ; perf. Could (power, possibility). Possum,* can^ 
amahk^ 

Pees, (ego) facere possum, lean do it. 

{tu) facere potes, thou canst do it. 
&c. 
Peef. (ego) facere potui, I eould have done it. 

(tu) facere potuisti, thou couldst have done it 
&c. 

126. Ought; ^^ovu> (duty, propriety). ^'^^^^^^^ 

Pees, (me) facere oportet^ j ^ ^^^ ^ ^^ I (ego) facere debeo. 
(te) facere oportet < ^ ^. ^* > (tu) facero debes. 



oon«;ience); concessum est, U is permuted^ comprehends both as a gensral 
expression. 

• Ovy queo : cannot^ nequeo (Inf. quires nequirSj like eo). Possum relates to 
the ability of the doer; queo to the feasibility {to him) of the thing to he dime. 
Posswrif I can do it, if no external hinderances occur : queo , / can do it, because 
there are no external hinderances, sufficient to prevent me ; lamina condition 
to do it. This is expressed by saying that possum denotes subjecHoei queo objee- 
Hce possibility : or (in DOderUin^s words) possum quantitative^ queo qualitative 
possibility. Doderlein observes : ** The best prose writers, as Cicero and Sal- 
lust, and even Pliny and other later authors, frequently use fueo, but (jakequis- 
quam and uUus) only in negative propositions : that is, only in such as actually 
contain a negation, or at least are of a negative character." 

f Necesse est^ expresses necessity; oportet^ duty or propriety ; opus est^ advisa** 
bleness. Debeo is the corresponding personal form to oportet^ as indigeo to optts 
cat. Oportet expresses the moral claim; debeoj the moral obligation of a par- 
ticuXar person to satisfy that claim. Debere is generally supposed to be de-haberCf 
* to bave/roTTi' a person, and therefore to owe it to him. Ddderlein is inclined 
to refer it with ddfiliSf to Ha, Jftio), to want. 

8 Or, J ahntld do (it), > 

T^dmMdo{ii). \^' 



§ 20. 127^182.] MAT, MIGHT ; CAN, COULD. 61 

127. Perf. (me) facere { I ought to have ) / v #. , , . 

oportiit^ i dme(a) j ('^o) &<»« debui. 

(fe) facere oportuit j S« d^) J C") ^^^'^ ^'^'^- 
(a) Or, with the subjunctive goyerned by * irf* omitted ; 
(ego) faciam oportet,'» I ought to do (it). 
(tu) facias oportet, thou oughtest to do (it). 

128. (^May, might; can, could ; should, &c., when they 
stand in principal clauses, are not auxiliary but principal verbs ; 
and must be translated by the proper tenses of Ucetf possun^ 
oportet, or debeo, &c. 

129. May, might, are oflen used of events the possibiUiy ol 
wliich is granted by the speaker. ^ May or might is then equivalent 
to may (or might) possibly ; may for any thing I know. 

r may happen, ^ it is to be trans- 

(a) When ' may ' = J may possibly, > lated hy fieri 

C mayfor anything I know, j potest ui 

.\^ (Fieri potest ut fallar, I may be deceived.) 

130. The perf. infin, after a past tense of a verb expressing 
duty, possibility, permission, &c., is generally to be translated by 
the pres. infinitive. 

That Is, the time is marked by the tense of the verb expressing dutff^ 
^c, and the pret, infin, marks the time relatively to that verb. If it in 
meant, that the action should have been completed before the time spoken 
o^ the peif. infn. must be used. 

131. [C. XVII.] (^'May,* 'might,* sometimes mean ^ can,' 

* could,* and must be translated by possum. 
[C. iviii.] 05" The perf. infin. must be translated by the 

present infin. after might, could, ought, unless the 

action is to be represented as over before the time 

to which might, could, dz;c., refer. 
When the infin. perfect follows * ought* * ought * is the perfect. 

132. Vocabulary 19. 

To be the slave of, serrlre, servivl, servltum (dot). 

To spend, or lead, a life, ag^re, ^, act. 



k Legem brevem esse oportet^ A law ought to be short. 
He ipsum amea oportet, non mea, You ought to love me^ not merdy ihkigM 
hckngingtome. 



62 APPOSITION. [§ ^i • 133-186 

Virtuous, honorable, honestus, a, urn. 

Chaste, castus, a, um. 

Moral, sanctus, a, um. 

To shed one's blood, profundere, f&d, fUs. 

For = in behalf of; pro (governs abUa,). 
Country = country of one's Wrth, ) ^^^j^^ - 

or citizenship, ) 

To snatch away, take away, eripSre, entpu, erept. 

To take away a man's life, vitam alicui i ertpSre. 

Exercise 20. 

[N. B. A parenthetical *ffun' in an interrogatire sentence is used to 
Indicate that < an ' is to be used.] 

y 133. May a man be-the-slave-of glory ? [No.]^^ught we 
not to have obeyed the laws of our country \^ What ought I to 
have done V/l asked what I opght^ to have done ^^l^o man 
may take away another's life. ^It cannot he denied, that he has 
led a very moral' life^^f^ught he not to have shed his blood for 
his -country 1^ There is no doubt, that he lived a very disgrace- 
ful' life.^Ought' we (then) to be the slaves of glory ^j^ught' 
he not to have obeyed the laws of virtue J^t was owing to ypu 
that** my life was not taken away by Caius. 



VIL 

^ 21. Apposition. 

134. When to a substantive or personal pronoun there is added a sub- 
stantive (without gLprepoaitian) explaining or describing it, the latter is. 
said to be placed in apposition to the former. * Alexander the conqueror 
of Persia.' 

135. A noun in apposition may be turned into the prodioate (nom. qfter the 
verb) of a relative sentence. 

136. (a) A substantive in apposition must agree in case with 
the substantive o/*2rAic A it is spoken. 



i Obt. The person/rom whom is put in the dot. This dot. may be explained 
thus : it is the penon towardo or againat whom the action of snatching away 
life is directed. 

k The pHuptrf. must here be used, for the imptrfcct would fix the duty to the 
HvM tf asking. 



^21. 137-142.] APPOSITION. 53 

137. (() If the substantlTe of which it is spoken be /eminlM^ thafettk 
form should be chosen for the substantive in appotUiaii, whoMver 
there is one. 

138. (c) If the principal word be the name of a Untn,^ with 
urhs or oppidum in apposition to it, the verb or participle gene- 
rally agrees with the appositian instead of the principal noun. 

(With this exception, agreement with the principal noun is Ifts nifa^ 
though a rule that is not always observed.) 

139. id) The English *a«/ * wAen,' *for,* standing with a noun, are oM^ ' 
omitted, and the Latin substantive placed in appomtion, 

140. {Eng.) The city of Rome. The island cf Cyprus. 
:^ (Lai,) The dty Rome. The idaiSd Cyprus. 

141. (a) Alexander victor tot regum atque populorum, Alex- 

ander the conqueror of so many kings and nations. 
iUsus magister egregius, Experience an admirable 
teacher. 
Philosophia magisira moruxn, Philosophy the teacher 
of morals, 
(c) VolsinU, oppidum Tuscorum opulentissimum, totum 
concrematum est fulmine, Volsiniif the most weaUhy 
town of the Tuscans, teas entirely destroyed (burnt) 
hy lightning. "^ 

{d) Mdem Salutis, quam consul voverat, dictator dedi- 
cavit, He dedicated as dictator the temple of Solus 
which he had vowed when consul. 

142. Vocabulary 20. 

To take, cXpSre, io, cep, capt. 

King, rex, r6gis, m. 

Philosophy, philosophia, 89, /. 

Inventor, inventor, 5ris; inventriz, ids. 

Teacher, magister, tri ; magistra, e. 

Manners, morals, character, m(}res, nm, m. 

Discipline, disciplina, e, /. 

Frugality, fhigalitas, atis, /. 

Parent, genitor. Oris ; genltrix, icis. 

Athens, Athens, irum, f. 

Branch-of-leaming, doctifna, «, /. 

Maker, causer, effector, 5ris; eifectrix, icis. 



1 The name of a people often stands with the substantive eivi&w, in apposi« 
tkm to it in the singular ; ^CoTmonenseOf qttm est longe firmissima totius pro- 
vtaidsBosito*.* C8BS.BeU.Civ.U. 19. 



54 NOMINATIVE AFTER THE VERB. [§22. 143-146. 

Wladom, saplentia, »,/. 

Happy, beatua, a, um. 

An old man, sSnex, senis, Q. plur, senum 

To wish, desire, be willing, velle, vblu, — - 

To blot out, efface, destroy utterly, delSre, deldv, delSt 

Treaty, foedus, Bris, n. 

To renew, rlSnovare, av, at. 

Exercise 21. 

^/ 143. Apiolae, a town of the Latins (Latini), was taken by king 
Tarquinius^Philosophy was the inventor' of laws, the teacher' 
of morals and disciplines^ Frugality is the parent^ of virtues^^t 
cannot be denied, that philosophy was the inventor' of laws. 
vTtDaius used to call"* Athens the inventor"" of all branches-of- 
learning. ^It cannot be denied, that wisdom is rightly called the 
maker of a happy life^^ll do not desire the same things as an old 
man, that I desired when a boy (p. 14. 15, h).^I have left nothing 
undone to finish^^ the business to your satisfaction.^li was 
owing to you*" that the city of Rome was not destroyed by fire. 
/i^The treaty between the cities of Rome and Lavinium* has been 
renewed yyUas not the treaty been renewed between the cities 
of Rome and Lavinium l^JOught not the treaty between the 
cities of Rome and Lavinium to have been renewed 1 



§ 22. Nominative after the verb. — Attraction of the predicate, 

144. (a) If the verb esse, &c. standing afler a verb that ia 
immediately followed by the infinitive, has a participle or adjec- 
tive with it, it will stand in the nominative case. 

145. (h) Afler a verb of tnshing, dz;c.p the accusative of the 
pronoun is sometimes expressed, and sometunes omitted, if it meana 
the same person as the nom. of the principal verb. 

146. (h) If the ace. is omitted before the infln.y the noun or parti, 
ciple with the infinitive is attracted into the nom. case. 



» Clr ' Would^ or *u8ed to* may be considered as signs of the Inqnatfcel 
(Dlcebat, would §ay ; uud to uy,) a Plur&L 

• Inter Romam Laviniumque urbea. 
V 8tud/ii ^ dmdmi. 



§22. 147-150.] NOMIMATIVE AFTER THE VERB. 5& 

147. (c) Afler verbs of declarvngy &;c.« the accnsative under 
the same circumstances, is sometimes^ but less commonly omitted. 

148. (c) When the ace. pronoun is omitted before the infn. 
after a verb of declaring, &c., the adjective or participle is gene- 
raHy attracted into the nominative ; but sometimes not, especially 
when it is the part, of the fuU in rus, esse being omitted. 

149. (a) Soleo (possum) esse otiosus, I am accustomed to he {I 

can he) at leisure. 
(h) Vult \ '^' ^^^Princ^em, ) ^^ ^^ ^ j^ ^^ j^^ 
( esse prmceps, ) 

(c) Ait S " essejwrotom, \HeuiystTuaTieU ready, 
i esse" paratus,^ ) 
Facturos^ jiollicentur, They promise to doit. 

150. Vocabulary 21. '{Of Apposition- Verhs.^) 

To become, to be made, fiSri, factus.. 

To turn out, * evadSre, evia, evSa. 

To be* named = appointed, nominari, nomfhatiu. 

To be elected or chosen, ebgi, electna. 
To be made (of an Appointment > ^^^-^j ^^^^^ 

to an office), ) 

t^To be born, nasci, natus. 

To be considered, or»]^eld, habSri, habitus. 

'To seem, appear^, vidSri, "visus.^* 

To be rendered,* ' reddl, redditus. * 

An orator, orator, (^ris, m. 



*i Sentiendi d dedarandi, 

' Cicero is fond of inserting §e after vette, 

• In Cicero the pronoun is seldom omitted except Bfterfateri, dieere, opkiari, 
and similar yerbs. (Ochsner.) 

t Bentley says: *ait eaaeparatum* "ne Latinum quidemest;" which, how- 
ever, Kriiger thinks is too much to say. 

« But the participle of the^. aee. standing (with the omission 6f eme) for the 
fui. mfin. is sometimes aUractedf especially in poetry. * Vitura et quamvis 
nunquam speraret Ulixen.' Propert, ii. 7. 45. * Vmturaqiie rauco { Ore mina- 
tur hiems. StcU. Theb, i. 347. So with other predicates. * Rctulit Ajaz | Esse 
Jovis pronepos,* < Acceptum refero versibus, case nocms,* * Sensit medios dc" 
lapsus in hostes,' &c. (K.) 

* By appontionrverbs are meant the verbs that make no complete pfedieaie: 
bat require a noun after them, which is rather in apposition to the subject {th^ 
TUrni, to verb) than governed by the verb. 

^ T\> tsppear must be translated by videri, whea it means to seems by appar 
'^e, when it means to come into sight ; to be seen ; to be evident. 



56 DATIVE AFTER ESSE. [§ 23. 151| I5d 

A plat, poeta, m, m. 

* To be wont, or accustomed, stflere, eolitus sum. 

To desire, cupSre, cuplv, cupit. 

To have rather, malle, malu, 

Rich, fives, divftis. 

To begin, Gcepisse; incipSre, cep, cept.' 

Troublesome, molestus, a, um (with dcU.y. 

To cease, leave of]^ desinSre, desii, desit. 

Timid, timidus, a, um. 

To go osLf continue, pergSre, perrez, perrect. 

By accident, casu. 

Exercise 22. 

/ 151 , I had rather be-in-good-health' than be rich.J^I begin to 
be troublesome to yoU|^ Cease to be timid^^here is no doubt 
that the boy will turn out an orator^^Do not continue to be 
troublesome to Caius.jgit cannot be denied that Balbus seems 
wise to many persons^^^N'o one is born rich.^^No one becomes 
good by accident^. ^4n uma Pompilius was made king^^t was 
owing to you that^^ Iwas not made king.^^e promises to perform* 
the business {omit esse)/^|fNo one can be happy without virtue. 
/^T\\Qve is no doubt, that no man can be happy without virtu^^jeJ 
had rather be a good man, than seem (one)XI^<u^7 persons can- 
not turn out orators^^ poet is bom, not madeyTWas the world 
made by accident or by design ? ^ 



§ 23. Dative after esse. 

152. (a. h, c. d.) When esse, &c., having the same suhject as 
the principal verb, follows a verb that governs the dative, if the 



« Coepi has only the tenses derived from the perf, Ccepfua eat Is used for 
its perf. before pass, infinitivea. So deaitus est (ceased), though more rarely. 
(Zumpt.) When he adds that the perf., pluperf.y hnd fut. perf, have respectively 
the meanings of the pres.^ imperf.^ and mnplefvXvfre^ I believe him to be mis- 
taken, for : (1) In many passages caspi has certainly the meaning of the perf. 
(2) In many more, I think in all, the Latin idiom requires one of the perfect^ 
where we should use one of the imperfect tenses. Ccepi is regularly joined only 
with the injin, : incipio with {infin. or) a noun (as its subject or object) : and 
eoBpi dwells more on the action begun ; incepi gives more prominence to the . 
Veginnirjg that is made, and is altogether more emphatic. (D.) 



§23. 153-155.] DATIVE AFTER ESSE. 57 

accus. pron. is omitted, the noun after esse either remains in the 
Bccus. or is (more commonly) attracted into the dative J 

153. (a) Expddit bonas esse vohis, It is expedient for you to be 

good women. 

(b) Licet esse headsy They may he happy (if they please). 

(c) Medios esse non licet, We may not he neutral. 

{d) Mihi negligenti esse non licet/ 1 may not he negligent. 

154. Vocabulary 22. 

(Verbs in the third person governing the dat.^ and often used with 'a 
sentence as their subject.) 
It is permitted, licet. 

I have leisure, vacat mihi (but dot, of pronoun gener- 

ally omitted when the person is 
known). 
It is given, iatur, datum est. 

It is expedient, expedit. 

It is profitable, prOdest, profuit, i&c. 

It4s injurious, hurtful, nttcet. 

Negligent, negligens, tis. 

Neutral, medius, a, um. 

Luxurious, luxuri5sus,^ a, um. 

Exercise 23. 

/155. Let us be permitted** to be miserable .Jfj^et us be pei- 
mitted to be neutral. ^^Aere is no doubt that no man may be neu- 
tral J^t is injurious to be negligent.^/There is no doubt that it 
is expedient for all to be good. ^^Vf any persons doubt what is ex- 
pedient for them/Tlt is not given to all to be wise. J^t is expe- 
dient for no man to be luxurious.^I have no leisure to be luxu- 
riousy^t cannot be denied that few have leisure to be luxurious. 
/fTheiQ is no doubt that it is profitable to all to spend a virtuous' 
life/2There is no doubt that a wise man would rather be-in-good- 
health^ than be rich/iJrhere is no doubt that no one becomes 
good by chanceyiyHad you rather be rich, or be-in-good-health ? 



y The gen. and abha. are never attracted In this way. We may not say ! 
Interest CiceronU esse doqwnHa ;' * damnor a noUnJte esse hcno? (K.) 

s ' Per quam non licet ease negligeniem ' (sc. miMj. (Catull.) 

• Arijectives in dsuSf {vi)lentus, iduSf denote being fuU of what the root ex- 
Piesaes. 

i> Let-it-be-permitted to ns. 



68 THE GENITIVE. [§ 24. 156-161 

^j\ asked him whether he had rather be-in-good-health or be wise 
J^QfYou ought not to have heen^^ neutral. 



VIII. 
§ 24. The Genitive. 

156. (a) The Romans oAen used a dependent genitive where 
we use prepositions ; in, for, with, &c. 

157. Almost every substantive that depends so closely on another as to 
form almost ovu notion, with it, may in Latin be expressed by the geni- 
ttvcj no matter what preposition we should use in English. 

158. The genitive is joined attribtUively to its substantive, and as no two 
languages exactly agree, it often happens that what one language ex- 
presses by an adjective^ another for want of an adjective would express 
by the genitive case. Hence — 

159. (6) Where we use the genitive or the preposition ' of* with a substantive, 
an adjective may often be used in Latin. 

160. (c) Where we use a substantive with an adjective agree^ 
ing with it, an adjective in the neuter is often used in Latin, with 
a genitive governed by it. 

(a) THese adj^tives are indefinite numerala and demonatrative pronmme. 

They are only used as qtutsi-eiibstantivea (governing the gen.) in th^ 

nam, and ace, singular. 
(/?) The following are peculiar phrases: id temporis, at that time: id 

etatis, of that age : quid atatis 7 of what age ? 

161. (a) (jrratia heneficii,^ Gratitude for < kindness. Mu- 

lierum Sabinarum injuriae, The wrongs done to 
the Sahine women. Luctus fiKi, Grief for his 
son. Suarum rerum fiducia, Confidence in hisS' 
own affairs. Pyrrhi regis helium, The w^ar^itli 
king Pyrrhus. * • 

{b) Res alienee. The affairs of others ((jf. Other people's 
affairs). Causa regia, The royal cause ; or. The 



« *ThG genitive is aubjecHve, when it denotes that which does something. 
or to which something belongs : it is o&Jective, when it denotes that which if 
the object of the feeling or action spoken of. The objective genitive wuaUjf fol- 
lows the noun on which it depends.' (Z.) 



§24, 162.] 



TH£ GENITIVE. 



50 



king's cause, Timor externus, Fearfr&m mthaui ; 

fear of foreign enemies. 

(c) Quantum voluptatisi How much pleasure. Allquid 

temporis, Same time. Nimium temporis, Too 

much time. Multum boni^ Muchgood. Plus boni, 

More good. Quid novi ? (what of new ? ss) 

What new thing ? what news ? 

(Obs. Bonif mfiUy novi, falsi, are used as substanHoes after 

these neuters,) 



162. Vocabulart23 
Gratitude, 
Benefit, foyour, 
Weight, bardeD, 
Heavy, 
Light, 

Flight, escape from, 
Labour, 
Remedy, 
Anger, 



gratia, sb,/. 
beneficium, i, n. 
tfnuB, eris, n, 
gravis, is, e. 
iSvis, is, e. 

fuga, 8B,/. 

labor, Qris, m. ^ 

remedium, i, n. 
ira,8B,/. 

'^ Vo'^r'''^' ^^^ "" ^^''^^''^ '™''" ^ ^"^^* ^"^^^ ^^ ^^^ ^ ^"^"^ 
Care, t ^ cura, «,/. 

alienus, a, um. 

res, rei,/. 

difficilis, is, e. 

argentum, i, n. 

aurum, i, n. 

rerom natilra. 

Abderites.* 

emolumentum, i, n. 

emolumentum capSre ; cSp, capt 
( inquit (always following a word or two 
c of the reply). 

misericordia, 9,/. 

pauper, pauperis. 

quid. 

nimium. 

plus.f 



Not one's own ; of others, 

Affair, 

Difficult, 

Silver, 

Gold, 

Nature, 

OfAbdfira, 

Advantage =s profit, gain. 

To receive or gain advantage. 

Replies; says he. 

Compassion, pity. 

Poor, 

What, 

Too much, 

More, 



" Names from one's naUoe taum end in Ensis ; Antts (from towns in a, a) ; 
Isus with 1 (from towns in to, turn) ; as, G, atis (from towns in vm). From 
Greek nouns the adjectives generally end in iua (often with some change of 
root) ; also in iteSf itea, idtea; and in eeua from a. Those from towns of Greek 
origin^ but not in Greece^ usuaUy end in fnttt. (Z.) 

t PluSf plurUf only in the sing. Plur. plures, pluroy G. pluriwn, Aa 



rtO THE GENITIVE. [§25. 163-lfl8 

How much< quantum. 

Much, multum. 

Nothing, nihil (indecl. neut eubat.). 

No time, nihil tempbris. 

Exercise 24. 

/ 163. Is gratitude for a benefit a heavy weight ? [No.]^s not 
death an escape from labours ? Jxhere is no escape from death. 

^JfAre there not many remedies against anger i/Trood men are 
often overpowered by compassion for the poor.^The care ol 
other people's affairs is difficult^^We all lose too much time. 

^Is there more silver or gold in nature ? ^t was owing to you*' 
that I did not keep my promises^^jWe are now of such an age, 
that we ought to bear all things' courageously ^/t cannot be de. 
nied that Pythagoras of Abdera was a very great philosopher. 

^/IjA.ntisthenes was asked what advantage he had received from (ex) 
philosophyy^Antisthenes, being asked what advantage he had 
received from philosophy, * To be able,'«f says he, ' to converse 
with myseW^jt/^ow much time do we all lose L^lft cannot be 
denied that we all lose much time^jP'here were some*^ who 
lost much time. 



J 25. The Genitive continued. (Partitives. Genitivus Qualitatis.) 

164. A partUiee adjective is one that expresses some individuals consid- 
ered as parts of a larger number or body. 

Partitive adjectives are, therefore, such as which^ tvery^ eachy both 
MmUf <&c., with ordinal numerals, comparaiivea^ and avperlatives, 

165. (a) A partitive adjective governs a noun in the genitive.^ 

166. The gender of the partitive adjective is generally the gender of the 
governed genitive, because that expresses the thing meant. 

167. (b) But sometimes the genitive is the name of a country of which the 
person is one inhabitant : of course then the adjective agrees with man 
understood. 

168. (c) Also when a superlative^ or solus, &c., governs a gen., 



' Uf possim. 

^ Partitives are often followed by the prepositions meaning frunif ouf^ qT^ 
mnaagti (e, inter, de), instead of by the genitive. 



')25. 169-175.] THE GENITIVE. 61 

and is also (with the gen.) spoken of another substantive, the 
partitive agrees in gender y not with the gen., but with the other 
Mubstantive. 

169. {d) A substantive having an adjective agreeing with Uy and 

deterihing a former substantive, stands in the genitive or ablative. 

(It may be used attnbutivdy or predicaHvdy! aa an adjective, that la, 
to the substantive, or after the verb to be,) 
If the description be merely fwnuriealy the genitive only can be used. 

170. (e) Opus esti {there is need) is followed by an ablative of 
what is needed. The person who needs must be put in the dative. 

171. (/) After opia eat^ an English substantive is often translated by ap<»< 
aioe partieiple. 

172. (g) But the thing needed is often the nam. to the verb sum y 
or the ace, before esse. 

H^In this construction the verb «um will agree, of course, with 
its nom. 

In the former, it is always in the third person sing. ; optu being its 
real nom. 

173. {Eng.) f I have need of food. 

{Lot,) J (1) There is a business to me with food {abl. without prqt,). 
I /2\ J Pood is a business to me. 

C These things are a business to me. 
The Becond construction is preferred with neuter pronouns and ad- 
jectives. (Z.) 

174. How many are there of you 7 = how many are you 7 
There are very many of you, = you are very many. 
Few of whom there are, = who are few. 

When ^(f* with a demonstrative or relative pronoun follows a j)Zu- 
ral numera* or superlative, the numeral often expresses all who are 
meant by the pronoun ; and then the pronoun and the numeral must 
be in the same ca§e in spite of ' of' .k 

175. [C XIX.] H^ * Of you,' * of us,' are not to be translated after how many^ 
or other numerals, when the whole party are spoken oL 



i Opus est {it ts a task or business). Grotefend, comparing the Greek Ipyu^ 
Iffii Tivos, thinks that the ablative originally expressed the means by which the 
business is to be accomplished. Probably opus esse had, in various construo 
tions, come to have nearly the meaning of to be necessary or required : and then 
other constructions were commonly, or occasionally, used before the ablativi 
prevailed. Plautus uses even the accusative, as if i^ were the object required: 
the gen. is still sometimes found : probably the preference was at last given to 
the abl., from that being the usual case after verbs of needing, or requiring. ' 

k Consider, therefore, after such words, whether the pronoun expresses more, 
or no Tnore, than the numeral. 



w\ 



62 THE GENITIVE. [§25. 176,171 

When ofuByOf you^ are omitted, the verb will be of the^r«^ and sec 
and pers. respectiyely. 

176. (a) Uter vestrum ? Which of you ? Alter consuluni, 

% One of the consuls. Graecorum oratorumprcsstan 
iissimuSy The best of the Grecian orators, 
{b) Plato totlus Gracia doctissimus, Plato the most learned 

man of all Greece, 
(c) Hordeum est frugum molUssimum) Barley is the softest 
species of com. 
) Vir summo ingenio,'>^ A man of the greatest ability. 
! Vir excellentis ingenii, A man of distinguished ability. 
Ingentis magnitudinis serpens, A serpent of immense 

size. 
Classis sepiuaginta navium, A fleet of seventy ships. 

(e) Acuto homine nobis opus est, We have need of an acute 
man. Quid opus est verbis ? What need is there 
of words ? 

(f) Properato"" opus est, It is necessary to make haste. 

(g) Quarundam rerum nobis exempla permulta opus sunt, 
Of some things we have need of a great many 

^ examples. 

177. Vocabulary 24. 

W^hich(of two). uter, utra, utrum; g. utrius 

Each (do.), uterque j g. utriusque. 

Another ; one (of two things), a > ^ ^ ^^ ^j^^^j^^ 

second ; one more, > 



I According to the German grammarians, the gen, denotes a permanentt the 
(M. a temporary state. Grotefend says, the gen. is used of a thoroughly inhe- 
rent and permanent quality, penetrating the whole being, and making the thing 
what it is : whereas the abl, is used of any part or appendage of the thing spo- 
ken of, and only so far as it manifests itself; which part or appendage, more- 
over, may be accidental and temporary. To establish this he quotes : " Murena 
medioeri ingenioy sed magno studio renim Yeterum, mrdice indtutrus et magni 
laboria fuit." * Murena showed but moderate talents, though a great zeal foi 
antiquarian pursuits ; industry and laborious perseverance canstUuted his char^ 
tuder? Why not as well or better, * He shmoed great industry and persever- 
ance; but his mind was {easenHaUyi and, permanently) one of little power, 
though with a great fondness for antiquity 7' Was his vngenium (the m-bom 
power of his mind) a less permanent quality than his induttrta ? Zwnpt says * 
* With M«e, Cicero seems to prefer the abV 

« Properarc is used of a praia&worthy haste for the attainment of a^ncrpoM i 



(25. 178.] THE GENITITS. 

Of HUetus, MUeaiuB (162, e). 

Greek, OrscuB, i, m. 

Roman, Roznanus, 1, m. 

To predict, foretelli pnedicSre, diz, did 

Eolipse^ defectio, Qnia,/ 

Sod, sol, sOlis, m. 

Body, corpus, corporis, n. 

Food, meat, clbus, i, m. 

Driiddng, drink. polio, Onif, /. 

Serpent, serpens, entis, eom,gm(L 

Immense, ingens, ingentis. 

magnitude, int^jf. 



Lemnos, Lemnos,* i,/. 

To find, discover, invenire, ven, vent; repslkre, repBr 

repert.0 
Custom, consuetudo, irUs,/. 

Nature (i. e. a man's nature), natura, bb,/. 
Money, (often argentum, i, n. silver). 

To draw away, avttcare, av, fit. 

Connection, conjunctio, Onis,/. 

Honour (i.e. probity, trustwortlji- > [i^^q ^j r 
ness), > 

c making haste, 1 properato. 
TTure is need of} deliberation, > consulto. 

( prompt execution, ) mature facto. 

Exercise 25. 

/l78. One of them was a Greek, the other a Roman.^ThalesP 
of Miletus was the first of the Greeks who^ predicted an eclipse 
of the sun^ I did the same when (139) consul^jtfle says (ai<"») 



fewiinare = to be in a hurry. An adj. properuB was formed from pro JorOi, 
forwards^ as inferos, exterus, fi'om ffuir prepositions. (D.) 

B Greek nouns in o» of the •wmd decl. are declined like Latin nouns of the 
2d, but liave aoc. en or um. 

• < Incerm^ properly to come upon any thing, expresses the general notion oi 
to find: reperio, like to find out and todiacotcTy implies that the thing found was 
before hid^ and was sought for with pains.' (D.). CrombU observes that tnve- 
Tdre is the proper word for the^ocu^ Uae^; when we talk, that is, of the power 
of diseooering generally, without adding vhatf i. e. without an ooeuMrftM after 
it. He quotes from Cicero, 'vigSre, sapere, hwmire, meminlsse,' a passage 
Trhich plainly proves that inoe$iire does not exclude the notion of aearddng^ 
though it does not (like repmr«) necessarily. imply It. 

P Thales, Stis. 

4 Fari is to talk; use articulate speedi: loqui, to apeak or talk (opposed ta 
ta(i9ret to be silent); dicere is to aoy, the trantUioe form of loqui. As distin- 



64 THE GENITIVE. [§ 25. 170 

that there is no^ccasion for making-haste.o The body has need 
of much food.^Are not serpents of immense size found in the 
island of*'' Lemnos ?^lt cannot be doubted that he is a man ol 
no honour, ^^^Vhat need have we of your authority ?^It cannot 
be denied that the body has need of meat and drmkyf^(Wej 
have need of deliberation ^/It cannot be denied that we have 
need of deliberationj/ ^I s not custom a second nature VCJ^®"^©^ 
used to say** that he had need of many things^(fl[ow much money 
have you need of i^lff'lefl nothing undone to" draw-away Pom- 
pey from his connection with Caesar (156)^OIow many are there 
of you .^^^will ask how many there sue of them. 



The middle of the The rest of the 

way, work. 

media via, reliquum opus, 

mediae vise, reliqui operis, 

&c. &c. 

the bottom (or foot) of the oak ; universa 
Graecia, the whole of Greece : sapientia prima, the beginning oj 
wisdom : extremus liber,' the end of the book, dec. 

Some English substantives relative to poaUumy are often translated 
into Latin^ljy adjectives agreeing with their substantivQS. Such are, 
gndj middle^ whole^ top, &c. 

These adjectives generally stand before their substantives.* 



179. The top of the 

mountain, 
N. summus mons, 
G. summi mentis, 

&c. 
So, ima quercus, 



fished from loquiy dicere expresses a more artificial or studied speech, loqui 
being to speal? in the style of ordinary conversation. As distinguished from 
ajOf dicere is to speak for the information of the hearers, ajo expressing the a» 
aertion of the speaker, as the opposite of nego. Hence ajo is I say = I assert, 
a/?Erm,mai7rfain(but somewhat weoArcr than these words). Iruiuit (which />o- 
derlein derives from injtcUy throws-in) is used to introduce the words of an- 
other, and also the objections whicYi we suppose another to make. (Bentley,) It 
is also used in a vehement re-assertion (* one, one Isa-tf), 

' The adjective so used does not distinguish Its substantive from o«/icr things 
of the same kind, but a part of itself from anoGier part. Thus summus mom 
is the mcuntain where it is highest : not, the highest of a number of mountains. 

•Not, however, always, c. g, < sapientia prima! {Hor,)^ and, 'In hac insull 
eaftremd est fons aquae dulcis,' &c. (Cte. Verr. 4. 118.) 



525. 180, 181.] THE GENITIVB. 



05 



180. VOGABTTLABY 25. 
The Alps, 
Cold, . 
Snow, 
To melt, 

To ooont, reckoi^' 
Out of; 
A thousand. 

To SUTYlTe, 

Thiee hundred. 

To swear. 

Moon, 

Lowest, 

Planet, 

Master := 'master of a house,' 

•owner of ony property,* slaooa 

as well as any other. 
Wool, 
Black, 
White, 

Some — others^ 
Only, 

Chameleon, 
To nourish, support. 
River, 
Neither— nor, 



Alpes, ium,/. 

frigiis, ttiiS|9i. 

iiiz,niyi8, /. 

li(fueBCI!re, Hcu, — 

nnmerire, iy, St. 

ex {ablat,). 

mille (indecl. in sing. In plur. -allUfr 
ium, ibU9,t dkc.) 

superesse, superfui {dot.), 

trCcenti, sb, a. 

jurare, 5t, at. 

luna, s, /. 

inf imus, a, um. 

planeta, or es, s, m. 
\ dominus, i, m. ; heru», ^ m. is a moiter 
> only in relation to his BervaniB oi 
) alavea. 

lana, s, Ji 

niger, gra, grum. 

albus, a, um. 

alU— alii. 

solus, a, um, O. solius. 

chameleon, ontis, or 9nis, m. 

XlCre, alu, alit or alt. 

flumen, inis, n. 

nee or neque, followed by nee or 
neque.« 



\ 



Exercise 26. 

yl81. On the top of the Alps the cold is so great, that the snow 
never melts there.JftlJount how many there are of you.**-^Out 
of (ex) so many thousands of Greeks (but) few of us survive, 
Ji^Three hundred of us have sworn. ,fThe top of the mountain was 
held by T. (Titus) Labienus.^The moon was considered the 
lowest of the planets/^t cannot be denied that custom is a 
second nature. ^Slaves are of the same morals as*> their master. 



• 3SUU the adj. is indeclinable. 

« * iVft; and ne^e stand before either vowels or consonants.' (Z.) Mr. Rid- 
dle says : 4n good writers nee is found usually only before eanaananU; neyt»4 
Defore vowels.' But merely taking the examples as they are given in Br5der'fl 
Grammar, we have from Cicero, *nee siU nee alter! ;' 'ne^uenaufr agio neque 
Incendlo ;* * imc hominum ;' < neque perfrlngi.' 



06 THE GBNITIVE. [§26. 162-184. 

^ Who is there but^' understands that custom is a second nature ! 
4^Caius promises that he will finish the rest of the workv^/Three 
hundred of us have finished the rest of the joumej^^^tpf wools 
some are black, others whitey(^he chameleon is the only animal 
that" is nourished neither by meat nor drink.j|^he Indus is the 
largest of all rivers. 



§ 26. The Genitive continued* (Gen. after adjectives.) 

182. Adjectives which signify desire, knowIedgCy recoUecHon^ 
fear, partidpationy and their opposites ; together with verbals in 
axy and many of those that express fulness or emptiness, govern 
the genitive. 

(a) These adjectives have an incompleU meaningf and maybe compared 
with iraruiHve yeibs. The governed substantive expresses generally 
the object of Bome feeling of the mind. 

183. (5) To this class belong many participles used adjec- 
tively. 

(c) In Poetry^ the gen, may almost always stand after an adjedive^ 
where its relation to the ac^ective might be ezpresssd by *wUh 
regpeet to.* 

184. (a) Avidus novitatis, Greedy of novelty. Insidia]:um 

plenusy FuU of plots. Beneficii immemor, Apt-to- 
forget a favour, ^^i maritimse peritissimi, Very 
skilful in naval affairs. Magnae urbis capax, Able 

^^ to contain a large city. 

' {h) Veritatis amans, Attached to truth ; a lover of truth. 
Amans patriss,^^ lover of his country. Officii 
negligens, Negligent of duty. ^ 

(c) Audax ingenii, Bold of temper ; of a bold temper. 
Insolitus servitiiy Unaccustomed to slavery. Insue- 
tus laboris {C<bs.). Fidissima tvz\Yirg.). Seri 
studiorum (Hor.). Utilis medendi (Ov.). 



' Potns, ^B, " Potto is the act of drinking^ and that on which this aetion if 
performed ; a draught; a liquid noaUowed : poiu» is drinhingf and drink in Ueetf 
without reference to the action," (R.) 

^ And in TcKihu, who has : vetus regnandif summus oeveritatie, &c. 



$26,185.] 



TBB GEIOTIVB. 



67 



165. VOCABULABT 
To hate, 



26. 



Odiflses (with tenses derived firoa tbf» 
perfect). 

Tirt&8, Gtif, /. 

contentio, OdIs, f, 

▼entas, StiSi /. 

philoflophne, i,m. 

gloiiQsuB, a, nm. 

jOcuf, i, m. 

dabitlre,7 et, it. 

8ii8cip6re, cSp, cept. « 

xta. 
r ne— quidem, (with the word the ttta be« 
\ longs to between them ; ite jSeo qiA- 
C dem^ not eyen in jest.> * 
rnihU aliud nisi, (the fp])bwing oc^. is 
) not to agree with %ML but with the 
C substantiye afterniti.) 
To take in good part, to receiye ) boni consUere,* sulu, suit ; in bonam 
fiivourably. > partem accip6re. 

(AcUectives governing the Grenitive.) 

Mindful, mSmor, tfris. 

Unmindful, apt-to-forget, * immemor, Uyis. 

Negligent, careless ofl inatten \ „ ^ 

^ negligens, tis. , 

avidus, a, um. 
studiQsus, a, um. 
cupidus, a, um. 
perftus, a, um. 
rudis, is, e. 



Courage, 

Contention, 

Truth, 

Philosopher, 

Glorious, 

Jest, 

To hesitate. 

To undertake, 

In-such-a-manner, 

Not even. 



Nothing but, 



tive to, 
Greedy, 

Eagerly-desirous, 
Fond, desirous, 
SkiUedin, 
Unacquainted with, ignorant of, 



X Of this verb the y«rf., plvperf,^ vadfut. ptrf, are respectively used/or (that 
is where we should use) the pre*., imperf., and HmpU fut. This is the case 
with most verbs that express simple emoitum» and openxtwM oi the mind, which 
are completed the moment they exist. The moment I do hcde^ I Aopt haJted ; the 
moment I do know, I have known, 

7 Dubitare, to hegUate, is generally followed by inf. 

* So, lequi boni {or squi bonique) facere, to take in good part f to be saHsfUd, 
Lucri facere, to turn to account ; to get (he credit of. In boni eonmderef boni is 
probably a gen. of the price or value, conavUre being used in its first sense 
(according to Riddle) of * to think upon, whether by oneself, or with others.' He 
derives it from an obsolete conao, from which cenaeo is derived. DSderUin 
thinks eon-suUre meant originally * to git down* (from the same root as «oZ-ium, 
telrla, and perhaps «o^um), and that boni is an old adv. (of the same form as 
heH) ; so that boni conatUas z=: bene conaidao or acguiescas. It occurs in Ctuint., 
Ben., Ac. . not, I believe, in Cicero. 



68 THE GENITIVE. [§26. 1««. 

A partner \ consors,* tia (properly a4j., one who haf 

' ( the same lot). 

A lover of; attached to, amans, tie ; diligens,* tis. 

Productive of, efficiens, tis. 

Such a lover of, adeo amana, or diligena. 

Exercise 27. 

^186, All men hate (him who is) apt-to-forget a kindness. 

J?. Courage is greedy' of danger. ^SAany are fonder of contention 
than of truthf^^ythagoras calls (those who are) eagerly-desirous 
of wisdom philosophersi^^^U men ought to be mindful of benefits 
(receiyed).4^Cicero has lost Hortensius^ the partner^ of his glori- 
ous labour. TThat (Iste) basest of all men is the same that he 
always was.^Epaminondas was such a lover* of truth that he 
did not utter-a-falsehood even*^ in jest.^We ought all to be such 
lovers of our country as not to* hesitate to shed our blood for it. 

^l will warn the boy not to become inattentive to duty^^^e said 
that he was not* negligent of duty^^j^t cannot be denied, that we 
ought all to be lovers of our countrj^^^^He begs me to take these 
things in good part,4/rhey say that virtue is not productive of 
pleasureXltiet war be undertaken in-such-a-manner that nothing 
but peace may seem (to be) sought for. 



> 8ociu»t * a companion ;' * associate ;' * member of the same society ;' * sharer 
of the same fortune ;* in which last meaning It is 83mon7mou8 with eomorB, 
Cornea^ 'companion,' ' fellow-traveller.' Sodatii, * companion in amusement or 
pleasure.' (C.) 

CofuorU* fortuaa eadem, Mciw labor idem ; 
Sed caros fedunt schola, Indus, mensa aodaim 
Vir comis multos eomiiet sibi jungit eundo. 
Com-it-es, aon and '{/,' as in supine of eo. 

* Amare expresses the qfecHan qfkne; diUgere (properly, toehoootapcarC^ the 
preference of one object to another. Iff therefore any thing of deHberaie durieo 
or preference is to be expressed, dUigere should be used. 

b Gonsors. Socius would imply that they shared the eame toil, not that 
Hortensius had a separate share of the aame occupation, 

* Dillgens with gen., his attachment to truth being a principle with him. 
In the next sentence, amantf because, though patriotism should be a prindple^ 
sifeeHon for one's country is the thing required. ^ 

A Say : < that he uttered a ftlaehood not even In jest.' 

* A eoneequenee; not a purpooc 



$»• 187,188.] 



THE GSNITIVJB. 



69 



§ 27. The Gerdthe continued. 

187. (a) (Eng.) lb prefer a capital charge against a man, 

(To make a man an accusecUpersan of a capi* 
tal matter. 
Aliquem rei capitalis reum facere. 

(h) (Eng.) To hring an action agatnet a man for hriJbery* 
(Lot.) Aliquem de ambitu reum facere, 

(c) (Eng.) To prefer a charge of immorality against a 

man. 
(Lat.) Aliquem de moribus reum fkcefe. 

(d) (Eng.) He has informed me of his plan. 
(Lat.) Certiorem me sui consilii fecit.* 

188. VOCABULAEY 27. ^ 

(Adjectives governing the gen.) 



Tenacious, 

Capable of containing^ 

Without, 

Accused o^ 

In his absence, 



BriJber) 



Extortion, 

Assault, 
Impiety, 



tenax, acis. 

capax, acis. 

ezpers, tis («r, pan). 

reus f (from re»), ^ 

absens, tis {adj. agreeing wUh the auJba.).f 

ambitus, (is, m. from ambire, to go 
round, to canvass. Properly, there- 
fore, to accuse a man de amhUu is, 
' to bring an accusation about his can- 
voMing^ and then, as <reum facere 
de moribua ' is ' to accuse of immoral- 
itt/,' so to accuse him de ambitu is ' to 
accuse him of improper j illegal can- 
vassing',* I. e., of bribery. 

res or pecuniae repetundse ; or repetun- 
dsBoZon^/jorop^fy things or moneys 
to be claimed back. 

vis i {vtolence). 

impietas, Stis, /. 



♦ Certiorem facere may also be followed by o&Z. with de : 
* Eum de rebuM geetia certiorem faciunt.' 

i '* Reoa appello non eos modo qui arguuntur, sed omnes quorum de re dis- 
oeptatur; sic enim olim loquebantur." {Cie. De Orat. 2. 43.) From the oUm 
it is plain that reue had come to be used of the defendant almost exclusively, 

» Vis, vis, — , vim, vi | vires, virium, Ac. Gen. vis in TVic., but very 
rare. 



70 THE GENITIVE. [§28. 189, llKi 

Tc prefer a charge against, ream &cSre. 

To inform, certiorem facSre ; fee, fact. 

To learn, discSre, didic. 

Design, plan, consilimn, 1, n. 

Full, plenus, a, um. 

Danger, periculnm, i, n. 

Exercise 28. 

y 189. We are very tenacious of those things which we learned 
a8**> boys.J2The Island of Pharos is not** capable-of-contdining a 
great city .^ They are going to prefer a charge of immorality 
against Caius.//3[?hey have brought an action against Caius for 
an assault.^/7hey have preferred a charge of impiety against 
Caius in his absence, ^l left nothing undone to^^ inform CsBsar oi 
my design^l fear that he will not^' inform me of his design .^It 
is disgraceful to be without any leaming.4^1 fear that he will 
not keep Ms word^JHe promised that he would*^ leave nothing 
undone to draw away Pompey from his connection with** 
C8Bsar.^rrhere is no one but*^ believes that you will be without 
anyi dangers^^j20[e warns^ us that all things are full of danger. 
/jThere are some who*°« deny that virtue is productive ol 
pleasure. 



§ 28. The Genitive continued, 

190. (a) Such a substantive as property, duty , part, mark, Okc, 
is often omitted in Latin after ' to hs ;' so that to he is followed by 
a genitive governed by this substantive, or an adjective in the 
neuter gender agreeing with it. 

(Such a noun as qfficium, munus, indicium, &c.^ must be under' 
stood. 

This genitive is construed in various ways in English : and therefore 



^ Ncn is *not^ hand is * certainty notj* * surely notf'' used especially with 
adJectiveSf adverba^ and imperBonal verba. 

i 'Any,* after experSf must be translated by omnUf 'aUJ 

k When moneo does not mean to warn or advise vib to do {oxnot to do) some* 
thing, it takes oee. with irifln. (not ut tu). 



§28. 191-*200.] THB GENimrE. 71 

tliere are various English phraBos that may be redaoed to thii con 
stmction. 

191. (a) Sach phrases are; UiBdiaraeterUiieqf;UUitieigmbeiUontiti»far 
(the rich, Ac.,) i Uitnot votry one who ; anjf man may ; U denumdt oc 
requires f U hetrcof^ thowB^ Ac. ; it hdang* to. 

When the adjective is of one ttrmiHatwn (and therefore would leave 
it doubtful whether man or ibing is meant), it is better to nse this con- 
struction. 

(* It is ibUc ;* not ' 9apien» oA^ but * wapieniia ett,*) 

192. So when the predicate is an abstract noun in the nom., it is more 
commonly In the gen. in LaL— < It is madneas,' *tkmtnHm est.' 

193. (5) These genitives are used in the same way with/aeere, JUri, hdberif 
ducL 

194. (c) Verbs of accusing^ condemrdngy acqidttingy &c., take a 
genitive of the charge. « 

195. (/) But if the charge be expressed by a neuter pronoun^ it stands in the 
acouBotioe, 

196. This construction may be explained by the omission of crtmm«, or 
nomine^ which are sometimes expressed. 

197. (c) Instead of the gen,, the ablat. with de is very common. 

198. (d) Thejnmukment to which a person is condemned, stands generally 
in the ablat. ; sometimes in the gen., and often in the ace. with ad. 

199. (e) Satago,^ misereor^ and ndserescOy govern the gen. . 
verbs of remindingf remembenngy^- and forgetting, the gen. or 
accusative. 

But verbs of reminding rarely take an aceue. unless it be a neitf 
fnvnmtn. Sallust has the three forms : admonere aliquem, reifdere 
and rem 

200. (a) Imbecilli animi est superstitio, Superstition is a 

mark of {or betrays) a weak mind. Judicis est: 
It is the part (or duty) of a judge. Est boni 
oratoris, It is the business of a good orator. In- 
genii magni est, It requires great abilities. Cujus* 
vis hminis est errare, Any man may err. Meum 
est, It is my business. Extremae est dementise. It 
is the height of madness. Suee ditionis facere, 
To reduce to subjection ; to bring under his domm- 
ion. 



k Satagere (to be doing enough) : < to have one's hands full.' 
1 When memini and reconior signify *to make mention qf* memini takes 
the gm., or abJat. with de; reeordor, the acc.—Memini seldom takes the cm 
ofa iMTson, except in the sense of remembering him aa a contemporary. (Ji.) 



72 THE 6ENITIVB. [§ 28. 201. 

(h) Tempori cedere semper sapientU est hahitum^ It has 
always been held a wise thing to yield to the times. 

(c) Proditionis accusare, To accuse of treachery. De 

pecuniis repetundis damnari^ To he condemned for 
extortion. 

(d) Capitis (or capite) damnari, T? he capitally condemned 

(or^ condemned to death). Ad hesOas condemnare, 
To condemn to the wild beasts. 
{e) Misereri omniumy To pity all. Meminisse prcBteriio- 
rum, To remeniber past events : meminisse heneficia. 
To remeniber kindnesses. Officii sui commonere^ 
^ To remind a man of his duty. Dissensimum obli- 

viseiy To forget disagreements. 
^f) Slid me accusas, If you accuse me of that. (So^ id 
me admonuit.) 
201. Vocabulary 28. 

To accuse, accusare,a av, at. 

To charge falaely, to get ^ipa^^i^^^ .5 .^^ 

charge against, ) 

To prosecute, postulare,<» av, at. 

\ To acquit, absoIvSre, soIt, solut. 

To remember, \ meminisse,? recordari,<i also to make 

(. mention of. 
To forget, oblivisci, oblltus. 

To remind, put in mind of, admbnere, commonere, ui, Xtum. 

ij, .^ C miserSri,' miseritus, misertus ; miseres 

• c c6re. 

To condemn, damnSre," condelnnSre, av, at. 



■* Incusare is * to cuxuse,' but no^ in a court of justice. 

» Properly, * to pretend a thing cigainst a man.' 

• Literally, < to demand^* i. e. for punishment. 

P With tenses derived from the peril (See odt, 185, x.) Imperat, memento ; 
ni. mementote). 

« Meminisse is, * to retain in my recollection,* * to remember: * reminisci is, * to 
recall a thing to mind,' * to recoUect : ' recordari is, * to recall a thing to mind, 
and dwell upon the recollection of it.' (D.) 

' Miserati governs the ace. Miserari is * to show compassion,* misererif * to 
fed compassion,' as an act of free will, implying b. generous mind, and thereby 
distinguished from miseret me tui (I am miserable on your account), which car- 
ries with it the portion of an irresistible feeling. (D.) 

■ Damnare aliquem voti (or votorum), is, to condemn a man to pay his vow (cr 
cows) by granting his prayers. Also, damnare votis. 



§ 28. 202.] THB GBNITIYB. Y8 

An Athenian, AtheniensU (182; •V 

Socrates, Socrates, is, m. 

Barbarian, barbarus, i, m. 
To Uve for the day, forgetful, that > .^^ ^^^ ^.^g^^ 

is, of the morrow, ) 
tt is agreed upon, it is an aUowed«> constat » 

fact, i 

Superstition, superstitio, 5nis,/ 

Feeble, imbdcillus, a, um. 

To disturb^ agitate, pertorbare, &y, it. 

Constancy, firmness of mind, constantia, ae, f. 

To persist, perseverire, av, it. 

Error, error, Qris, m. 

Treachery, proditio, Onis,^ 

Sedition, seditio, Qnia,/. 

A Christian, christiinus, i, m. 

Injury, injuria, », /. 

Adversity, res adverse. 

To condemn to death, capitis damnire. 

To acquit of a capital charge, capitis absolvere. 

Religion, religio, Snis, /. 

Exercise 29. 

/ 202. The Athenians (falsely) charged Socrates with impiety, 
Mid condemned him to death, J^t is for barbarians to live for the 
day (only).^It is an allowed fact, that superstition is the mark of 
a feeble mind^^ requires great constancy not to be disturbed 
in adversity ^/rfe is characteristic of a fool to persist in error. 

^It is your business to obey the laws of your country. ^?li is not 
every man who can leave life with an even mind,^It teas ovnng to 
you that he did not accuse Balbus of treachery. ^Xie promises" 
to prosecute Dolabella for extortion^He was condemned to death 
-by Augustus./^aius was acquitted of sedition by Augustus. 

y^pDo not forget benefits^It is the dufy of a Christian to pity the 
poor^iH^t cannot be denied that (86) it is the duty of a Christian 
to pi^ the poory^pfear that he will not*^ easily forget theinju- 
ry^I fear that he will remember the injuryy^/^id you not 
admonish me of that (200,/) ^^Adversity puts us in mind of reli- 
gioxi/9[t cannot be denied that he has been acquitted of the capital 



t Literally, it stands together as a eonsisteni tmtli. 
4 



74 THE GENITIVE. [§ 29. 208-200. 

§ 29. The Genitive continued. {Impersonal verbs.) 

203. (a) With interest and refert (it concerns or is important) ; 

1) The thing that is of importance may be either (a) an inftU' 
ttive {with or without ace.) or {fi) a neuter pronoun {hocy id, illud. 
quod : so that they are not quite impersonal), or a clause intro 
duced either (/) by an interrogative, or {d) by ut or ne. 

2) The person to whom it is of importance is put in the gen. 
with interest or refert; but, instead af the personal pronouns, a 
possessive pronoun is used in the ablative feminine : med, tud, sua, 
nostra, vestrd : so cujd sometimes for cujus.^ 

3) The degree of importance is expressed either by the gen. 
{magni, parvi, quanti, &c.) ; or by an adverb {muUum, plurimum, 
magnopere, nihil, &c.). 

4) The thing with reference to which it is of importance is 
governed by ad ; as magni interest ad laudem civitatis, it is of 
great importance to the credit of the state. 

204. {b) These impersonals, pudet, piget, pcmitet, tadet, miseret, 
take an accusative of the person feeling, a genitive of what causes 
the feeling. 

205. Wh(U eauHt the feeling may alsd be a verb (in the infnitwef or in an 
indicative clause with quod^ or a mbjunctive one with an inUirrogaivDt 
word). . . 

206. (a) Intelligo quanti reipublicce inter sit omnes copias con- 

venire, 1 am aware of what importance it is to the 

republic, that all our forces should assemble. * 

Interest omnium recte facere, It is the interest of all 

to do right. 
Quid nostra refert ? Of what importance is it to us f 

(or, What does it signify fp us ?) " ^^ 

Magni interest ad laudem ciTilatis, It is of gr^at im^ * 

portance to the credit of the state., '^ 

Magni interest, quos quisque audiat ijuotidie. It is of 

great consequence whom a man hears every day. 



• To be explained perhaps by reference to eau»d, gratid. It seems to bo 
proved that these are (as Priacian teaches) ablatives, since the a is long: e. g. 
Ter. Phorm. iv. 5, 11 :— Datum ^sse dotis. De, Quid-tua, malum! id r6fert1 
Ch. Magni, Demipho. lUfert =: reifirt^ for * ad rem fert ' qr cox^evU 



§29 207,208.] 



THE GENITIVS. 



75 



IBud mek magni interest, te tU videam, It is qfgreai 

consequence to me that I should see you. 
Vestrd interest, commiliiones, ne imperatorem, pes- 
simi faciant, It is cf importance to you, my com- 
rades, that the worst sort should not elect an em- 
peror, 
{b) Ignavum pceniteUt aliquando ignavia, The sloihfid 
man uriU one day repent of his sloth. 
Me non solum pigetstuUiticBmesd, sed etiam pudet. 
lam not only sorry for my folly, hut also ashamed of 
it, TwAei me vitBd, I am weary of my life, Tsedet 
eadem audire milites, The soldiers are Ured of 
hearing the same thing, Tui me miseret, mei piget, 
Ijnty you ; I am vexed at myse^, 
207. Vocabulary 28.* 

interest, rtfertg the latter very rarely 
when apcTMon is ezpresaed, imless by 



It concerns, it is of importance or 
consequence, it is the interest of,'* 



i am sorry for, vexed at, 

1 repent, am discontented or dis- ) ^^^^ ^^ 

satisfied with, S ^ 

I am ashamed of, 
I pity. 



a pronoun $ principally isiqwdr^ert 7 
what does it signify 1 what difference 
does it make? and iixhU nfertj it Is 
of no consequence, or makes no dif- 
ference, 
plget me. 



pudet me. 

miseret me (see 201 '). 



I wn disgusted at; am weary or ^^^^^^^g. for;,cr/. pertffisumest. 



tired of. 



Like ; equal to ; as good as, 



On account of^ 

To present. 

Crown, 

Goldenj 



instar ; an old subst. signifying a modd 
or image: and as such followed by 
thegenitvoe. It should only be used 
of equality in magnitude^ real or figu- 
rative. 
1 1 ergo, governing and following the genL 
I tioe, ItlstheGreek ?pyo>. 
donSre, iv, at. 
cor5na, bb,/. 
aureus, a, um. 



Exercise 30. 



208> 



(What are the various ways of translating vMher—orTl 

What difference does it make to CaiuS| whether \^ 



78 THE DATIVE. [§30.209-212. 

driiiks wine or water ?Xlt makes a great diflTerence to me why he 
did this.^ It makes a great difference to us| whether deatb is a 
perpetual sleep or the beginning of another life^/I will strive 
that no one^^ may be dissatisfied with the peace^J^it is of great 
y importance to me, that Caius should^) be informed of my design. 

^ I will strive that it may be your interest to finish the business. 

"y It is your business to strive that no one may be dissatisfied with 

' the peace. ^We pity those men who have been accused of treason 
in their ahsenceM I will strive that no one may recollect my 
error ^^ I am ashamed of, and vexed at my levity^ (p. 14. 15, a). 

/y I will strive that no one may be ashamed of me/Ut is your 
interest that they should not condemn me to death^lt is the 
interest of all, ^uU the good and wise should not be banished. 
/<^ Plato is to me equal to (them) alL^jThat {Uk) one' day was to 
Cicero equal to an immortality^yHe was presented (petf.) with 
a golden crown on account of his virtue'. 

(For the Genitiye a£ price see under the Ablative.) 



IX. 
§ 30. The Dative. {Dative with Adjectives.) 

209. Adjectives which signify advantage^ likeness, agreeable^ 
nessy usefulness, fitness, facility, &c. (with their opposites), govern 
the dative. 

210. But of such adjectives, several taks a genitive without any essential 
difference of meaoiing. 

211. Natus, commodus, incommodus, utilis, inutilis, vehemens, 
aptus, accommodatus, idoneus, may also be followed by ad with the 
ace. of the object, or purpose, for which. 

Propior (nearer), proximut (nearest), take dai,, but sometimes the cuxum 

212. Vocabulary 29. (Adjectives governing the dative.) 



Grateful (both actively and pas- > „«,♦„„ - „ „^ 
. 1 X . . 1 ui c gratus/ a, um, 

Bively) acceptable ; agreeable, > 



V SvMoia and duktM are ^»wtd:* the former especially sweet to Ihe sense of 
VMlEin^, the latter to that of taste; both being used gentraUy and ligwoHvay 



^ 80. 212.] THE DATIVB. 71 

Liable, subject, exposed to, obnoxius, a, um. 

Common, communis, is, e. 

(Adjectives that take Gen, or Dot.), 
Like, similis,^ is, e; ayperl. BlmHUtnna, 

Unlike, di&similis, is, e. 

Equal, . par,< paris. 

Peculiar to, proprius, a, um. 

Foreign to ; aveiBe to ; inconsis- ) ^ j 

tent with, > — i -j > 

Friendly, a friend, amicus, a, um ; amicus, i, m. 

Unfriendly, an enemy, inimicus.' 

Allied to (of a fault), chargeable > jffini- • i^ e. 

Survivinff ( superstes,b ids ; used 8ub«tantiye!y» a 

' mrvivor, 
(The following are often followed hy 'ad' to express tipurpoae or 
objeotffor which, Ac.) 
Bom, natus, partic, of nascor. 

Convenient ; of character, obliging, commodus,^ a, um. 



like our *9wut.* Jucundus^ that which directly causes joy and delighi. Chrahu^ 
that which Ib grateful or acceptable from any cause. Amcenusj agreeable or de- 
lightful to the sight, though extended to other things by later writers. 
Dtdcia delectant gustantem ; suavia odore ; 
Jucunda exhilarant animum, sed grata probantur 
A gratis : quae visa placent loca, amcena vocamus. 

DoderUUi thinks that anuBtium is not * quod amorem prestat,' but is a sjmcope 
for ammcBnum, as CamoBTUB for ComnuBtus, and is equivalent to 'animo laxando 
idoneus.' 

^ Similis takes gen. of internal, dat, of external resemblance. This does not 
hold without exci^ption ; but to express, Ufce me, him, <ftc. (i. e. eqwd to), the ^01. 
should be used : 

Ille tut simiUs, mores qui servat eosdem ; 
Ille tibi similis, fiiciem qui servat eandem. 

K Similis expresses mere resemblanee : eequaUs denotes mutual and absolute 
equaUty ; par, mutual eojigruity, proporticnate equality. (C.) 

y AUemts also governs the abl, and especially with ab. * In the sense of dis- 
htcUned, hostile, the prep. Is rarely wanting.' (Z.) 

> Hostis, properly a stranger; hence a ptibUe enemy (an enemy to my country, 
not necessarily tome personally). InimUms, one who is an enemy to me per- 
sonally. Amicus, inimieus, as adjectives, may be compared ; and as such generally 
take the £2a/. 

■ Also to be implicated or concerned in (a conspiracy, Ac.) ; an chjed (ol su» 
picion). 

b MquaiiB and superstes have usually a dat. ; but the former more commonly 
%geji., when it signifies a 'contemporary.* (Z.) 

« Cammodus (from eooit modus), commensurate with. 



7S THE DATIVE. [§ 80, 213 

Inconvenient, tmsuitable, incommoduB, a, um. 

Fit, aptus, a, um. 

Suitable, serviceable, idoneus,* a, mn. 

Fitted, adapted, accommodatus, a, um. 

Ufieful, expedient, good, utilis, is, e. 

Useless, Inutilis, is, e. 

Prone, proclivis, is, e. 

Innocent, innocens, tis 

Word, verbum, i, n. 

Fault, culpa, ae,/. 

Lust, Jbldo, inis,/. 

Age = time of life, aetas, atis,/. 

{Eng.) Common to kings and peasants (or, to kings with peasanU), 

(Lat,) Common to kings wUh peasants 

Exercise 31. 

^Shoul4 invmire or reperire he used for finding what has been sought 1 (177, o.)J 

■f 213. It cannot be doubted that (we) men are born for virtue. 
^l^t cannot be denied that it is very inconsistent' with your charac- 
ter to lie. Jit is easy to an innocent man 4o find words. ^ fear 
that you will not find words.^|Tft cannot be denied that death is 
common to every age. ^ His father warned him not to think him- 
self bom for glory. ^ I fear that these things are not" useful for 
that purpose (re*) Jr Don't you understand to how many dangers 
we are exposed ^ I fear that these things will not be agreeable 
to the rich.y/j^erall love (those who are) like ourselves.^^^Our 
own dangers are nearer to us (p. 14. 15, a) than those"* of- 
others/ijle says that he is not* chargeable with this fault/3 It 
cannot be denied that he was of a character very averse frdm 



• Idoneua expresses a naturalJUneaa actually existing, but that requires to be 
€ib»ervedj made aioaUable, or (if spoken of a person) eaUed forth, Aptu» ( ss oon- 
venienter jimctus) expresses actual fitnees, now exiaHng. In use, the two wordg 
may be thus distinguished : 

( 1 ) Idoneua necessarily requires a purpose to be mentioned or implied. Aptus 
does not necessarily require the mention of a purpose, but may express what is^ 
generally. (2) Idoneua may express a person's fitness to suffer^ to be axied upon* 
Aptus expresses a fitness or readiness to act, (3) Idoneus, spoken of a person^ 
describes diJUneas that may never be obaerved or called forth: aptus, a fitnesi 
actually existing ; that has been called ffnih, and is ready to act. [Idoneus from 
ideo, as uUroneus from uUro, (D.)] 

4 Nostri, gen. pL 



^31. 214, 215.] THE DATIVE. 79 

impiety (p. 14. 14)/^frhere is no one but»^ thinks it inconsistent 
witli your character to keep your word/^T* wished to be like 
Balbos (149, h)/^ou, such is your temperance,* are the enemy 
of (all) lusts' (jg^')^7^ ^^^^ strive to discover what is"^ expe- 
dient for the whole of Tjrreece/|jf< fear that these arguments are 
not fit for the times^^lre you exposed to these or greater 
dangers ? 

Exercise 32. 

[What is the Lat. for deUgfUful to the eyes.] 
214. Are not your own dangers nearer to you than those ol 
others ? It cannot be denied that he is (a person) of a very oblig- 
ing character. Many persons say that their own dangers are 
nearer to them than those ^*> of-others. They say that they are 
not prone to superstition. Might he'^^ not have spent*** a more 
honourable life ? It was owing to you that our life was not taken 
away. Is philosophy' the best teacher of morals and discipline ? 
[No.] He used to say that Athens was the inventor of all 
branches-of-leaming. It was owing to you that I did not turn out 
an orator. I had rather be like Cato« than Pompey. Even Bal- 
bus is not^ averse to ambition. It cannot be denied that (we) 
have need of a mind averse from superstition. Have we done 
more good or evil ? This is common to me and you. There is no 
one hut understands that these things are common to the rich man 
and the poor man. I cannot hut^^ take these things ingoodpart,^ 
I will strive that nobody** may pity me.s Is wisdom peculiar' to 
you ? [No.] I fear the boy will not be the survivor of his 
father. There is no doubt diat we are come**' into a very de^ 
UgKtful place. 



§ 31. The Dative continued, 

215. All verbs may be followed by a dative of the thing oi 
person to, for, or against which any thing is done. Hence — 



• Begin with * CaJUnwf and qo on with * than Pompey.' 

t ^Iffft even Balbus is.' t Miteret, notmiaereri. See 201, r. 



60 THE DA7IVB. [§31.216*222 

216. The dative follows verbs that signify advantage or dis- 
advantage ; verbs of comparing ; of giving and restoring ; of 
promising and paying ; of contmandin^^ and telling ; of trusting 
and entrusting ; of complying with and opposing ; of threaiening 
and Jei/ig^ (ingry, &;c. 

217. OCr Of these verbs many are transitive, and govern 
the ace. 

(a) With these verbs the ace. expresses the immediate, the 
dat, the remoter object of the verb, 

218. (a) Verbs of eomparing are also followed by the;7rapo9£(iofi«, cuMj inUr, 
and sometimes oc?. 

{b) Of verbs that signify advantage and disadvaatagej jut>o, Uedo, ddeda, 
and qffendo govern the aec. 

219. (c) Of verbs ihat signify commandyii rego and gubemo govern the occ,, 
tempera and modcror the occ. or <2a^. 

220. Tempero and moderor with the da^. are *to moderate,' < rtf- 
»frain within proper limits :' in the occ. ^ to direct ' or ^govern,' 
Temperare ah aliquft. re = * to abstain from.' 

221. (a) Confer nostram longissimam SBtatem cum s&ternitate, 

Compare our longest life with eternity. 

Hominem cum homine comparat^ He compares man 
with man. 

Vitam utriusque inter se conferte, Compare the Eves 
of both of them together, 
{b) Libris me delecto, / amuse myself unth books. Offendit 
neminem, He offends nobody. Hsbc Isedunt oculum, 
These things hurt the eye. Fortuna fortes ad-jtivat, 
Fortune helps the bold. 
(c) Moderari animo, To restrain your feeling. Tempe- 
rare sibi, To restrain oneself. Temperare ab 
injuriSL, To abstain from (committing) injury. 

222. Vocabulary 30. 

(Verbs governing the dat. but followed by no preposition in English.) 
Advise, snadere.! suas, suas. 



k Jubeo takes ace. with in/id. It may be followed by *te/' with wbj. if iue4 
ibsolutely, without the mention of b. person. (Z.) 
i JMbfMTtf (properly) to make a man think ofaomUhing, D.) calb his attentloi 



§ 81. 222.] 

Believe, 

Gominand, 

Please, 

Dispknse, 

Envy, grudge, 

Help, aid, assist, 

Heal, cure. 

Hurt, 

Indulge, 

Favour, 

Marry (of a female), 

Obey, 

Oppose, 

Pardon, 

Persuade, 

Resist, 

Spare, 

Threaten, 
To compare, 



THE PATIVE. 



81 



( credere, credid, credit; (also toMfruai^ 
C with accuB, ofwJiat is entruded), 

impSrSre, iv, at. 

plaedre, placu, placit 

dispIicSre. 

^ inyidere, vid, vis (It may also have tueuB 
( of ihe Ottng grvdged). 
C auziliari ; subvenirej vSn, vent; succur* 
^ rere, curr, curs ; opitulari, flublSyare 
^ and juvare take the cuxu8\ 

med€ri.i 

nOcSre, nocu, nocit. 

indulgere, induls, indult. 

fivere, fiv, faut. 

iiubSre," nups, nupt {properly to veil). 
S parere (of the habU) obedire {siparHeu 
I lar acta). 

repugnare, ay, at. 

ignoscere, ignov, ignot. 

persuadere, suas, suas. 

resistSre, restn, restit. 

parcSre, pCperc et pars, pars et parcit. 
{ minari (with acciu. of ^e thtng thrtcd" 
I ehed), 

comparare ; conferre,^ till, collat. 



to something from virhich he is to draw an inference for himself by his ovm 
reoMn and good aenae. Hortari appeals to his will ; auadert^ to his wnderataanjA' 
ing, Suaderc is to attempt toperauades perauadere is to adviae effectually; tc 
perauade. 

k AuxiUari (to make oneself a man's auxilium\ to increase a person's strength ; 
to help. Juvare- (allied tojuvenia; properly to make youiHtfvl^ powerful^ acttcei 
hence) to help (one who is atriving. D.) ; to facilitate the accomplishment of a 
purpose ; aupport. Opitulari (from opea), to aid with one*s meoju, credit, to- 
aovrcea, a person who is in great need or perU, from which he has no power to 
deliver himself, SuJbvenire (to come-under, i. e., to support) ; to come to the as- 
sistance of a person in difficulty or danger. Succurrere, to run to the assist* 
ance of; which implies a miore pressing danger; to auccour, Sublevare, to 
raise a man up ; to hold him up ; to support :— figuratively, to aUeviate, mitigate, 
UghUn. (R.) AdjUvo and auxilior do not necessarily imply, that the person as- 
sisted needed assistance ; the other verbs do. Adjxwxrt (to help forward) often 
means to increaae; enhance. (C.) 

1 Mederi (to administer a remedy with good effect) relates rather to the sick 
permm, or to the operation of the physician ; aanare, to the diaeaae, or to the 
operation of the medicine. (D .) 

n 7>) &e married is nuptam eaae^ and we find, nuptam esse cum aUquo. 

" Caiiferre (to bring together), cmiendere (to stretch together), componere (to 

4* 



83 THE DATIVE. [§ 32. 223, 22^ 

To be angry with \ ^^^^ ^^^^^ ' succensere (of deep kut^ 

^^ * C ing re8entmen£)t both govern dative. 

To injure, hurt, l»dgre, laes, laes (accua.). 

To delight, amuse, delectare, av, at {aecua.). 

To offend, ofiendSre, fend, fens {accu§.), 

* He threatens me wUh death ' should be 
In Latin, * threatens death to meJ 

Exercise 33. 

[Which interrog. particle is to be used when the anawer would be *no ' 7] 

223. Do not hurt another. It is not every man who can^* com 
mand his mind. Is it easy to restrain (one's) mind ? It is 
the duty of a Christian to leave nothing undone, that*^ he may 
learn to govern his mind'. Ought (you) not to obey the laws 1 
We ought to be angry^ with vices', not with men. He promised 
to abstain from* injury. Venus married Vulcan (Vulcanus), 
It is the duty of a Christian to succour the miserable. They 
promised to abstain from (committing any) injury. I will ask 
him whether he can cure my head. I have left nothing undone '• 
that I might cure my head. It is strange that you should favour 
me. Do you envy (pi.) me or Balbus? I almost think" that I 
have opposed nature in vain. It shows'* a great mind to spare 
the conquered. I warned my son to envy nobody." Compare 
this peace with that war. I have unwillingly offended Caius. 
He threatens me with death every day. Do not grudge me my 
glory. There are some who'®' grudge me my glory. 



§ 32. The Dative continued, 

224. Sum with its compounds, except possum, governs the 
dative. 



place together), all express the bringing of things into jtuctapoaUion for the sake 
of instituting a comparison between thenu From their meaning, one should 
say that eonferre is to compare things, the difference of which will be obvious^ 
as soon as they are brought together: amtenderey to institute a dose comparuon, 
Ramshom says, comparare is to compare things that are exactly eimUar, and 
form, as it were, a pair (par). But Cicero has : * eonferre pugnantia, comparara 
fon/rarto.' 
^ Sueeeru^re, because the anger is lasting. 



§ 32. 225-227.] the dative. 83 

225. Verbs compounded with prepositions, or with the adverbs 
bene, satis, male, generally govern the dative, but with many ex- 
ceptions. 

(a) Most of the verbs compounded with ad, in, inter, 6b^ 
pnB, sub, con, govern the dot. 

(fi) Many of those compounded with ab, ante, de, e, post, pro, 
re, super, govern the dat. 

226. Some are transitive, and govern the accusative only ; 
some govern the dative or the accusative with no difierence of 
meaning ; and very many of them may be followed by the pre* 
positions^ they are compounded with. 

227. VOCABULABY 31. 

To be absent, abesse, abfui. 

To be present, adesse,*! adfui (hence, to stand by). 

To be engaged in, interesse. 

To be in the way, to be prejudi- : 
cial to, ! 

To be -wanting, fail, 

To be before, or at the head o^ to ] 
command. 

To profit, to do good to, to be ad- 
vantageous to, 

To survive, superesse. 

To oppose, obstare, stit, stit. 

To satisfy, satisfacSre, fee, fact. 

To confer benefits on, bene&cSre, fee, fJacU 

To prefer, * anteponSre, ptfsu, ptfsit. 

To reckon one thing qfter. I. e., ) jhlMre, habn, habit. 
as infenor to another, > 



p This is especially the case when the object is no personal circumstance, or 
cannot well be conceived as such, for then the preposition merely expresses a 
local relation. (G.) 

^ Preesent is used as the participle of adesse. PrcBsentem esse expresses an 
immediate audible or vinbU presence ; adesaej presence generally^ within some 
sphere belonging to us. An expected guest adeatj when he is wWUn ourltDolU; 
but to be prceaen*, he must be in the same room with ourselves. Adeese relates 
to a person or thing to which one is near ; inieresse, to an action that one is as- 
sisting at. (D.) 

' Abease is simply to be absent oxaioay; not to be there. Deesse is spoken of a 
thing that is waniingt the presence of it missed, because necessary to the complete* 
ne8so£ a thing. Deficere is the inchoative ofdeesse, asprqficere to prodessee. (D.) 

• Prodesse drops the d before those parts of «um that begii^ with a consonant. 



84 THE DATIVE. [§32. 228, 22» 

Eng, To prefer death to darery. 

£^ ( To reckon slavery after death (pot^oisre aervitutem morti). 
< (Or, as the English.) 

Exercise 34. 

[Obs. ' Better ' when it means ^prtferable,* * more Bat^factory,* should be 
translated by aa^tc^.] 

228/ It is wise" to prefer virtue to all things (transL both 
ways).JiH.e says that he has done good to very many'^He 
says that he was not engaged in the battle. ^At is your business 
to stand by your friends. Jii is not every one who can satisfy the 
wise. /^ It is the duty of a judge to assist {subvenio) an innocent 
man^T'He says that he will nott be wanting to his friends. 
/)^ Who commands the army ?yl will ask who commands the army/ 
/O I warned the boy to prefer nothing** to honourable conduct. 

// Hoto does tt Jiappen that all of you**> prefer death to slavery ? 

/ 2.1^ is better to do good even to the bad, than to be wanting to the 
good/jAll of us"> have been engaged in many' battles,,^/To 
some courage is wanting, to others opportunity. j(/TIe promised 
that he would not be wanting either' to the time or to the oppor- 
tunity.y^ometimes (402) fortune opposes our designs./yThere 
were some who*®' preferred death to slavery. / 



229. Vocabulary 32. 

(Veihs that take the dot. or ace, without difference of meaning.) 
To flatter, fawn upon, adulari, adulatus. 

Lie near, border on, adjacere, jScu, jScit. 

Attend to. consider, \ ""4?^^'^.*)!"'^ ""' ^'^- "» ^'"^ « 

r antecellgre,cellu(i?cry rare); prsestare,^ 

Excel| surpass, am superior to, < preestit, prsstit {dot, beat wUh, ante- 
( cellere). 

jr,^, J def ic5re,« fBc, feet (to revolt from, a, 

I ab; to, ad. Also with aecua.Xjo desert). 



t See note on the second of the Differences of Idiom. 
« Let the verb be the last word in the sentence. 

^ Translate as if it were, * would be wanting neWier to the time nor,' Ac. 
^ So also the other verbs of going before^ or mtrpaeaing: ante- or pre- cederft 
turrere, -venke, vertere, &o. (jpr<ecedere has only the act. In prose. Z.) 
>See227«r. 



f US. 280.] THE DATIVE. 85 

( desperare (also with de which governi 
To despair of, < the abkU.f hence desperatiu, given 

\ over). 
To make sport o^ make merry { illudere, ins, las (also followed by In 

with, mock, C with oceu*. or abUU), 

FaU upon, seize upon (of cares, > mcesBCre,! cessiv, et cess, cessit. 

&c., assailing the mind), > 

Wait for, praestuiari, Stus." 

Rival, emulate, lemulari, itus.' 

Accompany, comitSri, itus. 

f prsebere or prsstSre se for tem (the lattet 
To.h<.wone«lfbr»ve,&c. J lmplying<««<«;thefonnernotnece». 

I sarily so ; prsbere se, to ^low one 

[ self; pnestare se, to prove oneself). 
Grief, dtflor, oris, m. 

Tuscan, Tuscus, a, um. 

Territory, ager, agri, m. 

Exercise 35. 

28^1 will advise the boy to emulate the virtues of his father 
^Attend to what^ (pi.) will be said-JfLet us not flatter the power 
tahifThe Tuscan territory borders on the Roman (territory) 
/*Did not words fail you ? ^ Are the Veientes going to revolt from 
the Romans ? [No.] 7/ almost tJdnk that the Lydians (Lydii) 
are going to revolt from king Cyrus.J[^Does it show" a brave mind 
to despair of one's {suns) fortunes ? ^<3rrief seized upon the whole 
(omnis) Brmy/0 It was owing to yoir* that the treaty between the 
cities of Rome and Lavmium was not renewed^ I cannot but>* 
mock you/^he never beheld Caius without" making merry 
with his folly >y I will ask Balbus whom he is waiting for,>|^here 
were some who mocked the boy. 



y So also irwadere, 

■ Expedare expresses merely a looking for the future in general ; oppertrtf to 
be keeping oneself in readiness for an occurrence! prceatolarij to be in readiness 
10 perform a tervice. (Rid. after Doderlein.) 

» jEmtUtnr is sometimes said to govern the do/, in the sense of to envy; it does 
not however express simple ervoy, but the endeavour to equal or mirpasa a peruynn 
which mayt or may not, be caused by envy. 

i» * fVhxU * is here rel, ( = those things^ wJwh), 



86 \THE DATIVE. [§33. 231-235 

§ 33. The Dative continued. ( Verbs with two constructions.) 

231. (a) X^ono/ circumJo, and several other verbs, take either 
a dative of Xhe person and an accusaUve oi ihB thing; or an accu^ 
sative of the person and an ablative of the thing. 

Verbs of 'fearing take a (to^ of the person /or whom one fears, 

232. (a) Cirdumdat urbem muro ; or^ circumdat niurum urbif 

He surrounds the city with a waU. 
Ciceroni immortalitdtem donavit; or, Ciceronem tm- 
mortaUtate donavit, (The Roman people) conferred 
immortality on Cicero. 

233. Vocabulary 33. 

(Verbs that take dot. of peraon with ace. of thing; or. ace, of person 
with abl, of ffUng.) 
Besprinkle, bespatter, adsperg8re,d spers, spen. 

Surround, circumdSre, dSd, dat. 

Clothe oneself with, put on, induBre, indu, indut. 

r exuBre, ezu, ezut {acciia, of personf ab- 
Strip off, J lot. of thing. With accus. onZy * to 

( throw off,* * put off,' * divest oneself o^* 
To cut off, prevent, obstruct, intercludSre, interclus, interclus. 

(Verbs with a different construction in* different meanings.) 

' cav^re, cav, caut (cavere allquem ;* to 

guard against! be on one^s guard 

To beware, < against ; cavere alicui, to guard ; 

watch over; cavere or sibi cavfire, to 
I be on on^s guard). 

iconsulSie, sulu, suit (consulSre aliqtiem 
to conmdt: consulSre alicui, to consult 
for a person ; to consult his interest : 
consulSre in aliquem, to proceed or 
take measures against a man). 
To wish well to, ciip6re« alicui ; cupSre, cuplv, cupit. 

To provide for the interests of ( prospicere patrise. • 

one*s country, ^ providere patrise. 

c imponSre (aliquid alicui) ; with dat. only 
To lay upon, ^ « to impose upon.' 

f incumbere rei ; incumbere in rem, to ap- 
To lean upon, < ply oneself vigorously; to detote on&' 

t self to. 



•■ So, Impertire or Impertlri. d So, InspergBre. 

« Also cavere ab aliquo, or ab aliqua re. • So, bene, male^ &c. velle alScni 



^ 33. 234, 235.] thb datiyb. 



81 



Crnelly, 
Almost, nearly^ 
Altar, 
Baggage, 
A camp, 
A mound, 
A ditch, 
To prepare, 

The state, 

To take a camp, Ac 

Humanity, human fiseling 

Flight, 



A wall, 



A«fonewaII, 

234. [C. XX.] &In English, 
other substantives, are 
Latin by adjectives. 



crudeliter. 

prope ; p€ne or pene. 
ara,aB,/. 

impedimenta (p2ifr.)properly kUidia 
castra (phir.). 
agger, eris, m. 
fossa, 8B,/. 
parare, iv, it. 
{ respublica, reipublicae, reipubliciB, rem- 
i publicam, dc. 

( exuxre ; i. e. * to strip the enemy (ace.) 
c of their camp ' (ablat.). 
humanitas, atis,/. 
fuga, ae,/. 

murus, i, m. (the general term ; mosnia, 

from munire, is the wall of a city for 

protection against enemies; paries, 

Stis, the wall of a building, allied to 

pars, portio, Ac. ; maceria, allied to 

margo, the wall of an enclosure, e. g. 

of a garden or vinesrard. D.) 

murus lapideus. 

substantives standing before and spoken of 

used adjectivdy, and must be translated into 



Exercise 36. 

235/1 warned Caius whom to guard {sulj,) against J2.Tar- 
quinius Priscus was preparing to surround the citj^ with a stone 
wall -3 There is no one who is not aware that Cicero is watching 
over the state.^He prormsed to consult* my interests. UTle im- 
posed on his own (men) that^ he might the more easily impose 
on the Gauls, o^hey have proceeded cruelly against Caius.T'Ii 
remains that (ut) we should consult our own interests<^ That 
basest (person) has bespattered me with his praises. ^1 have per- 
suaded Caius to devote himself to the state/^The Romans have 
taken the camp of the Gauls./ZlHe hopes to take the baggage of 
the Gauls.^Do not divest yourself of your human-feeling'. 
/o Csesar surrounded his camp with a mound and ditch^I pity the 
old man (who is) now almost given-over //I will warn Balbus not 
to throw off his human-feeling/ fconsult for yourselves : provide 
for the interests of your country. 



88 THB DATIVE. [§ 34. 236-24] 

§ 34. Verbs thai take a second Dative, 

286. Sum, with several other verbs, may govern two datives. 

(a. 5.) The second dative expieaseB the purpose or some similar notion 
It is the common construction to express the purpose for which a man 
comesj or sendt another. 

237. (c) A second dative often stands after sum, where toe 
should use the nominative. Such verbs as proves, serves, &c. 
may often be translated by sum with the dative ; and an adjective 
after 'to he' may often be translated into Latin by the dot. of a 
substantive. 

238. (d) The English verb ' have ' may often be translated by 

sum with a dative.' 

{Ejig.) I have a hat. I have two hats. 

(Lot.) There w a hat to me. There are two hats to me. 

It is obvious that the ace, zfiex^have* will be the nam, before *tobef 
the nom, before *^i?e,* the dot, after *to 6c.' 

239. (c) In * eat mihi nomen,^ the name is either in the nom., the cforf., or 
(less commonly) the gen. 

The construction with the dai, is even more common (in the case of 
Raman names) than the regular construction with the nom,. It is an 
instance of attraction, the name being attracted into the case of 
mihi, (K.) 

240. if) The dative of a personal pronoun is often used to point out, in an 
animated way, the interest of the speaker, or the person addressed, in 
what is said. 

241. (a) Paus^Jiias, rex Laeedsemoniorum, venit Atticis aux- 

ilio, Pausardas, king of the Lacedcsmordans, came 

to the assistance of the Athenians, 
{h) Pericles agros suos dono, reipublicae dedit, Pericles 

gave his estates as a present to the state, 
(c) Magna mob est hominibus avaritia, Acarice is a great 

evil {or, very hurtful) to men. 
Ipse sibi odio erit, He wiU he odious {or, an object of 

dislike) to himself, 
{dy Fuere Lydiis multi ante Croesum reges. The Lydiant 

had many kings hefore Croesus. 
(c) C. Marcius, cui cognomen postea Coriolana fuit, Caiua 



f So •con ft«re* may be translated by 'poiut «m.* 



( 84. i43.] THE DATIVE. 8fl 

MarciuSf whose surname was afterwards Coriola* 
niLs. — Fonti nomen Arethusa est, The name of tAd 
fountain is Arethusa. (Nomen Mercurii est mihi, 
My name is Mercury.) 
(/) At tibi repente paucis post diebus venit ad me 
Caninius, But, behold, a few days afterwards 
Caninius comes to me, 

242. VOCABULAEY 34. 

(Verbs that are often followed by /too datiye&) 
(1) With auxiUo (assistance). 
Come, Tenire, vfin, vent. 

Send, mittSre, mis, n^ss. 

Set out, - proficisci, profectus. 

(2) With culpcBf vUiOf crimini. 
To impute as a fault, culpae dare, dSd, dat (with aee. of thing). 

To reckon as a fault, turn into a ) vitio t vertSre, vert, vers (with aee. of 

&ult, ) thing). ^ 

@) To give as a present, dono or muneri,h dare (with aee. of thing) 

To be a hindrance, impedimento esse. 

To be a reproach, to be disgraceful, opprobrioi esse. 
To be hateful, odio esse. 

To be detrimental, detrimento esse. 

To be an honour, to be honourable, honori esse. 
To be very advantageous, magnsB utilitati esse. 

To mean k \ "^'^ velle; mihi tibi, &c., to be used ac- 

' c cording to the person meant. 

To throw himself at any body's ( sei ad alicujus pedes, or alicui ad pedes 

feet, c projicgre, j6c, ject 



f VUium is any^io, hUmiah^ otfavU; whatever makes a i\Ang imperfoei. 
It may therefore be found in (hinge as well as in actions and persons. Culpa 
la favli! whatever is hlamable; hence vitium may be used for culpti, but culpa 
not always for vitium. Scelus always implies a wicked intention; culpa not al- 
ways, but often only a want of prudence^ canUion^ &c. 

k Aprcemium is given to reward^ with reference to the m^erit of the receiver : 
B donum^ to produce Joy, with reference to the gratuitousness of the gift : a 
munusy to express affection or favour^ with reference to the seniimenJt of the 
giver. (D.) 

I JPrSbrum is 'what a person may be reproached with:' opprobrium is *what 
he is (or has been) reproached with ;' ' a reproach * actually made. (D.) 

k That is, not uhat on^s meaning w, but what one means by such conduct. 

I Projieere se alicui ad pedesj which Erebs formerly objected to, ie quits 
correct : (See Cic. Sest. 11 ; Ctss. B. G. 1, 31.) 



90 THB ACCUSATIVE. [^ 35. 24^245 

iC. vu.]i:jr I What is sometimes used for *how* (quam) :. sometimes for 
*hawgre(U* (quantus). 



Exercise 37. 



A 



243- He promises to come* to the assistance of the Helvetii. 
JZ, Timotheus set out to the assistance of Ariobarzanes.">^/K was 
dwing to you, that I did not throw myself at Caesar's feet.^t is 
the part of a wise man always to fear for himself. i^There is no 
doubt that (86) he is going to consult the interests'' of Caius.^ I 
fear that these things will nof prove an honour to you. y^I don't 
understand what he means (by it).j It is very honourable* to 
you, to have been engaged in such*®> a battle. 4^There is no doubt 
that superstition ought to be a reproach to a man/^yPhey turn my 
greatest {see Index L) praise into a fault^/I hope that men will 
understand howp odious cruelty is to all men/jU will warn Caius 
howp advantageous it is to keep one's word/jHe says that he has 
not many slaves/^f! will ask them what they mean^^H will not 
object (87. 91.) to their imputing this to me a« a fauJt./gRe pro- 
mised' to give them the island of Lemnos as a present/7i/Lighi 
you not have brought"* a charge of immorality against Caius 1^ 



§ 35. The Accusative. 

244. (a) Many intransitive verbs become transitive when com. 
pounded with a preposition that governs the accusative ; and a 
few when compounded with a preposition that governs the abla- 
tive. 

Of these, those that are not deponent hare generally a passive voioe.^ 

245. (h) Neuter verbs may take a substantive of kindred 
meaning or origin in the accusative ; and verbs of tasttng or 
fmelUng of take the thing in the accusative. 



B Part, in rua with the proper tense of wm, 

• Say : 'It is for a great honour.' 

p < How* TAMSt be translated by qtiantuB, 

4 With many of them the preposition is often repeated; and with others the 



§ 35. 246-249.] teb accusative. 91 

246. (c) Other neuters are used transitively to express a tran- 
mtwe notion combined with their own proper notion. 

Thus, sUire (to thirst) =: * to duirt as a tfUrwty man desires ;' harrert 
= * to/ear, and express my fear hy shuddering i* properare mortem, 
'to cause d^th, and to cause it in Aotfto.'— This figurative use of neuter 
verbs is common to all languages. 

247. It has been already mentioned that the accusative of neuter pro- 
nouns is found with verbs, with which the accusative of a substantive 
would be wholly inadmissible. 

248. (a) Pythagdras Persarum Magos adiit, Pythagoras vis* 

ited the Persian magi, 
Pythagdras multas regiOnes barbarOrum pgdibus 

obiit,' Pythagoras travelled over many countries oj 

the barbarians on foot, 
Postumia tua me convenit, Your Postumia has been 

with me, 

(b) Somnlare somnium, To dream a dream, Servire 

servitutem, To suffer a slavery ; to be a slave, 
Ceram 6lere, To smeU of wax, 

(c) Sitire honOres, To thirst for honours. 

Idem gloriatur, He makes the same boast. Idem pec- 
cat, He commits the same sin, Multa peccat, He 
commUs many sins, 

^4^. Vocabulary 35. 

{TVansiiioe compounds of IntransUwe Verbs.) 

Attack, aggredi, lor, aggressus. 

Visit, adire,* adii, adxtum. 

To enter into a partnership, coire societatem; coeo.t 

To stir out of the city \ ^^" (^^^ ^"^'> ""^ ^^<^^re, cess, 

' C cess. 



oU. is more common than the aoc, ; excedere and egredi, in their proper mean- 
ing of going outi should be followed by e or the oft/. But Livy has urtem 
ereedere, 
» Ob in o6«To, Ac, seems to De an abbreviation of amb, d/i^f. (D.) 
• "PltJfrc is, to pay a visit as a, friend or companion; adire, to visit on 6im- 
TusSf or in consequence of some iocmi: convenire^ to visit, on business or noti 
sahdare, to pay a complimentary visit. (D.) 
» The compounds of eo have generally perf. ii, not vou 



02 THE ACCUSATIVE. [§ 35. 250 

To exceed the bounds of mode- 



7^' 



. modum excedSre. 
ration, > 

To die, mortem obire, obii, obitumt obeo. 
To caU upon; haTe an intenrtew j eonvSnlre, vgn, vent. 

with ; hence, to speak to, S 

To come to a determinaUon ; to j consilium inire. 

adopt a resolution, ) 

To encounter death, mortem oppStSre, petivi, petii, petit." 

To smell of, dlSre, olu ci olev, olit ei olet. 

To have a strong smell of; to ) ^edblSre.^ 

smack of, i 

To taste of (i. e. have taste or C sapSre, io (petf. rarCf sapiv U sapu 

flavor of), c sapit). 

To thirst for, sitire, iv. It. 

To boast o^ gloriari, atus. 

To grieve for, dslere, dolu, dolit. 

To sail past or along, praetervehi, vectus. 

Hardly any body, nemo f^re (' almost nobody*). 

Coast, ora, se,/. 

Speech, oratio, 5nis,/. 

- Antiquity, antiquitas, atis,/. 

Citizens, civis, m. et/. 

Wonderful, mlrus, a, um. 

To dream, somniare, av, at ; somnium, ' dream. 

Herb, herba, bb,/. 

Honey, mel, mellis, n. 

Exercise 38. 

[How must the infin. be .translated after to perntade 7] 
250./lt cannot be denied that you have dreamt a wonderful 
dream. ^He publighed-a-proclamation that nobody** should stir 
from the city. 3 I won't object to your entering into a partner- 
ship (87. 91) with me.')/^^ave you entered into a partnership 
with Balbus or with Caius iJTie has commissioned me to have 
an interview with Csesar.^The honey (pi.) smells of that herb. 
is whole speech smacks of antiquity. fl)oes not Caius's speech 



" Obire mortem, or diem aupremum (for which obire is used with the aoc 
emitted), is only spoken of a natural death, which the mortem obiene simply 
sufers ; oppetere mortem is, if not to seek it, yet at least to meet it withJlrmneM 
and a disregard of life. (D.) 

▼ Re has in many compounds the meaning oi forth; thus redoll;ire^ <to 
smell forth ;' * to emit a smell.' It thus becomes a strengthening prefix : Dbdat- 
Ida thinks that, aa mUh^ H is possibly the Greek i^ 



§ 36. 251-254.] t^e accusative. 08 

smack of Athens ? y^It is the duty of a good citizen to encounter 
death itself for the state./^Ought he not to have encountered *•> 
death for the state ?y^Marcellus sailed past the coast of Sicily 
(iStciZMi)./ZThree hundred of us»*> have come to this determi- 
Dation./JTAer6 is Jiardly any body who has not (44, (3) ) come 
to this determinationy</I fear he will not" choose to enter into 
a partnership with meVJl/ear he toill enter into a partnership 
with Caius./ipMay a Christian thirst' for honours ?/yHe makes 
the same boast as«) Cicero//! cannot but*' grieve far the death 
of Hortensiusv/^lt is a difficult (matter) to put off all (one's) 
human-feeling/^ ^Both you and Balbus have exceeded the bounds 
of moderation.^/rhere are some who exceed the bounds of 
moderation. 



§ 36. The Accusative continued. 

251. (a) Verbs of askings teaching, and concealing, may have 
two accusatives, one of the person and another of the thing. 

252. But very frequently (and with some verbs always) either 
the person or the thing is governed by a preposition. 

Obs. Thus doceo, to give information^ prefers the ablative with de. 
After petOj and sometimes after the other verbs of beggings the person 
is put in the obL with a : and after rogOj interrdgo^ (&c., the fMng often 
stands in the cM. with de. 

253. (c) Transitive verbs that take two nominatives in the pas- 
sive, take two accusatives in the active, one being in a sort of 
apposition to the other. 

The apposition accusative completes the meaning of the verb, which 
cannot form a complete predicate by itself. 

Such verbs are verbs of catting^ appointing to an office, eonsideringj 
Ac, together ynthfaeiot effieio^ reddOj &c. 

The second accusative is often an adjective. 

254. (d) With fqcio and efficio a sentence with ut is often found 

instead of the second accusative ; and when the accusative of the 

first veri represents the same person or thing as the nom. of the 

second, it is generally omitted. 

(Eng,) The sun makes all things (to) Nourish. 
{Lot.) The sun makes that all things should flourish. 



94 THE ACcusATjVE. [§ 36. 255-257 

(Eng.) He had Lysis for (or, as) his master. 

{Lai.) He had Lysis his master ( = (u his master). 

255. [C. XXII.] (Kr * For ' and « as ' are to be untranslated^ 
when the noun that follows can be placed in apposition to another 
noun in the sentence. 

256. (a) Racilius me primum sentenUam rogdvit, Racilius asked 

me my opinion Jirst. 
(Verres) parentes preiium pro sepulturd. liberiim pas- 

cehat, Verres used to demand of parents a payment 

for the burial of their children,. 
Quis musicam docuit Epaminondam ? Who taught 

Epaminondas music ? 
Nihil nos celat, He conceals nothing from us. 
(h) Socrates totius mundi se incolam et civem arbitrabatur, 

Socrates used to consider himself an inhabitant and 

citizen of the whole world. 
(c) Mesopotamam fertilem efficit Euphrates, The Eu- 
phrates makes Mesopotamia fertile. 
Homines ccecos reddit cupiditas et avaritia, Desire and 

avarice render men blind. 
(rf) Fac ut sciam,^ or (with ut omitted) fac sciam, Let me 

know. 
Temperantia sedat appetitiones, et ^dt, ut hcB rectse 

ratiOni pareant, Temperance quiets the appetites, and 

causes them to obey right reason. 

257 » VOCABULAEY 36 . 

Ask, rtfgare,* Sv, at. 

g^ J petSre, petiv, petii, petit {person to be 

' t governed by ab.). 



V In comic writers the ace. is often expressed: *Eum ita. faciemtu, ut quod 
viderit, non viderit.' <Ego tefaaam^ ut miser sis.' *Neque potui Vmorem 
/aeercj ut propitiaesaet mihi.' 

* Petgre and rogSre are the most general expressions of a vM> to obtaitij 
whether in the way of a request or a demand ; thus standing between posci^e and 
orarej but somewhat nearer to orSre. Of the two, rogart relates immediately 
to the person applied to, peters to the favour asked. PostuUtrt and exXgSre 
denote a simple demand (without any accessory notion to strengthen it) as a 
quiet declaration of the vnU : but in postuLare the stress lies on the wisk and wU 
of the person making the demand •, in exigere on the Ugal obUgaHon of the per- 



6. 268.] 


THE 


ACCUSATIVE. 90 


CUm, requirej 


, demand, 


< postulare, ay, at; p(Mc8ie, ;)opotc pos- 
c cxt;flagitare, av, it. 


Beseech, 




obsecrare. It, at. 


Pray, 




orare, av, at. 


Abjure, 




obtestarijtatUB. 


Teach, 




dtfcgre, docu, doct. 


TJnteach, 




dedttcSre. 


Conceal, 




celare, av, at 



To teach Socrates to play on the ^ Soeratem f idibus doc6re (L e. 'to 
lyre, c , teach him with the strings'). 

To think = to imagine, putare, av, at. 

To think, or to be of opinion = ( censere^ (the word for deiitering an 
to deliver it as my opinion, I opinion in Vu senatt-Jumae), 

Tothink= toieckon,judge,con- ( «^^^=5''^«;'«Tvr2' 
., I- o » . judgment after a valuation ;* arbitrari, 

( * to decide as an arbiter.* 
To think, as opposed to knowj oplnari, atus. 
Not only, but also. \ °^^ solum-sed etiam ; or non solum 

c — verum etiam. 
To give much information about, multa docere de {the person in occub.). 
Again and again =: most earnestly, etiam atque etiam. 
Experience, usus, fis, m. 

Just ^ fjEor, right, equitable, aequtts, a, um. 

Discourse, sermo, onis, m. 

Exercise 39. 

258yExperience, the best master, has taught me many^ things. 
J^Who taught you to play upon the lyre ?S I ^^ yo^' (thee) again 
and again tiot to desert me.// 1 will not conceal from you the dis. 
course of Titus Ampiu8.cn feyp that he is preparing^* to conceal 
those things from his parents. ^He had warned Caius not to con- 
ceal any thing^^ from his parents'.^ These things I not only ask 
of you, but also demand. i'Who taught you those^ (bad) manners 
(of yours) ?7I will unteach you those manners (of yours)y<^he 
Gauls have given me much information about their own affairs. 



son against whom it is made. Poae'^e and Jhgitare denote an empJuUie de* 
mand : but the poscens only demands in a decided manner, from a feeling of 
right or power, the Jlagitana with pauum and impetuosity under the influence 
of a vehement desire. (D.) ^QncQjlagiUxre may be ' to demand importunately t* 
to importune.* 

X Censure is followed by the aec, with infin, ; or, if the opinion Is given to be 
foUowedi by tU with the mij, ; but the u< is often omitted. 

y Jote is the demonstrative of the second person ' that qf youv? 



96 THE ABLATIVE. [§ 37. 259-261. 

/I I ftar that you will not consider yourselves citizens of the whole 
world,/2^eligion wiU make us obey the laws of virtue-^He 
thought* it just, that citizens (ace.) should^' spare citizens (p. 14, 
15, a)^c/rheie is hardly any body but thinks it iust that you 
should spare me. 
259. Vocabulary 37. 

(Impersonals vdth aec,) 
It escapes me, me fugit, falUt ; prsterit* 

Unless I am mistaken, nisi me £EiIlit. 

It is becoming, dScet. 

It is imbecoming, dedScet. 

{Eng.) Jt x8 becoming (or unbecoming) to (or in) an orator to be angry. 
(Lot.) Jt becomes (or miAeseema) an orator to be angry. 

Exercise 40. 

[Of aandre and med^ri, which relates principally to the skill of the 
ph/ncian? (222,1.)] 
/260. -Three hundred of us,^^ unless I am mistaken, survive. 
^ I do not forget (it does not escape me) to how many dangers we 
are exposed. 3 You, such is your temperance,^ have learned to rule 
your mind. ^ Jit is not every one who can^^ cure the mind. Ji will 
ask Caius, whether he can cure the mind. ^ All of us not only 
ask you for peace', but even demand it (of you). Tit is your duty 
to succour the citizens now almost despaired ou^f^lt becomes a 
wise man not to be disturbed in adversity.^ li is becoming to a 
boy to hear much, to speak liitle/t>\\. is not unbecoming in an 
orator to pretend' to be angry.?^ It does not escape me, haw odi- 
ous^ ^ impiety is to the good. 



XI. 

§ 37. The Ablative. 

261. (a) The ablative expresses th^ means or instrument, and 
often the cause or manner. 



> Censebat. Cen$9re should be used when the opinion is the expre»aian of a 
uttUd eonvictum, 

» lAUet me and UUet mxhi, though they occur* in Juftin^ Pliny ^ <ftc., should be 
avoided. Vc.) 



$ 87. 362-266.] the ablatiys. 97 

262. (h) The price for which a thing is bought, ioid, valued^ or 
done, is put in the i^blative, 

263. (c) The adjectives magno, parvo, Ajc, are generally put 
by themselves, the substantive pretio being understood. 

264. But some of these adjectives often stand alone in the gem* 
tive, especially after verbs of valuing at such a price, with which 
this is the regular construction. 

(cQ TanH and quanti (with their compounds), phtriMf mindruj always stand 
in the genitive. With verbs of valuingy magni, parti, maxxmi, minimif 
phaimiy also stand in the gen, ; but magno, permagnoj and parvo, are 
found in the abL also with <B8timare. With verbs of price, magnOf per- 
magna, parvo, mimmo, plurimo, ntmto, vili, stand in the abSative. 
{e) The siibstantives,.;foon, nauei, tUhxli, piH, &c., also stand in the gen, 
after verbs of valuing. 

^:^MuUi } ^ n^jt ^ged, but j ^«^ 
Majorie^ > iplurw, 

865. (a) Terra vestlta est fioribus, herbis, arboribus, frugibus, 
The earth is clothed with flowers, herbs, trees, 
fruits. 
Comibus tauri se tutantur. Bulls defend themselves 
with their horns. 

(b) Viginti talentis unam oratiOnem Isocrates vendidit, 

Isocrates sold one oration for twenty talents. 

(c) VenditOri expedit rem venire quam plurimo, It is for 

the interest of the seller that the thing should be sold 
for as high a price as possible. 

(d) Te quotidie pluris facioy I value you more every day, 
{e) Totam rempublicam flood non facere. Not to care a 

lock of wool (or, as we should say, a straw, or 
rush) for the whole state. 

266. Vocabulary 38. 

To value, SBstimare, av, at. 

To hold cheap, parvi pendSre ; pSpend, pens, 

n, _^ $ Btare, stet ; or constare (with dot, ol 

To sell (intrans.) ; to be sold, venire,^ eo, venlv, and venu, 



bThe passage in Phsdrus, *Multo majorie alapn mecum veneunt/ Is pei^ 
haps the only instance, t (B.) 
VSiiire == venum ire, to go to oaie, from an old substaotlve t9iwi. So^ ve- 

5 



98 THE ABLATIVE. [6 37. 307, 

To Bell, vendere, vendid, Tendit. 

To buy, emSre, em, empt. 

More highly, for more, dearer, pluris. 
For less, minoris. 

For as much— as, tanti— quantl. 

For just as much as ; for no mow ) tantldem-quanti 

For how much, quanti ? 

Too dear, nimio. 

To reckon or think nothing o^ nihili fiu^re. 

Not to care a straw for, \ ^<^^*^\ ^^^7 (lUeraUy to make, I. e. 

Not to care that for it, non hujus facSre. 

Peck, mtfdius, i, m. 

Wheat, tritlcum, i,n. 

Sesterce,d sestertius, i, m. 

Merchant; mercator, oris, m. 

(Eng.) To cost a person much (or dear). 
{Lot.) To stand to a person at much. 
[G. zxiii.] f^ When oiUf <tro, &c., mean orUf two, &c., apiece or Jar tach, they 
must be translated by the dUtrHnUive numerals, eing^di, bint, Ac. 

Exercise 4:1. 

^ 267. That victory cost the Carthaginians {P<Eni) much blood. 

^ It cannot be denied that that victory cost us much blood. jfMer- 
chants do not sell for no more than they bought (at). VHe says 
that he does not care a straw for my glory. *^ I will ask him for 
how much he bought these things.^ I sell my (goods) for as much 
as Caius./ The peck of wheat was at iwo- sesterces.^ For how 
much does wheat sell ?^Epicurus thinks nothing of painy OThere 
is hardly any_body«« who does not (44, (3) ) hold his own things 
cheap.// 1 do not care that for youjJMy life is valued at ten' 
asses a day. K^ It is foolish to hold one's own (blessings) cheap. 

/(/He says that I have bought these things too dear ./Merchants 
never sell for less than they bought (at)./tf will ask what*" com 
is selling for. 



nun-dSre, ven-dSress venum dSre. Tacitus has posUa v^noy exposed for sale 
Vefuo is conjugated like 6o, having venii rather than vmivi for per/I, and impeif. 
ttnitham as well as vembam. No imperat. ; no supines, gerunds or participles. 

< A JEtoman coin, worth about three and a half cents Federal money A thoih 
tand segtertii made one setterHum^ which wluei a turn, not a com, 

* I>«ni8 lx| diem assibus. 



^ 38. 268-ti78.] the ablative. OU 

^ 38. The Ablative continued. 

268. (a) Verbs of abounding, JUUng, loading, dec, and their 
opposites, such as verbs of wanting, depriving of, emptying qf^ 
govern the ablative. 

269. (6) But of these ^eo and indtgeo (especially the latter) govern the geni' 
tire also. 

270. (c) Some verbs of freeing from, removing from, differing 
from, being at a distance from, &c., are sometimes followed by the 
ablaUve, but generally (in prose) by dk preposition.^ 

271. (d) Fungor, fruor, utor (with their compounds), potior, 
vescory dignor, ghrior, take the ablative : as does also supersedeo. 

But potior takes the genitive^ when it means *to obtain oovereign 
power over,* 

272. (a) Pericles fiorebat omni genere virtutis, Pericles was 

eminent in every kind of virtue (i. e. admirable 
quality). 

(b) Res maxime necessarise non tam artis indigent, quam 

laboris. The most necessary things do not require 
skill so much as labour. 

(c) Athenienses beUo Uberantur, The Athenians ^ggg^ res- 

cued from the (threatened) war. 
Leva me hoc onere. Relieve me from this burden. 

(d) DivitOsj nobilitate, viribus, multi m&le utuntur, Many 

men make a bad use of riches, noble birth, (and) 
strength. 
A ugustus Alexandria brevi potUus est, Augustus soon 
gained possession of Alexandria. 

273. VOCABULAEY 39. 

(Verbs governing the ablative.) 
To deprive of, privare, av, at. 

To bereave of, deprive of, orbare, fiv, at. 

To rob of (by open violence as an > ^^^g j- ^^ 

enemy), > 

To be without \ car6re,h carui d cassus sum, carit ei 

I casB. 



f With dtfendirey «x«ote?r«, exonerarcj levSre, the ablative alone is to be pre- 
ferred. (Z.) 
f ExpildreyCompH&rtBXQ * to plunder ^^ as robbers, 
b ^^amrt is simply * ^ he withmU :' eg9re is < to need, to wmti^ indSgdre It * to 



100 THE ABLATIVE. [§38. 273. 

To Stand In need oi; need, re- ( CgSre (abUU. or gm.) or indigSre {vMiih 
quire, i it gtronger) egCre, egui, — . 



To use, 


iiti, usus. 




fungi, functus; perfungi (strmtger). 


To eiyoy, 


fhil, fruitus, and fructus. 


To feed on, live on, eat, 


vescik (no peif.). 


To boast 0^ 


J gloriari; also foUowed by Aj' and by 
l *vn* when itsignifies 'toghryin.* 






idem gloriari. 




niti, nisus and nlzus ; in aliquo nltl, is 


To rest or lean upon, 


^ *to lean on a person for support, 


1 thai ia,* to rest with' in the sense of 




I depending upon hia exertumtf &o 


To rejoice. 


gaudere, gavlsus. 


Medicine, 


medif^na,! bb, /. 


Milk, 


lac, lacUs, n. 


Flesh, 


caro, carnis,/. 


Cheese, 


caseus, i, m. 


Fever, 


febris, is,/, (abl. i.). 


Quite, 


plane. 


Debt, 


(aes alienum, another man's money; 
I ses esris, n. copper. 


A heavy debt. 


ma£[num ees alienum. 


Severity (of a disease), 


gravitas, atis,/. 


^Disease, 


morbus, i, m. 


Perversely, 


perverse. 


(fJnjT.) Make a bad 


(perverse, Ac.) use of it. 


(Lai ) Use ill (perversely^ <&c.) 



/eel that I want ;' the in expressing intra animum. With reference to an advan- 
tage desired, car9re is simply, < to be without a desirable good,' egere^ * to be 
without an indispenuble good.' (D.) This seems to be the proper limitation of 
Cicero's definition ; that corertf is * egSre eo quod hab^e velis,' 

I Also with a, ab, 

k Vesei is the most general expression for supporting life by food, including 
edere and bibere as the actions of men, pasci and potSre as the actions of beasts. 
When vesci relates, as it generally does, to eating, it denotes any manner of eat- 
ing, chewing, swallowing, <&c. : whereas edere, comedgre supposes the manner in 
which a man eats, by biting and chewing. In vesci the principal notion is the 
purpose of eating, the support of life ; in edere, the means by which life is sup- 
ported, the action of eating. (D.) 

1 MedicameatuM or medicamen is a medicine with reference to its material 
substance, oBitis prepared by an apothecary : m^icina, with reference to its healr 
ing power, as it is prescribed by aphysicianf remedium is a preventive, a remedy 
against an impending eviL (X>»\ 



§38. 274-276.] the ablative. 101 

Exercise 42. 

[Should 'every day^ be translated by tndiet, or by quotidie^ when there 
is noprogreaewe increate from one day to another 7] 

274./ Do not deprive another of his praise^. Z^ rejoice that 

you are quite without fever. J The body, to he (ut) in good health, 

requires many things.»>,^^ature herself admonishes us every 

day how few things we require^^Tle promised to set me free from 

my debt. /Have I not set you free from a heavy debt ? 7 Many 

men make a perverse use of reason. Jf They live on milk, cheese, 

flesh. ^It was owing to you*^ that I was not bereaved of my 

children./|^M/ a Utile more^^ and Caius would have been bereaved 

of his children.//// i^ not every man who can think nothing of 

pain/ Jit is a disgraceful thing (for a man) to boast of his vices. 

/3May I not make the same boast as Cyrus Vifir will exhort Caius 

to discharge (75) all the duties of life^^Tiie safety of the state 

depends upon you aldne (in te uno)/^o men alone feed on flesh ? 

[No.]/? The severity of disease makes us require** medicine 

(gen.y 



275. The manner or catise, and any word that restricts the 
meaning of another to a particular part of a thing spoken of, is 
put in the ablative. 

276. Vocabulary 40. 

Lame of one foot, claudus altgro pSde. 

( A4jectiyes* followed by the dbl) 

Worthy, deserving o^ dignua, a, urn. 

Unworthy, indignua,™ a,mn. 

Banished, extorris, is, com, gend. (from ex terrS) ° 

Relying on, frStus, a, um. 

Contented, contentus, a, mn. 

Endued with, pneditus, a, mn. 

To deserve, dignus, mn, &c., esse, 

Censmre, reprehensio, Onis,/. 



* Adjectives signifying want orjreedomfrom (vacuus, Iiber, t&c), take the abL 
or the abL with a, ab, 
^Digmts Qxidindigma are (less commonly) followed by Ihegenitive, 
B Profngua is one who has fled from his country; exsul and extonia impl> 
that the person is under •en/ence of banishment. Extorria relates rather to the 
miaery of the exile; exaut^ to his pwiiahmcni and diagrace. (D.) 



103 THE VOCATIVE. [§ 39. 277, 278. 

Punishment, pcsna, »,/. 

Severe (of punishment, <&c.), graTis, is, e. 

Motion, mOtus, us, m. (what declens. 1 why T) 

Reality, re8,rei,/. 

Name, n5men, xnis, n. 

(Eng.) He deseiYea to beloved.^ 

{Lot.) He is a deserving (person) who should be loved (dignus est 
qui camtur), 

{Eng.) To inflict punishment on a person. 

{Lot.) To affect ( = 9mO a man with punishment (aliquem 
pcenft afficere). 

Exercise 43. 

277.XAre they deserving of praise', who have done these 
things ? [No.]2p.I think this man deserving not of censure only, 
but also of punishment. 5 These things are unworthy of msM 1 
cannot hut ihink^* these things unworthy of us^fHe has threat- 
ened me toith*^ severe punishment^I have said this (pL), relying on 
your compassion. ^T^ere is no doubt that he will inflict a severe 
punishment upon you. ^ Nature is contented with a little.^ Age- 
silaus was lame of one fooy^j Had you rather be blind, or lame 
of one foot V/ The mind is endued with perpetual motion/ i-ii 
cannot he doubted that the mind is endued with perpetual motion. 
/^ It cannot he denied that he sold his country for gold/^He is an 
orator not in reality but in namey'.fHe is a boy in age./^He 
deserves to be praised by a\\/7It is not every one who can heal 
the diseases of the mind/>r Itpannot be denied that he is banished 
from his country ^^iThere are some who'*' deny that these things 
are unworthy of us. 



XII. 

§ 39. The Vocative. {Attraction of the Vocahve.) 

278. Sometimes, in poetry, a vocative is used instead of a nomi« 
native after the verb.' 

• So, he doeenot deserve to be, Ac, * indignus est, qui,* Ac. 

P Examples in poetry are MahUme paler, oeu Jane UbenHus oudiB. (Hor.> 
T\me tile OdryeuB Phineua rex indytus orce 7 7\t Pha^ comes, et nostro dilecte 
parenii? (Yal. Flac.^ So in Greeli 8X0 uKu^ptyiwoio I (Theocr.) (K.) 



( 39. 279-281.J the vocative. 108 

Another vocative has generally preceded, and this second vocative la 
aUr acted into agreement with it ; but Qometlmes it merely refers to a 
nominative of the tecond person. 

(a) The phrase ^rnacU virtute esto I* (a blesHng on your vahur! or, 
good luck to your valovH) is probably an example of this construction, 
ituute being the vocative of maetut from mag-er^ (to increase, enrich, 
Ac). The only objection to this explanation is Livy's adoerhicA use 
of wMte with the infinitive. (See example : juberem mactt virtute 
ei«.) (K.) 

279. (5) On the other hand, a nominative sometimes stands in 
apposition to a vocative, or where a vocative would be the regular 
construction. 

This is especially the case with solua^ uaus^ primuf. 

280. (a) Made virtute esto ! A blessing (m your valour ! or, 

^ Go on in your valour P 
MacH virtute, milites Romani, este ! Oood lucky O 

Roman soldiers ^ to your valour ! 
Juberem maeie virtute esse^ &c. 1 unmld say, a bless- 

ing on your valour ! &c. 
{b) Audi tu, populus Albanus ! Listen^ ye people oj 

Alba! 
Salve primus omnium parens patriae appellate ! Hail 

thou, the very first who was ever called the father 

of his country ! 

281. VOCABULAKY 41. 

Dutiful affection, piety ' pietas, atis, /. 

Towards, In (with aecus.), 

e ave, salve* {imperaiivea of the 2d conju- 
Hail, farewell! 3 gation— vale, valeto is only fiare- 

C weUI). 

The toga,* J ^^'S^ ®» f' (^ opposed to the wtli- 

C tary cloak^ it means the cvoU gown). 

4 The root mag (the Greek /icy) of this obsolete verb is still found in magmu 
and mactdre (to present with ; to honour). (D.) 

' PietaaiB dutiful of ection (towards the godSf one's parents^ relationsy country^ 
and even bentfactors), arising from a naturalfeeling : cariiaa (properly their dear- 
nen to us) is founded on reason and a/u«< appreciation of their value. 

* That'ove was a mornings salve an evening salutation, does not appear to be 
established. Suetonius makes salve the morning^ and vale the evening saluta- 
Uon. (See Habicht.) 

t A woollen upper garment, covering the whole body, and forming the ordi- 
nary dress of a Roman citizen. It was tL^ovnng robe, covering the left am^ 
ont leaving the right at liberty. 



104 THE PASSIVE. [§ 40, 283-2b0l 

rtriumphus, i, m. (a puUio prooesfdoa 
A triumph, j granted by a decree of the senate to a 

^ victorious general). 
To gain a triumph for . ylctory ? j^ or ex GalUs triumphare. 

mrer the Gauls, > 

To lead the captives in triumph, captivos per triumphum ducgre. 
People," ptfpulus, i, m. (the vocal, not in use!. 

Exercise 44. 

/ 282. A blessing on thy valour, Titus Manlius, and^ on thy 
piety towards thy father and thy country ! 2HaiI thou, the first 
who has deserved a triumph in a civil gown !^ Hear, O people 
of Rome li/A blessing, O citizens, on your dutiful-affection , 
towards your country !^J*A blessing, O boy, on your diligence ! 
You, such is your diUgence,^^ will soon finish the business. "7 His 
diligence is as great as'^ his abilities^ It cannot be deniea that 
(86) his diligence is as great as his ability .'^f There is no doubt 
that he told many falsehoods about his age, thcU (63) he might 
appear younger (than he is)^^It cannot be denied that he told 
many &lsehoods, that he might not be banished// I ask you again 
and again to succour (75) me/^Jhere were some who*"' denied 
that I had deserved a triumph. 



XIII. 
§ 40. The Passive Voice. 

aB3. (a) The ogiTit after a passive verb (which is regvljoiy under ^ gov- 
ernment of a or ah) is sometimes put in the daJtwe^ especially in poetry, 
and after the partiapU in du». 

284. The accusative after the active verb (the objtd) becomes the nomi« 
native before the passive verb. 

285. (ft) But verbs that govern the dative in the active are 
used impersonally in the passive ; so that the nominative before the 
English verb becomes the dative after the Latin verb. 

286. (c) VapalOt vfneo, fo, having a ptusiv meaning, have also a |mwcm 
eowdruction. 



n Not In the sense of folk or/(rfftt, as in English, but of a yopk. 
^ Ac, (See 4, d.) 



$ 40. 287-290.] the passive. 105 

287. [C. XXIV.] ftCr (d) To express the future suljunctive 
passive we must not use the participle in dus with sim, essem, &c., 
but futurum sit, esset, &c., followed by ut. 

288. (e) The future infinitive passive is made up of the supine 
m um with iri ; but when verbs have no supine, we must use 
fore or futurum esse, &c. 

This substitute for a future infinitive passive must be used even 
wlien tlie verb hoM amipviUi unless the event is to be described as being 
about to happen. 

In other words the mpine wUh iri is a pcado-posi futurum. 

289. (jT) So also fore ut with the subjunctive should be used 
for the future infinitive active, when the event is not to be described 
as being now about to happen, 

290. (a) MiM consilium captum jam diu est, My resolution 

Jias long been taken, 
(h) (TloricB tiuB invidetur. Your glory is envied, 

Philosophiae vituperatorihus satis responsum est, The 
reviUrs of philosophy have been sufficiently answered. 

(c) Rogatus est, an ab reo vapulasset, He was asked 

whether he had been beaten by the prisoner. Al 
hoste venire. To be sold by an enemy. A me fieri, 
To be doing by me, 

(d) Nescio, quando futurum sit, ut epistola scribatur,^ / 

don't know when the letter will be written. 

(e) Dixit ybre ut oppidum expugnaretur,« He said that the 

town would be taken. 
Dixit oppidum expugnatum iri, He said that the city 
was about to be taken. (G.) 
(/) Nunquam putavi fore "ut supplex ad te venirem, I 
never thought that I should come to yoiC as a sup- 
pliant, 

(Eng,) Tou are envied, favoured, spared, answered, &c, 
{Lot.) It iff envied (favoured, spared, answered, &c.) to you. 
(Eng.) I don't know when it will be written. 
{Lot,) I don't know when it tpill be (subj.) that it be written. 



« Of course eeeet and ecriberehtr after a past tense. 

« The tense of the subjunctive verb depends not on fore, but on the preced-^ 
ing verb. Spero fore ut eonvoieaeat : aperabamfoiQ ut oonvaietceret. 



106 THE PASSIVE. [§40.291,292 

291. Vocabulary 42. 

To be beaten, YaptilSre, av, at. 

_ ,, . , . 5 convalescere,y valu (see Tables for Ra- 

To recover (from a sickness), { ference, II. vU.). 

To Ileal, to be healed of a wound, consanescSre, sanu. 

^ ^ ^, ^ ^ ^ 5 recrudesc&e, crudu (properly to gron 

To burst out, or bleed afresh, J raw again). 

Wound, Yulntts, 6ris, n. 

Priest, priestess, saeerdOs, dOtis, m. et/. 

A husband, vir, viri, m. (a man). 

, . ( persuasum est mihi, or persuasum ha- 

I am persuaded, J ^^^^ 

A liar, mendax, ads (prop, anadjecl,). 

Faith, fidelity, fides, ei,/. 

^ plerique {pUri declined and qtu append- 
Most men, J ^ . j^^^ ^^^ ^^^^^ ^^ ^^ ^^^^ 

' facBre {withdblat. ; oJbL with c2e; or with 

dad, De should be expressed before 

^ do any thing with a person, •^ the persorud pronMrnSf the ablativea 

of which are of the same form as the 

I accusatives). 



Exercise 45. 

/ .292. I will ask whether he has been beaten by his slave. 
2. What will become of my TuUiola^ ? 3 ^ ^^P® ^® ^^^^ recover./^ 
hoped he would recover. ^T doubt not but that (86) you will be 
praised by all. /. The wounds, which had been healed, bleed 
afresh. / //ear his wounds tcn'S*^* bleed afresh, f These priest- 
esses of Vesta are not permitted to marry a husband. ^ Your virtue 
is envied. > {xLiars are not believed. / /The unwilling are not easily 
persuaded of any thing.*; Sphere is no doubt that your glory will 
be envied/ '^11 my property has been sold by an enemy.; ■ I will 
ask which* of them is favoured by Caesar;/ fThat (iUe) age is 
not only not envied, but even favoured.^/ jfyear that these wounds 
will not^ heal/ |What will become of me?/fl?here are some 



7 The disease/rom which a person recovers, must be governed by ex with 
ihBabl. 

* Peratumammum habeo should never be used ; persuoMiasimum eti wXhi does 
not occur in Cicero, but in a letter of Brutus*s to Cicero. (Klotz.) I am per* 
nutded qf (persuasum est mihi e^, dc. with abl.), 

* Say : * to the unwilling nothizig is easily persuaded.* ^Qihoo persons. 



§41.293-297.] the passive. 101 

who^^* believe that he has been beaten by his slave^^here are 
some who envy your glory. ( 



§ 41. The Faasive continued* 

293. (a) The verbs that govern two accusatives in the active, 

sometimes govern one accusative (that of the object) in the passive. 

Since even in the active it is only some verbs of aakingt &c, that gov- 
ern the two accusatives, care must be taken not to extend the rule just 
given beyond the actual practice of good writers.— i?dgrSri may take 
this ace. It is found with indUtuM and edoctua ; with doctua or dedodttt 
it is not common in prose : with celari and morOri very rare, except 
with the neuter of pronouns, or such adjectives as mvUa, pauco. (Z.) 

294. (b) Passive verbs and participles are sometimes followed 

by an accusative of the part particularly referred to (accusativus 

partis afFectae). 

Thus we may say, not only captUferitur alicuif or caput alicujvMfer 
rituTf but also cdiquisfeTitur caput. 
(c) In some particular constructions the partref erred to is put in the^en. 
or aiblatioe, 

295. An accusative also follows many other passive participles, especially 
in the poets. 

The peculiarity is this : the dative of the act. is allowed to stand as 
the nominative (auljecl) before the passive, or, which comes to the same 
thing, with a passive participle in agreement with it; and then the ao- 
cuaative of the object is allowed to remain. This construction (which 
is called the Greek accusatvDe), and that in 294, must not be imitated 
by those who wish to write in Cicero's style. (G.) 

296. In many general expressions the passive voice is used 
impersonally where the active might be used in Latin, and is used 
in English. 

(Thus ambulatum est, It has been walked (by us) = we have 
walked), 

297. (iZ) With verbs of seeming, and passive verbs of declaring^ 
thmkingy &c.j the personal construction is far more common than 
the impersonal.* 



• In the past tenses, traditum estj prodUum est are very commonly used. The 
passives of audtre and nuntiare are frequently, though not so exclusively, used 
personally. (Z.) 



109 THE PASSIVE. [§41. 298, 299 

{Eng.) It aeems, it aaid, Ac, that Caius haa retired (or, as Lat.)» 
{Lot.) CaiuB 9um»^ it •md, <frc., to have retired. 

298. (a) Rogatus sententiam, Being asked his opinion, Longam 

indutus vestem^ Clothed in a long garment, 
{li) Oblitus<> faciem (smeared as to his face s=), having 
his face smeared or covered, Incensus animum 
(kindled as to his mind =), Having his mind agi- 
tated, Adversum femur ictus (struck as to his 
opposite thigh =), Wounded in the front part of 
his thigh, 

(c) Pendere animi or animo,* To he in anxious suspense, 

Discrucior animi, My mind is on the rack ; I am 
tortured in mind, 

(d) Lycurgi temporibus Homerus fufsse dicitur, Homer 

is said to have lived {or, it is said that Homer Uved) 
in the time of Lycurgus, 
MiUiades videhatur non posse esse privatus, It seemed 
that MilUades could not he a private man, 

299. Vocabulary 43. 

Blood f (when a/Ud), cruof, 5ris, m. 

og . ( tacitus, a, um (if achud^ tacitumus, ^ 

c iim if habUual silence is meant) 

To be sUent, hold one's tongue, sUere, sUu, 

To be sUent, hold one's tongue, ) ^^^^j^ ^ ^^^^ 

cease speaking, > 

Silence, • . silentium, i, n. 

Habit of silence, tacitumitas, atis, /. 

About i<^sr to be silent), \ ^® <^* "^^^ ^"^ "^^ pronoun 

c may stand in occut. without prepos.) 
To set on fire, incendSre, cend, cens. 

To light, kindle, accendSre, succendSre, cend, cens.h 



. * Prom obVtfOre, 

• Often aniirUa^ if more than one person is spoken of. Cicero uses pmdire 
ammi and pend&re aninUa : not, I believe, pendsre animo, 

t SangutB inest venis, cruor est de corpore fusus. At the moment of ehedding 
■anguis should be used. 

' SUsre is, to emit no sounds to make no noise, to be still i—tacere is, to utter 
no tDord^ to be silent ; especially, to pa^s over in silence. The opposites of 
9Usre Are tirepHre^fremXre ; of tat&re^ dictrt and V6quLi, (D.) 

b Jncencfifre is to set the vihjolU of a thing on fire ; accmdi^e and atueendire, to 
•et a part of it on fire, that it may be consumed graduaUy, Axmdcrc is to 



54x. 300.] 


THE 


PASSIVE. 


Torch, 


• 


UBda,«,/. 


Lamp, 




lucema, ae, /. 


Funeral pUe, pyre, 




rttgus, i, m. 


To strike, hit, wound, 




ferire ; icCre,! ic, let ; cedere, cCcfd, 


Rod, 




virga, «, /. 


Spear, 




hasta,«,/. 


Arrow, 




sagitta,®,/. 


Lightning, 




fiilmen, inis, n. 



109 



To be flogged, whipped with rods, virgls cedi. ) 

Thigh, femur, tfril, n. 

To walk, ambulare, Sv, at. 

Right (opposite of left)^ dexter, tra, trum. 

Exercise 46. 

/- 300. Cato was first asked his opinion.^^Sfou with your usual 
habit of silence' said nothing. ^^^Marous, having his face covered 
with his own blood, left the city./yThe laws ought not to be sclent. 

^I am afraid that'^^ the laws are silent about these matters. ^lan- 
nibal, having his mind agitated by silent care, was silent^?^ 
warned the boy not to light the torch. ^By whom has the funeral 
pile been lighted ?^I will inquire by whom the funeral pile was 
lighted. /flCaius, being struck by lightning, died.*^^ foretell that 
you mil he flogged (288)^^Caius was wounded by an arrow' on 
his right thigh .Vz^ league was made between the cities of *' 
Rome and Lavinium^E/It cannot be denied f^Mhe lamp was 
lighted by the boy^yjTWe have walked (jww*.) enough. ^^fWe have 
come (pass,) to (ad) the XownyTTt cannot he that^^heds not tor- 
tured in mindi^flt is said that Uaius has been struck by a stone. 

y^Vas the funeral pile lighted by you or by Balbus ? 

light it from abave^ succendere from below. Hence a torch, lamp, Ac, accendihtr , 
a funeral pile awxendxtur. (D.) Animxa accensua is merely an excUed mind, 
fmimtu vncermts an CLgUated udad. (D.) 

i FcrJre, to strike generally; asdire is to strike with what cuts (including 
rodsj <&c.) : iOre, to strike with what piercca (including lightnmgy gtones, <&c.), 
Ferire and icSre supply each other's deficiencies: thuB ferire is used for^e*., 
imperf.y JvZ,, which icere wants ; and icere supplies ferire with a p€rf.)bJiA past 
participle for fern^ferUue, which are not in use. i[D.) IcKre fiait» is to roiiif^ 
or make a treaty, league, dc 

k Deoesd'.. 



XIO EXPRESSIONS OF TIJiE. [§ 42. 301-307 

XIV. 
§ 42. EvpreasUms cf Time. 

301. (a) In answer to the question token ? the noun which 
expresses time is put in the ablative : in answer to the question 
hmD long ? in the accusative. 

302. (h) In answer to the question in what time ? tnikin what 

time ? either a preposition (tw/er,i intra) is used : or the noun is 

put in the ablative with a cardinal or ordinal numeral. 

If a cardinal number is used, the noun will be in the plural i if an 
ordinalf in the tingtUar. 
(In ten years : in the tenth year.) 

303. (c) In answer to the questions Tiow long before ? how 
long after ? the noun that expresses time is put in the ablative. — 
Ante and post are here used ds adverbs^ unless there be another 
noun or pronoun to be governed by them. 

304. (d) A point or space of future time for which any 
arrangement or provision is now made, is put in the accusative 
with in : the exact time at which a thing is to be done, in the ace. 
with ad. 

305. {e) Abhinc (ago) of pa^t time is joined to the accusative 
or the ablahve .•" it roust precede the numeral and its substantive, 
one of which must be the next word to i£. 

306. (/) Naiv^s (bom) with the accusative of time = at such 
an age ; fio many years old. Major and minor with the genitive 

r ablative of time == (respectively) above or under such an age. 

At nuh an ags may also be expressed by the genitive only (without . 
natuB), 

307. (a) Vere, In the spring. Auctumno, In the autumn, 

Hibemis mensibus, In the winter months, Solis 
occasu (at the setting of the sunb=), At sunset, 

1 InUr^ if the uhdlt duraHon is spoken of: ui/ro, if wme pohU within that 
^lace. 

n Zumipt says the aceuaaiive for duration, the ablative for a point of time. 
This seems to be incorrect ; thus in * litem decidit abhme annoa ^uohior * duration 
is not meant The ablative is more d^ite than the accusative, and should (I 
think) be used when 9l definite point ofpaat time is to be expressed ; the accu- 
toHve when exact accuracy is not intended. Hence the accusative is the more 
oonimon. 



I 42. 3Q7.] EXPRESSIONS OF TIME. Ill 

Inediam hiduum aut triduum ferre (to endure absti- 
nence from food =), To go without food for two, 
or even three days. 

Ager rnuHos annos quievit, The field has lain fallow 
for many years. 
(h) Germaiii inter annos quatuordedm tectum non subie- 
rant. The Germans had not entered a house for 
fourteen years together. 

Multi intra vicesimum diem dictatur^ se abdicaverunt, 
Many persons have laid douon their dictatorship^ 
vjithin twenty days, 

Agamemnon cum universe Grseci^ vix decern anrds 
unam cepit urbem, Agamemnon with the whole of 
Chreece had great difficulty in taking a single city in 
ten years. 

Pompejus undequinquagesimo die ad imperium populi 
Romani Ciliciam adjunxit, Pompeius in forty-nine 
days added CiUcia to the empire of the Roman 
people. 

(c) Paucis post mensibus, A few months afterwards, 

Paucis ante diebus, A few days before, 
Hom^rus annis multis fuit anU lUmulum, Homer lived 
many years before Romulus. 

(d) Ad CGonam Canium invitavit in posterum diem, He 

invited Camus to supper for the next day. 
Solvere ad Gracas Kalendas,^ To pay on the Greek 
Kalends. 

(e) Abhino annos {or annis) quatuor, Four years ago. 
(/) Cato annos quinque ei octoginta naius excessit e vit^ 

Cato departed this life when he was eighty-five years 

old (or, at the age of eighty-five). 
^Minores annis triginta {Persons) under thirty years 

old (or, of age). 
Minores duorum et viginti annorum, TJndei the age 
^ of iwO'and4wenty. 



> Tti&t is, Tiever ; there being no Kaknde in the Greek Calendar. 



112 SXPBESSIONS OF TIME. [§ 42. SON 

Civis major annis viginti, A cUizen above Umnt$ 
years old* 

Cato primum stipendium meruit amiorum deoem sep- 
temque, C(Uo served his first campaign; at the age 
of seventeen (or, when he was seventeen years old). 

308. VOCABULART 44. 



To receiYO, 

To succeed to =i follow, 

Swallow, 

Winter (as orfj.), 

Month, 

Go away. 



accipSre, recipCre, excipBre," cep, cept. 
excipSre, cSp, cept {occub.). 
hinindo, inis,/. 
hibemus, a, um. 
mensis, is, tti. 
abire, abeo, iv, it (78, x.). 
C interf icere, f^c, feet (tlie most general 
To kill, i term for killing, Whether by #/orra- 

C tiorif poison^ hanging, or the aioord). 
To kill (as a vioUnt. unjttst. cruel \^ ^ .ti-^. 

act!bypoi^,U^imar<m. f°«^' «>' en8«^ (»f by a proceas that 

To kill, slay (especially in hon- > occid5re, cid, cIs (it is used however of 



ourable, open fight), 

To slaughter, butcher. 

To reign (neut.). 

To lay down a magistracy. 

Exactly (of a number), 
Ephesian, 
Temple, 
To be burnt, 

To serve a campaign. 

To hold a magistracy. 



) cM kinds of killing), 

( trucidare (according to Duderlein = 

c tauricldOf I cut down an ox). 

regnSre, iv, it. 
( abdicare magistratum, or abdicare se 
c magistratu. 

ipse (in agreement with the noun). 

Ephesius, i, m. 

templum, i, n, 

deflagrare, iv, at {intrana,). 
( stipendium merere or mereri (i. e. to 
I earn pay). 

magistratum gerCre, gess, gest. 



B Acdpimtu oblata ; txcipimua vagantia ; recipimut fu^entia. (D.) Tb receivi 
]m aodperej when the thing is cffered or gvoen : to receive a person flying or wan- 
dering is exdpere or recipere ; excipere being the act of a BervicabU friend, an 
equal; redpere that of a benefactor, a superior, Excipere is to ttop a Ivcing 
being in motion, and eitherreceive him in a fiiendly, or intercept him in a hoHiU 
m&nner. (D.) Accipere vvlnera is to receive wounds intended for me; excipert 
vulnera is to expose myself to wounds 'that may every moment come in my 
way.' (HUl.) Redpere is also distinguished from acdpere by denoting to receivo 
not merely for detention, but for actual poaaeeeion, Accepta pecunia may be a 
mere deposit : recepia pecunia is a formal taking into posaeasion, (D.) 



$ 42. 309, 310.] EXPRESSIONS of time. lid 

[C. xxT.] 1^ After an expression of time, *ihat* is often used for on tofuch 
{Eng,) To have reigned more than (or abooe) two years. 
(Lai.) To be reigning Jm third year. 

(Eng.) Before the eonattUiip^ cenwrthipy dc, of Caius. ^ 

{Lai.) Before Caiut (being connUj cenwr^ &c. (ante Caium con8uIem>. 

Exercise 47. 

/309. I come to your epistles, six hundred of which' ' I received 
at one time.,,;i^he swallows go away in the winter months^^Do 
not the swallows go away in the winter months ^^^^ithridates 
slaughtered many Roman^ citizens in one' day^/Mithridates, who 
in one day hutchered so many Roman citizens, has already reigned 
ahove two-and-twenty years from that {ah iHo) time. ^We dream 
whole nights^^Caius laid down his dictatorship within ten days. 
^ Scipio* died a year^ before my consulship^ Cato died exactly 
eightyp-three years before the consulship of Cicero/J^he 
eclipses of the sun are foretold for many years*^^^e published 
an edict, that no one" under (306, /) nine-and-twenty years old 
should command an armyy^^n the same night that ^ Alexander 
was born, the temple of the Ephesian Diana was burnt-down^ It 
is certain that Caius served his first campaign at the age of 
eighteen^l^e died at the age of thirty-three/fEing Archelaus 
had been in possession of Cappadocia for about forty-nine years. 

/^At the age of thirty he had already waged many wars/^ay 
(then) a man under twenty-two years old hold a magistracy ? 

/2ftle died three years ago/^t is the part of a good citizen to 
receive wounds for his coumry. 



810. (a) (He did it) three years after he (had) returned. 

(1) post tres annos (or tertium annum) ) quam redie« 

(2) tertio anno' ) rat. 



o Seipio the last word. p Annis octoginta et tribus ipwis, 

4 Begin with the relative clause. 30 (c). 32 (d). 
♦ » li might be supposed tliat * tertio amw quam {or quo) redierat,* would raeaa 



114 



EXPRESSIONS OF TIME. 



[§42. 311 

(3) tribus annis (or tertio anno) postquam redierat. 

(4) tertio anno qtio redierat.' 

(h) Pridie quam excessit e \itk,'TJie day before he died* 
PostricUe quam a vobis discessi, The day after 1 

left you, 
Postero anno quam, &c., The year after, &c. 
Priore anno quam, &d., The year lefore, &c. (Z.) 

311. Vocabulary 45. 

intexdiu, or die. 

noctu, or nocte. 
( die ac nocte ; die noctuque ; nocte et 
c interdiu. 

▼espgri, or vespCre.* 

in templ^re, or temptfre oTify. 

India Lafinis. 
( bello, a» todl a» in bello (especially if join* 
C ed with an adj. or genii,), 

pugn& Cannensi (or with in). 

paucis his diebus. 



By day, 
By night, ; 

By day and by night, 

In the evening, 

In good time, 

At the time of the Latin games, 



In war. 

In the battle of Cannae, 
A few days a^Oj 



A few days^ before (a past time > p^^^j^ ^.^ ^^^^^ 

condere, did, dit. 
obsidSre, add, sess. 
oppugnSre, av, at. 
' Hispania, bb,/. 
ccena,* 8b,/. 
venenum, i, n, 
ftmes,1s,/. 
Buspcndium, 1, n. 



spoken of). 
To found, 

. To invest, blockade. 
To assault, storm, 
Spain, 

Supper (or rather,'*di7i7wr), 
Poison, 
Starvation, 
Hanging (Uhc rope '), 



' after two completed years from his return, and before the completion of the 
third :' this however aoes not appear to be so. ' OcUtw menae^ quam coeptum 
oppugnari,captum Saguntum, <frc (lAo.) iv dKrit itr}<ri (Polyb,) ; * Tyrus aepHmo 
mense capta est* {Ctart,); voXiopKup ivrh ptffwas (JPlut,) 'after a siege of seven 
months' (CUnion), 

■ Nearly so with arUe: * Ante triemUum quam Carthago deleretur, M. Cato 
mortem obiit.' The use of the nbJvncHve here will be spoken of below. Obs. 
In <^ construction poatquam is oftener followed by the pluperfect than by the 
perfect. (See 614.) The following is an example of the perfect : * Nero natus 
est post novem menses quam Tiberius exceant,' {Suet,) 

t From veipeTf veaperis, 

* From Koiv6st common: the principal meal of the day. 



§49.312-^16.] PLACB. SPACE. 115 

Exercise 48. 

/3I2. The city was taken hy storm three years after the siege 
began. *^Hamilcar was slain nine years after he came (had 
come) into Spain .5J Carthage was destroyed seven hundred years 
after it was founded.^j|^e died the year after he was banished. 
^O^'^hy did he go out in the evening ?^I will ask why he set out 
in the evening^T^anius came to supper in good timc^Is this 
said to have been done by night, or by day ?^He died a few 
years &goyj^e died the day after he had called upon me//He 
was killed the year after Saguntum was taken/Jj^as not he 
killed in the battle of Cannae 3^He set out at the time of the 
Latin Games^^^^he town was taken five months after it began 
to be blockadedy<0i( is said*'' that Caius killed his slave by poi- 
soiv^Did he kill his slave by poison or by starvation ^/^as he 
not killed his enemy by the rope ?^ am afraid that Balbus has 
killed his slave by poison. 



XV. 
§ 43. Place. Space. 

313. (a) If the town at which a thing is done, is a singular noun 
of the^^ or second declension, it is put in the genitive : if not, 
in the aHatvoe." 

314. (J) In answer to whither ? the place is put in the acctwa- 

the : in answer to whence ? in the ablative. 

These rules apply only to the names of towna and smaU itianda. Be- 
fore other words prepasUioru must be used ; and before theB6j when the 
name has an adjecHoe.'' 

315. Urbtf oppidunif locut, in apposition to the name of a town in the 
geiUHve, stand in the abloHve, 

316. Such combinations as ^tchool at Captuij* ' Carthage in Africa^ <&a^ 
are not admissible in Latin. But the name of the town must be gov- 



« Say : ' after it began to be assaulted.' 

▼ VLvppdmn, or urha come before the proper name, it must take a 'prefpotUianu 

(Z.) 

^ In almost all the constructions of tivM and apace the prepositions are occa- 
sionally expressed. Thus ^db Epidauro :' * -per totam noctem :' Ac. 



116 PLACE. SPACE. [§43.317-319 

erned by the preceding rales, and the other nouns governed by a pr& 

poeUion, (C.) ' 

(Eng.) Running to his mother at Naplu, ^ 

(itot ) \ ^^^^^"^^ ^ Naples to (prep.) his mother, 
c Currens ad matrem NeapOiim, (C.) 

317. (c) Local space is expressed by thesaccusative : sometimes 
by the ablative. 

With diMtarty exstare, eminsTCj ace, or ahL is used (but not quite In- 
- diSerently) : with abesae, ex- dia- tEdgre, ace, should be used ; with con 
aydXrt^ autrafaeercy the aee. or abl. ;> sometimes with prep, a, ab, 

818. (a) Vixi RonuB, TarenU, Athenisy GaJnis, Tibwre^ I have 
' lived at Rdmij Tarentuniy Aihensy GalUy Tihur. 
(h) Legati Athenas missi sunt : Ambassadors were sent to 

Athens. 
Fugit Tarquinios CarinthOy He fled to Tarquinii from 

Corinth. 
(c) Tridui viam processit, He advanced a three days* 

march. 
Campus Marathon abest ab oppido Atheniensium cir- 

citer miUia passuum decern, Thefeld of Marathon 

is about ten thousand paces from the city of Athens, 
Bidui abest, It is a two days' journey from us (iter 

understood). 
Milites aggerem latum pedes trecentos exstruxerunt, 

The soldiers threw up a mound three hundred feet 

broad (or, in breadth). ^ 

319. Vocabulary 46. 

A pace, pasBus, Us := 4 Eng. feet, 10.02 inches 
A Roman mile of a thouaand paces, mille passus. . 

Miles, millia passnum (thousands of paces). 

Two days, biduum, i, n. 

Three days, triduum, i, n. 

To be distant from ; to be at a > ^ ^IstSxeJ distit, 

distance o^ ^ » ^ •» 

To be nearer ; not so far off, propius abesse. 

To post himself; encamp, considere, sed, sess. 



, * Zumpt says, * If not the distance is to be expressed, but only a place to be 
designated by the circumstance of its distance, the abl. is used :' in the eighth 
edit, of the original, he says, *in tne ace., but the abl. is also correct.' (Caes 
t 48.) 
y Distare generally takes a. 



$ 44* S20-822.] gerunds and thb participle in dus. U7 

To depart a finger's breadth, tmnsTersuin digitum diacedSre. 

Ab they aay, as the saying is, ut aiunt. 

Carthage, Carthago, inis,/. 

Thebes, Thebs, arum. 

Exercise 49. 

(How most *Iam anuwered* be translated^ 285.) 

/ 820. He lived many years at Veii«? The boy died at Carthage. 

3 My father and mother died at Thebes. //LWhy did he set out for 

Rome in the evening ?4 I have lived several years at Carthage. 

5 Might he not have lived at Rome ? *^ I almost think it would have 

been better for (dat,) the Roman people to have been contented 

with Sicily and Africa.^ They are building a wall two hundred 

feet high. J The town is five (Roman) miles from Carthage y/) He 

has posted himself (at a distance of) four miles from Ceesar. 

/f Caius is nearer to Caesar than Labienus./^Are (then) you nearer 

to me than Labienus (is) '{/H have been informed that Caesar is at 

a distance of two days' march from us.^jfThere is no doubt that 

the revilers of philosophy have been sufficiently answered. )^15oes 

he not deserve^ ^ to be relieved from his debt ?/((From this rule I 

may not depart a finger's breadth, as the saying is.* 



XVI. 
§ 44, On the Gerunds and the Participle in dus (Gerundive). 

321. The Gerund is a verbal whetatUivej but with the power of gaoeming 
what beiongs to the other parts of the verb. Another pecuiiarity ia^ 
that it cannot take an a4jective in agreement with it. 

The Gerund corresponds, as far as it goes, with the English ^verbal 
tubatantae^* or ^participicu avbOantice in tng",' but its use is far less 
extensive.* 

322. The Genmdioe or participle in dus is nearly allied to the Gerund : 



■ Transversum, ut ajunt, digitum. 

• The pupil cannot be taught too early or too carefully to distinguish the 
'parHcqnal rubstardio^ from a participle. It may be e(nnj)<nmd as weU as sim- 
pie : every participle, except the avmpU past participle, having a substantive 
use. ' An affectation of bdang diaiingiaahed :* ' the pretext of their fuwing seized 
Bome traders :* ' after his hamng been tumbling about in his mind one poor sen* 
lence :' * an atonement for his having been betrayed into,' Ac. 



J IP "JBairnDS AND THE PARTICIPLE IN DUS-. 1^44. 828-327 

118 meaning is passive denoting rueeaaity^JibusBf or somettiing fnUnded^ 
what must, should, or is to be done, ^ 

3S3. (a) When the participle in dus is in the neuter gender with the third per 
son sing, of esse, a whole conjugation may be formed to ezpreas what 
one miut, or should do. The person is put in the dative. 

324. 0C?~ In the oblique cases the part, in dtis in agreement 
with a substantive, is nearly equivalent to a gerund govenmg 
that substantive in the case of its verb. 

Of vrrUing a Utter, \ ^^^^f epistolam. 
c scnbendse epistolae. 

325. A whole conjugation may be formed with ihepart. in dus 
and sum. 

Present \ -A^n^ai^dus sum, lam to he loved, 

c Amandus es, Vuju art to be loved, &c, 
Imnerf i Amandus eram, I was to be looed. 

C Amandus eras, ifum wast to be loved, &c. 
Obs. Amandus eram or fui is generally to be rendered ^unUd (or, ought 
to) have been loved. The reason is this : a thing which was (then) a 
thing to beloved, is (now) a thing which ought to have been loved, 

326. (a) Pres. Scribendum est, j f* ^^'^'T^*- 

c i, you, we, Ac, must wrUe, 

Sing, mihiscribendumest,^ Jmt^jirrt^e. 

tibi scribendum est, thou must write 

illi scribendum est, ?u muH write, 
Plur, nobis scribendum est, we must write, 

yobis scribendum est, you must write, 

illis scribendum est, they must write, 

Xmperf. Scribendum erat \ <^*^^'^ havewrUten. 

C 1, thou, we should have written. 
mihl scribendum erat, I ought to have written, 
tibi scribendum erat, ihou oughtest tohaoe written, ^. 
And so on for the other tenses. 

327. {Part, in dus in agreement with a substantive.) 

N. Epistola scribenda, a Utter to be written, 

G. epistolse scribends, of writing a Utter, 

D. epistolse scribendse, to or for writing a fetter. 

Ace. (ad) epistolam scribendam, to write a Utter (or, to ox for 

writing a letter), 
Abl. epistolU 8cribendS,b by writing a letter. 



* That Is, *U is to be written by me^ according to the idiom by which the pas- 
sive used impersonally is equivalent to the corresponding tenses of the active. 

b It is not always that the gerund governing a case can be turned into the 
gerundive (partic in dus) ; but only when the sabetaoitive In the case corres- 
ponding to the gerund would Itself give a-eorraot, though imperfect, meaniiiiir- 



\ 44. 398-831.] gebttnds and the participle in dtts. 119 

N. Auctores legend!, authors to be read. 

O. auctomm legendorum, qf reading anthers, 

D. ajctoribus legendis, to or for reading authors. 

Ace. (ad) auctores legendos, to read authors (or, to or for rsad* 

ing authors). 
Abl. auctoribuB legendis, by reading authors. 
't2S* The part.^ dus often appears to change its meaning, but it only 
appears to do so. 
Scribendum est mihi (it is to-be-written byms'si) 1 must writs. 
Consilium scribendsB epistolsB (an intention icith respect to a Uttsr to* 
be-written zs) an intention of writing a letter. 
329. (Eng.) We should all praise virtue. 

(Lat.) Virtue is to-be-praised by all (dat.). 
(Eng.) A time to play. Fit to carry burdens. 
(Ijat.) A time of playing. Fit for (dot,) burdens to-be-carried. 
• (Eng.) He is bom or inclined to act. 

{Lot.) He is bom or inclined for (ad) acting. 
S30. [C. zxYi.] f;^ What is inform the present participle active is often * the 
participial substantive* or gemnd. It is always so, when it governs on 
isgovemedy instead of merely 'ogreems'. 

f:^ What is in form the infin. pass, is often used as the partie. ol 
the fut. pass, implying possibilUyf dutyt or necessity. 

Exercise 50. 

331. Man is born to understand and act. ' Caius is skilled in 
waging war. ' We learn by teaching. - We should praise virtue 
even in an enemy. He has snatched away from me the hope of 
finishing the business. We are all of us desirous of seeing and 
hearing inany things. . Water is good* for drinking. Demos, 
thenes wa% eagerly-desirous of hearing Plato.*; Pericles was 
admirably-skilled (peritissimus) in ruling the state. *They adopt 
the resolution of setting the town on fire. Ought not glory to be 



Thus in, * I bring the dead to my recollection by reading the tombstones,' here I 
may use *sepuleris Ugendis^* because I bring them to my recollection by moans 
qf the UmibstomSf though reading is the particular way by which I effect this 
But in, * Themistocles rendered the sea safe by chasing the pirates^' I must say. 
-prsedones eonsectando,* not ^prcedonibus oonsectandis^* because he did not make 
it safe by means of the pirates^ but only by chasing them away. (G.) In the 
eonitraction with the gerund, the gerund is more emphatic than the gerundive 
in the other constraction. Whenever therefore the participial substantive in 
ing is empJiatic, the gerund should be used. 

« Utilis. Utilis, inutilisy are followed by the dative of the gerund, or by tbe 
ace. with ad. Cicero generally uses ad. 



120 GERUNDS AND THE PARTICIPLE IN DUS. [§ 44. 332-335 

preferred to riches ? '^We must do this, . .Those persons are not 
to be heard, who teach {fractpiunt) that we should be angry with 
our enemies./* #We must all die/ , An orator must see what is be- 
coming* r We must take care to hurt {suT^,) nobody.^*/ JWe must 
not take cruel measures even against Caius.'' 



332. If a verb does not govern the ace, the part, in dus cannot 

be used in agreement with its substantive. 

In other words, such verbs have only an impermnal construction in 
the passive : as we must say, ^mendaci nan credUwt bo we must say, 
^ mmdaci rum crkltndum eai.* 

(a) Hence to express *we must' do, <&c., with a verb that governs 
the dot, we must use the part, in dua in the neuter gender, retainin|r 
the object in the dative. 

333. (b) ButfrumdWifur^enduSj potiunduSf utendtis^ are sometimes found 
in agreement with their substantives, because these words formerly 
governed the ace. When so used, they are generally in immediate 
agreement with their substantives. 

As, rea Jruenda; ad affkium Jungendumj <&c., but also *fruenda 
etiam sapientia est.^ 

334. The gen. mng, nuueultne of the partic. in dtis is used with «ui,f even 
when it is plural ox feminine singular : 

C pttrgandi sui causS,/or the sake of clearing themselves. > 
( placandi tui, qfappeaaing you (of a toaman). > 

335. (a) Parcendumf est inimicis, We must spare our enemies 

(our enemies are to oe spared), 
{h) Ea quee utenda accepisti, Those things which you re- 
ceived to be used. % 
Utendum est cuique suo judicio (abl.). Every man 
must use his own judgment. 
(e) (Peculiar constructions.) 

Inter bibendum, Whilst they are drinking. Solven- 
do esse (par, equal to, understood), To he ahle to 



d 2Ve in Caium quidem, <&c. 

* So also veacenduSf gloriandits, medendusj pcBnitenduSf pudendua. 

f Other genitives plur. are found in the same way, ' diripiendi pomorum,' &c. 
In some other instances the gerund in di appears to have a passive meajung j 
' spes restiiuendif* the hope of being restored. (Z.) 

' In a few passages the ace. of the object stands after this impersonal con- 
struction : < Canea potlus paucoa et acrea habendum, quam mvUoaJ (Varr.) 



1 44. 8d6--3d8.] GESUNDS and the participle in dus. 121 

pay, Oneri ferendo'» esse, To he equal to hearing 
the hurden. Conservandse libertatis esse, To tend 
to the preservation of liberty, 
336. [C. xsvii.] f^^ I have to do it' must be translated by the part, in duM. 
{Eng.) With whom we hoot to live. 

{Lot.) With whom U is to-he-lived (qulbuscum vivendum est). 
[C. xzYiii.] f;^ * It i*,* followed by the mjm.pa»8.^ generally expressed 
necessity iJUneasy or something intended; but sometimes mere possibiliiyt 
to be translated by possum, 

[ * The passage is to be found in the fifth book ' ss the passage may 
or eon be found in the fifth book.] 

837. Vocabulary 47, 

To overthrow, evertSre, vert, vers. 

To occupy myself in ; to be en- ) ^^ ^^ ^ 

gaged in, > 

To preserve, conservare, av, at. 

To study, devote oneself to, stiidere, studu, {dot.). 

Literature, literse (pi. ; also, a letter z= an epistle). 

To spend his time in, tempus impendSre, pend, pens {dot.). 

To make it my first object or ) id agSre Q to be doing that ' and nothing 

business, ) else ;k agSre, eg, act). 

To plead a cause, agSre causam. 

Tofeelthankfulitoretainagrate- >g,^,j^^g^jl^ ^tj„ 

lui sense, j 

To thank, return thanks, gratias agCre. 

To repay a kindness, to prove > gratiam referre : f^ro, tifl, iSt (the per- 

one's gratitude, ) son to whom must be in the dot.). 

To clear s: excuse, purgSre, av, at 

Obs. * Should^* which the pupil has been taught to translate by debeo or oportet, 
must now be translated by the part, indus^ whenever it is not emphatic; when- 
tver it might be turned into 'it is to be^* &c. 

Exercise 51. 

838. He is of opinion that these things tend (c) to the over- 



k The dot, of the purpose is sometimes found instead of the ace. with ad : die* 
trahendo hosti, or ad distrahendimi hostem. When the verb governs an object 
in the dat,i the agent is sometimes expressed with ofr, to avoid ambiguity:— 
Ci Fes ' quibus a vobis consulendum est.' — 

Obs. Caius consulendus est {must be consulted) : Caio consulendum est {ffis 
(nteresU of Caius must be consulted). 

i Vacare (to have leisure for) is never used in this sense by the best writera 
(Hotting. Cic. Div. i. 6.) 

k PoHowed by ti< with subj. 



182 GJBBUIIDS ASD TH£ TARTICIPLES IN DITS. [§44. 839. 

throw of the state.x ^o these things tend to the preservadon oi 
the overthiowof the state ?.^ There is no doubt that (86) the 
state is not able to pay (c). It is the part of a Christian to spend 
his time in assisting^ the wretched, c Let us cansuU the interests 
of those with whom we have to Uve. ^ I will inquire of Caius 
whether Balbus should be consulted. We must oonsult the inte* 
lestsof Balbus./ It was owing to you*' that the interests of Caius 
were not consulted. I made it my first object to {ut) preserve the 
Roman territory. I cannot repay your kindness. ,' There is no 
doubt that he is going to thank you. V'^I will inquire of Caius 
whose cause he is going to plead./J Every animal makes it its first 
object to preserve itself. . .^e must strive to conquer, /^^ust we 
not repay the kindness of those from {prep, a) whom we have 
received benefits ? '^^ persuaded Caius to devote himself to litera- 
ture. ''They had come into the camp for the purpose of clearing 
themselves (334)., 'fThey had called upon Caius for the purpose 
of clearing themselves. /^here were some who consulted the 
kUerests of Caius. < 

839. Vocabulary 48. 

(Words following the construction of proper names of places.) 
At home, dbmi.» 

From home, dbmo. 

Home, dtfmmn.n 

At my, your, another man's Ac. > ^^ ^^^ ^^^ ^ ^^ 

house, ) 

On the eround 5 hmni (which may follow a verb of eithei 

* C rutormoiion). 

In the field, militi».o 

Out of doors ; out. ] ^'^ (•«« a verb of mdum) foris (after 

) other verbs). 
To dine out, foxis coenare. 



I SubUtandit: as rubvmlre, mucwrr^t govern a doA,^ they cannot be put in 
Qgieement with their object 

n DcfmniM is partly of the second, partly of the fourth, and has both forms in 
pome cases. The following line gives the forms not in use : 
Telle m«, mii, Tvtt, mt«, si declinare domus vis : 
but it has dofod for oX homo, &c. ; though not for * qfUu houaeJ 

» Also *to Pomponitu^s hou»e^^ Pomponii domum, wUhovJt a prepotUion: *to 
my fumgCf' domum meam. 

• Belli and^ mXl^iuB are used only in connection with ifiM: liiXo however ia 
pped for in wr. (%•) 



f 44. 340.] GERUNDS AND THE PARTICIPLE IN DUS. 123 

Into the country, nis. 

From the country, rure. 

In the country, ruri {less commonly^ rure). 

To return, redire, eo, iv, it. 

To return, turn back, revertere,vert, vers ; or reverti.P 

To be reconciled to, in gratiam redire cum aliquo. 

To confer an obligation on (i. e. > gratiam ii^e ab aliquo (Cie,)y apud ali 

on a superior), ) quern (I/tv.) ineo. 

Yq^^Jj <juventaBGtis,/.;juventa,»,/. Juven- 

' ' I tus, also * the youth.*? 

To cast forth, projicSre, jec, ject. 

To resolve, constituSre, stltu, stitut. 

.Approved (of valor), tried, spectatud (lit, seen). 

Exercise 52. 

340. Titus Manlius spent his youth in the country. ^ When 
TuUius returns (shall have returned) from the country, I will 
send him to you. 3 Quintus resolved to spend his life in the 
country «/ On the day after he returned from the country, he was 
accused-of treason, j He i^ the same in the field that (45 {I) ) he 
has always been at home, s He answered that Pomponia was sup- 
ping out. ' Might he nui nave spent his life in the country ? 
They {ilU) kept their word both at home and in the field. He 
set out into the country. * There is no doubt that he set out for 
the country in the evening. ' There is no doubt that he will cast 
these things out of doors. J DiodOrus lived many' years at my 
house.'' ^Balbus came to my house./ /Had you not rather be in 
your own house without' danger', than in anotfier-man's with' 
danger' ? There is no doubt that he was a person of most-ap- 
proved' merit (virtus) both at home and in the field (p. 14, 14). 
It cannot be denied that he has resolved to turn back home* There 
IB no doubt that you will confer an obligation upon CsBsar. Bal- 



P Redire properly expresses the eonHnued adirnivrhich intervenes between the 
momentaneous actions of the turning back (reverti), and the return or arrival 
home (revenire). (D.) Redire is said of one who returns after having arrived 
at his journey's end and finished his business ; reverti of one who turns back 
before he has completed his journey or business. {Emesti.) 

1 JuventOf youth =s the time of youth j juventtts (utis)j youth =s the time of 
youth; or, 'the youth' =:the young teen: JuverUaSy the goddess of youth* 
Cicero does not wejuventa! but lAvy and later writers use juventa for the tim§ 
of youth, inventus for the youih. (D.) 



124 THE CONSTllVUTION OF PARTICIPLES. [(45. 341-345 

bus is already reconciled to Caius (perf.). We must succour 
the miserable. There is no doubt that a Christian should succour 
the miserable.* There is no doubt that he threw these things 
(forth) on the ground agaifut his wiU, The Roman youth were 
of approved valour in war 



I XVIL 

§ 45. On Ihe construction of Participles. {Ablative absolute.) 

341. Every aUrilnUive word involves an assertion. 

Thus * a ftu house? = a house ukith tt afne one. * QiarUt^a hat 
as the hat whiA belong* to Quwletj &c. 

342. Thus then every participle makes an assertion in an indirect man- 
ner » it oMtcmet it aUribyJtivdy^ instead of atating it predicatively ; thaf 
is, as 2l formal propotUion. 

343. Whenever therefore it is convenient to express by a complete sentence 
the assertion (unaned by a participle, we may do so, connecting it with 
the principal sentence by a relatiffe pronoun, or a conjunction (or con- 
junctional ad?erb) of /tma, cauae^ /tmtto^ton, &c. 

344. On the other hand, subordinate sentences connected with a principal 
one by rdative prorunma or oonjwnditma (such as vohoii afters (f, atnctf, 
because^ aUhaughy &c.)} ^&y often be expressed by participlea, 

345. Since the use of the participle is far more extensive in Latin than in 
English, such sentences must very frequently be translated into Latin 
by participles. . By this construction the Latin gains more compact- 
ness and power of compression than the English possesses, but with 
an occasional vagueneaa from which our language is free.' 



* See page 121, note K 

' Since in the aOnbuivoe combination no particle of connection is expressed, 
Us relation to the principal ports of the sentence must be gathered from the 
general meaning of the author. An instructive example of the possibility of 
miscormecting occurs in a late review of Tait?a Horace (Quart. Rev. No. cxxiv.) 
Speaking of the passage, 

Causa fiiit pater his, qui macro pauper ageUo . 
Noluit in Flavt ludum me mittere, <&c. . (Sat. I. 6, 71.) 
the reviewer, understanding the meaning to be, because thefaJQur'a meanauDcre 
alenderj he wnddnot aend hia aon to a provincial adwoly hut carried him to Rome^ 
proceeds to consider, how education could be cheaper in the capital than in the 
country. If the critic had but construed the passage correctly, he would have 
Xound no grounds in it for speculating nhovLt foundaHon achoola, Stc. at Rome, 
^t have remained satitfied with the obvious meaning, that, * though tkafathct^t 



^45. 846^48.] thb construction of pabticiples. 125 

346. When a participle does not refer to a noun or pronoun 
already governed or governing in the sentence, it is put in the 
ablative in agreement with its own noun. 

(a) An ablative thus unconnected with the general structure of the 
clause in which it stands, is called an ablaiive absolute. 

(/?) In turning a subordinate sentence into the participial construc- 
tion, if therumunative of the subordinate sentence be not a noun i 
ring in the principal aentencCf or a pronoun representing such a i 
the construction must be the ablative absolute. 

347. Examples. 



(1) \ Nobody wfto considers this, will hesitate. 
^ i Nobody considering this, will hesitate. 

(2) < Nobody, if Caitts considers this, will escape. 



I. 

fobi. ai>s.) I Nobody, Cains considering this, will escape. 

^|v { Alexander, afler hehad taken Tyre, marched pn, <&c. '^ 
c Alexander, having taken Tyre, marched on, &c. t 

(2) ^ The King, when Alexander had taken Tjrre, retired, Ac. I 
(oN. abs,) \ The King, Tyre being taken by Alexander, retired, <&c. J 

>I1L 



/jx 5 I desire joys which wiU last for ever. 

( I desire joys about-ta-lasi for ever. 
(2) ( I desire heaven, because its joys will last for ever. 

he 



{<M.ab 



vr. 



(dbl, abs.) ( I desire heaven, itajoys being about-ta-last for ever. -^ 
(D i. ^^ ™^^^ many things, though they stare us in the face, 
c We miss many things staring ns in the fistce. 
( We miss many things,though some truths stare us in the face. 
. abs.) \ YfQ Q^sg many things, some truths staring us in the face. ^ 

348. VocABULAEY 49. (Preposition a, ah, abs.) 

A before consonants : ab before vowels and sometimes before the 
consonants in hUaris and j; abs is much less commonly used, except 
before ^e,* and never except before t and qu. 

The meanings of a are (1) from; (2) &y, governing the agent after 
pass, verbs; {2)qfter; (4) on or a/, of relative position ; {]S)on the side 
01 part of ; (6) in paint of; (7) the qffice held. 
From a boy, a puero. 

Immediately after the battle, confestim a prcslio.t 

In front, afronte(frons, tis,/. et m. ' forehead > 



r were slender,* he neDerthdess would not send his son to a school thai was 
iSutught good enough for the ehxidren of great centurions, <^., but resolved to gioe 
him the best education the capital could afford. 

■ Butler says that it is found before all the consonants except b. 

^ Pugna is any battle, from a single combat to the general engagement of large 
armies : prosliwn is an engagement of troops. Ddderlein seems to confine the 
meaning of prodium too much, when he makes it only the * occasional engage- 
ment of particular divisions of an army :' for Nepos says, ' illustrissimum est 
tfndium apud Platseas.* Acies when used of a battle is ^general engagement* 



180 THE CONSTRUCTION OF I'ARTICIFLES. [§ 4(5. 849| 350. 

In flank, a latere « (latus, Sris, n. ' aide^). 

In the rear, a tergo. 

At two milea dUtance ; two mUeS | ^ ^^^^^ passuum duobua 

So near home, tain prope a dttmo. 

To make for us, a nobis fiacere. 
To be on our aide; tostandon >^„^l,j^,j,jj^ 

our aide, ) 

To be of a man's party, ab aliquo sentire ; sens, sens. 

An amanuensis, a mKnu servus.^ 

Again from the beginning ; aU ) ^ j^^g,^ p^^^^, ^^ ^^j 

oyer again, ) 

Exercise 53. 

[Obs. a (p) prefixed to a clause, indicates that it is to be translated 
participially.] 

/ 849. Let us oppose the evils Pthat are coming'.^. Must we 

spare even » those who resist (us) ? [No.], ^''We must spare them 

even p though they should resist (us^y I must not despair p if 

(but a) few' stand on my side. ^TTimotheus increased by (his) 

many virtues the glory p which he had received from his father'. 

^Caius, p after he was banished, lived many years at Athens.y The 
father, p after his son was banished, lived many years at Carthage. 

^ We do not believe^ a liar, even p when he speaks the truth, j? The 
father turned back, p because he feared /or his son (2dl)./<4Caius, 
p who was accused of treason, has been acquitted of the capital 
charge.* V/ Why did you turn back so near home ?//;The Gauls 
attack the Romans in the rear/ ^riovistus posted himself at 
about two miles oflT. /fie took Massilia p after it had been block- 
aded two year*, .""^A treaty was ratified p after the city had been 
besieged for two years/< vDo not these (arguments) make for us 1 
/ 'I'^cipio immediately after the battle returned to the sea/^Almost 

^ from a boy he has devoted himself to literature. 



§ 46. The Partic^Je cwOinued, 
350. (a) The participle of the future in rus often expresses 
the purpose with which a person acts. 

« On iheJUmkt (a lateribus). 

"v So, a6 epiMiif a i|Bcretary : a raUonSbuBt a steward or accountant. 

« We believe a liar, not «Mn« &c. (ne — quidem). 



§46. 851-356.] thb constkuction of participles. 137 

351. (i^) The participle in dus oflen expresses the end or fmr> 
pa$e for which a thing is done. 

(a) This is especially the case after curare (to caute a thing to ht 
done) and verbs ofgioingj reeewingf tendings undertaking. In Engtish 
the injm. o/ctite is often used where the tnfin. ^^asaive would be cMowabUf 
out U9B common. 

{0) He gave them the country to dwell in. 

(Or) He gave them the country to be dwelt in (by them). 

352. Of two connected sentences, one may often be got rid of 
by turning its verb into a participle. 

Of course the more emphatic should be retained : for Instance that 
which is the ej'ect rather tlian that which is the cause; that which is 
the conseqtience rather than that which is the condition; that which is 
posterior in point oftimeTBXher than that which precedes it, 

353. It is a peculiarity of the English language, that we use a present par- 
ticiple when, though two events are dosety connected, yet that repre- 
sented by the participle must be over before the other begins. 

[C. XXX.] 05" A present participle must be translated by a 
peffect participle (or its substitute, quum with petf. or pluperf. 
sul^.) when the action expressed by it must be over, before that 
expressed by the verb begins. 

Examples. 

354. (a) I write to aid the student. } j 
(part,) I write going-to-aid the student (adjutums). ) 

(b) He gave them the country to c{t(7«U in. >lj^ 

(part,) He gave them the country to-he-dwdt-in {habiJtandum). ) 

355. He apprehended them and took them to Rome. > jtj^ 
(part,) He took them apprehended to Rome. i 

He took up the bundle w:idnnoS. >|y 
(obL dbs.) The bundle being takenup, he ran off. ) 
(Eng.) Leaping from his horse, he embraced him. 
(LaJt,) Having leapt from his horse, he embraced him. 

366. VOCABTTLAKY 50. 

To cause to be done; to have a^^i^^fi^ciendumcmSie. 

thing done, ) 

To contract to build, aliquid faciendum condudlve 

To leta thing out to be buUt by ) ^^^^ ^^^^^^^ ,^^^^ 

contract, > 

A sentence, sententia, e, /. 

To corrupt, corrump8re, rttp, rupt. 

To learn by heart, ediscCre, edidici (no mip,\ 

To repair, ref icSre, io, fgc, feet. 

To pull down, diruSre, ru, riit. 

Bridge, poiuf, pontis^ m. 



128 THE CONSTEtrcnON OP PARTICIPLES. [§ 47. 357-390 

Exercise 54. 

/ 357. Conon causes the walls p which had been pulled down b> 
Lysander,* p to be repaired. '. He undertook p to corrupt EpamL 
nondas with money. ; For how much will you undertake p io coT" 
rupi Balbus ?, /He had contracted p to build a bridge. . He gave 
Cyrus to Hatpagus z to be killed. /Carvilius, when"^ consul, had 
let out the temple {ades^) of Fortune {Fortuna) p to he built h^ 
contract. We give boys sentences Pto learn by heart (354, h). 
He has set out for Rome p to free his son from debt, 'f I cannot but 
think*^ you corrupted by gold/ ,^Forgetting«" the benefits which 
he received from Caius, hs took cruel measures against him.;^ (Be- 
gin with reht. clause ; 30, Sl.y/ile says that it is no^* necessary 
to make haste/ jj'here are some who^^' have tumed*back home. 



§ 47. The Participle continued. The Supines. 

358. (a) No Latin verb (except the deponents and neuter^ 
passives) has a participle of the perfect active. Hence this 
participle must be translated by the (passive) past participle 
put absolutely, or by quum with the perfect or pluperfect sub- 
junctive. 

359. (b) An English substantive may often be translated by a 
participle. 

It is very frequently necessary to translate abttr ad' nouns expressing 
a mode of action in this way ; as such nouns are comparatively seldom 
used in Latin. 

360. (e) So also the *parHcipial mbatanUv^ may often be translated not only 



X G. Lytandri. 

7 JEdea and tcmplum are both a temple : but in the former it is considered as 
the one prindpal building which is the dwelling-place of the Qod ; in the latter 
as the whOe temple^ with all its buildings, courts, &c. Mdea in the nn^. has 
generally the adj. sacra with it, or the name of the Deity : Jomsy Mnervti^, <&c. 
Fanum is a spot ctmsecrated for the erection of a temple by the augurs ; and 
hence the temple itself considered as a consecrated place, * a sanctuary.* Delur 
brum was either the temple itself; as a place of expiation and purification ; or, 
according to others, the part of the temple where the image of the Deity stood ; 
ihe shrine. Templum is from Tcuvta^ rifuroi (citQ, a portion *cut of* by the 
augurs ; dehd>rum probably from de-luoy to wash away: Ddderlein think* that 
fanum is the German J7ann, Engl. ban. 



n 47. 861-364. the pifticxple. 12& 

* 

by the partieiple in duM^ but by other participles. This is a oommos 

way of translating it when it is under the goyemment of ^wWumt.^ 

961. After *tohmr* and ^totee* tho presmt mfin, acHoe must be translated 

into Latin by the present partieiple active, 

362. When the participle of an dbh dbsol. is * hemgy it is 

omitted in Latin, and two suhstantiveSy or a substantive and ad* 

iectzve, are put together in the ablative. 

362.*. The supine in um (act,) foUows verbs o{ moHan : the supine in u (vir- 
tually, though not really poMs.) follows a few adjectives (such as bett, 
diffteuUf <&c.)} and the substantives^hs, nefas^ &c. 
a) The supine in um with ire means ^ to go abovi to^^ &c., implying efforf 
and exertion. 

363. (a) {Eng.) Csesar, having crossed the Rubicon, marched to Rome. 

(Lot ) \ Caesar, the Rubicon being crossed, marched to Rome. 

I or, Csesar, token he had crossed the Rubicon, marched to Rome 
(5) 1. Tarquinius, after his banishmentiiom Rome, &c. 
Tarqulnius, being banished from Rome. . 
2. After the banishnj'eni of Tarquinius, consuls were elected. ^I. 
{M. Ota.) Tarquirdu, bting banUlud ) ^^^^^ ^^^^ ^^^^^ 
{or) After Tarquinius bant^ed, > 
(Tarquinio expulso ; or, post Tarquinium expulsum.) 

if T-^ ^"^ o" *'°^^o° °^ ^"'«' \ a Rom» condirt. l U 

{Juat^) JpTOTn Rome founded, ) ) 

(So, ante Romam conditam, <&c.) 

(Eng) By ihcpraeticc of Virtue, > ,^^ ^^ 

{Lot,) By yirtue practised, ) 

(Virtute colendS, by practising virtue.) 

(Eng.) A reward for having despised the deity; or, for contempt of the 

deity. 

(Lot. A reward of ( = for) the deify despised (spreti numvUs merces). 

(c) (Eng.) He assists others toithout robbing himself. 

(Lot.) He assists others, not robbing himself (se ipsum non i^polians). 

(Eng.) He goes away tvUhout your perceiving it. 

(Ijat.) He goes away, younot perceiving it (te non sentiente), 

(Eng.) He goes away without scuting any body. 

(Lot.) He goes away, nobody being saluted (nenUnei salutato). 

(Eng.) He condemns him without hearing him. 

(Lot.) He condemns him tmheard linaudUum). 

864. VOCABTTLAEY 51. 
At the suggestion of the Magi, Magis auctoribus (auetor, an adviser) 

Under your guidance. \ ^ ^^^ <y^^ ^^^ ^^ ^^^^^"^ • ^"^ "** 

C cis, m. et/.) 

In the reign of Herod, HerOde rege.* 

t On neminis, nemine, see the index under * Nobody.* 
• Or, Herode regnante. If the reign were that of a Roman Emperor, tmpsr 
ante must be used. . 

6* 



180 THE PARTICIPLE. [§47. 365, 8CM) 

Against the will of Caiiu, Caio invito. 

In the life-time of Augustus, Augusto vlyo. 

I haTe completed the work, opus absolutum habeo.^ 

I plainly see through his design, consilium ejus perspectum habeo. 

It caxmot be said without impiety, nSfas eat dictu. 

It may be said without impiety, fas est dictu. 

Hard to find, dlffidHs inyentu. 

365. [C. mi.] OCT The English present part, act, is gene- 
rally translated by the Latin past parUc. when the verb ifl 
deponent. 

This arises from the principle given in 353, and from this: that thi!> 
Romans spoke of a,fedayf as over, the moment it had beenfdt ; and of 
a mental operation as over^ the moment it wu performed; whereas im 
should describe both as preeent ; as now going on. 

Exercise 55. 

[Which word for to light should be used of a funeral pile ? 299, h.] 
/ 366. p If nature opposes, you will strive to no purpose..^ P^tha 
goras came inta Italy p in the reign of Tarquinius Superbus. 
'?p After Dion (G. Dianis) was killed at Syracuse, Dionysius 
gained possession of the city// -^neas, p after the taking of Troy 
Dy the Greeks, came into Italy.. ) The slave, having lighted the 
funeral pile, cast himself at his master's feet.'* ;^They returned 
to Veii p without waiting for the army of the Romans. '^'They 
could scarcely be restrained from"' condemning you t<S death 
without hearing you, ^ At the suggestion of Caius, Balbus pre- 
tended to be mad.» fl woo, afraid that I do not®^ see through Balbus's 
design. ''tThe son 'died p after the banishment of his fathery /He 
pretends that he has finished the work/ Zl have now finished the 
work which I promised to perform* (Invert).' ^^^ After the taking 
of Massilia by storm^ a league was made (Express post)./ /Was 
(then} man bom p to drink wine ? / Tou have recovered from a 
severe disease p by drinking water. - ; j heard Caius cry out, that it 
toas aU over with the army/ 7ls virtue hard to find ? [No.]/ ^ou 
will do what shall seem best to be done/-/Why do you go about to 
destroy yourself Ji^hey sent to Delphi, to consult (sup.) what 
should be done. 



• Frotfl this idiom, which dwells more on the poaseasion of the completed ac- 
tion than on its mere completion, arose the perfect with have in our own and other 
modem languages. 



§ 48. 367-378.] pronouns. 181 

XVIII. 

§48. Pronouns. 

'367. (a) * Otwi,' when it is to be more strongly expressed than 
by meuSy tuus, suus, dsc, must be translated by ipsius or iptorum 
(as one or more are meant) after those pronouns. 

368. (J) Selfy -"^elvesy &c., in an oblique case are often trans- 
lated by ipse and a personal pronoun together ; the ipse being in 
the nom. if the meaning is that that agent did it ; in the case of 
the personal pronoun, if his doing it to himself is the stronger 
notion. 

369. Properly avi relates to the nominative case of its own vsrb ; but it 
may be used, in a dependent clause, for the nominative of the principal 
verb, when either the grammar or the sense would prevent its being re- 
ferred to the verb of its own clause. 

370. (c) Hence in a dependent sentence, that expresses some 
thought or purpose of the subject of the principal sentence — 

His, him, her, their, denoting the nominative of the principal 
sentence, should be translated by sui or suus, whenever (from the 
grammar or the obvious sense) there would be no danger of under- 
standing it to mean the nominative of its own verb. 

His, him, her, their, denoting the nominative of the principal 
sentence, must be translated by ipse, when there would be danger 
of understanding sui or suus to mean the nominative of its own 
verb. 

371. {d) Suus often refers to an oblique case, especially when 
quisque or unusquisque is used. • 

372. Obs. NostrUm amd vestrflm are to be used (not nottriy veatri) when 
* of U8y* * of you* ss^autqf us,' *otU qfyou;' that is to say, after par(i- 
tiveB (including numerals, comparaiivcs, and 9tq)erlcUives).^ 

373. (a) Mesiipsius cul^Si, My own fauU. 

Nostra ipsorum culpa. Our own fault, 
(b) JIfe* ipse consOlor, / console myself. 

Se ipsos onmes nature diligunt, All men naturally 
love themselves. 

b Nostriim and vestriimare also used when they have omnium in agreement; 
omnium nostrUm, Ac, 
• The cases of the personal pronouns (except tu and the genitives plural} are 



182 PRONOims. [§48. 374. 

(c) Cicero effecerat, ut Q. Curius consilia Catilinse sUn 
proderet, Cicero had induced Q. Curius to betray 
to him (Cicero) the designs of Catiline. 

(It being cbvUmaiy abturd to Bappose that Curias was to betray then 
to Curm».) 

Persse, mortuo Alexandro, non alium, qui imperaret 

tpsisy digniorem fiiisse ccmfitebantur, The Persians^ 

after the death rf Alexander, confessed that nobody 

had ever better deserved to rule over them, 

( Qui imperaret sibl, might have meant * a fitter peraon to gcnem himself.') 

{d) Hannibalem sui cives e civitate ejecerunt, Hannibal 
was banished by his feUow-citizens, 

374. Vocabulary 52. 

To befall, happen, accid5re,«i cid, (dai). 

To happen, turn out, evenire, ven, vent. 

To happen (of fortunate events), ^continggre, tig, tact, {dot.). 

It was this man's good fortune, huic contigit ut, &c. 

To restore liberty to his country, patriam in libertatem vindicire. 



To defend (a ffiing or Person if }^^^^^ fend,fenB. 

ocfuoZ^y attacked), ) ^ ' 

To defend (a thing or peraon^ if^ 

and whenever it is attacked }) > tueri,* tuitus et t&tus. 

to take under one's protection, ) 
His own friends, or adherents, sui (plur.). 
For its own sake, propter sese. 



sometimes strengthened by * met* to signify edft with or without ipee: mihimei 
ipsij aibimet ipsiSy nobiamet ipaiay de memet ipaOf &c. Se is also doubled into aeae : 
for tumeti tute is add. Matthise says, that Cic. never puts ipae in the nom. after 
this appended met. 

d Accldire and evenJre are said of any occurrences whatever ; con/tn^^e, o5- 
venircj and ohtingerey only of fortimate ones. But cuxidentia are occurrences 
that take tta by aurpriae ; ecenientia those that are expected. Accidentia are repre- 
sented as the eiTects of chance; eoenientia as the results of preceding actions or 
events; contingentia as favours conferred upon us by good fortune ; obtvngenHa 
and obvenientia as advantages/o/Zms" to our lot. (D.) Prom the use ofconting&rt 
to describe the happening of fortunate occurrences, aceidere would come to bo 
^aneraUy used of unfortunate ones. 

• Neither is in itself stronger than the other ; for as the defendena shows 
more apirii and atrength in resisting an actual danger, bo the tiuna shows moi 
care and afection in endeavouring to prevent an anticipated one. (D.) 



5 49. 375-377.] pkonouws. 133 

Exercise 56. 

[How is Uirough to be translated, when it expresses the cause ? (261 )] 
/ 375. The mind is a part of mejj The better part of you is 
Immortal..^. Let none of us doubt that it is expedient to obey the 
laws of virtue.i-^ Which of you is believed ? oMany evils have 
befallen me through (ahh) my own fault./ Do not many evils 
happen to us by our own fault ? / All men favour themselves. 

^^ These evils may have happened to us (129 (a) ) through our own 
fault. '^' It cannot be denied that the mind is a part of ourselves 
{pfus),/i)\ will pray Caius to take my cause under Ms protection, 

V Ought he not to have commanded himself $C2/< is not every man who 
can command himselfy^'He is an enemy to himself^/^e should 
practise justice for its own sake./iThey prayed Artabazus to take 
their' cause under his protection/^He was called king by his 
own adherents./^; jft was this man's good fortune to restore liberty 
to his country. ^* I fear that he will not be able to restore liberty 
to his country^ /They ask to be allowed to take all their property 
with themy ^TKere are some^*' who favour themselves. 



§ 49. Pronouns continued. (Is, hie, iste, ille.) 

376. (a) He, she, it ; they, are translated by is, ea, id, when 
they merely stand for a person or thing either before mentioned or 
about to be described by a relative clause. 

* /*,' is whoUy without emphasis, or the power of diatmgiiUking one 
object from another. One of its main duties is to act as a mere ante* 
cedent to the relative.* 

377. When used to distinguish objects, hie denotes the nearest, 

Ule the most remote, iste that which is the nearest to the party 

addressed. 

e) late may be considered as the demonstrative of the second person = 
* that qf yourSf* ' that which is knoioti to (or concerM) you* 



{ Ipaorum: for sruam might mean, they prayed him to support hu own 
cause. 

8 </« qui pugnat' means *the combatant* or *a cornbatant* (accordingly af 
he has been mentioned, or not mentioned before): while 'Ate qui pugnal, 
' CU qui pugnat,' signify respectively *(fU9 combatant,' * yonder combatant* 



134 PBONOUNS. [§ 49. 378-384. 

378. From this power of denoting comparatiye neameM and remoteruM 
(whether in apace or time)^ hie and tUe are used to discriminate 
between the different words that form the subject of diBcourse. Thus 
then, 

Of two things already mentioned, hie relates to the nearer, the 

latter ; iUe to the more remote, the former.^ 

Ste, referring to what immecUatdy prtcedea, must occupy a very 
early, if not the first place in its sentence. 

379. While hie refers to what has just come from the pen (or mouth)^ 
Hie may be opposed to it in another direction, and introduce some new 
matter. 

380. So also hie may refer to uhat foUou>»i but it must then descend from 
its prominent place at the beginning of the sentence, to occupy one 

' equally emphatic either at, or very near, the end. 

381. ^ nUy* from relating to the pastf may denote that which has long been 
known, uheiher favourably or unfavourably, 

(b) Here iUei ssihe well known ; the famous, 

382. In Utters^ iste relates to the place where ihe person addressed is 
residing, and to the things that concern him : in trials^ iste denotes the 
opposite party y as long as he is directly addressed; but when the 
speaker turns to the judges, he may use Mc to denote the opposite 
party. (G.) 

As iUe may mean ^whom all krcow,* so iste may mean 'whom you 
knoWf* whether for good or not.k So also hie may mean * whom you or 
/ see before us.* 

383. (d) ' Hie ' is used before * quidem,' where we use * it is 
true,' * indeed,' to make some partial concession, to be followed by 
a « hut.' 

384. (a) Dionysius servus meus aufOgit : is est in provincid. 

t\ik, Dionysius, a slave of mine., has run away : he 
is in your province, 
(h) Medea ilia. The famous Medea. Magnus ille Alex- 
ander, The celebrated Alexander the Great, 



h Of the passages where hie relates-to the more remote word of a sentence, all 
probably may be explained by one or other of these considerations . — (1) The 
well-known order of the actual occurrence or existence of the things may be re- 
versed in the sentence. (G.) (2) Etc may denote what is before our eyes. (3) 
Or hie may denote ' id de quo potissimum agimus.* {Raschig ad Liv. xxiv. 29.) 

I IUe can never perform the part of a mere antecedent to the relative ( = w) ; 
and the employment of hie for this purpose must be confined to those cases 
where the relative Ciause precedes (see 30, (c) ), so that here too it Buppoits itfl 
ordinary character of referring to what has just been mentioned. 

k In this way iste is qfien used to express contempt, but by no means always. 



549. 385, 380.] fBONOTOS. 185 

(c) Ista, civitas, That state of yours. 

(d) Non sine ratione iUe quidem, sed tamen, &c., Nol 

without reason it is true, hit yet, &c. 

385. VOCABULAEY 53. 

And that too, et ia;i isque ; et idem, idemque. 

Nor that ; and that too not, nee is. 

r isn demum (that at lengthy as if the oth<* 
That only, ? ers had been travelled through before 

f this was arrived at). 

To know, scire," sciv, scit. 

To know := to be acquainted < novisse, nosse (perf. of noscere, to learn 

with, c to know, to make acquaintance with). 

To know thoroughly by expeO«^^^"®» ^ (properly, to be hard, as a 

rience; tobeconversantwith, { ^^^ ^^°,""^« *»y '"^^^ "^"^^ ^' 
J hour; acp.). 

r adimSreo (of good things) eximSre (of 
To take away, ) bad things) em, empt. They govern 

( the dot. of that/ram which. 
To make a beginning with, facSre initium a. 

Of a common kind, vulgaris, is, e. 

Exercise 57. 

386/He has killed both his father and his mother ; the former 
by poison, the latter by starvation.^ What prevents him from 
making a beginning toith himself? ^This™ only is true wisdom, 
to command oneself.^^/'^hat" true wisdom is, the wise only know. 
-^Do you know Caius ?^I will ask what true wisdom is. yAt how 
much is that state of yours to be valued, from which the good and 
wise have been banished ? f*l doubt whether this is true happiness 
or not,4 I have had an interview with Caius : he says that he has 



1 Some scholars doubt the existence of the forms it and Hm. Cfrotefend^vea 
dat. ei» (also iia) : Zumpt (in his eighth edit.) u (ei), iia {eia) ; adding that the 
former are the more common, and generally written in MSS. with a single {. 

■ When iSf hie, or qiti, &c, stands as the subject of an apposition-verb (150), it 
generally agrees with the following noim, where we might suppose it to agree 
with * thing.* [" Ea demirni est yemfelicitaa,"] 

B Scire relates to a. proposition; if followed by an accusative only, it is a netU, 
pronouny or nSUL It expresses actually acquired knowledge, Nosse is to have 
become acquainted with the signs and marks by which a thing may be known i 
It * describes therefore knowledge as the result of external or internal perception^ 
' R.) Hence nosse is often followed by the accusative of a noun. 

o Demitur quidlibet ; adimuntwr bona \ eximuntur mala. (D.) 



186 PROifOTTNS. §49. 387,388. 

not seen the ma.n//fDo not take away from me my liberty ^^/That 
(famous) Plato has taken away from me all fear of death/;2!^polIa 
admonishes us to become acquainted with ourselvesy^It is not 
every one who can»» know himself./^hose good thmgs which 
can be taken away, are not really good things, p/^aving set my 
aon^ at liberty, he has taken away all my? care^^ have been 
praised by a good man it is true (d), but (one who is) unskilled 
in these matters./^hristians after death will enjoy a happy life, 
and that too an eternal one.//He has always devoted himself to 
literature, and that too of no'* common kind. 

887. VOCABULAEY 54. 

Also, (may often be translated by) idem.' 

This or that, as well as some other, et ipse. 
Where you are ; in your neigh- > ^^^ 

bourhood, 5 

Even or very {wUh that), ipse ; illud ipsum* (* even that *). 

To join battle with, to give bat- > ^^^ committSre cmn. 

tie to, > 

1 o your neighbourhood ; to whew ) j^j ^ ^^^^^ 

you are, 3 

Prom yourneighborurhood ; from > jgfin« 

where you are, • J ' 

Proud, superbus, a, um. 

Exercise 58. 

IHow must ^lambeUcved* be translated 1 285. J 
3885/Those whom we love, we also wish to be happy .^Lel 
him who commands others, learn also to command himself.^Are 
(then) liars believed in your neighbourhood ?>^hose who come 
from your neighbourhood, say that you are proudvJ^t is not 
becoming for*' a Christian to be proud. ^I had already set out to 



P Say : * are not true good (things).' 

« Say : * all caxe Jrom me.* 

' Nihil est liberale, quod non uiem justum (which is not adjust). 

e To justify the use of iUe (to denote am/ thing, provided it did not immediakfy 
precede) there must always be an intermediate object to which hie is applicable; 
yet, not if the remote event be one of general notoriety. " fluid T, Albutiual 
nonne equissimo animo Athenis ezsul philosophabatur 7 cui tamen Ultut iptum 
numquam accidisset si, Ac," {De FHn, v. 108.) 

t Adverbs of motion to a place end in or tic ; of motion^^trnt^ in inc^ ndc 



^50. 389-391.] PRONotms. * 131 

your neighbourhood. TEven that would never have befallen me^ 
in your lifetime, S^ K Christian may not be proud. ^Do not join 
ha.ii\e,/^ fear the Romans will not be willing to join battle with 
the Gauls ,y /it cannot be denied that justice should be practised 
for its own sake./jZIt remains, that I should give battle to the 
Gaulsw/Jit follows, that it is a difficult thing to know oneself/i/I 
know that in^our neighbourhood you both are wise and seem 
(so.)/JSuch*®> a war was undertaken, as Rome had never before 
seen. 



§50. Pronouns continued. (On the translation of *any.') 

389. ' Any ' when all are excluded is quisquam or uUus. 

390. ' Any ' when all are included is quivis^ or quilihet. 

(a) All are excluded in sentences that are really or virtually^ negative ; 

and after vix {scaTcely\ sine {wWumt), 
(fi) All are included when * any * means * any you pleage^' * every, ^ 
(y) * duisquam * is used tnihout, * ullus ' generally tDtth a substantive. 
Quisquam may however be used with designations of men {honu\ 

ctv»), <&c. 

391. (h) ^ Any' after si, nisi, num, ne, quo, quanto, is the in- 
definite quis ;" of which the feminine singular and neut. plur. are 
quce or qua, after si, num, ne (and ec).* 

V In qtdvia (and vJtervia) a deliberaie and thoughtful choice is supposed, in qui- 
libet (and uterltbet) a blind and inconsiderate one. — Quilibet generally carries 
with it some expression of contempt. (D. after LachTnannJ) 

▼ Sentences that are virtually negative (that is^ aa good as negative) are (1) 
such questions as expect the answer *no,* and are asked not for information but 
assent! thus, * can any man believe this ? ' = 'no man surely can believe this ;' 
(2) cffnvparaHve sentences; ' he was taller than any of his friends' :s ^ none of his 
friends was so tali as he.'— With respect to «m«, aliquis should follow it in a 
Tiegative sentence (in which it is to be considered positive) j and uUus in a positive 
sentence (in which it is to be considered negative). (6.) 

w Quisquam sometimes follows «i, but it then generally implies that the exist- 
ence of the exception is very doubtful. And even without si it is used to ex- 
press any single person or thing. " duamdiu quisquam erit, qui te audeaf 
defendere, vives." Such expressions as * sine omni cvltV for *sine uUa curd 
are only found in Plautus and Terence, In Cicero * sine omni cmV would 
mean * without all (imaginable) care.' 

* Whether qtuB or qua should be preferred, is a disputed point. The poets 
use qua -with few exceptions. (Z.) The form qui is also used in the sing, nom, 
nasc, : si qui, ecqui. Even aliqwi ( = aliquis) is found in a few passages ol 
Gioero. 



188 * PBONOUNS. [§50. 392-396. 

(But aUqidi follows these particles when the any or mmu U emphaiK.) 

392. ' Any ' is translated by aliquis^ or quispiam, when it means 
^nome one or other,' * some.^ 

393. ((2) The indefinite article ^a ' may sometimes be trans- 
lated by quidam, aJiquis, or qui8piam,y when ^ a certain ' or < «)in« ' 
might be substituted for * aJ 

394. («) iVefcto ^uit (the quU agreeing with the snbst.) is sometimes used fot 
quidam, but it generally carries with it some notion of contempt or ol 
indifferenee at least. 

(Eng,) Henry, Charles and John. 

(Lot,) Henry, Charles, John. Or^ Henry and Charies and John. 

895. (a) Solis candor illustrior est quam uUius ignis, The 
brightness of the sun is more intense than that of any 
firs. 
An quisquam potest sine perturbatione mentis irasci ? 
Can {then) any man j^ angry without some mental 
agnation? 
{b) Num quis irascitur infantibus ? Is any ^oefjf a^^grsf 
toith infants ? 

(c) Quodlibet pro patri^, parentibus, amicis, adire peri. 

culum .... oportet, We ought to encounter any 
danger for our country ^ our parents^ and our 
friends. 
Mihi quidvis sat est, Any thing is enough for me* 

(d) Agricola qmspiam^ Some husbandman (any, or a, hts- 

bandmanj. Pictor aUqmsy Any, or a, painter. 

(e) Prope me hie nescio quis loquitur, Some body or 

other is talking here near me. 

390. VOCABTTLAST 55. 

Everybody ?qiiisque,» qnaeque, quodque; Q. cu- 

5 jusque. 



s If *soine^ is emphatic = some at leaat, though but 2itt^ or of a bad quaKty, 
aliquig should be used. 

y When quidam expresses 'a' it implies * a certain* one, though it is unne- 
cessary, perhaps impossible, to name it : quispiam and aliqui* do not imply an 
allusion to & particular individual. 

■ Quiaque is a sort of enclitic, and therefore never stands at the beginning of 
A sentence in prose, and seldom even in poetry. The corresponding tmphaik 
form is ' unnuquisque^* * each particular one,* 



9 60. 397.] PBOMOUMS. 189 , 

Every body who ; whoever. i l"^"^ 9"^*»»*'* (<l^^^ 

i every thing thai; whatever). 

Whatever; every-that, J quicunque,-^ quDBCunque, quodcimquei 

C G. cujuscunque, &c. 
Why? quid! 

How? qui ? 

^w^'^^ * ^^^^ ^^ ^°^" \ ^^"^^ ^"^"^^ ^^"°^ ' ^' ^^^^^ 
At onoe— and, idem— idem, b 

Any one man, qidvis unu8« 

Take care; see that, videne. 

Rashly; inconsiderately ; without ) ^^^5^^ 

sufficient reason, 5 

What? quid? 

Some how or other, nescio quomtfdo. 

Exercise 59. 
397/Can (then)« any man govern the seasons ?JX Take care 
not to be angry with any body without sufficient reason. ^Take 
care to do nothing inconsiderately v^an (then) any ofyou govern 
the seasons ? /Hardly any one cangovem himself !^Every man 
ought to defend his own^ friends.'lT^ill any man hesitate to shed 
his blood for his country ?/This might have happened to any 
body .^ Shall (then) any thing deter me from encountering'^ any 
danger (whatever) for my country' and my parents^ l/Ols not any 
thing enough for Balbus 'i/Ale is braver than any (890, v) of the 
Gaulsy«2lf any one breaks his word for the sake of his friend, he 
sina^jSDo you (then) believe that any Roman (you please) is 
braver than any Greek l/lfi^u may say any thing (you please) 
here./lWhatever things are in the whole (onmis) world, belong 
to men./^Some are the slaves of glory, others of money.//fiow 
does it happen that you (pi.) do not know this ?^^1V^hat ! do not 
all understand this l/^TThere are some who believe any body. 



* QttunmgtM is the adjective form of ^tttf^tttf. 

b Fuere quidam qui iidem ornate, iidem versnte dicerent (Z.) 

« Though num expects the answerno, it does not imply that the answer 'yet* 
cannot possibly be given, as ' on ' does. * An qmequam, * is therefore more com- 
mon than *num quisquam,* and stronger than *nii9ii quit,* 

4 Qttu^ue should immediately follow cases of sui or «uti«, and numnrdU 
'decimus quia^ue, every tenth rnq^). 



1 140 PRONOUNS. [§ 51. d9d-4(Kft. 

§ 51. Pronouns continued. {On the prefixes and aOTixes of 
the interrogatives.) 

398. (a) The syllable ec often appears as a prefix, and the syl* 
lable nam as an qfix, to interrogative pronouns and adverbs. 

The 'ec' is from en! em! hem! a particle calling for attention to 
what is going to be said. ' Nam * is properly namely, by name ; bo that 
^ptienam is, who by name ; name or tell me, toho, {Haritmg.) 

The en stands alone in, ^En unquam cuiquam contumeliosius audistis 
lactam i^juriam, &cA * ( Ter, Phorm. 11. 3.) Nam le appended to quia^ 
qitidf ubif numy Ac 

399. (h) < Always ' afler one superlative and before another, 

may be translated by quisque^ agreeing with the same substantive 

that the superlatives agree with. 

The eingtUar is generally to be used, when a substantive is not to be 
expressed in Latin. 

400. (a) Ecquid* sentitis in quanto contemtu vivatis ? Do you 

perceive at all (or, perchance) in what contempt you 

are living ? 
Num quidnam novi accidit ? Has any thing fresh 

occurred ? 
(h) Optimum quidque rarissimum est, The lest things are 

always the rarest. 
Altissima qtusque flumina minimo sono labuntur, T^ 

deepest rivers elwoysJUno with the least sound. 

(c) Doctissimus quisque, All <Ae most learned men* 

(d) Aliud alii natura iter ostendit. Nature points out one 

path to one man, another to another, 
Aliud alio fertur. One thing is home in one direction^ 
another in another. 

401. (Eng.) One Balbus. {LaJt.) A certain Balbus. (Quidam.) 
(Eng,) One does one thing, another anotherj 

{Lai,) Another does another thing. 

402. Vocabulary 56. 

Little = but or too litde, paium (with genit.). 



« JBie ( = en) prefixed to quisj quid^ qtusndOy &c., puts a question doubtingly^ 
but intimates that the answer *no* in rather expected. It often gives a tone of 
impatience to the inquiry. 

f In a sentence of this kind, one— one must be translated by <Uku9-^aHit» 
and another-^anotherhe untranslated. 



§ fil. 402.] PRONOUNS. 141 

A little = some, but not much, paulum, or paultUum. 
''Z^U.. '"""''' --j.Hq««.tum(wl.h^). 
In the mean time, interim. 

Meanwhile ; all that time, interea.' 

Sometimes s= now and then (ap- 1 
yroachingi as compared with I 
WMnunquam, to the notion of ( i^^terdum. 
huJt 9ddom). J 

Sometimes (approaching to thej^^^^^^^^ aHquandoh (the last beh 
notion of pretty oflm), ) *°S property some time or other, and 

^ often therefore equivalent to at lad),i 
funquam (with negaHoes)*, aliquando 
I (when it means, at aome one time, be 
Ever, ^ it when it may) ;quando (after «,»!«, 

1n«, Ac, when the ever is not em« 
phatic).k • 

In a different direction ; to jome ) ^^ ^oq. .x 
other place, > v i ;• 

From a different direction, aliunde. 

c usquam,! allquo, quo (to be used accord- 
Any where sz any whither, < ing to the Rules for ' any .* See ilfi|i^ 

' Index I). 
Nowhere or whither, nusquam. 

StrengtiL J vires, virium, Ac. (in ting. * forced 

C < violence' ; vis, vim, vi). 
J^ Rarius inierdum quam nonnunquam esse memento. 

' Interea refers to an event continuing during the whole interval : interim to 
one that occurs at aome time or timea within that interval. Hence, as Doderlein 
observes, in negatvoe sentences interea is the regular word, as the poaaibHitif 
and txpectaiion of a thing's happening is always of some duration. 

k The syllable oZt, whether as prefix or termination, always denotes qualify. 
Thus * si aUquia adest,' is, * if there be any one present, be he who or what he may ^ 
whereas ^ si quiagiuim adest ' would mean ' if there be but one present, no matter 
whether mjore or not.' (G.) Aliquanda is properly * aJt one time, whether near 
or far off^ but as a thing's once happening may prove the poaaibUify of its often 
happening, aUgtumdo is often equivalent to aliquuttiea. But in the golden age it 
is used by preference of things that had better happen never, (D ) 

i It gets this meaning from its being implied by the nature of the sentence 
that no early time remains. In this meaning it is often joined with tandem 
( ;= tarn demum. D.). 

k Hence 'ever' =: at any time, is translated by unquam, ahquando, or 
quando, according as ^any^ would be translated under the same circumstances, 
by tUlua, aliquia, or quia. Si quia, ai quando are nearly equivalent to whoever^ 
idienecer, 

1 Uaquam is more regularly the 'any where' of rest; but is used after verbs 
•9f motion, as we use where. 



142 COHFAHISONS. § 52. 403, 404. 

Exercise 60. 

[*Ever ' after whether^ when marked as emphatic, is to be translated 
hy eoquando, 

< Perchance^^ after whdher^ is to be translated by the addition of qwd 
to en or num : ecquid^ numquid. 

When < «96r ' and < any ' are marked as emphatic Qn other cases) they 
are not to be translated by quandot quis. 

* A ' emphatic is to be translated by o. pronoun,] 

403/What prevents us from banishing every tenth man ?jgWe 
have lost some considerable time by playing, ^^They *ay that they 
shall never^ die»i^^We shall all die some time or other.^^TThe best 
men always (5) die with the most resignation.^In the mean time 
one Octavius called upon me at my own house, t^one of you 
called up(A me all that time'.^ There is no one lout (44, (2) ) is 
sometimes mistaken.^ Most' of us are pretty often, all of tis are 
sometimes'deceived (p. 14, 15, ft)./^Which is the wiser, Caius or 
Balbus ?y/Does any man believe liars 1/fin the mean time a^ 
(893) greater fear seized upon the soldiersy^ hear that there is 
a' greater fear in the city/^f you ever return (sJiaU have 
returned) home, you will unaerstand the^e things^^^ave you 
ever' heard this from any body ? [No.],^f you are setting out 
any where, return in the evening./^Sre you going to set out to 
some other place ^jTNowhere/l^me considerable time has been 
lost (in) asking my friends.y^ome persons devote themselves to 
one thing, others to another^Virtue is not of such*®* strength a* 
to defend herself. *f2/Have you perchance two countries Ijiil^et 
me know whether I shall ever^ see youj^^here were some who 
had two countries. 



XIX 
§ 52. Comparison. 

404. (a) The regular particle of comparison Is quam {than). The things com* 
pared will of course be in the Kimc cote, 

(a) When the same noun belongs to each member of the comparison, it 
is omitted in one. In English we express it in the^rs^ clause, and use 
the pronoun < that * for it in the second. This ' that ' is not to be trans- 
lated into Latin. 



§52. 405-409.] comparisons. 143 

405. (h) Sometiines quam is omitted, and the following noun 
put in the ablative.'^ 

(a) As a rule, the ablative should not be used in this way, ezeept where 
the same noun would follow quam in the norninatvoe* Sometimes how- 
ever the aJblaiwef especially of prtnunmaf is used for the accttaative after 
quam. In the construction of the ace, with infin, this would be regular. 

(0) Moreover, the construction with the ablative should not be used, un- 
less the object with which another is compared, actually poegestes ths 
property^ in question. 

406. (c) Comparatives and superlatives are often accompanied 
by ablatives, expressing hy how much one thing exceeds or falls 
short of another. 

407. {d) The English the— the {^by how muck— by ao much) are expressed In 

Latin by quarUo—tanto ; quo-H!o or hoc, 

A sentence of this kind may also be expressed by ut quieque with a 
superlative, followed by iia with another. 

408. * Sommjohat ' and < too ' with the positive are expressed by the compar 
rative, when those adverbs are not emphatic. And sometimes an emr 
photic positive is expressed by the comparative. 

409. (a) Europa minor est, quam Asia, Europe is less than 

Asia, 
(h) Non ego hac node longiorem vidi, I have not seen a 
longer night than this. 

(c) Multo difficilius, Much more difficult. 

(d) Eo minor est arcus, quo altior est sol. The higher the 

sun iSf the less is the arc. 
Tanto brevius omne tempus, quanto fclicius est. The 

happier any time is, the shorter it is (i. e. appears). 
Ut quisque est vir optimus, ita difficillime esse alios 

impr6bos suspicatur. The better a man is, the more 

difficulty he has in suspecting that others are 

wicked. 

(e) Romani bella qusedam fortius quam felicius gesse- 

runt, The Romans carried on same wars vnth more 
courage than success. 
Pestilentia minadar quam pemiciosior, A pestilence 

» If I say a person is ^aapientior Caio,* I ascribe wisdom to CaktB, though 
less of it than to any other person. If I say he Is * sapientlor qtuan CaiuOf* I 
do not necessarily ascribe to Coius any wisdom at all. 



144 coMPABisoNS. [§52. 410. 

more alamdng than (really) fatal (or, alarming 

rather than destructive). 
(/) Proelium majus quam pro numero hostium editur, A 

severer battle is fought than could have been ex- 
• pected from the (small) number of the enemy. (Or, 

a battle unusually severe for the number of the 

enemy.) 
Alexander consedit regidi selldi multo excelsiore quam 

pro habitu corporis, Alexander sat dawn on the 

royal chairs which was &r too high fi>r his stature. 
(g) Res graviores (important). Morbi graviores (se- 

vere). 

410. Vocabulary 57. 
Passionate, iiacundus, a, um. 

Angry, iratns, a, um. 

Considerably more, aliquanto plus (see 402). 

Many times as great, multis partibus msjor. 

Are hard to be avoided, or diffi- ) ^^^^ vitantur. 

cult to avoid, ) 

Hidden, occultus, a, um (partie, of occtUSro). 

Snares, insidjae, arum,/. 

Frequent, crdber, bra, brum ; firequens,n tis. 

Loquacious, loquaz, Scis. 

Old age, senectus, utis, /. 

Difference, distantia, se,/. 

Worse, P«jor, or, us {Uugood ffum. deterior). 

(Words by which superlatives are strengthened). 
As shortly as possible, quam^ brevissime. 

Extremely flourishing (in re- > j^ ^^^^^^^^^ 

sources), > ^^ '^ 

Far; by far, multo. 

The very least, vel minimus. 

The most unjust possible, or in ? ^el iniquisshnus. 

the world, ) 

{Eng.) He is too proud to be a slave. 
{Lot.) He is prouder than that he Should be a slave. 



B Creber denotes dose and crowded aueceeeUm, and often implies censure : frt" 
queas denotes a plentiful suppfyt and rather as an epithet of praise, SVequme 
is also used of a place * nmck resorted to,* and a ^ftdl * senata-house : in which 
sense cre&er is not used, but ceUber, which is related to it as KaXvnra to Kfixra. 
(D.) 

« Potest, possunt, Ac, may be inserted after quam. < Aves nidos quam poe^ 
sunt molUssime substemunt == tarn moUUer, quam possunt mollissime. (G.) 



§58. 411, 412.] BEMABKS ON SOME OF THE TENSES. 145 

(Q,uam ut mancipium sit, w poasit esae.) 
i^ng^ I took the greaiest pains I could. 
{Lot.) I took pains (as great) asP ^ greatest I could (quaaC^ 
(Eng.) As great a diiierence as there can possibly be. 
(Lot.) A difference as great-aa the greatest can be. 

(Quanta maxima potest esse distantia.) 

Exercise 61. 

41l/rhat report was frequent rather than certain (e)J^The 
better a man is, with the more resignation will he die. ^The 
most hidden dangers are alioays the most difficult to avoid .^^he 
more hidden a danger is, the more difficulty is there in avoiding 
iU^'^TThe more passionate a man is, the more difficulty has he*^ 
in commanding himself. ^Ue is too angry to be able to command 
himsel^^ prefer the most unjust peace in the world to the justest 
war.^Saguntum was an extreiiiely flourishing state. ^ I will say 
as shortly as possible, what it seems to me should be done.*J^hey 
perceive the very least things.y/They worship Libera, whom they 
also^^ call Proserpina,/{2[ have accomplished the longest journey 
1 possibly could^^ have finished the business with the greatest 
care I possibly coul4^n important matters, there is need of delib- 
eration. J^TOld age is by nature somewhat (408) loquacious/^We 
have lost considerably more gold than youJ^t is an allowed factf 
that the sun is many times as great as the earth,^fThere is the 
greatest possible difierence of character between them. 



XX. 

§ 53. Remarks on some of ike Tenses, 

412. ThepeTfect definUe (perf. with haso^ is virtually a present tense, being 
used of an action begun at some past time, and carried on, up to, or 
nearfy up to the present moment. Hence, as we have seen (40, cQ, it 
may be followed by the present or perfect subjunctive."* 

P Quam maximas potui copias = tantaSy quam maximas. (G.) 
<} Nevertheless the Roman ear was so accustomed to the imperff svbj, after 
the perf.^ that they used it (eyeii where the perf. is plainly equivalent to our 
perfect with ^haxe\ provided 'the action could be conceived as one advancing 
gradually to its completion.' (Z.) ' Diu dubitaci (have long doubted) num melius 
sit/ &c,, would sound strange to Roinan ear? : they preferred * num melius essei^ 
oven when they did not norra/<?/ but were onY stating the resuU, (K,) 

7 



146 EEMARSS ON SOBIE OF THE TENSES. [§53. 418-410. 

413. (a) To express, * I June been doing a thing for a long time/ the Romanf 
said *Iamdobigit for a long time already.* 

(Jam pridem cupio, IJuwe long been dcnring.) 

414. In animated narrative, the jpast is often described by the 
jtresent, 

{b) The present when thus used (praten* kuUnicum) may be followed 
either by the present wbj. (according to the general rule for the sequenoo 
of tenses), or by the imperfect aubj. (as being itself vtrtuaUsf a past 

^ tense). The imperfeei is, on the whole, the more common. (Z.) 

416. (c) A present tense after relatives, or, ' when,* ^ if,' * as 
long as,* ' before,* &c., is generally to be translated by a future^ 
when the action expressed by it is sfiU future. 

The action t; generally still future, when the verb in the prin- 
cipal clause is in a future tense or the imperative mood.' 

If one action must be completed before the other begins, the 

future perfect should be used. In this case the perfect definite is 

sometiiries (by no means always) used in English.* 

416. (1) {Eng.) Whensoever I tak(^ my journey into Spain I wW. come to you. 
{Lai.) Whensoever I thaU take my journey, &c. 

(2) {Eng,) When I hone performed this, I wUl come^ &c. (Rom. zv. 28.) 
{Lot,) When I shall have performed this, I tpiU come, Ac. 

(3) {Eng.) When he ia come (perf. def.), he vnU tell us, <frc. (John iv. 6.) 
{Lot.) When he thall have come^ he will tdl us^ <frc. 

(4) iEng,) (Saying) they teould neither eat nor dHnk, till they had kitted 

Paul (Acts zziii. 12). 
{Lot.) (Saying) they would neither eat nor dnnk^ till they ehoidd 
have killed Paul. 



' The subjunctive present used imperaJtivdy^ is virtually an imperative. 

• The Roman, viewing the future action or event from hiapreeenty marked itfr 
fittwrUy^ and, if necessary, its completion : the Englishman removes himself to 
the * when * spoken o^ and contemplates it as a state then existing. The Roman 
considered it relatively: the Englishman considers it absolutely. There are 
some constructions, in which the completion of the action is not marked, even 
in Latin ; for instance, in the use of the imperfect subjunctive in marking the 
relative time of a wi^ request^ or question : e. g. * He answered when he was 
flaked;* * quum interrogaretur* not interrogaJtus esset^ though the question must 
be completed before the answer is given. 

i Even in Latin, the present (after si) is sometimes used, as in EngUsli, in 
cx>nnection with bl future; but only when it is to intimate that the future event 
depends upon some |)reffen< circumstance or resolution. Examples are: *Per» 
feietur bellum, si non vrgemtts obsessos,* Ac. Liv. v. 4. * Si vindmus, omnia 
nobis tuta, <&c. . . . patebuntJ Sail. 58,9. (O.) (On the out{), prea. tSux ei 
«ee436(6)). 



} 53. 417-419.] REMARKS ON SOME OF THE TENSES. 141 

(5) (Eng,) Am soon as they hear of me, they ahtdl tbey me (2 Sam. 
zxU. 45). 
(hai.) As soon as they thaU hear of me, they aihaH obey me : 
ipr) As soon as they thaU have heardj Ac 

417. (d) ' Should,* ^wouldf' ^cotdd,^ &c., when used to soften 
an assertion by throwing into it an expression of doubtfulness^ are 
generally to be translated by putting the verb in the present or 
perf, of the subjunctive. 

a. In this idiom the perfect does not appear to bear uny refeienoe to tbo 
eampleiion of the action. (See 428, note K) 

b. («) Velimf nolim, maUmf are often used in this manner, and often in 
jconnection with the verb in. the subjundvpe governed hy*ut* omitted. 

418. (f) After ut a consequence (but not a purpose) is often 
put in the perf. subj., instead of the imperf.j after a past tense. 

a. This occurs very frequently in Cornelius Nepos. The use of the 
perf. gives more promxTunce and independence to the ooneequemjce, (K.) 

h. The IMP. subj. marks (1) something past, (2) something conUmr 
porary with another in past time, (3) something contemporary and 
continuing, 

c. The PBKP. subj. is either the subj. of the aorisi (* wrote *) or of the 
prtEteritum in proBStnii (or perf. definite, * have written *). (K.) 

419. (a) Jam pridem cupio, I have long desired. 

Vocat me alio jam dudum tacita vestra exspectatio, 

Your silent expectation has for some time been 

calling me to another point. 
Copiee, quas diu comparabant, Forces which they had 

long been collecting. 
(&) Subito edicunt (]lonsules, ut ad suum vestitum Sena- 

tores redirent, The Consuls suddenly published an 

edict) that the Senators should return to their usual 

dress. . 
(c) Quum Tullius rure redierit, mittam eum ad te, When 

TulUus returns from the country, 1 will send him 

to you. Facito hoc ubi voles. Do this when you 

please. 
Si te rogavero aliquid, nonne respondebis ? if J put 

any question to you, will you not answer ? 
{d) Hoc sine uU^ dubitatione, confirmaverim,^ I would 

assert this without any hesitation. 

a Thep«rf. euJtjunctiDe used in this manner to withhold a positive assertion^ 
«ocure in rugaHpe sentences oftener than in positive ones. (O.) 



14!^ REMARKS ON SOSiE OF THE TENSES. ( 53. 42U 

(e) Dc me sic velim judicesy I would wish you to judge 

thus of me. 
Nolim factum, I could wish it not to he done, {Nol* 

lem^ factum, I could wish it had not been done.) 
(/) Quo factum est, ut plus, quam colleges, Miltiades 

valuerity The consequence of wMch wasy that Mil 

Hades had more influence than his colleagues. ^ 

420. Vocabulary 58. 

e dudum, w jamdfidum (applied to Aari 
For some time, < preceding periods ; on hour or ftw 

( hours! less, generally, than a day). 

r dill, or jamdiu^ (of an action continued 
Long i for a long time, < suspended, or not occurring, through 

C the whole period). 

r pridem or jampiidera (referring to a paat 
Ijong ago, < point of time ; not, like diu, to a past 

C period of time). 

r cupSre,' io (150), iv, it (this is of the m- 
To desire, \ tDardfeding : optare is to desire = to 

( express a tnsh for), 

r avdre {defect, verb) this denotes a rest- 
To Xongf < less impatient Umging ! gestlre, a do- 

i lighted^ joyous longing. 
' Not above two or three times, bis terve. 
Two or three times ; several times, bis terque. 
(The Preposition Ad.) 
(1) 7\>, (p)ai!(3)uptOtUntil!toVuamountqf;{i)fory&c. 
To a man, ad unum. 

* When a eonedved case is to be expressed with the indmation that the faei 
corresponds to it, or may so correspond, the pres, ani perf. of the subj. are used : 
but when it is to be intimated that the fact does not, or cannot correspond to it, 
the imperf. or phtperf. stibj, must be used. (Z.) 

« But pridem and diu are often interchanged, though only in constructions 
wnere the notions of duration or of a distant point of beginning (respectively) 
may easily be implied, though the exact word would require duration rather 
than a pointy or a point rather than duration. In ^jampridem cupiOj* &c.f the 
notion of continuance is plainly implied : in the corresponding English construc- 
tion we have it expressed. Dudum = diu-dum (where dum restricts the mean- 
ing as in vix(2um, noudum) : pridem = vplv 6fi {Hartung) or irptv 6^v, (D.) 

« Velle, cup5re, denote the inward feeling} optare, expetSre, expression oi 
tliat feeling. VeUe and optare denote, respectively, the calm feeling and ite 
expression , cupere and expetere the eager^ excited feeling and its expression. 
Avire expresses a restlesSf impatient longing; geatire a deHghted auUicvpa 
Uan. iD.) 



( 54. 421, 422.] bemarks on some of the tenses. I ID 

To extreme old age, ad Bummam eenectutem. 

He is nothing to, = compared to, > ^ ^^ ^^ ^ 

him, S 

C!or a time, ad tempus (also, * at the proper ttacTU 

As many as two hundred, ad ducentos. 

Word for word, ad verbum. 

At most, ad summum, or summum only. 

At least, ad minimum ; minimum. 

At last, ad eztremum. 

(a) (Eng.) They <2o nothing 6t</ laugh. 

(Lot,) They nothing else than laugh (nihil aliud 911am ridenti 
faciunt omitted). 

Exercise 62. 

[By what verb should to take away a bad thing be translated?] 
421/1 have for some time been desiring to take away from yon 
that care of yours. Jfl have long desired to call upon Caius. 

^p Afler his soldiers had been slain to a man, he himself returned 
to Rome.J^ Having taken Marseilles by storm," he returned 
home.^^ am longing p to tal^ Marseilles, and obtain a triumph 
for a victory over the Gauls. ^He was whipped with rods several 
times^Tlle was whipped with rods two' or three' times' at most. 

^ There is no doubt that Caius is nothing (compared) to Balbus. 

^Time is wanting p for finishing that business (of yours). /^ would 
wish you to pardon me./j^Caius to extreme old age learned some- 
thing additional ^ every day^At last all held their tongues/^I 
am longing to return thanks to Caius/t^t cannot be denied that 
death is a rest fron^ labours. 'ViTDo we not give boys sentences to 
ham by heart ?''^/£lIe gives boys the longest sentences he can*" 
to be learned by heart, word for word./pt'hey do nothing but cry 
out, that it is all over with Cssar's army./^is industry was 
suchy^^^ that (418) he learned something additional every day. 



§ 54. Remarks on some of the Tenses continued. 

422. (a) The perfect subjunctive (as well as the present) is 
used 83 an imperative. 



1 Addiscebat aliquid. 



150 REMiAKS ON SOMB OF THE TENSES. [§ 54. 423-427. 

423. {h) The future is sometimes used, as in Englishj for the 
imperative ; in other words, we sometimes express a wish that a 
person should act in a particular way, in the form of an assertion 
that he will so act. 

424. (c) Questions that do not ask for information, hut for 
assent, are to he translated into Latin hy the present or imperfect 
of the subjunctive, according as a present or past time is refer- 
red to. 

The object of such questions is, to excite the sanu emotion or produce 
the »ame conoktUm in the minds of the persons addressed, that the 
speaker himself feels or pretends to feel. If they are negative in form, 
the answer or expression of assent will be affirmatives and conversely, 
if not. 

425. These ^questions of appeal ' (which usually express perplexity or 
some emotion) may be asked by auxiliary verbs in English in various 
ways : the thing to be considered is, * does the question require an an- 
swer for information^ or mere assent (or sympathy) V 

a [Forms of * questions of appeaV in English.] (1) With Pbes. Subj. 

What shaU I do? (when asked in perplexity, implying that nothing 
sati^aetory can well be done.) WJiat am I to do? What can I do? 

Why should I relate this? (Ans. You iieed not.) (2) With Impehf. 
SuBj. What was I to do? What should I have done ? What 'Ought 1 
to have done? 

426. (1) (Eng.) He taught the children of the principal jnen. 

{Lat.) Principum liberos erudiebat, (Imperf. expresses a state conr 
tinued or an action qften repeated in a past space of time.) 

(2) (Eng.) You tDOuld have thought. You would have believed. 
(Lat,) Putares. Crederes. 

(3) (Eng,) I remember reading that (or, to have read that). 
(Lot.) I remember to read that (legere* memini). 

(4) (Eng.) It would be tedious, encllesSj &c. 

(Lai.) It is tedious, endless, &c. (longum, infinitum est), 

(5) (Eng,) It would have been better. 

(Lat.) It was better (utilius/tft^^). So satius, par, idoneum, AcJwL 

427. (a) Quod duhitas, ne feceris, What you have doubts 

about, don't do. 
(ft) Si quid accident novi, fades ut sciam. If any thing 
new happens, you will let me know (= let me 
know). 



» But the inf. perf.f^ows memini^ &c., when the ppeaker does not carry him- 
self back, as l^we|^ having himself «een, heard^ &c what he describes. 

* Erat or fuerat must be used, if the time requires those tenses : and the injin* 
prat. follo\i'B these expressions. (See 130.) 



§ 54. 428, 429.] remarks on some of the tenses. - 151 

(c) Quid faciam ? What am I to do? Whdt can I (or 

shall I) do ? 
Quis neget, &c. ? Who can deny . , .? 
Quid facerem ? What was I to do? What ought 1 

to have done ? What should I have done ? 

428. Vocabulary 59. 

A banquet ; an entertainment, con^vium,b i, n. 
If I may say so without offence, pace tu^ di:i;erim. 
Under favour, bon& ta& veniiL 

A favour; pardon, venia, le, /. 

Topardon (spobmoU superior), \ ^'^JXxefi (also 'to gwnt a permls. 

C sion'). 
To ask pardon for a fault, delicti^ veniam pStSre ; petiv, petit. 

Look to that yourseli^ id ipse vidSris ; or tu videris. 

Let Fortune look to, or see to, it, fortuna viderit. 
I can scarcely believe, vix crediderim.* 

(The Preposition Adversvm or Adversus.) 
Adversus, or adversum, corresponds almost exactly with our against 
in all its uses ; but has besides the meanings over-against ( =s opposite) 
and towards. 

Exercise 63. 

[Translate, '1 am pardoned^} 

^429. Who can deny that a banquet is preparing ?«JjThere is 

no one but wishes that a banquet should*^ be prepared.^You 

would have thought that a banquet was prepared*/^What'was I 



b EpulcB^ arum is the most general notion, a m/etd^ whether frugal or sump- 
tuous, with only the members of the fiunily or with guests, public or private : 
coiwvoium is a meal with gueaia, a dinner-party : dlfpet a rdigiona banquet, a 
banquet after b, sacrifices eptUUm a banquet in honour of some person, or on 
some festive occasion ; comxasatio a riotous party, a drinking bout, (D.) 

• The ignoscens pardons from his heart, forgives and forgets ; the veniam dam 
passes over as b. favour what he might justly resent or punish. The friend or 
equal ignoscU ; the superior or more powerful person veniam dot. (D.) 

d Doderlein thinks that delictum is not asinofomiesiomais generally thought, 
but that it has the same extent of meaning napeceaium: both expressing sins 
against prudence as well as those against morality ; errors as well as sins. 

♦ Vix eredidenm = vix credam =: vix credo. But this perf, subj. does not 
always stand for the present indie, but sometimes for the per/, * Turn vero ego 
necqvldquBLm CapiU)]mm servaverim* "^ servavi. (E.) 

* In English we have no present or wiperf. passive, exceptin a few verbs that 
form these tenses with what is inform the present participle of the oetioe voice, 
but is probably the participial substaaniive^ which used to be governed by the 



132 CONDITIONAL PROPOSITIONS. [§ 55. 430, 431. 

to do ? — ^the banquet had been long preparing. ^^Ke latter saya 
that a banquet is preparing : the former denies (it).^e taught the 
boys to play on the lyre71)o not prepare a banquet^t would he tedi- 
ous (426) to relate aH the evils that have happened to us by oui 
own fault.^^Under favour I would say, my brother, that opinion 
of yours iy very often' (p. 13, 6.) prejudicial .^Are they too to 
be pardoned ?//It cannot be de^ed that they have several times 
asked pardon for their faulty^j^et fortune see to this, since we 
may not use reason and counsel^ j I remember their charging 
Caius with immoraUty./^fl^ey published an edict that no one^* 
should be capitally condemned without being heard^3ustice is 
piety towards the godsy^Would it not have been better, not to 
have concealed those things from your fiither VT^hey do nothing 
but mock the poor (420, a)/^prhere are soiiie who perceive the 
very least things. 



XXI. 



§ 55. On the principal kinds of Conditional Propositions, 
430. In condiUoruU (or hypothetical) propositions, the clause with < (f is the 
eondUion or candUionai davse .* the other, the consequence or conaequeni 



431. Sometimes the consequence is expressed in the indicative mood, no 
doubt being intimated as to the existence or non-existence of the condi- 
tion. 

(If this w A, that wB.) 
Here we have ^possibiUiy, or simple supposition^ without any expres* 
sion of uncertabUy* 



preposition * on * or * on ' shortened into * a J Thus * the ark was a preparing* 
(1 Pet iiL 20). * Forty and six years was this temple th buildmg ' (John ii. 20). 

There is no trusting the mere hxik of a form, as the following table will show :— 

(1) He . . , is coming . . . (pres act.) 
- (2) The house . is building . . . (pres, pass.) 
(3) This . . . M asking (too much) (* is,' iri^ the participial substantivo 1 

(1) He . ,iscome peril act.) 

(2) The house . t» 5ui// .... (perf. pass.) 

(3) He . . . ishmd (by all) . (pres. pass.) 

' Indie. : pace i\A dixerim, &c., being only parenthetical insertions. 



( 56. 482-485.] conditional propositions. 158 

432. SometimeBj however, though the consequence la expressed In the in- 
dicative, uncertainty w expressed as to the existence or not of tha 
condition : it being implied however that this uncertainty will probably 
be removed. 

('(fIJiave any thing, / will gioe it you ;* and I will see whether 1 
have or not.) 
Here we have tmeertainiy with the prospect of deciaion. 

433. Sometimes the consequence is itself expressed in a ccTidUional form t 
and then the condition is merely contemplated as a eoneeivable caaCf but 
no hint is given as to its being likely cuituaUy to occwr or not, 

(If you were to do this, you would greatly oblige me.) 
Here we have (according to Hermann and JButtman) *tmcertainty 
without any such accessary notion as the prospect of decision.' 

434. Lastly, the consequence may express tofuU wovJdhe doings or would 
have been done, if a condition that is actually unrealized^ had been real- 
ized ji£«< now, or at some past time. 

If I had it, I would now give it to you (but I have not). * 

if I had had it, I would have given it you. 



(Forms of Conditional Propositions.) 

435. (a) Si quid hahet, dat,^ If he has any thing, he gives U. 

(b) Si quid haheam, daho. If I have any thing, I will 

give it, 

(c) Si quid haleret, darei,^ If he should have any thing, 

he would give it, 

r(l) Si quid haheret, daret, J ^^i^l^^l^"^; 

Wj rifhe had had any 

L (2) Si quid hahuisset, dedisset, , thing, he would 

have given it. 

8 The consequence may also be in the imperative or in the future, (See 
437, i.) 

ii On this, see 445. It is, to say the least, very uncommon to find a proposi- 
tion of this form, from which the notion of the possible realization of the con- 
dition is not excluded. (See Zumpfs opinion, 419, v.) Kiihner says, <si hoc 
dicas* = law ro^ro Xiy^t and tl toUto Xiyots : sometimes, however, the last rela- 
tion Is expressed as in Greek, *si hoc diceretur, vere dieeretur,* (Vol. ii. p. 546.) 
The same form of proposition is used in a different way, when the imp. subj. 
( =: the Greek optat.) Is used to express something /re^uen^^y occtimn^ in past 
time, 

* Ca»ar— Si peteret per amicitiam patrls atque suam, non 

auldquam prqficeret.^—Uor. Sat. i. 3, 4. (See Heindotfad loo.) 
7« 



154 CONDITIONAL F&OFOSITIONS. [§ 55. 436-441. 

436. Here ,we see that the forms (c) and (cQ (1) coincide. The form (c) 
means, * if at any time he were to have any thing, he would give it :* 
but such a sentence, though not neeeeaarily intimating the imppssibilit) 
of tliis case occurring, of course, doea imply that it haa not occurred. 
It thus runs very near to the meaning of (cQ (1), which, besides imply- 
mg that it heu not, implies that it tnU not occur. 

These t¥ro cases are not distinguished in Latin : the context, or our ' 
jnrenoue knowledge, must determine whether the case is contemplated 
as pooeible, or not. 

437. (a) Possibility, or simple supposiOony without any expres- 

sion of uncertainty : the indicative in both clauses. 
(b) Uncertainty with the prospect of decision : * si ' with 
the subjunctive present (or perfect) ; the indicative^ 
commonly the future,' in the consequence. 
^ (c) Uncertainty without any such accessary notion as the 

prospect of decision: the imperfect subjunctive 
clauses. 
(d) Impossibility, or belief that the thing is not so : the 
subjunctive in both clauses, the imperfect for present 
time, and a continuing consequence ; the pluperfect 
for past time. 
488. But the consequence may refer to present, the condition to 
past time ; or vice versd, 

* If I had received a letter {accepiaeem), 1 would now reed it {^ecUarem)* 
< If I at this time wanted any thing (opus eseeC), I wovJd have come 
(venieeem) myself.' 

439. Since, * / would give it you (now), if I had it (now)' comes to the 
same thing as * 1 would have given it to you, if I had had any,' the tm- 
pe/ifed eubjunctioe in Latin may often be translated by the forms * would 
have* {ooiM or ahmdd have), when, it is implied that the condition will 
not be realized. 

440. (d) When the form * would have ' is in the consequence, 
the pluperfect in the condition must be in the subjunctive in 
Latin. 

441. With the imperfect and pluperfect, ^si* always governs 
the subjunctive. 



i The imperatiye may stand In the consequence. Of course the perf. or fu- 
ture, both the eimple and the periphraatic future, may stand in either clause, or 
both : si lllud mihi beneficium trUmetur (or trilndum eril or fuerit), magnopere 
ffoudebo. In the second class, tribu^um ait, or fuerit, fromjuerim^ 



(55.442-444.] conditional propositions* 155 

442. f;^ Since wc use the indicative condUionaUjff care must be taken to 
translate this by the subjunctive (435, b.) when ^afundd* might be used i 
when, that is, there is *tmceriainiy with the prospect of €heinonJ 

443.- VOCABTJLARY 60, 
Happy, beatus, a, um.k 

Much less, \ nedumi (generally after a negatitc ; if a 

C verb follows it must be in the •u5/tme). 
Not to say ^ ne dicam (of what might probably be 

^' I «atd with truth). 

I do not say, non dico. 

I will not say, non dicam. 

All, omnes {all togetJier, cuncti, universi)^* 

Cautious, cautus, a, um. 

An taken one by one; each of Jgj^^j ^ 

them singly, ) 

For instance, verbi causS. 

To rise, orior, oriri, ortus. 

The Dog-star, Canicifla, ffi, /. 

(Evig.) No painter. (Lot,) Nemo plctor. 

{Eng.) This does not at all terrify me. (Lot.) This terrifies me noLhinfg. 

Exercise 64. 

[06«. <If he were to' <&c. s <if he ahmld' <frc.J 

444/If a happy life can be lost', it cannot be happy' .,;CHe who 

does not defend a^friend, if he can, sins'.^If all things are brought 

about** by fate, nothing can admonish us to he more cautious. 

i/Peleus, if he were to hear it, would lift up his hands.<^e. 



k Faushu and frotper are said of {kings only, not of 'perwM. * That which 
is 'jpTorpeTuw, merely satisfies the hopes and wishes of men^ like *trithed for^ 
* desired :' the fauatum refers more to the graciousness of the gods : the Jbrtunor 
lua is a hieky person : the beatus feels himself happy (as he is) and is contented.' 
(D.) Pelix expresses both that which w, and that which tnakss happy {beatus, 
only what is * happy ^) : and relates principally * to the obtaining, possessing, or 
enjo3ring external goods, and supposes a man's own co-operatian.* This latter 
circumstance distinguishes it firom fortunatuSf which also relates more to par- 
ticular events. 

1 Nedum is sometimes followed by ut: *nedum ut ulla vis fiereC 
(lAv. iii. 14.) 

B Cundi (opposed to cUspersC) * aU actually united;* vniversi (opposed to sinr^ 
guli or unusquiague) * all taken together.' As meaning * all,* * the whUe,* in the 
sing., totus represents the thing as originally *a whole:* omnis, eunctus, unH- 
versus, all represent it as origvnaUy made up (k certain parts, of which the aggre- 
gate is taken. (D.) 

n Flunt. 



A< 



156 CONDITIONAL PROPOSITIONS. [^56. 445 

leuSy if he heard it (hut Tie has not)^ would lift up his hands. 
If any one were to do this he would Jay the king under a great 
obligatu)n,j^yen Cssar could not have done this ; much less 
can you (448, note 1). ^^he hoy should he admonished^ that he 
may show himself the more cautious (63, i^).^All the wisest 
menH are aware that the interest of each and en all is the same'. 

/^ I can scarcely think him equal to aL of them taken one hy one, 
much less to all of them together, //if you are equal to them all- 
together, you will easily conquer them all-taken-one-hy-one^^If 
Fahius, for instance, was horn p at the rising of the dog-star, he 
will not die in the sea^/fHe is not equal' to them all taken onehy 
one, not to say to them all together y^He is equal to them all 
taken one by one, I do not say ta them all together y<^o painter 
would say this (pejf, subj,)y^^^ow that I do not fear these 
things at aU. There were some**^' who did not fear these things 

• at all. 



§ 56. Conditional Propositions continued. 

445. (a) Such conditional sentences as would in English have 
were to — , should^ or would^ in both clauses, often take the verba 
ofbAh clauses in the subjunctive present. 

a. The conditional clause is here a contemplated pfmUnlUy (resexnr 
bling, in this, the third class ; si haberetf dareC) ; but the thing contem- 
plated is contemplated as occurring nenr, and therefore often agreei 
with the second class (si habeam dabo), in implying a prospect ol 
decision. 

Hence if a contemplated case is contemi^ated as occurring now, the 
pr€$tnt subjunctive should be preferred to the imperfect: and when the 
possibility of its occurring now is to be atrongly intimated, the present 
is the onjv proper form. 

(1) Tu d mc 9i», aliter sentias. 

If you were here, you would think differently, 

(2) Tu si hie esses, aliter sentires. 

If you were here (which you neither are nor wiU be), you would think 

d^erenUy: 

(or) If you had been here, you would have thought differently. 

0, From the ambiguity of the form * si quid haberet, dafet,* the subj. 

pres, should probably be preferred, when it is not intended to intimate 

that the condition is improbable or impossible. The pres, subj. may be 

o Impar est 



} 56. 446-450.J conditional propositions. 157 

used of suppositions reaUy impossible, if it is not the speaker's object 
to intimate tliis : * Si exmstai hodie ab inferis Lycurgus goaidoai} dc. 
(JWt>. 39, 37.) 

446. The three conditional tenses of the subjunctive, are scrv 
herenif scripsisseniy and scripturus essem, 

447. ' Scripsissem * and ' scripturus essem ' are both used to 
express our < toould have written.' But < scripsissem ' intimates 
that the thing would certainly have happened : scripturus essem, 
that it would probably have happened, because it was so intended 
or arranged 

(b) Thus, * he would have slept ( =: he intended to have slept, 
and therefore we may suppose wovM have slept) there, if he had 
gone on,' should be translatedby the part, in rus yf'iihesset,^ 

But the indicative (erat, fait) is more common^ when the inten- 
tion is to be positively expressed, 

448. (c) The imperfect and pluperfect of the indicative are often 
used instead of the same tenses of the subjunctive, in the conse- 
quent clause. (It is then better to let the consequent precede the 
conditional clause.) 

449. (cQ The particle 8i is occasionally omitted ; the verb of the conditional 

clause should then begin the sentence. 

450 (a) In quo si tantum eum prudentem dicam, minus quam 

debeam prcRdicem,' In which if I were only to call 

him prudent, I should commend him less highly than 

I ought, 
(Ji) Conclave, ubi erat mansurus, si ire perrexlsset. The 

chamber in which he would have lodged, if he had 

continued his journey. 
(c) Perieram, nisi tu accurrisses,^ I had perished ( = 

should have perished) if you had not run to my 

assistance, 
{d) Dedisses huic animo par corpus, fecisset quod opta- 



P So also in the third class * si quid haberd dcUurva easet* is correct, where 
datorus esset = * ?u wovld he prepared to give,* {Kriiger : who quotes Toe, H. 
U. 77, * c^jus filium adoptaturus essem^ si ipse imperarem,^) 

4 A conditional clause often refers to a consequence impliwt: * Pons Sublicius 
itor paene hostibus dedit, ni unus yiTfuitset * = {ei dediaeet) ni unus yir fuioaet, 



158 



CONDITIONAL FEOPOSITIONS. 



[§56.451. 



bat^ Had you given this mind a hody Wee itself ^ Tie 
vfould have done what he desired. 
Vocabulary 61, 

sin, sin autem. 
an minus.' 
nisi.- 

etai : etiamsi* — ^followed by tamen, yet, 
(sometimes tamen preeede$ etsi, when 
the vnexpected nature of the event ta 
be described is to be made more prom- 
inent ; for tamen eteij tametsi is fomid, 
and the tamen is sometimes repeated 
in the principal clause.^AlUiough 
may also be translalpd by quamquami^ 
I qtiamvie and ttcet.) 
rquamquam (suggested by a former 
< statement : it has no influence on the 
C mood), 
nisi forte; nislvero. 

{potestas, atis, /. (of might with rights 
and therefore the proper word for 
conceded power) ; potentia, e,/. (of 
actual inherent power), 
res ita se habet. 

potestatem sui fiicSre. . . 

in nostra esse potestate. 



451 

But if; if however, 
But if not, 
Unless; if not, 



Although; though, 



AHhough indeed, 
Unless indeed, 

Power, 

The thing is so, 

To put himself in their power, 

To be in our own power, 



' Or, ain aecuSj «tti alUer. 

• * Your memory will be weakened niti earn ezerceas ' implies that if you est" 
erciae it, it will not be lessened. But from si non you might not infer this, but 
only draw the strict conclusion that if you do not exercise it, it will be lessened. 
The W, in H non^ is the eonj unction, thd non belongs to the verb or other word 
In the proposition. 

t The compounds of *«* follow the same rule as ei: With the pree., per/., and 
fnt, they take the mdicoHve unless the thing is to be asserted contingently and 
doubtfully ; with the imperf, and pluperf. they generally take the aubj. -, though 
here too the incUcative comes in, when they introduce, not a auppontion, but a 
fact, ^Tametei aduce deoerehanCur,^ (Cffis.) 'Si,* like our *ifj* is sometimes 
used for * tphether ;* < Tentata res est, si prime impetu capi Ardea posset.' 

« Quamquam (quam 'how' strengthened by doubling) is 'however much,* but 
expresses * however much a thing really exiata,* or can, or must exist. It there- 
fore takes the indie, when the thing is not to be represented as doubtful, iluam- 
via (or quantumvia) is ' however much a thing may be conceived poaaible, and 
therefore takes the auij. Licet is no particle, but an impersonal verb, and may 
occur in any tense. * Licet recte agas, tamen, &c,* 'Act aa right aa you please, 
yet, ^.* ' Detrahat .... fortuna 2ice&{£.'— Quamvis :=' although ' (as in Nep. 
quamvis carebat nomine ; with indie.) belongs, generally speaking to a later 
age. 



§ 56. 452.J CONDITIONAL PEOFOSITIONS. 160 

{Eng,) Erem this ia not just tmZew it is voluntary. 
(iMt.) Even this is so {only) just, if it is voluntary. 

{Ra justum est .... m est voluntarium :▼ ita here s o& 
that condition or supposition.) 
[C. Kxzii.] ^But* ( =exceptj unUw) after a negative is nut, or (if it stands 
before a substantive) the prepos. pnsUr* 

Exercise 65, 

[How iB*ihat' translated after * UfoUtnDs*! (83)] 

452y^If you were to ask me what is the nature of the gods, I 

should perhaps answer nothing (445)v2 If the thing were so, I 

should rejoice (445).^ If there be nothing in our own power, let 

us go away .^j^f they had remained, he would have put himself 

in their power. ,5^einust cultivate eloquence, though some make 

a perverse use of ii^Nothing would be in our own power, if the 

thing wex« so. TThe Stoics say that no man is divine, hut the wise 

man. ^Who can deny (424) that the most hidden snares are 

always the most difficult to avoid ?^l love my enemy, more than 

you envy your friend ./jCaius is more brave than prudent. 5^^ 

don't know whether'* any thing better than friendship' has been 

given to man by the immortal gods./J^hough these things are 

contrary to each other, we must nevertheless use themv^|fSVho 

will deny (424) that these things are of importance to us Igyhough 

the thing were so, yet this could not he said without impie^j^P 

almost think that these things are not in our own power.>0P this 

I true, I shall rejoice : but if not, Imust bear it with resignation, 

A9€hia itself is not just unless it is voluntary. 



^e tru 
y^hisJ 



^ So, * Patres decreverunt ut, quum populus regem jussisset, id Mcratum < 
fii Patres auctores fierent. {Liv, 1. 17.) 

V Grotefend distinguishes between three forms of comparison, thus : — 
Caius fortior est, quam prudentior z= Cahu is, indeed, both braive and prti* 

dent ; hut yet more brave than prudent. 
Caius magls fortis est, quam prudens = Caiua ia just as brave, as he is not 

prudent. 
Caius fortis est, quam prudcna := Catus is brate^ but not at aU pruderj (where 
potlus may t>e supplied). The last twc forms belong to late WTiteiBi 
eflpeciahy Tacitas. 



100 CONDITIONAL PEOPOSITIONS. [§57, 453 

^ 57. Conditional Propositions in dependent sentences. 

458. (a) Possibility without any expression of uncertainty, 
(Caiiu, si quid habet, dat.) 

Dicebant Caiura, si quid haheret (or, si quid habeat), 
dare. 

(h) Uncertainty witli tlie prospect of decision. 
(Si quid kabeam, dabo,) 
Dicebat, si quid haheat (or haheret), se datarum.* 

(c) Uncertainty "without any such accessary notion. 
(Si quid haberet^ daretj) 

Dicebat, si quid haberet, se datarum esse. 

{Or daturum fordf if the independent proposition would be datnrus 
aMem. See 447.) 

(d) Impossibility, or belief that the thing is not so. 

(1) (Si quid haberet, daret,) 

This form in a dependent sentence coincides with form (c). 

(2) (Si quid habuisset, dedisset.) 

Dicebat, si quid habuisset, se daturum fuisse. 

(3) When the verb of the conditional clause is in the 

pluperf., that of the consequent clause is in the im 

perfect. 
(Si quid accepisset, daret.) 
Dicebat, si quid accepisset, se daturum esse.^ 

(4) The verb of the conditional clause in the imperf.^ that 

of the consequent clause in the pluperfect. 
(Si quid opus esset, venisset.) 
Dicebat se, si quid haheret, daturum fuisse. 
Dicebat se, si quid haheret, daturum. 
(of) Dicebat se, si quid habeat, daturum. 

> Obs. The eandUional forms of the infinitive are scripturum esse {prca,) , 
BOlpturum fuisse {per/,) ; scripturum fore {futJ). Of these scripturum e»e is 
■loo a mere/u/ur6 infinitive; the two others are only conditional forms. 

y Obs. The form daturum ease cannot be used to express * impossibility or 
belief that the thing is not so,* unless the verb of the conditional clause is of the 
pluperf. subj. * Dicebat si patris literas accepisset, se eas cum fratre communl- 
caturum esse.' The form * si literas acciperti se communicaturum esse,' would 
not imply this, but only express the receiving of a letter as a contemplated case 
fbeionging to class (c) ). 



§ 57. 454-457.] conditional propositions. 101 

454. Hence, when we have to make these sentences dependent, 
we must put 

f(yr dat, dabit, daret, dedisset : ' 

dare^ daturum esse^ daturum esse, daturumjwsse : 
for daturus esset, ', 

daturum fore. 

455. We also see that the first two classes (when the verb ifl 

in the future) are no longer distinguished. 

Si quid habet, dabit. ) 
Si quid habeat, dabit. i 

' Dicehat se, si quid hdberety daturum j' or, * si quid 
hdbeat ;'« for where the perfect subjunctive would regu- 
larly be expected after a past tense like dicehat, the 
present is often found with apparently no difference 
of meaning; but not the imperfect for the present 
Kruger.) 

456. Vocabulary 62. 

To remain, remanere, mans, mans. 

To confer benefits upon, conferre, contttl, collat (in, with aee,) 

To be intimate with, fisoniiiariter uti ; usus. 

^ To draw up an army, instruSre aciem ; instruz, instruct 

To draw up his army in three lines, triplicem aciem instruBre. 
To engage, confUgSre, fliz, fiict 

Either — or, aut» — aut ; vel— vel ; sive — sive. 

Or, aut \\e\\orthe enditie ve. 

457. ^^ * Aty* when the thing was done not in but tuar^ should be translated 
by apudy or ad with ace. 

(The battle apud Salamina. * Apud ' is found in later writers even for ' in.') 



■ Grotefend observes, that Caaar generally retains the suDj. pre*, or perf, 
(after a past tense) when those tenses would stand in direct narration : but that 
Cie, and Liv. generally turn them into the impeif. or plupeif, (See 418.) 

^ *Aut* expresses a diffisrenee in the tfdnga; *vel* a, difference In the expres' 
fdon. (Z.) Vel is the imperative from veUe, as fer from ferre: its proper 
meaning therefore is, Hf youpleaat^ so that * A ifeZ B* was originaliy * A or, 
ifyouUke, B;' that is, * A or B: one or the other, no matter which.' Hence^ 
tts meaning *even:^ vel maximus, * the very greatest, if you please.' ^Aui* is 
used in the case of oppotUe notions, when if one is, the other is not. * Vd* 
should be used when the notions are not opjtosUe in themselves ; especially when 
only some of the possible suppositions are mentioned. It very often evidently 
retains its original meaning, of expressing indifference as to which notion is 
taken ; and should always be used when such indifference is to be expressed. 
Thus ' The nobles can either corrupt or correct the morals of a states' vel oor 



102 ON OBuquB NABBATXOir. [§ 58. 458, 459. 

Exercise 66. 

[How is can deny to be translated in a question of appeal? (425.) ] 
458 ./Ele saidf that if a happy life could be lost, it could not be 
happy .^ He has long appeared to me somewhat disturbed.*^ 

yf Who can deny, that some are home one way, some another ?J^e 
answered that Peleus, if he had heard it, would have lifted up his 
hands. J^e answered that he could have^'' no friendship with 
these, if they remained in Gaul.^It is certain, that if any one 
had done this, he would have taid the king under a great obligation. 
It is certain that, if any one does this, he will lay the king under 
a great obligation. ^If any one does this," he will have deserved 
well of the state.^ I fear that nobody will be permitted to be neu- 
tral •^I fear that he has not concealed from you the discourse of 
T. Ampius.//(As to) what is best to be done (sup.) do you' see 
to that (428)y^ will strive to prove myself grateful (memor) for 
the benefits, of which you have conferred very many^^ upon me. 

/3 They say, that the rule of expediency is not the same as that of 
honour. "V/^flaving drawn up his army in three lines, he engaged 
with Mardonius..^^ He drew up his army, and engaged with the 
Gauls at Geneva.^/^here were some*'° who lifted Up their hanSs. 



7!' 



XXII. 
§ 58. On oblique narration. 

459. When one person has to report the speech of another, be may do this 
in two wajrs. He may either introduce Mm as speaking, and put m 
his mouth the exact wOrds used ; or hs may only state the nibstanet oi 
what he said under a change of form, 
(o) In the first way of narrating, the speaker uses the frai person. " Cae- 
sar said : ' / am of opinion, "—and so on. 

. ; ^ 

rnmpere, vd corrigere^ tor they can do loAtcA they pUase. It sometimes = boffi 
— imd. <He was his equal, vd moribus vd fortun&.' Ve (abridged from veTi 
commonly unites single words, not propositions : it is often appended to ai, ne 
{sive = 8eu : neve = neu). Site— awe ; eeu—eeu = * either—orf* * uhether—oTt^ 
when it is to be left dmihtful which of two statements is correct, or which d 
two terms is applicable (the second being an aliaa of the first). Cromble 
observes that avoe^avot should generally be used when * eUlier (or wheBiery^or* 
may be turned into ' he it-Hjr he U.' 



§58. 46(V462. on oblic^tje narration. 163 

(6) In the second way, the substance of what he said is glren in tho 
third person. " Caesar said, that fu was of opinion,"— and so on. This 
second way, in which the tpeedi qf another is reported in the third per- 
son, is called oblique or indirect narration. 

460. (a) In oblique narratumt the principal verb or verbs will 

be of the infinitive mood, 
(i^) All the subordinate clauses that express the original 
speaker's words or aj^nions will have their verbs in 
the subjunctive mood. 
i:3r Hence conjunctions and adverbs that go with the indicative in direet 
narration, go with the subjunctive in indirect or oblique narration.b 

(Thus in the example (453, a), * Si quid habet dot,'' becomes, when re- 
ported, * Dicebant Caium, si quid haberety dare.') 

(c) When a speech is reported in ohUque narration^ (1) the 
verb or participle on which the infinitive depends 
is often omitted : (2) questions for an answer are 
asl^ed in the subjunctive : questions of appeal gene- 
rally* in the infinitive (with interrogative pronouns 
and adverbs) : (3) the imperative in direct becomes 
the subjunctive in indirect narration. 

461. (d) The subjunctive being thus employed to express the speech or aen- 
timeni, not of the speaker or writer, but of the person about whom he is 
speaking or writing, naturally came to be used in constructions where 
the sentiments of another were lees formally reported. Thus in the 
fiible : * The vulture invited the little birds to a party,' *quod illia daiw 
rua erat ' would mean that he really was going to give them the party ; 
but * quod UUs datums esset ' would only mean that he said he wa^ 
going to give them a party. So with the verbs of accusing^ the charge 
stands with quod in the subjunctioey because, the accusers asserted that 
the crime had been committed : the indicative would make the histo- 
rian or speaker assert the truth of the charge. 

462. [Direct.] 

(a) {b) Quantum possum, te ac tua vestigia sequar. As 
far as I can, I will foUow you and your footsteps. 



b Obs. I^ As the subjunctive has no future, the JWure vdA future penfed be- 
oome the pres, and perfect of the suJbjunet. respectively. Senties— quum ages, 
aensurum esse, quum agas. — Faciemus, quum imperaveris : facturos esse, qus 
imperaverit (from imperavirim). If the speech is narrated in past time (is intro- 
duced, that is, by a past tense) the^. and fui. peif. will become the impcf, 
and pbipeif. in the oblique narration. 

• Not quite always : thus Ces. B. Q. 5 29. postremo quis hoesibi peraua- 
dereif^o. 



104 ON OBLIQUE NARRATION. [§ 58. 463, 464 

[OhUque.] 

Clamavit se, quantum posset, eum atque ejus vestigia 

wcuturunij He cried out that he, as far as he could^ 

would follow him and his footsteps, 

(c) (1) Legatos ad Ceesarem mittunt : " sese paratos esse 

portas aperire, &c." They send ambassadors 

to Ccssar : (saying) that they are ready to open 

Vie gates, &c« 

(2) Interrogabat : 'cur paucis centurionibus pau. 

cioribus tribunis . . . ohedirent?^ Quandc 
ausuros (esse) exposcere remedia, nisi, &c. ? * 
He askedf * why they obeyed a few centurions 
and still fewer tribunes? When {said he) 
will you dare to demand redress, if &c. ? * 

(3) (Hirri necessarii fidem Pompeii implorarunt :) 

prastaret quod proficiscenti recepisset. Make 

good {said they) what you promised him when 

he was setting out, 

{d) Socrates accusatus est, qtu>d corrumperet juventutem, 

Socrates was accused of corrupting the young men. 

463. Vocabulary 63. 

(The Preposition Apud governing ace.) 

(1) With = in the house oi^ in the mind or estimation of; amongst : 

(2) In the presence of : (3) In := in an author's writings : (4) At, of 
place (see 457). 

He was vWi me, apud me. 

To have great influence with, multum valere apud. 

Cyrus in Xenophon, apud Xenophontem. 

To ipeak in the presence of the ) j^^ ^^^ poprHrm. 

people, ) 

Yesterday, % hSri. 

To-morrow, craa. 

Exercise 67 
464/Must we not all die ?jZ,He cried out, ' that he was ready 
to shed his blood for his country; must we* not all die (he 

• As * questions for answer ' may be of a very objurgatory character, it is often 
Indifferent whether the question be put in the injiiu or the nOjunet. Thus in 
Lto. vii. 15 * Ubi illi clamores sint arma poscentium 1 Ac' ^ubi iUoe clamores 
esM . . . .' might have stood equally well. 

• * We,* *yoUf* must be turned into ' ffuy,* 



§ 59. 465-467.] . on oblique narbation. 165 

asked) ? should not an honourable death be preferred to a dis- 
graceful life ? £^ Almost all (of them) visited Balbus ; ' Keep (said 
they) your word :^ finish the business which you undertook to 
finish.js^What is this,'* said he, * O Tribunes 1 are you going 
to overthrow the state under the guidance of Appius^ Herdo- 
nius' 7 f^. Valerius came to the Tribunes, crying out, * What 
is this ? Are you going to overthrow the state under the guidance 
of App. Herdonius' ? '^He cried out, ' that he called the Quirites 
to arms : that he would dare against the tribunes what the founder 
of his family had dared against the kings. '-^^hat was I to do ? 
all were crying out, that it was all over 'with the army.^The 
Roman people had not*' the same fonune at home that (they ha3) 
in the field. ^My (friend) Balbus has more influence with me 
than any otKer person^^^Socrates in Plato says that the soul Is 
not mortal. 



§ 59. Oblique narration continued. (Mood in subordinate clauses. 
Dependence on an infinitive.) 

465. (a, In the oratio ohUqua, even when dependent on a past 
tense, the present (and perfect) subj. are used when the clause 
expresses a general truth, independent of the judgment of the 
speaker, and when the reporter rf the speech wishes to make the 
sentiment his ovm,^ 

466. (li) Remarks that are really the reporter's (i. e. were not 
made by the speaker) are, of course, in the indicative. The 
Indicative is also used by the Historians, when the writer wishes 
to intimate that what is said is really so, and not merely so stated 
by the speaker. 

467. (c) The subordinate clauses inserted in propositions whose 
verbs are in the infin. or subjunctive, must have their verbs in the 



d Gompare[462, c, (3)] 

• Q,Tiid hoc rei est 7— -This sentence is to be in direct narration. 

f " Potest quis aliorum sententlam vel ita referre, ut tota ex eorum etiamnum 
pendeat mente, vel etiam tanquam tritam proponere atque usu confrmatam, 
quamque ipse jam fecerit suam. Prior si locum habet ratio, impetfechim con- 
junctlvi poni solet ? si posterior, pr<r««7w." {Wagtur^ ap. Kroger,) 



160 ON OBtlQUB NAB&ATION. [§ 59. 468, 4(18 

subjunctive, when they form a part of the whole meaning of the 
proposition.' 

If such a clause only limits or describes a particular term of the 
proposition, without fiedrly making apart qf it, the verb will be In tho 
Indicatiye. 

466. (d) In sentences dependent on an infiniUvey the pres. or 
per/, eubj. are found, where the general rule requires the imperfm 
or phiperf. ; but not vice versi. » 

In other words, the pre*, and ptrf, aubj, may stand (instead of the 
imperf. or pluperf.) after the per/, is^itive ; and also after the pret. or 
fut. infinitive when they dependon apa«< t^nse. 

469. (a) Cicero dieebat : tria esse omnino genera quae in dis- 
ceptationem cadere possint : quid fiaty factum, 
futurumve sit^ Cicero used to say thai there were 
only three kinds of questions thai could fall into 
controversy : what was doing, what had been done^ 
and what would happen, 
(h) Themistocles eertiorem eum fecit, id agi ut pons, 
quem ille in Hellesponto fecerat, dissolveretur, 
Themistocles sent him word, thai it was intended to 
break down the bridge which he had made over thft 
Hellespont. 
(c) Indignum videbatur populum Romanum ab iisdem 
Etruscis obsideri, quorum sflBpe exercitus fuderit, 
It seemed an indignity that the Roman people shotdd 
be besieged by those very Etruscans, whose armies 
they had often routed. 
Certum est hominum caus& factum esse mundum quse- 
que in eo sint ^ omnia, It is certain, that the world 
and every thing in it was made for man. 

id) With infin. prea. or fat, 

(1) Dixit (^iQ said) ; dieebat; dixerat; didurtu erat, 



6 I^ that is, they form an essential part of the leading proposition, being 
included in the object^ the purpose, or the circumstance supposed. (Z.) 

b *Tantam rerum ubertatem natura largitaest, ut ea, qiuB gignuntur, donata 
consulto nobis videantur.' Here ea qum gigmmtur are tlie actual productions of 
nature. (Z.) 



§ 59l 470-472.] on oblique narration, 167 

_5intemg6re .r quid ag^cre* (or a^oQ ho.tis.1 

~ i intdlecturum esse { ^^^ '^issa (or egerU) hostis. 

( quid acturuM esset (or ac<iiru«n<) lOBtlti. 
(2) And (after any tense of dico, &c.) 

r quid agertt (or og-o/) hostis. 
se inleUexisse < quid egiaset (or egerit) hostis. 

( quid acturus eaaet (or acfun<« •£() hostis. 

470. Vocabulary 64. 

(Prepositions Eboa, Inteb, Ob, Pbb.) 
Eboa, ace, : Towabds {of favorabU dispositions).* 
IiTTEB,! ace, : Between ; among ; in the midst o^ during. 
On the journey, inter viam. 

They loye me and each other ^ et nos et inter se am ant. 

Ob, aeeu8. ; on account of. 
* Before my eyes, ob ocixlos. 

Pbb, ace, Thbough (of place^ HmCy and vuans). By (of the sec- 
ondary agent"> by whom we do any thing ; and in adjurations, in wmcn 
it is separated from its noun by pronouns—* per ego te,* &c.). By ihs 
have of (digladientur ptr me licet : for any thing I care). 
Per se = by him, &c., alone (ipse per 8e),/or its own sake ; naturoMyt 

ofiisdf, Ac. 
Per in permagnus, pergratus, <ftc., is often separated from the adjec- 
tive ; * per mihi .... graium feceris.' 

471. (a) {Eng,) To make a bridge over a river (See Ex. 469 (5) ). 

{Lai.) To make a bridge in a river. 
(6) {Eng.) The town in question, 
{Lot.) The town de quo agitur. 

Exercise 06. 

[Translate the clauses marked thus (f) both as the speakei% and as the 
narrator's.] 

472/Catilina informs (them) that he had sent forward Man- 

lius titbe great body of men"* f whom he had prepared to take 

a.TmaJ ^J^They warn them to depart from all the islandsf which 



i KrUger : who observes, that the use of the present, Ac. may often be explained 
)iy the purpose of the writer, to intimate that what is said, ^iU and generally 
"dds good: and that sometimes there may be what Hermann calls a *mutniic 
incertarum sententiarum in eertas;* but that in many other passages no reason 
can be discovered for the employment of the pres, and per/, rather than the im- 
perf. and pluperf, 

k Rarely of hostile dispositions. (Z.) 

1 Inter sometimes stands between two substantives ; * Faesulas inter Ano 
tiumque.' 

« For instance, to send a letter * hy a slave* (per servum). 

B Ad earn multitudinem. 



108 ON OBLK^US NARRATION. [§ 59. 473| 474. 

are between Italy (Italia) and Africa.^He had contracted to 
Duild^' a bridge over the river* Danube (Ister, iriy p. 14, 9, a). 
J^le answered, that custom, f which is a second nature, was on 
our side, ^Let them go away for any thing I care.^He answered 
that he feared the waves, f which were such as he had never seen 
before. Tile answered that you, f such is your temperance,p were 
already well. PRe said that he was the first who* accomplished 
that journey .^They cry out, ' Why are these (questions) asked ? 
(460, f.) whe is so powerful as to be able to perform all he 
wishes ? ' (68, d.) 



473. (a) The ace. and infin. with ne in the oblique narration 
resembles, but must be distinguished from, its use 
to express emotion in direct narration. « 
(a) Adeone hominem infelicem esse quemquam, ut ego 
sum ! That any man living should he so unfortu- 
nate as I am/ 

Exercise 69. 

[In what mood are qtustiona qf appeal asked in oblique narration 1 460, c.J 
/474. That you should be able (inf. pres.) to bear this U^ThaX 
you should say this ! ^ He said that we ought not to learn many 
things, but muchv^yCThey cried out, ' Could any man bear this ? 
,fWould she never «ee thgm without calling them betrayers of 
their country (88, c) ?^Let her learn (they said) to govern her 
tongue .'J?^ fear that nobody will prefer a capital charge against 
him. fThey say that Caius has been accused of bribery^ which 
{36, 0) I shall not easily be induced to believe.'^He says that 

o * Rivus ' brook; * fluvius ' rivers * amnis * a broad, deep river, * Fluinen ' 
(properly the *ttream,* flu-imen) is also used as a general term for *Hver* (being 
used here of the Danube) ; especially when there is reference to its stream. 

P In a sentence of this kind, consider whether the reporter of the answer 
should be represented as making it hia ovm: if so, the aubj- preterit should be 
used by 465 (a). 

4 For which lU with the subj. is also found : Tene tU tUla res Jrangat?^ 
T8n ego vi adverser? 

' Ooa Crtdo^ which takes a dot. of the person believed, takes an ooe. of thfi 



^ 00. 475-477.] qui with subjunctive. 169 

he has not received the letters which I sent him (32, c)./^Who 
will deny that it is the duty of a Christian to keep his word ? 
y/^ho will deny that it is wise*' to have death always hefore one's 
eyes VJl^^^^y replied, that they sent the letter hy a slave^^hey 
answer, that the town in question is two hundred (Roman) milea 
fi»m Rome^/^ had perished, if yon had not succoured me. 



XXIII. 
§ 60. * Qui ' vnth Subjunctive. 

475. * Qui ' takes the indicative, only when it refers to a particular object fai 
the moat dear and direct way ; when there is no vagueness or indefinite- 
ness whatever in the reference. 

But when its reference w at all vague or indefinite, it governs the 
subjunctive. 

476. Qui therefore governs the subjunctive whenever the object described 
by the relative could not, as it were, be aeen and touched. Whenever it 
does not describe an individual object, but only refers it (or them) to a 
particular class by a mark common toaUthe class, it governs the subjunc- 
tive. When therefore for * who,* * which,* we might substitute * ot such 
a kind as to,* ^ such that,* <ftc., qui governs the subjunctive. 

(a) Qui with the indicative may refer an object to a class, but 
it then describes it (or them) in the most definite way. * Qui non 
defendit amicum, quum potest.* ' A man who actually does not 
defend his friend when he can.' 

477. Vocabulary 65. 

(Phrases after which qui is generally indefinite, and therefore takes 
the subjunctive.) 
Some men ; or there are some who, simt qui. 
There are not wanting men who, non desunt qui. 

(Negatives and vietually negatives.) 
Who is there 1 quis est 7 

How few there are 1 quotusquisque est 1 

duotusquisque est is used interrogatively and in the singulars i. e., 
how many does each man who belongs to the class make? duotus 
est 7 being <how many does he makeT So, too, nemo; nihil est; an 
uUuB, &c. 



thing believed: and though */ am believed* Is 'mihi creditur,* it must be *ego 
aredor* (tu crederis, Ac) when an ix^ immediately follows (J aifi believed to 
hope done thisy 



We have reason to rejoice, 



170 QTtI WITH SUBJUNCTIVE. [§ 60. 478, 470 

(Rsramio, ikvckio, habxo.) 
There are found peraons who, reperlimtur, invenluntur, qui.* 
Yon may find, reperias, invenias qui, &c, 

(Nihil >8t quod, <&c. Nihil liabeo qvod, <ftc.) 

'est quod gaudeamus = * there is some- 
thing of such a kind that we should 
rejoice on account of it.' * Quod* as 
an ace, neut, pron, (195, /.) going 
with gaudeo. 
WJ*ttajthere that you can com- 1 ^^^ ^ ^^^ ^^^ ^^^^ ^ 

We have no reason to desire, non est quod desideremus. 

You have no reason to hurry, nihil est quod festines. 

478. (a) {Eng.) I have nothing to accuse old age qf, 

{LaL) I have nothiog ir^tcA I may accuse old ae:e (quod incusem 
senectutem). 
(&) {Eng.) A pen to tnite with, 

{Lai,) A pen wUk which one may write, 
(c) {Eng.) Men who abound in silver, in gold (and), in estates. 

{Lai,) Men who abound in silver, who in gold, wha in estates. 
(<Q {Eng,) Men who abound neither in silver, nor gold, nor estates. 

{Lot,) Men who do not abound in silver, not in gold, not in estates. 

479. Vocabulary 66. 

To drive away, abigSre, eg, act. 

Stick, bacillum,t i, n. 

Bird, aviSjttis,/. 

Put; lay down, or aside, pSngre,^ p»su, p\i&t. 

To cross over, tnyicCre, jSc, ject. 

To allow it to happen, committSre (ut, with suJbj,), 



■ Obs. With sum, reperio^ habeo, <ftc., qui with the indicative is found, when 
it expresses partteular objects in the most definite way. This is naturally 
oftener the case when qui relates to the subject, which is mostly a particular 
dbjeet (or objects), than when it relates to the predicaie, which is generally some 
daas in which the subject is contained. Turn primum reperta sunt, quce per 
tot annos rempublicapi exed&re: not 'there were found evils which preyed on, 
&c.' but *the evils which have actually preyed on the state for so many years. 
were then found for the first time.' 

*> A diminutive of bactdum, 

« Volucres are all * winged creatures,* insects included. Avis is the general 
Dome for ' bird .•* * ales * is the word in poetry and the language of the augurs for 
the larger birds, especially the eagle. In augury, alites were the birds whoso 
JUgki, osciTies the birds whose song or cry, was prophetic. (D.) 

^ Ponere aliquid, *tolay down* athing; 'togetit out ofourhandof* ^toget 
rid of it.' Locare and eoUoeare are * to put a thing in its right place :* * to place * 
advisedly for some purpose. 



j61. 480, 481.] QUI WITH SUBJUNCTIVE. 171 

To be on the point o^ ineo esee (ut, with aubj.). 

Jewel, gemma, ae, /. 

Unburied, inhumatus, a, um. 

Exercise 70. 

/480. Diogenes ordered himself to be cast forth unburied- 
Then*^ his friend said: *To the birds and beasts?' *By no 
toeans,' said he, * but put* a stick by me, to drive them away 
i^ith (478).'aeTAer6 are some who iMnJc that Caius is pretending. 

xjThere were some who thought that Caius was pretending.^^here 
are not wanting persons, who deny that the rule of expediency is 
the same as that of honour. ^IThere^ are found some, who say 
that we should not cultivate virtue. ^^It is incredible how weary 
I^am of life. 7^e must cross over that sea which (48) you call 
ocean. ^TKere are some who think, that the best thing we have 
(53) will be lost. ^They cry out, that we shall lose the best thing 
we hsiVe./iPWenave no reason to hurry./^ have nothing to 
accuse you of (478). ^^^^ou have reason to rejoice, that you have 
concealed these things from your father./jTou will scarcely find 
any one to believe this^^l^e was on the point of being killed, 

/Sil&d you rather be like one^ (212, x) of these persons who abound 
in gold, in silver, in jewels, or (like) C. Fabricius, who had none 
(nihil) of those things y^How few there are, who have death 
always before their eyes ! 



§ 61. 'Qui' mlh the sul^wictive continued, 

481. Qui takes the subjunctive, when it introduces the ground 
of the assertion in the antecedent clause. 

(a) Here there is some difficulty in determining whether qui is used 



c ,^at that tirMj tiim. 
Then < ^ after that, inde, deinde. 
( ^s,thereforef Igitur, itaque. 
s PonittOe, The iK>rms of the imperative in to. Me, nio, are used in solemn 
commands and prohibitions, such as lawsj vnUsj <ftc. 

f [C. zzxiY.] i:^ * On«' often means < whm one* (allquis), or *a certain one 
(qaidam). 



173 QUI WITH SUBJUNCTIVE. [§ 61. 482-485. 

dtfimiidy or not, *B€ vat laughed aibyaUthe red, who did not ac- 
knowledge these fiiults to belong to Socrates;' this seems definite 
enough, but it is in the Latin, < qui non agnosceient.' 
{fl) When therefore for * wAo' may be substituted *for he {the, U^ Ac.*) 
the verb should be the subjunctive. 

482. For qui alone, tUpote qtd, quippe qtd,*^ ut qui are also used 
generally with the subjunctive. 

483. Qui takes the suhjunctivef when it has the force of t<t with 
a personal or possessive pronoun.^ 

It has this force after (1) dignue, indignut, idonuue, &c. 

(2) torn, idUt^^^uemodi, i» (•ueft), Ac 

(3) comparatives with sifoni. 

(4) ia evM^ ( s: talis sum), lam a man too.* 

(5) quxamtm? 

(6) when it expresses sl purpose, 

(a) When ^ui = ti< it, and introduces a eontequeneef the perf. subj. m.ay 
be used for the imperfed by 418. Zeno nuUo modo ia erai, qui, ut 
Theophrastus, nervos virtutis indderiL Cic. Acad. i. 10, 35. [al. 
inaderet.} 

484. Qui governs the subjunctive, when we may substitute for 
It, ' aMoughi ' since,' * hecause,l * seeing that,' &c. with a personal 
pronoun. 

(a) Qid takes the subjunctive afler unus and solus, signifying 
'alone,' 'only.' 

485. Qui, in narrative, is followed by the suhf. of the impeffed 
and pluperfect, to express a repeated atHon taking place in past 
Ume.^ 

The relative adverbs {yibiy qua, &c.) govern the subjunctive of these 
tenses in the same way ; and as far as they can be substituted for th« 
relative, they follow the rules above given. 



■ This of course will not apply to the use of qui to introduce a new sentence 
where ire use ^for he,* &c. 

• Utpote qui, quippe qui = *tna«iiucft as they;* *for they.* Grotefend re- 
marks that utpote, quippe may generally be translated by ^namdy,* 'that ia.* 
Our *aa being* will often give the force of them still better: they often stand 
before attribijivea only. * (Democrito) quippe homini erudito, &c.* 

b Thus qui^^ut ego, utiu, vJt Hies ut noa, ut voa, ut illi; through all theii 
cases. So, cujua-^ xU rruua, tuua, <ftc. : quorum =: ut noater, veater, <ftc. 

• But * ut ' ia sometimes used aJfter 'is ea* dc. <Neque enim {• ea, Catilina 
utxe.... ratio a furore revocarit.* {Cic. Cat. i. 9, 22.) Te is here emphatic. 

d Examples of qui and relative adverbs used of repeated actions are: *Neo 
quisquam Pyrrhum, qua tuliaaet impetum, sustinere valuit.* < Semper habit 
aunt fortissimi, gut summam imperii potvraUwr.* (Z.) 



(61.486.] QUI WITH BTJBJirNCTIVE. 173 

486. The kind of sentences in which the relative may be thus 
intxoduced in Latin, will be best learned by examples. 

(a) (Eng,) He was deBplsed by them, for they saw through him. 

( He was despised by them, who saw through him («ufr/.). 
(Lot.) < He was despised by them, oi-being who saw through hiis 

( («*&/.)- 
(6) {Eng,) He deserves (or, does not deserve) to be loved. 

(Lot,) He is worthy, (or, unworthy) \ ^?^ **^«" ^ ^«'-' 

i whom you should lo9e, 

(c) {Eng,) He is not a proper person to be received, 

{Lot,) He is not a proper person j "^ •^•"^ J« ^ff'"*^ 
c whom you thould recewe, 

(d) {Eng,) None are so good at never to sin. 
(La<.) None are so good, who never sin {svbj.), 

{e) {Eng,) None are so great, aatobe independent. 

{Lot.) None are so great, who are independent {sitbj.). 
(/) {Eng,) Of such a kind (or, such) that we can neglect duties for their 
sake. 

{Lai,) Of such a kind, for the sake of which we can neglect dutiea. 
(g) {Eng,) Tooihort to be the whole life of man. 

{X^') Shorter than iMicft can be f the whole life of man. 
(h) (Enff,) \ ^^^^^^ greater than I can requite. 
C Benefits too great to be requited. 

{Lot,) Benefits greater than whicht I can requite. 
r I am not a man to believe this. 
(t) {Eng.) < I am not bo foolish, simple, Ac, as to believe this. 
( I am not one who believe h this. 

{hat,) I am not he (i«) who would believe {qui putem), 
{f) {Eng,) Who am I, that my writings should be honoured thusi 

{LaL) Who am I, whose writings should be honoured thus? 
(Ar) {Eng.) They sent ambassadors, to sue for peace. 

{Lai,) They sent ambassadors, wAo JunUd sue for peace. 
(2) {Eng,) He deserves praise {or blame) for having done this.^ 

{Lot.) He deserves praise {or blame) iMo did this {suJtj.), 
(m) {Eng.) Wretched man that 1 1 am, who thought, Ac. 

{Lot,) O me miserably who thought, &c {qui wlth#u/^*.). 



• Dignus(orindignus) qui ametur. 

f Quam quse sit, or possU esse. (See Difference of Idiom 94.) 
r Q,uam quibus gratiam referre possim. 

t Obs. The verb after qui takes the person of ego, tu, &c., not of * w' ori 
person, 

* / am not one who much or oft deUgJU 

To season my fireside with personal talk,' <ftc. 

{Wordsworth,) 
i * O me misenun !' or * me misemm 1' The inteijections O, heu, proh . take 
the aoc ; hel and vw the dative; en and ecce the nom, orthe ooe. (the latter 



174 qjjxm with indicative. [§ ^2. 487, 488. 

Exercise 71. 

[Translate *Iamnot om reho think J 486. {.] 
^487. We must take care to use such (is) a liberality as (qui) 
may be of service to our friends, (and) hurt nobody •j^^i'here is 
no doubt, that the Gauls are too brave to be conquered (486, g) 
in one battle.^Those eternal fires, which (48) we call stars, are 
too many to be numbered«^^e is a proper perscm to be received 
(486, c) into your friendship.^/Nothing is so valuable,^ iJuU we 
should barter /or it our faith and our liberty. ^No one can be 
so great, as (483, (2) ) never to require the services of his friends. 

7 The benefits, of which'* you have conferred upon me very many 
are greater than I can repay (486, h)^ I am not one who think 
that this world and every thing that is in it, was made by chance. 
^ There are some who believe, that this most beautiful world and 
•^ all that is in it, was made by some chance or other ^^ho am I, 
that all men should consult my interest (486, j)? /fNho will deny, 
that this life is too short to he the whole life of man 1/X^ou are 
the only person (484, a) on whom the safety of the state depends, 
^plf Cato had died, Cicero would have been the only person on 
whom the safety of the state depende^^j/I am not so simple (486, i) 
as to deny this. 



XXIV. 

§ 62. Quum iciih the Indicative, 

488. Since ^um with the indicative^ is far less common than 
with the subjunctive, it is important to get a clear notion when it 
should take the indicative. 



chiefly in Comedy. Z.) The aee, of personal pronouns may stand in the ace. 
without the interjectUm, and even other words are so used. 

k Tanti, . . . quo v^amusssut eo yendamus. 

1 When quumt emitquam^ pHusquam^ &c^ take the indicaHve, either (1) the oc« 
currence is connected with a state that presents itself vvoidiy to the speaker't 
recoUectuniy or with a fixed and definitely marked point qf time: or (2) it falls 
without preparation or notice into the middle of another action (which is sus* 
pended or broken off by it), and thus is naturally described in an unconnected 
and abrupt manner. {Hartun^ Partlkellehre, U. 335.) 



5 62. 489, 4&0.] QUTJM WITH INDICATIVE. 175 

(a) Quum takes the indicative when it simply marks the tme^ 
witJiout carrying with it any notion of a cause or occasion. 

< When* marks the time in this definite way, and is to be translated 
by quum with the indicative^ when *then* might be substituted for it. 

* It was night when he left the room/ ss * it was night : then he left 
the room. 

(h) Quum takes the indicative when, though it does introduce a 
cause or occasion of what is stated in the principal sentence, it 
nevertheless describes the time in a very marked manner, refer- 
ring to turn, nunc, &c., or some noun of time expressed or under- 
stood in the principal clause. 

(c) Quum takes the indicative, when what is said in the prin- 
cipal clause is not only con^emporaneott^ with the action expressed 
in the quum clause, but is actually included in it. 

When a *vfhen* clause stands in this kind of close relation to its 
principal clause, ihepartieipial eubstarUive under the government of < m ' 
may generally be substituted for it. 

* When you ceneure them, you censure me.* 

* In censuring them, you censure me.* 

(d) There are two less common meanings in which quum goes 
with the indicative : 

(1) Whenat means ^ since' of time.°» 

(2) When it is equivalent to quod, after gaudecr, gratuhrj dec. 

489. The meanings in which ^qavm* always takes the subjunctive, are 
tmce^ vnaemuchf as, aUhoug\ whereas. In the sense of ^ when * it takes 
the subjunctive, when the statement introduced by 'when* is also the 
eauae or occaaion of what is asserted in the principal clause. 

With the imperf. and pluperf. quum generally takes the subjunctive, 
though the notion of » cauM, or even of an occanon, is hardly, if at all, 
perceptible, 'duum Agesilaus rcrcr/crcftir . . • decessit.** {Cam, 
Nep, I. 8, 6.) 

490. (a) Jam ver appetebat, quum Hannibal ex hibemis mot^, 

The spring was already drawing on when Hannibal 
moved jfrom his winter quarters, 
(h) Ager quum multos annos quievit, uberiores efferre 
fructus solet, Afield, when it has lain fallow many 
years, generally produces more abundant crops. 



« £x eo tempore quo. Obs. That the pres, is used. (See 490^ d) 
* Or quum with the indie, olimpe^, and pluperf. 



176 QTJUM WITH INDICATIVE. [§ 62. 491, 492 

(c) Quum in portum dico, in arJem dico, When I say 
into the porty I say into the city, (In saying into 
the port, I say, &c.) 

{d) Nondum centum et decern anni sunt, quum de pecu- 
niis repetundis a L. Pisone lata lex est, It is nol 
yet a hundred and ten years since the law about ex- 
tortion was carried by L. Piso, 
Gratulor, quum tantum vales apud Dolahellum, I con- 
gratulate you on your influence with Doldbella. 

491. (a) {Eng.) In attacking one, you attack all. 

{Lot.} When you attack one, you attack all (^tiuni with indie,), 
(h) (Eng.) It is many years since he was first in my debt.^ 

(Lot,) There are many years, whm he {• in my debt, 
(e) {Eng.) I congratulate you on your influence with Caius. 

{Lai.) I congratulate you, when you avail so mvch with (apud) Caius. 
(d) (Eng.) I do not like to be abused. 

(Lot.) I am not abused willingly (libenter). 

492. 'Vocabulary 67. 

This being so ; this being the case, quae quum ita sint. 

r quum (to denote the ground on which a 

g. J judgment is formed) ; quoniam = 

* S quum, jam (used when the ground is 

[ an acknowledged fact9). 

Not that— but \ ^^^ quod— sed : non quod p (with avih 

i jvmct.). 
To be spoken ill of, male audire (^ to hear ill *). 

'quia; quod (with utdic., except where 

the Bubjunc. is required for some other 

Because, < reason. — Quia introduces a «^ru:<cauM 

of the effect : quod the conceived cau8$ 
or ground of an acHon). 
I don*t at all doubt, nullus dubito.^ 

How insignificant, quam nullus. 

To congratulate, grattllari, gratulatus. 

n Multi sunt anni quum ille in sere meo est. 

o Quando is sometimes used in this sense ; and also quum, * Itaque, quofuh 
vestrs cautiones infirmse sunt Graeculam tibi misi cautionem.' (C. Fam. vil. 
18.) * Tu qutmi instituietif .... scribe ad me.' (C. Fam. tU. 32.)-' Ut has 
sometimes' the meaning of though: 'ut desvni vires, tamen est laudanda 
voluntas.' 

P For non qujody we often find non eo or ideo quod : but also non quo : all with 
subj. * Not aeifnot'lB* non quin.* 

4 This expression belongs to the language of common eonwrmtion, not to 
books. 



}62. 493, 494.] quum with indicative. 171 

To take, \ sumgre, sumps, sumpt.5 cSp^re, io,» cip 

( capt. 
To take hold o^ prehendSre, prehend, prehens. 

To do well, prsBclare fac8re. 

f;^ The subject of congratulation stands in the aoc, or in the abl. witt 
de or in ; or in the iradtc. ¥nith quod^ iat which quum is sometimea used 
(See 491, c.) 

Exercise 72. 

[With what mood may iarUerrogaJtvoea be used in obHqiU appeals 1 (460, c)] 
493./This being the case, I am unwilling to leave the city. 

^CfiBsar, when he had conquered the Gauls (= having conquered 
the Gauls), returned to Rome. ^We know how insignificant the 
strength of men is.^^^Vho, when he sees this (= seeing, or on 
seeing this), would not make merry {perf. suhj,) with you ? 

^Phocion was constantly poor, though he might have been very 
rich.^s it not several years since Caius was (first) in your debt ? 

y^s there any man who can be compared with Balbus ifiYou do 
well in loving the boy (491, a).^When I assert the one, I deny 
the other^/fXIe says that, if I had conquered the Gauls, he should 
have dibgratulated me on my victory ^I congratulate you on 
your having recovered (that you have recovered) ^Does any man 
Hke to be ill spoken of ?/^I will hold my tongue, not that I believe 
the man, but because it makes no difference to mcy^^hey cried 
out, * Why did he advise this ? might they depart a finger's*^ 
breadth from the rule of honour ? XTThey asked, « Was not Caius 
nearer Rome than Labienus ? ' (question for information). /^hey 
. answer that we ought to cxmsuU the interests of those with whom 
we have to live.^^^ 



494. VOCABULAKY 68. 

(Conjunctions that go with subjunct, only.) 

C quasi ss quam si (relating to mannsr\ 
As i^ i tanquam* =5 tam ^uam (relating to de 

^ gru; *justa8if*).» 

' l^wnifnvuM quo utamur: capimua quod habeamus; prehendimuB quod tenea- 
mus. (D.) Sumere {to take of my own free vnll and duHce) is generally spoken 
of something that we may appropriate : capere {seize upon) often denotes the 
taking what does not belong to us. (H.) 

■ Also velut si, yelut, ac si {and iometimee sicut; poeHeaUy ceu). After ftzn- 
woMf 9i is often expressed, and may always be understood. 

8* 



178 QUITM WITH INDICATIVE. [§ 62. 4d5-497 

Would that, utinam. 

OthatI Osi! 

r dmnmttdo (for which dum, modo ar« 
Piorided onlyj < used separately— 'noli' after these 

. C words is 'n8). 
It is nearly the same thing as i^ periode f^re est ac el. 
As if forsooth, quasi yero. 

Perhaps, forsltan (often with paf. 9ultj,). 

495. (Kr With these words the general rule for the seque;ice 
of tenses (40) is to be observed. The English would mislead us. 

Pugnati quasi corUendat, He fghis as if he contended, 

or were contending, &c. 
Pugnavit, quasi contenderet^ He fought astf he had 

been contending, &c. 

496. With utinam the j^es. and jperf. are used, if the thing 
wished is not to be re^esenUd (whatever it may le) as impossible' 
to he realized. The unperf. and pluperf. express wishes that are 
(in the speaker's opinion) impossible^ or unlikely, to be realized. 

^ Not^ after utinam is reguHarly ne, but very oflen non. 

Exercise 73. 
(Obs. In the principal clause the Ua or mc/ to which quaai or tan- 
quam refers, is often expressed.) 

497/They saluted Caius' (just) as* if he had been consul'. 

^Many, not to say all, saluted Caius, as if he had been consul. 

^ Would that you were consul I^/Would , that I had been engaged 
in that battle !^/*Would that I had been able to avoid suspicion ! 

^Provided your word be kept, I donH care a straw for all the rest. 
TTrovided you do not break your word, I donH care this for all the 
rest. ^Would that the letter had not been written!^ Live with 
men as if the immortal gods saw you. (Insert * sic ^in the princ. 
clause.)^ Speak with your friends, as if all men heard you.^All 
men are calling upon me, as if forsooth it were my business to 
assist all men«/2.Would that Varro himself would apply vigorously 
to my cause |/(^Perhaps some one may say, that these things are 
too small to he seen with the naked eye (pl.)y4ffi[ow few are 
there, who apply-vigorously to another man's cause ! 



t Sic relates more to something preceding and actually ^eit : ita to something 
fvOowing and ntpposed, (R. and H.) 



$ 63. 498-508.] antbquam and priusquam. 179 

XXV. 

§ 63. Antequam and Priusquam. 

498. (a) When the principal verb is in the present tense, the 
verb in the clause with antequam or priusquam may be in the 
pre^, indicative or subjunctive. 

499. (h) When the principal verb is in the future, the de- 
pendent verb may be in the future perfect, or the present sub- 
functxee ; sometimes also it is found in the present indicative. 

600. (c) When the principal verb is in a past tense, the de- 
pendent verb is either in the perfect indicative or in the imperfect 
stdjunctive : — ^in the perfect indicative, if there is no closer can- 
necUon between the two occurrences than precedence in point rf 
Ume, what is stated in the subordinate clause being stated as an 
actual occurrence ;— in the imperfect (or, if necessary, the pluper- 
fect) subjunctive, when there is a closer connection between the 
two occurrences than that oimere precedence in point of time. 

501. And, generally, whenever there is a closer connection be- 
tween the two clauses than that of mere priority (whenever, for 
instance, it is stated or implied to be necessary, proper, or designed 
with a view to some purpose,^ that the one action or event should 
precede the other) ; and whenever the two are contemplated as 
forming a connected sequence, the subjunctive should be used. 

602. Obs. When the stress is on the hefortt ante or priua stands in the prin- 
cipal clause ; either early in it (which is their most emphatic position), 
or just before the qttam, but not forming one word with it. When they 
are thus emphaHc, the verb being in past time, the perf. indicative is 
commonly used (rather than the imp. mbj,) : especially when a nego" 
tioe accompanies them : rum ante^ nee ante, non jniuM. 

603. (a) Ante rorat quam pluit, It drops before it rains. 



* In the following passage Livy uses the pree, where we should rather have 
expected the etibj. * Sed ante quam opprimU lux majoraque hostium agmina 
olsepiunt iter . . . erumpamus' (zzii. 50). So too in Virgil: *Sed mild vel 
tellus, optem, prius ima dehiscat, | Ante, pudor, quam to violo,* &c. {Mn. iv. 
25.) In Nep, iii. 2, the imp, mbj. is used where there seems to be only the 
simple relation oi precedence in point qftime, < Aristides interfuit pugnis navall 
apud Salamina, que facta est prius quam ille posnE (exsilii) HberarUwr.^ 



180 ANTEQUAM AStD PEITJSQITAM. [§ 63. 504-50b. 

Tempestas minatur antequam surgat, A tempest 
threatens before it gets up. 

(b) Antequam aliquo loco cansedero, longas a me literas 

non exspectabis, Till I settle somewhere^ you will 
not expect long letters from me. 
' Antequam de republic^ dicam, exponam vobis bre- 

viter, &c. 
Priusquam respondeo . . . dicam, &o., (Phil. ii. 3.) 

Priusquam conor proponam, &c., (iii. de 

. Orat. 25.) 

(c) Hbbo omnia ante facta sunt, quam Yertes Italiam 

attigit, All these things were done before Verres 
reached Italy. 
Ducentis annis ante quam Romam caperent, in Italiam 
Galli transcenderunt, The Gauls crossed over ifUo 
Italy two hundred years before they took Rome. 

601. (1) (Eng,) A mortal body must necessarily die. 

{Lot.) It is necessary, that a mortal body should die (Corpus mor- 
tale interire necesse est ; or intereat necesse est ; the Bubj 
being governed by ut omitted). 
(2) {EngJ) There is no Ztrin^ pleasantly. 

{Lot.) It cannot be lived pleasantly (jucunde vivi non potest). 

605. VOCABULAEY 69. 

(The Prepositions Pbjcteb, Secuitduh ) 
Pb JETER, beside; beyond, above (of degree); contrary to; besideof Uy 
say nothing of, except, but. 
Contrary to expectation^ prsBter ezpectationem. 

Contrary to your custom, preeter consuetudxnemiuam. 

Secundum {from sequi), * following.*. Along r qfisr (of time); 
qfUr, next to; according to; in favour, ^(with verbs of judging, Ac). 
He made a decree in your favour, secundmn te decrevit. 

Exercise 74. 
[How are questions of appeal to be translated in oblique narration 1] 
y 506. I will not leave the city before I have had an interview 
with Caius (J).j? Before I set out, I had an interview with Balbus 
(c)^He answered that, before he set out, he had an interview 
with Caesar. ^/There is no living pleasantly, unless you live 
(impers. pass.) according to nature *PUnder the guidance of na. 
ture there is no going wrong. /^Contrary to expectation, the 



} 64. 507-511.] DT7M; DONEC, QUOAD, &C. 181 

Praetor has made a decret in favour of Caius.9^hey exclaim, 
* Are not hidden dangers always the most diffieult to avoid ? ' 

i^Who can deny, that the Praetor has made a decree in your favour? 

^ TJds heitig the case, I have no doubt that the Praetor will make a 
^ decree in your favour. yJfThis being the case, the world must 
necessarily be governed by some wise mind.^^irtue must neces- 
sarily' hate vice,^^ am not so foolish as to deny (486, t) that 
virtue and vice are contrary to each other ^/Jf I had not believed 
Caius, I should never have put myself in their power.yf^ho w 
there who denies this ? 



XXVI. 

§ 64. Dum, Donecj Quoad, &c.- 

507. (a) Dum, donee, quoad (= until, tilt) take the indicative^ 
when they merely mark the time up to which the action or state 
is to be continued. 

508. (h) Dum, donee, quoad (= untU, tiU) take the subjunctive^ 
when that up to which the action or state is to be continued, is to 
be represented, not as a fact^ but only as what may possibly occur ; 
especially when it is itself the object pursued. 

509. (c) Dum, whilst, takes a present indicative even when the 

principal verb is in a past tense. 

This arose from an endeavour to represent duration in a Tivid man- 
ner. A past tense is occasionally found, e. g. ' qui dum veritus ett, nos 
yidit.' (Cie. acL Att. i. 16.) ' ' Que divina res dum conficiebatur, que- 
sivit,' Ac. {Nep, Hann, ii.) 

510. Dum, donee, quamdiu, quoad " (= as long as) take the indi* 
catwe* 

511. (a) Epaminondas ferrum in corpore retinuit, quoad renun- 

Uatum est vicisse Bceotios, Epaminondas retained 



" In the sense of *uhil»tf* 'at long as,' donee always denotes a space of time 
carried on to such a terminaiionj dum denotes this, but more with reference to 
the tpaee Uadf^ than to its termxnaiion. Quoad marks the continuance of tlM 
time quite up to the point mentioned : it relate* to a demorutrative expressed or 
tmderstood in the principal clause. When the statement introduced by wkOti 
is the cauMor oeearion of what follows, dum should be used. 



182 DUM, DONEC, QUOAD, &c« [{ 64. 512-514. 

the spear m his body, UU it was reported to him thai 
theBcBotians had conquered, 

(b) Differant, donee defervescat ira, Let them put of (the 

purpose of taking revenge) UU their anger cools. 

(c) Dum Romani ea parant • • . jam Saguntum oppugna- 

hatur, Whilst the Romans were making theseprepa* 
rations, Saguntum was already hesteged* 

512. FOCABULARY 70. 

After,^ po8tq;iiam ; aamtiimeM poBteaqiiam. 

Before, antequam 

As soon as \ ^^ P**™^™ » q^um primum ; simul ac; 

c or atque: (with uu^ic.) 
When = as soon as, ubl j ut ; (with indie.) 

(Adverbs of place with gmit.) 
Where in the world are you 1 ubi terramm es 1 

Where in the world are we 1 ubi gentium sumus 1 

To such a height of insolence, eo insolentiee. 
To what a degree of madness, quo amentis. 

r quoad ejus facere possum (where tht 
As fiir as I ean, < geniL ' ejos * relates to tne preceding 

C proposition). 
Asferascan be done; as far as > ^^ -^ g^^ 
possible. ) 

To meet, \ °^**™ (^^^ ^^^ ^^ • o^vlam, from ob^ 

\ via). 
To march against the enemy, obviam ire hostibus. 
^ ^ C prBpius (with dot. or ace. (see 211) So 

* c proxime). 

(Adverbs of qwmtUy with gawt.) 

' sat, or satis,^ of what is rwUy enough : 
affatim of what a given person ihxnka 
oifeda enough. Affatim = ad fatim, 
Uo satiety;' fatis an old substantive 
from the same root as fatisco, fatig^ 
and lastidium. (D.) 
Abundantly, abunde. 

Abundance of timber, abunde materiae. 

513. {Eng.) In addition to thia, he was blind. 

{Lai.) There waa added to thisy that he viras blind (Hue accedebat, tU 
csecus eati. With a pre*, tense, accedit). 

514. i:^ With the adverbs meaning * as soon aa* the English pZttpcr/irf should 

be translated by the p^fect. In ihia sense, postquam * after * is usually 



V Sat before polysyllables, mOia before dissyllables. {Bammgarten, Crusius ad 
Sueton.) 



Enough, 



565.515,516.] QUOD. 183 

followed by the peifed indicative. (See note % page 114.) ^Vhen tbo 
jhnptrf, is used, the succeeding action is generally not represented as 
fiUowing the o^etimmediaJtdy : e. g. P. Afncaniu^poatcaquam hit 
eonnd et covkt fu crat, L. CoUam in judicivm vocavU (Cic. Div. in 
Gee. 21) : this howerer la not always the case : e. g. Nep. Lysand. 4 
(<iid) ipostquamdc tuU rdma^-d ixtra tr^ibrum—Uradtdit. When 
continued states or repeated actions are described, the principal verb 
being in the imperfect^ the imp. or phtperf. is used. * Simulac se re- 
miaerat .... reperiebatur,* (Nep, Alcib. 1.) (Z.) 

Exercise 75. 
[How are questions of appeal to be tnmsiated in direct narration 7 427, c] 
/ 515. As long as he was in the city, I opposed his designs. 
* Men, whilst they teach, learn. ^^Who can deny that men learn 
whilst they teach ?«f As soon as the business is finished,*® I shall 
wait upon Caius..<^^s soon as t}ie business was finished safirfac 
UMrUy, he waited upon Caius. ^fWait till Caius returns." J^Let me 
know where in the world you are.Jfltfen have now arrived 
{impers. pass*) at such a height of madness, that p whilst all men 
consuU their own inierests^ no man promdea for the interests of his 
country ^It is the part of a wise man, as long a^ he lives, to 
prefer virtue to all tKings.l^7n addition to this, he was lame of one 
legJlfRofw few osre there who provide-for-the-interests of their 
country t/^e persuaded the Athenians to march, against the 
enemy .^Wait at Rome till you recover.yJThe business is too 
difficult to he finished by any* hody./^i is not every body who can 
finish such*°> a busine^ in a few daysvjfWe learn many things 
whilst we are playing/j^a.ye we (then) need of some Greek master 
to teach us^''^ to play upon the lyre i^fhet us neither ask what is 
disgraceful nor do it p when we are asked. 



XXVII. 



§ 65. Quod. 
616. ^That^ is expressed by ^quod, when it introduces the 
ground of a former statement, or the explanation of a term in a 
former proposition ; especially when it refers to a demonstrative 
pronoun or adverb expressed or implied. 

^ Show the ambiguity of this sentence by translating it in two ways. 



184 QXTOD. [§ 65. 517-521 

Such pronouns and adverbs are id, hoc, ilhid: so, idea, ideirco, prop- 
Urea, inierea, Ua, tarn, He, <f«. 

517. Verbs of the affections (rejoice, grieve, wonder, dec.,) are 
followed by quod, or by the accusative with the infuiitive.' 

518. Quod takes the indicative, except when it introduces the 

ground of another ^rson^s judgment or conduct ; when it takes 

the subjunctive (by 461). 

Of course it must be followed by the subjunctive in obUqut ncaroHon x 
and it must be remembered that when an ace, with infin, follows a vtrl 
of mxymg, <ftc., the narration is oblique. 

519. The ground of an accusation is, of course, in the sub. 

junctive (by 461) ; so also the reason for which another person • 

praises or blames any body. 

620. ' Q^od * with a verb is often the proper way of translating \he parti- 
espial eubgUmtive under the government of a preposition. 

(1) {Eng.) He accused Um qf having betrayed the king. 

( Lat. ) He accused nim, that he had betrayed the king {quod with 

(2) {Eng.) Hia having tpared the conquered, is a great thing. 
( Lat, ) TViot ke spared the conquered, is a great thing. « 

(or) ' That (or, this) that he spared the conquered^ is a great 
thing.y 

(3) {Eng.) He praised (or blamed) him, /or having^done this. ^. 
( Lat. ) He praised (or blamed) him, that he had done this. 

{Quod with.«u&;. .* the indicative wovHd intimate that the narrator 
believed him to have actually done it.) *■, 

(4) {EngJ) Many persona admire poems without understanding them. 
( Lat. ) Many persons admire poems, nor understand them. 

(^que intelligunt.) 

(5) {Eng.) You cannot be ruined i0{^(m<ru&iing others. 
( Lat. ) You cannot b^c^ined so aa not to ruin others. 

{ut nan > with mhf.) 

521. VOCABTTLARY 71. 
To be praised, grieve for, \ ^^^^^ ^^J"' ^°^^ ^^^ ^ ^' ^ 

X (luodj introducing the statement as a fact, is naturally better suited to the 
past than to the present. * Gaudeo quod acripsiati * is better than * te acripaiaaej 
(Z.) With verbs that express an emotion or feeling {gaudeo, doleo, miror), thfl 
occ. with inf. is the more common : with those that express the man^eataHon 
of an emotion or feeling {laudo, reprehcndo, aecuao, miaereor, gratiaa ago, grat» 
ulor, eonaolor), quod is preferred. (Z., 8th ed.) 

J Magnum est hoc, quod victor victis pepercit. 

> Or ' qmn* if the sentence is of a negative character. 

* DoUre is to feel pain or aorrow; mcerere is to ahow it by outward signs that 



J 65. 622.] QUOD. isa 

Orieve ; grieye for, mcBrere, mcBstus (with aee. or oU.). 

To moum ; bewail, lugSre, Inx, luct. 

To be glad, leetari, Isetatus. • 

To rejoice, gaudere,^ iBCavisus sum. 

Exceedingly, vehementer. 

To recruit oneself se ref ic6re. 

(The Prepofiitioii db.) 
Di, eoneemingf abovi; down froms from (Cicero has, audire de ali 
quo : 80 Smere, conducere tie aliquo) : qf^ with partitives : by or accord- 
ing to, of advice (de consilio meo) ; with words of time ; Ac 

In the middle of the night, mediA de nocte. 

By night, de nocte. 

Late at night, ' multft de nocte. 

On purpose^ de industrii. 

To know a man by face, de fade nosse. 

Unexpectedly, de improvfso. 

Exercise 76. 

[In sentences dependent on an irt/bi., what tenses are sometimes found instead 
of the impeifttad j>b»perf, subj.7 469, d.] 

/522. Know that I do not know the man even by face.^I am 
exceedingly glad that you have finished the business to your 
satisfaction.^! rejoice that you have obtained a triumph for a 
victory over the Gauls j/l shall wait at Rome till I recruit myself. 
^He answered that he was going to remain at Rome till he had 
recruited himself. ^1 will not leave Rome before I have recruited 
myself.^Caius praises the greatest poets vnthout understanding 
them.^I had ratber be a good man without seemng (one), than 
seem one toithout being (so) [Translate with trfJ.^Would you 
prefer being wise without seeming (so), or seeming wise wUhovi 
being so t/A\ did not fear that any one would grieve for the death 
of abandoned citizens^/lNo one ever grieved more for the death 



are vnvoluntaryy arising from an irreaistible feeling (and thus mosrere and 
moBTor rise above doUre and dolor) ; lugere is to 9how it by convmHonal signs; 
to moum. (D.) 

b Gaudert is Xoftd joy ; Ustari is to ihovi it hj joyful lookg, &c, (D.) DSder- 
lein thinks Cicero mistaken when he makes Zctori express an exulting^ triumphs 
ant }oy, gaudere a more temperate delight. But could Cicero be mistaken on 
ruck a point, involving no principle of etymology, but only a correct perception of 
the relative force of two words in common use? At all events, according to 
DoderUMt own explanation, ketarif expressing the manifutaHm of joy in con- 
sequence of an irrematSbUfotUng^ might be expected to rise above gauden, 'yaeH 
as mmrere above ddere. 



186 THE ROMAN CALENDAR. [§ 66. 623-528. 

of his only son, than he grieved for that of his fathery^^hy 

Bhould V now bewail the life of men ?/{frhis being the case, whai 

reason have we^" for bewailing the death of abandoned citizens f 

y^How few are there, who would bewail the death of Gains ? 

/t^hey P set upon the enemy unexpectedly, and put them to flight. 

/ffHe did it in such a manner (ita) that it seemed to be done on 

purpose. 



XXVIII. 
§ 66. The Roman Calendar. 

523. The Roman months were of the same number of days aa 
the English months, but were diiSerently divided. 

524. The first day of the month was called the Kalends (Ka< 
lends) : the Nones (Nonas) fell on the Jifth or ^even/A ; the Ides 
(Idus uum, f.) were always eight days after the Nanes^ tliat is, 
on the thirteenth or Jifteenth. 

525. In March, July, October, May, 
The Nones were on the seventh day. 

(And therefore the Ides on the Jifteenth.) 

526. Days between the Kalends ipd the Nones were reckoned 
by their distance from the Nones: those between the Nones 
and the Ides by their distance from the Ides: those after the 
Ides by their distance from the Kalends of the following month. 

Hence a day after the fifteenth of May, would [be Buch[a day be£9re 
the Kalends of June. 
627. Suppose we take the third of March; this Is a day before the Nonea of 
March, which happens da the aecmffi. Now 7—3 = 4: but the Ro 
mans reckoned both days tTi, so that they would call the third of March 
not the fourth, but thej^fth day before the Nones. 

528. To suit this Roman way of reckoning, we must subtract 
the given day from the number of the day on which the Nones or 
Ides fall increased by one. If the day be one before the Kalends, 
we must subtract from the last day of the month increased by two. 
If the remainder be two, the day will hepridie; because the day 
the Romans would call the second day before, was * the day be- 
fore J OS we speak. 



6 66. 52d-^31.] THE ROMAN CALENDAB. 181 

629. Thus take the 3rd, 9th, 23rd of June : 

(1) In June the Nones are on the Jijth: therefore three must be sub* 
tracted from (5 •\-\=)six; and the remainder being 3, the dayii 
<the third day before the Nonet of June.' 

(2) In June the Nones being on the fifth, the Ides are on the tkirUeathf 
and the subtraction must be from fourteen. Hence subtract 9 from 
H: the remainder being 5, the day is the Jlfih day before the Ides of 
June. 

(3) Since June has thirty days, we must subtract from thirty-two. 
Hence substract 23 from 32 ; the remainder being 9, the day is tho 

ninth day before the Kalends of July, 

fiCr (The adjective forms are used with the months,* and Idus 

is fern,) 
580. To express when ? 

<0n the third before the Kalends of March' is by rule *die teWib ante 
Kalendas Martias,' which was shortened by the omission of dU and 
ante into ^tertio Kalendaa Martiaa* or 4ii. Kal, Mart.* 

But another form is used (almost exclusively) by Cicero and 
X/£oy;this form is * ante-diem tertium Kalendae Martiaa* shortened 
into * a. d. iii. Kal, Mart,,* a form which cannot be explained gram^ 
maiicaUy, 

This ante-^iem came to be treated as an indeclinable substantive, and 
the prepositions od, tn, ex, were prefixed to it, as to other substantives 
of time. 

631. [Whenl <m what day?] 

Natus est Augustus ix. Kalendas OctohreSj Augustus 

was horn an the twenty-third of September (32— 

9=23.) 
Claudijs natus est Kalendis Augustis, Claudius was 

ham an the first of August. 
Claudius obiit (or excessit) m. Idus Octoln'es, Claudius 

died on the thirteenth of October (16 — 3=13.) 
Meministine me ante diem (a. d.) xU. Kalendas iSfovem- 

hres dicere in Senatu ? Da yau rememher that I spoke 

in ihe Senate an the 2lst of Octoher ? (33 — 12=21.) 
[Against or hy such a day : far such a day.] 
Consul comitia in ante diem tertium Nonas Sextiles 



• These forms are, Januarius, Februaiius, Martins, Apriis, Mains, Junius 
anintUli (sr JuUus), Sextilis {or Augustus), Septem-, Octo-, Novem-, Deoem- 
bris. 



188 THB ROMAN CALENDAR. [§66. 532-53d< 

( = Augustus^) edixit, The Consul fixed the elections 

hy an edict far ihe third of August (6 — 3=3.) 
In ante dies octamtm et septimum Kalendas Octohres 

comitiis dicta dies, The lime of the elections is fixed 

for the twefUpfourth and twenty-fifth of September 

(32—8=24). 
Capuam venire jussi sumus ad Nonas Fehruarias^ 

We are ordered to come to Capua by the fiflh ol 

February. 

682. Vocabulary 72. 

C oomitia, 5nun (properly/ the suBsemb^ng 
Elections, / of the people ' for the purpose of elect' 

( lug the consuls, &c, Ac). 
To my election \ '^ "*^ comitia (i. e. to the meeting at 

' c which I am to be elected or rejected). 

To suffer, sinere,* f^v, sit; pSti, ior, passus. 

To lose flesh, corpus amlttgre. 

To stay (in a place), commorari. 

To compel, cSgSre, coSg, coact. 

The day before the Ides, pridie Idus : or pridie Iduum. 

To fix by edict, edicere (with ace.). 

It is worth while, opersB pretium est. 

633. (a) {Bng.) Instead of reading^ he is at play. 

(Lot.) He is at play, whereao he ought to read (quum debeat). 
(b) (Eng.) Instead of growing rich, he is growing poor. 

{Lat.) He is growing poor, tphereas he might grow rich (quum possetj, 
534. (c) {Eng.) Far from thinking this^ I hold, <&c. 

{Lai.) It is so far off that I should think this, that I hold, Ac. (tan- 
tum abest ut— ut,* <ftc.) 

Exercise 77. 
/ 535. Tiberius died on the sixteenth of March JcNero was bom 



4 The months of Jmy and August were called QuintUiSf Sextilis respectiyely, 
( a: the ffffi and sixth month, reckoning from Mardi^ the old beginning of the 
year,) till those names were exchanged for Julius and Augustus in honour of the 
first two Caesars. 

♦ Sinere is properly * to let go,^ * not to stop^* pati is, * not to proihibii ••' sinere has 
for its immediate object the person actings paH the action itself: sinere is eom^ 
manly f though not exclusively, followed by ut with the subj. : pati by the aoc, 
with tn/ln. (D.) 

* Tantum abest ut nostra miremur, ut . . . . nobis ipse non satisfaclat Demos* 
(henes. Sometimes the second lU is omitted, the clause having rir or tHamx 
* tantum abfuit ut inflammares nostros animos: somnum viz tenebamii&' 
(Clc. Brat. 80.) 



^ 67. 586-539*] sonnbction of propositions, &c. 199 

on the fifteenth of December. ^Caius was bom on the fifteenth 
of October.,^balbus died on the twelfth of August.t/Vitellius 
was born on the 24th of September ; or, as some (say), on the 
seventh of September. ^^The Consul has fixed (by edict) the elec- 
tions for the 21st of July. 71 believe that the elections will be 
fixed for the ninth of A^iiu^ Say that I shall not be angry with 
him, if he does not come»» to my election. ^I am compelled to 
stay here till I recruit myself: for I have lost both flesh and 
strengthv'^ifrhere are some who think that the elections will be 
fixed for the ninth and tenth of July ./^nstead of being with me, 
he is at his own house/j^J^stead of being very rich (as he might 
have been), he is very poory^Instead of applying vigorously to 
the affair, he is gone into the conntTyys^ am so far from praising, 
that I can scarcely restrain myself from calling you a betrayer 
of your country .//l am so far from believing any body (no mat- 
ler who he may he), that I scarcely believe you/bl was so far 
from being ill spoken of, that all men prafeed mejTThere were 
some who laughed. ^ 



XXIX. 

§ 67. Comiection of Propositions hy the RelaUve, 
Imperative forms. 

636. Any relative pronoun or adverb may be used for the cor- 
respondmg demonstrative with the conjunction and (and some- 
times, hut, for, therefore, &c.) 

537. When in English such a clause as ' they say,^ < as — says,* 
&c., is inserted parenthetically in a relative sentence, the verb of 
this clause should generally be made the principal verb of the 
relative clause in Latin, the other verb being put in the infini- 
tive. 

538. When in English the relative pronoun is separated from 
its verb by another clause, which contains a demonstrative pro. 
noun, the relative should be expressed in thai clause in Latin, and 
the demonstrative be expressed or understood in the other. 

539. The imperative may be expressed by several circumlo* 
cutions : 



100 ^ CONNECTION OP PROPOSITIONS f § 67. 540-542. 

(1) The imperat. of command by cura ut (take care to), 
fac ut {oifac only) with subj. 

(2) The imperat. of prohibition by cave with suhj 
(governed by ut omitted), or noli with infnJ 

610. (a) {Eng.) Two and two make four : qn<2 if fhU is granted, &c, 
{I^d.) Two and two make four : if uhinh is granted, Ac. 
(6) {Eng,) Cains, toAo, tA^ m^, was killed at Lugdunum. 

{Lai,) Caius, whom they report to have been killed, Ac. 
(e) {Eng.) Crassus, who, as Lucilius tells us, never laughed but once. 
{Lot,) Crassus, uhom Lucilius report* to have never knighod but 
once. 
((f) {Eng,) Narratives, by tM^ when we road thtnij we are affected. 

{Lot.) Narratives, which when we read, we are affected. 
(«) {Bng,) Success with trfticft, if it should fall to our lot, we should bb 
dissatisfied. 
(Lot,) Success, if whichs should fall to our lot, we should be dis- 
satisfied. 
(/) {Eng,) I did this; andif you had not thwarted me, Ac. 
{Lot.) I did this ; whom if you had not thwarted, Ac. 
541. [C. zzxv.];:^ ' Wm* and ^would,^ ^wUlnot^md 'wouldnot* are often 
principal verbs, to be translated by velle and noUe respectively. 
They are to be translated when for 

irtO, wauldf we may substitute 

ia (are, <ftc.) wiUing, was (were, &c.) willing, 

642. Vocabulary 73. 

(Phrases with e, ex ; pbje, pro, iv,) 

To have a pain in my feet, ex pedibus laborSre, or dolgre. 

To cook with water, ez aquft cbquCre ; cox, coct. 

Prom a wall, ex muro. 

Opposite, over-against, e, not ex, regione.* 

To be tired with a journey, e vi& languere. 

To Uve according to nature, e nature vivSre. 

From the heart, ex animo (in sincerity). 

It is for my interest, e re me& e8t.h 

(To place) on a table, in mensi. 
For = owmg to, especiaUy of ob- > .^^^ ^ . 

stacks, jr V /. 

In comparison with him, prse illo. 

Safe, salvus, a, um ; incolumis^ Is, aJ 



r Cura ut quam primum venuu. Fac animo forti, magnoque tia. Cave 
putes, or noli putare.— Such forms in English are, *teJeo cart to,' *6e mirej/ou,* 
mind youy* Ac 
9 In Latin, the relative must stand before bL 

* Another noun will, of course, follow regUme in the genu 
t So, e republics est. 

* A person is tutus when he is in safety ; sfcurua when he bdievea himself to 



§ 67. 543. BY THE RELATITE. 101 

• 
Pro virili parte, according to one's duty or poweT as an indiyidual {not 

* with all one's might ') as far as an individual can. 
Pro re nat& (according to the thing that has arisen) = according to 

drcwnMtancts, 
Pro eo ac mereor^ according to my deaerts. 

Exercise 78. 

M2/I for my part wished this: and if Pompejus had not 
envied me, the republic would now be safe.^^Philosophy teachea 
that the world moves ; and if this be true, we also must neces- 
sarily move ^ Who can deny that this is for my interest l^^^o 
gods will requite me according to my deserts. ^s it not certain, 
that the gods will requite you according toyour deserts ?^I am 
sorry that you have a pain in your head.Tlf you had done this, 
I should have praised you from my heart. /'You will not be able 
to see the sun for the multitude of our javelins. ^Caius, being 
tired of his journey, was killed by his slave /^OTiey answered 
that they would receive VLS^/t)id he not answer that he would 
not receive us J^^o not think that the soul is mortal.,/^ake care 
to finish the business to my satisfactioUi/^^o not think that every . 
man can command himselfj^/6e sure to come to my assistance 
as soon as possible./^Who will deny that these, things are for the 
interests of the republic l^ cannot speak for sorrow v^flBe sure 
not to impute this to me m a fault/^e sure not to hurry^gj^e 
sure not to believe that it is necesswy to make haste ; for, if ybu 
believe this, it is all over with us^/The moon is eclipsed, when 
it is opposite to the sun^JMay I not determine what should be 
done according to circumstances J^S^t is the part of a good citizen 
to defend the republic as far as an individual cai^^S^^nefits, for 
which, if you confer them upon me, I will prove myself grateful 
(memor) JS^ou may eat the food p which is placed on the table. 
M^Q says that he will not eat the cheese p which is placed on the 



be 60, and is ^xnXhma care (se-curus) or anxiety on the subject. Hence 'Ne sit 
mouruB^ qui non est iultua ab hoste.' Of aahusy soapea^ ineolumis^^-aalmta says 
the least (as it properly relates only to {existence) ; aospes more, as it points to 
the protection of a higher power ; inadumia the most of all, as it excludes not 
only annihUationf but even the supposition of any injury or attack. 



102 SOMAN WAY OF RECKONING MONET. [§ 68. 544-547 

tablej2|^ shall do what appears** best to be done according to 
circunistances^55^^®^ w®^® ^°*® ^^^ could not speak for 
sorrow. 



XXX. 

§ 68. On ike Reman way of reckoning money. 

544. The Romans reckoned their money by sesterces : and by 
nummuSf yhen it means a eoiny sestertius is always meant. 

d.q. 
645. A sedertiua ( =r 1 3} or 3| cent0) was not quite equal to hoopenee 
English money. 

A autertium = a Vwuaand sestertii : it was the name of a turn, not 
of a eom. 

546. Sestertii and sestertia are used quite regularly with nu- 
meral adjectives : but sestertium in the singular is used in a very 
peculiar way with numeral adverbs. 

547. O^With numeral adverbs sestertium means so many 
^ hundred thousand sesterces J 

Hence Sestertium aemel * ^ < a hundred thousand sesterces.' 

Sestertium c2eeiets: ten 'hundred thousand sesterces' s= a 

million sesterces. 
Sestertium vicUa^s 20 'hundred thousand sesterces' = two 
million sesterces. dc <ftc. 

Obs. With numeral adverbs below 'ten taneSf* so many hundred thour 
mmd aeaterces are meant. 

With numeral adverbs above and rmdtipleB of ' ten times,' throw away 
the cipher from the units' place, and you have the number of'millioM 
of aeBterees* 

Thus, if * sestertium sexeenHea* were the sum; throwing awayO 
from the units' place of 600, we have ' 60 mUXuma of seatercea* for the 



£. a, d. 
• A sestertium = 8 1 5^ = $38 68. 
Sestertium semel = 807 B 10 = $3873 60. 
Sestertium deciea^ eeniiea, milliea, &c, (that is, the multiples of aeTnd by 10) are 
got approximately by this rule s— For every cipher in the proposed multiple add 
to the right hand of 807 one figure taken (successively) from the l^ hand of the 
series 291666 continued ad infinitum. Thus to get aeatertium milliea^ since lOOG 
has 3 ciphers, I must add 3 figures (291) taken from the left hand of the given 
series to the right hand of 807. Hence mUUea aeatertium = 807291 = nearly 
94,000,000 in tohoU numbers. 



$ 68 548-552.] eoman way of reckoning money. 198 

With intennediate numerals, the sum is easily obtained by these 
rules : Sestertium ter vicies = < 2 million, 3 hundred thauatmd m»- 
terce»J 

548. In this construction sestertium is declined : 

Sestertium vicies, two million sesterces. 
Sestertii vicies, of two million sesterces, &c. 

549. In turning the number of sesterces into Latin, remember that to the 
numeral before 'milluma* I must add a cipher in the unii^ place (in 
other words, multiply it by 10) to get the numbed adverb^ that is to go 
with sestertium. Thus in < 2 million sesterces,' by adding a cipher in 
the units' place to 2, I get 20, and vicies is the adverb required. 

.550. (a) Sex millibus ssdes conduxit. He hired a house for six 
thousand (sesterces). 
(5) Sex sestertia persolvit. He paid six thousand sesterces. 
(c) In sestertio vicies (splendide se gerens), On a fortune 
of two million sesterces. 
551. Vocabulary 74. 

Inheritance, haereditas, atis, f. 

To keep up a certain state, splendide se gergre ; gess, gest. 

ilibertinus, I, m. (but if spoken in rtfet' 
ence to his master^ iTbertus. Thus 
Brutus's Ubertus ia one qT the doss 
libertini). • 

oriundus: — *nati CarthagXne, sed oH. 
tmdi ab Syracusis ; * bom at CarthagCi 
Descended from, < but of Syracusan extraction ;' or * de- 

scended from a family that had for- 
merly lived at Syracuse.' 
Meanly, Bordide. 

Exercise 79. 

552/ He kept up a certain state with a fortune of three million 
sesterccs.jKWith a fortune of two millions of sesterces he kept 
up more state than Caius, who had received 10 millions from his 
father. ^Caius, the freedman of Brutus, left more than^ 15 thou- 
sand sesterces.^f;^hat you, with a fortune of 10 millions, should 
live so meanly !,^aius, who was of Syracusan extraction, sent 
Brutus two hundred thousand sesterces as a present.^^On the 



k With ampliuSf plus^ minus^ &c. quam is often omitted ; the noun standing 
in the case it would have stood in, if quam had been expressed. SometimeB 
however the ablat, follows these adverbs. 

9 



194 



SOMAN WAT OF RECKONING MONBT. [} 69. 55d-M5 



2drd of Noyember, Balbus sent me as a present twenty thousand 
sesterces^^^^e gave them three thousand sesterces a-piece.^'From 
this inheritance Atticus received about ten million sesterces. 



( 69, On the division of the As : the method of reckoning frao- 
tions, interest, &c. 



563. 



Ab 

Deunx 

Deztans 

Dodransi 

BesCbesaiB) 

Septunz 

Semis (semiBsiB) ( 

Quincunx 

Triens 

QuadranB 

Sextans 

Unda 



■H- 
(A=) t 



fan Am. 



654. These words were used to express the Jractions set down 
opposite to their names. 

555. The same division was used in reckoning the interest of 
money, which was due monthly. Asses usura = one As per 
month for the use of a hundred. This was also called centesima 
usuTffiy because in 100 months a sum equal to the whole principal 
would have been paid. 

orcentesimie usune ^ 12 per cent. 



Deunces 








r " 


Dextantes 








10 


Dodrantes 








9 


Besses 








8 


Septunces 








7 


Semisses 




usurse 


. 


6 


Quincunces 








6 


Trientes 








4 


Quadrantes 








3 


Sextantes 








2 


Unci» 








1 


BiiuB centesimsB 


= 24 


pe 


r cent, and so on. 



1 Dodrans = de-qnadrans. 



§ 69. 556, 557.] eoman way of reckoning money. 195 

556. (a) Statura ejus quinque pedum et dodranHs fuit, His 
height was jive feet and three-fourths {five feet 
nine). 
(Eum) hseredem fecit ex dodrante. He left him heir 
to three- fourths of his estate. 
(b) Assihus usuris grandem pecuniam collocavit, He 
invested a large sum of money at 12 per cent. 

Exercise 80. 

557/Caius, the freedman of Balbus, has been n:ade heir to 
one half of his estate.JgP© has left one Caius, of Carthaginian 
extraction, the heir to seven-twelfths of his estate ; from which 
inheritance he will receive, I think, about six hundred thousand 
sesterces.^The freedman of Brutus, who died at Rome on the 
third of August, has left nearly fifteen million sesterces ; and it 
is thought that Caius has been left heir to half his estate^/He. 
is said to have lodged a large sum of money in the hands of ^ 
Balbus at 9 per cent. 

" Apud aliqucm collocare. 



TABLES FOR REFERENCE. 



TABLE I.— GENDERS. 

Obs — 3JaB. exceptions are in capitals sfem. in the common type ; ntuJt, (n UaUm 

(Thibd Declension.) 

Mas, terminations. Fern, terminations. Neut. temUnatuMB* 



KB, OB, OS, 

ES increasing^ 

0, when not do, go^ io, 



Principal Exceptions. 
cr) cadaver vber 

iter ver 

papaver verber 

tuber 
or) arbor 

{egtufr 

tnarmor 

ear 
e») compes rcquics 

merces seges 

merges teges 

quies <bs 

Off) cos 

dos 

Off fossis) 

Off (oris) 

iehlaot 

fepos 

imehs 
o) caro 

techo 



FiBST Decl. Fern, 
except names of men. 



Sec Decl. (us, eb) f 
Mm.— except 
alvus 
domus 
humus 
vannus 
pdagua 
virus 
vulgus (also m.) 



to] 



dOj go, lo,* 
as, IS, aus, 

es not increasing 

B impure 

us in hypermon. 

Principal Exceptions. 

I CARDO 
^. ^ LIGO 
"'LMARG0(f)j 
is) AMNI8 LAPIS 

AN GUIS (f) MEN6IS 
AXIS ORBIS 

CA88Is(is) PANIS 
COLLIS PISCIB 

CINIS POSTIS 

CBINIS PULVIS 

ENSIS SANGUIS 

FASCIS TOBBIS 
, FINIS (f ) UNGUIS 
FOLLIS VECTI8 
FUNIS VEBMI8 

IGNIS 
X) OALIX 
CODEX 
COBTEX 
GBEZ 
POLLEX 
8ILEX (f ) 
tTHOBAX 
VEBTEX 

BIOENB (JlOe). 

8 im- { ifONS 
purel PONS 

FONS 

DENS BUDENS 

tHTDBOPS 
as) AS ELEFHAS 

vas {vasis) 

/«* 

nefas 



c,a,t,t,l,n, 
art ur^ HSj 
us monosyll. 



Principal Exceptions 

Q SAL 

SOL 
n) LIEN 

BEN 

6PLEN 

PECTEN 
Ur) FUB 

FUBFUB 

TUBTUB 

VULTUB 

iZff) pecus (udls) 

LEPU8 

Cff»iono-$eni8(m) 



syUMey"^^"^) 



MUS. 



FOUBTH DbCL. (us) 

Mas, except 

acus 

idus (pi.) 

manus 

porticuB 

tribus 



Fifth Decl. 
Fem. except 
DIES (also Fan, 
in sing,) 



♦ Words in io that are not abstract nouns are mo*, e. g. papilio, pugiO| 
BciPio, sEPTENTBio, sTELLio, uNio (pcarf), with the numeral nouns tebniq, 
auATEBNio, Ac. t Properly Greek words. 

X Those with (f ), (m), are sometimes fem. and mas. respectively. 

9 Greek nouns in ddus (exodus, methddus, <f<c.) wUh dialectusj diptIionpru& 
^, arc fem. 



FORMATION OF THE PEKFECT AND SUPINE. 197 

These rules depend on ttie terminations ; but some words have a 
particular gender from their meaning. 

A. The names of maU persona and trincb, are masculine. 

B. The names oi female peraons, counlries, islands^ tovma^ plants^ and 

treea^ are fem. 
(a) But of Unona, these are maa, 

(1) Some in o (ckoto, hippo, nabbo, sflmo, pbusYno) : and 

(2) All plurals in i; vEir, Delphi. 
These are neuter : 

(1) All in ttwi, or plur. a ; (2) Those in e or ur of the third ; Prah 
neMte, TSbur. 
{h) Of treea and phnUa; 

(1) Those in er (and many in ua) of the second are maa, : 

(2) Those in er, ur of the third are neut. : acer^ ailer, rcbur^ <f»c, 

C. Several are common: comea^ amjux^ cuatoa^ dux, fujapeaju^venia, parens^ 

princepa, aacerdoa, ^e. 



TABLE II. — Formation of the Perfect and Supine, 

I. llJrThe first syllable of diaayllable perfects and supines is Umg, if the next 
syllable begins with a consonant. 

(a) But 86ven perfects have «Aor/ penult: bibi, dSdi, fidi, scidi, steti, 8titi,tttlL 
(6) Nine dissyllable supines have ahort penult: datum, citum,'*' Itum, litum. 

quitum, ratum, rtttum, satum, situm. 
(c) Statum from ato is long, but from aisto short ; and the compounds of ala 

that make atitum have i : as preeat^tum^ from prceatare. Though noaco has notum^ 

Us compounds that have Uum have I (cognosco, cognXtum), 
N. B. Verbs in italics have no supine. 

II. First Conjugation [properly a contracted conjugation ; ama-o, amo], 
(\) Most verbs of this conjugation form roots of perfect and aupine, by 

adding r, t, respectively to the proper root, 
[amo (ama-o); aniav-i; ama/-um.] 

(2) Others change a into u; and form the sup. in Xtum, after rejecting a, 
CrSpo, crSpui, crSpitum. So ciibo, dbmo, frico (alao fricatum), mJcOi 

sttno, tttno, v5to, s5co (sectum)— jlivo, juvi, jutum 7 jfivatum7 

(3) Others form perf. in both of these ways. 

Discr^po, discrepavi and discrepui, discrepatum (7). So incrSpo (ui, itum 
preferred) ; the compounds of neco, and the obsolete plico (fold). 

{But supplico, duplico, multiplico, only avi, atum : explico, expkunf 
reg. ; unfold, ui, itum.) 
(4) Irregular (with reduplication). 
Do, dedi, datum {wiGi a in dare, dabo, dabam, &c.) ; sto, stSti, statum : hid 
stare, <&c. 



* From eieo, to excite. Of the compounds several have clre, cKtim, from thi 
obflol. eio. 



198 FORMATION OF THE 

HI. SSCOND CoNJUGATIOir. 

Properly a covdracted conjugation, but with the vowels open in the first 
pers. singular of the present tense. ■ (Mone-o ; mone-is =: monas, &cO 

(1) Most reject e, and form perfect and supine in ui, Hum, 

(Mon-eo, mon-ui, mon-Uum.) 

(2) But some retain e, and add r, in the perf.— eo, evi, etum. 

Deleo, delevi, deletum. Fleo, neo, and verb§ formed from oleo* {make 
to grow), pleo (J^t <^^ s^^o (<vit acctuUnned). 

(3) Others form perf. from root of present, lengthening the vowd (if 
short), when pres. ends in a single consonant. 

Caveo, cavi, cautum : faveo. 

Ptfveo, fovi, fotum : mttveo, voveo : ptfreo, ferveo (and fef bui) ; Con- 

nvoeo, nivi and nixL 
Prandeo (pransum), video (visum), sSdeo (sessimi), ttrideo,^ 

(4) Others form perf. in su 

(a) p sounds. {Any pc sound with azsps; but bs sometimes r= m.) 

Jubeo, jussi, jussum ; sorbeo, sorpsi, sorptum. 
{fi) k sounds. (The k sound, if impure, is thrown away before ». Any 
k sound with 8z=.x: ^ is to be treated as a A: sound.) 

Mulceo, mulsi, mulsum. Algeo, indulgeo (Indultum), ftUgeo, mtUgeo, 
tergeo, turgeo, urgeo, torqueo (tortum). 

Augeo, auxi, auctum : lueeo,frigeo, lugeo. 
(y) t sounds, {t sound thrown away before •.) 

Ardeo, arsi, arsum ; rideo, suadeo. 
{S) Liquid verbs, (r thrown away before a.) 
Maneo, mansi, mansum : haereo. 
(«) With reduplication, {t sound thrown away before s.) 

Mordeo, mbmordi, morsum : pendeo, spondeo, tondeo. 
{0 Neuter passives : audeo, ausus sum ; gaudeo, gavfsus sum ; soleo, 

solitus sum. 
(*j) The following have perf. in ui, but do not form their supines in i/um, 

Doceo, doctum ; teneo, tentum ; misceo, mixtum and mistum ; toneo. 

tostum ; censeo, censum ; recenseo, recensum and recensltum. 

IV. Thibd Conjugation. 

(1) Perfect in i, added to root of present. 
(a) Acuo, acui, acutum : arguo, congruo, Imbuo, induo, luo (luitunis), 
metuo, minuo, pluo, ruo (rutum, ruitum), spuo, statuo, atemuo, suo, 
tribuo. Volvo, volvi, volutum. So solvo. 
(/?) t sound thrown away before a in sup, 
Mando, mandl, mansum ; pando (passum, pansum rare), prehendoj 



• Some of which have deaco in pres. Aboleo, sup. aMihrni : adolcsai 
vduUum. 
b langueo, langui ; liqueo, liqui and licui 

smooth, mid. asp. 

« Mutes with a p sound, p b (ph). 

k c g (ch). 

t t d (th). 



PERFECT AND SXTPINE. 199 

ecando; and compounds of condo {kindle)^ fondo {thrufC)^ in cendot 
Jendo. 
(y) Bibo (bibi, bibitum) ; cudo (cusimi), digo^ lainbOipsallOf9ciibo(EcM)i 
aidoj vello (vidsum : also inilsi), verro (yersumd), verto (versum), yibo 
(viBum). 
(^ (Short TOwel of root lengthened-^ changed hito e in perf.) 
Cap-io, capi, captum : £lcio, jScio, ago, 6do (gsum),*emo (emptum), iSgo 
(lectum), fddio (fossum), fugio (fugitum). 
(c) (n or m, by which the present has been lengthened from a nmpUr 
root, rejected.) 
(retaining short vowel) findo (fid), f tdi, fissum : scindo (scxd). 
(lengthening the vowel : a changed into 9.) 
Frango, frag, fregi (fractum) ; fundo, fud (f asum) ; linquo, liqu, lie 

(liqui, Uctum) ; nimpo, nip (ruptum) ; vinco, vie (victum). 
Percello, percnli, perculsom ; sisto, stiti, Btxtam. 
(0 With reduplication. 
Cado, cScidi, casum ; csedo, cScIdi, ciesiim ; cano, cScinl, cantum ; credo, 
credidi, crfiditum ; pango (pag), pgplgi, pactum : parco, pgperci, par- 
citum or parsum ; pario, pSpSri, partum ; pello, pSpuli, pulsum ; pendo 
pSpendi, pensum ; pungo, pupugi, punctum ; poseOf p))posci ; tango 
(tag), tStXgi, tactum ; tendo, tStendi, tensum cmd tentum ; tundo 
tutudi, tdsum. So the compounds of do ; eondOf abdOf reddo^ 4^c. 
cond^i, eondttumf Ac. 

(2) Perfect in si, 
(jj) p sounds. (53r -Any p sound with slaps; with /, pt.) 

Glubo, glupsi, gluptum : nGbo, sciibo, carpo, rSpo, scalpo, sculpo. 
{$) k Munds, including those in A, ^ and et, (Any k sound with s\bxs 
with t, d.) 
Cingo, cinxi, cinctum ; sGgo, tSgo, fingo (fictum), tingo, ungo : avigo 
figo (fixum), jungo, lingo, mingo, mungo, mngo^ pingo (pictum), 
plango, stringo (strictum), rSgo, dico, dilco, cdquo, trSho,* vCho. Add 
compounds of stinguo ; exstinguo, restinguo. 
Flecto, flexi, flexum, nezo (also nezui), pecto. 
(«) Liquid Verbs (assuming a j7 before s) 

COmo, compsi, comptum ; d5mo, promo, silmo, contemno. 
(c) t sounds, (t sound tlm)wn away before s s vowel, if shorty lengthened.) 
Claudo, clausi, clausum ; divido, divlsi, divlsum : tedo, lado, plaudo, 
rado, rodo, trudo: mitto (mlsi, missum).— C<mi|)otmc29Qf vado 
(>) k sounds, (the k sound thrown away.) 
Spargo, sparsi, sparsum ; mcrgo, tergo. . 
(^) t sounds, {ds changed into ss;) cSdo, cessl, cessum. 
(y) Liquid verbs, (f , m changed into s before «.) 

06ro, gessi, gestum : uro, prSmo (pressum) 
(D Compovpnds of specio (6«AoiiO etuim^ tti spicio maks spezi, spectum. 



4 terri^verswn poetical. Z. 

• h seems to have had originally a hard sound. Thus hiemt for x«fiwi and 



200 fOEMATION OF THE 

T7io»e in lido/roni lacio (entice) except eJicio, make lexi, lectum. 

Diligo, dilexi, dilectum : intelligo, negbgo. 

Col-, e-, di-, se-, ligo, tDtth perlego, prselego, haveperf. legi. 
(3) Verbs with perf. in wt. 
(o) Without change of root 

aio, alui, Xlitum (and altum) : coIo (cultum), consiflo (consuItumX 
molo ; occulo (occultum), vitioj nolOj malo! compounds of cello (rush ) 
shoot forth) ; firSmo, g6mo, trgmoj vomo, gigno, (gen, gSnui, ggni-« 
turn) ; lapio, rapui, raptum ; sSpiOj elicio, compeeco^ diepeseoj depso 
{aleo depstum), pinso (also pinsi, pistum) ; eterto (also sterti).— Com- 
pounds qf sero (to connect), serui, sertum. 
(») With change of root. 

MSto, messui, messum; pono, ptfsui, pttsTtum; ccnio,f crevi, ere- 
turn ; lino, lev! (livi rare), Iltum ; sino, slvi, situm ; sperno, sprevi, 
spr§tum; stemo, stravi, stratum; sSro, sevi, sStum; tSro, trivi 
tritum. 

Cresco (ere), crevi, cretum ; nosco. 

Pasco (pastum) ; quiesco, suesco. 
fi) Verbs forming perf. in jri, as If they had roots ending in k sound or K 

Fluo, fluzi, fluzum ; struo, structum ; vlyo (victum). 

(4) Perfect in m. 

(o) Peto, pStlvi, p^titum * cttpio, arcesso, capesso, lacesso, incesso 

(5) Neuter Verb. 
h) Fido, f Isus sum (confido, diffido). 



Fero, tiQi, latum. 
Tollo, susttUi, sublatum. 
V. FouBTH Conjugation. 

(1) Perfect in %. 

(a) Venio, v6ni, yentum; compSrio, compSri, compertum. (Sbreperio 

(2) Perfect in m*. 

(fi) Salio, salui, saltum ; apSrio, bpSrio, Xmicio (amicui 7). 

(3) Perfect in sL 

Farcio, farsi, fartum ; fulcio, haurio (hausi, haustum), raucio (rausum); 

sarcio, sepio ; sancio, sanzi, sanctum ; vincio ; sentio, sensi, sensum. 
■VI. Deponents. 

Second Conjugation. Fateor, fassus; liceor, licitus; mSreor, me- 

ritus: misSreor, miseritus, misertus; reor, rStus; tueor, tuitus; 

vBreor, veritus. 
Third Conjugation. Adipiscor, adeptus : amplector, amplexus ; com- 

plector, complexus; 4ivertor, diversus; (ao praevertor, rSvertor;) 

expergiscor, experrectus ; fruor, fruitus and fructus ; fungor, functus ; 

grSdiDr, gressus : invShor, invectus; iraseor, iratus; labor, lapsus^ 

Itfquor, lOcutus ; mbrior, mortuus; nanciscor, nactus; nascor, natuat 



' Properly, to separate. In the sense of to Bee, it has neither perf. nor sop. 



PERFECT AND SUPINE. 201 

mtor, Disus, nixus; obliviscor, obEtas; paciscor, pactus; pascur 
pastas; pStior, passus; prSficiscor, profectus; qu6ror, qnestus 
sSquor, secutus : ulciscor, ultus ; iitor, Qsus. 
FouBTH Conjugation. Adsentior, adsensus: expSrior, expertusj 
metior, mensus ; oppCrior, oppertus ; ordior, orsus ; Brior, ortus.ff 

VIJ (i;^ sc in verbs denotes the beginning of an action or state.) 

Inchoatives in sco have no perfect^ but that (in m*) of the rcot. Thla 
would hardly be considered their perfect, did not some of those formed 
from nouns take a perfect in uiy though no verb in eo occurs. 

VIII. In compound verbs (1) a, cb^ of the root often become i, sometimes 
e: (2) e of the root often becomes i: (3) the redttplicaiion of the root \i 
dropt, iaxcept in praecurro and the compounds of poBeo a&d disco. 



ff The present follows the thirds but 2 sing. oriTio or crtris, 

9* 



TABLE 

or 

Dlt-JJEKKNCES OF IDIOM. 
4^. 



Enolish. 

1. You and I. ) 
Balbus and I. > 

2. Saya that he has nof- sinned. 
Says that he has nerer, <ftc. 

3. He promises to come. 

He hopes to live. 

He undertakes to do it. 

He pretends to be mad (16). 

4. To have a prosperous voyage. 



5. To my, his, ^c. satisfaction : satis- 

factorily; successfully. 
G^ To fight on konebaek. 
6*. It is a breach of duty. 
7. He sends the most faithful slave he 

has. 

6. He was the first to do this, > 
(Or) He was the first who dM this. ) 
So^ He was the only one loho did it. 

9. Such is your temperance, 

Or, Pfm vwr M*uai temperance. 



Latin. 

( I and you, 
\l and Balbus. 

Denies (negat) that he has sinned. 
Denies that he has ever, <&c. 
He promises that he wiU come (ace. with 

inf.) 
He hopes that he shall lice (ace. with 

inf.) 
He undertakes that he will do it (ooc. 

with inf.) 
He pretends that he is mad {ace. with 

tTif.; pron. expressed). 
To sail from ( = according to) one's 

thought or intention {ex sententid 

namgare.) 
Ex senteniid. 

To fight from (ear) a horse.b 
It is against (contra) duty. 
He sends the slave, whom he has tho 
most faUhfid. 

He the first (person) did this (55). 

He alone did it {soluts feci£). 
r Whicfi is your temperance. 
1 Of which temperance you are. 
] For ( = in proportion to) your tern 
[ perance (56). 



* Obs. Says not should not be translated by nego unless it is in answer to an 
adtial or virtual question. When the not is closely connected with the foUowina 
verb^ it should be translated by non. 

^ Ex sqwM^ if more persons than one are spoken ot 



TABLE OF DIFFERENCES OF IDIOM. 



20S 



15. 

16. 
17. 

18. 

19. 
20. 

21. 

22. 

23. 
24. 

25. 
26. 
27. 

28. 



It's 
V 



ENQUeH. 

As far aa I know. 
It's all over with . . . 

To make the same boast. 

To make the same promise. 

To make many promises. 
J^To utter many fidsehoods. 
To take by storm. 

That nothing . . . 

That nobody . . . 

That never . . . 
[This is only when ' that' intro- 
duces a purpose.'] 

No food is so heavy as not to be di- 
gested, &c. 

He is «o foolish aa to think, ^c. 

She never saw tiim without calling 
him, <&c. 

He could scarcely be restrained 
Jrom throwmgi &c. 

I left nothing undone to appease 
him. 

I cannot but, <&c. 

I will not object to your doing it. 

It cannot be that the soul is not 
immortal (89). 

r Nothing prevents him from do- 
J ing it. 

■^ fib, nothing deters him from do- 
l ing it. 
It was ovoing to you that I did not 
succeed. 

By sea and land. 
J To be within a very little of . . . 
\ Or, But a little more and . . • 
Not to be far from. 

I almost thlnkjC > . 

I don't know whether, \ 
To take away any one's life. 

The city qf Rome, the island of 

Cyprus. 
He did thisa« (or when) Consul. 
( I may go. 

{ I am permitted to go. 
I ought to do it. 
I ought to have done it. 



Latut. 
Which I may know (quod secum). 
It is done concerning {actum est de), , 
To boast the same thing (69). 
To promise the same tmng (59). 
Togromlse ^^^^^^ 

Tofght a place out by force (per vim 

expugnare). 
Lest any thing {ne quid). 
Lest any body (ne quis). 
Lest ever {ne unquam). 



No food is so heavy but {guin) it fnay 

be digested, &c. 
So fooUsh Mo/he thinks (u/), 66, d. 
She never saw him, but (quin) she 

called him, <&c. 
He could scarcely be restrained but thai 

(quin) he should throw (88). - 
I left undone {prodermiai) nothing 

thai I should not (quin) appease him. 
I cannot do (any thing) but that {fa^ 

cere non possum qtdn), <&c. 
I will not object bid that {recusabo 

quin) you should do it. 
It cannot be {Jieri) but that {quin) the 

soul is immortal. 
Nothing prevents (obskd) by which he 

should the less do it {quominus &ciat). 
Nothing deters him by which he should 

theless do it (99). 
It stood through you by which I should 

the less succeed {per ie steiit quomi' 

nuSf Ac, 99). 
By land and sea. 
To be a very little distant hut thai . . . 

[minimum abesse {impers.) quin.] 
Haud multum > «hfi«;e 
Haudprocul jaDesse. 

Haud sicio an ; nescio an, Ac. 

To snatch away life to ( s: from) any 

one (vitam aucui eripere. 132). 
The city Rome ; the island Cyprus. 

He Consul ( ^ being Consul) did this. 

( To me it-is-permitted {Ucet) to go 

I (124). 

It behoveth me {oportet me) to do it. 

It behoveth me {oportuU) to do it (126). 



« Haud scio an, nescio an, dubito an may be followed by the negatives, nemui 
nihil, nuUus, nunquam, or by the for as that follow negatives, quisquam, quie* 
quam, uUus, unquam. Haud scio an .lemo approaches nearer to a denial than 
haud scio an quisquam. (G.)— But Cicero and his contemporaries never omit 
the negative. {Matthid, Hand, Ac) 



204 



TABLE OF 



EirOLisH. 

29. I am at leisure to read. 

30. I have need of food. 



C making-haste. 
There IB need of >?Jj^;f^-„. 
[ tion. 

31. How many are there of you? 
How many are there of us? 
Three hundred qfua are come. 

Of whom there are \ JfJ?; „, „^„ 
•^ ( very nvany. 

Very many of which . . . 

32. Some mock, others approve. 

33. One was a Greek ; Hie other a Ro- 

man. 

34. Such a lover of truth. 

35. To take in good part. 

36. He was condemned in his ab- 

sence. 

37. To prefer a capital charge against } 

Caius. \ 

To bring an action against a ) 

man for bribery. ) 

To prefer a charge of immorali- r 
ty against Caius, L 

To inform a man of a plan. 

38. Without any danger . . . 

39. It is characteristic of . . . 
It is incumbent on . . . 
It is for . . . 

It demandSf or requires^ firmness. 
It shows^ or beiraysj weakness. 
Any man may do it. 
It is not every man who can &c. 

It is wise. 

40. To reduce to subjection. > 
To bring under his dominion. ) 

41. To be capitally condemned. 

To be acquitted of a capital charge. 

42. Common to me and you. 

43. To compare things together. 

44. To threaten a mxinwOh death. 

45. To prefer death to slavery. 



There-is-leisure (vaca£) to me to reatf 

C (1) There is to me a business with 

< food {prep, omitted). 

f (2) Food is a business to me. 

{(the matter) being hasten' 
(t»£ matter) being am- 
(thT matter) prompOi 
done {177). 
How many are ye 7 {miot estis?) 
How many are we 1 (quot sumus ?) 
We (being) three hundred are come. 
(Trecenti venimus.) 

Which very many (quae plurima) . . 
Others mockj others approve (alii— 

alii). 
The other was a Greek ; tJu other a 

Roman (alter— alter). 
So {adeo) loving of, &c. 
Boni consulere.t (See 185.*) 
He being absent was condemned. 

To make Caius an accused-person 

(r«w) of a capital matter (187). 
To make a man an accusea-person ol 

bribery (gen.) ; or^ about bribery (de). 
To make Caius an accused-person 

{reus) about morals (de moribus, 

187). 
To make a man surer of a plan {certio' 

rem facere). 
Without {eayjersj adj.) all danger . 
It is (a mark) of . . . 
It is hfie duty) of . . , 
It is Uhe character f privilege, &c.) of . . 
It is (a thing) of ( = for) firmness. 
It is (a mark) of weakness. 
It is any man's {task) to do it. 
It is not every man's {task) to do it 

(non cujusvis est), &c. 
It IS {the conduct) of & wise man.' 

i:^ Words in brackets to be omitted 
To make of his own dominion {sua 

ditionis facere). 
To be condemned of the head. 
To be acquitted of the head. 
Common to me with you. 
To compare things amongst (or be- 

cween) themselves (inter se) 221 (c). 
To threaten death to a man (222). 
To reckon slavery after death (servitu- 

tem moTti posthahere, 227). 

(or, as in Eng.^ with anteponer^). 



t JSqui boni facere : in bonam partem accipere. 



DIFFERENCES OF IDIOM. 



2G» 



EWGUflH. 

46. To Burround the city with a wall. 
To besprinkle a man with praises. 
To put on a gannent. 



To take the enemy's camp, bag- 
To obstruct {or cut off) the ene- 
my's flight. 
To cut off the supplies of the 
Gauls. 

4T. I have a book. 
I have two books. 
To come 
To send 



48 



To set out : 



to the assistance of 
Caesar. 



19. To give as a present. 
To impute as a fault. 

50. To be a reproachj or disgraceful. 
To be very advantageous. 

To be odious ; hateful. 

Obs. 'flow* before the adj. must 
be ' quanius ' in agreement with 
subst. 
151. To throw himself at Cassar's feet.] 

52. Gains would say . . . 
Caius used to say . . . 

53. I fear that he vM come. 

I fear that he vjHI not come. 

54. The war agavisl Pyrrhus. 
Connection wtth Pompey. 
Rest from labours. 
Wrongs done to Caius. 

f 6. He did it that h.3 might the more 
easily escape. 

56. To make CsBsar retire. 

57. It M becoming to (or in) an orator 

to be angnr, &c. 
Soj it ia unbecoming to (or in) an 
orator . . . 

58. This victory coat them many 

wounds. 



59. Hardly any body. 



Latin. 

To give-round {circumdSre) a wall to 
the city [or as in Eng.]. 

To besprinkle {aspergere) praises to 
man for as in Eng. J 

To clothe (induere) myself with a gar- 
ment ; or to put-on {indtiere) a gar- 
ment to myself. 

To strip (exuere) the enemy of theii 
camp, baggage, &c. (abl.) 233. 

To shut-up (intercludere) flight to tho 
enemy (233). 

To shut-up {intercludere) the Gauls 
from their supplies (abl. commeatu). 
233. 

There ?s a book to me. 

There are two books to me (238). 

To se^d^ I ^° ^®sar for an assist- 
losena > ance (dat.). 

To set out. ) V«*ut.;. 

(Auxilio venire, mittere, proficisci.) 
To give/or a present (dono dare). 

(Culpas, or vitio dare, or vertere.) 
To he for a reproach (opprobrio esae) 
To be for a great advantage (magniF 

utilitati esse). 
To be for a hatred {odio esae). 

(So impedimento, honori, Ac, esse.) 
Quanto odio est ! {Jiow odious it is I) 



[Se CsBsari adpedea projicere; or lit^* 

rally.] See p. 89, note 1. 
Dicebat» 

I fear leat he come {ne veniat). 

I fear that he come (ut veniat*). 

The war of Pyrrhus ] 

Connection of Pompey I r'^jf,'^* 

Rest 0/ labours ^^cnUwe. 

Wrongs of Caius J 

He did this, by which {quo) he might 

more easily escape. 
To make that Caesar should retire (/a» 

cere, or ejfflcere utj Ac). 
It becomea an orator to be angry, &c, 

{oratorem decet), 
{Qratorem dedecet . . .) 259. 

This victory atood^ to them at many 

wounds {flbl.), 266. 

[Compare the Eng. ' this atood me hi 
a large sum.'] 
Almost nobody {nemo fere) 249. 



• Or^ ne non veniat. 

^ This notion is probably that of a debt standing against i man in his credi- 
tor's books. 



800 



TABLB OF 



Ehousb. 

60. Kake a bad, &c, use o^ dc. 

61. He deserves to be loved. 



62. To inflict punishment on a man. 

63. To gain a triumph for a victory 

over the Grauls. 

64. A blessing on >your 
Good IucIl, or success to > valour. 
Gro on in your valour ! 

66. You are envied, spared, favoured, 
answered, <&c. 

66. I don't know when the letter will 

be written. 

67. i2 0M7IW, it «au2, &c. that Caius has 

retired. 

68. We hace todUced, come, &c. 



69. To have reigned above six years. 

70. Before the Consulship of Caius. 

71. He went to a wchool at Naples. 

72. We should all praise virtue. 

A time to play. 

Fit to carry burdens. 

He is born {or inclined) to act. 

Prepared to take up arms. 

73. Whilst they are drinking, playing, 

<&c. 
To be able to pay. 
To be equal to bearing the burden. 

Th tend to the preservation of lib- 
erty. 

74. I have to do another page. 
I vnh have U done. 

75. He gave ^hem the country to dwell 

in. 

76. I go to oofitfutt Apollo. 



77. Balbus luxting Iqfl Lavinium, <&c. 



78. From the ^neio/ibn of Rome. 
From the deatruction of Jerusalem. 
The honour of having saved the 
king (of the king's ©rctcrrofum). 
V9. He does it vnthaut robbing others. 
He ^oes away without your per- 
cetving it. 



gsebadlv (273), 
e is a deserving person, who should 
be loved (dignus est qui ametur). 
276. 
To affect a man with punishment (276) 

(aliquem poeni afficere). 
To triumph concerning {dc) the €buhi. 

Be thou increased in valour (macte 

virttUe esto: voc. for nom. 280). 

^Plur. macti este .0 
It u envied (spared, favoured, answered, 

&c.) to you {290). 
I don't know when it will be {(juando 

futurum sit) that {tU) the letter be 

written (290). 
Caius seemSf issaidf &c. to have retired 

^nearly always). 
It has been walked^ come, &c. (that Is, 

hyvB: ambulatum, ventum est). 
[This is only an occasional and possible 

construction.] 
To be reigning his seventh year. 
Before Cains Consid (ante Caium con- 

sulem). 
He went to Naples to {vrep.'S a school. 
Virtue is to-be-praised by all (laudan- 

da). 
A time of playing. 
Fit for burdens to be carried {oneribus 

gestandis idoneus). 
He is bom {or inclined) for acting {ad 

agendum). 
Prepared for {ad) arms-to-be-taken-up. 
During drinking, playing, Sui. {inter 

bibmdum^ ludenduTn^ &c,) 
To be for paying (solvendo esse). 
To be for bearing the burden (onerl 

ferendo esse). 
To be of liberty to-be-preserved {oou' 

servandcB libertatis esse). 
Another page is to-be-done. 
I will cause it-to-be-done (curabo fact* 

endum). 
He gave them the country to be dweU 

in (habitandam). 354. 
I go intending-to-consuU (consultunxs) 

Apollo (354). 
C Balbus, Lavmium being left, <&c. 
< Balbus, when he had left Lavinium, 
C Ac. 

(Relicto Lavinio ; or quum reliquis- 
set Lavinium : 363, a.) 
From Romefounded (a Romi conditA). 
From Jerusalem destroyed (363), 
The honour of the saved kmg {servati 

regis decUB). 
He does it, not rahbing others. 
He goes away, you not perceioUtg xt (te 

Tum sentiente). 



DIFFBRENCBS OF IDIOM. 



20t 



Enolish. 
They condemn him wUhoui htaring 
him. 
60. I have completed the work. 

I see plainly through hia deaign. 



Bl. I heard him Wi 
82. 



I saw him tDolk, 
That only. 
And that too. 

By a good man U is true^ but an 
unlearned one. 



Literature, and thai too of no com- 
mon kind. 
63. A slave of mine, 

84. He took away all my care. 

85. That famous Medea. 

86. Those whom we love we also wish 

happy. 

87. Something or other obscure. 

Some chance or other. 
Somewhat disturbed. 

88. Henry, Charles, caul John. 

69. Every opinion that, &c. 
Every man who. 



90. OTwBalbus. 

91. One runs one way, another anoth- ) 

er. V 

Different men run different ways. ) 
Some run «ne way, others another. 



92. The best men always, &c. 
Hidden snares are alw&ys, <&c. 



1 



All the wisest men. 
93. These are Aard to avoid. 



There is difftcuUy in avoiding [ 
these. J 

He has the greatest difficulty in sus- 
pecting. 
94. lie is /oo proud to steal. 

D"). I armed thegjtatest forces I could. 



Latdt. 

They condemn him taiheard (inaudi 

turn). 
I have the work completf'd {opus abao> 

ltaumhabeo),364, 
I have his design seen through (per* 

spectum habeo). 364. 
I heard him singing, 
I saw him waUcmg (361). 
That ai length (is demum). 
Et it, iiqoe, tdemque. 
By a good man that indeed, but an un- 
learned one (a bono iUo mtidem viro, 

sed — , or sed tamen, 383). 
Literature, nor^/to/of-a-common-kind 

(nee ecB vulgares). 
*My slave:' or *a certain one out of 

(quidam ez) my slaves.' 
He took away/rom me (miht) aJ care. 
That Medea (Medea ilia). 
Those whom we love, the same (eos* 

dem) we wish happy. 
I know not what of obscure (nescia 

quidobscurt). 
J know not what chance {nescio quis ca- 

sus). 
Disturbed I know not what {nescio quid 

conturbatus). 
J Henry^XJharles, John. 
jHenry, and Charles, and John. 
WTio^rfir opinion {qtuecunque opinio). 
Whoever {quis^is). 

(More commonly than in English, as 
we seldom use whoever, when the 
notion of every Is emphatic), 
A certain (quidam) Balbus. 

Another man runs another way. 

Other men run another way (or other 
ways). 

[alius— oZiMtf (or some adv. derived 
from alius).] 

Each best man, &c. (optimus quisque). 

Each hidden snare, &c. (but quisque 
may be used in the plur. when a subs, 
is expressed in this construction : oc* 
evltissimte queeque insidiae). 

Each wisest man {doctissimus ndsque.) 

These are avoided with difficulty (diffi- 
cile). 
{Difficilius, difflcillinie, when requlr- 

He suspects with the greatest difficuttji 

(difficillime) 
He is prouder than th.it he {quam ut oi 

guam qui with subj.) should steal. 
I armed forces (as gTesit)€u the greatest 

I could (quam mazimas potui cO' 

pias). 



208 



TABLE OP 






English. 

96. Am great a differenoe as there can 

possibly be. 
The greatest possible difference, 

97. I have been long desiring. 

They had long been preparing. 

96. When I take my journey, I will 

come. 
When I have performed this, I will 

come. 
When he is come^ he will tell us. 
When you toish to play, rcTnem- 

ber to play fair. 
As you soWf so will you reap. 
I will do it, if I can. 
99. They do nothing but laugh. 

100. What sJiaU I do 7 
What om I to do 7 
What can I do 1 
yfhysfumld I relate? 
What was I to do 7 
What should 1 have done 7 
What ought I to have done 7 

101. You would have thought. 
You would have believed. 
You would have said. 

102. I remember to have read. 

103. It would have been better. 

104. No painter. 

This does not at all terrify me. 

105. Even this is not just, unless it be 

voluntary. 

106. He was more prudent than brave. 

107. To make a bridge over a river. 
The thing in question. 

108. I have nothing to accuse old age 

of. 

I have found xarcdy any thing to 

censure. 
Men who abound in silver, in 

gold, in estates. 
Men who abound neither in sil 

ver, nor in gold, nor in estates. 
A pen to wrUe tvith. 

109. [Constructions with the relative.] 

(1) Some persons think: or there 
are some who think, &c. 

(2) You have no reason {cause^ occa- 
*uwi, ruedf Ac.) to hurry. 



Latin. 
A difference as-great-aa the greaieat can 
be {quanta maxima potest esse). 

I am a long time already desiring (Jam- 
pridemcupio). 

They were a long time already prepar- 
ing (413). 

When I tjiall take my journey, I will 
come. 

When I sJuUl have performed this, I 
will come. 

When he shall have cottic, he will tell us. 

When you ^mll wish to play, remem- 
ber to play fair. 

As you shaU sowj so will you reap. 

I will do it, if I ^all be at>te. 

They nothing else than laugh {nikH 
aXiud quam rident). 

Q,uid faciam 1 

Cur haec narrem ? 

Quid facerem ? (425.) 

Putares. 

Crederes. 

Diceres. 

Memini me legere. 

It was better (utilius or satius fuU *). 

(Often) nemo pictor. 

This terrifies me nothing (nihil me ter- 

ret). 
Even this is so just, if it is voluntary 

{ita justum . . . . si est, &c.). 
He was more prudent than braver (pru- 

dentior qnamfortior). 452, w. 
To make a bridge in a river. 
The thing de quo agitur. 
I have nothing which I may accuse old 

age (nihil habeo quad incusem sen- 

ectutem). 478. 
I have found scarcely any thing, which 

I may censure. 
Men who abound in silver, who in 

gold, who in estates. 
Men who do not abound in silver, not 

in gold, ntft in estates (478). 
A pen, with which one may write (478). 

There are some who think {subj. 

Sunt qui putent, &c.). 
There is nothing (on account of) 

which you should hurry {nihU est 

quod festines), 
(or) There is not (any thing, for) which 

you should hurry {iwn est quodj Ac.) 



« So, satis, par, rectum, justum, idoneum, optimum, consentaneum, mdiiM, 
equius, rectiua, satius erat — fuit—fuerat. 



DIFFERENCES OF IDIOM. 



20S 



-• aesplsed by them, for 
ttieu saw through him. 
(4) He deserves to be loved. 



(5) He is not a proper person to be 
received. 

(6) None are w good aa never to 
sin. 

(7) Of »u/ck a kind tkai we can neg- 
lect duties for their sake. 

(8) Too short to he the whole life 
of man. 

(9) I am not a man (or, am not so 
foolish, simTtUj crtaulints^ &c.) as 

to believe tnis. 
(10/ Who am I thai my wriiinga 
should be honoured thus 1 

(11) They sent ambassadors to sue 
for peace. 

(12) He deserves praise (blame, <fit.) 
for having done this. 

(13) Wretched man that I am, who 
thought, <&c. 

(14^ How few there are who, &c, 
UO. In censuring them you censure 

me. 
m. It is many years since he was first 
in my debt. 

I congratulate you on your influ- 
ence with Caius. 

I don't like to be abused. 

112. A mortal body must necessarily 
perish. 



TTiere is no living pleasantly. 

113. In addition to thts^ he is blind. 

1 14. He accused him of having betrayed 

the king. 

His having spared the conquered, 
is a great thing. 

He praised (or blamed him) /or 
having done this. 

115. Many persons admire poems inth- 

out understanding them. 
You cannot be ruined without 
ruining others. 
L16. Instead of readings he is at play. 



Latin. 
He was despised by them, 'xho S'tw 

through him {qui with oubj.). 
He is a worthy person who should be 

loved. (Dignus est, oui ameiur ; or 

quern ames. So, maignus est, qui 

ametur: or^ quem ames.) 
He is not a proper person tcAo shovld 

be received {pr^ whom you should re- 
ceive). 
No one is so good who never sins 

isvbj.). 
Of such a kind for the sake of wMdi wo 

can neglect duties. 
Shorter than which can he (quam qua: 

sit or possit esse) the whole life of 

man. 
I am not that (person) xiiho can believe 

{is qui credam). 

Who am I whose writings should be 

honoured thus ? 
They sent ambassadors who should sue 

for peace {qui pacem peter ent). 
He deserves praise, &c. who did this 

{suhj.). 

me miserable, wlw thought^ &c. {qui 
with suhj.) 

^Quotusquisque est qui . . ? {with subj.) 
tilien you censure them, you censure 

me {([Uum with indie.). 
There are many years when he is \n 

my debt {guum in meo aere est). 

1 congratulate you, when you avail so 
much with Caius {quum. generally 
quod^ tantum vales apud Caium). 

I am not abused willingly {libenter, 

491). 
It is necessary that a mortal bod; 

should perish. 

[Mortale coi-pus Interire {or intereat) 
necessef est.] 
It cannot he lived pleasantly (504). 
Hither is added^ that he is olind (hua 

acced-it, ebat, &c. ut«r). 513. 
He accused him that (quod) he had &e- 

trayed the king isubj.). 
It for * ^w,' ' that ') is a great thing. 

that (quod) he spared the conquered 

(tn(2ic.). 
He praised (or blamedj him that (quod) 

he had done this {suhj.). 520. 
Many persons admire poems, nor un 

derstand them (520). 
You cannot be ruinea so as not to ruin 

others {ut non with subj.). 521. 
He is at play, whereas he ougfU to be 

reading {quum debeat). 



t This necesseis anoldadj, used in the neut, gender only, 
8 More commonly Titod 



210 



TABLE OF DIFFEBBNCSS OF IDIOM. 



Ekolxsh. 
Inatead ^ growing rich (as he 

might) he is Rowing poor. 
Far from thinking ihisy 1 hold, 

Ac. 

117. And (but, Ac.) if this is granted. 
WhOf thevsayy was killed. 
Who, asB. says, was killed. 
By wfdchf when we read them, wa 
are affected. 

Do not think. 

Take care to do it. 

Be sitro to beg or mind yon are. 



Latin. 
He is growing poor, whereas he might 

grow rich (^umpo«M^). 
It is so far o^that I should think thhi 

that, Ac. 

(Tantum abestut ut). 533. 

If uihich is granted. 
Whom they report to have been killed 
Whom B. reports to have been killed. 
Which when we read, we are aifected. 

5 Beware of thinking, caveputea. 
I Be unwilling to think, nou jndare, 
Cura ut facias. 



PERFECT Al^D SUPINE. 211 



QUESTIONS ON THE CAUTIONS. 

k. WuEN must him, her, them {he, she, they), be translated by am ? and hia, her, 
ite, theira, by auua? (When the pronoun and the nom. of the verb stand 

/for the same person. C. x. 12.) 
When is the per/, in a sentence with * that ' to be translated by the preaeni 
infinitive 7 (When the action or state expressed by the perf. is not to 
be described as over before the time referred to by the prinjcipal verb. 
C.ii. 13.) 

3. When must * ahmdd * be translated by the preaent infinitive 7 (When it doea 

not express duty or a future event.^ C. iii. 13.) 

4. When are wovid, ^unUd, signs of the future Z (After past tenses. C. 

IV. 16.) 

5. When should ^ thing ' be expressed 1 (When the mas. and the neut. of the 

adjec. are of the same form. C. v. 21.) 

6. Where is cum placed with the ablatives of the personal pronouns? (After, 

and as one word with, them. C. vi. 25.) 
r. When a preposition follows a verb, how may you help your judgment in 
determining whether the preposition gives a transitive sense to the verb, and 
is probably to be translated by the inseparable preposition of a compound 
verb 7 (By trjring whether the preposition clings to the verb in the passive 
voice. C. VII. 32.) 

8. Is ^for* before a noun and the injin, to be translated? (No.) What is the 

construction? (Accus. with infin. C. viii. 38.) 

9. What are *a»' and *6trf' often equivalent to? (Relatives. C. ix. 45, and 

43(a).) 

10. How is *««di often used in English ? (To express size,) How is it then 

to be translated ? (By tantus. C. x. 45.) 

11. When <^^' stands for a substantive that has been expressed in a former 

clause,' is it to be translated into Latin ? (No. C. xi. 47, note.) 

12. What tense is '/ am covne ' 7 (Perf. definite of the active voice.)— what, * 1 

was come * 7 (Pluperf. of act.) What verb forms the perf. active with am 7 
(Intrans. verbs of motion. C. xii. 57, note.) 

13. wien a verb seems to govern two accusatives, \yyyfhsX preposition is one of 

them often governed ? (By ' to.* C. xiii. 60.) 

14. When must * that-^not ' be translated by ut non instead of ne 7 and that no- 

body, that nothing, Ac, byut nemo, ut nihil, respectively? (When thai 
introduces a consequence, not a purpose : whenever, therefore, a * #0* or 
*«ttA' goes before it. C. xiv. 77.) 

15. How must the Eng./w/. be translated after verbs of fearing 7 (By the pres, 

subj, C. XV. 96.) 



» To judge of this, try whether you can turn the verb with should into the 
participial substantive. "It is strange that you sJundd say so." What ia 
strange? Your saying so. 



212 QUESTIONS ON THE CAUTIONS. 

16. When are ^who* and 'v^Udi' dependent interrogatives 7 (After woras oi 

aakingf knoinng, dotUfHng, ttHing^ Ac. C. xvi. 112.) 

17. Does *7nay ' ever stand for can? *migW for could? (Yes. C. xvii. 131.) 

18. When is the pcrf. injvn, to be translated by the pre*, injia,? (After mighty 

couldy oughty &c., when the action is not to be described as over before th« 
time referred to. C. ztiii. 131.) 

19. When are * qf yauy' * of u«/ &c., not to be translated after numerals, super- 

lativesj Acl (When all are spoken of. C. xix. 175.) 

20. Is an English «*6«fcm/irc ever used a4/«cfip<^y 7 (Yes.) Where does it then 

stand 1 (Before a substantive.) How must it be translated 1 (Greno- 
rally by an adj.: sometimes by ex, de with a sitbet. C. xx. 234.) 

21. For what does * what * sometimes stand 1 (For Iiowj or how-great.) When 

must ^what* be translated by '^uam* ? (When it stands for *A<n/? ')— when 
by * quantua 7 (When it stands for how-great, C. xxi. 242.) 

22. When are *far* and *a«' to be untranslated 7 (When the noun thatfoUowa 

can be placed in apposition to another noun in the sentence. C. xxii. 
255.) 

23. When must **(me,* '/wo,' Ac, be translated hy distributive numerals? (When 

they stand for * one a-piecey* Ac. C. xxiii. 267.) 

24. What is the substitute for a future suhjunctive in the passive verb 1 (futurum 

sit, esset, Ac, ut . . . with the proper tense of the verb.) What must we 
take care not to use for it 1 (The part, in dus, with fftTM, esseniy &c. C. 
XXIV. 287.) 

25. What is *ihat* often used for after an expression of time? (For on which; 

the ahl. of relat. C. xxv. 308.) 

26. Is that which is inform the present participle act, in ingt always a partiaple 7 

(No.) What else may it be 7 (The participial substantive.) When is it 
always the participial substantive ? (When it govemsj or is gooemed^ in- 
stead of merely agreeing.) To what parts of the Latin verb does the 
participial substantive correspond 7 (The Jnfin. and Gerund.) Can the 
participial substantive ever be translated into Latin by a participle? and 
ifsoj by what participle? — (Yes, by the participle in dus: but the jpart, 
in dus must not govern the substantive, but agree with it, both being put 
Into the case that corresponds to the preposition governing the participiai 
substantive, C. xxvi. 330.) 

27. Into what construction must *Aai?e* before an infinitive be turned for trans- 

lation into Latin 7 (Into the form * m, or are^ to he-^.^) 

(I have to do three more pages ^ Three more pages are to he done by me 

C. XXVII. 336.) 

28. What does ^ is to he done ' generally mean ? (Necessity, fitness, or intention 

Does * is to he done ' always mean necessity ^ fitness^ or intention ? b (No / 
C. xxvni. 336.) 

29. What does * is to 6e,' Ac, mean, when it does not signify necessHy^JUness^pY 

intention? {Ans. Possibility.) 



b This is what is to be done by all who wish to please the king. {Necessity.) 
TMs is to he done to-morrow. {Intention.) 
This is to be done, if you set about it in the right way. {PoesUfiUt^,) 



QTIESTIONS ON THE CAUTIONS. 213 

30. When must a present parttc, active be translated by a perftct participle^ oi 

its substitute quum with the perf. or plvpetf, ntbjundive? (When the 
action expressed by it must be over, before that expressed by the verb bC' 
gins. C. XXX. 353.) 

31. By what participle of a deponent verb is the pre», participle often translated 1 

(By the perf. partic. C. xxxi. 365.) 

32. How is * 6u^ ' ( = except, vnless) to be translated after a negative 7 (By nin 

or prater. C. xxxi. 451.) 
S3. When is *ai a town' not to be translated by the gen, or ablat.? (When 

the action was not done in but near the town or place: e. g. 'a 

battle at Mantinea.) How is *at* to be then translated? (By apud 

or ad,) 
34. What does one often stand for? {Some one, allquis; or a certain one, 

quidam.) 
86. When an English word is followed by a preposition, what should you always 

remember 1 (To consider whether the Latin word to be used is followed 

by a preposition or by a case : and then by what prepofiitlon, or whhl 

case.) 



QUESTIONS ON THE SYNTAX. 



In what respect does a verb agree with its nominative easel an adjective 
A' Ah its substantive 1 What verbs take a substantive or adjective after tbem in 
thenpminativel 

[Verbs of becomings being, Beeming, 
With passive verbs of makings eallingy deeming.] 
In what case does the thing by which stand 7 In wjiat case does the sgent, ox 
person by whom, stand? When should the pronoun that is the nom. to the 
verb be expressed 1 

9 1. When two or more nom. cases sing, come together, in which nu7n6<r should 
the verb be put 1 in what jmraon ? 

With et—et, quum--tum, in which number is the verb generally put 7 (a). 
Which of the Latin words for and is confined to the office of connecting 
•tmt^r notions 7 {d). 
52. What case does the infin. take before it 7 What Eng. conjunct, is some- 
times to be untranslated! When 'that* is to be untranslated, in what 
case do you put the nom. and in what mood the verb 7 
Mention some verbs, &c. that are followed by ace, with fnfin, 

(1) Yerha 9entie7idietdeclarandi: 

Of feeling, wishing, knowing, j with which ace. with lafin. stands as 
Believing, saying, trowing, J the object. 

(2) Nearly all impersonal forms* (with which ace. with infin. stands as 
the aubjec£)j except 

ConUngit, everit, anrfaccidl^ i ^^^^ ^„ f^,,^^^^ ^ ^ 

With restat, reliquum est and fit,b > 

Do any verbs of the class aentiendi admit of any other construction 7 
[Yes, those that express emotion are often followed by quod : those 
that express wishing, especially opto, by ut.] 
9 A When an adjective belongs to more than one substantive or pronoun, with 
which should it agree in gender 7 and in which number should it stand, 
even when the substantives, &c., are all sing. 7 When the substantives 
are things that have not life, in what gender is the adj. generally put 7 
What substantives are seldom to be translated 1^ 
% 5. What are respectively the demonstratives or antecedent pronouns to quif 
qualis, quantus, quot 7 



• That is, where in English we use * i^ ' as the representative of the true 
nominative. 

^ And sometimes sequitur. 

« But when *man^ is coupled with an epithet of praise, it should generally 
be translated (by vir) ; especially if it Is an apposition. 



qXTESTIONS dN THE SYNTAX. 215 

Is the relative ever governed in case by a word that is not in its own 

clausel 
In what respects does the relative agree with its antecedent ? [In gen' 
dcTy number y vnA. person,'] YVhen the antecedent is expressed in il»e 
relatioe, and omitted in the principal clause, where is the relative 
clause often placed? what pronoun often represents it in the princi- 
pal clause? 
What is the relative ' what » equivalent to 1 [* TTiai which.'] 
When the relat. agrees with some case of a subat, expressed in its own, 
but not in the principal clause, what must be done 1 [Some case oi 
that subst. must be supplied in the principal clause.] 
9 U. For what does an infin. sometimes stand ? When an adj. or rel. is to agree 
with an infin. mood or sentencSf in what gender must it be put 7 When 
the rel. has a sentence for its antecedent, what do we often find instead 
_of the rel. only 1 [Id quodf or qius res >id or res being in apposition to 
the sentence.] 
9 7. What is the great rule for the sequence of tenses? (40.) Is the perf. with 
have considered a past tense? [No.] Is the Jut. perf. a subj. tense ? 
[No.] How should * but,' or a retative with * not,' generally he translated 
after nobody , nothing, &c, ?d 
9 8. In such a sentence as ' TJiebes, which is a toim,^ <&c., should which agree 
with TTiebes or with town? When does which, in such a sentence, agree 
with its proper antecedent ? 
9 9. When the antecedent has a superloHve with it, in which clause does the 

superlative generally stand ? He was the first person who did it. 
9 10. How is *that' to be translated when it is followed by may or might ? what 
does it then express ? [A purpose.] How is ' that,* expressing a purpose, 
to be translated, when it is followed by not or any negative word ? 
{I U. How is *ihat* to be translated after so, such? what does it then express ? 
[A consequence.] How is * ihai ' to be translated when the sentence has a 
comparative in it? What is quo equivalent to, and what is its force with 
the comparative? [Quo is equivalent to uteo; with the comparative 
* that by {his?* * that tht.'] Does quo ever stand for < that ' when there ia 
no comparative In the sentence ? [Yes ;• it is then equivalent to < that by 
this means.'] How ia* not' to be translated before the imperaiive or subj. 
used imperatively? How is 'a«' before the infin, and after so, such^i to 
be translated. 



d Qfim cannot stand for cujas non, cut non ; but either these forms must bo 
used or the demonstrative expressed {cujus ilU vitia non videat ; or, quin ille 
efttf vitia videat). In the nom. or ace. qui non may be used, and should be 
when the nof»1)eloiigs especially to the verb. It is compounded of the old abl 
qnt, and ne, not. It does not therefore itself contain the pronoun ; but the num 
or ace. of the demonstrative is understood. 

• « In funeribus Atheniensium sublata erat celebritas virorum ac muliei am 

» lamentatio minueretur." (Cic.) 

f Q^in must be used, if it is, * as tu?/ to . . . &c.,' after a negative sentence.^ 



218 QT7ESTI0NS ON THB SYNTAX. 

S 12. What does the Latin t?^. never express 7? When the Engtish inf. ex* 
presses a purpose, how must it be translated 7h After what verbs Is the 
iuf. to be translated by vi i with the subjunctive 1 

§ 13. Give the forms for that nobody ; that nothing, that nog that never. When 
must that nobody ; that nothing, Ac, be translated by ut nemo; ut nihil, 
Ac. 7 

S 14. How must ' as not to . . . <&c.* after a negative be translated 1 After what 
verbs when used negatively, must quia be used? Is non dubito ever fol- 
lowed by ace. with infin. 7 [Nearly always, when dvbitare means to hesi- 
tate ; when it means to doubt, the ace. with infln* never follows it in Cicero, 
but does in Com. Nepos.J] 

§ 15. By what conjunction are verbs of /itnderm^ followed 7 [By quominuM, 
which is equivalent iouteo minta.] Are verbs of hindering followed by 
any other conjunctions 7 [Yes ; they may be followed by ni, when the 
thing is so entirely prevented as not to have been begun; by quin after a 
negative sentence : and sometimes by ace. with infin.k] How must that 
fOt be translated after verbs of fearing? how must tkat be translated after 
verbs of /(kinn^r? 

S 16. Which interrogative particle asks simply for information 71 [N5.] Which 
expects the answer * yea 7* [Nonne.] Which the answer * no 7 * [Num.] 

^ 17. When are questions dependent ? [When they follow and dej>end on such 
verbs as oak, dovbt, know, examine, try: ilia doubtful, uncertain,^ &c.] 
In what mood does the verb stand in a dependent question 7 In what 



t Except in poetry. 

h The various ways of expressing a purpose are given in the following table 
Eo ut ludos spectem, ") 



g^ ^ ludqrum spectandorum ) c^uga 
C ludos spectandi J 



> lam going to see the 
games. 



Eo ludos spectaturus, 
Eo ad ludos spectandos, 
Eo ludos spectatum («up.) 
i The general rule for the use of ut, is that It may be used : 

(1) To express every request; command (except after jxibeo); advice • 

efect; decree. 

(2) To introduce the conditions of an agreement or treaty. 

(3) It is used after all intensive words, such as suxh, ao {tantia, taUa, tot, Ua, 

adeo, sic). 

(4) All purpoaea may be expressed by ut. (Crombie.) 

Obs. Mmeo and perauadeo will not be followed by ut (but by ace. and inf.), 
when the person is not warned or persuaded to do something, but merely that 
tomething ia ao. 

J Thus his preface begins with "non dubito j^c plerosque," Ac. 

k "Nostrosnavibuscg-rediprohibebant." (Csbs.) 

1 But n? appears sometimes to be used as equivalent to non-ne. ' Estiw hoc illi 
tflcto atque facto Fimbriano simillimum 7 ' (Cic. pro Sext. Rose. Am. 33.) 

«» Obs. If you have any doubt whether who, which, what, is a rel. or an inter 
wg., ask a question with the clause, and see whethei the sentence before you 



QUESTIONS ON THE SYNTAX. 217 

[ must the verb be put in sentences that stand as the aec, \o a pre- 
ceding verb 7 

I 19, How must ^whether* be translated in double questions? how *or?' If 
^vhtthtr^ is untranslated, how may < or' be translated? Does an ever 
stand before a single question ? [Yes : it then implies, with something of 
impatience, that the answer must be ' no.'] By what must ' or ' not be 
translated in double questions 7 

§ 20. Go through 1 niay go^ &c. / mighi have gone^ &c. Icon doU; I could havt 
done U; I ought to doit; J ought tohave doneit, , Translate, I ought to do 
it, omitting ut. I mat bb deceived. How is the perf, injm, generally 
to be translated after might, could, ought 7 

9 21. How is the case of a substantive in apposition determined? When urbe 
or oppidum stands in apposition to the name of a town, does the verb 
agree with urba, oppidum, or with the name of the town? 

S 22. He wishes to be the first. He says that he is eeasy. 

§ 23. They may be happy. We may be neutral. 

S 24. When may a substantive and preposition generally be translated by the 
gen, ? [Ans. When the prepos. joins it to another substantive.] How 

MUCH PLEASURE ; MUCH GOOD ; SOME TIME. 

9 25. What do you mean by a partitive adj. ? What case follows partitive adjec- 
tives? With what does the partitive a(y. generally agree in gender? 
In what gender does a superlative (or solus) stand when it governs Vigenit, 
and also refers to another subst. ? In what case does a substantive of 
description stand when it has an adjective agreeing with it? By what case 
is opu^ est followed ? What other construction is there with opus est? 
There is no need. What need is there ? The top op the mountain. 
The middle op the way. The rest op the work. The whole of 
Greece. 

S 26. What, case do adjectives that signify desire, Ac, govern ? What case do 
participles used adj^ively and verbals in ax govern ? 

9 28. What j^ubstantives are omitted after to be? It is Cicero's part. It is 
YOUR PART. What case do verbs of accusing, &c., take of the charge? 
What case do satago, Ac, govern? What case do verbs of remembering 
BXidforgetting govern ? In what case may a neui, pron. stand with aocu- 
sare, admmiere, &c. ? 

S 29. With interest and refert in what case Is. the person to icAom it is of import 
ance put ? [In the genitive when the person is expressed by a substan 
iice : in thea5/./em. when a possessive pronoun is used.] How is the degrcA 
of importance expressed ? how is the thing that is of importance express- 
ed ? what case of the personfeeling do pudet^ Ac, take ? what case of what 
causes the feeling? 

9 30. What adjectives govern the dai, ? Mention some adjectives that are fol-' 
lowed by ad. What cases may follow propior^ proximus? When should 
oimUis take the gen. ? (w.) 

f 31. In what case do you put the person to, for, or. against whom the action i« 



readily and obviously answers it. * I don't know toho^ did It. ' Who did it ? 
* I don' t know who did it.' Therefore who is here an interrogative. 

10 



216 QOTSSTIONS ON THB SYNTAX. 

done, or the feeling entertained 1 Mention the claBses of ^erbs that take 
the dot. [Verba comparandi ; dandi et reddendi ; promittendi ac solvendi i 
imperandi'et ntintiandi; fidendi; minandi et irascendi; obsequendi et 
repngnandi, regunt dattvum : quibus addaa, 

Inotdeo, ntc&o,yareoque, truhdgeOyparco, 
Graitdor, auxUiory aiudeOy medeorque, voooque.] 
Do any of these take the ace, also 1 By what prepositions may Terba ol 
€Omparmg be followed 1 [By cum or ad.\ How is together to be trana- 
lated after compare ? 

[' Tf^effitr* may translated be, 
After comparey by • inter ae*] 
What verbs of advantc^e and diaadvantage govern the ace. ? He threat* 

Bin m WITH DEATH. 

[He threatena me with death should be, 
In Latin, threatena death to me."] 
Of verbs of commanding^ which govern the ace. only? which the dot. or 
ace. 7 
9 32. What case do aum and its compounds govern 7 What exception is there 1 
Mention the compound verbs that generally govern the dot. 
[Moat of these compounded with 
Prro, con, sub, 
Ad, in, inter, ob : 
Many of those compounded with 
Ab, post, ante, de, 
Re, pro, super, e.] 
I 33. He svBaoTTNDs the citt with a wall. He pbesents me w:th a 

OABLAND." 

9 34. What verbs govern two datives? What case often follows ram where vfi 
should put the bom. 7 How is haiee often translated? Mt name la 

CaIUS (239). I HAVE A cow. I HAVE SIX COWS. 

9 35. Do neuter verbs ever take the a4x. 7 Explain, aiHre honores. 

9 36. What verbs take two accusatives ? Do oU the verbs that have any of these 
meanings take two accusatives 7 What transitive verbs take two accusa- 
tives, one in a sort oiappoaUimi to the other? 

I 37. What does the abU express? In what case is i\iB price put? What ad- 
jectives stand in the abl. to express the price, pretio being understood ? 
What adjectives alwaya express price in the gen, 7 What substantives 
stand in the gen. after verbs of valuing 7 What should be used instead ol 
muUi and majona7 

9 38. What case do verbs of abounding^ &c. govern ? What case may egeo and 
indigeo govern ? What case do verbs of freeing from, Ac, take ? What 
is their more general construction in prose ? What case dofrmgor, &c 
govern ?» In what case is the mannery eouae, Ac., put ? 

§ 39. How is a voe. sometimes used in poetry? What case sometimes stands 
in appoaition to the voc, 7 



n Mihi coronam, or me corona donat. 

In the phrase 'poivri rerum* (to become a ruling power) the gen, only is 

round. 



— ■^■i 



QTIESTIONS ON THE SYNTAX. 219 

§ 40. in what ease is the agent expressed after the pass, verb, when a, ab^ is not 
used 1 After what part of the verb is this the regular construction 1 
What verbs cannot be used personally in the pass, voice 1 Go through 
lam bdievedJP Mention some verbs that have a pass, construction (286). 
What is the substitute for a ftU. inf. pass.^ when the verb has no supine 
to form it with iri? I hofb he will bscoveb (use fore ut). 

I 41. What verbs can govern an ace. in the pa«8. ? Can ^pass. verb or partici- 
ple take an ooc. of the part affected? Wb have walked enough (trans, 
by the pass.). Which is the more common in Lat. * Caiua videtur, 
dicitur, Ac, e**e/ or ^ videtur j duntur, &c. Caium, esseV 

t 42. How is a noun of time put in answer to when ? in answer to for how Umg? 
How do you express the time in or wi^in which ? How do you express 
time in answer to how Umg before or after? How are antCj post^ used in 
this construction 7 How do you express a point or space of future time 
for which any arrangement is now made 7 How do you express the exact 
time by or against wliich a thing is to be done? Thbee tears ago. 
These yeaes old. Above twenty yeabs old* (307, /) Thbbb 
years after he had betubned (310 (a) ). 

S 43. In what case is the town ai whu^ a tiling is done, to be put ? In what 
case is the name of a town to be put in answer to whither? in answer to 
whence? To wliat proper names do these rules apply 1 In what case do 
urbs and oppidum stand in apposition to the name of a town in the gen. 
(315) 1 How is heal space expressed 7 

8 44. Decline 'grieving*^ throughout. Op wbiting a letter. I am to be 
LOVEjD. Go through, I must writs. Go through epistola scribenda. 
When must the part, in dus not be used in agreement with its substan- 
tive (332) 7 We must spare our enemies. At home. From home. 



P Mihi creditur, J am believed. 
Tibi creditur, thou art believed. 
lUi creditur, he is believed. 

Nobis creditur, we are believed. 
Vobis creditur, you are believed, 
Illis creditur, they are believed, 
• These constructions admit of many variations by the introduction of natut 
and quam — "Above thirty-three years old.** 

major annos tres et triglnta natus ; 
major quam annos tres et triginta natus ; 
major quam annorum trium et triginta ; 
major quam tribus et triginta annis. (Z.) 



q N. 


Dolere, 


grieving. 


G. 


dolendi, 


of grieving. 


D. 


dolendo, 


to grieving. 


Ace. 


dolere, 


grieving. 


AbL 


dolendo. 


by grieving. 



The ace. is ddendum only when governed by a preposition. * Se poccati iasi- 
siulant quod dolere intermiserint ' (have intermitted grieving). 



220 <iUESTIONS ON THE SYNTAX. 

Home (after a verb of motion). Into the country. PeOm tiib coun- 
try. In the country. On the ground. 

fi 45. What kind of sentences may be translated by participles (344) 1 In what 
case do a noun (or pronoun) and participle stand when the noun or pro* 
noun is not governed by any other word 1 What is this called 1 

§ 46. He gave them the country to dwell in. What does the part, in rus 
often express 1 What does the part, in due often express 1 Express * to 
have a thing mac2e,' in the sense of causing it to be made* [Faciendum 
curare.] 

6 47. What participle is wanting in all but deponents and neuter-passives 1 
Having left his brother. [Relicto fratre, tv quum reliquisset fra 
trem.] 

§ 48. My own fault. Their own fault (373, a). When — tdfy^-selvca are to 
be translated by ipse and a personal pronoun, in what case may ipst 
stand 1 [In the nom. or in the case of met, according to the meaning.*] 
When may /itm, kU^ her^ its^ theirs in a dependent sentence, be translated 
by 8ui or auusy even when they denote the nom. not of their ovm^ but of 
the principal sentence 1 By what pronoun must /iitm, her, &c., be 
translated, when sui or suus would be understood to mean the nom. of 
its own verb 7 Does suvs ever relate to the accusative 7 With what pron. 
is this very common 1 Which gen. pi. {Hm or t) is used after partitiveh 
(372) 1 

9 49. What is the difference between *t* qui pugnat,* and * Ate or iZZc qui pugnat* 
(376, g) 7 Which of these three pronouns is to be used when he, him, Ac, 
is without emphasis, simply describing a person or thing before mentioned 
or about to be described by a rel. clause 7 By what case only of * ts * can 
his, her, Hieir^ be translated 7 [Atw. By the gen."] Of two things already 
mentioned, what pron. means the latter? what (lie former 7 Which pron. 
means/Aof of your*? Medea illa. Distinguish between Ate, is^c, i//*, 
referring to different objects. 

§ 60. When is *any* to be translated hy quisquam or uUus 7 when by quis 7 
when by quivis, quilibet 7 when by aliquis qui8piam7 Does quisquam 
ever follow si ^ (note w) 7 By what pronoun may * a * sometimes b^ 
translated 7 

S 51. Whatprejix do interrogatives often take 7 what g^? How should 'c/- 
ways ' with two superlatives be translated 7 

I 52. When are the pronouns that, those, not to be translated 7 When th( y 
stand in the second member of a comparative sentence for a sub- 
stantive expressed in the first.] When qtuim is omitted, in what case is 
the following subst. put 7 What case goes with comparatives and super- 
latives to express the measure of excess or defect 7 How are the Eng. tht 
— the ( = 6y how much — by so much) to be translated 7 

I 53. Isihe present ever followed by the imperf subj.7 When 7 When is the 



* * He wounded himself,' se ipse vulneravit ( = ipse, non alius, sc vulneravit) : 
se ipsum vulneravit ( = se, non aiiwrn, vulneravit). Hence ipse is to be in ;h« 
nom. or in the oblique case, according as the notion to which it is opposed, oi 
with which it is contrasted, is in the nom. or in an oblique case. 



QUESTIONS ON THE SYNTAX. 221 

Eug. prea. generally translated by the L&L future ? By what tense is tha 
per/, definite often translated 7 [Ans. by the fuiure perfect.'] How are 
assertions aojtened in Latin 7 What subjunctives are very frequently used 
in this way 7 What conjunction is often omitted after vdim^ Ac. I havb 

LONG DESIRED (410, a). 

§ 54. Is the perf. subj. ever used as an imperat. ? What other tense is some- 
times used as an imperat. ? By what tense are questions of appeal, oi 
questions for assent, to be translated 7 If he has ant thinOi he gives 
IT. [Si quid habet, dat.'] Ip I have any thing, I will give it. [Si 
quid habeam, dabo.] If he should have ant thing he would give it. 
[Si quid haberet, daret : btit much, more commonly, si quid habeat, det.] 
If he had ant thing he would give it. [Si quid haberet, daret] If 
RE had had ant thing, HE WOULD HAVE GIVEN IT. [SI quid habuisset, 
dedisset) How is ^possibilUy without any expression of uncertainty* 
translated 7 How is 'uncertainty with the prospect o£ decision* trans- 
lated 7 How is * uncertainty without any such accessory notion * trans- 
lated 7 How is ' impossibility or belief that the thing is not so,* translated 1 
May the consequence and the condition refer, the one to pcut, the othei 
to prM«n/ time 7 When the consequence has *irou^ have,* how must 
you translate the pluperf. indie, in the conditional clause 7 With what 
tenses may si take the indic.7 With what tenses does si always govern 
the subjunctive 7 

ft 66. In conditional sentences are the verbs of both clauses ever in the subj. 
pres. ? [Yes ; *Si quid habeat, det,* should be always preferred to ^Si quid 
haberet daret,' unless it is to be intimated that the supposition leill not be 
realized.] What are the conditional forms of the sui>j. ? When should 
acripturus essem be used for * ^lould have written* ? What tenses of the 
indie, are used for the subj. in conditional sentences 7 la si ever omitted 7 
where should the verb of the sentence then stand 7 What are the con- 
junctions for although? [Etsi, tametsi, quamquam ■ with incfic. ; licet 
with subj. What is quamvis, and what mood does it govern in Cicero 7 
[However much, however j with subj.] What is etiamsi, and what mood 
does it govern 7 [Even if; even though; with indie, or subj.] Do any 
other conjunctt. express ihouglf,? [Yes; sometimes, quum, ut, with 
subj,] 

§ 67. In a dependent conditional sentence, the verb of the consequent clause 
will be in the Infin. : what infinitives will take the place (respectively of 
dot. ? oi dabit ? daret 7 dedisset 7 daturas esaet 7 

% 58. Explain the meaning of oblique narration 7 In oblique narration, in what 
mood will the principal verbs stand 7 [In the infin.] In what mood will 
the* verbs of the subordinate douses stand, provided they express the 
words and opinions, not of the narrator, but of the speaker 7 [In the 



' Either the condition or the consequence, or both, may refer to a past, or future 
time. 

• When these conjunctions take the subj. the sentence is generally in tl^e 
dbliqua oraiio, taken in its widest sense. (See § 56 ) This, however, does not 
hold good of the later writers. (Billroth.) 



/ 



^^l QUESTIONS ON THE SYNTAX. 



nibj.] In obliqae narration what is often omitted 7 [The verb or parUo 
on which the infinitives depend.] In what mood are que^ionafor anmoa 
y asked? [The subj.] In what mood are ^ues^ioTu ^ oppeoZ asked? [Iq 

^ the infin.] When questions are thus asked in the infin., may inUrroga- 

Uvea be used with the infin/l [Yes.] In what mood is the duirgt ex 
pressed with quod ? 

I 69. When may the pree, and perf. subjunct. be used in oblique narration, 
even when dependent on a poMt tense? In what mood will remarks 
stand that are the reporUr'a not the tpeaker'a 7 In what mood do the 
verbs of subordinate clauses stand, when the principal verb of the propo- 
sition is in infn. or avibj. 7 With what limitation is this rule to be ap- 
plied? When may the pret. and perf, aubj. be used, although the gen- 
eral rule would require the imp, or pluperf. May the imp, or pluperf, be 
ever used, when the general role would require the prea, or perf. 7 How 
are the ace, and infn, used with nif in direct narration (473) ? 

% 60. Mention some words^ phrases, &c., with which qui takes the subj. 
[Ana, After aufn^ in * sunt qui,' * erant qui,' &c., and after negative and 
inteTTOgaHoe sentences, nemOy nihilf Ac, eat: quia eat 7 an quiaquam eat? 
quotuaquiaque eat 7 &c. Also after adaunt qui^ non deaunt quiy Ac, and 
similar phrases with reperio, invenio (to find).] 

9 61. What mood does qui govern, when It introduces the ground of an asser- 
tion ? What mood does qui take after quippe^ utpote7 alwaya or gene^ 
rally 1 What mood does qui take when it is equivalent to ut with a 
peraonal or poaaeaavoe pronoun? Mention some phrases with which 
qui has this force. In what other cases does qui govern the subj. (484, 
485)? 

4 62. When does quum take the indie, 7 What mood does quum generally 

govern, when the verb of the sentence is in the imperf. or pluperf. ? 
[The subj.t] How is the subject of congratulation expressed (492)? 
Mention some conjunctions that always govern the subjunctive. (Vocab. 
68.) When are the prea, nnd perf. aubj. used with utinam? when the 
imperf, and pluperf, 7 How is * not ' generally expressed after vJtinam^ 
dummodOf &c, 

i 63. When the principal verb is in the present tense, in what mood is the verb 
after antequam or priuaquam expressed ? ^ When the principal verb is in 
thefut., in what mood or moods may the dependent verb be? When 
the principal verb is in a paat tense, in what mood or moods may the de- 
pendent verb be ? When should the aubj, always be used after antequam^ 
priuaquam 7 

R 64, When do dvm, donee^ quoad ( = untU) take the indieaHve 7 when the aub* 
hmetive 7 What mood do they and quamdiu always take, in the sense ol 
^ aa long aa? With the adverbs meaning aa aoon aa, how should the Eng- 
lish pluperf, generally be translated (514) ? 

§ 65. When is that expressed by quod 7 What class of verba are followed by 
quod 7 What mood does qtuxl take ? with what exception ? 

5 66 What was the frat of the month called by the Romans ? on what day did 



But the indie, of repealed actions. 



QUESTIONS OW THE SYNTAX. 223 

the Nonu £edl 1 on what day the Ides 7 In what months were the NotuM 
on the seoenOi? How were the days between the £a^^ and lffnu§ 
reckoned 7 days between the Nonea and the Idea? days after the Idea? 
Give the rules for each case. 

S 67. What may be used instead of a conjunction and personal or demonstroHM 
pronoun? Mention some circumlocutions for the imperatice. 

I 68. Was a sesterHum a coin 7 How many aeaterees made a sestertium 1 What 
is the meaning of sestertium with numeral adverbs? Is sesterHum cfe- 
cHnable in this construction 1 How may the value of sestertium dedeSf 
eentieSf Ac, be got approximately (547, note *) 1 

§ 09, Give the division of the as. Explain asses usurw. By what other name 
WHS this rate of interest expressed 1 



PRACTICAL INTRODtJCTION 



TO 



LATIN PROSE COMPOSITION. 



PAUT IL 



PllACTICAL INTRODUCTION 

TO 

LATIN PEOSE COMPOSITION 

PART n. 

CONTAININO A PULL VIEW Ot 

THE ORDER OF WORDS IN LATIN, 

AND 

LONGER LATIN EXERCISES. 



THOMAS KERCHEVER ARNOLD, M. A. 

BBOTOB OF LYNDON, 
AND lATB FILLOW OF TBINITT COLLEGE, CAMBBXDOB. 

CAKEFULLT BEYISED AND RE-AERANGSD 

BY REV. J. A. SPENCER, A.M. 



NEW YORK: 
D. APPLETON & CO., 443 & 445 BROADWAY. 
1867. 



Entebxd, according to Act of Congress, in the year 1946, by 
D. APPLETON & CO., 
In the Clerk's Office of the District Court of the United States for the Southern 
District of New York. 



ADVERTISEMENT. 



The object of the following Work is to supply boys with an easy 

collection of short passages, as an Exercise-book hi those who 

have gone once, at least, through the First Part of the Author's 

' Practical Introduction to Latin Prose Composition. 

T. K. A. 
Ltndoit, 
April 6, 1844. 

[Consult the Preface to Part L^ at the beginning of the vol- 
ume.] 

J. A. S. 



TABLE OF CONTENTS. 

PART II. 



1. On THE Obder OF Words iH Latin 233 

f I. Position of Attributives 236 

2. Dependent Genitive •••• 239 

3. Participial Clauses • 240 

4. Proper Names 241 

5. Antithetical Words 242 

6. Secondary Emphasis ; position of words occurring in two j 

clauses i'" ^^^ 

7. On the position of Sum 245 

8. Pronouns 246 

9. Pronouns (continued) 247 

10. The Relative - 249 

11. The Relative (continued) 250 

12. Interrogatlves 259 

18. Prepositions 262 

14. Conjunctions 254 

15. Conjunctions ; autem, enim, igitur with esse 266 

16. Non. Haud 267 

17. Comparatives, &q 258 

H. LoNOBB Latin Exercises 263 

Cautions. 1 303 

Differences of Idiom 308 

Memorial Lines 313 

Versus Memoriales 313 

Vocabulary 315 

fktracts from the •* Antibarbarus" 329 

Index I.— English 332 

Index U —Latin and Critical Remarks , 3S0 



EXPLANATION OF MAMS, ETC. 



Woids in Italics are to be looked for in the Vocabulary.* 

-^— — to which the mark Q is prefixed, are to be looke«2 for in the 
Antibarbams. 

Df. and C. stand respectively for the Diffisrences and Cautions at the end of 
the book. 

Df. (1) and C. (1) stand respectively for the Diffi»rences and Cautions of 
Parti. 

*, ^t after a word, mean that that word is to be the first or second word re- 
spectively in the clause. 

S 7, mean that the word is to be the last, or last but one (respectively) in the 
clause. 

r.f. mean that the relative clause is to be placed first. 

a. V. that the sentence is to be translated by the active voice. 

i means that the word is to be inserted in the relative clause. 

^ mesms that the word is to stand near the (head ^ beginning of the sen- 
tence.' 

m means that the word is to be placed in as emphatical a position as possible, 
near the middle of a sentence. 

p means that the sentence is to be turned into a participial clause. 

ah — ab indicates that the order is to be retained. 

ab X h a indicates that the order is to be reversed. 

" " mean that the words over whiclTthey are placed, are to be separated. 

An accent over a word means that it is emphatic 

Words in spaced printing (printing) are those to which the dlroction in- 
timated by a mark or reference applies. 

<* prefixed to a word, or to several words, in spaced printing, means that it or 
they are to be omitted. 



* The pupil will there find, not the word only, but the phraso of which it forms a 
part For other words a dictionary must be used. 



PRACTICAL INTRODUCTION 



LATIN PROSE COMPOSITION. 



ON THE ORDER OF WORDS IN LATIN, 

1. In the usual arrangement of a Latin sentence, the subject, 
as the most important word, stands first ; and words which modify 
the meaning of another, precede the word whose meaning they 
modify. 

1. JRatio praeest ; appetUua obtemperat. — 2. Consuetude) est altera natura.-^ 
3. Habent opinionem, ApoUinem morbos depellere. 

2. Hence (a) oblique cases mostly precede the verb (or other 
word) on which they depend ; (h) adjectives and dependent geni- 
tives precede the substantives tu which they belong ; and (c) ad^ 
verbs precede their verbs or adjectives. 

(a) Corporis granritaiem et dolorem anlmo judicamus. 

(b) 1. MamerHna civitas.— 2. Syracusiua Phili8tus.~3. Rdiqua vitas \n- 

stituta 
(e) 1. Sui negotii bene gerens.— 2. Sapientia prope singularis. 

3. With respect to the usual order of oblique cases ; — 

The nearer object precedes the more remote : e. g., the accus. 
after the transitive verb precedes an abl. of manner or instru- 
ment, dec. 

Helvetii Ugatoa ad CteMrem mithint. C€B9, [Su aluo exx. under 2 (a).] 
Descriptions of a place precede the mention of things existing, 
or actions done in it. 

Caesar a Xiocu Lemano admoniemJuTam millia passniim decern munmji» 
oam^ue peiducit. Cca. 



284 ON THB ORDER OF WORDS. [§ 1. 4r-U. 

The cause precedes the effect. 

Veniebant ad Eumenem, qui propter odium fructum oculis ex ejua casn 
capere vellent. C. Nep, 

Exercise 1. 

4. [Does mens or anrniua denote the mind with all its passions, emotionfi^ 
Ac. 7 (92, note c.)] 

We do not feel a disease of the mind by o any bodily sensa* 
tion.* Caius is going to send a copy^ of the letter to his father. 
There is no doubt that the plea of necessity is a valid excuse for 
Dionysius. It cannot be denied, that he employed an advocate at 
Carthage. It cannot be doubted that they lived in affluence at 
Rome. We have been impatient for your arrival. There were 
some who' looked forward with impatience to your arrival. The 
Gauls attack the Romans, before they have disencumbered them, 
selves of their haggage. The Athenians are going to recall Bal- 
bus from hanishment. It would have been better* never to have 
returned from hanishment. It is one" thing to sin, another to 
throw the hJame upon another. There is no doubt that Philistus 
the Syracusan (b) lived many years at Rome. It cannot be de- 
nied, that you are connected with Scipio by the ties of hlood. 

» «By the body.* » See Example. " Df. 1109. < BaiiuBfuU^ 426, (5). 
» 38. 

5. 0:5" Unusualness of position calls attention to a word so 
placed, and thus renders it emphatic. 

6. Hence in a language which, like the Latin, admits of considerable vari- 
ety in the collocation of words, what toe effect by printing a word in 
Italics, is accomplished by placing it in an unusual position. 

7. This unusualness of poidtion is the great principle on which the emnhasis 
or prominence of a word depends. 

8. The beginning and the end of a clause are positions favorable to empha- 
sis because " by the former our attention Is excited, and on the latter it 
rests." But of course the beginning of the clause Is not an emphi»tic 
position for the subject, nor the end for the predicate ; but vice versiL 

9. (a) The subject receives emphasis by being placed at or 

near the end of the clause : (h) the predicate by being placed at 

or near the beginning of the clause. 

(a) 1. Sensit in se iri Brutu8.—2, Semper oratorum eloquentise moderatris 

fiiit auditonan prudeniia, C. 

(b) DiBoe§ tu quidem quamdiu voles : tamdiu autem velle debebis, quoad te^ 

*uitum proficias, non p^nitebit. C. 



§ 1. 10-15.] ON THE OEDSff OF WORDS. 285 

10. An emphatic subject often stands just before a verb which 
closes the sentence. 

Eorum, qui exacts sta^ e moriuntur, fortvma laudatur. C. 

11. A verb stands at the head of its clause without emphasis, 
when it is used with autem to explain a previous assertion. 

In English we should insert such an explanation parenthetically. 
1. Amicum segrotantem visere volebam : hahitai atUem ille in parte orbis 
pemotissima.— 2. [Cato] objecit ut probrum M. Nobiliori, quod is in pro- 
vinciam poetas duxisset : duxerat atUem consul ille in JEtoliam, ut scl* 
mus, Ennium. C. 

12. The verb or adjective precedes its oblique cases when its 
comparative importance to the whole meaning of the sentence is 
greater than theirs. 

1. Quseritur an is, qui pnfuU nobis^ si postea nocuit, nos debito solvent. C. 
2. Quae perspicuam omnibus veritatem continet propositio, nihil indiget 
approbationis, C. — 3. Iris nunquam non adveraa aoU est Sen.— 4, Sim- 
ilea parentibua ac majoribtta suis lilii plerumque creduntur. C 

13. Oblique cases and adverbs receive emphasis by being 

placed at or near the beginning or end of the clause. 

1. Semper oratorum eloquentise moderatrix fuit auditorum pmdentia. C— 
2. Arbores serit dillgens agricola, quarum adspiciet baccam ipse mm,' 
quam. C. — 3. Erudito homiTd esse ego iratus, ne si cupiam quidem, non 
possum. C.-~4. Ne vitcUionem quidem dolorU ipsam per se quisquam 
in rebus expetendis putavit C. 

14. Of words standing close together, the reversing their usual order gives 
promidence (I think) to the first rather than to the second. Thus when 
a b becomes & a, it is 6 rather than a that receives prominence. 

Mirabile videtur, quod non rideat haruspex, quum haruspicem yiderit. C 

Exercise 2. 

15. It cannot be denied, that Hortensius* is gomg to follow tJie 
example of Cato. Let Hortensius defend himself from this charge 
by the plea of °bad health. Brutus felt "that he was invited to a 
share. He exclaims : " What* advantage will the Carthaginians 
derive from so great a wrong ? " Let good examples^ for imita- 
tion be proposed* to boys.* There is no doubt that the plea of 
necessity is a valid excuse for you. I' will follow* the advice of 
Cato. The examples of those who die* for their country are 
t|[uoted-with-approbation.* We are looking impatiently «for the 
arrival of Cicero. I fear that he will not^ undergo the danger 



236 POSITION OF ATTRIBUTIVES. [§ 1. 16-19 

willingly.* I coHild not follow' such an example, even if I wished 
it (13, 3). He is always* bringing me into danger. I fear that* 
Hortensius* will not ward off the danger from me. I fear that 
Hortensius will die by his own hands. How few there are who* 
have altogether' satisfied the expectations^ of men !^ 

1 How are questions of appeal BBked in oblique narration? [460, (c)(2).] 
• Pro patrid mortem or Tnorte oceumbere, ' Ldudare, *Df. IKi- 

B Df. 1109, (14). « Ex omni parU, 



§1. Position of Attributives. 

16. (a) An attributive receives, perhaps, a slight emphasis from 
being placed after its substantive ; but (Jb) it receives more by 
separation from it, especially if it be placed near the beginning 
or end of the sentence.* 

(a) 1. Sedebat in rostris coUega tuus, amictus toga purpured^ in sella aurcd^ 

coronatus. C— 2. Jacet, inter saltus satis clausus in medio campus 
herbidua aqtumiaque. L, 

(b) 1. In miseriam nascimur sempitemam, C— 2. JEdui equites ad Cssarem 

omnes revertuntur. Ctes, 

17. If the attention is to rest on a substantive having an attri. 
butive with it, it is placed after the attributive, and separated 
from it, so as to be thrown as near the end of the sentence as 
possible. 

1. Cimon barbarmiim uno concursu vim maxiiruim prostravit. C. Nep,— 
2. In iis pemiciosus est error, qui existimant lUndxnum peccatorumque omr 
nivm patera in ftmicitii liceniiam. C— 3. Miles quidam parum abfiiit, 
quin Varum interficeret ; quod ille pericukm^ sublato ad ejus conatum 
scuto, vitavit. Caa, 

18. If an attributive belongs to two substantives, it either pre- 
cedes both, or follows both, or follows the first. 



1 6^«ar makes the position q/Zei* its substantive the imuo/ position of an attri* 
butive ; that before its substantive the more emphatic one. This opinion seei 
tu me utterly untenable ; e. g. in the example, " sedebat in rostps coUega tuu 
amictus Xogt purpuredy in selli auredy coronatus," (Cic. Phil. ii. 34.) who can 
doubt that the adjectives purple and golden are here more important notions than 
the substantives toga and chair?— In this sentence, however, purpured and aif 
red gain a little emphasis from their being followed by a slight pause. 



§ I. 19-22.] POSITION OP ATTRIBUTIVES. 287 

(F^rom her diviiu birth and origin.) 

(1) A diviw ortu et progenie. '\ 

(2) Ab ortu et progenie divind. > Notj ab ortu et dicind progenie.8 

(3) Ab ortu divino et progenie. J 

19. Zumpt confines the position after the first to the 'familiar style ;' but it 
occurs even in the Orations of Cicero, and is, I think, the best position, 
when the second substantive is an emphatic addition : e. g. Cic Phil. ii. 
33. ** Sed arrogantiam ho mini 9 inaoUnUamqiu eognoaciU." 

20. Of two adjectives oY other worda joined by ^and' (or some 
other co-ordinate conjunction) that which is to arrest the attention 
most is often placed towards the end of the sentence, and sepa- 
rated from the other by one or more of the words that belong 
equally to both. 

Ohs. The pronouns, and other small unaccented words, are 

very frequently used for the separation of connected words. 

1. Insula est Melit'a, satis laio ab SiciUa mari pericuhsoque disjuncta. C— 
2. Omnibus officiis dUigmUr a me aasvcUqua servatis, Ac. — 3. Et dolori 
fortiter ac fortunes resistere. — 4. Dominoa esse omnium rerum et mode- 
ratorea deos. 

21. Ohs, This separation of co-ordinate notions is conveniently 
employed in dividing a long sentence into portions, and thus giving 
symmetry and strength to the styk by preventing the accumula- 
tion of unaccented words. For instance, Wolf writes : ' nunc 
tandem jucundum fructum mihi capere licet variarum curarum : ' 
jucundum and fructum are here emphatic, mihi capere licet wholly 
unemphatic. By arranging the sentence thus, }nunc tandem licet 

I jucundum mihi \ variarum curarum \ fructum capere,^ we have 
a nearly regular alternation of the rising and falling of the voice ; 
or what Cicero calls intervalla cequalia. (Reisig.) 

Exercise 3. 

[An accented pronoun is emphatic, and to be ezpresseJ.] 

22. Is it the part of a Christian to yield basely to pain" and 
fortune* (20,3)? Thick" cZomc?*" are covering the whole sky. {Turn 
intc pass, voice,) It is a great thing to be able to endure cold* and 



a This sentence {sic) is in Cic. Tusc. i. 12 (26), and Wolf improperly refers 
dimnd to both substantives; a supposition which Ore//i •appears to counto- 
nance by not condemning it. 



288 Fosinoiv of ATntiBunYES. [§ 1. 29-^25. 

hunger.* They believe that they shall derive great* advantage' 
from this injury. He' gave me admce boldly* and rashly." Fired 
with anger* and ambition^' he' heaped every kind of almse upon 
me. It cannot be doubted, that he is easily accessibJe to flattery. > 
Which* advice* they' received with ascJamatians, He' did many* 
and rash* <> actions by the advice of Caius. There is no doubt 
that he is living by alms, Caius Las made this question very 
dark. He has followed a bold' and rash' advice. Deliver me 
from the yoke* of slavery.* You see (pi.) the anger and ambi- 
tion of the man (19) ! 

> *tfaat flatterenF have easv* access* to hla ears.' 



23. When a substantive, with a notion joined to it attributively^ 
is more nearly defined by some other words, those words are usu 
ally placed between the substantive and its attributive. 

Tua trga Uueeeium benignitas. C. Tanta fait in caatriB eapiendiB ederitas, 
Ac. Co*. Halesini pro multis et magnis suia majorumque suoriim in 
rempubHaun mentis atque beneficils, Ac, C. Pro hac, quam conspicitis, 
ad eonserrandam rempubUcam diligentla, &e. C [06v. the vuertUm of 
the rdaixoe dcaut^ 
(a) A deviation from this rule occurs, C. Nep. MUtiad. 3, 3, 'hortatus es! 

pontis cnstodes neafortund daiam occasiontm liberandi GrsecisB dimit 

terent.* Hereybr/una is emphatic. 
(/?) A notion joined attributively to a substantive may be expressed eithef 

by SB adjective, or a participle, or a genitive case. 

24. (a) A participle generally follows its substantive, as con- 
taining a predicate assumed attributively ; but {h) where the 
predicate would precede the subject, if the clause were resolved, 
there the participle should precede the substantive. 

(a) Ratibus/imcftff tngectus. Z#. Gonsules— regibus exadiM creati sunt. 

(b) Ingratus est, qui, rematis testibus, agit gratiam. Son, Caesar pulsus, non 
inatanJte PompejOj negavit eum vincere scire. Siut, 

25. In other words, the participle should precede, when atten- 
tion is to be called to it rather than to the substantive ; and also 
when the participle and substantive together form one complex 
Qotion. 

Temeritas est videlicet/Zorenitc Ttatia, C Itaque boM adhibita ratio cermt 
quid optimum sit. C. 



}2. 26-20.] DEPENDENT GENIl^IVE. 28ft 

Exercise 4. 

26. It was decreed, that for his so-great merit towards* the 
state,! he should be called* king by the senate. Caius behaved 
with such courtesy' towards all,' that no mar was so humble 
as not* to have access to him. I will strive to satisfy^ men's great 
expecfations o f m e . i I fear that I shall not* satisfy yourgreat* 
expectations of me.i If {Ego, si, &c.) such an opportunity of 
successi^ were offered me, I' would eagerly seize it [I. 445, a, 
(1). ] The Gauls, having lost their haggage, all' Jled, The 
troops of Lentulus p restore the fortune of the day," and rout the 
enemy. Are you' the man* to lose such*" an opportunity of suc- 
cess^ by your-own laziness ?» I fear that I shall not** be able 
to recompense** you for your so-great benefits towards" me J 
There were some, who looked forward to your arrival with impa- 
tience. 

* in with ace. * appeUare. 8 gay; ^wae ofsuckcourteajf (abl.). See 

P. kuTnoTtUas. Choose the word that is nearly =: affabUity, < Use qui 

nan. See Pt. I. p. 215, note d, « I. 75. « Df. 153. "^ rei gerendm, 

* See BATTLE. 9D£ 1109, (9). " tampnadanu. " SeeD.^Tui- 

via, w Df. 153 ^ graiiam* rtferre.* " m. 



§ 2. Dependent Genitive. 

27. When a gen. depends on two substantives it generally pro- 
cedes both. 

HujuM autem orationia difficilius est ezltum quam principium invenire. C. 

28. When a gen. depends on a substantive that has anotlier 
genitive dependent upon it, with which it forms one complex 
notion, it is generally placed before it. 

The gen. that forms, as it were, one notion with the substantive, gta- 
erally follows i it : it is very often an abjective genitive. 
1. Fartimmi viri magnitudinem animi desideras. C— 2. Themialo>'lia 
vltia ineurUit (stalia magnis sunt emendata virtutibus. C. Nep.-^'d. 
Cupio ab hac fuminum satietate nostri discedere. C— 4. Huju$ voa 
animi monumenta retinebitis corporis in Italia nullum vestigium esse 
patiemini? C. 

* Not always : e. g. hufusxex animi magnUudinem admirans. C. Nep, U. Id 



S'lO PARTICIPIAL CLAUSES. [§ 3. 30-32 

Exercise 5. 

29. It is more difficult to avoid the snares of these men/ 
than to endure* ° their arms. Nearly all men's^ youthful* 
opinums are gradually weakened.' Who would not praise ©this 
great philosopher's contempt^ for' external things ? I am not the 
man* to laugh at the Christian's contempt* for* the things of this 
life.^ I have very often admired hoth* the courtesy and the 
benevolence of Cimon. Extreme* cheapness^ followed" that 
year's* deamess of provisions.' I don't doubt that extreme 
deamess will follow" this year's cheapness of praomo7». My 
TuUia's weak state** kills" me with ©anxiety. 

^ tuatinire. > Say ; * opinions of commencing life.' Should it be istUm 

teUu, or atoi imeru 1 (See 25. last clause.) 3 Dod. paulatim, 4 despicientitu 
i Ft. 1. 156. 6 Df. 1109 (9). 7 Say i < of human things.' > ^utim- 

iwn. 9 Summus. ><> amaeqtd, ^> Ft I. 290 ((2). ^ imbeeUli' 

ta§oorpori». ^3 exanimare. 



§ 3. Participial Clauses, 

30. When a participial clause is equivalent to an apposition or 
relative sentence, it stands as near as possible to the word it 
modifies. 

1. Pisistratup primus Homeri libros^ antfusoeanUoj sic disposuisse dicitur, 
Ut nuiic habemus. C,—2. Sspe homines rotunum^ bono amtUioa dUs 
immortalibtu datam^ in fraudem malitiamque convertimt. C. 

31. But when a participial clause is equivalent to a sentence 
beginning with a conjunction, it is sometimes inserted in the prin- 
cipal sentence, sometimes placed before it, sometimes after it, as 
its relation to the principal sentence requires. 

1* Kgyptii et Babylonii, in camporum patendum aequoribus habUanleSf 
( =: quum hob.) omnem curam in siderum cognitione posuerunt. C. — 

2. Perditia {= licet perd.) rebus omnibus, tamen ipsa virtus se sustentarc 
potest. C— 3. Brutus Consul ita proelio uno ac<iidir Vestinorum rea 
ut dilaberentur in opplda, se dtfennvri ( = ut defend,). L, 

Exercise 6. 

[P means that the sentence is to be turned into a participial clause.] 
82. ° My reputation being lost, nothing^ remains* but that I 



[§4. 83-35. PROFEB NAMES. 24] 

should dit by my own hands. I gladly receive the Aonotir^* 
offered to me for* having saved the state. They all' jLy to the 
town to defend themselyesp ^there. Be sure^ not to 
neglect your AeaZ^^, which is now re-established. p Can 
any one cure a body, that is worn-outP by sucb' labours? 
Who doubts, that such* opinwMf so deeply* implanted, so long 
entertained/ are very hard to root up V The example of a man 
p who makes glory his first object, is not to be followed. 

1 nthU • aliud »—nUu * See I. 83. ' o6. Say ; * on account of the 

lepubiic saved.' ^oave. See Dt (1), 118. < C (1), 10. « tampmiitu. 

7 vehuhu : the word for old which refers to the superiority of age. D^. onli- 
fuuB. B Df. {!), 93. 



§ 4. Proper Names. 

33. A proper name generally precedes its apposition. 

1. Ex pnepositio : Hb syllaba : e litenu— 2. Cato, vir clarissimus.— 3. Lemnos 
insula. 

34. But if the attention is to rest upon the apposition, or if it 
has a nearer relation to some preceding notion, it stands first. 

1. EjuM doctor Plato triplicem finxit animum. C. (because the efu» refers 
to XtTweratea in the former sentence.) — 2. Homo mirificus,' Dionysiua 
{thai wnuUiful person, Dumyoiiu), 

Exercise 7. 

35. I will make no objection^ to your hissing off the stage 
othat very bad actor* Balbus. I remember that Pamphilus, my 
host, said' that he would not come. You (sing,) have heard Q. 
Minucius Rufus say, that king Antiochus lodged^ athishouse' 
o w h e n at Syracuse." Verres invited Antiochus, king of Syria, 
to supper. I hear that the excellent Lucilius,' a friend of mine, 
is suffering from a disease that must end fatally. I am vexed that 
Rutilius, a man p who has deserved well of me, should be Uving 
on such confined means. I fear that Satureius, an excellent man, 
and oone who has deserved extremely; well of the state, will 
be brought into danger of his life. It is your ^ business to be« 
seech the conqueror to spare the I^e of Pamphilu^i your host. 



342 ANTITHETICAL WOBDS. [§ 5. 96-40< 

Your oonnectioQ* Rutilius swore that he owed his hft to me : hit 

father' Numantius'^ would not heg Cessar to spare mine. 

^ Df. (1), 19. s Utirio ( sa * Uags-pla^ ') implies Bomething of deprodotloi 

SDH (1), 2. < devarmrL {Lue. otr. opt.) * <tffini§, 

▼ The accent oygi faiher shows that it is to precede the proper name. 



§ 5. Antithetical Words. 

36. From 7, it follows that antithetical words or notions will 
naturally often stand, the one at the beginning, the other at the 
end of the clause. 

1. Neee$mtaH9 inventa antiquiora sunt, qnam vohiptatie. C.—2, Errare 
mehercule malo cum Platone, quam com istis vera 9enHre. C, 

37. If the antithetical notions consist of more than one word 
(each answering to one of the other set), the order of the first set 
is very often reversed in the second. 

38. If the antithetical notions are in different sentences, they 
stand, ' 

(a) Either both at the beginnins: ? r ^u • ^- i 

\( ^ , , , , ^ ® > of their respective clauses : 

(h) Or both at the end i ^ 

(c) Or the one at the end of its clause, the other at the begm- 

ning ; the order of the first being generally reversed in the second, 

if they consist of several words. 

(a) ShUti mdloruni memorlft torquentur ; aapientet bona prt^eTUaf gratfi re- 

cordatione renovata, delectant. C. (ab^ab,) 
(a, b)Multi in oTiUeUparandia adkibent curam : in amicia digmdia negligent^ 

matt. C,{ab — a b.) 
(e) 1. Ut eupidUaiibua principum et vitUa infid soled tota ciyitas : sic emendari 

et eorrigi eontinmHSL C.—Z Hetuo ne aeeltrate dicam in te, quod pro 

Milone dicam pie. C.{abXba.) 

39. When a substantive is repeated in a sentence, the two 
cases generally stand close together. 

Obe. Not always : e. g nihU semper Jloret : ettaa auceedit atati. C. In 
sentences of the kind to which this rule applies, the pron. ^anoBur* 
might generally be substituted for the second sobstantiye, *ofie' being 
added to the first. * AfonkiUs man '=s*on0 man kills ofurf^.' 

1. Vir virum legit— 2. Ex doTtto in domupn migrare.~3. Diem ex die ex- 
Bpectare.«4. Arma armia propulsare. 

40. These forms will be indicated thus : 

a &— a 5 will indicate thttt the order is to be retalnodi a b X 6a that it Is to be 
reversed. 



{ 6. 41^ 42.] SECONDABT EMPHASIS. 243 

Ofa. The inverted order is called Chiaumm^ and ifi iSbidfauowiU form for an* 
tithetical Bentences. 

Ohs. These rules are not invariably observed : ^. g. Rerum 

copia verhorum copiam gignit. C. Pausanias magnam helli 

gloriam turpi morte maculavit. Nep* Iniquissimam pacem 

justissimo hello antefero. C. 

Exercise 8. 

[Obi, When 'one' is tobe omitted (oone), 'another' mustbetrandated 
by a case of the substantive that follows o n e.~« Then indicates that 
the question is to be asked by on.] 

41. I don't see, how past pleasures* can assuage^ present evils 
{ahxha). I confess that the judgment of the generality' differs' 
from my judgment. Laws* punish^ the wicked, defend and pro- 
tect* the good. The opinion* which" you' are implanting in my 
mind, Rutilius is rooting up.' The opportunity* which" you are 
seizing, Caius has let slip.* The more difficult it is to acquire a 
knowledge of heavenly things,^ the more do they kindle oin us 
the desire of knowing" <> them. It is one* thing to be unanimously 
acquitted^ another to escape by a smtence^^ purchased by bribery 
{ah — ah). Do you © t h e n believe, that the mind is strengthened 
by pleasure, <> a n d weakened by continence l*(ahxh a). Arms 
must be resisted by arms (39, 4). Is it • t h e n true that • o n e poet 
always envies oanother? I by Hercules had rather be condemn* 
ed* than acquitted" by a sentmc^^ piurchased by bribery (86, 2). 

1 Sedare. > vtUguM. * ditteniire (a qu& re). < tvppUeio^ affUere^, 

s Ddd. iiuris or I. 374. « Invert. I. 30 (cQ. 7 « heavenly things, the 

more difficult knowledge they admit of (AoftenOi ^c. 8 cogmmere. 

9 1. 38. ^° See Jitdgmemt. 



6. Secondary EmpJiasis : position of words occurring in two 
clauses, 

42. In a sentence of some considerable length a word receives 
a slight emphasis or prominence by being, placed just before or 
after a pause. 

For instance^ just after an appodtion'clause that beftngs to the subject. In 
fact, the beginning or end of any grofup qf vorda Is a slightly emphatic 
position. 



M4 SBCONDABT BMPHASIS. [$ 6. 4d-45. 

L Ontoris nomen upod antiqiios in Gredl | majori quadun Td eopifi, Tel 
gloiii flornit. C— 2. CfleliiiB talis tiibimixs pieUa fuit, ut nemo contra 
dviam peiditonun populanm tuHndaUamquc denuniiam | a aenata et a 
bonomm causa steterit libentius. C. 

48. A word that is the subject or object of two sentences should 
generally precede both. 

1. ESatUB, uM primiun nostios equites oonapezemnt, impeta facto, oeleriter 
noatroa pertmbaTerimt. Ctat.— 2. Quem^ nt barbaii inoendium effugiaae 
Tidenin^ telia eminna miaaifl^ inteifiecenint. Nep, 

The position of a sabject at tlie liead of a aentence before the coqjiinction 
of an accessory sentence is so oonunon, tliat it is often found there^ eTen 
when it is }utf the sabject of the piindpai sentence also. 

1. Hie etd crimine Pario est accnaatns, tamen alia fiiit causa damnationla. 
A<p.— 2. i?oiiiampostquam Carthag^em veneran t t urn ez Cartha- 

gfniensibus Unas, ^. 

44. A word that is the subject of one sentence and the object 
of another^ should generally stand before both (as belonging to 
the principal sentence) and be represented in the accessory sen. 
tence by die proper case of if, ea, id. _ 

1. Rex Pnisias, quum Hannibal! apud eum ezsulanti depugnari placeret, 
negabat sa andSre. {When BaamSbaly uho wu ruiding ob an exiU triih 

King Prasias, tpit/ud, ^: he said Ac.) C— 2. BoUm, petentibna 

JEduis, quod egregii virtute erant CQgniti, ut in finibus suis coUocarent 
concessit. Ctes, 

Exercise 9. 

45. If the Boil* had sued for peace, they would have obtained 
it. If Caius does* this, he will endanger his reputation. Dio 
nysius* having seen me at Rome, left nothing undone' to 
bring me into odium. Could* my favourite, your connection,* 
Rutilius, upon hearing this^ (pL) almost die with laughter? 
When youT favourite^ Saufeius was staying with* my friend 
Luoilius,^ ^'tho latter used to get an a|)peM^tf by walking. 
(44). When Metellus* was at Athens, he •used to devour litera 
ture with^that wonderful* person' Dionysius. 

»* Shan have done.' « D£ Pt 1. 18. • affkis, *AbLAbsoL 
' oinMl quern deversarif to stay "with any body for a time as a guest. ' homo 
tdr7fieu9f 



$ 7« 46-51.] ON THE POSITION OF STTSC. 246 

§ 7. On the position of Sum. 

46. iSttfii, as the mere logical copula, stands either between the 
subject and predicate, or afler them both. 

Homo est mortalls : cr homo mortalis est 

47. Sum^ when it precedes both subject and predicate, is rooro 
than the mere copula, and expresses existence emphatically [=» 
' exists ;' * there iff.*] 

Est homo mortalis {jnan i» undoubtedly mortal). 

In ut neeeau the 'est' is emphatic {=*i»db8oltddy necessary:^) or *mud in* 

faUiblyJ 
1. Non Yident id se cupere, quod fugitivo aiicui ant gladiator! ooncedi 9U 

neeecfe. C— 2. Se esse tertLom illmn Conieliun, ad quem regnnm hiyus 

iirbis penrenire eatet neeute, C. 

48. Sumy when unemphatic, should generally be placed after 
an emphatic word. 

Hence is it not placed after entm, autem, Ac, except when it is em* 
phatic. 
1. Postqnam divitiiB honori ease coBpere, &c. C— 2. Hsbc conficta arbitror a 
poetis ewe. C— 3. Ut a te paulo eat ante dictum. C.~4. Nature est ipsa 
fjEibricata. C.--5. In eoque colendo slta vits e«< honestas omnia. C. 

49. On this principle esse is often placed after its governing 
verb ; especially after such verbs as affirm or deny existence, 
such as credo, nego, ajo, volo, veto,^ 

1. Is igltur yersum in oretione veto< eMe. C— 2. Defensum ne^e< esse. C— 
3. Cluos equidem credo eaae^ Ac. C— 4. Ut socios honore auctiores vdU 
eaae, C 

50. Esse in compound infinitives very frequently precedes a 

hyperdissyUdble participle; the participle often standing at the 

end of its clause. 

Abs te eaae Hberataa: per te esM reereajtaa; latrocinia eaaa deptdaat aaae 
adeptoas operam eaae ponendam (but, jmrrogatua eaae videaitwr) — all in a 
small portion of one letter (JEpp, ad Qutn/. Frair, lib. L I). 

51. The est of a compound tense often stands after its parti- 
ciple, at the end of a clause. 

1. Nihil amplius desiderarem hoc statu, qui mihi Jam partua eat. C,^2 
Qu8Btamen(ut in mails) acerbitatiafi<epoiiemi(ici<. C. 



1 By Kx> means always : omniretione taeare^ ut csso quam beattsdmos vdo 
Vipp. ad QftMt. FnJtr, Ub. L 1 . 



240 FBONOuns. $ 8. 52-55. 

Exercise 10. 

52. Dionysiiis, who says that virtue is not productive of plea* 
nare, is blamed* by many. Caius denies that gain should be 
pursued as a first object. He says tfiat this should be the first 
olject with those who are placed over othersi* that those who are 
under their command* should be as happy ®as possible.* I 
believe that the boy is a liar.' He says that pleasure is not to 
be our first object. All cry-out, that this very false* man 
^ is not to be believed upon his oath. He promised that he would 
place no obstacle ^in the way of accomplishing so 
great an object.^ Are you' ^then going to feel ajfnnded, at 
this ? They teach ° us^ that that ophdon shoiild be given up. 

1 DocL reprdundert. > To be placed oyer othen, praseaae aHia. Indie. 

* To be under any body's command, tn eujut imperio erne. * I. 410. p. 144. 

*,acM. 



§ 8. Pronouns. 



53. When a substantive has both an adjective and adjective 

pronoun with it, there are six possible positions^ without sepa« 

ration. 

h 



1. Tus snayissimaB litters 

2. TnjB litterai suavisrimn 

3. LittertB tas BnavissimaB 



4. SoayiasimaB tusB Utterai 

5. SoayiBsimai littersB tuas 

6. Litters Buayifiaims tus. 

(a) If both the predicates are emphatic, the forms 2. 5. should probably be 

preferred. 
ifi) Then maybe twoadjectiye pronouns and an a4i6CtiTe : e. g. tuum hoc 

Buburhanum Gymnasium. C. De. Orat.L 1, 21 {end). 
(a) ExampUt qfform l(ioAicA t* Vu Engluh order) are : in hac no8tr& actione 

(C. De Orat. iii. 69) : suis lenissimis postulatis (Cm. A C i. 6): in 

meo gravisBimo casu (C. ad F'am. Iv. 6, 1) : in hac prsdart epistolk (C. 

de nn. U. 31). 

54. If the substantive has a demonstrative pronoun and two 
adjectives joined by et, <J-c., the most usual place of the pronoun 
is after the first adjective. 

Craeeue hie et eonaretus aer. C, 

Exercise 11. 

55. Do not pester ^that excellent man with your threatening ^ 



( 9. 56-59.] PBONOTTNS. 241 

letters. He never answered a single word* to my verykindly 
expressed* letters ^ I cannot but* return some answer to 
your very acceptable letters. Those wrong opinions ^ofyoura 
must be rooted-up out of your mind. Is it ^the part of a 
Christian to spend all his life in making gain ? You must strive 
to retain^ that great reputation ^ofyours. You must take 
care* lest your so-great reputuUion should be endangered. No 
obstacle shall be placed by me (^in the way ofaccom- 
plishing) this so great and difficult an object.* 
Is it then the part of a Christian to increase this unpopw- 
larity* of mine ? 

^ NvUwn unquam verbum, > humanUHmuB, > Df. (1), 18. 

« Pt. I. 75. « cav&re. • See Oozvm. 

§ 9. Pronouns continued. 

56. Quisqise with a superlative or ordinal numeral follows the 
tidjective. 

Optimus qui$que : aldMima quasque flumina : qiiinto quopte verbo. 
'Quisque is generally placed immediately afler a case of sui or 
suus referring to it. 

Placet StoiciB tuo quamquerem nondno appellare. C 

57. (a) Quidam generally follows its noun, whether substantive 
or adjective : but 

58. (h) Quidam precedes its noun, when there is an opposition 
between the quidam and some others : and in other cases where 
the quidam is very emphatic. 

(e) For instance, where the quidam means *$<nM that I could name :^ * soma 

toe know qf* 
(a) 1. Interim Agyllius quidam yincula lazavit. Nep,—2, Sed audio majorom 

fuetidom in urbe timorem esse. C. 
(5) Clamor isteindicat esse quondam cives imperitos, sed non muUoa, C. 
(e) Otium preestaturi videntur, si quidam homines patientius eorum poten* 

tiam ferre potuerint. C. 

59. The lUe of celebrity follows its substantive, if there is no 

adjective with it : if there is, it generally s^nds between the two. 

Oba. Not always : e. g. iJlam aeerbissimam miniatram Prsetorum ayari- 
ti83 calumniam. C. Ep, ad Q. JFVatr, i. 1, 8. Herculem Xenophontiunj^ 
Ulum. C. Xenophon Socraticus iUe. C. 
I. Habetur vir cgregius L. Paullus ille, qui, <fec. C— 2. Omnis iOa vis et 
quasi flamma oratoris, <ftc. C— 3. Antipater itfe Sidonius. C— 4. Mno 
sarchus, auditor Paneetii UUub tuL C. 



248 ' PBONOims. [§9. 60-04, 

60. AUquis in connection with another adjective generally 
takes the second place. ^ 

Bene dioere non habet definUam aliquam^ regionem. 

61. (a) When its substantive has no other adjective or pronoun 
with it, aUquis generally follows the substantive, when both are 
unemphatic ; but (h) precedes it, when either is to receive promi- 
nence or emphasis. 

Obt, Aliquia is emphatic and precedes the substantive, when it means 
* aomc at all tnetda^ * wmz \f not mwh ^ e. g. qui sedulitatem mali poets 
duxerit aliquo tamen prsemio dignam, &c. C. 

(a) 1. Aut de pingendo ftidor aliquia diserte dixerit aut scripseiit. C.~2. Si 
kujtuce rei ratio aliqutiy &c. C. 

(&) 1. Eju» facti, si non bonam', at aliquam rationem afierre. C— 2. Quid 
mihi— tamquam aUad Cfrceculofotioao etloquaci— qusestiunculam— poni- 
tis 7 C.~3. Timide tamquam ad aUqutm scopulum' libidinis, sic tuam 
mentem ad philosophiam appulisti. C 

62. Two pronouns, or an adverb with the pron. from which it 

is derived, are generally brought close together. 

Ob9. Not always : even when the pronouns relate to the same person: 
e. g. *^cum quibus te non tuum jtuUcittm §ed temporum vinda conjunxo' 
runt,** C. Fam. x. 6. 
Equites, sine duce rellcti, alii ali& in civitates suas dilapsi sunt. L, 

63. (a) When ipse with a case of sui stands for himself, &c., it 

generally follows the case of sui : but (h) when there is to be 

particular emphasis on the subject, ipse precedes, and is used in 

the nominative, even though the opposition intended is between 

oneself and somebody else, 

(a) 1. Deforme est, de se tp^mprsedicare, &lsa presertim. O— 2. Non egeo 

medicine ; m«ip«e consoler. C — 3. Lentulum fni^ tp«{ antepono. C. 
(6) 1. Si quis ipse nbi inimicus est, dc— 2. Ipsi se curare non possunt. 
[Sometimes, however, the ipse follows : si te ipse contineas. C] 

64. In other words : whenever what is asserted of the agerU 
with respect to himself is a strange thing, ipse is to be in the nom. 
and precede sui, even when the meaning is himself, opposed to 
otJiers (of whom the assertion might be expected to be made). 



^ For *any other,* alius ullus is more common (I think) than ullus 
alius: but this depends, of course, on the relative emphasis of * any ' or ' other, ' 
l*o express it stronglj, separate the adjectives, as : mm ullam rem aliam 
extimescens nisij&c, C 

s In ttnitfo/i^KW this order should be observed, unless there is another adj. 
(e. g. aUqms unua pluresve), or the aliquis is emphatic 



( 10. 65, 66.] THE REUkTIVB. 249 

Exercise 12. 

[*The ^famous,' 'the °great/ Ac., to be translated byilUJ] 
65. I far prefer* this suburban gymnasium © o f yours (53, fi) 
to the o f a m o u s Academy and Lycseum. Every body loves 
himself.* Every one is dear to himself. The longest letters are 
o always' the most agreeable. To each virtue its own* pecu- 
liary praise is due.* Does it <> t h e n become an orator almost to 
die with laughing every third word ? They cry-out, that each 
man must abide by his own judgment. Would you' dare to 
refuse to abide by the judgment of the <> g r e a t Plato ? I must 
explain, what^ was the opinion of that god <> o f mine, Plato. 
That Epicurus ^o{ yodrs boasts that he had no master. Epicu- 
rus says that he attended' <'the lectures of a certain 
Pamphilus at Samos. It cannot be denied, that some^ corpuscles 
are smooth, others rough, others round (ah X ha). Do 
you ° t h e n believe, that this immense and most beautiful world 
was made" of* certain corpuscles, by no natural compuK 
8 i o n , '<^ but by a certain fortuitous concourse ? Let us honour 
this ©man's* diligence with some reward, if not a great 
«> o n e . " Do you o t h e n compare me to some Scythian (61, h) ? 
Isit°then like a philosopher^* to defend pagnaciously some 
doubtful opinion ©or other? 

1 Longe anteponere. > I. 363. Begin with ipae, * I. 399, b. 

* peculiar, prtrprvut. To be due, deberi. ^ quianam. ' to attend a person's 
lectures, audire aliquem. Turn the veft into the passive, ' loas heard by him J 
' quidam, * efficere. ^ ex, " * no nature compelling.' i* if 

with no {nan) great, yet (oQ with some reward.' (S^ Ez. 61, b.) ^ Say : 

<of a philosopher.' 



§ 10. The Relative. 

66. (a) The relative (except when it refers to iSy ea^ id) should 
stand as near as possible to its antecedent : {h) the place of the 
antecedent being often determined with this view. 

(a) Xerxem per literas certiorem fecit id agi, ut pons, quern Ule in Hellesponto 

fecerat, dissolveretur. Nep, 
{h) Bellum grave et periculosum vestris vectigalibus atque sociis a duobns 
potentlssimis regibus infertur, MffuridcUe et THffrane; quorum alter, &c 

a 

11* 



200 THE EELATI7B. [§11.67-71, 

67. This applies only to strictly relative clauses : not to qui =3 
the demonstr. is^ with et, nam, igUur, autem, &c. 

68. 'Appositions, and even single adjectives (especially super- 
latives), that in English precede the relative clause, are in Latin 
generally placed in that clause. 

Hence Uhe very celebrated general Epaminondas, in whose house' wonid 
be : Epaminondas, tajuB cdeberrimi imperatoria in domo, Ac. * The Im- 
mortal glory which the Greeks acquired,' gloria, quam vavnuniaUtm Greci 
retulerunt. So : 'a city %gkichf* que urbs, &c. — *the dty hejirst vintedy* 
quam urbem primam adiit. — 'an opinion u&tcA,' qusB sententia, &c., {ciiy 
and opinion being in appoaUion to something preceding.) 

Exercise 13. 

69. In the same year Cumae, a city* which" the Greeks were 
then in possession of,^ is taken hy the Campanians. The Amanus 
divides Syria from dilicia, a mountain which was fiill of <> o u r 
constant* enemies." I hope that you will* recover fronji the very 
severe disease, with which you are now afflicted. I hope that 
you will^ keep the many" and very beautiful" promises, which you 
made me. The very great" and beautiful" reward, with which I 
have been presented, wonderfully* delights me. That Athena- 
goras of Cyme," who had dared to export corn in a famine,* 
was scourged' with rods.' 

^ To be in possession of^ tensre. s Constant, aempUemue : to end tho 

sentence. ^fore ui . . . * mirijce, ^ Cynueus. ' virgia etedL 



§ 11. The Relative continued, 

70. (a) When the subject is defined by t^ and a relative 
clause, it is oflen placed in, and at the end of, the relative clause : 
so, (5) when a relative clause stands before tlie pi^ncipal clause 
(the relative being in the nominative), the antecedent often ter- 
minates the relative clause. 

(a) Ille, qui in Timno mundum iBdificavit Platonis cfou*. 
(6) Q,uiB perspicuam omnibus yeritatem continet ^propon^io, nihil indiget ap* 
probationis. C, 

71. When the relative clause precedes the principal one, the 
rel. may give up its usual place (as the first word) in favour of a 
notion that is to be made prominent. 



§ 11, 72-75. THE RELATIVE. 251 

Tribnla viZi infcenus Pompeii quod aatis sit, efficiunt. C, 

72. Of two cases of qui, an oblique case precedes a nqmi 

native. 

Senatus ille, ^iMm^ex regibus constare dixit, unu'jyeram speciem Ramani 
■enatflB cepit. L. 

73. When qid refers to something preceding, no conjunctions 
can go with it but sed, et (before), tamen, qtddem, que (after). 

1. Perturbat me, C. Caesar, illud interdum : ciud tamm^ quum te penitus 
recognovi, timere desino. C. — 2. Morosit&s senum habet aliquid ezcusa- 
tionis, non illius quidem justee, Bed qua probari posse yideatur. C. 

74. Other conjunctions, such as autem, vero, eniniy igitur^ 

cannot stand with qui, unless its reference is to something that 

follows. 

1. QtuB avJUm secundum naturam essent, ea sumenda et quadam sestima- 
tione dignanda docebat. C. — 2, Qui igitur adolescens, nondum tantd 
gloriE pneditus, nihil unquam nisi seyetissime et grayissime fecerit, ia ei 
ezistimatione, eftque setatesaltayit? C.~3. Qvanan, vero patres aut ma- 
jores allquE gloriE prsestiterunt, u student plerumque eodem in genere 
laudis excellere. C.~4. Qua ergo ad yitam tuendam pertinent, partim 
sunt in animo, <ftc. C. 

Exercise 14. 

[r./. means that the rel. clause is to stand first (see Part I. 30) : a. v, that the 
sentence is to be translated by the actiye voice.] 

75. That opinion^ ^ofyours, which is injurious* to us, must 
be rooted-up out of your mind. That Rupilius,* who for so many 
years had sat at the helm of the state, had fied away secretly. 
(r. jT.) liet those therefore, to whom we all owe our UfoeSy be 
huried with military honours, (r./.) Will therefore* that Lu- 
cilius,» who is prepared for his faie, whatever it may he, Jly 
away secretly ? (^•/•) You are thereforei driving from the 
helm of the state those, to whom both you and I owe our lives, 
(r.f.) The General who had so often saved the state, was suf- 
fered by his fellow-citizens to be deprived of hurial, (a. v.) 
We have scarcely com* enough' for a month. Let ©those 
therefore! who have kept back their contf be fined a sum-o& 
money.3 Peace must be sued for ; which those who sue for it 
(fut,)y will obtain. 

' iMBdere, 8 Say : * which may be enough fo r (*iri*) a m o n th.' • See 

example (71). ^peeunia. abl. 



202 INTERBOOATnrBS. PREPOSITIONS. [^ 12^ 13. 76*79" 

§ 12. IfUerrogatives. 

76. (a) Intern^atives, except ne, take the first place in an indL 
rcct question that follows the principal sentence : but, 

77. (h) In direct questions, or indirect questions that precede 

the principal sentence, the interrogative scHnetimes yields the first 

place to an emphatic notion. 

(a) Q,u8eritur, eur doctissimi homines de mazinils rebus dissentiant. C. 
{b) 1. DU tOrwn sint, necne sint, quaritur. C.~2. Quid? AUxoRdrum 

Exercise 15. 

78. What ? is not nearly* thewholehearen* filled* with 
the human race ? But whether these numbers* are poetical, 
or of* some other kind, must be seen next.^ When Socrates* 
was asked,* whether he did not think Archelaus,* the son of 
Perdiccas, happy ; I don't know, said he, for I have never cc«. 
versed with him.* What ? did not the ° f a m o u s Cato of Utica* 
die by his own hands ? What ? with what feelings do we think 
that Lucilius of Ariminum saw his mistake (h)? I wish to 
remark'^ ° h e r e , what* a calamity over-confidence* usually** is. 

* Ramshom says : compUrt^ to fill completely ; vmpleret to fill what is hollow 
empty ; opplerey to fill to the brim, to fill to overflowing, to cover a sur&ce by 
filling . Nearly so Jentzen : plenvm quod eat ad satidatem diciiur eompletuntt 
txpletum: reple turn estj quod exhauaiumeratf utfo9aasoppletu9ad9w 
ptrjvciem^ ref ertu a, differ tutf e onfert us adapatiumifrderiua pertinent. 
2 Mf. 8 deincepa. < * Socrates, when it had been inquired of him' (ntfr/.), 
dc, quctrere ex aliqw), s coUoqui cum aliquo, ' IMctttsia^ a4j.- 

ilrtmin^nw below. t lAbet inierpontre, 8 c. (1), 21. Dt (1), 60. 

nimiajiducia, ^ * is wont to be.' 



§ 13. PrepogiUons, 

79. Prepositions (except versus and tenus) generally stand be. 
fcre their nouns, (a) When the substantive has an attributive 
with it, the preposition stands between the attributive and its sub- 
stantive, when either of them is emphatic, (h) When the attrib. 
utive is a rel. pron., the preposition generally stands between the 
pion. and its substantive 



( 13. 80-84.] PREPOSITIONS. 253 

(a) 1. Magnft cum cvaA atque diligentU Bcripdt C— 2i Romam HonUum 
acdpiunt eo majore cumgaxuUOf quo prope metum res fiierat. 

fb) In some expressions the preposition nearly always takes the middle place* 
e. g. qud in re; qiumiob rem; ed de caiiad, 

80. Even when the relative has no substantive with it, the pre- 
position often follows it. 

I. Senatns, quM ad soleret, referendum censuit. C.~2. Homo disertas doq 
intelliglt eum, quem contra dicit, laudari a se, Ac C, — 3. Socii putandl 
sunt, quMinUrxtB communicata est. C. — 4. Res, qu& de agitnr. C. 

81. Cum is always appended to mc, te, «e, noUsy volis, qiu 

(= quo) : and also to quo, qua, quihusy when the cum is entirely 

unemphatic. 

1. Mazime cavendum est, ut cos, ^ibutcum sermonem confeiinus, et 
vereri et diligere videamur. C— 2. Ira procul absit, cum (emphatic) quA 
nihil recte fieri, nihil considerate potest. C. — 3. Noli adversum eos me 
Telle ducere, cum quibiu {opp, to adversum eos^ ne contra tearma 
ferrem, Italiam reliqui. Nep, 25, 4. 

82. When a substantive governed by a preposition has other 

words attached to it, these words are often placed between the 

preposition and its noun. 

I. Erat olim mos ut faciles essentin fuuiTi cut^tM tribuendo. C.»2. Honore 
digni cum igTwminid dignU non sunt comparand!. C. 

A preposition is sometimes separated from its noun by que, ve, 
vero, autem, tamen, quidem, enim. 

I. Sensim banc consuetudinem et discipllnam jam antea minuebamus ; poet 
vero Sullee victoriam penitus amisimus. C. — 2. So : post autem Alexan- 
dri mortem. Nep, — 3. Poet enim Chryslppum. C. 

83. Even in prose, per in adjurations is separated from its case 

by the ace. pronoun of the person addressed, the verb adjure, 

beseech, implore being omitted. 

Nolite, jttdices, per yoB foriuna»i per liberos vestros, Inimicls mels, lis pr»- 
■ertim quos ego pro vestrS salute suacepi, dare Isetitiam. C. 

Exercise 16, 

84. On these matters I would wish* you (pi) to deliberate* 
with Pomponius, with Camillus, with whomsoever* it shall seem 
^good to you. As to* him, in whose o hands* all" power" 
is^lodged,! see nothing to fear.* Epicurus showed himself 
a sufficiently aptoscholar in ©receiving* this nerveless' 
fmd effeminate^ opinion ; after him Philonymus the Rhodian y 



354 CONJUNCTIONS. [§ 14. 85-89 

atsetied that to be without pain is the sununum bonum. They fix 

a certain limit,* beyond which, ^'they say, we ought not to 

advance. Neither in those who frame constitutions, ^'^ nor in 

those who wage wars, is the desire of oratorical power ^^ wont to 

arise. I believe that a limit in sepulchres is properly^* required : 

for to what expenses that matter*' has already advanced, you see 

in the tomb of C. Figulus. Pomponius is going to set out for Sicily : 

a matter! concerning which I have || fished <nU& gre&t deal^^ 

from Hortensius. 

^ Fe2tm with Bubj. (ut omitted). > The simple relative. > (£/• 

* To be in any body's hands, peiiea aliquan esse. DC (I), 108. ^ ad 

aliquid satis docilem se prab9re. f enervatus. b mtUiebris. * mo* 

dumadtdbire, ^^ eonstUuere rempvbUoam, " tUcendL ^ recte. 

'* res. " mtdta. 



§ 14. Conjunctions, 

85. A conjunction stands at the head of the clause to which it 
belongs. 

86. But the relative or demonstrative pronoun, and any em- 
phatic notion, may precede any but the co-ordinate conjunctions, 
et, ac, afque; vel, aut ; sed; at, verum; nam, namque, etenim; 
quamobreniy quapropter; ita, Uaque, sic, &c. 

I. Id iUe ut audivit, domuin reverti noluit. Nep, — 2. Huic si paucos puta- 
tis affines esse, vehementer erratis. — 3. CommeritariosquosdamAristotehs 
veni ut auferrem. C — {So in sttbordinate sentences,) 4. Ati]ius Regulua 

• sententiam ne diceret, recusavit. C,—6. Gorgiss Leontino tantua 

hones habitus est a Grsecis, soli ut ex omnibus Delphis non inaurata 
statua, sed aurea statueretur. C. 

87. When two conjunctions come together, the conjunction of 

the principal precedes that of the subordinate sentence. 

Itaque^ si aut reqnietem natura non qneereret, aut earn posset aliU quadam 
ratione consequi, facile pateremur. C. 

88. Qtmm (how) with an adjective is often separated from the 
adjective, for the purpose of adding emphasis to it. 

Ut credam ita esse, quam est id exiguum 7 C, « 

Exercise 17. 

89. When he' heard this,* he suffered nobody to rest. I am 
jome to recompense you with some reward, if not a great o o n e 



} 15. 90-92.] CONJUNCTIONS. 255 

(86, S). When he heard this/ he uttered the name of Quinc- 
tilius in a very pathetic manner. I will call upon Caius, whom, 
though I think he will keep his promises, I will neverthelesshind 
by an oath. Do you ^ t h e n think those evils are to be feared, 
which are over in a moment of time ? Listen to what that 
Caius (of)yours* has done. If Demetrius has an audience^ 
it will be all over* with the army. Though Caius* owes his Itfe 
to me, yet he endeavours to bring me into odium. If therefore 
(87, I) they think that they owe their lives to me, I should be 
honoured ° by them with some* reward.* If therefore (87, h) 
they have derived any advantage from my care, let them confer 
some* reward* upon me. 

^ Acftim ent dc. 



§ 15. Conjunctions. — Autem, enim, igiiur, with esse. 

90. Ob8, Igitur^ tamen, argo^ deinde^ prtetercOt Uaque^ take the first place, 
when they modify the whole clause, and not merely any particular notion 
of it. When they modify a particular notion, only or especially, they 
follow that notion, or the first and most important of the words by which 
it is expressed. In Cicero, however, Uaquc always takes the first place, 
igittcr never. 

91. If esse or the subject begins the sentence, autem, enim, 

igitur, take the second place. 

1. J5M enim effectriz multarum et magnarum voluptatum. C.^2. Stmiau- 

tern clariora indicia naturae. C— 3. Id autem est perfectum offi 

cium. C. 

92. If the sentence begins with the predicate or non, num, nemo, 
nihil qtiis;^ or if esse is emphatic; esse (generally) takes the 
second, and the particle the third place. 



> Qui* tnim eat, Ac, occurs Tuwc, iv. 2, and elsewnere. The thing to be con- 
sidered is ; whether the question or assertion relates to the txiaUnct of the 
thing or to its "nature. " Quo minus recte dicatur qwd enim t»t^ nikU enim 
iBly nulla obstdt ratio.— Discrimen profidscitur ez natur& verbi ewe, quod, quum 
non plenam significationem prsBstet, cimi nomine conjungitur in imam notion- 
em, et encliticorum more comprehenditur uno accentu : sed ubi sigmficat ver€ 
tstt exatare, attrahit interrogandi particulam.— Q,ui quserit, quid tat enim? aut 
szspectat responsicnem nihil eaae^ vel nihUalvudeaae; aut anreavara aii^ dvbitai. 
Qui interrogat, quid erwm est? de certo genere rel quaerit, vel, Interrogationis 



256 CONJUNCTIONS. [§ 15. 93-09 

1. MXomAtm eat eRMtqnod wntio. C— 2. PRkU tM «mr tUnd, quamobrani; 
Ac C— 3. QiMeilencntqiii, Ac.1--4.iVcai9tt<^^iliir, qiiL 

93. (a) A prepositioii throws these particles into the third 
place, unless it is emphatic ; {h) when they may stand between 
the preposition and its noun. 

(a)JB:rAae^Silw-i]hidefficitiir. C. 

(6) 1. I^mi MTt SiiibB«M<or»aM(haiie Goiisiietiidiiiem) paiitoB amWnwuL 

C.»2. HerilliiB jam pil^^em est rejectus : poti emm C kr yM ip pum non en 

dispatatam. C 

94. Sometimes est follows a preposition and its case, and thus 
the particle is thrown forward to the fourth place. 

Abedut enim interfectuB. C. 

95. Quoque^ qiddem (which always follow the word they belong 
to) also throw aviem^ emm^ igUur to the third place. 

Ei qwfque anm ptocoDsnli imperinm in anniim proTogabatar. L. 
- 96. A partial exception to what is here said of quidem, arises 
from the affection of Uie pronominal particle qiddem for a pronoun. 
Thus in Wnque persuade esse te quidem mUd earissimuniy sed 
muUo fore eariorem, si, &c., the quidem, which properly belongs 
to carissimum, has deserted to the pronoun. 

97. So with other verbs the particle takes the third place, when 
the verb has a word with it, from which it cannot well be sepa- 
rated. 

Non video autem, Ac. Num vU igUur audire, Ac, 1 

98. The post-posUtoe conjunctions may separate a praenomen 

from a cognomen, and even such a compound word as jusjuran- 

dum, plebiscUum. 

1. L. quidem PkUippuM gloriari aolebat C.~2. Bern vero pubUcam.'-^, 
JuritquejurandL-^l Rogationibiuv p2e6£tpe 9cUi». 

Exercise 18. 

99. For I must say how salutary^ religion is to men. For 
some reason must be given of this, as it appeals to you at least,' 
strange counsel. For who is there, whose ears that re'port has 



vi intentd, nan hoc mm, vel prortug nihU ease. Nam tota vis continetur imo 
verbo qutd.-^Hoc ad alias quoqne formas pertinet, qusB verbtun est encliticnm 
Domini coigunctum habent." (Hand, TStrs, ii. 400.) 



516. 100-103.J NON. HAUD. 25*) 

not reached ? 1 approve of that :^ for there is nothing from which 
you can derive greater advantage. Be of good* courage i* for 
there is nohody to eject you from possesnon. Do you wish there- 
fore to Usten to what that Pomponius* has done ? You see what 
prudence, and how firm" a mind" there is need of; for o w e must 
take the helm of the state. For who is ttere who denies, that yon 
both sit at the helm, as the saying is, and above all others' 
watch over* the state ? o W e waver'' and change © o u r opinion 
even in clearer things : for in these there is some obscurity. I 
approve of that :' for there is no rapidity® which can come-into- 
competition' with that*" of the mind. 

> To be salutary, aahtU east * qaidcm, > lando id qwidenu 

^ anHmuM, > wvum ex omnibua maxime. ' protpieer^ with dat. 

1 kbaare, * ederitas. * contendere. ^^ The subst. must be repeated. 



§ 16. Non. Hand. 

100. (a) JVbn (or AaMtf) generally stands before the word whose 
notion it denies : thus when there is an opposition, it is always 
prefixed to one of the antithetical words : but, 

101. (h) Non (haud) takes the first place in negative senten- 
ces that express a consequence, (hence so frequently with ergo^ 
tgitur,) and (c) in hypothetical conclusions, when nisi is the con- 
ditional particle. 

(a) 1. Non paranda nobis solum sapientia sed framda etiam. C— 2. Otil 

fructus est non contentio animi, sed relazatio. C. 
(>) Non igUur de improbo, sed de callide improbo qusrimus. C. 
(e) Non jam Trolcis temporibus tantum laudis in dicendo Uljssi irHmued 

Homerus, nin jam turn honos esaet elpquentiss. C. 

102. Non {hatid) may also take the first place, when the denial 
is to be very emphatic ; especially in negative questions. 

1. Non ego jam £paminondse, non Leonidas mortem hm'us morti antepono. 
C— 2. Quid bestiffi? non pro suo partuita propugnant, nt irulnera reci« 
plant? C. 

103. The place of iton in the case of e^, &c.| with a participlci 
or of an auxiliary verb (with infin.) is next before e^ or the 
auxiliary verb (when there is no antithesis). 



258 COMPAAATIVESi ETC. [§ 17. 104-106. 

1. in TMb quonUun Uben tun Ueet^ tacite rogant, <&c. C— 2. Regulo non 
fitU Jupiter metaendiiB, ne, Ac. C— {TfTkm there %» antUhuia^ the non 
prtetdm Am tmHAetieai word.] 3. Non modo— mm detenitas, sed— 
Gondtanu est.— 4. Hanc epietolam cur non 9emdi 'velim, causa nulla 
est. C. 

104. The place of non is optional^ when it belongs to a pre- 
dicate {esse being the copula), or when it belongs to a universal 
negative proposition with quis or qui, 

1. Jove tonante cum populo agi non est fiis. C— 2. Nihil est, quod Deua 
efficere non possit. C. — ^3. Nihil est enim, quod non alicubi esse cogatar. 

a 

Exercise 19. 

105. P should not have risked all> my fertunes/ unless I had 
made you take an oath in words prescribed by me. F should not 
have been hamshed^ unless you had brought me into odium. You 
shall not therefore receive any reward of your improbity from me. 
I do not therefore consider myself to be ® t o o richly rewarded 
for my great* labour. What therefore ^did Caius^do? did 
not® he' receive from you the reward of his crimes ?• I shall not 
therefore place much reliance on your promises. I know that 
you favour me : I will not therefore bind you by an oath. Caius 
would not have fallen into so great* a calamity imless he had 
ceased to be in favor with you. There is hardly any thing which 
does not admit of the excuse of ignorance. 

^ Say : ' for my so-great labour.' s Ask the question with non, which Sa 

often used for nonne in vehement interrogations. 8 See Dod. delictum. 



§ 17, Comparatives^ SfC. 

106. In comparisons with quam, both the substantives connected 
by quam often precede the comparative. 

1. Adventus hostium fuit a^rie, quam whi, terribUior. L. — 2. Maris stdnta 
iempeatoBf quam ante promeoj terret navigantes vehemeniiue. C— 3. Bx 
multis judicari potest virtutia esse, quam €EtaH8y cursum eeUriorem. C— 
4. TTumUtoeUB nomeUf quom Solonisy eat illuetriue. C. — 6. Pompejusfuit 
reatUuendi met, quam rUinendif ettuJUosior. C— 6. I\iceref quam sanore, 
viihicm fGcUiue est. Q. 



) 17. 107-112. OOMPABATIYES, ETC. 25(^ 

107. A vocative is inserted after some words of the sentence. 

Ctmaa in omnibus causis gravibna^ C. Cteior, initio dicendi commoveri go- 
learn veliementiufl. C 

108. Inquam also is inserted after some words ; as ait is^ when 
not followed by an tnfin. or nc^ ita^ <&c. 

1 . Te, inquUi Appi, tuiunque capnt, de. Z«.--2. Hoe te uno quo poflsum, aU^ 
modo, fiUia, in libertatem vindico. L, 

109. If inquam has a nom., the verb generally stands first. 

110. So with ut ait; ut narrat ; <&c., the verb precedes its 
nominative. 

I. Sed dam palato quid sit optimum judicat, coeli, palatum (ut cat Ennitu) 
non suspezit. C,—2, Paddeianus aliquis hoc animo, ut narrat LaicUvus^ 
Ac 

111. So mihi crede {usually in this order), credo, opinor, puto, 
exisUmo, (all four with or without ut,) quceso, ohsecro, are often 
thrown parenthetically into the middle of a sentence. 

1. Rubeo, mihi crede^ sed jam scripseram. C— 2. Tranquillatis autem rebus 
Romanis, remigravit Romam, vi opinor, L. CottS et L. Torquato Coss.— 
3. Nolite, olMeero vot, pati, mihi acerbiorem reditum esse, quam fueiit, 
ille ipse discessus. C. 

Obs. Crede mihi is by no means uncommon in Cicero : the * believe * is 
then emphatic. Thus, Jam enim dico meum ; antea, crede mihi, subdubi- 
tabam. — Oic ad AU. ziv. 5, 2. Crede may then stand at the head of its 
clause; as, Crede, igUurmihi, Plance, omnet, &c. — Cic. Fam. z. 6. 

Exercise 20. 

112. It is easier to tie a knot, than to untie o i t . <> M y return 
was more bitter to me, than that departure itself. »» LucUius was 
honoured with a more splendid funeral than Demetrius. The 
Boil fied to ^their camp in more complete disorder than the 
^klui. It is easier to make a promise than to perform it. Is it 
not sometimes' a harder othing to perform a promise than to 
make it ? You ought to blush (111) believe me ; for you have 
wrested these things from my hands. Do not, I beseech you, allow 
this lucky opportunity to slip through jout fingers.* These 
things, as I imagine, would not be in our power,* if you had not 
let this lucky opponunity slip through your fingers.* Terrour^ 



260 COJtPAJLATVrRSs ETC. [§17. 112» 

as Ennius says, banishes' all* wisdom* from my mind. Separate^ 
yourself at length/ I beseech oy o u , from those, with whom not 
your <^o w n judgment, but the drcunutances of the times have 
united* you. 

1 Rarins hUatiwn qnam naummquam easo memento. * See Haxb. 

9 ^Mmihiex mdrnQexpectorare, For ex onimo othen read 'aranlDuito 



EXPLANATION OP MARKS, &c. 



Words in [ ] are to be omitted in translation.^ 

il Words in italics, to which this mark is prefixed, are to stand at the head of 
their dause. If the word that follows il is not in italics, the mark applies 
to that word only. 

* This mark denotes, that the word to which it is prefixed is to be looked for in 
the Extracts from the * Antibarbarus,' appended to the volume. 

I This mark means, that the clause to which it is prefixed is to precede the 
whole or part of that which stands before it in English. 

t This mark means, that the active voice is to be turned into the pamvCf or vice 
versd. 

Numerals followed by a curve refer to the Cautions at the end of the volume. 

Numerals without a curve refer to the Difierences of Idiom at the end of the 
volume. 

C. and Df. refer, respectively, to the Cautions and Differences of Idiom in Prac- 
tical Introduction, Part I. 

V. M refer to the Vernu MemoriaUB at the end of the volume. 

M. L. refer to the Manorial IArm at the end of the volume. 

f^ Numerical references in the notes refer to the First Part of the * Practical 
Introduction to Latin Prose Composition.' 

X^ Words in the notes marked by single inverted commas, are the lUeral trans- 
lation of the Latin to be used. 



1 in the first five Exercises, words to be omitted are marked by ° prefixed to 
words in spaon2 piintlng. 



PRACTICAL INTRODUCTION 

TO 

LATIN PEOSE COMPOSITION, 



II. 

LONGER LATIN EXERCISES. 

(On connecting propositions hy the relative pronoun, where in 
English we should use a demonstrative.) 

1. Propositions are in Latin often connected by the relative 
quiy qucB, quod, where in English we should use and, for, hut, 
now, &o., with the demonstrative. 

2. (a) Nam et pnetor pedestribuB ezercitibus prsfuit, et praefectus classis res 

magnas mari gessit. Q,vua ob causas ( =r atque ob eaa causas, * and 
for these reasons *) pnecipuus ei honos est habitus, 
(b) Namque omnibus unus insulis pnefuit. In gttd ( = nam In eS) po- 
testate Pheras cepit, coloniamque Lacedsemoniorum. {Nep. iz. 1.) 

3. The relative in these propositions is equivalent to the unem- 
phatic is, ea, id, with et, autem, igitur ; or even nam, tamen, sed, 
vero. If the demonstrative pronoun required is the more strongly- 
demonstrative hie, iHe, or even if there would be any emphasis 
on * is,* the relative must not be used : nor if the conjunction 
would be emphatic, e. g. itaque, ergo, at, verum, nempe, nimu 
rum, &c. 

4. Whether is should be retained, or this'construction with the relative used, 

depends on various considerations. Thus in Gic. Gluent. 7 : Postremo 
imitf , qm erat reliquus Dmea fflxvus Cn. Magius est mortims, Js fstAX 
heredem ilium adolescentem Oppianicum. Here the *w' is retained 
because a ^t had so lately preceded. 

5. The connection by the relative is very often used, when 
there is a dependent or subordinate sentence, which is then placed 
immediately after the relative : hence this qui very often precedes 
a quum, postquam, ut, ubi. 



864 EZERCISB 1. 

6. Reddita Inclnwinun ex spduncft bourn vox Hercttlem convertit Quern 

qmen ▼adentem ad spelimcaiii Cacns vi prohibere conatUB esset, ictus 
davi fidem paatomm nequidquam invocans morte occubuiL {tA»,) 

7. When an English relative clause is followed by a subordi- 
nate clause containing a demonstrative, or has such a clause 
inserted in it, the relaHoe is, in Latin, placed in this subordmaie 
clause (which then stands first), and either *u* \s used in the 
other clause or (if the pronoun is in the same case in both 
clauses) the pronoun is omitted. 

8. An example or two will make this clear. 

(a) < A man (toftom I should have spoken to), (if I had seen Mm).' 
In Latin this would be : 
' A man (toAom if I had seen), (I should have spoken to).' 
(6) ' A man by toAot e treachery I should have been ruined, if I had not di»- 
covered U in time.' 
In Latin: 

< A man (tokoae treachery if I had not discovered in time), (I should have 

been ruined hy U),* 
(c) Thus instead of 

* Non yident id se cupere, ^uod (si adepti sunt id) fugiUvo alicui aut 
gladiatori concedi sitnecesse,' 
A Roman would have written i 

< Non vident id se cupere, (quod *i adepti sunt) fugitive alicui aut gladia- 

tori concedi sit necesse.' (Cic.) 

0. Hence never write qui, pium is, <&c., qui, quum ^us, &c.| 
qtd, quum ei, 6z;c. ; but qui, quum — ; cujus quum — / cid quum^ 
&c. So m^t qui, si ejus, 6zc., but cujus si, 6zc, 

Exercise 1. 

[See Pract Intr. Part I. 441.] 
Alexander died at Babylon, ^ a m an who, if his life had been 
a longer ^ one, would have subdued the whole world.* Alexan- 
der died at Babylon, o a m a n who, if a longer life had fallen-to- 
his-lot,** would have subdued the whole world. Alexander died 
at Babylon, ^a man who, if fate had kept* him alive <^for a 
longer o time, would have subdued the whole world. Alexander 
died at Babylon, a man who, unless fate had taken from him his 
life prematurely,* would have subdued the whole world.— His 
death was the ruin of* all his fellow-citizens,' by whom he 
was slain' because he wished to save them. I have very oilen 
read that there is no evil** in death, o for that if any sense remains 



ON RHETORICAL FIGURES. 265 

after it,i it ought to be considered immortality rather than death. 
The powerj of conscience is great, and those who neglect it, he* 
tray* themselves. Philosophy contains the doctrine> both of duty 
and of morality :" those ^therefore who profess it seem to me 
to support a very important character." King Eucratides reduced 
India under his dominion^^ but when he was returning thence,? 
was slain on his march by his son. 

* WoBLD should not be traiislate(r by mumdua except when the meaning is 
imcMTM. When the earth or its countries are meant, crbit ttme or terrarum 
should be used ; the latter especially when there is reference to different coun- 
tries, b Should you use contingU^ or aeddU 7 « reaenxire. d immature, 
^perdere. t dvis. t Ddd. inttrficere. h Part I. 161, Ob».y and 
end of 162. i ' in it' The verb in the next clause should be subj., it being 
the speech or sentiment of the person or persons from whom the narrator had 
heard the opinion. Pt. I. 460 {b), J vis. k indicare. Express 
both ip»e and auus, Pt I. 368. i disciplina. » Say, ' of living welL' 
« perwnam auatimsre. <> tn poteatatem redigere. P Use reL adverb.— m 



(On Rhetorical Figures.) 

1. Geminatio, or the doubling of an emphatic word, 
(a) CruXf crux inquam misero et aerumnoso parabatur. (C) 

2. Repetitio (inopa^ogi), when several clauses or members of 

a sentence begin with the same word. 

(a) Nihilne te noctumum presidium Palatii, nikil urbis vigiliflB, nihil timor 
populi, mhU consensus bonorum omnium, nUiUMc munitissimus habendl 
senatiis locus, nihil horum ora vultusque moverunti (C.) 

3. Conversio (antor^oyij), when several clauses or members of 

a sentence end with the same word. 

(a) Urbis vigiliae nihil te moverunt, timor populi nihil, consensus bonorum 
omniimi nihil, Ac. 

4. Complexio is when several clauses or members of a sentence 

both begin with the same word and end with the same word. 

(a) Quia legem tulit 1 RuUus. Quia majorem partem populi suflragiis pro- 
hibuit? RuUua. Quia comitiis praefult? RuUua. Quia decemviroa 
quos Toluit renuntiavit 7 RuUua. (C.) 

5. Traductio, when a word occurring in a clause, occurs again 

(intentionally and as an ornament) in one or more subsequent 

clauses. - 

i2 



266 ON BHETORICAL TlGUnSS. 

(a) Eum tu hominan appellafl^ qui si fuisset homo, ntmqiiam tarn crndeJiter 

▼itam hommis petisset. 
(&) Qui nihil habet in vUd jucuDdius vUd, is cum virtute vUam aon potest 

toUere. (C.) 

0. Polysyndeton (noXvtrvkdtrm^), the using many conjunctions, 
L e. one between each pair of words or notions. 

(a) Ei inimico proderaB| et amicom laedebaa, et tibi ipsi non conaulebafk (C.) 

7. Annominatio (nagoyofiaala) is the antithesis of words of 

nearly the same sound. 

a) — nt eum non facile non modo extra ttehan, sed ne extra Uetum quidem 
quiaquam videret. (C.) 

(b) Hanc reipublicas pestem non paulifiper reprimi, sed in perpetunm com- 
primivolo. (C.) 

(e) Ezpetenda magis est deeemmdi ratio, quam deceriandi fortuna. (C.) 

8. 'OfiowTtrmoPj when the members of a sentence are of par- 
allel construction, having the same cases, or the same persons of 
the same tense. When they end with the corresponding case or 
tense, it makes ofwioTsXevToy, — ^Both occur in tne following ex- 
ample : 

(a) Vicit pudorem libido, timorem audacia, rationem amentia. (C.) 

9. 'ItrowoXoy, when the clauses are very nearly of equal length, 
(a) Alii fortuna felicitatem dedit : huic indostria virtutem eomparavit. 

10. 'Jrrl^Btop (antithesis) requites this equality of length in the 

antithetical portions. 

{a) Est igitur heec, judices, non scrlpta sed nata lex ; quam non didicimus, 
acceplmus, legimus, verum ex naturft ipsft arripuimus, hausimus, expres- 
simus ; ad quam non docti, sed lacti, non iiabttti, sed institati somus ut, 
<&c. (C.) 

11. Commutatio (art^(iBrafio^) is when the antithesis consists in 

the conversion of a proposition. 

(a) Quia stultus es, eB, re taces ; non tamen quia tacee^ ei re stultus ea : si 
poema loquens pictura est, pictura tacitum poema debet esse. 

12. Regressio {htarodog) is when this kind of conversion is a 

conversion of a part only of a proposition. 

(a) Ut eloquentium juris peritissimus Crassus, juris peritorum eloqaentissi- 
mus Scaevola haberetur. (C.) 

13. Gradatio (xXiftai) is the mounting up as it were from one 
word to another, the preceding word being repeated. 

(a) Imperinm Grscise fuit penes Athenienses^ Atheniensittm potiti sunt 



BXERCISE 2. 267 

Spaniate; Spartiatas Buperavere Tfaebani; Thebanos BfacedOnea vice 
runt, qui imperium Orscie brfivi tempore aitUunzenint Aaiam bello sub- 
ac'tam. {AdHerennJ) 

. 14. ^Axwiwmitiuiq is the purposely breaking off the discourse, 

'and suppressing a statement one was about to make. 

(a) De nostro enim omnium— non audeo totum dicere. (C.) 

15. DissoIiUio (oirw^cToy), the omission of the copulative con- 
junction. 

(a) dui indicabantur, eos vocaii, custodiri, ad senatum adduei jiualt (C.) 

16. Correctio {sTrcofo^naig) is the correcting an expression pre- 
viously used. 

(a) Hie tamen vivit. Vivit? immo vero etiam in Senatum venit (C.) 

17. DuUtaUo is the purposely expressing a doubt ; under which 
Intentional forgetting and remembering may be reckoned. 

(a) Tuistud ausus es dicere, homo omnium mortalium— nam quo te digno 
moribustuisappellem nomine? (C.) (Heie is also ajDonopefif .) 

Exercise 2. {On Rhetorical Figures.) 

{Liiteris delector.) 

[Gbminatio.] Literature, literature alone, I say, delights* me, 
[Refbtitio.] Literature nourished me when a boy ; literature 
preserved me when a young man** from the infamy of lust : litera- 
ture assisted me when I was a man, in the administration" of the 
republic : literature will comfort the weakness of my old age.* 
[CoNVERSio.] Literature delights us with the most dignified* 
pleasure ; it delights us with the discovery ofwhat is new;' 
it delights us with the n^ost certain hope of immortality. [Coh* 
PLEXio.] Do you think him' a bad citizen, who is delighted with 
literature ? who is delighted with the discovery of truth ? who is 
delighted with the diffusion of learning ? [Tradttctio.] What 
do you mean? Are you' delighted with literature, who hate 
'^ w h a t is the foundation (pi.) of o all literature ? [Polysyn- 
deton.] Literature both instructs, and delights, and adorns, and 
consoles. ['Ofioimnenor, oiAOioriltvtw,'] Do you think it possible, 
that one who is devoted to the pursuit of literature, should be 
bound by the chains of lust ? ['Jbnl&nw.'] Do you, who say 
that you are delighted with literature, allow yourself to be en- 



SMI8 BxsRCiss 3. 

tangled by pleasure? [*AytifiSjafiolii.] I do not cultivate 
literature because I am delighted with it, but am delighted with 
it because I cultivate it. [Gsadatic] The pursuit of literature 
has acquired for me learning : learning ^has acquired ibr 
me glory : glory °has drawn upon me envy and malevolent 
depreciation. [Afosiopesis.] What? do you: do you charge 
me' with this, <> a m a n who have never in my life pursued? any 

thing but virtue and learning ? — ^What you have pursued ; 

but I am silenty lest I should seem to have brought against 
you a railing.accusation> [liavpdnw.] What shall I say 
about the use of literature ? it instructs, adorns, delights, ^ and 
comforts o a m a n . [Corrbctio.] Literature delights me : why 
do I say delights ? nay,i it comforts me, and affords me my only 
refuge fronu these annoyances of my laborious life ! [Dusitatic] 
Literature instructs, or delights, or comforts me ; for which of 
these words I should use rather than the others, I do not know. 

» obUdare, Omvp. Dod. obUdatio. b D5d. pwr, « 359. ^ Dod. 

vetuB (2). • honetHttimtu. t * of new things.' Should < things * be ex- 

pressed? C. 5. V expeUre, 483, (2). h oorarieUan facere. * ^tm 

fwro. . ) * amongst.' 

Exercise 3. 

Pausanias tells ^ us in his b o o k o n A 1 1 i c a ^, that the Athenians, 
having been praised* by Pindar in one of his Odes', set 
80 high a value* upon the testimony of that* great and sublime 
poet, that they not only' sent him many presents in return* foi 
it, but also raised"* a statue^ to his honour'^ at Athens. No 
wonder*, that in those times there were many great poets, when"* 
those who were endowed with the poetic faculty" both re- 
ceived • the most magnificent presents, and were rewarded* with 
the most splendid honours. 

• AUica, Oram. b « because (I. 516) they had been praised.* Since this 

clause is here qtioted from Pausanias, in what mood should the verb stand 1 
Why 7 (I. 460, a.) « * in a certain ode ' (carmen). When * a certain * means 

apariieular one that we do not, however, think it necessary to name, it should 
be translated by guidam. When certus is so used, it implies that one hxu good 
rcoBone for not being more explicit : Quotiea ego eum et qtwnio cum doUtre vidi 
inaolenHam ceriorum hominum — extimetcentcm (Cic. Marc. 6.) A practical 
rule may be, not to use certua, unless the meaning is, *a certain oney-^ou knoa 
pretty wdL whkh (or wfwm) I mean * d < To set a high value on,* mugni fa 



IXERCISES 4, 5. 269 

cere. Adapt this phrase to mean, * bo 'high a value J •Which pronouo 

should be used for the ' that ' of celebrity 7 (I. 381, b.) t Not onlyr-iut also : 

here simply, et—et (both — and). t ob. h To place or erect (a statue), 

simulacrum or statuam ponere, hearty statuerCy or (iVep.) eonstituere. i What 

words express whole-lengtk sculptured images 7 With what distinction 7 (Dod. 
imago.) k ( to him.' i This imperfect sentence must be completed ; 

* it is not therefore wonderful :* for *that* use %* «. » * When.* Does 
the * when * da more than rimply dale the time 7 (See 1. 489.) > edfaeuUaU, 

• received— and were rewarded. Of two connected verbs having the same nom- 
inative c€ise, it is better, as a general rule, that they should both be in the same 
voice. Alter this accordingly, by turning reeeioed into the passive voice : this 
must be done by choosing such a phrase as *tobe loaded^ presentedj &c., with 
gifts.' ^hoTwribus maetarK {Cic.) On the derivation of tills word see 
Part I. p. 103. (278, a) and note 'K 

Exercise 4. 

To destroy** the credit" of Socrates's speech, and cause the 
judges to listen to it with suspicion, ^his ||accusers« had 
warned them beforehand^ to be on their guard,* ^ telling' them 
that he was very powerful* in speaking, and possessed such** 
ability* and dexterity, that he could make the worse cause ° appeal 
the better. 

» To destroy the credit of any thing ; prevent it from being believed ; alicuif 
OTalicuirei, Jidem derogare or abrogare. b < render it suspected to the 

judges.' « Obs. When an English sentence begins with a secondary clause, 

and a word which occurs in the principal clause occurs also in this, it is better to 
begin with such a portion of the principal clause as will contain this word, and 
then use a pronoun for it in the secondary clause. Thus, instead of *Socr a ' 
tes*a speechy' — ^hisaccusers,^ let ithe: * the accusers of Soar at es^' and — *hi9 
speech ;' placing ' the accusers of Socrates ' first. d To warn beforehand, yr«- 
n^M&re. (I. 75.) • To be on one's guard, aUn cavsre, t (1. 460, c, 1.) 

Express a *for,* e Tole very powerful^ plurimum posse. h Such, i#, 

00, id: repeat it before < dexterity,' calliditas. i vis. 

Exercise 5. 

[(p) prefixed means that the verb is to be turned into a participle : (r) after a 
word, that the rel. pronoun is to be used.] 

Periboea, or Phylonome,* as others call her, beingrejected 
withdisdain,^ accused** Tennes to<* his father, in exactly* the 
same manner as Phaedra ^ accused Hippolytus. The credulous 
father (p) shut up his son in' a chest, ® and cast him into the sea. 
Neptune ||came tothe assistance* of his innocent grand, 
son; and the chest floated>> to the island of i Leucophrys. When 



270 BXERCISES 6, 7. 

the inhabitants of the island opened^ it (r), and learned w h a t h a d 
happened,! they not only ofiered Tennes the throne, « but even 
named the island Tenedos after him." Nay, they even* wor- 
shipped him as a god oafterhis(p) death. 

* Sinoo it ia left doUMfkU which was her right name, what word should be 
naed^lor *cr ? * (Pt. I. p. 161, note a.) b • being/ejected and refused.' Taka 
the word lor ^rfjuu^ that meana to refuse a p/ea«ure, whether a «mftt2 one or 
not. Dod. ntgare (end). • Which is the best word for to accuse hiaefyl 
(1. 201.) d apyd. • plane, C. 9. f inchtdei^ imfib^ng to pui inia, 
and there shut np, of t«n takes the ace with in: but also the aU. AnUnUut or- 
vuOotin celld Ccim»rdiaindti9U.'~-]3tmeiiratumem in epittolam inclnsi: 
inektdere aKqwm in cut to diaa. (Clc.) tferreopem, h defcrri {Bd), 
i I. 140. J I. 489. k Dod. aperire. i rea. » To offer any body 
the throne, dsferre regnum alicui. » * from (dc) his own name.* • Nay 
—eyen: quinet. 

Exercise 6. 

When* Ulysses, according to fabulous history ^^ might have lived* 
"with** Calypso* in all [possible] luxury, he yet preferred^ even 
to immortality that«f rough and rocky country [of his] : (p) which 
he would [surely] not have done,^ if he had approved-of» that 
opinionis of Teucer's, [that] * every man'sJ country is" wherever 

* Not, qimm Uh/aaesj but tHysseSy quum^ Ac. I. 489. b «a8 it is in the 
fables.' 6 1. 128, 130. d apud, « < Feminines in o (as echo, 
CkdypaOj DidOy Sappho) have generally the Greek gen. in Ha (edixtaj Didttaf Sap- 
p^iw), tho Latin gen. onia being less common. The dat. and ace. end in o, oi 
in tmi, onem respectively.' {Zumpt) Samahom adds, that Cesar preferred the 
regular Latin declension, ont*, ont, onem^ one. 1 1. 227. s I. 381 (&). 

• mm itafactiarua. 1 1. 441. k Dod. aenierUia, i quiaqiu, 
«L460(a). BL460(6). •'I vm well oS,' beiue^ mifU. 

Exercise 7. 

Xenophon has given us a very* sound^ opinion® of Gobryas's, 
and [one] which every day's* experience* confirms,' namely,* 

* that it is more difficult tofind^ men who [bear] prosperity [well], 
than [men] who bear adversity well.' For in prosperity a great 
manyi men grow insolent,*' and are puffed up [with pride] : but 
in adversity all are recalled to temperance and moderation. 

* AdmSdum (ad-modum, *to a degree') is *very* with adjectives, partidplei^ 
uid adverbs. i» grama (weighty). « D(jd« aenUnHa, d A(y. ftio> 



szESCisss 8^ 0. 271 

t; but seethe next note. * Experitniia in the best prose writers ii 

trial : * knowledge gained by experience ' is unu, or usub renan ; re» ; Umpua, 
&c. [in Tac. also exptrientia,] Hence expcrUnUa docetf and the like, should not 
be used, but tempua or rerum uauM docet. With rerum tiaua the adj. quoHdianiu 
riiould be left out. [Va&lhsLa^apilniB quanta axp^rientia pardaj Geor. 
I. 4.] f * declares to be true.' tyOeUcet as the second word, 

k DifiT. 93. Dod. vwenire. i Ddd. pUrique. k JjuoUaeerc was used by 

SaUost (after the old Cato), and was followed by Tacitus and Justin : it is better, 
however, to use inaoUntemJieri ; seinaolenUr eferre oxgtrere^ Ac (Erebs.) 

Exercise 8. 

{On the Tkeogony of Hesiod,) 

Of all* the remains* of Greek literature that are now extant,* 
none in my opinion** is more remarkable than the Theogony* of 
Hesiod. For although || this^ poem cannot* be compared to the 
works of Homer and other famous poets in size, or in the magnifi- 
cence of its subject,** and of ila particular portions y^ or in the var 
riety and beauty of its diction, yet it has another recommendation, 
and that* [one] peculiar [to itself], [so] that on this groundi it 
appears even to deserve the preference"^ over those poems." 

b *AU-^which* is expressed strongly by using quotquoit instead of the simple 
relative. (For * of' seel. 165, h.) b monvmenia, « superesat: *now,* 

hMlit, d D5d. aerUeniia, • Theogonia. t Relative pron. t Omit 

* not :' using neqat—ruqut with the ablatives. h cargumemiupn, i rta^ pi. 

k I. 385. I cauaa, ™ * to be to-be-preferred.' part, in duB, ^ Greek 

neuter plurals in a make dat. and abl. in iff, not ibua. poemata, poematum, pee* 
matis (not poemaHbtu), 

Exercise 9. 

That* ancient philosopher, whom Hesiod followed, said that first 
of all Chaos existed : by*' which he meant, not, as very many« 
subsequent"* [authors], a rude and undigested mass* of matter, but 
[according] to the proper meaning' of the word, * space ' in which 
no matter is contained.^ For he says that *mattee' was not 
created till cfterwards* To Chaos he added a connective** power, 
because without such a power » matter would have lain inactive, 
and nothing) would have been created. 

» I. 381, b. b In this idiom the ace. is used hi Latin. Thus ; < whom do 

you understand (or mean) by a wise man 7' quern tu intelKgie (or intdligi vis) 
aapimtem? * Dod. plerique, d Simply poifca. '(See the first 

Uno8 of Ovid's Metamorphoses.) r wign^oaHo, '< which is empty 



272 EXBBcms 10^ 11. 



(Meimt) of afl matter.' h eopiilalKr, idt. i Where we fepeaC Hie 

■ubttanciTO in this way, the Romanfl (being richer in demonstratiye pronomiff 
than we aroi and able to give them more prominence) generally used a pronooo 
only. So also when we uee another substantiye with ' euehf* or a demonstrativ« 
pronoun, in reference to a preceding substantiye. Thus if * thie prince ' werf 
used in reference to * Alexander* wliich had been mentioned in a preceding 
sentence, it would be better to leave the word *pnnee* untranslated, and say 
'ftprke,' l*nor any thing.' What word for any (thing)? Pt. I. f 60 

p. 137. 

Exercise 10. 

1. With« the ancient philosophers it is an intricate^ and per- 
plexed« inquiry, whether the soul remains'* (p) when it is freed 
from the chains of the body, or whether the death of our bodies is 
also the death of our souls.* Epicurus thinks that our souls perish, 
deeming it wrong' that, having so many points of agreement with 
swine,* he should differ from them in this single respect,^ 

2. The Stoics allow i to them a long life, as [they do also] to 
crows, but not an eternal J one. But Pythagoras is indeed a 
pleasant [personage], for he teaches, that they remain indeed 
[alive], but migrate from [their own] bodies into others, so that 
he' may perchance^ be a cock to-day, who in the time of the 
Trojan war was» Agamemnon. 

1. * Apud. h perturbatuM. ^ impUcatua. ^permarare, ** whether 
[that] which [is the death] of [our] bodies is also (1. 387) the death of [our] souls.' 
f Tufae, s ' since (quunij I. 469) so many things agree to him (I. 370) with 
swine.' i> * by this one thing.' 

2. ' irUmere, J Dod. continuua. k p^nie is * aecidentaUy* except after 
si, nieit nam, n2, ecqwd^ where it is the regular word for * perthcmce,* Here use 
fortaeee. i *had been.' 

Exercise 11. 

1. I am well again !» I know for a certainty,* that I could 
not find« a beginning* for my letter [that would be] more agreeable 
to you II than this, or one that you would more desire to receive.* 
[My disease] was a tertian fever, like that which^ you cured for 
me9 three years ago*> at Ferrara :*» except that» this was [of] a 
milder J [character.] 

2. Accordingly it left me^ on the eighth day after my seizure.^ 
I was cured not only by medicine," but also by bleeding," by* the 
advice of my [friend] Angelus Justinianus, who not only pro* 



BXEBGTSE 12. 273 

scribed p for me himself, but also made up* a great part of the 
medicines with his own hand. 

1 . * CorwdUaeere, By what tense should * lam well ' be translated 1 b < cer- 
tainly.' Both certe ado and ctrto ado occur. The difference is thus g^ven by 
Hand: certe aeio means, * U i» certain thatlknow^.certo sciOf * I have a 
certain knowledge qf the ffUng staled.' Which should be used here 7 « Dod. 
invenire. dprincipium. * more wished {optalitut) by you.' f quaUs* 
»f ' drove away from me,*febrim abigere^ discutere. h Ferraria, i nin 
quod, J * Mild/ mitia et remiaaUB. 

2. k < A fever leaves anybody,' decedU. (C): ab aliquo diacedU. Krebs warns 
against reliquU or deaeruU qtum, Doletus quotes afebre relingui from Cic. ad 
Att., but I cannot find the passage, i 'After it had seized me,' corripere. (Pt. 
I. p. 114, 310,^ note ".) » medicanuntai pi. » miaaio aanguinia. <> de, 
P * To prescribe * (of a physician), remedial medicamenla, Ac, prteacribere, prcB" 
cvpere ( Cela.) ; prcMcriberej or morbo proponere (Nep.). i Muretus uses conficere 
ac eoneinnare {of which the latter is not found in Cicero) ; better parare (Cic). 
Columella has componerey Curtius in poculo diluerej which of course expresse? 
only a particular kind oC preparation.* 

Exercise 12. 

1. When it was the general opinion,^ that a brave man should^ 
die by his own hands* rather than endure** any* great and bitter 
evil, Aristotle wisely perceived that the opinion *■ was false ; [and] 
asserted,* that they who acted thus, far from being considered 
brave, should be looked-upon^ as cowards,* and men of a mean and 
abject spirit. 

2. For such men prove J that they are not able to endure what 

they fly from, and are too weak to support the calamity,^ on account 

of which they give up their lives. Nowi this argues effeminacy," 

rather than any greatness of soul. 

1. * *it was commonly (vulgo) believed.' b I. 191. c < To die by one's 
own hands,' neoem or mortem aibi consciacerej mortem oi vim ailn inferre; manna 
aibi afferrej &c.f dj)'6d.ferre: choose the verb that means * to endure 

heroically.' ' • I. 392. f * that that opinion of men.' s pronurdiare* 
h *were not only riot [to-be-considered] brave, but [were] to-be-considered 
cowards,' &c. H^ Non modo is sometimes used for non modo now, but only 



• Scribon. Larg. has temperare. 

t ^^ aeinterjicere, ae occidercy are generally rejected ; but they do occur, though 
less commonly, (1) aeipaum interficere (Sulpicius in Cic. Epp. Fam. 4, 12, 
2) : Craaaum auapte manu irUtrfectum, Cic. Or. 3, 3, 10 ; and Liv. 31, 18, 7, sa 
qui ipsi i n t e r f i c i u n t. (2) duintil. (5, 10, 69) quotes from a lost oration 
of Cicero's, cum ipae aeae conarelur oceidere, {Kreba.) 

12* 



274 EXEBCISBS 13, 14. 

when the following clause is negative, or equivalent to a negative, and botk 
clauses have a common verb expressed in the second. Thus 

Not only not but not even ; or, but scarcely. 

nonmodo— — — 5 •» nii guaaemi 

^ IstdHs. 

Should the *nol' be Inserted or omitted here? i ignartu. (Dod. p. 234, 4.> 

2. ) dodre. This passage in the original is given as a statement by the writer 
and therefore in the indicative. It will be a useful exercise to translate it botk 
ways : i. e. first as the writer's opinion, and then as AriMtotU^M view atated bjf 
th& wriUtt and therefore in orat. obliq. (See I. 460.) k < and not (neque) 

equal to bearing that calamity,' &c. Should wp§al be translated by oBquuB^ 
cBqiiali»t or par ? (D5d. €equu§.) i atUcm. " *an efieminate weakness 

tmoUUia) of aovl,* 

Exercise 13. 

It is an acknowledged fact, that || Cicero in his Orations bor- 
rowed much from the Greek orators : and that, besides beings an 
eager^ and diligent imitator of the artifices/ which he perceived** 
them to have employed* for' moving* and governing the minds 
of their hearers, he not seldom transferred whole enthymemes"* 
of theirs to his own orations. 

» * and not {neque) only was— but also introduced.' b acer. « sing, 

d t. e. not of axiy partiadar artifice or artifices, but indefinitely^ such as 
he observed in them. What mood should be used 1 I. 475, 476. • vH. 

(in* 9 versari. ^ enJOvymema^ atie. 

Exercise 14. 

1. Oh [this] sad and bitter* news about the Eong of Navarre!*" 
We had indeed heard it (r) here from others ; but« nevertheless 
were supported by some hope, till your letters arrived.* I (p) re- 
ceived both of them yesterday evening," and con^municated [their 
contents] to all our [friends] : nor was there one amongst them,' 
who did not declare it as his firm belief ' that, when you' wrote in 
such language,^ the recovery* of this excellent and religious prince 
must be J quite given up as hopeless.^ 

2. I fear that in a few days we shall feel to our sorrow^ what a 
blow [both] France and the cause of religion"* have received by 
the death of this (r) [prince]. Behold, what fruits f are born» by 
civil wars ! Miserable France wanted but this one'' [qfflictionly to 
see^* those old Theban calamities renewed in her own blood ! 

I. •» sad' and bitter" to us.' (See p. 237, 20.) y> Navarro. « 'which 



EXKBCisss 15, 16. 275 

alf&oughi Ac— yet.' d 'To arrive' (of a letter), aferri^ it being always 

Wought to the receiver.—* Till' What mood 1 1. 507, 506. • AeH vetperi 

(yesterday in the etening>. f * any (single one) of them.' I. 389, 390, 391 

r ( To declare one's conviction ' (or firm belief), atatiure often with sic or ikL 

EgoauiemamctUlddtibiiationetie aiatuo et judico^nemiritni habuxaMf 

&c. (Cic. de Or. 2, 28. 122 ; niai hoc ita atatuiaae ay-^t--facturum,) h ita. 
1 aalua. 3 * that it could not be but that (Diff. 20.) the recovery, &c.' 

k ( To give a thing up as lost or hopeless,' deplorart quid, — the e f f e c t {yoeeijping) 
for the c a u s e (a perauaaion ihaJt fht thing ia hopdeaa &c,). But this use, though 
found in Ovid, Livy, «&c., does not occur in Cicero or Caesar. Perhaps it is bet- 
ter therefore to use deaperare, deaperatur qmd or (seld. in Cic.) de aUqud re. 

2. 1 * with our great evil.' ■» * how great a blow Prance, how great [a 

blow] religion, Ac, has received.' » Active yoice.—firuciua parh-e. ' • * This 
one thing remained to — France,' Ac. 

Exercise 15. 

It is said by the ancient* poets, that there are in the ocean cer- 
tain^ islands, to which the souls of those who have led a holy and 
religious life"^ are borne after their death : that there they dwell 
together** most delightfully and pleasantly, in a* most beautiful' 
meadow, which is enamelled* with perpetual flowers : that the sun 
is ever bright** in that happy region,i the trees green, the flowers 
and herbs in bloom : that [there all nature 3] smiles, and the gentlest 
zephyrs perpetually breathe, by whose fanning^ the leaves of the 
trees (p) are softly stirred, » and delight"" the ear with the softest 
[possible] murmur. 

'^ Dijd. antiguua. The distinction at the bottom of the page (in D(jd.) should 
be translated thus : * Antiqui acriptorea means the classics, inasmuch as the age 
in which they flourished has long been past ; veUrea, inasmuch as they have 
lived and influenced mankind for 2000 years.' b < Certain :' (Ex. 3, c.) 

c aancte rdigioaeque vivere. Remember that this whole passage is a statement 
gathered from the poets : it is their doctrine, not the writer's. I. 460. 
•i inter ae. • I. 393. . f What is the proper word for beautiful^ as ap- 

plied to objects that please the sight? [I. 212, note v.] s diatinguere. 

properly to relieve a surface by ornaments placed upon diiferent parts of it. 
^nitet diffvMluminecoBlum, (Lucr.) i* there.' J * all [things].' 

^JlabeUOi'^h ^ventUare. Ut cum purpureaa ventilat aura comaa, 

(Ovid.) Obs. The words and general character of this passage do not always 
belong to aoberproae; but as it is a representation of poetical descriptions, this 
is perhaps permissible here. » blandiri. V7hat case 1 

Exercise 16. 
1. Ancient authors are not agreed*" upon the reasons^ why thia 



276 EZBBCISE 17. 

or that animal was sacrificed to this or that god. For some assert* 
that the favourite animal of each god was slain* before his altars ; 
and thus the horse was the victim offered to Mars. And [on the 
other hand] U was not lawful to offer a mid hoar to Venus,^ % be- 
cause that animal*) had killed Adonis. 

2. Others [however] held* that a god was best pleased with the 
blood of the animal, j: which he*' hated : that thus a cock' was 
sacrificed to Night, because that bird seemss to be calling forth 
the day by its song, [and] driving away the night : [and] a goat to 
Pallas, ^because [that animal] ir^icts great injury upon^ the olive- 
tree. 

1. ^* We are not agreed,' non satis convenit Inter nos (de aHqu& re). See Ex. 
15, note a.) b < To assert ' is n o t aaaerere, • * that the [animal] which 
Wd» most acceptable (graiua) to each was wont to be slain,' Ac. Relat. clause 
to precede. I. 31. d «and because a wild-boar had, Ac.—*- it was not- 
lawful {rufaa), that sacrifice should be made {rem dimnam Jiert) to Venus with 
a wild-boar.' 

2. * * thought,' puiare. f gaUua gaUinaceuf. ' The verbs 9eemm — 
injticta express the reasons alleged by the holders of the opinion. Will this cir- 
cumstance have any effect on the mood 1 If so, why 7 h insigniier Usder% 
(Cic. hs^insig niter diUgere.) 

Exercise 17, 

If nothing^ is sacred and religious, but what is without orna- 
ment, let gold be removed' from our temples ; let jewels, images,' 
and* pictures be removed, and, in a word, votive-offerings of everji 
kind. But if it is an impiety even to entertain such a thought a^ 
this,^ let us confess what common-sense? itself in a (393) manner 
teaches [us], that wealth is not* better employed in any things than 
in the worship of Grod, nor eloquences better** than in refining i 
and beautifying philosophy. 

» D6d. imago. Choose the word that means * any plastic work : in opposi- 
tion to tabuUBf pidurce (pictures). b Use the fig. asyndeton. * in a word,* 
deniqtie; * votive-offerings,* donaria. {Liv.) ^ * this is impious (n«/ortt«) 
oven to be thought.' Cogitare^ which " denotes the usual activity of the mind, 
/which cannot exist without thinking or employing itself about something," ia 
here the best word for a thought entering the head. d ratio. * neque 
— neque. t * any where.' Usquam follows the same rule as lUltts, i. e. 
stands in negative and virtually negative sentences : alicubiand uspiam answer 
respectively to aUquis and quispiam ; ubivia to (liUTw, quUibet. B dkmdi 
copia, b preedaHue. i exootert: 



EXEBCISES 18, 19. 377 

Exercise 18. 

i. 1 should never have thought it 'pdssihle^ that I could derive 
pleasure,^ I wiU not say^ from your' grief, but from any* [man's]. 
And yet if the truth* mu«t be spoken, I am obliged' to ccxifess, 
that it was most gratifying* to me to leam>» from your letter, that 
you were exceedingly » grieved, as soon as J the news of my 
illness'' reached* you." 

2. For that grief could not arise from any other source," than 
from your great* affection for me ; and from [the time] that I first 
saw you, and heard from^^ very many others how distinguished 
you were for learning and virtue, ^ I have had no fonder wish^ 
than to be loved') by"^ you. 

1. * * that it would oe * (that I could derive, Ac.) b • To derive or receive 
pleasure, pain, &c., from any thing,' capere voluptatem, dolorem, Ac, ex aliquS 
re. e nonmodo. d I. 389-391. • *the truth' must be trans- 
lated by vera (* true things '), whenever the meaning is, *tDhat ia truc^ Hrui 
things,* If a single thing is meant, the sing, vertan may be used. Veritas is 
* truth,' as an abstract notion. t neceeee est. I. 604 (1) : take the second 
form. e graiisairmis, h < that (quod) I learnt.' inteSigere, the notion 
heingfOf* being made aware,* i vthemeiUer, ' ) I. 612. ^ valetudo 
(' state of health ') or infirma valetudo, Cic. has two or three times invalUudOf 
but the reading is mostly doubtful. i qfferri: allatum esse. » * to 
where you are,' isiuc. I. "387. 

2. a «from elsewhere,' aliunde. « eximius. P *a man of what erudi- 
tion and virtue you' were.' <i * nothing has been more desirable (pptabUius) 
to me.' f I. 348. 

Exercise 19. 

1. Socrates, in the*) dialogue which is entitled* ' the first Alci- 
biades,^ employed || a witty*' and refined* artifice to check^) the 
presumption* of Alcibiades. For whereas* the young man per. 
suaded himself, with the characteristic self-confidence of Ids age,* 
that he was already abundantly furnished with all the knowledge 
that a statesman required,' Socrates (p) accosted him courteously, 
and hy proceeding from one question to another,^ made it plain 
from his own answers,^ that he had as yet obtained! no knowledge* 
of justice and injustice. i 

2. And when Alcibiades took it impatiently, and was indignant 
as considering^ himself to be reproached with ignorance,* Socrates 
defended himself [from the charge], and asserted^) that he' was 



278 XZBECLSB 20 

not saying any thing whatever" of that sort against him, [but] that 
it was Alcibiades himself, who was making the confession" about 
himself. 

1. * intertU. b urbanu9t which denotes refined and polished wit. 

• eUgana, Cicero speaks of an elegant joeandi genue: *to check,' reprS- 
mere. 4 Dod. mperbia, • quvm, I. 489. f 'wliich is wont to be 

the character {vngenium) of tliat age.' What is the word for age zs *time of 
l(fe?* t <with all those things which had reference (perHrare) to govern- 

ing the state.' ' To goverrif* admxnigtrare^ of a statesman managing it under a 
sovereign power. ^ * by questioning step-by-step ' {jHsulatim), Ctuintilian 

Has paulatim et(vJtdicUur) pedetentim interrogare, i 'brought 

him to that point, that it was plainly established by his own answers.' * To 
bring any body to that point,' aliquem eo perdueerej ui, &c. * To be plainly es- 
tablished/ aperte efflci {ex). } Dod. irwemre, k Dod. cognUio. 
1 juatum^ tnjushtm : not the abstract j u s t i t i a , but that which is actually ^ic^l 
or unjuat in practice. 

2. m ( because — ^he thought.' (On the mood after quod, see 1. 618.) 

» *not — any thing whatever,' nihil prorstis, • If\Ueri, Translate *d^ 

fended,* 'aeaerted,^ by the historieal present. I. 414. 

Exercise 20. 

1. How highly the Athenians valued* || the poems of Homers 
and how useful they judged them to be for inflaming*' [men's] 
minds with a love of honour'') and worth, ^ may be perceived* from 
their having passed'' a law, that** every* fifth year, at^ the Pana- 
thenaic festival, the poems of Homer, and of none hut Homer,s 
should be publicly recited. 

2. For their opinion wdSy^ that laws do indeed enjoin* what is 
to be done and [what] avoided, but that from their [necessary] 
brevity, they do not teach [this knowledge] ; but that the poets, 
w^ho, imitating human life, give a copious narrative J of brave and 
noble actions, and almost'' place them before [men's] eyes, are 
letter calculated^ to persuade [us to imitation]. 

1. * To value highly, magnifacere. How must this be modified to express 
how highly V b dignitaa ( = worth, virtue) as in Cic. volwptatem concea- 

suram dignitatij &c. « exiaUmare, d I. 75. • I. p. 139, note 

d. f Express the preposition * in.* The Panathenaic festival, PanaOie* 

naica (sc. solemnia). Varr. ff * of him alone out of the whole number of 

poets.' 

2. h * thus they thought.' i DSd. jubire. \ copioae exponere, * piv 
Qomodum. 1 aptior (ad aliquid faciendum). 



BXEBCISES 21, 22. 279 

Exercise 21. 

1. The Lacedeemonians paid Br similar honour^ to TyrtSBus. 
For though in general*' they were indisposed* to poetic studies, and 
not^ fond« of listening to the strains of poets, they nevertheless had 
passed a law,^ that whenever' an army [of theirs] was drawn up 
for a general engagements^ the soldiers should be summoned to the 
royal tent, and there * inspired with a contempt* of death in their 
country^ s cause, ) :j: by listening to the poems of Tyrtaeus. 

2. To -^chylus, too, nearly the same honour was paid* by the 
Athenian people ; for it was enacted by a public decree that even 
afcer his (p) death Ms plays should he * acted, a privilege which 
was granted to no other tragic poet.^ 

1. » *To pay an honour to any body,* fumorem alicui habere, tribuere; honors 
. ttUqutm qfficere : not honorem alicui exhibere. ^ cderoqui (ss * in other 

respects,' *with this exception*). « alienuSf I. p. 77, note y. d neqw, 

• Diff. 111. Idiom given for 'don*i Wee to,* Ac. f <had appointed by 

law,* lege conttUuere, 8 * as often as,* quoties, h cum hoatibuM 

dimlcalvrua in proemdu constUisset, i Participle. Should you 

use spemere, contemneref oi despicere? (V. M. 5.) ) *fbr (pro) their 

sountry.* 

2. k (the plays) * of [him] alone out of all the tragic poets—should be 
•acted,* 

Exercise 22. 

(Dreams.) 
'We sleep through whole nights,* and there is hardly any'* 
[night] in which* we do not dream : and do we [yet] wonder, that 
what we have dreamed sometimes* comes true V^ These are the 
words II of a philosopher (p) who is discussing* the unreality^ of 
dreams, and asserting'^ that [even] if some' dreams f are confirmed* 
by the event, it does not follow** from this, that dreams are not to be 
looked uponi as [mere dreams]. For out of J such* a number and 
variety [of them], it would be more wonderful if nothing ever' 
came true** of what we ^see when we are asleep,"^ 

* I. 302. b I. 477. « I. 402. d * to come true,' evadere, ox 

afenire, both Cic. • exagUare, to discuss a thing repeatedly ; to wyrk a 

point. f vanUat. s comprobare. h to follow from any thing, ex aliqud 
re ^ffici followed by ut : here by lU ne : Pt. I. p. 38, note). i haberU » ini 
with abl. k C. 10. 1 1. 402. • » perquUtem. 



280 SXBRCisBS 23, 24. 

Exercise 23. 
{Semiramis.) 

1. Semiraniis is said to ha,\e gained a throne^ from^ a very low 
rank [oflife] by an exceedingly || ingenious<> and clever plan. She 
had by degrees* obtained such ii^uence over ^king NinuSy' that 
nothing was so great that Semiramis would not dare to ask? 
it (r) of the king, or that the king would venture to refuse her, (p) 
if she did ask it. 

2. And so, having once^ thrown outi (358) in conversation, 
that there was*^ something which she desired very much, and 
the king having told ) her to namei" it openly and fearlessly, 
J whateveri it might be, * I should wish you,* she said, * to f grant™ 
me this [favour,] that I might (128) sit on"^ your throne and ad^ 
minister justice'' for but**^ a single® day: and that, for the whole 
of that day, all should obey me [just'] as they do you.'Tf 

1. * * To gain a throne,* ad regnum pervenire. h ex. « humUu 
et abjeetuB. ^ D5d. astutue. ^ ' Dod. pautatim, t < had 
■o bound {agiringere) king Ninus to herself.' e pettrt, (See 1.252, 
Remarjc.) 

2, i^ aliquando, Unjicere. JJu6«rc, I. 76. kprofiteri. 
I guictpdd tandem. ^tribuere. ^ jut dicer e. ^unue. P 'as 
(quemadmodum) they do to you, so (tto) they should obey me.* 

Exercise 24. 

(Semiramis continued,) 
The king laughed, and granted [her] what she f requested. 
Immediately it is proclaimed, that on an (393) appointed* day, all 
men should obey the commands^ of Semiramis : that such was the 
king's pleasure ;* that she for that day f was placed over^ them all 
with sovereign authority and power. When (512) the*®> day ar- 
rived, the queen sat on*'> the throne in royal pomp.' Vast crowds 
assemblef^ [before her.] She at first, by way of experiment^ issue* 
some commands of no great importance,^ 

* Certtu. * dido audientem esse, with dat. of person. * * that so 

U pleased the king.* dpreeesse. * imperium, f cuttu*, im- 

plying more than apparel only ; all the attendant circumstances of a king* a 
idtting in state. ' * A very great concourse (concurstu) takes place.' 

oxperUndi eautd, i * commands some things {ace,) of no U) g:reaf 

momfint. 



EXSBGiSBS 25j 26, 27. 281 

Exercise 25. 

{Semiramis continued,) 

When' she saw that all men obeyed her in earnest,'' whatever 
she commanded,'' she orders the royal hody-guard^ to arrest* (75) 
the king himself: they arrest him. To bind him [in chains] : 
he is bound. To |m< him to death ;' he is put to death. In this 
manner^ her reign of a day is made perpetual.^ This is [the 
queen] who surrounded Babylon with walls of brick, » and whose 
famous) hanging^ gardens were the objects of such admiraiionJ 

» 'When^ s= <as soon as* (512). What tenseand mood? (514.) b aerio. 

« < in all things.' With respect to the place of * a22,* see p. 242, 39, which should 
lay down the rule as generaly not as confined to mbstantioes only. d sateUitea 
ac atipatores regU corporis, (Cic. Rull. 2. 13, 32, h&ai a tip at or ea corporia 
constUuU eoadcm minisiroa et aattllitea poteatatia,) * comprehendere. 

t interjicere. s ita. b ^from^) [that] of-a-day (diumua) becomes a 

lasting [one].' Lasting, diutumua : there is a sort of pUy on the similarity of 
sound in ditamua and diutumuM, This is caUed Paronomaaia, see above, p. 
264. So non magia amort quam more^ (C. Nep.); in ore atqiu amore^ 
(Cic), <&c.* I of brick, latericiua, 1 1. 381. k pentilia, 

1 *had such admiration.' C. 10. 

Exercise 26. 

Cicero, an extremely* good judge^ of eloquence, * thought so 
highly II of Plato, that he said Jupiter himself, if he wished to 
speak * Greek, would use no* language but"> that'^^ of Plato. 
And then'* Aristotle ! did he not* both lay down* the rules' of 
eloquence better than any other man,s and possess such eloquence^ 
himself, that the same Cicero called him a river flowing with 
gold? 

* in primia, b existimator. « non alius, d Nonne is, 

of course, the regular interrogative particle here: but <kox is often used 
without ne in yehement questions— especially questions of appeal' 
" tradere, f prtsceptum, f unua omnium optime. h * of such (C 

10.) eloquence.' 

Exercise 27. 

1. Philosophy heals these and similar diseases, and produces* 
in her [followers] such*' a firmness of mind, as* neither^ the 
allurements of pleasure (jpZ.), nor the fires* of pain (piy^ nor the 



Z9Z srSBciSBS 28| 39. 

splendour of riches, nor obscure and despised' poverty, nor the 
thirst of honour {pL), nor the fear of disgrace, nor the desire of 
life, nor the fear of death, can shake' and overthrow.^ 

2. For as the poets say that the top of Olympus is always calm, 
uecausei it is too high fori the power of the winds and tempests to 
reach U :^ so the mind of philosophers is too loflyi and elevatedt 
to feel those whirlwinds" of desires (p) that rage and battle" 
together* on the ground for ^^> things [of the] most worthless 
[nature]. 

1. * {^Io0ri. k Ut eo, id, (See 1. 483 (2)). « C. 9. « Tianriate 
ndOur—'MT—nor^ by I. 478 (4). •fas (torch). f Dod. Bptnurt^ 

t amodUre^ * pull violently from its place.' ^ labefaetare. 

2. i propUrea quod : which la stroDger than quia or quod only, and gives mors 
prominence to the reason assigned. i Dlff. 94. k * to arrive thither,' 
§opervemre, i Dod. oZ^ut (t). '^JlaiUB {(la), ^ diffladiaru 
•inter 96. 

Exercise 28. 

1 should scarcely have dared to ask you to writer to me in Latin, 
fearing that this would seem to you an exceedingly^ difficult 
[task]. (]Jonsequently,* the Latin'* letters which I have lately 
received from you were the more acceptable, — [they were] not 
indeed* entirely' faultless,' but yet much more correctly and 
elegantly toritten^ than I should have believed [possible]. I en- 
couraget you therefore to hope with confidence^) and" not to doubt 
but**^ that, under my guidance,*' you will one day^ attain"* to 
some" [considerable] facility in this accomplishment^ as weU as in 
others. • 

•■ 75. b oppido, « Quo (the relative adverb, instead of the de- 

m9n8trative eo), with the comparative a4j. d < written by you in Latin,' 

Latine, See I. 53, note *. •1.383. t omni ex parte, t emen- 

dahu. k nitidioree et euUiorea. i jvbeo^ * I bid you.' ) bene. 

kl.364. iaUquando, » Ddd. inpetitre. ^aHqt^. o 'of this 

kind also.' 

Exercise 29. 

{On a Recovery from Illness,) 

Certainly, when all' my medical-attendants'* asserted-repeat* 
pdly^ with onef consent, that there waa hardly any hope left q/ 



EXERCISES 30, 31. 268 

•ijf recovery,^ I had so prepared myself and oomposed my mind, 
as* to be neither grieved nor frightened by the fear of, as it was 
supposed, approaching' death : and asked nothing^* else* of^ the 
♦Almighty, but") that He would deal with me * mercifully, would 
pardon the erroursi of my past life, and, in that separation of body 
and soul, would not** suffer me to be tormented eUher in a greater 
degree or for a longer time) than my strength could bear. 

^mec^ict. h diditare. ^ nanmua, d 'of my escaping,' 

evadendi, * I. 66. f imminens. t aliua. h I. 262, Obs. 

i MToto. J more violently, or longer.* ComparativeB of w^ummttr 
and diu. 

Exercise 30. 

(Same subject continued.) 

But I hope that I have been allowed hy God to remain in tJus 
worldy*' that the stains contracted^ in former years may be blotted 
out by my tears ; and that at last (p) I may slight* and reject the 
temptations* of vice (pL), and pursue now eU least in my old age* 
that course of life which I ought to have pursued' from the begin- 
ning. And I beseech you, * again and again, nohle Sir,t that, as 
you stimulateh me to the (p) performance of this resolution* by 
your example, so you would he kind enough } to assist me [to do 
so], not onlyk by your admonitions and advice, but also by offering 
* prayers to Grod in my hehalf.^ 



» * I II have been left by God in this life.' b < To contract a stain,' 

lean, concipere: * to blot it out or efface it,' maetdam ddert or dvere, 
c omitUre, d UUeebra. « rndtem Jam senex. f C. 9 vbr 

daritmmc b ineUare, i amnU met propoaUum, J dignairi$ 

it 'not only— but also,' et'-^: or in the iisnal way, nofiMrfum— «e({eliaivk 
I 'for me.' 



Exercise 31. 

[Obs. When a demonstrative is to be translated by a relative, the conjunction 
at the head of the sentence must be omitted.} 

Deucalion, in Ovid,* ingeniously interprets the response* given 
him by Themis, (p) when he asked by what means'" he could 
restore the human race, {p) which had been destroyed by the 
flood. For, being ordered < to throw behind his back the IxHies 



284 BZERCiSES 32, 33, 34. 

of his great mother/ || he (r) made out' [that] || hy the name of 
tnother the earth [was meant], and that stones were called* the 
hones || in her (r) body, 

* ( Tlie Ovidlan Deucalion.' OeidianuM. b tora. • ara, * Intel 
iSgtre, • Sulf)., as being a thought of DeueaUan^a, 

Exercise 32. 

[All men] submit to punishment with a letter grace,*- when^ they 
think that they deserve to be punished.' Wherefore Aristotle, in 
his second book on the Art of Rhetoric,^ sets-down* this argument 
with others^ among those which tend to soothe the mind ; that we 
should point out to those who think that an injury has been done 
them, that they' began,' and that what^ they complain of *^) has 
befallen them deservedly. 

* * bear II with a more even mind that they should be punished.' b Ezpreas 
^ alt men-^when^* by quieunqtie (whosoever). « I. 486 (b). ^ d «0n the 
rhetorical art,' rheiorieua, * ponere. t quoque, ' * were the first 
( prioree) in ^inflicting ii^ury.' b = * those things which.' 

Exercise 33. 

Soon [afterwards] he fell ill of^ a * severe diseasCy and suffered 
80 much from it^ for two* months, that his friends and medical, 
attendants feared for* his life, and** (jp) though he f shook off the 
disorder,* it was**^ but**^ very slowly indeed^ that he recovered the 
♦bodily strength (p) he had lost, and his former* health. 

* in morbum incidere or cadere, b < was so shaken or oppressed by it f 
morto urgeri, tentari, qgtigi (Cic), cor^fiietaH (Com. Nep.). « Inmi^ the two 
months being considered as on« epace, Bini*exira distributionem sig- 
nificat duOy turn eeparatirnf sed eimul eumpta,* (FbcciolaH.) d I, 
231. * To shake off a disorder, moHmm or vim morbi depeUere, t ad- 
modvm tarde ac lente. ' prUHnue. 

Exercise 34. 

I send you back your review,* in which I have scarcely found 
[any thing] to cavil at,* much less* to censure. Your judgment 
is correct' and sure: your style elegant and in good Latin. ^ 
That* you have made such progress' in this (r) I rejoice the 
more, because' it was'°^ principally** by my advicei that you were 



EXERCISES 85, 36. 265 

perstuided to add this accompitshment) of writing well, to your 
other graces* of genius and learning. 

» eenaura. b Diff. 108 (1). 'To cavU at,' calumniari. « *muc]] 

less,' necfum,* I. 443. d < and quite (y tone) Latin.* • I. 517, note x, 

f 'To make such progress,' tanhmiproficere, i I. 516. h potUsimuntf 

I. 364. i Use the subst. auctor. (See I. 364.) J ' thought that this 

credit {kms) — should be added,' — conjungere^ as it was to be, not apptmded to 
them but united with them. k omamenta. 



Exercise 35. 

As if • my house were turned into an infirmary,* there are ill 
in it both my youngest daughter, and my two maid-servants. I 
am therefore obliged to ask« you to defer** your coming,* which 
for*'^ many reasons I was so anxiously' expecting, to a time 
more convenient to us. Farewell, excellent man. Leyden. 
March 19.*^ 

* I. 494. b Sen. uses valetudinarium. The term in Justinian's Code of 

Laws is nosocomtumy from votroKuiistov. « I. 252. d J. 75. ^adveniuB 

t tantopere, 1 1. 526, 528. These rules may be given thus : — 

Adde diem semper Nonis atque Idlbus unum ; 

Accipiatque die* mensis lux ultima &tnw. 



Exercise 38. 

The more* lazy* I grow'^ in writing letters, the more vehe* 
mently do I desire to converse with you, especially since* [we] 
have* innumerable subjects' of conversation.' You will there- 
fore highly gratify^ both me and all mine, if you will revisit us, 
and [that after so] long a time,* during the Easter holidays.) The 
cold is sharp, I allow ; but you shall have^ a bright' fire' in your 
bed-room. 

* I. 407. b Dod. ignama, • 'age makes me.' dL 489. 

• esse, r argumenhim, i Gerund. b « will have done [a thing] 

most gratifying,' graJUsnmus, i intervaUum, ) ferus PaKhaka, 

k 'there shall be prepared for you.' i focus. 



* ' Nedum ia rare ip. Cicero, who generally uses rum modo instead of it aftei 
ne—^idemJ 



1 
t 

J 



286 EXERCISES 87, 38, 39. 

Exercise 37. 

Your letters are few and far between ;* but they make up fon 
their rarity by their wonderful' tenderness.' Many parts of thew^ 
have delighted me, but nothing more than the^' affection, which 
you not only manifest* to me in my Ufe-time,^ but also solenmly* 
promise to manifest** to my [family], when I amgoneA 

* * are certainly rare,' rarua quidem. b eampeMore, « tuatitaa. 

d (many [things] in them.' • amorem pneatare (to manifest by sub- 

stantial kindness). f ' to me aliye.' s mmcU, h Diff. 2 

I * aikaU havt ceaud to be J 

Exercise 3d. 

As to» my property> [which is] small* indeed,"* but in a tolera- 
bly good condition,* let us converse [about it] when you come in 
the spriTigJ I am so strongs both in body and mind, that unless 
I f am carried off by apoplexy,^ I seem as if I mights arrive at 
the same age that my mother reached :J nor do I feel that I am 
* growing an old man \(from any thin^ but^^^ my laziness in let- 
ter-writing, i 

» De, b rea (pi.). • modicua. d 1. 383. • *but suflSiciently 

aninvolyed/ aatis explicattta, (So Cic. provincia guam maximt apta expliea- 
taque,) f tub tempua vemum. ff ' To be strong,' vigire, b opo- 

pUxia 01 apoplexia, i *to be able.' ) aUingere, k '[from] any 

other circumstance,' rea, i * in writing letters.' 

Exercise 39. 

Of our [men]* not more than twenty were [either killed or] 
missing^ [after] all the engagements. But in the castle there was 
not a single* soldier who was not wounded : and of one cohort four 
centurions lost^ their eyes. And desiring* to * produce evidence 
of their exertionsr' and the danger they had been tn,' they counted 
over before'* Marius about thirty thousand arrows* [which had 
been] shot J into the castle, and brought to him the shield^ of the 
centurion Scesva, in which there were founds a hundred and twenty 
holes. » 

* In such enumerations the poaaeaaive adjective is often used, of course in 
agreement, instead of partitive gen., or «a:, <&c. Cssar, especially. Is fond of 
this construction: thus no «/rt eirciter aeptuaginta ceeiderunt, (Bell. Civ 
1 4G. ^ To be [killed or] missing (i. e. loat in any way), deaiderari. 



EXERCISES 40, 41. 287 

« ^'Single* after general negatives, such as nemoy nvUus^ neque qidaquam or 
uUu8f is best translated by omnino ss. ' at all, !n all,' which extends the meaning 
strictly to all. Here Turruh-omnino, d I. 56, n. ' ' when {quum) 

they desired.* (subj.) f ^or (sing.). ff * ^A«ir danger.' h «To 

count over (again) before any body,' renumerare cuu i For military mat- 

ters Caesar and Livy are the best authors to copy, but especially Cssar. With 
respect to compound numerals of this kind, he so nearly always places the 
thamands first, then the gen., and then the number of thouaands, that this is a 
very good order to follow. Thus, mUlia pcuauum decern ; miUia hominum circi- 
ter viginiif AC. ) * To shoot ' (of weapons hurled, as those of the ancients 

were), conjicere, k 'the shield being brought (referre), [there] were 

found in it,' dc. i foramen. 

Exercise 40. 

He sends thither M. Valerius with five cohorts of the eighth 
legion. The people of Veii^ as soon as they saw our standards, 
opened^ their gates; and all,*' both inhabitants*^ and soldiers, isame 
forth^ to meet' Valerius toiih their congratulations ;' Sulpicius and 
Manlius threw themselves down from'^ the wall. Manlius, being 
brought** before* Valerius, begs to be sent J to Marius. Valerius, 
with the cohorts and Manlius, returns on the same day that* he 
had set out [upon his march thither]. Marius incorporated* the 
legions with his own army, and dismissed Manlius impunished."" 

'•Veienaes bV. M. 7. ^ universi. d opptc^ont (inhabitants 

of the Unon), • exire. f * To meet* is generally translated by abviam 

with a dat., ire (exire, <&c.) obviam aUcui. ' ' congratulating.' h deduct, 

iad. J I. 75. k C. 25. i conjungere aliquem cum aliqud re. 

« incdumia. 

Exercise 41. 

I have heard our friend Pomponius say* that he had two 
soldiers in Spain, rich brothers from^> the Faliscan territory ; their 
father f having left them a small country-house,^ and a field* of 
certainly* not more than one acre, they** formed an apiary • round 
the whole house, and had a garden [there], and filled up' the rest 
with thyme, cytisus, and balm.' These'» [brothers, he said] used 
never to make J less, on an average,^ than ten thousand sestertia 
by J their honey. 

» / have heard you say, is, audivi te (ipsum) dicere ; audivi, quum diceres , 
audlvi te dicentem. b * to whom when a small country-house had been left 

by their father.' c ageUus, d tone, • alvearhm, i. e. a system o/ 



298 EXERCISES 42, 43. 

bee-hites. fob§epire. t apUuirvm. h Continue this ixt oHiqui 

namtioiL i utperm. ue dueeraU, J 'to make so much hj any thing, 

rtdptre (with ace. of the thing) ex, 

ExereUe 42. 

If there is no» food [for them] naturally-growiiig^ [there], the 
owner ought to sow what hees Wee hest :* such as* roses, wild- 
thyme,* balm,' poppies, beans, lentils, peas, basil/ the [sweet- 
scented] rush,^ lucerne,! and especially cytisus, which is extremely 
good J for them [when] in health. For it begins to flower at^ the 
vernal equinox, and continues [in flower] to the autumnal eqtdnox. 
But though" this is best for*^> [their] health, thyme is best wiA 
reference to ike'' making of honey. * For ^^ this reason the Sicilian 
honey bears the *palm, becausep the thyme is there good and 
abundant.* 

«" * not.' (See p. 257, 103.) b naiwxdi», e < most follow.* « < Oute are J 
OhB. All the names are to be in the singvlaT. * terpyillum, t apia»trum, 
t ocimttm. k eyperum, i nudiea (sc. herba). ) utiUanmuM, 

k 'from,' ab. 1 * to the other equinox of autmnn.' What is the word for 

'other* of two things? » 'as this is best— so thyme,' Ac,, ut-^aic • ad, 
• nuUiJlcium. P quod, ^JrtqauenM, 

Exercise 43* 
(On the Medical Art,) 

As agriculture [provides] nourishment for healthy bodies, so 
medicine promises * health to [them when] diseased.* There is^** 
indeed nowhere, [where] this [art] does not exist : since^ even the 
most uncivilized* nations are acquainted with herbs and other sim- 
pie* [remedies] for* the cure' of wounds and diseases. Among*®) 
the (Greeks, || however^ it was cultivated considerably' more than 
amongst^ other nations : and* [yet] even amongst these, not from 
the first beginning [of their national existence], but [only] a few 
centuries before us, since ) j^culapius was celebrated as the first 
inventor [of it] ; who, because he studied somewhat* more pro- 
foundly this science, [which was] still rude and in its infancy ^^ 
was tDorshipped after his death as a god,'' 

* V. M. II. b oiquidem, * imperUignnuu, d promptuo ^. e 

ready at hand). •ad. t aurilium, i. e. help against them, whethei 



EXKRCISES 44, 


45. 






289 


fs aliquantOf 1, 402. 
.' recipi. 


k 
vulgarU, 


in, 


with aU. 1 00. 
■*waaroajlvwl 


Exercise 44, 











vAofe c/rparHal cure. 

t tt^po^e ^imni, with ffu&;. 

into the number of the goda.' recipi. 



{Same subject continued.) 

After" [him] || his two sons Podalirius and Machaon, fidlowing 
Agamemnon in the war against Troy,^ afforded no^> inconsid- 
erable* service to their comrades.'' But yet Homer has described* 
II them (r) not as having rendered them any' aid against' pesti- 
lence,^ nor^ the various kinds of diseases, but only as being 
accustomed to cure^ wounds with the knife ) and medicinal appli- 
cations.'f From which it [plainly] appears,**^ that these [were] 
the only branches! of medicine which" they f attempted; and 
that [consequently] these are the oldest. And we f may learn 
[from] the same author," that diseases were referred to the anger 
of the gods, and that it was^^> from them [that] assistance used to 
be implored. 

• DeintU, b * Trojan.* « mediocria, d commilUone$. • proponere, 
with inf. t The regular words after negatiyes are quUquam and tUhui: but 

alifuis is sometimes found. According to MaWticB this is : ' when the thing 
either reaUy exists^ or mighi be supposed to hoDt existed,* (Ad. Cic. Cat. 1, 6, 15.) 
Use aliqids here : and see 1. 160. ff tn, with abL k Dod. lues, i V. 

M. 19. \feTrum. k med^xumentum, i pars, » Diff. 8. 

a * Author' is never awAor (but seriptor, Ac.) except when, as here, he is our 
cttUhoriiy for a statement. 

Exercise 45. 

{Same subject continued.) 

And it is * probable, that though there were no remedies^ against 

bad health, yet that men for the most part enjoyed good healthy^ on 

account of their good habits<^ [of life], which neither sloth' nor 

luxury had corrupted. For* it is'*^ these two [vices], which first' 

in Greece, and then^^^ amongst^*^ ourselves, have injured' [men's] 

constitutions. And consequently,^ this complicated! [art of] 

medicine, which was unnecessary in fornter days, and is so now 

amongst other nationsy) enables'^ but a very few^ of us tp re^h the 

beginning (i^Z.) of old age. 

13 



J 



290 BZERpiSBS 46, 47. 

* inter nulla auxUia, followed by gen. b < yet that it generally (pleramquc^ j 
feil-to-menVlot (contingere) good.' « morea. d Dod. ignavta, 

* nqtddem, f prittff there being only two cases mentioned. r affiigeret 

* constitutions,' corpora. h V. M. 20. i muUipUx. ) < neithei 
necessary in former days— nor amongst ^) other nations.' In former days ; 
oUm. V. M. 9. k ' Enables to reach,' perducit ad, dc. i vix aliqui. 

Exercise 48. 

Sylla with an inferior force* was besieging troops which hacLyet 
suffered no Joss or disaster,^ they being' [also] supplied with an 
abundance of every thing : for every day* a great number of ships 
arrived from aU parts^ to bring them provisions : nor could the . 
wind blow from any quarter that was not favourable to some of 
them J He,ir on the other hand,^ having consumed all the corn 
round ahout,i was in great distress ;J but yet his men''> bore their 
privations^ with extraordinary patience. For they called to mind? 
that, afler^^ suffering the same [hardships]i in Bithynia the year 
before, they, by their exertions and patient endurance," put an 
end" to a very formidable* war : they rememberedp that, after" 
suffering great distress^ before Nicomedia, and much greater 
Btill' before Mantinium, they gained a victory* over mighty 
nations. 

* milUum nunurw. b copioi integrcB atqiu incolumeo. According to Dod. 
incolumis and integer both mean * unhurt and vnUmched :' integer^ opp. to ' being 
attadcedf^ incolumis^ io * being woimded.' Dod. salvus. « quum iUi. a QQy 1. 1. 

* vndique. t < nor could any wind blow, but {qain) they had a favourable 
course from some quarter {^parsy * Covld^ should be' the imperfect^ as it is an 
expression of a repeated possibility. C ipse, i> aviem, ifar and wide, 
J anguatice (a * strait'), pi. k » these things.' (See I. 24,) i See I. 24. 
» patientia. » conficere. «> mcucimua, P I. p. 72, note q. ^ inopia 
(distress for provisions). » v. M. 21. ■ * To gain a victory,' victorcm 
or victores decedere^ with gen. of course. 

Exercise 47. 

1. In the mean time,^ L. Sanga, whom Sylla at his departure 
(p) had left in command of the camp,* being informed [of what 
was going on], came to the assistance* of the cohort with two 
legions. On his (r) arrival, the Africans were easily repulsed ; 
they did || not^ [so much as] stand« the sight' and [first] shock of 
our [troops], but [as soon as] (p) their first ranks were broken,? 
the rest turned their backs and fled from the field. ^ But Sanga 



EXERCISE 48. 291 

recalled our men, that they might not pursue them to any great 
liutanceJ 

2. Now J many men think, that if he had chosen**^ to pursue 
them more warmly,^ the war might have heen terminated on that 
day : it does not however *appeari that his decision was [justly] 
censurable :■" for the duties" of a lieutenant are one,® those of a 
general another :•> the former? ought to act in every thing ac- 
cording to his instructions y the latterp to decide without restraint 
according to what seems best vnth reference to the whole state of 
affairs, 

1. * I. p. 141, Doteg.. b *had placed over the camp,* prcsficere. 

6 I. 242 (1). ^nequt vero. ^ftrre. f D6d. vidert, C <To 

break the first ranks,' primos dejicere. h loco cedere. i longitu, 

2. i At. k acriua, 1 I. 297. ™ reprehendendtis. The ad- 
jectives in -ahUj -ibUj may be translated by the part, in dus^ when they mean 
what ought to be done : not when they mean what can be done. " partes. 
* I. 38. P alter — alter, ^ ad prcBscrvptum libere ad summam rerum 
eonauUre. 

Exercise 48. 

He» disposes his men [along] the*^^ works he had begun^ to 
raise, not at certain intervals,^ as was done on^ the preceding • 
days, but in a continued line of guards and posts ^^ so that Ithe par- 
ties'] touched^ * each other, and [all together] filled up the wlwlt 
line of works. ^ He orders* the military tribunes and officers of 
the cavalry to patrol [about the works], and begsi them not only 
to be on their guard against*^ sallies, but also to keep an eye upon 
tr^ividuals secretly leaving the gates J Nor" was there of the 
whole [army] a single individual'' of so indifferent* and sluggish? 
a mind, as to take a wink of sleep"^ that night. 

■ * He * (of the general), ipse, b inatUuere. • * certain space 

being intermitted.' d < as was the custom of,* &c. • superior. 

t perpetuis vigiliis stationibusque. ff * disposes, being the historical pres- 

ent. What/erwM would both be correct here 7 1.414. ^ munitionem ex- 

plere : expUre^ to leave no gaps ; complere, to Jill as full as a thing wUl hold, 
i * to order to patrol,* circummittere. J hortarij I. 75. ^ ^ Tobe on 

one^s guard against any thing,* cavere ab aliqua re. » * to observe the secret 
exits {exitus) of individuals,' singtdi homines. " neque vero : the vem 

adding emphasis to the assertion. » * any (one).* What word for • any ? ' 

1. 389—391. • remissus. p languidus. « as to rest,* con- 

Viieoeere. (See I. 66, note s. Translate according to 1. 483 (a).) 



892 KxssciSBS 49y 50. 

Exercise 49. 
(Death of Polycarp.) 

1. When* they f arrived* || there,*** he being* from* his age 
weak in his legs, and [consequently] allowed to ride upon an as9^ 
a great concourse {pi.) took place both of Jews and Pagans : 
some* of whom, remembering his old reputation, had compasnan^ 
on his age : but most [of them] were * exasperated [against him] 
from** their hatred against' the Christians, and espedaHy hecaus^ 
Polycarpus had prevented the offering of sacrifice^ to the gods of 
thetr country. 

2. Hence when, [upon] being ordered to curse Christ, he said] 
that he would never do that to his King and Saviour, he was im- 
mediately handed-over^ to the executioners to'* be burnti alive. 
When they f were leading him to death, a certain presbyter, with 
whom he had been intimate,"^ met" him :• [and] said weeping, ' O 
Poly carp, what undeserved treatment art thou receiving f'f he [re- 
plied] :« 'But not unexpected' [treatment], for many Christian 
bishops will hereafter" meet with this fate f*^ 

1. * tt6» : what tense 1 1. 512, 614. b pervenire, I. 296. « fimm, 
with Bubj. 4 * riding npon an ass,' arino vehi. • Instead of making 
these principal sen^^ences, connect them with the preceding by quum with subj. 
Same— but mods aUi~^ptttrimi vera, f miaerarL i 1. 156. h fiuurf- 
meque quod, i oaerajieri prohibuerat. 

2. ] Diff. 2. k tradere. l comburL ^famiUaariter vtL 

» obviam t89t • u iptum, P ' what undeserved [things] thou art 

auferingl' ^huieilU. * inopinatua, •demde. ^hunc 

tsUuM habire. 

Exercise 50. 

It is [kind in you and] like a brother^ to exhort*® me, but [you 
exhort me who am] now^, by Hercules,* running [apace, that way 
myself, so] that I lavish* all my [assiduous] attentions'* upon?* 
him* alone. Nay,' I shall perhaps' with my ardent zeal accom- 
plish** what oflen happens to travellers, $ when they make haste ;« 
[I mean] that as [they], if they have happened' ° to rise later than 
they intended,! [yet] by quickening their speedy they arrive even 
earlier! at their journey's end,"" than if they Jtad lain awalce aU the 
morning ;» so I, since I have so long overslept myself'* in the oK 



EXERCISES 51y 52. 393 

servancep of this man, [though], hy Hercules, you have many a 
time tried to awake me,^ will make up for' my laziness by 
running. 

^■frattmt (adv.). b mehercule. The notDf is to be made emphatic by 

itutdem. « confcrrt, d tffudia (pL). • him ^ him. whom ycni 

mention, <fec. What pron. should be used for *Ac7* I. 377 (c). f Ego 

vero: the rero adding emphasis to the statement. f V. M. 15. 

« rfficere. i V. M. 22. J reZfe. k properare. i ci^iti*. 

""•whither they wish,* wi/*. "dc mu^d node vigUart, ^in- 

dormire. p coUre. I. 359. *» * you by HercuJes often rousing mo.' 

* eoTrtgtrc, 

Exercise 51. 

Cato in Sicily was refitting his old ships of war,» and commawL 
ing the states to provide new ones for him,^ These [objects] he 
pursued with great zeal. In Lucania and Bruttium,* he, by 
means of his lieutenants, raised troops* of Roman citizeiis : and 
required* from the states of Sicily a certain amount' of infantry 
and cavalry. When these [preparations] were almost completed, 
being informed of Curio's arrival, he complained in an address to 
his troops,' that he was abandoned and betrayed by Pompey, who, 
though utterly unprepared^ in every respect,^ had begun) an unne- 
cessary war; and [when] questioned in the senate by him and 
other [senators], had asserted'^ that he had* every thing ready and 
in good orders for"'^ a war. 

■ naoea longer, b < was commanding new [ones] to the states.' So 

imperarefrumenhan cmtatibrts^ Ac. « Jn Lucania BnUtiisque, The name 

of the people (I/ueoni) is often thus used, where we use the name of the terri- 
tory. A deledua habere, * e;ngere. f numenu, tinconcunu. 
Use the pr(B», hiatorieum, h imparatiaaimua followed by prep. ab. * all 
thingu.' ) atucipere. k Diff. 47. ^ apta et parcUa. 

Exercise 52 

Having given [him] these instructions,* he arrives at Canusium 
with six legions, three of them being composed of veteran soldiers,^ 
the rest such as he had formed^' out of the new levies, and filled 
up* on*« his march : for he had sent Domitius's* cohorts straight* 
from Corfinium to Sicily. He found that the consuls were gone« 
to Dyrrachium with a great part of the army, and that Lucceiua 
was remaining at Brundusium with twenty cohorts; nor- could it 



294 EXERCISES 53, 54. 

be found out [for] certaiDty, whether he had remained there for 
the purpose of holding^ Brundusium, thati he might the more 
easily remain master of the whole Hadriatic, or had [merely] 
stopped there for*® want of ships. 

■ mandata. b * three [of them] Teteran [legions J.' veteranum 

* diUettu (sing.). ' ampUre. * Domitianiu (adj.). t ffroHmu 

V pro/UrimL k obUnere. i What wozd for ' that T 

Exercise 53. 

When the excited* body of young men^ were rashly taking armS; 
and endeavouring to make a hostile attack upon* the unofiending^i 
Thessalians, it was I who compelled the senate to repress by 
its authority the violence of [these] striplings : it was*"* I who 
strictly charged* the quaestors not to supply money' for the pay- 
rnent* [of the troops] : it was'"> I who, (p) when the arsenal^* was 
broken open, withstood [the multitude], and prevented^ [any] arms 
from being carried out. And thus you know that it was"^ by my 
exertions, and mine aIone,i that an unnecessary war was not brought 
about. 

*■ eoncitare. ^juvenhu. ^ manu laeesBtre. d quieiut. * intcrminan 
(Ter. followed by iu). t sumptvM. f Btipendium. k armamentarium. 

1 ' by my exertions [of me] alone.* Exertions, opera, <e, eing. (Comp. Cic. eoliu* 
trim mtum peccatum; in uniua med ealute.) 

Exercise 54. 

See how uncertain^ and variable^ the condition* of life is ; how 
unsettled'* and inconstant [a thing] fortune ; what* unfaithfulness' 
there is in friends ; what* simulations* suited to times and circum- 
stances,* what* desertion* [even] of our nearest [friends] in [our] 
dangers, what* cowardice.* There will, there will, I say,^ be a* 
time, and the day will come» sooner or later,^ when you will miss* 
the affection of a most friendly, the fidelity of a most worthy j 
person, and the high spirit* of the bravest man that ever UvedJ 

* ratio. How to make uncertain and variable emphatic, see p. 236, 16 (b). 
b vaguB. e Caut 21. d Plural. * aptits ad tempua. i prqfecto 

(assuredly, verily). s luceacere (will dawn, i. e. begin to shine). 

k aliquando. i desiderare. In this construction the mhj. preeent is to be 

used : not the fut. indicative. J gravisnmus. k animi magnitudo. 

On the position of the two genitivca sec Introd. 27. i * The bravest man 

that ever lived,' un:i9p08t hominca natoefortimmiSM vir. 



EXBRCISES 55, 56, 57. 295 

Exercise 55. 

Are you trying to Jind'' a new method of governing the state ? 
Why,** you cannot discover* a better [one] than [that which] you 
have received from your forefathers. Are you trying to find out 
at a vast outlay,^ how you may not pay* taxes 1 Why,* you can- 
not by taking counsel {pi') increase the resources' of the treasury, 
which you desire [to increase]. Are you trying to find out how 
you may spare men [who are] polluted by crime ?••> Why,* you 
cannot, by pardoning the guilty,' secure* the safety of the inno- 
cent. 

» quasrere. ^ ai, « V. M. 2. d < by making very great 

outlays.' aumphis, • conferre, f opes. t nocentea, h custodire 

(guard). 

Exercise 56. 

Even the bravest men have not, except in extreme necessity, 
flung their lives away^ for the sake of avoiding some* disgrace : as 
[for instance] P. Crassus Mucianus, [when] conducting* the war 
against Aristonicus in Asia, being taken [prisoner] between Elsea 
and Smyrna by [some] Thracians, of whom that prince* had a 
l^rge force in his fortified toions,^ that he might not fall into his 
hands f* escaped [this] disgrace by a voluntary death J For he is 
reported to have thrust* his riding-stick^ into the eye of one of the 
barbarians : who [then], enraged* by the violence of the pain, 
stabbed Crassus with his dagger in the side,) and [thus], whilst* 
he avenged himself, delivered a Roman general from the diS" 
graceful violation^ of his digmty.'^ 

* * sougl^t death voluntarilyjVmor/^m itUro oppetere. Some, 1. 392. b gerere 
{belhan cum). * Only a pronoun. d < had a great number in garrison.' 

• in ditionem ejus pervenire. f arceaaita ratio morHa. t dvrigere. 

h a riding stick, virga^ qad aliquia ad regendum eguum utUur. The tense of 
the verb, of course, to be altered according to circumstances. i aceendi. 

1 * stabbed {amfod&re) Crassus's side with his dagger.' k 1. 509. i iwrpUudo, 
» majeataa: which Cic. attributes to consuls, judges, &c. 

Exercise 57. 

It teas ever my persuasion,^ that* all friendships should be main« 
toJned* with a religious exactness,^ but especially* thoee which' 



296 SZBRCISBS 58, 59. 

are renewedi afier*^^ a quarrel :^ becausei in firiendshipa [hhh 
erto] nnintemiptedi a faUure^ of duty is easily excusedi by a 
plea* of inadvertency, or, to*) put a worse construction'^ upon i/, of 
negligence : [whereas] if, after a reconciliation,* any [new] offence 
he given^f it does not pass for negligent^ hut wilful r^ and is not 
*imputed'' to inadvertency, but to perfidy. 

* N *J. have always thought.' b Connect these two clauses by ^uum^^Sum 
Jbotf^—and), • tuerL * * with the greatest scrupulousness {reHgio) and 
fidelity.' • * In quum^tum, the iwm is often strengthened by vcro, carte etiam^ 
jfTiBeipuef moxtme.' f I. 476. ' reconeiliari in graOam. k inanicUUB, pi. 
i propterea quod. i integer, k prtUcrmUtere, i defendere. 
^exauatio. ^gnaiuM interpretarL •redUue in gratiawt. 
p ( any thing is committed.' I. 389—91. 4 < fg not thought neglected, but 
violated.' 

Exercise 58. 

Having called together his men for the purpose of addressing 
ihem,*^ ' Know,' he says, ' that in a very few days from this timCy^ 
the king will he here*" with ten legions, thirty thousand horse, a 
hundred thousand light-armed* [troops], and* three hundred 
elephants. Therefore let certain persons cease to inquire or 
♦imagine [any thing] beyond [this], and let them believe me, 
who have certain knowledge ;' or, assuredly,' I will order them 
(p) to be put on board** the oldest vessels [in the service], and to 
be carried to whatever country the vnnd may happen to take 
them.' 

• < to an assembly.' ad eeneionem voeare, advoeare, or eontoeare. — in concionem 
advoeare. (M. L. 4.) b. The prop. hie. in agreement with * days.' In I. 311, 
pauci» his dtehua is given for ' a few days ago,* It may also mean * within a few 
days ;' the hie marks ntamesB to the speaker (i. e. to the time of his speaking), 
on eitkeT side. « adene. d levie armaiurce. • Diff. 88. r See 
above, Ex. 3, c. compertumhab!&re. Compare perapectran hah^ej abadtUum habere, 
I. 364. ' out quidem : the quidem adding emphasis to the and. k y. M. 23 
I ' by any wind whatever into any lands whatever.' ipUcunque. 

Exercise 59. 

On**> his approach being announced, L. Plancus, who *coni. 
manded the legions, being compelled by the critical state of affairs,* 
takes [a position on] a rising ground, and draws up his army in 
two divistons^ facing different ways,* that he may not (414) be 



BZBRCISB 60. 297 

Burrouuded by the cavalry. Thus, though his farces were infS' 
riar,^ he kept his ground* against furious charges [both] of the 
legions and of the cavalry. When (p) the cavalry were already 
engaged, both parties f behold at a distance ^ the standards of two 
legions, which V, Attius had sent from the upper bridge to the 
support' of our troops, antidpating what really occurred,'^ that' the 
generals of the opposite party would use the opportunity unex- 
pectedly offered them, to fall upon our men. By the approach 
of these (r) legions the battle was broken off,j and each general 
marched back his legions to his camp. 

* neceasaria res. b par8. « divertus^ in agreement with odes, 

d ' having engaged {cengredi) with an unequal number.* • stisHnere (to 

support : to bear without yielding). Use the historical present. f V. M. 24. 
t ntbsidium. Use the construction I. 242. h * suspecting [that] that would 

be whicl) happened,' accidere or contingere. Why 1 M. L. I. i * Ui is 

sometimes used (with subj.) as explanatory of a demonstrative pronoun, 

where qtuxL might rather have been expectea, or the ace. and inf. ) Pres. 

tiiBlOT.—dir inure. 

Exercise 60. 

Whilst he was preparing and carrying out* these [plans], he 
sends his lieutenant, C. Fabius, before him into Spain, with three 
legions, which he had put into winter-quarters at Narbo and its 
neighhourhood ;^ and directs that the passes'* of the Pyrenees 
should be quickly seized, which L. Valerius fwas then occu- 
pying with his troops:** the other legions, which were in more 
remote winter -quarters y* he orders to follow. Fabius, according 
to his instructions^^ having made great despatch, clears the pass,^ 
and proceeded by forced marches against Valerius's army. 

^ adminiatrare. b circum ea loca, ^ aaUua. So saUua Hier- 

mopylarum. (Liv.) d praai^ia. * * which were-in-winter-quarters 

{hiemare) further-ofl'.* f ' as had been commanded.' e prtBsidium ex 

§aUu dejicere : dejicere in this sense is a technical term of military science. 

ON THE TENSES IN A LETTER. 

1. It is a peculiarity in Roman letter-writing, that the writer 
pul3 himself (as it were) in the time when the letter loill he re- 
ceived, and thus speaks of what he is doing, as what he was doing . 

13* 



298 8ZBRGISB 61. 

and so uses the mpeffect and pli^perfect instead of the present and 
perfect. 

2. Thus: 'I have nothing to write/ nihil kaheham quod 
icriberem : 'I have heard no news,' nihU navi audieram. 
And this extends to the adverhs : instead of ^yesterday,' we find 
' the day before J 

3. To see that these are the tenses the receiver would use, sup 
pose him relatmg the substance of such a letter : turn quum Cicero 
hanc epistolam acripsity nikil hah el at quod scriheretf neque 
enim novi quidquam audierat, et ad omnes meas epistolas re- 
ecripserat pridie, ^c, 

4. But general truths and statements that are not made rela- 
tively to the time of writing stand in the usual tenses (e. g. ego te 
maxim et feci semper etfacio): nor does the use of the 
imperf. and pluperf. always occur where it might stand. 

Exercise 61. 

Although I have nothing to write,* and moreover f am possessed 
by a*'^ strange unwillingness^ to write«> [at all], yet I am unwil- 
ling that this good-for-nothing" [lad of] mine should go to your 
neighbourhood^ without [any] letters of mine to you. I love you 
more every day,« because I am * persuaded that you' f love' your 
studiesif in the same way. But I would wish you to write to me 
an accurate statement^ with what * author you are now engaged, 
whether Cicero or Terence, or as» 1 would rather [have it], with 
both ? You ought also to take painsJ to employ, in what you 
write*^ to me, the phrases' which you have observed in their 
works : that this" itself may be a proof" to me of the * accuracy 
fffith which you read them,'^ Farewell. Tibur, Aug. 28. 

» Use the fevorite form nihU est quod (477). »> odium, ^ verbero (cmM). 
d What adv. ezpresBes * to where you are,* * to your neighbourhood?* I. 387. 
• Distinguish between quotidie^ indies. Which is used in both senses? I. 69, t. 
f To be expressed by the passive voice, to avoid the ambiguity which the two 
accusatives would occasion. ' amuse yourself,* oblectare. See Dod. oblectatio, 
i lUterarum studia. k ' ♦accurately.* i ' which.* J dare operam 

(followed by mQ. k shall write — shall have observed {notare) : the conduct 

being recommended as what should be followed in future. . i loguendi 

genera. « Express res, ■ fdemfacere cujus rei, • * of your *accu- 

racy in reading them.' 



BZBBCISBS 62| 63. $89 

Exercise 62. 

If I had as oflen^ enoount^ed^ toils and dangers against' you 
and my country, and our Jiousehold-gods, as I have from the be- 
ginning* of my manhood f scattered by my wrme your most wicked 
enemies, and fwon' safety for you, you could not have decided* 
any thing more against me m my ahsencey O Conscript Fathers, 
than you have hitherto been doing. You first' hurried me off, 
though not yet cf the legal age^^ to a most cruel war, and then' 
destroyed me, with my most deserving army, by hunger, the most 
wretched of all deaths.'^ Was this the hope with which the Ro- 
man people sent out her children to war ? are these the rewards 
for our wounds, and for'* our so often shedding our blood for our 
country ? Being tired of writing and sending messengers, I have 
exhausted all my private resources and expectations, whilst^ you 
all the time have in three years sent the pay of scarcely one year.* 

•' * 80 many ' [toils, Ac.]. A sentence is occasionally arranged in this not 
strictly accurate way, where tot refers to quoUea. (Thus Clc. pro Balbo, 2Q; ti 
tot constdibus m^ruime/, quoties ipse constUfuUset,) * under my command,' 
tkidu mat. b auKvptrt, « 1. 179. 4 qiuBrert (which is often used 

of a successful search : nearly = tnventre). • To * do,' when used in this 

way as the reprssentaitiot of a preceding verb (here to ht doing = to 6« docidxng)^ 
is mostly /ocere, but sometimes agert : e. g. Salt Cat. 52, 19. f IfHrst—then 

may often be translated by turning the verb with *Jirst* into a past participle . 
thus * me, being hastened away— you destroyed,* Ac. < To hurry a man off, 
projicert (if he be. sent away recklessly, to be never cared for afterwards), 
r * against [my] age,' contra tetatem, h guum— «n/en7n, words often used 

Indignandy of conduct that is a strong contrast to what it should have been. 
* * scarcely one-year's pay has been given by you.* One-year's, anmtus. Pay, 
stipmdivm; but sumptus when considered as given to the commander-in-chief 

00 defray with it all the expenses of the war. 

Ea^cise 63. 

{The same subject continued.) 

By the immortal gods, is it^° that you think I serve* tor a trea- 
sury 1 or that I can have an army without provisions and pay 1 

1 confess that I set out for this war with more zeal than prudence ; 
seeing that*' {p) though I had received from you only the name 
of general,^ I raised an army in forty days, and drove back* the 
enemy, (p) who were already hanging over Italy,* from the Alps 



300 SXERCISB 64. 

into Spain. Over' these [mountains] I opened' a difierent^ road 
from [that which] Hannibal [opened], and [one] more convenient* 
for us. I recovered Gaul, the Pyrenees, Laletania, the Indigetes ; 
and with newly-raisedi troops, and much inferior [in number], 
BtoodJ the first attack of the victorious' Sertorius : and [then] spent 
the winter in camp, amongst the most savage enemies ; not in the 
towns, or with any such indulgence to my troops as a regard to my 
02cn popularity with them would have suggested.^ 

* prtutare vicem {alicujtu rci). b quippe qui : here with indie. 1. 482. 

« * of a command,* imperium, d mmmovere. • in cercicibus jam 

ItaluB agere. Nearly eo: nunc in cervicibus rumua, ' are immediately 
upon them:' bellumingens in cervicibus «ra/, * impended :' both Liv. 
f per. f V. M. 7. »» * different from,' alius atque, i nomts. 

) austinire. k ex ambitume med. The kind of ambitio meant, is the courting 
popularity with an army by allowing it such indulgences as comfortable winter 
quarters, dc. 



Exercise 64. 

{The same subject continued.) 

Why should I go on to enumerate* the battles [I have fought], 
my winter expeditions, or the towns {p) that I have retaken or 
destroyed ? since facts are stronger'' than words. The taking* of 
the enemy's camp at the Sucro,' the battle at the Durius,«* the (p) 
utter destruction* of C. Herennius, the general of our enemies, 
with Valentia, and his whole army, are apparent^ enough to you • 
and for these (r) [benefits] you give us in return, * ye grateful 
Fathers, want and famine. And thus the condition of my army 
and that of my enemies is the same : for pay is given to neither^ 
[of them] : and each, [if] || victorious, may come into Italy. 
[Wherefore] I advise and beseech you to* attend to this (r), and 
not compel me, by my necessities, to consult my own interests 
^part from those of the state,) 

* * Why should I after this (dcin, for deinde) enumerate 7 b < the thing 

(sing.) has more weight.* plus valere. « The Xucar. d The Douia 

* Use participles. I. 359. t darus. f reddere, h *ig given to 
noithcr.' > I. 75. ) prtvatim. 



BZERciSES 65, 66. 30 k 

Exercise 65. 

(The same subject continued,) 

Either I {ph) or Sertorius have laid waste the ivJioIe of hither 
Spain, and cut off all its inhabitants ;» except the maritime cities, 
which [are however only] an additional** burden and expense to 
us. Last year [indeed] Gaul maintained* the army of Metellus 
with money and corn, but now, in consequence of a had harvest,^ 
that [country] hardly supports itself.* [For myself] I have ex- 
hausted' not only my private fortune, but also my. credit. You 
[alone] remain : and, unless you (r) succour us, the army, and 
with it the whole Spanish war, will remove* itself /rom this 
country^ into Italy, j^ against my will, indeed, hut according to my 
predictions,* 

* * have wasted hither Spain to extermination,' ad internecUmem vastare, 
b Express by the adv. vUro (properly meaning, * further on'). See I. 237. 

« alere, d media fructihua. • * itself hardly gets on.' agitare, 

( coruumtre. e transgredi. »» * hence.' 1*1 being unwilling 

and [yet] foretelling.' 

Exercise 66. 

Herennius, since his rear* was pressed by the cavalry, and he 
saw the enemy before him, (^p) when he had reached"* a certain 
hill, halted there. From this he despatched* four cohorts of tar 
geteers^ to the highest of all the hills in sight ;• and orders them tc 
make all possible haste to take possession of this y^ with the intention 
of following^ them with all his troops, and, changing his route, 
reach Octogesa by the hills. As the targeteers were making for 
this hill in an oblique line, the cavalry of Marius {p) saw [thenij 
and charged the cohorts ; wli0*» did not stand for a single moment 
against the impetuosity of the cavalry, but {p) were surrounded 
by them, and all cut to pieces in the sight of both armies. 

* novisaimum agmen, b nancuci, « miitere. Use the historl- 
«ri present. d eetrati, • * to a hill which was the highest of all 
in bight.' D5d. videre (4). t magna cursu coneitatoa occupare. 

t *with that intention, that he ^ould follow.* »» 'nor did the 

targeteers stand,' Ac, 



808 xxsBGiS£S 67y 68. 

ExercUe 67. 

I have received your three*^ letters : but in the last there were 
some [parts] so carelessly written, that it was plain^ jrou were 
thinking of something else when you wrote it. I will show you 
these [faults], when I come to your part rfthe world ;^ and ^all 
pull your ear,* that you may be for the future more attentive 
uihen you wriU^^ and avoid at least such blunders,* as even UtUe 
hoys^ would avoid, who are learning their accidence.' Do not, 
however, be distressed by this admonition of mine : for I do not 
wbh to ftake away any^ [thing] by it from your cheerfulness, 
but f to add [somewhat] to your attention. Adieu. Tibur, 23 
Sept. 

^ 4t is pMOf'fatiU comiat : * to be thinking of something else,' akud agtre. 
b < to where you are :' to be expressed by an adv. derived from Me, the demon* 
strative of the second person. I. 387. * auHeukan pervelUre, 

< *in writing.' * error or Mtocismti* (a solecism). t puenldu». 

s < to be learning one*s accidence,' primia UUris mJbuL ^ I. 369—391. 

Exercise 68. 

Your letter gave me much pleasure,*^ as every thing [does] that 
proceeds^ from you, although you had committed many* [faults] 
in it. But as lisping children'* are listened to with delight* by 
fathers, and even their very mistakes are a pleasure to them, so 
this your infancy of hUer-wriUng^ is delightful to me. I send you 
it' back corrected by my own hand. For so, you know, we 
agreed.^ Do you, dear^ dear^ Alexander, pursue with spirit) the 
path, to which your natural disposition leads you, and which 1 
have always exhorted and urged you to follow.^ I have, by my 
reporti [of you], raised great expectations in the minds of your 
parents :" and you must now take all possible pains" that neither 
I nor they fniay be disappointed* in them (r). Adieu. Tibur, 
July 7, 1570. 

* * [waej li noeet to me.' b prvfidaei {ab aliquo). < By muUa peecare^ 

ijifclu •libenter. tinlUtn». f* it itself.' h * We agree [to 

do any thing],' eonchiU intet no8, i dulciBaime ae 9uaci§9inu. 1 magna 

animo. k < and I have always been your exhorter and Impeller.' i tetU^ 

vumiwn. ^ magnam tpem {alicujus) apud {aliquem) concUare. ■ omul 

curd ae ehidio providsre, • tpesfaUU aliqtietn. 



cautions; 



1. (a) Take care not to translate the English inf., when it expresses a purpose, 

by the Latin infinitive.— To make out whether the infin. expresses o 
purpose, try whether you can substitute for it * in order thai,* or * UuU, 
(b) The infin. after < Aave,' <w,' is to be translated by the part, in duB. with 
the proper tense of esae. 
(Entr ) ^ ^ ^^^ something to do. 

I There ia something for me to do. 
(Lai.) Something iatobt done by me. 
(e) * TJure ia aonuthing far me to do,* may also mean, there ia aomeikif^, 
uhich ImaydOf* eataliquid,quod agam, 

2. In translating *ago* by abkinc, remember, (1) that it must precede the 

numeral ; (2) that the numeral must be a cardinal, not an ordinal, nu- 
meral ; and (3) that the accuaaiive is more common ^Ean the abU 
(2) Hence abhine annoa quahtordecim is right ; tertio abhinc anno, quarto 
decimo abhinc die, doubly wrong ; tribua abhinc annia, or irea abhinc 
annoa, wrong. 
8. Take care not to translate ^from* by *a* or *ab* in the following con- 
structions : — 

(1) To derive or receive pleasure, pain, profit, Ac, from, eapere voluptaUm, 
dolor em, fructum, deaiderium ex (not ab) aliqjid re, 

(2) To hear/rom any body, audire mt aliquo. 

(3) * JFh-om [being] such— becomes so and so/— car. 

(4) From such a district, town, &c. (it being a man's birth-place or resi- 
dence) — «r. 

(5) To recover/roTTi a disease, convalescere ^rmorbo. 

(6) To retum/rom a journey, redire, reverti ex itinere. 

(7) jFVom, =: * on account o^' propter. * F^om their hatred against auy 

body.' 

(8) To fling or throw oneself /rom a wall, se de muro dejicere (Ccea.) : seex 
muro prscipitare (Ctc.). 

(9) From, ^ out of, ex. 

4. When a substantive is followed by a relative clause which defines it, be 
careful not to omit the demonstrative ia, ea, id, ox iUe (if there is empha- 
sis), with the substantive, if a particular thing is meant. To determinr 
this, try whether you cannot substitute * thai ' for * a ' or * the.* 

(a) Thus : * the oration which he delivered,' Ac. ( ^ thai parOeular ovatioo 
which he delivered), e a oraOo, quam habuii, Ac. 

(6) So, when a substantive is defined by a relative adverb, iha'a or ' Ae' 
is to be translated by a pron. Thus : 



304 CAUTIONS. 

{Eng.) There will be a day, wAcn, Ac. 
{Lot,) There will beift^ day, ithen, Ac. (quum). 
{Eng,) TTu day will come, wAcn, Ac 

{Lot.) TTuU day will come. wA^n. <&c. {quum). [Comp. Caution 13., 
6. Be Tery careful noi to translate the Enghsh infinitiye after a substantive oi 
adjective, by the Lot. infinitive, unless you have authority for it. Al- 
ways consider what the rdtUion is, in which the infinitive stands. Can 
it be translated by a gerund in di? hy ad with the gerundive (a partici- 
ple in dtu) 7 by a relative douse, Ac. 1 
Thus : A desire to pray, ^ a desire of praying. 

A knife to cut my bread vrith, =s (1) a knife for cutting my 
bread ; (2) a knife, wWi wkidi I may cut my bread. 
Obs. The ^for cutting my bread* will not in Latin depend on knyk, 
but on the verb : e. g. I borrowed a knife for cutting my bread witli, = 
*for the purpose of cutting my bread, I borrowed a knifej 
6. Take care lutt to translate * assert* =r ' ajimi,* by asscrcre, but by qffirmare, 
confirmare, dicere, doeire, pronuntiare, &c. ; or, if followed by a not oi 
other negative, negare. 
2. Take care not to translate * honour* by hoTior or honos, when it means not 
* an honour ' (i. e. external mark of respect), but * the inward principle 
of honour * ijionestas) ; or * integrity* * trustiporthiness * (Jides). 

8. From nemo^ let me never see i but nuUius and ntUlo : or (after nega* 
Neminis or ncmine ; \ ||ves) cujusquam, quoquam, 

9. When a clause that follows another in English, is to precede it in Latin, it is 

often necessary to place in it a word from the preceding sentence. 
Thus': < Alexander was blamed | because ?u indulged in drinking.' 
* Because Alexander indulged in drinking, he was blamed.* 
(a) This is especially the case, when b, pronoun in the second clause refers 
to a substantive in the first. 

10. From our having hardly any power of altering the order of words in a sen- 

tence, it is very difficult to give emphasis to an oblique case without 
placing it in a separate sentence with the verb to be. Thus : *I desire 
something* very much, {the ^something* being emphatic) would 
become ; * there is something, that I desire very much.' Hence 

5:^ In a sentence beginning with * U is * or ^ it was ' before * that,* the 
*itis* OT * it was* is omitted, and the sentence with Uhat* made a prin- 
cipal sentence. 

{Eng.) It is the manufacturers, that I complain of. 

{Lat.) 1 complain of the manufacturers.* 
(a) So in a sentence beginning with * it isbui* or ^ it was but,* and followed 

by * that,' &c. 

{Eng.) It was but very slowly that he recovered. 

{Lot.) He did not recover but { = except, niei) very slowly. 

11. The boy has but a stupid head. 
Who always for B.*but* puts sed 

• Instead of *that,* which is here a relative, w?w or whidi may ocoar. ' It is 
the farmers^ iMom I complain.' 



CAUTIONS. 805 

Or at : for other meanings ' 5u< ' has got : 

* Onfy,' 'except,' 'atleast;' or 'vfho' with *not* 

(1) * Stay btU one day ' = stay only one day (solum or modo), 

(2) * Do biU stay ' = a< least (or a< ofl. events) stay («a2/em). 

(3) * Nobody but Cesar' =s nobody excep/ Caesar {nisi or preeter), 

M) < There is nobody &tt< thinks'^ there is nobody who does not think 
(9lim or qui non). 

(5) * Not to doubt hut OT but that ' . . . s: non dubitare quvn, Ac. 

12. • No ' before another adjective, as in * o man of no great learnings' must be 

translated by rum, not nuUus,^ 

13. ' Tke,* when it relates to something that preceded, is often \o be translated 

by a demonstrative pronoun. For instance, if it had been mentioned 
that a day had been fixed, if it were afterwards stated that * the day * ar- 
rived, it must be *that day* in Latin. 

f;^ Hence, when *the* means a particular thing before-mentioned, 
it must be translated by a demonstrative pronoun. Or, in other words, 
when for *^' we might substitute *that,* it must be translated by the 
demonstrative pronoun. [Compare Caution 4.]* 
14 * That,* in a clause following a comparative with quam, or aliut, malle, Ae., 
is not tnmslated. 
{Eng.) I had rather support my countrjr's cause than that of a private 

man. 
(Lat,) PatruB caus am mala, quam privati sustinsre. 
IB. Take care not to translate *oj* by a gen., in the following constructions ;-« 
(a) To deserve well of any body, bene mereri de aliquo. 

(6) To complain of any thing, querl de aliqui re. 

(c) To be made qf any thing, factum esse ex allquH re. 
{d) A book of mine, liber mens, 

(«) How many qf us, three hundred of us, Ac. See Pr. Intr. Pt. 1. 17^ 
175. 

16. Take care not to translate *€n* or *upon* by ntper, in the following con- 

structions : — 

(1) To lavish, Ac. — upon any body, conferre — in aliquem. 

(2) To do any thing on his march, in itinere. 

(3) To sit on a throne, in solio sedere. 

(4) On this behig known, > ,^^ ^^ ^ , ^ ^,^ 
Upon , ) 

(5) To write on a subject, scribere de (sometimes super) aUquS re, 

(6) On descrying the troops, * the troops being descried,' obL abs. 

17. Take care not to translate *for* hy pro, in the following constructions:— 

(1) F\>r many reasons, multis de causis. 
I*or which reason, qui de causi. Cie, 
For a weighty reason, gravi de caus&. Cte. 
The reasons/or which, . . . causs, propter quas, Ac 



* I have inadvertently referred sometimes to this Caution instead of to Cau- 
tion 4. 



306 OAVTIONS. 

For that reaflon, o& earn causam. Cii, 
Far this reason, ^pfropttr hoc. 

(2) Good or useful jfor any purpose, utilis ad aliquid. 
Fit/or, aptus or idoneus ad aliquid : also dative. 

(3) For^ ^ a oaii«e, abL 

(4) ¥*Ofr := amceming^ e. g. to battle^ any thing, de aliqu2 re. 

(5) My reason^or not doing this, oauro nonJaciend<B hujua reL 

*8u Amongatj before the name of a nation, amongst whom a habit prevailed, ia 
usually apud (not in^) : sometimes * in * with abl. 

19. When two substantives are governed by the same prepontuniy the preposition 

is repeated, imleu the two aubetantives are to forrn^ as it were, one com^ 
plex notion. Hence they are repeated whenever the two substantives 
are opposed to each other. Hence in 

(a) rf— e<; nec—nec; . . . always repeat the preposition. 

(6) out— out; vd—^d ^ 

after msi^ > generally : it is better, therefore, 

after quam following a comparative, ) to repeat it.* 

Thus : et in bello etin pace: nee in bello nee in pace: in nuUd aUd re 
nisi in virtute : in nuUd alid re quamm virtvte. 

20. Take care not to use apparere when * appears ' == * seems ' (ru2efur) : nor to 

use videri (but apparere) when appears = * is manifest s* or * makes tXa 
appearance.* 

21. A boy who is thoughtful is never perplext. 

By * then^B^ meaning ^at that time,* aSd ^therefore,* and ^nest' 
(a) Then, =z * at that timej* tum tunc; =s *next,* deinde; = 'there- 
fore,* igitur, &c. 
23. * Men * is often used for * soldiers,' mUiies. ' His men ' should be * sui,* if 
there is any reference to their commander : if not, milites, * the soldiers,* 

23. * Before * a town should be ad, not ante. See I. 457. 

24. Choose often means, to ^wish^ to ^he pleaded,* <&c., vdle, not eUgere, <&c.« 

e. g. *if you had chosen to do this' {si voluisses). 

25. In modem English there is often used for thither, and must be translated by 

the adverbs meaning *to that place* {hue, iUuc, &c.) 

26. * Crime* is not crimen (which is ^acharge* ' an accusation*) but«;e^u«,/aet- 

nus, &c, 

27. Take care not to translate after by post, in the following constructions : 

(1) To be reconciled q/2er a quarrel, reconciliari in gratiam e x inimMntiis, &e. 

(2) Immediately after the battle, cor^festim a pros Ho. 

28. Take care not to translate in by * in,* in the following construction : 
(1) It is written in Greek authors, scriptum est apud Grcscos. 

29. In* this is life,* let * this * with * life * agree : 
Hoc id, or illud, barbarous would be. 

30. * Ought * Is a word that requires care : for it is often translated by an im- 



* Sometimes a common preposition preceding the conjunction is not repeatod 
withei—eti arU-^aut; e. g. cum etnoctumoetdiumomeiu. 



CAUTIONS. 807 

perfect or fut. indicative, where our idiom would lead us to use the 

present, 
(a) When a present duty^ <&c., exists, but is not acted upon, the imperfect is 

often used, especially when it is a general duty, {Madvig. 308.) 
5^ Hence, when *yau ought^ = ' you ought (but do not),' use aeot- 

ham or oportebat. 
{b) When ought refers to what tpUl be right or proper, when or after spme* 

thing has taken place, use oportebiC, ddtebo. 
(1) The * after* is often implied by an abl. absoL, the participle being of the 

passive voice. 

31. Remember the, care with which the Romans mark both X\iQ eomplUum o{ 

every precedent action, and the futurity of eyery future action, 
(a) Remember that the fut, perf, of direct becomes the pluperf aubj. in 
oblique narration. 

32. When one verb has 'indeed,* and the next *bui,* take care not to omit the 

pronoun in Latin, if the nom. to the verb is a pronoun, 
(a) This pronoun should be followed by the quidem : if it is ego, write equv' 
dem for ego quidem.* 

{Eng.) He did not indeed laugh, but he smiled. 

{LkU.) Non ritit ille quidem^ sed aubrisit, 

33. When for 'so that* (introducing a consequence) you could put Hn ntch a 

manner, that,* take care not to use tU only, but ita,-^ut, placing the ita 
in the preceding sentence. 

34. Take care to use a disttibutii^ numeral instead of a cardinal one, with a 

plural noun used in a singular sense, as Uteres, caatra, &c. 
f:^- But observe, vni and temi are used, not Hnguli or trini. 



* For equidem, though probably not compounded of ego quidem, is yet used 
where quidem with the peraoTMl pranTim would be used for the second or third 

person. 



TABLE 
or 

DIFFERENCES OF IDIOM, 



EnGUSH. hATlV. 

1. AU^who or wkUhf Ac. ) Often : — all — oM-many-at (onmea — 
AU men^who. > quotquot) : which is strozjiger ; =r all 

wUfunit exception. 

2. This was not done till afterwards. This was done afterwards at length 

{poatea demum). 
C Nothing is beautiful, but what, 

< J%ose things onlywre beautiful, 7%m« things o^^^^ {ea demum) 
( which, which. 

3. What do you mean by a wooden Quern tu Intelligis murum ligneum t 

wain 

4. I am reproached with ignorance. Ignorance is objected {objicitur or ex- 

probratur^ which is stronger) to me. 
Participial Substantive. 

5. [Norn.] Grieving. Doldre. 

Your wparvng the conquered is a It is a great thing, that you have spareJ 
ereat thing:. the conquered. 

glagnum est, quod yidis peperd^.] 
_„ ^ „ olSre. 

[SepeocaU in»imvUmty quod dolert 
intermiserint.] 

7, Pbom, with part, subst. : — 

(1) To prevent any thing from h^g Prafci6«re— aliquid/cri* {rare), 
done, n efat. 

quominuojlat, 

(2) Either from thinking, that, Ac, Sive eo quod — exietimarent^&c 

(3) YiQdX&iifromremnnbering, Ex eo quod meminiooetjAc, 

(4) i^ar/rom doing this, &c. Tantum abest^ut hoc faeiai, 

ut, Ac. 

(5) Not from despising — but be- iVbn yuod aspemaretur— sed quod, Ao 
cause, &c. 

8. By:— 

[The most usual way is the gerund 
in do; or partic. in due (in 
agreement).] 



♦ Principally with the inf. pass. : ignea fieri in eaatri$ prohibit (Ces.), 
prohibuit migrari Veioa{lAT,). 



TABLE OF DIFFEB£NC£S OF IDIOM. 



309 



English. 
By doing this. 
9. Ik.— 

To be wrong in thinking, Ac, 

10. Without: — 

(1) He did any thing wUfunU bang 
(uked, 

(2) He went away without reading 
the letter. 

(3) Many praise poets i^»(Aoii<t<ni2ar- 
Uanding them. 

(4) He never praised him toiihrnU 
odding, &c, 

(5) Nor ever saw him toUhotU calling 
him a fratricide. 

(6) I enjoy any thing indeed, but not 
without perceiving, dtc. 

(7) I enjoy any thing without per- 
ceiving, Ac. 

11. To: — Grenerally ad, with part, in 

dus. See Obs. on Fob. 

12. Through :— By part, in dug, abl. 

of gerund; or by ex eo quod 
with subj. See Df. 7, From 
<2). 
tl2. Op :— -The gerund in di, or the 
part, in dus, in the gen., is the 
most usual form ; but these forms 
do not always senre. 
(1) * Let nobody repent ofhaving 

preferred following,' Ac, 
{2\ *I do not despair of there 
D e 1 n e some one,' Ac, 
I *I think he should repent of 
laving given up hisopinion.' 
(4) * They accused Socrates o f c o r- 
r u p t i n g,' Ac. 



Latih. 
(Often) 'ihii being done,' (abL ab&). 

In hoe errare, quod putem, Ac 

Non rogaiua. 

He went away, the Utter not being read 

{epiitold non leetS), 
Many praise poets, nor under&tand 

them {neque intelligunt). 
He never praised him so that he did 

not add (u t nonadjiceret). 
Nor ever saw him but she called him a 

fratricide {quin—c o mp ellaret). 
1 90 enjoy any thing, that I perceive 

[aliqu& re ita potior, ut animadver- 

tam, Ac.] 
1 90 enjoy any thing, that 1 Jo not per- 
ceive [aliquftre ita potior, vt non 
ivertam, Ac] 



ceive fal 
animadv 



'\: 



(5) 'Instead of.' See 32. 

13. For:— 

(1) * Pardon me f o r w r i t i n g.' 

(2) *To revile, abuse a man for 
having done any thing.' 

(3) * Many reasons occurred to me 
for thinking,' Ac. 

(4) 'Ithankvoufor compelling 
me to do tids.' 

*You are greatly to blame for 
laving done this.' 

14. And not. 

And nobody, nothing, nowhere, 
never, no 



'\: 



And hardly any.» 



Ne quern paenitecU sequi maluiota, 
Non despero fore aliquem, <^. 

EgoiUi, quoddesuaeententiddeceo' 
9i9 8et, pasnitendum cen9eo, 

Socratemaecusartmt, quod corrum^ 
p eret, ^k. 



Ignooct mihi, quod 9cribam, 
MaUdicere Jiomim, cur fecerit, <f«. 

Multa mihi veniebant in mentem, 
quamobrem putarem, <f«. 

Gratiae ago, quod me {hoc facere) 
eoegieti. 

Magna tuA est culpa, qui hoc feeeris. 

Nor. 

Nor any thing, nor any body, nor anv 
where, nor ever, nor any (nee quvu 
quam, quis^piam, usquam, unquam, 
ullu9 (or avMquqm). 

Nor scarcely any {neque uUusfere), 



* The exceptions are, (1) When the negative is to be emphatic, et 9emper me 
vluit et a studiis noatris non abhorret: (2) When et non or ae non^=nai 
•vther or much more =s ac non potius (the potius being often expressed), si res 
verba postularet, ac non pro ae ipso loqucrctur. 



810 



TABLE OF DIFFERENCES OF IDIOM. 



English. 
16. Hardly any. 

Hardly any body. 
16. Your ) 

His > accomplishments. 
Their i 
f 7. After with the participial mibai. 
is mostly translated by the perf. 
participle. 



18. It isldnd in you to ask me, Ac. 



19. I shall accompUsh tohat, &c. 



20. II they happen to do, &e, 

21. It is ascribed, <&c. (of a general 

truth). 

22. Am2 ^/im Aristotle I (i. e. is not he 

a case in point 1 &c. in appeals 
introduced in an argument.) 

23. A. i» rigid in saying. 

24. From which. 

25. It seems likely [enough] that he 

will callj <&c. 

26. .Fbi^-no/, Ac. 



27. A strange fury 



28. Must (of a necessary inference). 
See to what a condition the state 

must come. 
He must have made great progress. 
What progress he must have made ! 

29. To be on the point of being killed. 

To be on the point to run. 

30. Ita, aic are often used where they 

seem superfluous, «. g. 
(1) With verbs of kearingy learnings 
qMrmingf doubtin^^ 4^, — ^They are 
then generally followed by the in- 
fin. (if the verb would otherwise 
be so constructed), or with ut and 
the subj. 



(2) Also in adverbial sentences of 
equality : He thinks as he speaks. 
To do any thing as if, &c. 
It is as is said. 
31. In the case of the Nervii. 
^2. Participial substantive with 'in- 
stead of.* 



Latut. 

Prope ntdlus. 
NeTnofere. 

SoTMtimes : ' the accompllshmenta 
uihich are in yoUj hirrif t/i«m,* <&c. 

(Eng.) After having suffered (or «*/• 
I fcrin^) this, I went, Ac. 
"S (Lat.) Uaving suffered this, I went, 

Ac. 
' (Eng.) After consuming the com, he 
went, Ac. 

(Lat.) The com being consumed^ he 
^ went, Ac. 
You act kindly indeed, (in) that you 

ask me. 
{fads amice tu quidem, ^uoci me rogas, 

Ac.) 
(Often) I shall accomplish that {hoe of 

iUud)f quodj Ac. : i. e. the dem. pron. 

is often inserted. 
If perchance they do, Ac. {si forte). 
It is wont {solef) to be ascribed 

(Often: not always.) 
What Aristotle? 
Quid Aristoteles ? 

A. rightly says {rede). 

Often * iDfience ;* unde. 

He seems about-to-call {videtur voca 
turus), 

Neque enim : but non enifri is not «7i» 
common even in Cic. ; and is to be 
preferred, when there is any anti- 
thesis : i. e. when followed by a * bvi.^ 

A certain strange fury {quidam after the 
adj. — this addition of quidam to an 
adj. is very common). 

Cic. often translates this by putare. 

Vide quern in locum rempublicam ten- 
turam putetis, 

PtUandus est multum profecisse. 

Quos progressus eumputamus fecisse ! 

In eo esse ut interficeretur ; or with 
part, in rus with Jam. 

Jam cursurum esse. 

Examples. — 1. Sic a majoribus suis ac- 
ceperant, tanta esse beneficia, Ac. 
C. — 2. Quum sibi ita persuasisset 
ipse, meas — literas, &c.(withi7ifm.) 
C.—3. Se ita a patribus didvcisse^ vi 
magis virtute quam dolo contend- 

erent. Cces. — 4. ito'Helvetios 

institutes esse, ut consuerint, Ac. 

CiBs. — 5. Ita enim definit, ut pertur 
batio sit. 

Jta sentit ut loquitur. 
Jta facere aliquid — tanquam. 
Est ita ut dicitur. 
in Nerviis, 



TABLE OF DIFFERENCES OF IDIOM. 



311 



English. 
(1) Instead of reading, &c. 



(2) Why do you laugh instead of 
crying? 
33. Participial subst. with * far from.' 

(1) Far from doing this, he does that, 

(&C. 

(2) To he far from doing any thhig. 

(3) To be not far from doings Ac. 



34. (1) A, B, C, and such, Ac. > 

similar, Ac. J 

(2) A, B, C, and the rest. > 
— others, > 

35. Despairing. 

36. Not rcry ancient. 

37. The most wretched of atf« la t0«. 

38. ThovaryoelebratodOfaoia 



Latin. 
Quumpoaeity or quum deb eat fe- 

Sere, <&c., according as the thing nut 
one was a duty omitted^ or merely 
a thing that might liave been done. 
Cur rides ac non potius lacrima- 
ris7 

(1) Tantum abest ut—vJt (with subj.) — 
or, if the verb has a 'no^' with it, 
tantum abest vi — ut ne — quicUm^ <&c. 

(2) Longs abesse ut^ (ftc. (e. g. ille lon- 
gissime aberitj ut credat, &c.) 

(3) Pautum^ baud' or nxm muUum^ oi 
haud procut abesse^ ut, &c. 

Obs. The abesse is to be used im- 
personally, 

A, B, C, such. 

similar. 

A, B, C, the rest. 

A; B, C, others. 

Since he despairs, p Consider which 

Since he despaired. > form should be 

(Quum with subj.) Jj used. 

Not so ancient, non ita antiquus : but 
non valde, non admodum, are not bar- 
barous, as some teach. 

The most wretched state qf aU. 

( Cioero, a very celebrated man. 

{Oioero, vir€ 



MEMORIAL LINES. 



1. ContingU nm of things we like, 
But aecidii when evils strike. 

2. ^omn<iiu> let me never see Jusentifiiw nuBtk 

3. For erinitf let crtmen never come, 
But 9celu»,faemuMjJtagUium, 

4. When the word <mm' means 'aoldienj these 
Should rendered be bymititefu 

5. The boy has but a stupid head, 
Who always for a *6tt<' puts ted 

Or at: for other meanings * frul * has got; 

< Onfy,* 'ftrcepr,' *ai lead,' and *ieAo' with 'wft,* 

(See Caution 11.) 

5 A boy who is thoughtful is never perplezt 

By tAm's meaning < at that time ' and * therefore * and ' next' 

(SeeCautiaii21.) 

7. In *thUiBlife' \et'thia' with *life' agree; 
Hoc, id or ittucf barbarous would oe. 

8. Jn*ao many apiece ' leave apiece quite alone ; 
But of numerals use a distributive one. 

9. After these impersonals i<< 

' Or ne will be correctly putf 

Contingitf evenit, or aecidit, • 

With reetatf reliquiMi eat andjEf.* 

10. Let * thai * translated be by quOf 
When with comparatives it does go. 

11. Vereor ne, I fear he will; 
Vereor ut, I fear he tDonU : 



12. 



TvLmfut. by oubjunctive present 
After fears forget it donx 

By lit translate infinitive 

with fltfAr, eommandy advise, and strive. i 

But never be this rule forgot : 

Put ne for ut when there's a not. 



* So after sequitur sometimes. 

b Under ask are included beg, pray, beeee^ Ac ; under coMUAxm, dlargo^ 
Hreet, Ac. s under advisb, exhoii, adminishf permadCf impel, intbtei, da 



VERSUS MEMORIALES 



1. SvMiMus uBuri, CAPISIU8QUE ut po88ideamu8 f * 
PBENDUNTUSQ.UB numu Yolumus qufficunque temrd. 

2. Qui qucBrit bepebit, non qiuBsUa iNyENiuirruB.b 

3. Navis, equus, cumisque vbhitnt ; fobtabit asellus 
Pondera, POBTABUNTqueliumeri: leviora febuntur. 
LsBva oEBiT clipeum, vestesque gebuntub et arma. 

4. Tu 6UCCENDE rogum ; tsedas accende facesque. 

5. VUia DESPICIMU8 : contemke periculOf miles ; 
Spebne voluptatesyfoedasqu6 iibidinis escaa.^ 

6. Pars ORM est litvs : retinentar flumina bipis. 

7. Clausa aut tecta apebi : fatefit quod reHat apertum,l 

8. Rarius intebdum quam NONNVNauAM esse memento. 

9. Olim prceteritum spectatque futurwn.* 

10. Bis tebq,ue augebit, minuet bis tebve notatum. 

11. Mens JBOBA est, carpii«que jbobum : de corpore solo 
^GB0TT7M dicas : nunt animalia tantum. 
MoBBiDA, non homines: haec tu discrimina serves. 

12. De spatio nusquam dicas, de tempore k^nqvam. 

13. Plbbs sciscitf jubet at fopvlus, cmsetque ssNATUfiL 

14. Nemo ablaiimim nee habet, nee hdhet genitivum j ^^,^7^^^* 

15. Particulas at, ecquid, nisi^ ne num fobtb sequatur.r 



* But capere arma occurs as well as suvure arma, 

b This is true of reperircj but invenire is the general term for *Jtnding, even 
after search or examination, 

Despicbbb relates to what we might value or respect: coirrEMNEBE to what 
we miffhtfear or think important: spebnebe to what we might accept^ or to oh 
jects tnat we might pursue, 

d Hence aperire os{neYerpatefacere): oculoa aperireox patefacerei 
ffortaa {fores, ostium) aperire or patefacere ; viam ajjerire, {for one occasion), 
patefacere {to throw it open), Aperire is also * to m^ike a thing visible,* Patefc^ 
cere often implies the permanent removal of obstacles. 

• Hence olim ^^ formerly, informer days once upon a time, and hereafter, 

t That is, perhaps or perchance must never be/or/« {hut fortasse with indie.) 
except after the particles si, &c. The real meaning of forte is * bu accident,* *by 
chance,* and it does not lose this meaning after si, &c, : this is auK) the original 
meaning of perchance, perhaps, 

14 



814 YERSirS KEMORIiXBS. 

16. Dat "ficio^ 'fieiort -faao sed dat tibi 'fio.f 

17. Q,uicquidhabetpenDa8 'tolucus' complectltur: alio 
Magna avis est : oscen praedicit voce fiitura. 

18. Ne potiuB quam rum post dum, modo, dummodo dicas. 

19. Et 9iu>r6um et morbi spectat )ii«d«»iii«na sano s 
JEigrotum luoxom spectat medieuimque peiitum. 

20. * Aique igitur' praTum est ^igUurqus^ — *idxo4Ub' Latinum eetH 

21 . * Major adhue* RomsB dicebat serior aetas : 

Cum Cicerone *etiam* sed tu, et cum Cflssare dicas.! 

22. FxsTiNABX potes minium.' pbopxkaxb virorum est 
Optatam qmcunque yolunt contingere metam. 

23. Rectius in navem quam nave imponere dicas: 
Dicere sed nan, scribas si carminai fas e8t.J 

24. Quod eemia pkocitl esse potest t quss longnu absunt 
Humanum efiuglent rerum discrimina visum-k 

25. *iVb»— porifer* vites: <non—«9tM' dicere las est. 

26. Nee {neque) *9ero* habeat post se : non accipit autem, 

27. Particulas u<, ne recte mv, nxyb sequuntur.i 

28. EziMO qu8B maJa sunt; adimo bona; demere possum 
Quidlibei :— haec teneas justo discrimine verba. 



t That is, the compounds of f ado that retain the a, have Jio in the passive. 
Conficio has confdor^ according to the rule here given : but also somotimea 
ymfieri. 

h That is, never use igUur when * eonaequenUy * or * thertfore ' follows * and r" 
but ideo: — et ideOy atque ideo^ or ideoque. 

i That is, etiam is the classical word for *aHU* or < yet,* with companitivea \ 
not adhuc. 

1 MUUea in navem imwrnere. CaBS. Liv.: nave, Suet.— cart ncs, O^ 

k Proeult fax off but within eighis longe, aoiai off Batobeouiqf aigkL 

1 But nee, nequeoxe sometimes fomid: e. g. Liv. 24, 3. 



VOGABUIART, 



djv « anytxMly 

atog » anything 

ci B alioui 

q& a aliquft 

C8 » alicu|u8 

qd = aliquid 

qo «» aliqtto 



qm a aliquem 
qnn = aliquorum 
qs => aliquos 

* means that the phrase is not found 
in the classics, though pzobaMy 
correct. 



Ahue, y. (qd. re perveise uti or abuti ; 
or immodice, iutemperanter, inso- 
lenter abuti, when the a. lies in ex- 
cess : e, g, to a. = trespass on a 
man's indulgence or patience, in- 
dulgentift, patienti4 C8 immodice 
abuti). To a. a person os rail at 
(conviciis qm cousectari or inces- 
sere)« To load or cover a man 
with a., to heap every kind of a. on 
a man (omnibus maledictis qm 
Texan; omnia maledicta in qm 
oonferre). To fling a. at a man 
(maledicta in qm conjicere). To 
overwhekn aby with a. (qm contu- 
meiiis operire atque opprimere). 

Abuse (usus or abusuB perversus). 
An a. ■» a bad custom (mos pra- 
vus). To remove abuses (mores 
pravos abolere). 

Access, To have a. to atbg (habere 
aditum ad qd) : to aby (ci ad qm 
aditus patet). He is easy of a. 
(aditus ad eum est facilis). He is 
easy of a. to private individuals 
(faciles aditus sunt ad eum privato- 
mm). He is difficult of a. (aditus 
ad eum sunt difficiliores). An a. 
of fever (accessio febris). I grant 
a. to me to everybody (omnibus 
oonvenieudi mei potestatem facio). 

Accessible (facilis accessu : of places). 
He is 9. to flatterers, or flattery 



(qm or facilem aditum ad auras 
ejus adulatores habent.) 

Acclamations, To receive athg with 
a.'s (plausa et clamore prosequi 
qd). 

Account (ratio). To look through an 
a. (rationem cognoscere, inspicere). 
To go through a man's accounts ; 
to examine them carefully (cs ra- 
tiones excutere, dispungere). The 
debtor and creditor a/s balance 
(par est ratio e, g. acceptorum et 
datomm, accept! et expensi). To 
state and balance a.'s (rationes con- 
ficere et consolidare). To compare 
a.'s (rationes confeire). To bring 
a sum of money to a. (pecuniam in 
rationem inducere). To demand 
an a. from aby (rationem ab qo re- 
petere). To render an a. (rationem 
reddere with gen, of thing). To 
call upon a man to give an a. of 
his life (ab qo vit» rationem re- 
poscere). 

Acquit. To be unanimously acquit- 
ted (omnibus sentontiis absolvi). 

Advantage; Benefit To gain, de^< 
rive a. or b. from athg (utilitatem or 
fructum ex q& re capere or perci- 
pere). It is to my a. (est e re me&, 
or est in rem meam). 

Advice, To give a. (ci consilium 
dare). To Sak, a. of aby (peter« 
consilium ab qo). To follow aby's 
a. (sequi cs consilium: cs consilio 



816 



TOOABULARY. 



Qti t). To do athg by aby'a a. (qd 
faeere de or ez ca^cooailio). 

Advocate (adyocatos, one who aeeiet' 
ed toith his advice ; patroniu, one 
toho pleaded the caiue). To em- 
ploy or engage an a. (adoptare nbi 
pationum or defensorem, if the per^ 
eon ia accused : deferre causam ad 
patronum). 

Affluence, To live in a. (in omniom 
rerum abondantiSt yivere. Circum- 
fluere omnibus oopiis atqae in om- 
nium rerum abundantiA. viveie. C. 
Am. 15). 

Affront, To put an a. on aby (con- 
tumeliam ci impbnere). To look 
upon athg aa an a. (qd in or ad 
contumellam accipere). 

Alms. To beg for a. from aby (sti- 
pem emendicare ab qo). To live by 
a. (aliens miaericordiA. vivere). To 
give a. (stipem spargere, largiri). 

dimbition. To be ambitious; to be 
led by a. (g1ori& duci, ambitione 
teaeri). From a. or ambitious mo- 
tives (gloriJi ductus). To be fired 
with a. (ambitione accensum esse). 

Answer. To receive an a. (respon- 
sum ferre, auferre). I received for 
a. (responsum est). To a. (if by 
letter, rescribere). To return no 
a. (nullum responsum dare). To a. 
not a word (nullum yerbum re- 
spondere). 

Appetite. To have a good a. (liben- 
ter cibum suihere, of an invalid: 
libenter ccBuare). To have no a. 
(* cibum fastidire). To give a man 
an a. ; produce an a. (appeteutiam 
cibi faeere, praestare, invitare). To 
get an a. by walking (opsonare am- 
bulando famem). 

Arrival, To be impatient for — or look 
forward with impatience to aby's a. 
(cs adventum non mediocriter cap- 
tare). 

Audience. To grant aby an a. 
(admittere qm). To have an a. 
^dmitti; aditum ad qm habere), 
^fore a numerous a. (frequentibus 
auditoribus ; magna audientium ce- 
lebritate). 



t Alag 08 consilio ol>teinperare. 



B 

Baggage (sarclna, baggage of indi 
vidual soldiers; impedimenia, oj 
the army generally). To take th« 
h. (impedimenta capere: impedi- 
mentis potiri). To strip the enemy 
of all their h. (omnibus impediment 
tis hostes exuere). To lose one's 
b. (impedunenta amittere: impedi- 
menfis exui). To fight whilst en- 
cumbered with one's b. (sub onere 
confligere). To attack the enemy 
whilst they are encumbered with 
their baggage, before they have 
disencuml^red themselves of their 
b. (hostes sub sarcinis adoriri). To 
hide their b. in the wood (impedi 
menta m silvas abdere). To plun 
der the b. (impedimenta diripere.^ 

Banish, Banishment. To banish ; to 
drive into banishment Tezsilio affi- 
cere, in exsilium ejicere, pellere, 
ezpellere, agere, ex urbe or civitate 
pellere, expellere, ejicere. ex nrbe 
exturbare. de civitate ejicere. In 
Roman law ci aquft, et igni inter- 
dicere, to compel a man to go into 
b. by forbidding aby to give him 
fire or water: he kept the remk 
of a Roman citizen, but lost aU 
its privileges and honors; rde- 
eare, to send him to a fixed place, 
out without loss of rank or goods; 
doportare, to banish him for life to 
some desert spot, with loss of rank 
and property : this kind of b. be- 
longed to the times of the Casars). 
To banish aby for ten yeais (rele- 
gare in decem annos). To b. aby 
to an island for life (deportare in 
insulam). To b. from the society 
of men (relegare ab hominibus) 
To recall from b. (revocare de or 
ab exsiiio, reducere de exsilio, in 
patriam revocare or restituere). — 
To return from b. (exsilio redire). 

Battle. A b. by land (proelium ter 
restre) ; by sea (proelium navale ; 
pugna navalis). A long and severe 
b. was fought (puguatum est diq 
atque acriter). To draw an army 
out in b. array . to ofier b. (exer* 
citnm 'n aciepA e^ucore). Tq b^ 



▼OOABULARY. 



317 



gin th« K ; to join b. (proBliom com- 
mitteret). To fight a b. (pnoBlinm 
0r pngnam facere or edere). To 
renew the b. (L e. after an inter- 
vol: pugnam repetere). To re- 
store the b. ; to restore the fortune 
of the day (pugnam novam inte- 
grare, prceUum redintegrare or reno- 
vare : generally of fresh troops 
arriving). To renew the b. the 
next day (postero die pngnam ite- 
rare). To win the h, (praelio or 
pugn& superiorem discedere ; victo- 
rem pnnlio excedere). To wis a b. 
(secundo Marte pugnare : rem pros- 
pere gerere). To lose the b. (pug- 
nd, inferiorem discedere: pnnlio 
vinci or superari). To lose a b. 
(adverse Marte pugnare : rem male 
gerere). To offer aby b. (ci pug- 
handi potestatem facere). To fight 
a pitched b. (dimicare). 

Benefit, See Advantage. 

Blame. I am to b. (mea cnlpa est). 
Nobody is to b. but myself (culpa 
mea propria est). To lay or throw 
the b. on aby (culpam or causam 
in qm conferre, transferre : the lat- 
ter of removing it from one's self, 
vertere). One throws the b. on an- 
other (causam alter in alteram con- 
fert). To be to b. (in noxA. esse or 
teneri ; in culp& esse). 

Blood. To stanch b. (sanguinem 
sistere, supprimere, cohibere). To 
thirst for b. (sanguinem sitbre). To 
cost aby much b. (multo sanguine 
ci stare). To shed one's b. for one's 
country (sanguinem pro patrift, pro- 
fundere; sanguinem suum patriss 
largiri). To & connected with aby 
by the ties of b. : to be related to 
aby (sanguine cum qo conjunctum 
esse : sanguine attingere qm). To 
do athg in cold b. (consulto et cogi- 
tatum facere qd). To shed b. (ccb- 
dem or sanguinem facere : commit 
murder). My own flesh and b. 
(i. e. children: viscera mea or 
nostra). To take some b. from aby, 
to Ueod aby (ci sanguinem mit- 
tere). 



t Or manum conserere. 



Body. The liody is worn out, e g 

with labors, diseases (conficitur). 
Bury, Buried, Burial. See Funeral 



Calamity, Affliction, Misfortune, 
Misery. C. visits aby (affligit qm 
calamitas). To contrive aby's mis- 
ery or c. (calamitatem ci machi- 
nari). To fall into a. (in calamita- 
tem incidere). Misfortune happens 
(accidit calamitas). To be in afflic- 
tion or misery (in malis esse or ja- 
cere ; malis urgeri : in miseriA esse 
or versari). To be the cause of a 
man's misery or misfortune (cala- 
mitatem ci afferre, inferre, impor- 
tare). To alleviate aby's a. (c» 
calamitatem levare). To ward off 
a. from aby (qm prohibere calami- 
tate, or a calamitate defendere). 
To pine away in a. or misery (in 
calamitate tabescere). To be born 
to' misery (miseriis ferendis natum 
esse). To sufier a misfortune, mi- 
dergo a. (calamitatem capere, ac- 
cipere, subire). To bear a misfor- 
tune (calamitatem ferre, tolerare). 
To be cast down by misfortune 
(calamitati or ad calamitatem ani- 
mum submitteret). 

Circumstances. According to c.'s 
(pro re. pro re nat&—- ex or pro 
tempore). Trifling c. (parvae res, 
parva momenta : the latter of points 
on which athg turns). C.'s of the 
time (tempora (pi.) : temporum ra- 
tio: temporum vincula. C. Fam 
X.6). 

Cloud. The heavens are covered with 
c.'s (caelum nubibus obducitur). 

Cold. To be able to endure c. (algo- 
ris, frigOris patientem esse). To be 
benumbed with c. (gelu torpere). 

Copy, see Example. 

Com: Provisions. Com is rising or 
getting up (annona carior fit ; in- 
gravescit, incenditur): is falling 
(laxat or levaturl). To keep back 



t Brut, in Cic. Ep. 11, 3, 3. Liv S3, S5. 

t Hence, to lower th« price of e., anno- 
nam levare or laxare ; to raise it, keep 
or force it up, incendere— «bo exoando- 
facere, flageilare. 



418 



TOCASULABT. 



their c. (amumam or framentam 
eomiiriiiiere). To be Btraitened for 
provurions : to be in want of c (re 
fhimentarift. laborare). Fhvrkiiona 
are acaroe (annou^ laboratnr). To 
get in a better aupply of c, to 
remedy their deficient supply of c 
(rei frumentaria mederi : rem fra- 
mentariam expedire). To order 
the atatee to bring in ao much c 
(frumentum imperare civitatibua). 
Deameaa, cheapnesB of p. (annonm 
caritas, vilitaB). - 



Danger, Endanger, Peril To un- 
dergo d. • (periculnm obiroi adire, 
fubire, auscipere). To expose one's 
ielf to d. (in periculum so ofierre, so 
inferre, in discrimen se conferre» 
inferre, or objiceret). To peril one's 
life for aby (inferre se in periculum 
capitis atque y'ltm discrimen pro cs 
salute). To bring aby into d. : to 
endaugor (qm in periculum or dis- 
crimen adducere, deduceroi vocare) : 
into great or extreme d. (multum 
periculi ci inferre : magnum, sum- 
mum, maximum in periculnm qm 
adducere). To bring the state into 
extreme d. (reropublicam in pnn- 
ceps dare). To seek or endeavor 
to bring aby into d. (periculum ci 
intendere or moliri). To be in d. 
(in periculo esse or yeisari, in dubio 
cBB^^^f life). To be in extreme 
d. of things (in maximum pericu- 
lum et extremum pteno discrimen 
adductum cBB^—^f thing* : in pne- 
cipiti esse ; in extremo situm esse). 
To share d.'s (pericula commuui- 
care). D.'s threaten aby: or aby 
is threatened with d. (instant ci 
peiicula. from aby, ab qo). At 
my«own risk (meo periculo). To 
ward off d. from aby (periculum ab 
qo prohibere ; propulsare). There 
19 d. that (periculum est ne). At 
his own risk and expense (sumptu 
periculoque suo). To fall into d. 
(in periculum venire, incidere). 



t IM se periculo exponere. 



Athg is endangeied (qd in dSiscn 
men venit). 

Darhwne: Dark: Obeeurity, Oh' 
•cure. To make athg dark (d rei 
tenelHt» obdncere ; or obscuritatem 
et tenebr^s offondere). To be or 
remain in darimees; to be reeted 
in obscurity (in tenebris latSre ; ob- 
Msuritate involntnm latSre). To be 
buried hi impenetrable darkness 
(craaris oocnltatnm et cireumfusum 
tenebris latSre). Bom of an ob- 
scure family; of obscure origin 
(obsenro loco natus, obscuris ortus 
majoribus). To explain what is 
obscure (res obseuras explanare: 
res mvolntas explicare). 

Death, Die. To die a violent d 
(violentA, morte perire). To die by 
his own hands: commit suicide 
(suft, se uHcn inteificere: mortem 
sibi consciseere, or inferre). To 
meet d. with resignation (leque 
animo mortem oppetere: fidentt 
animo ad mortem gradi). To seek 
or court d. (mortem expetere). To 
meet an honorable d. (honesto 
occumbere). To punish with d. 
(morte multare ; supplicio afficere) 
The punishment is d. (ci rei sup- 
plicium coostitntnm est). To con- 
demn to d. (capitis or capite dam- 
nare, condemnare). To die of 
athg (ex qd. re mori). To starve 
himself to d. (per inediam a vit& 
discedere). To die of laughter, or 
burst with 1. (risu pene emori, 7er. 
risu pene cormere. C) To read 
one's self to d. (in studiis mori). 

Desire : Longing : Regret. To Iea« 
sen the regret that athg causer 
(lenire desidorium quod qs ex qft. r^ 
capit). To renew regret, or long- 
ing (desidorium refricare). To pine 
away with a longing d. (desiderie 
confici or tabescere). To excite oi 
kindle the d. (cupiditatem incen- 
dere). 

Disease, lU, Bad Health, Relapse^ 
Poorly, Disorder, Sickness, Sick 
To fall ill (morbo affici, ' tentari. 
corripi). To catch a d., to fall ill 
of a disorder (morbum nancisci ; m 
morbum cadere, incidere). To faM 
into bad health (in adversam TaU^ 



TOOABULABT. 



319 



tudinfim ineideie) To be danger- 
oudy ill (in pericalosnm morbum 
impUeari). To be eeyerely ill 
(gniTi or graTiore moibo implicari). 
To have bed health (infinnft. atque 
egrtL yaletndine ease). To be poor- 
ly (leviter fogiotaie, xninua belle 
▼alSre). To have a disease in his 
feetf reins, &c. (ez pedibos, reni- 
bos laborare ; pedibos egrom ease). 
To have or sofl^ from a disease 
that most end fatally (ogrotaie 
mortifere; mortifero moibo afifec- 
tnm esse* uigeri; noyissimH yale- 
tndine confliotari). To be sick or 
diseased in mind (ab animo flBgmm 
esse). To recoyer from a sicknesB 
(ez morbo conyalescere). To die 
of disease (morbo morii a morbo 
perire ; in morbum implicitum mori 
or discedere). To recoyer one's 
strength after a disease (ez morbo 
recreari; yires recoUigere). To 
haye a relapse (in morbum recidere : 
de integro in morbum incidere). 
To be afflicted with a d. (morbo 
affici; affligi, afflictari, tentari). 
To treat a Ssease ; or use a treat- 
ment, employ a method of cure to 
a d. (morbo curationem adhibere : 
to a person, curationem adhibere 
ad qm). To apply, use, or employ 
remedies agst d.'s (morbis remedia 
adhibere : Ig. morbis animi). 

E. ' 

Endanger, see Danger, 

Error, Mistake To cause a m. 
(errorem gignere, creare). To be 
in e. : labor under a m. (in errore 
esse or yersan). To see one's m. 
(erratum suum agnoscere). To lead 
aby into e. (qm in errorem indocere 
or conjicere). To remoye aby's m. 
(errorem ci eripere, eztorquere). 
From a mistaken notion (errore 
captus). 

Example, Instance, Warning, Copy. 
To produce an e. (exem( lum sup- 
ponere, proponere). To haye an e. 
ibr imitation in one's own family 
(domesticum habere ezemplum ad 
imitandum). To propose aby an e. 
fiur imitation (proponere ci ezem- 



plum ad imitandnm). To eet a 
badt e. to others (mali esse ezem- 
pli). To follow aby's o. (sequi oi 
ezemplum or victoritatem). To 
take w. by aby ; to take e. by ab> 
(capere sibi ezemplum do qo; en 
quo snmere sibi ezemplum). Tc 
set up in any person a pernicious e 
(prodere in qo pemiciosnm ezem- 
plum). To form or fiBwhion one's 
self after al^'s e. (se formare in 
mores cs). To set an e. of seyerity 
(ezemplum seyeritatis edere). For 

4. example, as an instance (ezempli 
cau8&). To send a copy of my 
letter to aby (literarum ezemplum 
ci or ad qm mittere). To set an e. 
(ezemplum pnebere, prodere). 

Excuse, Plea, To admit of an e 
(ezcusationem habere or qd excu- 
sationis). To admit of some e. (ha- 
bere qd excusationis). My igno- 
rance may be {deeded in e. : I may 
be ezcused on the ground of igno- 
rance (est mihi ezcnsatio mscientiie). 
To plead bad health in e. (excusare 
moibum or yaletudinem). To de- 
fend one's self from any charge by 
pleading or urging athg; or, on 
the plea of athg (qd cs rei ezcusa- 
tione defendere). To accept an e. 
(ezcusationem or satisfactionem ac- 
cipere). To reject or not accept 
an e. (ezcusationem non accipere 
or probare). To e. one's self to 
aby's satisfaction (satisfacere ci) 
The plea of necessity is a yalid or 
comfiete excuse for aby (necessita- 
tis ezcusatio qm facile defendit). • 

Expectation ; Expect, To lead men 
to e. athg (facere ezspectationem 
cs rei). To cause or raise in aby 
an eager e. of athg, to make aby 
eagerly ezpect athg (magnam ez- 
spectationem cs rei ci moyere,t 
commoyere, dare, a^rre : qm m ez- 
spectationem adducere). To raise 
an e. (ezspectationem concitare). 
A person satisfies or ccmes up to 
men's e.'s (opinioni honiinum re« 



t Pemiw for very had. 
t Also de : quantum tu mihi moves f 
spectationem ae sermrne BitHiU. 



820 



TOOABULABT. 



^ . saperat. 

diMfpomts them, faUit). To mir- 
paoi e. (oispectatioiMm Tinoere). 



Fate. All will soflfer the nune t 
(omnw emidem fortnns exltnm 
Uturi sunt). To mibDiit calmly to 
my tf i^hatoyer it may be (quem- 
camque caram fortana inyezerit, 
qaiete feiio). To be prepared for 
my t, whatever it may be (ad 
omnem eventam paratum eaw). 
If yoa are fated to — (si tibi fatam 
est, toith tfi/in.) The blows or 
storms of t (fulmina fortune). 
Miserable, uihappy f. (fortuia ma- 
la, afflicta, misera). Happy, pros- 
perous f. (fortana prospera, secui- 
da, florens). 

Favorite. My f. DicsBarchus (deli- 
ci» mes, Dicttarchus). That t 
PanfDtius of yous (Fanaetius ille 
tuus). 

Favor. To be in aby's f. (in gratia 
cs or cam qot esse, gratiosom esse 
ci or apud qm). To be in high f. 

. with aby (cs gratiA, florere). To 
obtain aby's f (se in gratiam ponere 
apod qm ; gratiam cs siU colligere 
or conciliare). To court aby s f. 
(gratiam cs aucupari). To forfeit 
aby's t by abasing it (gratiam cs 
effundere). To restore aby to an- 
other's £, to reconcile aby to an- 
other (qm cam qo in gratiam redu- 
cere, reconciliare, restituere). To 
receive or take again into f. (in 
gratiam recipere). To lose aby's £ 
(gratiam cs amittere. gratiA. cs ex- 
cidere). To recover aby's f. (cs 
gratiam recuperare). I'o give a 
verdict in aby's £ (secundum qm 
fudicare or litem dare). To bring 
a man into great t with aby (qm 
•pad qm magnft. in gratift, ponere). 
To ask as a f. (beneficii gtatieqne 
loco petere, ut, &c.) : to grant as a 
K (beneficii gratisque causl conce- 
deie). 

Fingers. See Hand. 

t With srerybody (apud onmes). 



FUgU, Jfy, JUe, Escape, Rout. To 
betake one's self to il (jn fugam so 
confene, dare, or conjicere). To 
put to £ (in fa^am dare, verterot 
convertere, conjicere). To rout 
(profligare). To cat off aby's t 
(fugam ci clandere or intercludero) 
To seek for safety by t (fog! sain* 
tem petere). To save one's self of 
escape by f. (ex f ag& evaders, fugt 
se eripere). There is no other 
escape fm this thing (alia faga 
oajos rei non est). To fly in com- 
plete disorder to their camp (fag& 
effusft. castra petere). To fly any- 
where (fugH locum petere: confu- 
§ere or fugam capeseere qo). To 
y away secretly, to abscond (fusrk 
se subtrahere : clam se snbducere). 

Funeral, Burial, Bury. To honor 
aby with a splendid t (ampio, ap- 
paratissimo, &c. funere efierre). 
To bury aby with military honors 
(militari honesto funere humare) 
To bury aby alive (qm vivom de- 
fodere). To be buried alive (vivum 
terrft. obrui). To be deprived of 
burial (sepulchro carere). To be 
buried in oblivion (oblivione obrui, 

' obrCltnm esse) : in the waves (undis 
obrui or hauriri). 

G. 

Gain, Profile. To make g. of aby 
(quBBstum fac6re in qo) : of athg 
(lucrum facere ex qft. re). To ob« 
tain immense profits (magnosqusBS^ 
tus pnedasque facere). To tura 
athg to profit (quaMtoi hubSre qd) 
To count athg g. (in lacro qd po- 
nere: putare esse de lacro. depa« 
tare esse in lucro). 

Glory, Renown. To gain g., renowut 
credit, &c. (laudem sibi pordre or 
colligere, gloriam qusBrere, conse- 
qai, adipisci). To have an eye to 
g. in every thing, or make glory 
his first object (omnia ad gloriam 
revocare). To cover a man with 
immortal glory (inmiortali glori4 
qm aflicere, sompitems giorie qm 
commendare). 

Graft. To g. a treo (arborem inse« 
rere. surculum arbori Inserere). Ta 



«VO0ABULART. 



321 



g. tt good pear on a wild stock 
(pinim bonam in pimm iilyaticam 



Orafting, 



0. 



H. 



Band, Traditional, Fingers, Art. 
To have a work, «= Iwok, in h. 
(opcDi iJi manibnB habSre). To 
take in one's h.'s (in manus snmere 
qd). To hold athg in one's h. 
(manu tenere qd). To have aby 
at h. u e. to help one (habere sibi 
qm ad manum). The question 
which is now under discussion 
(qufBstio qu8B nunc m manibus est). 
To be placed in our own h.'s, to be 
m our power (esse in nostrfi. manu). 
To give in : to drop my hands, i. e, 
in confession of defeat (dare ma- 
nus). Traditional (per manus tra- 
ditust). To wrest athg out of aby's 
h.'s (extorquere qd ci de manibus). 
To let the lucky opportunity slip 
through one's fingers (fortunam ex 
manibus dimittere). Athg slips 
through one's fingera (fugit, elabi- 
tur, or excidit qd e manibus : also 
elabitur de manibus). Not to stir 
or move a finger for athg (cs rei 
causft. manum non vertere). A city 
strongly fortified by art (urbs manu 
munitiasima). To lay h.'s on aby 
(manum, manus afferre, inferre, in- 
jicere ci). Not to lay h.'s on aby, to 
keep your h.'s off aby (manus ab- 
stindre a qo). The matter is en- 
tirely in your hM (hujus rei potes- 
tas omnis in vobis sita est). To die 
by one's own h.'s (see Death). 

flealth (valetudo : if by iteelf, it is 
mostly equivalent to good h., which 
is bona, prospera, firma valetudo). 
To take care, or some care, of 
one's h. (valetudini parcere; vale- 
tudinem ourare: valetudini tribu- 
ere qd). To take great care of 
your h. (valetudini tuie servire). 
For your h.'s sake (corporis tuendi 
causft). To neglect, or take no 



t E, g. religiones {rtligxmu ob$ervanee$) 
per manus traditae. 

t So, to be placed in ytur ftomb, in vestrft 
nana situm esse 



care of, one's h. (valetudinem ii0cr- 
jigere: valetudini panim parcer^« 
1^1 drink aby's good h. (salatem oi 
propinaie, Plant *amicum nomi* 
natim vocare in bibendo). Bad h 
(adveisa, legra, infirma valetudo) 
Your weak h. ox weak state of h 
(ista imbecillitas valetudinis toe). 
[Obs. after curatio, excusatio, oX'* 
cusare, &c. valetudo b bad health, 
just as in, '' to excuse himself on 
the ground of his health,** <<hlo 
health will not sufier him, &&" 
it is implied that bad health is 
meant] To enjoy good h. (bon& 
valetudine uti: excellent, optimA). 
To be in an indifierent state of h 
(valetudine minus commoda uti 
To injure one's h. by the neglect 
of one's usual exercJM (valetudinem 
intemussis exercitationibus amit- 
tere). I am recovering my h 
(melior fio valetudine). H. is re- 
established (confirmatur). To be 
in good h. (rocte valere) : in better 
health (melius valere). To enjoy 
good h. (prosperitate valetudinis uti). 

Helm, Steer. To take the h. (ad 
gubemaculum accedere). To sit 
at the h. (sedere in puppi clavum- 
que tenere. C.fig, of a statesman). 
To sit at the h. of the state (ad gu- 
bernacula reipublice sedere). To 
steer the vessel, the state (gu- 
bernacula leipublicas tenere). To 
seize the h. of the state (gubema- 
cula reipublicflB prendere). To 
drive or cast aby from the h. of the 
state (qm a gubemaculis reipubli- 
cffl repellere or dejicere). To with- 
draw from or quit the helm (a gu- 
bemaculis recedere). 

Honor. To be held in h. (esse in 
honore: of persons and things) 
To hold in h. (in honore habere) 
To bestow h.'s on aby for athg 
(honores ci habere pro qft re : ho- 
nores dare or defeire propter qm 
rem). To load aby with h.'s (qm 
honore augere, ornare, decorare). 
To lavish h.'s upon aly (effundere, 
si ita vis,t honores in qm). To be« 



t These words show that this was an 
uncommon expression. 



u* 



322 



VOOABULABY. 



■tow dnrine h.'fl in alnr (deomm 
honores ci tribaere). To niie a 
man to, or place him in, posto of h. 
(honorem ci due, mandate, cre- 
dere, committere). To annre at 
h/s (ad honoras venire, perveniie). 
To elimb to h.'s (ad honorea as- 
cendere). To pay or ahow h. to 
aby (honorem ci habere, Nep., to 
a superior). 



In, Not difficult in itself (per m non 
difficilis). To be in our favor (a 
nobis facere ; of things). In front 
(a fronte). In the eyes of men 
(apud homines). In breadth (in 
latitudinem: so in longitudinem, 
&c.) To be in the prosecutor's 
house (penos accusatorem esse : of 
witnesses in his power). To say 
athg in joke (qd per jocum dicere). 
To do athg in anger (qd per iram 
facere). 

Injury; Wrong. To commit an i. 
against aby (injuriam ci facere, 
inferre, imponere, &c. ; injuria qm 
afficere). To suffer an i. (injuriam 
accipere). To bear i. or w. (inju- 
riam pati, feire). To abstain from 
committing any i. (abstmere inju- 
ria). To pardon an i. at aby's re- 
quest (injuriam cs precibus con- 
doiiare). To forget i.'s or w.'s 
(injurias oblivione conterere). 

Invite. To mvite one's self to dine 
with aby (coenam ci condicere). 
To invite aby to dinner (qm ad 
coenam invitare, vocare). 

J. 

Jiidgef Judgment, Sentence, Opinion. 
To acquiesce in a s. (judicium ac- 
cipere, ferre). To refuse to ac- 
quiesce in a s. (judicium recusare). 
A s. procured by bribery (emtum ju- 
dicium). To form a j. or pronounce 
8. about athg (facere judicium de q& 
re or cs rei. The thing by which, 
ex re). To change my o. (animi 
judicium mutare). To ask aby's Ob 
(OS judicium exquirere). To stand or 
abide by aby's j. (cs judicio stare). 



Let otheiB judge (abomm sit ja. 
dictmn). I have always been ti a 
(meum semper judicium fiiit). T<i 
agree to abide by aby's j. in any 
matter (cs judicio qd permittere) 
To submit one's self to aby'e j 
(■nbjicei!« se cs jndicio). In my 
opinion (meo jndicio). One who 
has an opmion of his own (homo ad 
judicii). 



Knot To tie a k. (nodnm facere, 
nectore). To tie a fast k. (nodum 
astringere). To untie a k. (nodum 
solvere or ezpedire). 

Knowledge. It is easy or difficult to 
acquure a k. of these things (hec 
facilem or difficilem habent cogni* 
tionem). 

Law. To bring in a bill ; to proppRo 
a 1. (legem rogare). The poopie 
passes the I. (accipit legem) : 
throws the bill out ; refuses to pass 
the I. (antiquat legem). To be 
passed or carried through (perferri). 
To draw up I.'s (leges condere, 
scribere, conscribere). To pass a 
I. (ferre legem, ut or ne ; lege san- 
cire, ut or ne ; of the people) To 
give I.'s to a state— of a ruler (leges 
dare or coustituere ci civitati). 
To impose l.*s on a state — of a ty- 
rant (leges ci populo or civitaii 
imponere). To overthrow l.'s (leges 
evertere or pervertere). To break 
a 1. (legem negligere, violare). To 
evade a 1. (legi fraudem facere). 
To swear obedience to a 1. (in 
legem jurare). To advise the peo- 
ple to pass a 1. (legem suadere): 
not to pass one (legem dissuadere). 
To oppose the passing of a 1. by hb 
veto (legi intercederet). To abro- 
gate a 1. (legem abrogare). To 
abrogate it partially (derogare legi 
or qd de lege). To abrogate a L 
virtually by a subsequent enact« 
ment (legi obrogare). To trample 



t «. «. of a Tnbone ot tne pec pie. 



VOCABULART. 



323 



a L underfoot (legem conculcare). 
To Bee that a 1. is put in force or 
strictly ezecated (efficere ut lex 
yaleat or valeret). To relax a 1. 
(laxamentum dare legi). To pro- 
cure the paaoing of a L (legem 
ferre): on one's self (legem mihi 
ipse dito : with gen. of Uiw). To 
observe a law (legem servare, ob- 
servare, conserrare). 
Letter, (1) Syllable; of the alpha- 
bet Not to write a I. (nullam 
l)teram scribere). To know a single 
1. df Greek (unam literam Giiecam 
scire). Not to be able to niter a 
s. (literam non posse dicere). 

(2) Epistle; correspondence To 
write a 1. (epistolam scribere , exa- 
rare). To write or send a 1. 1o aby 
(dare literas ad qm, literas niittere 
ci or ad qm). To answert a 1. 
(rescribere literis or ad literas or 
epistolam). To fold up a 1. (episto- 
lam complicare): to seal (signare 
or obsignare): to open (epistolam 
aperire or solvere). To break open 
the seal (literas resignare). To 
converse with aby by 1. (cum qo 
per literas colloqui or agere). To 
finish a I. (literas conficere). To 
pester aby with L's (literis ci ob- 
strepere). To draw aby into a c. 
(cs literas elicere). To long for 
a L (literas expetere, reqnirere, de- 
siderare). By I (per literas). To 
tear up a 1. (epistolam concerpere. 
C.) 

(3) Literature; Learning; Study; 
Books. To bury one's self in one's 
s.'s or b.'s (literis se involvere, ab- 
dere. in literas se abdere). To give 
up or devote one's self to 1. or s. 
(literis se dare). Devoted to 1. 
(Uteris deditus). To return to his 
s.'s ; betake one's self to one's s.'s 
or b.'s again (in titeras se referre). 
To devour b.*s (literas vorare). To 
spend one's life in s. (agere etatem 
in literis). To have paid even the 
slightest attention to 1. (literas vel 



t To retom some answer (rescribere 



primis labris degustasse. Q)— — 
Adj., profound, rare, abstruse, ac- 
curate (literas interiores [qundam] 
et reconditsB) :— -ordinary, super- 
ficial (vulgares, communes). 

Life, Live. As sure as I live I will, 
&c (ita vivam« nt, &c., ne vivam, 
ne, salvus sim, nt). To live as ona 
pleases (ad libidinem, ex libidine) 
ad arbitrium suum, arbitrio soa— 
vivere). Not to be able to Ihro 
without athg (qft, re carere non 
posse). If a longer I. had been^ 
granted him (si vita longior suppe-* 
tiisset). To live on very confined 
means, on a very narrow income 
(in tenui pecunia vivere). To live 
in penury (in egestate vitam de- 
gere). To aim at aby's /. (cs capiti 
insidiari). To spare tby'st 1. (ci 
vitam concedere, or mortem re- 
mittere). To owe one's 1. to aby 
(ci salutem debere ; also ab aliquo 
habere vitam ; cs beneficio vivere). 
To beseech aby to spare a person's I. 
(cs vitam deprecari a qo). To 
atone for, or expiate athg with 
one's L (capite luere qd), My L is 
at stake ; I am in, or brought into, 
danger of my 1. (in vitas periculum 
adductus sum : caput agitur). The 
language of common I. (genus ser- 
monis usitatum). To use the lan- 
guage of daily or common 1. (ver- 
bis quotidianis uti). To spend one's 
1. (omnem suam vitam coupumere, 
or astatem agere in qA, re). The 
rest of one's I. (qd reliquum est 
vitas). L. and spirit, i. e. in speak- 
ing (calor et vehementia). To 
depart this 1. (abire e vitA,: hinc 
demigrare). Adverbs used with 
vivere are ; molliter, delicate (deli- 
cate ac molliter) ; parce, continen- 
ter, severe, sobrie. 

Listen. Listen to what he has none 
(videte, quid fecerit). I cannot 
listen to this (aures mee a com- 
memoratione hujus rei abhorrent* 
qd ferre non possum). 



t t. e. a condemned perwn^i : CB vitae par* 
cere, «/ • general expreseion. 



884 



TOCABULABY. 



M. 

Memory: ReeoUeetiaiu As tar aa 
my m. or r. goes (nt mea eat me- 
inoria). To recall or bring athg to 
aby'a r. (ci qd in memoriam rodi- 
gtere, redacere. qm in memoriam C8 
rai redacere). Athg has dipped 
my m. (memori^ qd excenit, de- 
lapaom est). To retain a lively r. 
of aby (C8 memoriam vivam tene- 
re). To renew, to exercise the 
m. (memoriam renovare or redinte- 
grare; ezercSre). To refresh the 
m.) or mb up the r. (memoriam re- 
fricare). In my r. (meft. memorift.). 
In the r. of man (post hominum 
memoriam: after negativea). To 
have a good m. (memori& vigere). 

Kind. Eniotions of the m. (mentis 
perturbationes). To apply one's 
self to athg with one's whole m. 
(totft, mente in qd incumbere). 
Athg comes into my m., or oc- 
curs to me (qdt in mentem mihi 
venit). Recall to mind what, &c. 
(redite in memoriam, qui, &c.) 
Athg brings the recoliectiou of aby 
to m. (qd cs memoriam afiert). To 
dazzle aby's m. (ci animi aciem 
prcBstringere). To be of another m. 
(in alift. voluutate esse). Not to 
mind [s be anxious] about aby 
(de qo nihil laborare : ne quid, of 
course, when neceatary). To blunt 
or dull the powers of the m. (aciem 
ingenk.^ animi, mjiTitis praestringere. 
C.) 

Mistake. See Error. 

Mtkst. He m. have done so and so, — 
when the m. is an inferenci (pa- 
tandus est fecisse). 

N. 

Name ; To enlist ; Anonymous. To 
give a n. to athg, or impose a n. on 
athg (uomeu ci rei ponere or impo- 
nere). To receive a n. fm athg 



t The thing may be subst, infln., or 
sentence with ut. The thin^ may also 
be in tbo gen. : m mentem mihi venit cs 
reL 



(ex qft. re nomen reperiret). Foi 
that I thmk is his name (nam, ut 
opinor, hoo nomen est). To eafi 
athg 1^ its own n^ a n. of its own 
(qd proprio nomine signare). To e 
(nomen or nomina dare, proven, 
edere). To answerto one's n. (ad 
nomen responddre). To call them 
over by n. (nommatun citare). His 
n. stands high amongst advocates 
(cs nomen in patronis magnum est) 
A certain foreigner Camelus by n 
(quidam hospes, nomine Camelo or 
Caineli): whose n. was Camelus 
(coi erat nomen Camelo or Came- 
lus: seld. Cameli). An a. letter 
(liters sine nomine scripte). An 
a. paper (libellus sine auctore pro- 
positus). A. poenv (carmina in- 
certis auctoribus vulgata). In aby's 
n. (cs verbis, or cs nominet). To 
be free in n. (verbo esse liberum). 
Oood'Name; Reputation; Good- 
Opinion / Credit. A g.-n. is bet- 
ter than money (bona existimatio 
prsstat pecuniis). My g.-n. is at 
stake (mea existunatio agitur). No- 
thing could have happened that 
would be more injurious, or preju- 
dicial, to my g.-u. (nihil mihi ad 
existimationem turpius potuit acci- 
dere). To endanger qr risk one's 
g.-n. or r. (venire in discrimeu ex- 
istimationis). To court the g.-o. oi 
men, i. e. by some bad means (ex- 
istimationi se hominum venditare). 
A man of no r. ; of such r. (homa 
sine existimatione ; eft. existima- 
tione). To leave my r. or g.-n. iu 
aby's hands (committere ci existi- 
mationem meam). To get some c 
(qm aecipere existimationem). To 
get the c. of athg without deserving 
it (false in eam venure existimatio- 
nem). To recover one's r. (existi- 
mationem amissam reconciliare) 
To suffer in one's r. ; one's r. sufien 
(de existimatione suft. qd perdere or 
deperdere. detrimentum existima- 



t Or ab qft re nomen trahere. 

t Cs verbis, if a message is put m aby'a 
mouth : cs nominey when an inferior acts 
in the name, and by the authority of a 
superior. 



TOOABULAET. 



826 



tionis focere)^— O^Aer phrases 
are: ea eziBtimationi consulere, 
senriTe: C8 ezistimationem violare, 
oifendere, oppugnare : defenderey 
tueri: ezistim&tionemeoiiM|Tare,re- 

tinere. Ebdstimatio intogra (vn- 

blemiahed), pnedara, BanctisBona. 
exkstimatio in diBcrimen venk {is 
endangered). 
Necessarily, This does not n. prove 
that (hoc nihil necoBsitatifl adfert, 
cor, &c. with stihj,) 

O. 

Oath. To observe my o. (juBJuiandum 
aervare, conservare). To break an 
o. (jusjurandum negfligere, violare, 
relinquere). To bmd aby by o. 
(jarejurando qm astringere, ob- 
stringere, oUigare). The sanctity 
of an o. (jarisjarandi religio). Not 
to believe aby on his o. (jurivjurandi 
fidem ci abrogare). To draw up 
an oath (jusjurandum coucipere). 
To give aby one's o. (jusjurandum 
ci dare). To make aby repeat an 
o. after me ; or to make a man 
take an a in words prescribed by 
me (in mea verba qm jusjurandum 
adigere). 

Object. O.'s of sense, or of our senses 
(qu8B sub sensus cadunt; or qufs 
sensibus subjecta sunt). To make 
it one's first o^ to do something (id 
agere, ut, &c.) This ought to be 
their first o., that (hue omnia iis re- 
ferenda Bxmif ut — ). To make 
athg one's first o., or pursue athg 
as one's first o. (omnia ad qd revo- 
care, referra^ or omnia q& re metiri ; 
hue omnia referre, ut). Their o. 
in doing this was very different 
from what, &c. (hoc longe alio 
spectabat atqne, &c.) 

Ohsiaele. Athg is an o. in the way 
of accomplishmg athg (est qd im- 
podimeuto ad rem). To place an 
0. in the way of performing or ac- 
complishmg athg (ci rei moram at- 
que impedimentum inferre). To 
conquer o.'s (impedimenta superare). 
To place an o. or impediment in 
aby's way (moram ci afferre or in- 
terponere). 

Odium ; Unpfpularity. To bring, or 



endeavor to bring, aby into o (in- 
vidiam ci conflare or facore). Tc 
incur the o. (invidiam sulrire) To 
increase aby's unpopularity (es in- 
vidiam augere, inflammare). 

Opinion. See Judgment In my o 
(ut opinio nostra est, ut mea ferl 
opinio). OpiniooB are implanted 
(insenmtur) : are rooted up (evel- 
Innturt) : are imbibed (imbibnntur) 
prevail amongst men (animos homi- 
num pervadunt): are shaken oi 
weakened ^labefactantur, minuun- 
tur) : are given up (remittuntur or 
deponuntur): are confirmed (con- 
firmantur) : are maintained or sup 
ported (defenduntur) : wear away 
gradually or in time (diutumitate 
extabescunt). His present political 
o.'s (ea qu8B de republic^ nunc 
sentit or sentiat). To be driven fm 
an o. (de opinione dejici, depelli). 

Opportunity. [Oecasio,facult€is, &c. 
See D5d. occasio.] As soon as he 
saw an o. (simul ac primum ei oc- 
casio visa estt). An o. is offered 
(obfertur) : is given (datur) : is had 
(habetur, tenetur) : is let go or slip 
(omittitur): is wanting (deest): is 
seized (arripitur). To get an o 
(occasionem nancisci). if I have, 
or shall have, an o. (si fuerit occa- 
sio. si occasio tulerit). To give aby 
an o. (facere ci potestatem). To 
make Ibe most of an o. (occasionem 
urgere). 

Owe. To consider one's self to owe 
one's life to fortune, children, &.c 
to aby (ab qo se habere vitam, foi- 
tunas, liberos, arbitrari^). 

P. 

Part (i. e. m a play). To act this p 
of compassion (has partes miseri- 
cordias agere). To undertake the 
p. of athg (cs rei partes suscipere). 
To play the first p. or fiddle (primas 
agere). T^ surrender or offer the 
fint p. in athg to aby (dQ cs rei 
primas deferre) 



t Qd ci ex animo erellere. 

t Simelacpotestas primum data est C. 

4 In Pison. u. $ 25. See Ltfe, 

II Or ad qm. 



896 



VOOABULABY* 



Pari; Share, To call or invite aby 
to a share (in partem vocare). 

Pathetic. To utter in a very p. 
manner (magnft cum miwricordi^ 
iMTonuntiare). 

Peace, To sue for p. (pacem petere, 
precibuB exposcere, orare). To ob- 
tain p. (pacem impetrare). To 
make p. (pacem facere, conficere, 
constituere, componere — with aby, 
cum qo) To oner aby terms of p. 
(ci ultra pacts conditiones ferre). 
To break the p. (pacem frangere). 
To live in p. with aby (ooncorditer 
vivere cum qo). Without conclu- 
^ng a p. (pace infects). To treat 
for p. (agere de pace). Negotia^ 
tions for p. are on foot (de pace 
agitur). 

Plea, See Excuse, 

Pleasure, To be productive of p. 
(voluptatis efficientem ease). To 
produce or cause p. (voluptatem 
conciliare, pardre). To derive p. 
fm athg (voluptatem ex re capere, 
percipere). To be moderate in the 
pursuit of p. (voluptatis fruendiB 
modum tenere). With p. (lubens, 
lubenter). With great p. (luben- 
tissime). P. tickles the senses 
(voluptas sensus titillat). To give 
one's self up to p. (voluptatibus se 
deder^; er totum se tradere). To 
have a pleasurable recollection of 
athg (cs rei recordatione frui). To 
jicrease p. (voluptatem augere, 
ampliiicare). To be soothed — cor- 
rupted (voluptate deleniri — cor- 
rumpi). Inclined to p. (ad volup- 
tatem propensus). 

Poaeession, To put aby in p. of an- 
other's property (immittere qm in 
ci bona ; or mittere qm in posses- 
sionem bonorum cs). To eject a 
person iiu — (de possessione dimo- 
vere et dejicere: possessione de- 
pellere, deturbare). To remain in 
p. of athg (in cs rei possessione 
manere or permanSre) To make 
athg one's own by long and unin- 
terrupted p. (usucapere qd). To 
give up p. (possessione cedere, de- 
cedere). To be in p. of (esse in 
possessione cs rei.) 
Power, To ha\e aby or athg in one's 



p. (qm or qd in potestate eah, ha^ 
here). To have p. of life and deatb 
(vit8B necisque potestatem hab§re 
C.) Athg is in my p. (aitam est 
qd in potestate mek ; est qd facul* 
tatis mee). To faU into aby'sp 
(in cs potestatem «adere). To re« 
duce under one's p. (redigere ia 
Buam ditionem ac potestatem). To 
submit to the p. of aby (se sub ca 
poteoLatem subjicere). 

Promise, To make a p. (promissuni 
facere). To abide by a p. (pro- 
misso stare) : to fulfil or .perform 
(promisBum efficere, solvere): to 
make good (promisso satisfacere) : 
to keep (promissum servare) : not 
to depend much or pUee reliance 
on p.'s (promissis non valde pen- 
dere). To claim fm aby the fulfil- 
ment of a p. (promissum a qo exi- 
gere). 

Provisions, See Corn, 



Question, The q. is put; is put to 
the vote; is determined (discessio 
fit — of questions in' the senate, 
when the ayes and noes arranged 
themselves on different sides), 

R. 

Reason, I can give a r. for my be 
lief (cur credam afierre possum) 
I have good r.'s for being silent, oi 
for my silence (constat nobis silen* 
tii nostri ratio). To give the r. of 
or for athg (rationem cs rei afierre, 
dicere). To explain the r. ; a plan 
(explicare, exponere rationem). 
With reason (optimo jure; jure 
meritoque ; jure ac merito). And 
not wiUiout r. (nee injuria). 

Religion (pietas erga Deum, of fer^ 
sonal religion; res divine, o/rc" 
ligion considered objectively). To 
apostatize from the r. of one's 
country (sacra patria deserere) 
To embrace or be converted to tho 
Christian r. (sacra Christiana sus- 
cipere, especially of a body). 

Report, A r. reaches aby (fama ad 
qm perfertur): aby's ears (ad cf 
aures pervenit). To spread a r. of 
athg (famam cs rei dissiipare). A 



VOCABULARY. 



82*1 



r. begins to be whispered about or 
circiUated from any place (fama 
ab qo loco manat). A r. is becom- 
ing current ; there is a r. in men's 
mouth (fama surgit or nascitur). 
R. says (fama nuntiat) To hear 
athg by common r. (communi fam& 
atque sermone audire qd de qt re). 

Reputation. See Name, 

Rest. Not to let aby r. (qm qnies- 
cere or requiescere non pati). To 
r. after long labors (ex diutumo 
labore quiescere). Not to have or 
take a moment's r. (nullam partem 
quietis capere). To be composing 
or preparing one's self for r. (quieti 
se dare or tradere). 

Heward. To give a r. to aby (prsB- 
mium ci dare, tribuere). To honor 
aby with a r. ; to confer a r. on aby 
(pnemio qm donare, decorare, affi- 
cere: pnemium ci deferret). To 
be rewarded, to receive a r. (preemio 
donari). To recompense with a r. 
(remunerari qm prsemio). To be 
rewarded or receive a r. for athg 
(premium or fructum cs rei capere, 
percipere, ferre): for athg by aby 
(fructus cs rei ferre ex qo). I con- 
sider myself richly rewarded (mag- 
num rei fructum percepisse videor). 
To earn a r. (prsemium consequi). 

Jiisk. To r. athg, or expose athg to 
a r. (qd in aleam dare : ire in aleam 
cs rei). To r. one's life (commit- 
tere se periculo mortis). To take 
the r. of athg on one's self (rem 
periculi sui facere). 

Bout (pellere, profligare) S©e Flight. 

S. 

Say. Nothing is said about aby (de 
qo silentium est). After much had 
been said on both sides (multis ver- 
bis ultro citroque habitis). To s. 
athg merely to please aby (qd auri- 
bus cs dare : cs auribus servire. C.) 
As the saying is (ut aiunt). 

School To open a s. (ludum aperire). 
To put a boy to s. with aby (qm ci 
in dlscipUnam tradere) To send a 



t Prmmkan ci deferred of a state reward- 
oig men t by a public aot, by public hon- 
erSiacG 



boy to a pub!ic s.t (scholamm fie« 
quentiiB et velut publicis procep- 
toribns tradere). 

Sentence. See Judgment. 

Share. See Part. 

Side. To be on a person's s. (ab qo 
stare : cum qo sentue : to he of the 
same way of thinking on political 
questions). Athgl is on aby's s 
(qd cum aliquo facit). 

Stage. To hiss off the s. (ezsibilare , 
or exsibilare et explodere). To ap- 
pear on the 8. (in scenam prodire). 

Study, To intermit one's learned 
s.'s (intermittere studia doctrines) 
To pursue these s.'s (hasc studia 
colore).. To have made the arts 
one's 8. (artibus suum studium de- 
disse). To return to these s.'s (hec 
studia repetere, renovare, recolere) 
See Letter (3). 



Time.^ Before the t. (ante tempus) 
To leave one's self no t. for, &c. 
(nullum sibi spatium relinquere ad 
&c.) To try to gain t. (spatium of 
moram interponere). All the t. 1 
can spare fm athg (quod mihi de re 
qk temporis datur). To have t. to 
do athg (cs rei faciende tempus 
habere). Nor was there t to, &c. 
(nee fuit spatium ad, &c.) It is t 
to, &c. (tempus est with ger. in di, 
infin. or ut). He thought there 
was no more t. to lose (nihil ultra 
difforendum ratus est). He says 
there is no t to lose (diflferendum 
esse negat). To find t. (tempue 
lucrari, nancisci). To spend t 
(tempus in qd, re ponere or consu 
mere; ad qm rem conferre). Tc 
watch one's t for athg (tempus ci 
rei observare). To choose my or a 
convenient t (tempus cs rei scite 
et commode capere). To get a 
convenient or proper t (tempus 
idoneum nancisci). To let the t 
for action slip (tempus rei gerendsB 



t To send a boy to a school, opp. to 
keeping him at home, studia extra Mv.vft 
projtrre. PHn. 

i Truthy Veritas. 

4 Immediateljr or some time tflerward^ 
eonfestim out ex intervaUo 



898 



VOCABULART. 



4iniittfli«) To deep the t away 
^tampon indonniie, PkiL 3, 14). 
To happen at a nKMt inooiiTaiiieiit 
t (in aUeniaimiim tompcni caden). 
To be over in a moment of t (fieri 
ad panctnm temporie, C Tumc 1, 
34,82). 

U. 

Under, To be u aby's command 
(ease Mib cs imperio). To ledace 
u. aby's power (tab as potestatem 
redigere). 

Underatanding, Oar n. comprehends 
(intelligentia nostra capit qd). A 
man of a. (in qo inest or est inteUi- 
gentia). To adapt atbg to the u. 
of ordinary men (ad popolarem in- 
toUigentiam qd accommodare.) 

Unhealthiness. To escape from the 
bad eSectB of the unhealthy season 
(abeaw ab injoriA. temporis). 

Unpopularity. See Odiunu 



Vex. To be vexed at athg (moles- 
tiam capere or trahere: molestift. 
affici ; all toiih ex qA. re). To be 
vexed that (egre, graviter, moleste 
fero ; with ace. atul inf.) 

Victory. To gain a v. over aby (vic- 
toriam fene or xefene ex qo : vic- 
toriam reportare ab or de qo). 

View. To dissent fm this v. (ab hac 
ratione dissentire). To do athg 
with the V. of (facere qd eo consi- 
lio, ut) &c.) 

W. 

Way. To make w. for aby (dece- 
dere ci de viA. dare ci viam). 
These things may be taught in two 
w.'b: or there are two w.'s of 
teaching these things (haec dapli- 
cem habent docen£ viam). To 
March out for new w.'s (inusitatas 
vias indagare). To desert old ways 
(vias tritas relinquere). 

Word. Not to get a w. fm aby (ver- 
birni ex qo nidlum elicere). Not to 
be ibie to utter a w. (verbum om- 
uino nullum facere posse). To 
dofino one's w.'s (verba definire et 
deeoribere). I wish to say a couple 



of w.'s U yon (trStms veriHs te volo) 
By w. of mouth (veibo, opp. scrip 
tori). To have w.'s with aby (al« 
tercaii cum qo). To have never 
had any w.'s with aby (nullo veibo 
eoneeilasse cum qo). To was 
w.'s (verba frnstraeonsomere). To 
listen to aby's w.'s (loquonti aores 
prsbere). The w. plough (verbmn 
aratii: fwt veihnm aratmmt). Nor 
has this w. any other meaning (ne* 
que nlla alia huic verbo snbjecta 
notio est, nisi). To use a w. (ver- 
bo uti : hut verbum ponere in qo if 
to uoe against a peroon). To 
weigh the force of w?s (diligentei 
exammare verbomm pondera). The 
most appropriate w.'s (verba maxi- 
ma cujusque rei propria). To give 
up an <^inion for a w. (verbo de 
sententii desistere. C.) This word 
is usually applied to athg (hoc no- 
men de qft. re poni solet). To in- 
clude two notions in this w. : or to 
include two things in the notion of 
.this w. (huic verbo duas res snbji- 
cere. Fin. 3, 4, 3). To attach a 
meaning to a w. (vocabulo, verbo, 
&c., notionem or sententiam subji- 
cere). To which the w. virtue is 
usually applied (iu quo nomen poni 
solet virtutis). 



Yoke. To place a y. on aby (jugum 
ci imponere, prop, and fig.) To 
unyoke (jugum ci solvere or de- 
mere). To deliver aby fm a y. 
(jugum a cervicibus cs depellere) 
To free one's self fm, or shake ofi^, 
a y. (jugum excutere. jugo se ex- 
uere. jugum exuere, propr. and 
fig.: exuere, to do it gradually; 
to slip it off). To bring aby unoet 
the y. of slavery (ci jugum servi- 
tutis injungere). To submit to the 
y. (jugum accipere). 



t If the word in apposition is an a4)^ 
the followingpassage of Cicero is a gooq 
example: **To the word kappf,** *c.-» 
huic verbo. mam beatun Udmau, 4*» «Vsf 
5,29. 



EXTRACTS FROM THE " ANTIBARBARUS."* 



Aocurodh diligentia, cura. [accuratio 
onct Cic. Brut. 67, 238.] 

Act a playfj docere fabulam {of those 
wlio get it upy <^c., and of the author) : 
agere {of the player acting hia 
part.) 

Again and again^ etiam atque etiam 
( = t>cry earnestly with verbs 
of entreating). ^:=:' several times, 
often: iterum et or ac tertio : ite- 
rum et sspius ;t iterum ac tertium. 
C. 

Against the stream^ amne or flumine 
adverso [not fluvio adv.]. 

Agree. (1) /=r Tnake an agreement f 
agreement with any body, mihi cum 
quo convSnit. We agreed, inter nos 
convgnit. Even the consuls were not 
tlwroughly agreed, ne inter consules 
quidem ip803 satis conveniebat. L, 
\not convenio cum quo.] (2) =: cor- 
respond withf answer to, consentire 
cum qu^re. (3) Of a thing it is 
used personally: ])ax convenerat: 
qu8B oonvenerant : si posset inter eos 
quid convenire. C 

Almighty, summus, maximns [no/ om- 
nipotens, except as a theological term\ 
or by Deus only for * the Alm^hty. 
The Romans used Optimus Muii- 
mus with the name of Jupiter. — 
Jupiter O. M, 

Appear =s * make hia avpearanee 
amongst us * {of one who is dead, <f»c.) : 
ezflistere. 

— — ^ * seem,* videri (not apparfire). 
• sz*to be manifest,* apparore 
{not videri). 

Appear (in a dream\ ostendcre se coi 



in somnio ; videri cui in somnifi ; per 
Bomnum, quiete, per quietem ; umth 
likeness appears in their bodies, qua 
similitude m corporibus apparet. C 

Appear in any bod^s eyes, judicio cujui 
esse ; ab quo existimari ; videri cui < 
esse apud quern. 

. Day appears, diei venil 

{comes) I ifiucescit {begins to shine). 



Assert, dicere, aflirmare inot asserere]. 

Author, scriptor. 

Authority, An authority {used of a 

person), anctor. A weighty authority, 

locuples auctor. 

Bodily {pleasures), corporis (volup- 
tates). Corporeus is * consisting cf a 



Break, To break down a bridge, pon- 
tern rescindere, dissolvere, interrum- 
pere [not pontem rumpere or irangerej. 

Classical author, scriptor optimus, 
prsestantissimus ; or scriptor prims 
classls. Cic, [Gellius introduced 
scriptor classicus, as opposed to 
scriptor proletarius.] 

Command {an army), praeesse. 

Compassion, Prom compassion, miae* 
ricordi& captus, ductus, or permotus. 

Demagogues, concionatores : popu- 
lares, or populares homines. [If 
demagogi be used auos GrsBci dicunt, 
or ut Gneco veroo utar should be 
added.] 

Each otner, inter se ; of what is dons 
mutually or reciprocally: 
not invicem. 



* These Extracts are taken from a larger work of Mr. Arnold's, principally 
un the Latin Particles, which is in course of preparation for the American 
jublic. 

t 71? ask again and again, etiam atque etiam ; or iterum et eepius rogara 
But etiam atque etiam is never really numericaL 



330 



JCZTBACT8 FBOM THB ** ANTIBARBARUS/ 



EzAmKATi: ezacnere (Nep.); in- 
fensom reddere : Iram cujus incen- 
dere. [Exasperare, ezacerbare. Im.] 

Experience, usiu rerum, U8U8[nol ex- 
IMBiientiaJ. .FVoniejrperien«e,re, ubu, 
ezitu doctUB, expertus zfrcm my own 
txperieneef expertus in me, expertus. 

\FUh out mthgjnm ahy, «bqp qd expis- 

caii, C 
Fleah : in ' to loaejkgh,* ' gainjluh^' 4re, 

corpus amittere [not camem]. 
Fleshly (qf pleasures^ 4rc*)t by ^«n., 

eoiporis. 

Greek. To speak Greek or good Greek, 

Giece loqni. 
Grow (an old man, 4rc. *«' become*), fieri. 

Health,vel6tado.—Oood health, sanitas: 
bona or prospera valetudo {not yalfr- 
tudo on/y).— ealos (the continued eiaU 
or preservation iff good health.) 

Imagine (1) s to form a representation 
tn the nUndj animo cogitare, conci- 
pere, complecti :— animo fingere, ef- 
fingere ; cogitatione fingere or depin- 
gere : — ^proponere sibi ante oculos 
a^mumque : (2) :s conjecture, con- 
jecturam capere, facere: conjicere 
[fi^imaginari belongs to the silver 
age]. (3) =s to entertain an unfounded 
notion, opinari, in opinione esse : in- 
duisse sibi falsam cujus nd per- 
Buasionem. Q. quid somniare 
( zs. dream it). (4) I imagine {insert- 
edina sentence), opinor : ut opinor. 

Impure. An impure style, inquinatus 
sermo, inquinata oratio. 

Impute a thing to anybody^ tribuere, 
attribuere, adscribere, adsignare, 
acoeptum referre (quid cui). [Im- 
putare, Quint. Plin.Tun.}. 

Inspire anybody with hope, f ear ^ 4^., 
spem, admirationem, formidinem, 
cui injicere. 

■ anybody toiih a desire, quern 

cupiditate cujus rei faciendse inci- 
tare, or incitare ad aliquid faciendum. 

Inspired^ afflatus numine divine; in- 
stinctu divino perculsus ; instinctus 
divine spiritu. 

Invite {to supper, Ac), invitare (fry 
woKd qf mouth) : vocare (fry a slave). 

Key of a country, janua. [* (|uum earn 
ur^m sibi Mithridates Asisb jantiam 
fore putasset, quA ^raetd et revulsd 
tota pateret provincia.' C] 

LaHn. To speak Laiin or good Latin, 
Latine dicere. loqui. 



MtrcfiHy \wA misericorditer, fru^ cnsa 
misericordii or miseratione, miseri- 
cordii captus, Ac. To deal merd' 
fuU^ with anybody, misericordem 
esse In aliquem ; misericordia uti in 
aliquem; misericordem se praebera 
in aliquem. 

C^er violence, vim afierre alicui. 

One or two, unus et alter, unus itemqne 
alter. Unus alterve {szone or ai 
mo§t tiDo). 

Open a way or road (e. g.bythe siDord)^ 
viam aperire, patefacere. L. 

Opportunity, occasio, locus or facultas ; 
tempus (alici^us rei f&ciendie). An 
onportunity qf doing any thin^ is of- 
fered, locus filciende alicujus rei 
dator. 

■fPalm: to bear the palm, palmam 
ferre. 

Pay honours to anybody, cui honores 
habere, tribuere: honore aliquem 
afficere {not honorem cui exhibere). 

Prayers. To offer prayers, jirecvL^on- 
em or preces iacere, preces Deo adhi- 
bdre (C). preces mittere {lAv.). 
Obs. preces fundere is poet. 

Preserve {states, <f|c.)» conservare. 

Probable, verislmilis [not probabilisi 
whichmeans, * respectable,* * tolerably 
good n. It seems probable that MUo 
kiUed Clodius, wfo Clodium inter- 
feciaseyidetur {but Terisimilis is 
quite correct). 

Produce a passage, to, locum, ^yersum, 
&c.) afierre. 

witnesses, producere or pro- 
£erre testes : to produce evidence, tes- 
timonium proferre. 

——a reason, to, causas afierre. 

Pure {qf styleY purus et emendatus. 

Purity of style, integritas, castitas or 
sincentas orationis. 

Quote an author, to, producere, proferre 
Bcriptorem (producere, proferre tes- 
tes being used, but not locum). 

a passage, locum afierre, proferra 

[not producere]. 

Reason, causa, w?ien =: Aground,* 'nuh 
tice* To bring another reason, al« 
teram afierre rationem or causam. 

Severe {of a disease), gravis. 

Shed tears, lachrymas elfundero or 

profundere. 
Shed blood zs kill, occidere. 
Slay oneself {lay violent hands on ono^ 



EXTRACTS FROM THE " ANTIBARBARUS.' 



331 



9elff die by one* a own hande, commit 

suicide)^ se interimere, mortem sibi 

consciscere ; mortem or vim sibi in- 

ferre ; se multare morte.* 
Speak, The thing epeakafor Oadf^ si 

res verba desideraret, ac non pro s e 

ipso loqueretur. C 
Style^ oratio, dictio, genus scribendl or 

dicendi. 

. To erpreea oneself in^ or to poe- 

•689 a good style {of a Latin avthor) 



19, oratione emendatft et Latini nti ; 
emendate et Latine dicere. 
Suicide {to eommiJ)^ mortem sibi con- 
sciscere ; mortem or vim sibi inferre ; 
se interimere, <&c. ; mortem ultro 
oppetere {tphen the death is not com- 
mitted by one^s awn hands ; i. e. if 
virttLal^ not actual^ suicide). 

Think highly of, 4»c., de aliquo magnl 
ficesentire. 



• Also I manua sibi afierre < manu sibi vitam ezhaurire. (C.) 



INDEX r. 

ENGLISH. 



[Q stands for Q^ution»,— The numerals refer to the First Part of 
Latin Prose Composition.] 



A. 

/A, sometimes translated by aliquiSf 

qviapiopn^ or qwdam^ 393. 
abandoned, perditua. 
able (to be), poaae, miire(queo)j 125, e. 
Abdera (or), Abdtntts^ G. ae. 
abilities, ingenium (eing,). 
abomid, abundare {abl.). 
about ( = concerning), de (abi.,. 
about ( = nearly), ftre^ aav, ; circUerf 

prep, 
above (such an age), 306, and Q,. 
absence (in his)j absens. 
absent (to be), abesse^ 227. 
abstain from, temperare a5, 220. 
abundance of^ abunde^ ado, (g^cn.). 
acceptable, gratvM^ 212. 
accident (by)^ casv.. 
accompany, comitari. 
accomplish, confcere^ fecj feet. 
account : on — of, ergo {^en.) : 207. 
accuse, accusare; (if not m a court of 

justice) incusare {gen. of charge), 
accused-person, reus, 
accustomed (to be), 8oleret solUua, 
acquainted, to become, notceref 385. 
acquit, abmlvere, solv^ aolvi {gen, of 

charge), 
acquit of a capital charge, capitis abscH' 

vere. 
adapted, accommodaJtus^ 212. 
addition : in — to this, hvc acctdUf acce- 

debatj <&c., 513. 
adherents (his own), sui. 
adjiu'e, obtestari {ace.), 
admire, admirari. 
adopt a resolution, consilium tnire or 

eapere, 
advantage, ejnolumentum. 



advantageous : to be, prodesae {dot,). 
advantageous: to bo very — .magnai 

tUUitati esse, 242 (3). 
adversity, res aaversee. 
advice, consilium. 
advise, suadere {dot.) See 222; mo- 

nere (with ace. of person) : both 

with utf ne, by 75. 
affair, res. 

afraid : to be — , timlre, vereriy S. 99, e. 
afterwards, postea: with nouns of 

time : post, used adverbially, 
after f before a sentence)^ postquam. See 

after, prep, post fwith ace.). 
after the oattle, (cor^estim) a prodio. 
again and again, etvaTti atque etiam. 
again from the beginning, ab integrx). 
against adversus ^icc.) ; in (with ace, ; 

of feelings, actions, <&c., against a 

person), 
against his will, imntus {adj.). 
against the will of Caius, Caio irmto 

364. 
age f = time of life), eetasy atis. 
age (of that or such), id (Btatis lien ^ 
age (of what 7) quid cetatis 7 J ^°"» P- 
agitate, perturbare. 
agitated (having his mmd), incensus 

animum, 298. 
ago, abfUnc (to precede the subst. oi 

numeral), 305. 
agreeable, p-attLs, 212. 
agreed : it is — ^ constat (ace. with %nfin.y 
agricultural operations, res rustuM. 
all, omniSf cunetus ; ( = whole), univen 

sus, totus. 
all together, cuneti unioerti, 443. 
all over again, ab hUegro. 
all taken one oy one, dngulU 



INDEX .. — ENGLISH. 



333 



161. 



allowed: it iB—f, constat {ace. with 
in/in,), 

iillowed : I am — , licet mUd, 

allow it to happen, commUtere vJt. 

almost, propt. ^^ane. 

almost : I — think, haud ado an, 
(See note on DifF. 26.) 

alone, aolua ; or (if one person) 

Alps, Alpea, G. turn. 

already, jam. 

also, sometimes translated by the pro- 
noun idem, 387. 

altar, ara, 

although, 451, and d. on f 56. 

although indeed, quamqwam {indicX. 

always, after mperlat. by qwUqw, See 

a man ( = any : Indef.), quia, 

amanuensis, a manu serous. 

among, inter, 

amongst (a people), apud with ace* 

amuse, delectare, 

and, p. 18, d ; Uo me and you,' in Lat. 

* to me vnth you,* p. 78. 
and that too, not — , nee is, 385. 
anger, ira, 
angry : to be — , irasci (dot.): succssuere 

{dot.) 222. 
animal, animal, alis, 
another, alter, era, <&c. G. alterius: an- 
swering to ^ it is one thing,* aliud, 

38. 
another man's, alienus. 
answer, respoTidere {dot.), 
antiquity, antiquitas. 
any * (after expers), omnia. 
any. See 389. 
any where (= any whither), uaquam, 

402. 
any man may, cvjuavis eat. (See 

389-92.) 
appeal to, appeUare (ace.). 
appear, (= seem), inderi {maua). 
appear (show myself), apparere. 
apply vigorously to, incumbere in (with 

ace.^ ; culm, cubit. 
approved (valour, <&c.,) apectatua. 
arms, to take, arma capere. 
army, exercitua, Ha. 
arrived at : men have — , ventum est, 

296. 
arrow, aagiita, 
VLh, after tam, talis, tantus, tot, is, ^^m, 

quantua, qualia, miot, respectively, 
as, after idem, qui, 4j (or ac, ataue). 
98 far as I know, quod aciam, 5o. 
na far as I can, quoa dejua facers pos- 

«ufR, 512. 



as far as possible, > quoad ejus Jitri 
as far as can be done, > Tpoteat, 612. 
as it were, quaai. 
as soon as, avmul ac;ut primum ; quum 

primum; vbi; ut, 512; 514. 
as many as SXX), ad ducentoa. 
as not to, after * audi ' or * «o ' in a nega- 
tive sentence, quin (85) : if ^auch* 

or ' w ' were in a positive sentence, 
' tU would be used b> 66. 
ashamed : am — of, puaet, 207. 
ask, rogare, 
ask pardon for a fault, delicti zeniann 

petere. 
assault (a town), oppugnare. 
assault : to accuse of an — , rettm facers 

devi. 
assist, auxiliari, adjUvare, opitulari; 

aublevare, auocurrere, aubvenire, 

(See p. 81, k.) 
at anybody's feet. See 75, 1. 
at once, — and ; idem — idem, 396. * 
at, of place near which a battle is 

fought, Ac, apud (or ad), 457. 
at two miles' distance, a mUlibua paa- 

auum duobuaj 348. 
at two miles oil, a miUibus paasuvm 

duobus. 
Athens, AtkemB. 
Athenian, Athenienaia. 
attached to, amana; diligena (with 

gen.), 183. 
attack, adgredi, greaaua; adoriri. orhis 

{ace.). 
attend to, attendere, 229. 
averse to, alienus, 212. 
avoid, vitare. 
authority, audoritM. 
aware, to be, intelligere. 



B. 



Baggage, impedvmenia, pi. (properly 

nindrances). 
banish, pellere ex civitaie lpepul,mds\. 
banished from, extorris {abl.), 27u. 
banquet, eonvivium. 
btirbarian, barbarus. 
base, turpis. 
battle, bellum. 

battle of Canna), jmgna Cannenais. 
be it far from us. See note t, p. 40. 
bear, ferre {tul, lat, 33). 
beasts, ferce. 

beaten (to be), vgLfulare {ab), 
become, fen, foetus sum. 
become acquamted with, no&cere, 886. 



* The pronouns and adverbs for *anjf* may be exhibited in a convenient and 



334 



mDBX I. — ^BNOUSH. 



beooniiiig (to be) dtttrt (oetX 

beU, oSiere (dot). 

beforOi ado. antea, 

before, prep, ante (aeeJ), 

before (atandingbefore a aentencej, 

antequamf 496, &c, 
before one'eeyes, ofr oetdoa, 
behold, ad&pieere, io, «per, gpeet. 
beg, pdere, pe^io, pttity ab, 
be^n, ccBpUae (began^ before pass, in! 

cceptuMeM^, 
beginning, imHum. 
beUeye, credere, (elo/.) eredid^ eredU, 
believe, I can acarcely — , vis eredide- 

rim, 428, and note. 
belieyed, I am, mihi eredUur, 285. 
belonga. See 191. 
benefit, beneficium, 
benefit, ▼. benefaeere (dai.). 
bereave, orbare (abl.). 
beseech, dbeecrare, 
bespatter, iod»pergerfi(aUqiddalwus 

best, optvnviu, 

betrayer, prodUor. 

better, meliar. 

better : it is — (= more etUiefaetory, 

preferable), eoHue eei, 116. Ex. 34, 

p. 84. 



better : it would have boen — , 9atma or 

tUaiuafuii,426(5). 
between, inter. 

beware o^ covert, eao. taut, 233. 
bird, avis: (great bira) aZet. Voitieris 

=3 any winged creature, 
black, niger. 
blame, culoare. 
bleed afresh (of a wound), recrudeacere, 

crudu. 
blessing: a — on your valour! macte 

virtuteeatol 280, a. 
blind, ctBcua, 
blood, Bonguia, XtUb, m.. (when shed, 

eruor). 
blot out, delire, deUr, deUt, 
hoiiBt,'gloriari, (abt.) also de, in, 273. 
Doast, to make tne same, idemgiarkBrL 
body, eorp-ua, oris, 
border on, adjatire, 229. 
bom, natua : Dom to, natua ad, 
bom, to be. naaci (nahu)» 
both— -and: et — et, 
bounds. See Exceed. 
boY,puer, O.pueri. 
branch-of-learning, dodrina. 
breach of duty: it is a—, eorUra qg^ 

Hum eat. 
breadth, a finger's. See Depart, 
break one*s word, ) fdem faUerct 
break a promise, J '"" 
bribery, ambxttta, da. 



concise form, as in the following table :— 





Exclusion 
of otf.* 


Inclusion of 
a// alike. 


Inclusion of aome. 




Less em- 
phatical after 
M,ne,nttm,&c. 




PBOVOUIIS. 


quisquam 
ullus 


quiyis 
quUibet 


aliquis 
quispiam 


quis 


any (body) 


Advxkbs. 
(a) Place. 

(b)Time. 


r(to) 
usquam^l 


quovis (to) 

ubivis:>.^ 
ubilibetjW 


aliquo (to) 

alicubi j ,.. 
uspiamJW 


quo (to) 


any place 

or 
anywhere. 


unquam 




allquando 


quando 


anytime 

or 

ever. 





* ilSr All are generally exduded when 'any* follows negatieea; or *vnthouif 
aoarcthf* 'than:* and in questions that expect the answer *no,* (*^ ' ' 
nothdng,*) Ac. 



INBSX I. — ENGLISH. 



335 



bridge, jhuim^ niit, m. 

Dring an action or charge againgt, reum 
facere ; fee, fact : (with^ren. or lie,) 
187. 

burden, onua, ontria, 

burnt: to be — ^ deflagrare. 

burst out afresh, recntdeactre, erudu, 

business, negotium, 

but iLains ain autem, 451. 

but if not, sin minu9y 461. 

but a little more, and he would haye 
perished, minimum abfuit (tmpert.) 
gian perirety 91. 

but, after universal negatives, (=who 
— not), gum, [or, qui — nan,] 44. 

but, after universal negatives (=s ex- 
cept)) nin, or prep, proBter, 

but, after cannot. See tkmnot. 

butcher, trucidare. 

buy, anere, em^ empt, 

by letter, per literaa, 

by =s near, prope. 



CsBsar, deaar, aria, 

call, vocarty appellare, nominartf dicer e. 
See 61. 

call = summon, voeare. 

call upon, conveniref verifVCtU {ace.), 

call to mind, remirUacL 

camp, caatrOf pi, 

campaign^ end of, 308. 

can, poaae, quire (queo), 125, e, 

CannsB, o£ Cannenaia, adj. 

cannct: I cannot buv— , faeere nan 
poemm quin, Ac. 

cannot : it cannot be but that, jSert mm 
poteat quin. 

capaible of containing, capcue {f^cn.). 

capital, cap-^f itia. 

care a straw for, Jlocci facere, 

care that for, kt^jua facere, 

care, euro. 

care : for any thing I cu-e, 470. 

careless of, negligena {gen.). 

carry, portare. 

Carthage, Carthag-o, inia. 

east forth, prqpcerejec, ject. 

cause to be done, faciendum 'Virare. 
351, 356. 

cease, deainere deai, deait : ceased, bo- 
fore inf. pass, deaitua eat, 

cease speakins taore, 299. 

censure, reprekcnaio, onia, 

chameleon, ehamisleon, 

chance, caaua, 4U. 

character, moria pi G. urn. 

Oharge (lalsely,) UiaimiUarc {gen, of 



charge : bring, or prefer a ^y tsto 

make him an aocuaed peraon, reum 

faeere de — , 187. 
charge ( = enjoin), mandare {dat.'S, 
chargeable (with a fault), q^nif, 212. 
chaste, eaatua. 
children, liberi, pL 
cheese, eaaeua, 

choose (= elect), eUgere, Ug, lect. 
christian, diriatianua, 
circumstance. A circumstance which 

{referring to a preceding aentence)^ 

^iMsrev. 36, 37 (6). 
citizen^vw. 
city. VTva, urbia, 
civil-gown, toga, 
claim, poattdare, 
clear ( =3 excuse), purgare, 
clothe oneself tnauere, 283. 
coast, ora, 40. 
cold,yr^-u», 9ria. 
come, v^ire, vm, vent. 
come to the assistance o( alieui auj> 

ilUo venire, 242. 
come to a determination, eonaiUum 

inire, 
command, imperare {dat.), 
command an army, prceeaae {dot,), 
commission, mandare {dat,). 
commit many sins, multa peccare, 
common, communia. 
common : of a — kind, vidgaria, 
compassion, ndaericordia. 
compel, eogere, coeg, eoact. 
completed : I nave — the work, opua 

abaoltUian habeo, 364. 
concerns (it), intereat, 207. 
condemn, damnare, jondemnare: to 

death, eapitia. 
condemn a man to pay his vow, voU 

damnare, 
conduct, honorable, Jioneataa. 
confer (benefits) on, conferre {benefieia) 

in; ace; tiU,lat. 
confer an obligation on, gratiam inin 

cbb aliquo {CHc.) apud aliquem {Lie,) 

339. 
congratulate, congraJtvlari,^ 492. 
connection with, eonjunctio. See 157. 
conquer, vineere, vie, met. 
consequence : it is of — , intereat. 
consequence: it is of no — , nihil in* 

tereat, or refert, 207. 
consider =3 think, exiatimare, arbitrari 
consider = attend to, attendere, 229. 
considerable quantity, aliqwmtienu ^ 
considerably, aUquanto, 406. 
constancy, conatantia, 
constantly, perpetuo. 
constellation, aatrwui md-tu, em. 
Gonaul, conmi^ 11^ 



836 



INDEX I. — ^ENGLISH. 



consult, eonMulerej ttiZu, «utt., ace. 
consult, for, > constilere 

consult a man's interests, ) alicui, 233. 
contemporary, tequalia. 
contented, earUerUtu {abl.). 
contention, eonientio. 
continue, per^tre^perreXy perred. 
contract to biuld, amducere faciendum ; 

duXt dud. 
contrary to each other, inter m con- 

trarii, <e, a. 
conyenient, commodus. 
conversant, to be, eallsre (oee.). 
converse, loquiy locuiua. % 

comipl, corrumpere^ rup, rupt. 
cost, atare^ ctmMtare^ 26o. abl. : {dot. of 

person), 
count, •nufMrare. 
country, paHa; as opposed to town, 

ru8f ruri», 
country, in the, ruri, 
country, into the, rtu. 
country, from the, rure. 
courage, virhUf utia. 
courageously, forHter. 
courtesy, humanitaa, 
cross over, tranejicere or trajtcere^ jeCy 

jecty {ace.), 
crown, corona. 
cruelly, cmdeliier. 
cruelty, crudelitas. 
cry out, elamare, 
cultivate, co^«, cohiiCuU: if it be a 

atudy^ e. g. eloquence— «^uder« 

(rfo/.). 
cure, meaeri {dot.). 
custom, constietud-Of tni*. 
cut off, interduderef c2if», 233. 



Daily, quoliditf indies or in dies singur 
los. (See 69, t). 

danger, pericidum. 

dare, auaire, ausus awnu 

day, by, inlerdiUf 311. 

dea^ surdus. 

dearer, pluris^ G. 266. 

death, mors. 

death, to (after condemn)^ capitis, 

debt, ess aUenum^ 273. 

debt, heavy, magnum as alienvm, 

deceive, didpercy to, c«p, eept, 

decree, decemerey crev, cret, 

deem, putare. 

defend what is aetuaUy attacked, de- 
fender e ifendy fens) I ^ what may 
be attacked, tueri. 

Degree, to what a—! 9110, (withj'en.) 



deliberation (after optus sfQ, oonnclfe 

271. 
delight, ddectare. 
delightful, jucundvM. 
delightful to the sense of sight, ameenuM. 
demand, p(wtu/ar«; poeeerey poposc ; to 

demand importunateb/y ^ffiagiUsre. 

(See 257). 
deny, negare. 
depart a finger's breadth, transveraum 

digitum diseedere. 
depend on, nUit nisus or nixus : {in with 

abl.). 
deprive o^ spaKiars, orbare ; {ahV), 
desert, desererey seruy serl. 
deserve, mereri (merit) ; well of, benedsi 
deserving of; dignus {abl.). 
deserving to be, d^c, dignus esse qui, 

with subj. 
design, consilium. 
desire, vdle; cwoerey eupvSy cupii : — ap^ 

press a wish, ojatare (See 420, x). 
desirous, cupidus (gen.), 
despair o^ desperare. 
destroy utterly, delerey delev, ddet. 
destroy ( >= &um), amcr}hnarey 141, c. 
destroy : eo about to destroy, perditum 

irey 362,* a. 
deter, deterr&re. [See I^Vom.] 
determine, eonstUuere. 
detrimental, to be, ddrimento esscy 242. 
devote oneself to, incumbere t/i, with 

ace. {cubuy cubit), 
devote oneself to, studire {dot.). 
die, mort, ioTy mortuusi mortem or sw- 

premum diem obircy 249. 
difficult, difficilis, 
difficulty : there is — in doing, Ac. ^ it 

is done, difficile. 
difficulty : ne has — in doing, &c. ^ he 

does it, difficOe. 
difference, distantia. 
difference, it makes a very great, per- 

multum inieresty 123. 
difference, what is there 1 quidinUrest 7 
difference, there is no, ) nihU inierest, 
difference, it makes no, > or r^eriy 207. 
diligence, diligentia. 
dinner, ccma. 

direct = instruct, prcBcipere, cep. eepU 
dischargCj fungiy functusy {aU.) per- 

fungi. 
discipline, disciplina, 
discontented, am— with, poBvitet nu, 

207. ^ 

discourse, sermOy onis. 
discover, invenirey repirere. See 177, o. 
disease, morbus. 
disgraceful, turpis, 
disgusted: am— -aVfcecM (per£ per- 

t4Bsum esQ met WI, 



INDEX I.'p-ENOLISH. 



887 



indMnorably, turpiUr. 



dissatisfied: am— with, pcmtiU m«, 

207. 
distance : to be at a distance of, Ac, 

abetae^ dUtarey 319. 
distance : at two miles' distance, 348. 
distant : to be — from, abeaae; dialare 

(a), 319. 
ditch, jfoffM. 

diyest, enure^ exuy exutt 233. 
do notliing but — , nihil aHud quam 

(faeiutU omitted), 420. 
do well, pradare faeere, 
dog, cania, 
doubt: dvbitare, 
doubt: I don't at all—, nuUua dubUo 

iqtUn), See note 492. 
doubt : there is no — , nan eet dubium 

(9ttin), 89. 
dream, aamniare. 
dream, s. somrUum, 
draw, ( = call) away, avocare, 
draw up an army, aciem inatraere; 

struXf struct, 
draw up an army in three lines, MpH- 

eem acUm inatruere, 
dress, veatUua. 
drink, bibert, bib, bibit. 
drink, s.poh«,«^).^ 
drinking, oo«o, J"'* 
dxlTe, pdlere, peptd, puis : — drive 

away, ab^eref tg^ oU, 
dutiful affection, pt^M. 
d«ty, ^ffleium, 

E. 



Each (of two), uterqtUf utraqTU, tUrum- 
quCf Q. utriuaque, 

each one, unuaquiaqua, 

each other (after * to love,* Ac), inter 
ae, 470. 

each of them, singly, ainpdi, pi, 

eagerly desirous, atudumia, (gen.); 
ODtduaf (gen.), 

enafffacUia, Easily, /ocife. 

eat. edere {id, ea) ; vead (See 273). 

eclipse, defecHo. 

eclipsed, to be, deflcere.fectfect, 

efface, deUre, delev, delet, 

either — or : out — atU ; vel — vd ; aive 
— eive^ 456. 

elect, digere^ leg, led. 

election, condtioy n. pi. 

eloquence, doquentia, facundia (natu- 
ral eloquence). 

emfdate, eamtUari, 229. 

epcamp, conald^e, aed, aeaa. 



encounter death, mortem oppeUre, 
encounter a danger, periadum oUre. 
end o£ extremua, agreeing with iti 

subst., 179. 
endued with, prteditua (abl), 
endure, auatin&'e, tinu, tent, 
enemy private), inimicua. 
enemy (public), hoatia. 
engage = fight with, con/Ugeref JUs^ 



engage = undertake, redpere, eep, cepl, 
engaged in : to be — , qperam darCf 

337: (in a batUe, qfair, <ftc.) m- 

tereaae, 224. 
eiy«y,/ntt,(aW.). 
enough; aaUa, afotim, (See 512.) 
enquire of, qiuerereez; qtueaiv, qiueait, 
enter into partnership, coire aodeteUem^ 
entrust, credere^ credtd, crtdil {dot. ol 

person), 
envy, invidire. vid, via (dot.), 
Ephesian, Ettheaiua. 
equal, jaaTf oat. Equal to (in magrd-' 

tude, real or figurative), inalar 

(gen.),m. 
error, error, 

escape from, B,fuga, 157. 
escape : it escapes me, me fugit,faUitf 

pneterii, 259. 
eternal, eetemua (= everlasting) ; eem* 

pUernua, 123, c. 



even mind, eequua animua, 

even — not, ne — quidem. 

evening, in the, veaperi. 

esv&rf, omnia. 

every body, gtaiaque, 396. 

every tenth man, dedmua quiaque. 

every body who or that, quiaquia, qui- 

cunmie, 396. 
every thing, omnia, pL 
ever, vnquam, aUquando, quando, 402L 
evil, malum, neut. adj. 
exactly, with a numeral ; tpae, in agrco< 

ment, 308. 
exceed the bounds of moderation, tJto- 

dum excedere, ceaa. 
exceedingly, vdiementer. 
excel, anteceUere, preeatare, 229. 
exhort, hortari, adhortari, 
expedient, uiilia (dot.). 
expedient: it is — , expedU. 
expediency, uHlitaa, 
experience (fiuniliarity with a thing), 

uaua, Ha. 
exposed to, bbnoxiua, 212. 
extortion, pecunuB repehrndts ; or only 

repetundcB, 
extremely flourishing, Iqnge opulentis- 

aimua. 
eye^ocuhu. 



838 



IXDBX r. — ^ENGLISH. 



Fao& to know a man by, dcfacU noaae, 
fail (a friend), deeme {dot.), fail (one), 

MtlkfJkUB, 5. 

Saitl^ljddis, 

fall OB (» seize on), inceMere, 229. 

false. /oZnu. 

ialsehoodB, utter many, multa mentirL 

38. 
ramily,yamiZta. 
tax from (thinldng) this, tantym abe»t 

ut — ' " 



far : not to be — from, haud muUym 
or procul abtsMe (^in), 91. 

far be it from me not, 83. See note t, 
p. 40. 

far, muUo (with compar. and 8uperl.\ 

farewell, ave, Bolve^ vale^ 281. 

(ateyfatum. 

fault, culpa. 

favour, a, beneficium. 

favour,/argrc {datXfaVffaut. 

fawn;upon, adttlan (dot. or ace.). 

fear, of frody, tiTnor ; of mindf mdua^ lis, 

fear, timere^ Tnetxjure^ vereri. See 99. 

feeble, imbecUlus. 

feedon^vMci. See 273. 

feel thankful, eratiam habere. 

feyeTffebriSf ahl i. 

few, pauci^ <s, a. 

few : a few days ago, paucia his didnu. 

few; a few days before, patuna illia 

diebua. 
MelitVyJldea. 
field, in the, milUuB. 
fight, pugnare; fight on horseback, ex 

ejuo. 
find, vnveniref reperire. 177. 
find: hard to find, aifficUia inverUUj 

364. 
finser's breadth. £^ee Depart 
finish, conficere. 
fire, tffnia, (= conflagration) incen- 

dium. 
first, primum : at first, primo. See 83. 
fit, aptusy 212. 
fitted, acccmmodahiSf 219. 
fix by edict, edicire (ut). 
fiank, on the, a latere. 
flatter, adulari {dot. or ace.), 
flaw, mtiumi . 
"uga. 



^en,). 



flogged, to be, vtrgi8c<Bdi; ccmu^. 

folly, stvUitia. 

fond, cuptdiia i 

food, dbua, t. 

foot, pesy pedU, 

pti when untranslated, 255. 



for how much 7 quanti? 

for as much— as, tanHr—quanii, 266. 

for less, minoriSi 266. 

for just as much— as, > tarUidem — 

for no more, than ) qiianH^ 226. 

for ( = in. beAoZ/* ^, pro. 

for f = oirt?!^' to, of obstacles), pr<e,(aU. 

for instance, ver&i cau«^. 

for some time, dvdum, jamdudum^ 42Qt 

for (after to /cor), sign of dai. 

for any thing I care, per me licet. 

for us (after moAre), a nobis. 

foreign to, alienus, 212. 

foretell, prcedicere. 

forget, djUtoisci, oblitus, 199. 

former, the, i^, 378. 

forsooth : as if—, quasi vero, 494, 

fortune. See Good. 

fortune : let— see to it, id Fortuna 
vidirit. 

found, conderej condid^ condU. 

founder (of a family), pHncepsfamUi^. 

free from, liherare {ahl.). 

freedman, libertintu : (but with refer- 
ence to his Tnaster^ libertus,) 

friendly, amFcu^. 

friends, his own, sui. 

from a boy, pwero. 

from the heart, ex animo. 

from a waU, ex muro. 

from your neighbourhood, istmc. 

from a difierent direction, aliunde, 

from, after conceal^ omitted, 251. 

from, m\jst prevents^ deters^ Ac, quonU- 
nus, 94. 

from, after recovery ex, 

front, in, afronte. 

frugality, frugalitaa. 

fruits (of the earthy fruges: (of a *r«c) 
fruchis, 

full, plenusy 182. 

fury,/ttror. 



Grain an advantage, emolumentum ca- 

pere {cep^ capt\ — ex. 
gain possession o4 potiri {ahl. gen.). 
Graul, GaUus. 

get possession of, potiri^ potitus (ahl), 
gift, donumj munuSy erts. (See 242.) 
give information, docercy 253: give 

much information, muUa c2ooerc 

ide)y 252. 
give battle to, premium committere 

cum; mUy mtsa, 
given over, desperaius. 
given it is, daltur, 
glad, to be, Uekariy 521. - 
glory, gloTia. 



INDEX I. — ENGLISH. 



830 



giorlous. gloriotut, 

go wrong, errare. 

go away, abirt^ decedere^ cesa. See 308. 

go about to destroy, perditum ire^ 

362*, a. 
go on, pergerCf pcrrex, perrect, 
go on in your valour! made viHute 

eato! 280. 
god, Deutj 56. 
gold, aurum. 
golden, aureut, 
good, bonu»s ( = beneficial, expedient) 

tUUia. 
good : to do~, prodeaae {dot.). 
good fortune i it was my — {contigU 

mitdf—^j 374). 

govern, imperare^ dat. ; ( = regulate, 

direct) moderari lace, or dat. See 

220). 
grateful, gratus, 
gratitude, gratia, 
greatest (when degree is meant rather 

than size), mimmua, 
greedy, avidua (gen,), 
Greece, GreBcia, 
Greek, GrcBcua. 
grief, dolor, 

grieve, dolere^ rrusrere. See 521. 
ground, humus ; on the ground, humi. 
grudge, invidere (dat.), ru2, via. 
guard against, ) cavere {ace. 233), cop, 
guard, be on my, J caut. 
guidance, under your, te duce ; under 

the ^dance of Herdonius, Her- 

donitdudu. 



Habit of silence, tacUumiiaa, 

had rather, maUt^ 150 (conjug. 142, 1). 

hail, ave, aalve, 281. 

hand, manua, i^«, 4. f. 

hanging, auapendium, 

happen (of 69tb), accidere: of fortunate 

eventaycontwgereitig): = turn out, 

evenire, (See 374). 
happen : how does it happen that . , ,1 

gut lit ut, Ac. 
happy, beatuaffelix, (See 443.) 
hard: are hard to avoid, difficHe vi- 

tantur, 
hard to find, diffUUia inwntu {sup.), 
hardly ( = scarcely), mar. 
hardly any body, nemo fere, 
harvest, Jiuaaia^f 
bate, adiaae (with tensci derived from 

Perf.). 



hatefii], to be, edw t§ae^ 242. 

have, habere, 

have a thing done, fadendum eurara^ 

356. 
have an interview with, olmveniTt^ 

(aec.). 
have, in such sentences as, *vnih 

whom we have to do.' (See 336.) 
head, capvt^ ca'DiUa, n. 
heal, mMeri {dot.), 
healed, to be (of a wound), eonaana^ 

cere. 
health, to be in good, valire. 
hear^ aiudire, 
hearmff : without hearing him ( « him 

unhearcC), inauditum (ace. maae.) 
heart (as the seat of the qffectiona), ami- 

mua, 92. 
heart, cor, eordia, n. 
heavy, gratia. 

height : to such a — , eo, adv, {gen.). 
help (a person in perplexity), aiOvenire 

{dat.)i juvare (ace.), auxiUari 

{dat.)t auccurrere {dat. See 222, k.). 
her {ace. aing.), ae, if relating to nom. 

of sentence ; if not, eam. 
her, adj. auua, a, urn, if relating to nom. 

of sentence ; if not, ejua, 
hesitate, dubitare. 
hidden, occuUua, 
him, ae, if relating to nom. of sentence 

if not, eum. 
himseli^ 369 ; 373, c. (Q. on f 48.) 
hinder, impedire. See CI. on f 15. 
hindrance, vmpedimentum. 
his own friends, adherents, &c. aui, 
hit ( = strike), ferire, icere, ctedere, ee- 

eld, casa. See 299, i. 
hold, tenere, 

hold a levy of troops, delectum habere 
hold one's tongue, sUere, tacere, See 

299, g. 
hold cheap, parvi pendXri, 266. 
home, to, dimum : at, domi : from, doma 
honey, met, meUia, 
honour ( = the honorable), hovustaa^ 

( = probity)^<«, ei. 

honorable conduct, honeataa. Honor 
able, honestva. Honorably, honeate, 

hope, aperare, (See 15.) 

horseback, on, ex equa : (of more than 
ovu peraon) ex eguia, 

house, at my, domi meee, 

how (with adj.), quam, 

how disgraceful it is, qwmio opprtbrii 
eat. 

how manv, quot. __ 

how much, quantum. 

how does ft nappenl qutJU^ ut • . • T 



840 



nCDBX I.— BNOLISn. 



how fiBW thwe an, mho — lomoiut' 
qubtqut td, qui..? (wiA mOj.) 

aumao-feeling, 

humanlKTy j 

hunger, JwiMf, it. 

hurry, to be in ^fet/Hnart, 

hurt, noocre, daL ; Utdtrt (oee. /«t.) 

hurtful, to be, noeere, 

husband, vtr, 291. 



Hbrmypart, ^ 

If— not,«si».4M. 

if howeyer, mn anUmf 451. 

ignorant, to be, ignorare (aee,). 

ignorant : not to oe i^orant that, Ae^ 

non ignorare^ man. 
ignorant : who is ignorant thaC, Ac. 1 

qutB ignoraif quin ... 7 
ignorant of; rudig tewi.). 
immediately after the battle, eonfuUm 

AjpTcuiOf 348. 
immense, mgent. 
immortal, tmmorlo/ia. 
impiety, xmpietoM* 
impiety : if it may be aaid without — , 

Biftu est dieiu, 364. 
impiety : it cannot be said without—-, 

ntfat ai dictu, 364. 
importance, it is of; iiUereH {gen,), 203. 
importance, it is of great, magni (or 

mvUtum) intereaif wS, a. 
Important, gnwior. 
importune, MagUare. 
impose on, tmponere^ fotu^ Jtosiii 233. 
impute as afault, vt/to or adpaBdare 

or vertere, 242. 
in the presence of the people, apud 

populum. 
in (an author), apud {XenophmUtm, 

Ac), 
in front, afrmUe, $■ 

in Hank, a laiere. 
in the rear, a Urgo, 
in triumph (to lead), per triumphum, 
inattentive to, negligent {gen,)y 183. 
increase, augire, aux. auct, {trans,) 

erescere, ereo (neui,), 
incredible, ineredwiUs. 
m'»nsistent with, alienus, 212. 
inconvenient, inoommodus, 
induce, addvcere u/, Ac. 
indulge, indtdgere^ diUs, dvU {dot.), 
inaustry, diligentia. 
Inflict punishment on, aliquem pcmA 

qfiesre, 276. 
Influence : to have great — with, mul- 

turn vaUre (gmd aliquem. 



inform, certioremfaeerM, 187. 

information. See Give. 

inhabit, incoiere, eoki, euU. 

injure, violare, ( = do harm to) Isedsn- 

(aee.), 
injunous, it is, noeei {dot.). 
injury, tnfuria. 
innocent, innoeens. 
insignificant* how — ! otiam kuUubI 
insmence to such a height of, so (odp.) 

tnMfen<u8, 612. 
JniitanceL for, vsHdeausSU 
interest ( => true interest), utilUas. 
interest : it is the— of; tnisrest {gm,}, 

203). 
interests (to consult the). See 233. 
interests (to provide for). See 233. 
interview. See Hme. 
intimate : to be — yriihifamiiiartter vN^ 

abl. 
inventor, in9mlor.fem.uwentrix. 
invest ( =B blockade), obsidsre^ sed, sess. 
invoke, appeUare, 
iron-hearted,/erreic«. 
is ( » is distant), disiaJt. 
island, insula. 
it cannot l)e but that, fieri non potest 

quin. 
it is not every man who can, Ac., imh 

eujusvis est, Ac. 190. 
Italy, Italia. 



Jnyehn, jaeulum, 

jest, iocus. 

jewel, gemma. « 

join battle with, csmmittere prcelium 

{cum), 
journey, on the, inter viajn. 
joyful, lotus, 
just (equitable), eequus. 
instice, /icalilia. 



Keep, servare. 

keep one's word, Jidemprastare. 

keep up a certain state, spUndids 8€ 

gerere. 
kill, tnterfieerej oceiderSf neeare, 306L 
king, reij ngis, 
know, scire, mmsst, eaXttrs, 386. 



Labour, labor. 

lame of one leg, dUmins tHoto psda 

lamp, lueemo. 



INDEX I. — ^BNOLISB 



841 



lasting, 9eimffiicmu». 
latter, the; Me, 
laugh, rid9re, rU^ rU, 
law, lex, Ugia, 
lay on, tmponere, 

lay a person ander an obligation, gror 

Uam ab aU^ mirt. 
lay down a magistracy, magiatraJtum 
-- abdicart} (or ae with oW., 306.) 
lead a life, agert viiam; eg, ad, 
league, foDdus, eria, 
learning, branch o^ docirina, 
lean on, nUi, niauBt nixua {abl, 273). 
learn, diacere, didie. 
leam by heart, ediaeere. 
leave, relinquere, liq, lid: (by will), re- 

linqwere, 
leave ( = go out of), excedere {wUh obL) 

ceaay 83. 
leave nothing undone, mhil praicrmit- 

tare quiru 
leave off, deainerey deai, dealt. 
leg. See Lame. 

leisure : I have—, vaeat rnihi, 154. 
Lemnos, Lemnoa^ G. i. 
let me^ know, fac aciam {wWi ut 

omt** 



tet out to be built by contract, locare 

faciendum. 
letter, litercBy pi : epiatola. 
levy troops, aeUctum habere, 
liable to, obnoxiua^ 212. 
liar, mendax {adj.), 
lie; mentiri. 
lie near, adjac^Cy 229. 
life, vtto; ( = life>time) eetaa. In the 

life-time of Augustus, Avgualo 

tivoj 364. 
lift up, toUere, auahUt aublat, 
light, levia. 
light ( = kindle), accendere : auccendere 

ropmi, <&c. (See 299, h.) 
:htnmg, ^ttZmen, tTii*. 
:e, aimilia, dat.: (s equal to in size) 
""^ inatar. igtn.). 
like(9«rfr). See 491, <2. 
lines : to draw up an army in three—, 

triplMem aeiem inatnure. 
literature. ItUrce. 
little,^ a little {^few thisjga,) patico, 



ligl 
lik< 



little: but or too — , jwirttm. 

little, a ( = some, but not much), pau- 

lum ; paultUum, 402. 
long, diu :prideii\ jamdiUj jampridem. 

long for, avere, of an impaHeiiU,guHre 
of a jdyoiw longing. 



look to thatvovrsel^ id ipae vidiria. 

loquacious, loquax. 

lose, perdere, perdid, perdii : lose (pa» 

sively), amitUre. (See 56.) 
lose an opportunity, oecaaionem amii* 

tare. 
lose flesh, corpua amitUre. . 
love, amare^ diligere. (See 186, a.) 
lover of^ amanat diUgena (gen., 183.). 
lover, such a lover of, adeo amana oi 

diligena (gen., 183). 
lowest, tnfimua, imua, 
lust, libido, inia. 
luxurious, luxurioaua, 
lyre, to play on the. See Teadi, 



M. 

Mad, to he, fur ere. 

madness, amentia, 512. 

magistracy, to hold, Tnagiatrjium ge- 

rere. 
make, fcuere (fee, fact); effido: am 

made,^. Oba. * mnkes all thinga 

(ace.) flourish;' in Lat. 'makes 

that (ut) all thinga (nom.) should 

flourish,' 254. . 
make the same promise, idem palHcerit 

poUicitua. 
make treaty, Ac, ftsdua ieere, 299. 
make this request of you, Ulud ta rogit 

(ut ne). 
make ( = appoint to an office), ereare. 
make mention of, meminiaae, recor- 

c2art,201. 

make the same boast, idem gloriari, 
make it my first object, id agere (ut) 
make for us, a nobiafacere. 
make a decree in a man's fiivour, «e> 

cundum dUquem decemere; ilecreCf 

decret. 
making haste (after tmia eat),propa' 

rate, (abl. part 171). 
maken effector : fern, ^ectrix. 
man, homo, vir. (See ^, y.) 
man : I am not the-:- to ; non ia aum, 

qui (aubj.). 
manners ( — morals, character,) morea^ 

um, pi. 
many, multi. 
march ap^st the enemy, obviam cnt 

hoattbua. 
marry (of a female), nubere (dat. 222). 
Marseiiles, Masailia. 
master, magister, domvnua, \erua. (See 

180.) 
matter, rea. 
mean, aibi vtlU, 



842 



itoEX I.-— IHGUSH. 



B ; in the—, inierinL irUerea. 

(See 402.) 

uiB, by no, minime, 
meat, a6u«. 
medicine, metUeina. 
meditate, medilari (aec,). 
meet, to go to, obviam ire (dtU.). 
melt, it^ueaoere, /icu. 
mercliaiit m«rcator. 
mkidle of, nudiuB (in agreement witli 

Its subsi. 179). 
nslle ( = 1000 paces), mille poMtu* : pi. 

mUiapassttton, 
Miletus, of, MUenua. 
milk, lae, Uuii», 
mind, m«n», mentis; anxmtu. 
mindful, memor {gen,). 
miserable, miaer, era^ &c. 
mistaken, to heyfallL 
mistaken, I am, mefaUit, 
mock, iUudtre {dot, 229). 
moderate, modcrari {ace, or dai, 220). 
money, pecunia. 
month, menmSf m. 
moon, luna, 
moral, tanctua, 
morals, moretj urn. 
more, pluB (with gm,). For more, 

mortal, mortalU. 

most men, plerique. 

motion, nuauMf ut, 

mound, agger, 

move, movere^ nuw, mot. Move, fuuf . 



much, mu^ n. pi, (but if oppotd to 
many things, or followed by^en. 
muZ^um.) 

much less, nedum^ 443. 

multitude, muUituda, tnit. 

N. 

^aked, ntuiut. 

name, nominare (also » to appoint). 

feature, natura; rerum nahartL 

near, prope (oec.). 

near, to oe very, mimmum abesse (im- 

pers.) qtdn, 92. 
nearer, propior; (ado.) pivpiutf, 211. 
nearer am, propluB abaum (quam), 319. 
nearest, proximua, 
nearly, prqpe, /xen^. 
need, egere, indigere (abl, or Fen.), 
need, have — o^ opus est^ 17^ e. 
need, you have no — , nihU opus est. 
negligent, negligens (gen.), 183. 



neighbourhood, in your, idk, ^ 
neighbourhood, from your, idint, >387 
neighbourhood, to your, itftic. > 

neutral, medius. 

never, mmquam, 

nevertheless, tamen, 

news of the town, res urbaaue, 

next : the next thing is, sequJUiuT ta, 86 . 

night, by, nodu or node. 

no, nulhm ; after n«, ftcis. 

no one, nemo, 

no painter, neme pkiar, 

no time, mhUtemporis. 

nobody, nemo, inis.* 

none of you, nemo vestrum, 

none of those things, niful eorum, 

nor, neque, nee: but after u^ or ne it 

is neve or neu. 
not, non. After re/., see p. 216, d. 
not yet, nondum^ 
not one's own, alienus. 
not even, ne—quidem. 
not only — but also, non sohanr- -sed^ 

or verum etiam, 
not so far off, to be, propius abess6„ 
not to say, ne dieam, 
not that— but, non guod—sed; non 

guo^sed; non eo oi ideoquoii — 

led, 492. 
not at all, mfuL 

not as if not, non quin, with svbj,^ 
not to be for from, haud mtdiurn lor 

haudprocvl) abesse (^tcm). 
nothing, nXML 

nothlne but, nt&tl aliud nisi, 185. 
nourish, alere, ahi, alit or alL 
now ( = already), iofiu 
number, num^rare. 



Obey, par^re, obedire {dot. Sea 222V 
object, not to, run recusare quin, 92. 
obligation, lay a man under a great, 

con&r an — on, magnamabaU^pM 

(Cie.), apud aUquem {Lao.), gra^ 

iiaminire, 339. 
obliging, annmodus. 
obstruct, tntercbtdere, dus, 
obtain, poHri {abl. gen.). 
occasion: you have no — to hunyi 

mhU est ^uodfestmes, 477. 



* Neminir and nemine are not found, but nvlHuSf nuUo : — except now and thea 
nemine with pass, participle.— Nemo ablatwum nee habet, nee habet^ eni^tmii 



INDEX I. — ^ENGLISH. 



843 



occasion ; have— for vg/wt est, 170. 

ocean, oeeaniu. 

occupy myself in, operam dare, 337. 

odious, to be, odio ease. 242. 

ot after * strip,' Ac. (obL) 

01, after * become,* 'aeseree well,'' Ac. 

*am persuaded,* and when ^=s 

eonceming, de, 
o£ after ^sntpdre,* ex. 
of others, aUenus, a, um. 
of such a kind, eJttsmodL 
offend, qfendere^end,fens (aee.). 
offend against, vialare. 
offence : if I may say so without — , 

pace tud dixerim. 
old, veitts, veteris {n. pi. Vetera), 
old man, senex, O. senis, G. pi. um. 
old use, senedus, uUs. 
one (of two), aUer, O. itta. 
one thing — another, aliud — aliud, 38. 
one ( = a certain), quidam. 
one (a some one, no matter who), 

(diquis. 
one's, suus. 
only, adj. sohu, O. ius. 
onlyr the — one who, unua qui (with 

subj.). 
only son, umcus JUUis. 
opinion, to be o^ censere, 
opportunity, ooeaaio. 
oppose, renugnare (dot.), dbstare (dot.), 
or, out, mil, ve, 466 (in questions an). 
or not, necM. See 122. 
orator, orator. 

order, jM6er«, juss {ace. with inf.). 
ought, oportet. See 126. 
out o£ e, ex, 
out or doors, jfbnw. 
out : to dine out, ccmare faris, 339. 
oyer : it is all over with, adwn est de, 
over against, adversus. 
overpower (with emotion), frangere, 

freg,fract. 
overthrow, evertere, vert, vers. 
owe, debere. 
owing : it is owing to, per aluptem stat, 

quominua, &c. 99. 
own (empfuUie), ipsius or ipsorum, after 

Ttuus^ tutu, &c. 



P. 

Pace, passiis, 4^, 

pained, to be, dolere (ace. or dbl. with 

pardon, venta. 

pardon, ignoscere, run (dot.) ; (of a su- 
perior) veniam dare. 
parent, parens; gerUttr, fern, genUrix. 
part, pars, partis. 



partner, consors, 185. 

party, to be on our, a rjobis senUrs, 

past, the, prteterita. 

peclL modius. 

peculiar, proprius, 212. 

percMve, setUire. ' 

percnance (in questions), quid in ee- 

quid, numquid, 400. 
performj^im^ perfungijwnctus {abl.\ 
perhaps, fortasse. 
permitted, it is, Ueet. 
permitted, I am, Ucet rnihi. 
perpetual, sempUemus. 
perseverance, perseverantia. 
persist, perseverare. 
persuade (= advise^, suadere 's4at,) ; a 

advise effectually, persuaaere, suas 

(dot.), 
persuaded, I am, persuasum est miM 

de, Ac, or persuasum habeo, 291. 
perverse, perversus. 
perversely, perverse. 
philosopher, philosopkus. 
philosophy, phUosophia. 
piety, pietas. 
pity It), miseret me, or misereor, gen, 

(See 201, r.) 
pity, misericardui. 
plainly: see — through, perspedum 

habeo, 364. 
planet, planeta or es. 
plan, amsilium. 
plant, serere, sec, sal. 
play, ludere, Ius. 
play on the lyre. See Teaefu 
pleat A cause, a^ere causam, 
pleLoant, jucitnaus. 
please, placere (dot.). 
pleasure, voluptas. 
poet, poeta. 
point: to be on the — of in eo esse ut, 

479. 
poison, venenum, 
Pompey, Pompejus, 
possession, to oe in, tenure. 
possession, to gain, potior (abl or gen.), 
possible as (after superl.), quam, vd^ 

410. 
possibly. As great as can possibly be, 

quantus maximus potest esse, 412. 
post nimself, considers, sed, sess. 
poor, pauper, 
power, potentia of actual, potestas of 

legal, conceded, Ac, power, 
power: to put himself in their — , pch 

testatem suifacere. 
power: to be in our — , in nostrd po- 

testate esse. 
powerful, potens. 

practice ( justice^ <frc.), colere, colu, cuh 
praise, laus^ ' 



844 



OfDEZ I.— HBNGLISB. 



prafiG, to, Umdare. 

pray (a beg eameatly), 

predict, prttdicere. 

orefer, anteponeref pom, po&ii, 

prefer a charge, reumfckcere dt, 187. 

prefer a capital charge against, m 

capUaiu rewn facere, 1§7. 
prefer a charge of immorality against, 

dc moribwB reum faeert, 187. 
prejudicial, to be, cbcBU {dot.). 
prepare, parare. 
present with, donare, 207. 
present, give us a, dmw or muneri dare, 

242, (3.^ 
present, to be, adesse {dot.). 
preservation : tend to the—, 335, c. 
pretend, nmtdare. 
pretty often, nonnunmiam, 
prevent, ob»tare, obttU {dot.), 

pnestess, $ -w^w^j "•«• 

proceed against a person, eoruuUre in 

aliquttn. 
produce (= fruits), frugu, pi, 
productive of, ^fficUn» Xs^\ ^^• 
profitable, to be, -j^Todcate (dat.). 
promise, poUicen, licUtus promittere. 

See 17, 1. See 15. 
prompt execution (after optu mQ, ma- 
ture facto^ 177. 
prone, proclima {ad.), 
property, all my, omnia mea, 
property, all their, omnia aua, 
prosecute, po&tvlare, 201. 
protection, take under one's, tueri, 374. 
proud, auperbuM, 
prove an nonour, hofnori etse; (prove 

done by turn with the dot., 242.) 
prove myself mindful; proattare me 

mtmortm, 
prove my eratitude, ) graHam re- 
prove myself grateful, ) ferre. 
provide for the interests oi^ providfre 

vid, via; proepicere, apex, aptbt 

(both with da/.), 
provided that, dum, modo, or dtrni- 

mSde {after whick 'not* ia ne), 

494. 
pull down, diruere, ru, rut, 
punishment, pcena, 
purpose, for the, ctntad. 
purpose, to no, nequicguam^ fntaira, 
put ; put down, pmure, poau, poait, 
put otij exuere, axUy erut. 
put in mind o( adTiumare, 194. 
pyre, rogua. 



Ignite (to be without), plane {carere). 



Ratify a treaty, ieere fatdua, 

rather, I had. mSlo, 

rational fucuity, mena. 

rear, in the, a Urgo, * 

reason, vou, dc, luive no, fdhU est 

quod {aubj.), 
receive, oe-, ex-, re- eipere, eep, capi, 

(See 308.) ^ rt r 

receive favourably, honi conauUre {fn 

Q^intiL, Seneca, <f*c.) ; m honam 

partem accipere, 185. 
reckon, numerare, 
reckon one thing after another, poatha- 

here, 
reckon as a fault, vitio vertere, 242. 
recollect, reminiaei, 
reconciled, to be, en graHam redirt 

(cum), 
recover, anvaaleaetre, vo/u. 
recruit myseli^ me reficere. 
refrain: I cannot-^ from, temperart 

mifd noa poaaum, quin, Ac, 
regard the interests of, proapiccre, apex, 

apect {dat.), 
reign, regnare, 
reign: in your — , terege: te regnaatt 

or imparante, 364. 
reject, repudiare, 
rejoice, gaudere, gaviaua awn, 
relate, narrare. 

relieve from, Uberare {abl.) ; (of a par- 
tial ieYiei)la>are{abl!), 
religion, reUgva, 
relying on, frttuM {akl.\, 
remainder » rest of, 179. 
remains, it, rt^liqauan eat, reatat {tU}, 
remedy, rem^dium, 
remember, meminiaae {Imperat, tiM- 

mento) ; recordari, remvniaci, (See 

201. q.) 
remind, admonere {gan.\. 
render, reddere, dia, du, 
renew, renovare. 
repair, r^fieere, fee, feet, 
repay a kindness, graHam rafiarro, 
repent : I — me, me pcsnitet (gen,), 
report, fama. 

require, egere, indigere {rem. aM.). 
required, are, apua aunt, 172. 
resignation, eaquua anivmua. 
resignation, the most or greatest^A j^ms- 

aimua animua, 
resist, reaiatere, reMf repugnare 

{dat.). 
resolve, eonaUtuere, atitu, atUut 
rest, requiea, 
rest on, nUi, 273. 
rest o£ adj. reliquua, (See 179.) 
rest, all the, cetara i 



arDBH I.— ENGLISH. 



345 



lesiore liberty to his country, patriam 

in Hbertaiem vindicare. 
r«straic, Umpcrare idal.\ 220. 
restrained, to be, mfdberu 
retain a grateful sense, gratiam habere. 
return, redire, revertL rcDcnire, (See 

33a p.) 
return thanks, grahaa agent ^% oct. 
revile, tnaUdicere (dai,). 
reviler, vUuperatof'. 
revolt from, d^flcere ab ; /ee, feet, 
rich, divea, 
riches, divUi4s. 

right, reduas (of situation,) dexter. 
rise, ortrt, tor, orhu. (See 443.) 
rivu, eemvloTi {dot. or a4x.). 
river, JhtnuTiy amnUf JhwiUB, 472, o. 
rob, tjHMare {cM,). 
rod, virg<B^ pi. 

rope (= hanging), auspendium. 
Rome, Roma. 
Roman, Ronuxmu. 
rule, regula. 
ruling power, to be rerun poiiri. 



S, 



Safety, «a/i», ti/i*. 

sake: fortne — ofycauad. 

sake, for its own, propter aeae. 

salute, aahttare. 

sam& u26m. 

satisfaction, to your, Ac, e:r (tu^) «6n- 

tenM. 
satisfactorily, ex aententid. 
satisfy, aaiisfacere (dot.). 
say, aicere : (= eaaeria) aii. 
say that — not, negdre. 
say : not to say, ne dicatn. 
say : they (= people) say,/6ruft«. 

saying; as the — Is, ) 

says he, mquU. 

sauce, eoruUmenhmi. 

scarcely, viar. 

sea, mare. By sea and land, terrd 

marique. 
season, tempeataa. 
seasoning, eondhnentum* 
second, alter. 
sedition, aeditio. 
see, videre! r» distinguish | have the 

aenae of nght) eemere. 
see that you don't, vide ne. 
see (plainly) through (any thing), ali- 

quid perapectum habire, 364. 
see ; do you see to that, id tu vtdiria. 
seem, videriy viaua, 

16* 



seize on, inceaaere (of /ear, Ac), 329. 
sel^ selves. (See 368.) I myself, 

^e, 33. 
sell, vendere {vendidy vendiiS, 
sell, neui. venire {veneo), 2d7. 
senate, aenatua. 
send, mittere. mUf miaa. 
send forwara, pramittere. 
send (news by letter), peraeribere. 
send to the assistance ot, auxiHo mli» 

tare {two datboea). 
sentence, aanteiUiOi 
serpent, aerpe/na. 
serve a campaim «<^Miicf mm mtrero^ 

or TnererL 306. 
serves, eat (with dot. 237). 
service, to be of; prodeaae (dot.). 
serviceable, idantua. 
sesterce, aeatertiua. 
set on fire, incendere. aueeendere. Sec 

299. 
set out, prqficiaciyfectua. 
set out to the assistance o^ auxilia 

profieisei {two daticea). 

several, plurea. 

several times, 420. 

severe, gravia: gravwr, 409, g, 

severity, gravitaa. 

shadow, tanbra. 

shed, vrqftmdere,ftid,fua. 

should, «B ought, debere, oportetj 126 < 

or (after Ezerc. 49, Pt. I.) part 
' in dtw, 326, 327. 
show (myself brave), preebere. 
Sicily, SicUia. 
sick, ager, gra, grum: (of body ox 

mind) eegrohw* 
side, to be on our, a nobia atare. 
siege, bbaidio. 
silence, ailentium: {habit of) tdeUur^ 

nitaa. 
flent, tacitua: {habitualfy) taeitwrmuk 
silent, to be, aileref tacere. See 299. 
silver, argentumi. 
sin, ^eooare. 

since, qwum^ quorrdam^ 492 
sister, 4 



skilled in, peritua {gen.). 

slaughter, trueidare. 

slave, aervua. 

slave, to bo the, aervire {dai.). 

slay, oceidere, ^ eta. 

sleep, aomnua. 

smack ofj redoUre {ace.\ > n^e 

smell of, o/gffc, J ^°' 

snatch away, eripere^ ripu, rept {dot of 

pers.). 
snares, inaidite. 



846 



mSSX I«— BN0LI8S* 



SHOW, niXf fMa. 

10 near hoine, tempr0p0a dpmoL 

M. The thing is so, rea Uate habet, 

Socrates, SoenUea, €hn. W. 

sold, to be, venire (oenao), 267. 

some, aliquu, mfptani, 392. See 

note z. and 390, t. 
some one or other, nudo qw, 394. 
some body of consequence^ olimijt, 396. 
some other place, to, alio. 394. 
some other place, from, aliunde. 
some other direction, in, aUo, 
some other direction, from, aliunde. 
some considerable, aUquanUttn, 
some — others, aUi — aUL 
sometimes rumnunquam, aUquanda, 

interdum. See 402.* 
somewhat. Omit, and pot a4j. In 

comapar. 408 : or translate by jtanle 

with compar. 
Sony : I am — for, figet me {gen,)» 
soul, aanimue, 
soWj eerertf «e9, sot. 
Spam, JEtupanuk. 

spare, fxireere. pepere (dot,). * 
speak, loquif hcuhie, 
speak the truth, verum dieere, 
spear. Aa«/a. 
speecti. oraHo, 249. 
spend nis life, vUam agere, 
spend his time (in), Umpm impendgre^ 

spoken ill of^ to be, maleaudire. 
sport: to make— o£ iUvdere. lue 

(dot,), 
stand in need o^ erere (gen, oU.). 
stand by, adeaee (dia,). 
star, eldia, See 51. 
stay (in a place), commoraru 
starvation, famee. 
state, reapublicti. 
•tick, baeiUuM. 

stir out of the city, whe exeedere, 249. 
stone, lapUy adj, lapideue. • 

storm, qjpugTiare {aeeX 
storm, to take by, per tim expugnare. 
strange, minu. 
strength, vires, tunu 
strip off, exuere. 

strive, nUi, tnUi, niatiSf nirtM, fU. 
struck (by stonee. Ughtningf 4&c.), ictue. 
study, siudere (dot!). 
subject to, cimoxiue {dat.), 
succeed ( = follow), exc^pere (ace.). 
successfully, ex eenieniid. 
Bttccour, euceurere (dot,). 



muAkftaHe. 

such is-your temperance^ qtia tua est 

temperantUif 66. 
such a manner, in, Ua (u/)< 
sufi^, einere, nv; paHf paeeue. Son 

632. 
suggestion, at your, te auctore. 
■oitable, idoneue, 212. 
•an,M<. 

•iqierior, to be, > anteeeUere, praeektrek 
muptjm, \ 229, 

BupersUtioo, euperwlUio. 
supper, oBfia. 
support ( = nourish), alere, o/u, alU, cit 

alL 
surround, eireumd&re (urbem muro, of 

murum urbi), 
survive, euperease, 
Burvivor, euperetes, itis, 
suspense, to be in anxious, pmdere 

onufii, animo {or if necessary, 

animie, 
^raspicion, euapido, 
swallow, hhrmdo, dime 
Bweaifjurare. 
Syracuse, Syracuaas, 



Take,t ccqjere (cep, capt) : aumere 

{awna, aumpt). See 492. 
take oy storm, expugnare. 
take in good part, bani conauUre, 185. 
take away, adimere, eximere. See 385, 

o (em, empf) : eri]p«re {doL of pers.). 
take measures against, conatUere in 

(ace.), 
take cruel measures against, crudelUer 

in (aliquem) conauUre, 
take a camp, exuere hoatea castria, 233 
take care, caveref eav, caut, 
take care that, vtde (ne), 
take under one*s protection, tueri^ 374. 
take hold of, prehindere. 
teach, docere, two ace. 257. 
teach to play on the lyrey fdibua doeert 

(i. e. teadi tjdWi OTonthe atringe), ^ 
teacher, magiaier; fern, magiatra, 
temple, iemplwn, 
tenacious, tenax (gin,), 
tend, to, 335, e, 
terrify, terrere, 
territory, ager, 
thank, granaa agere, 
that (after doubtj diny, Ac, with neg.), 

qwn. 



* Rarius interdum quam nonnunquam ease memento, 
t Take ann% arma capere, or aumere, (Cieero,) 



iNDEX 1. —ENGLISH. 



84Y 



tbat (after fear), ne; tJuU—noi, tU (or 

that, as nom. to ^«t,' &c., agrees with 

nom. after it, 386, m. 
that famous, ilU^ 381. 
that (after * U rtmadnt,' * UfoOow '), u^. 
toat too, et it; idemquey \ ~«» 
that too not^ neciM^ \ ^^' 

that onlVj^t demum, 385. 
Thebes, 7%e&£B^ arum, 
then f 3 a) that time}, ftcm. 
then ( = after), deinde^ inde. 
then ( =s therefore), ^^r, itaque. 
there, t&£. 

there is no doubt, non ut dubiumquin, 
there are some who (think), 9wni qui 

{puterU). 
there are not wanting, non denmt qui 



there are found some who, r«p«ritm/ur 

ri («%*.). 
censerey putarCf txistimare^ ar- 

bitrariy See 257. 
think notliing of, nUdli facere, 266. 
thigh, /emur, oriSf n. 
tiling. A thing which (referring to a 

preceding sentence), id quod : 

sometimes, qtue res. 36. 
thirst for, ^iHre, ace, 240. 
this beinff the case, qua quum ita aint, 
thousand, mille, adj. ; pL mi22ux, subst. 
threaten, mvnari. See end of 222. 
three hundred, treeerUi, 
three days, space of, triduum, 
three years, space of; iriennium. 
through, expressing the cause, sign of 

throw before, proHcHre, Jee, ject (see 

76, y. » ./^w V 

throw off, exuere. 

till, colere, colu, cult, 

till, dorue^duniy quoady 507, Ac. 

time, at that, id temparia, 

time : at the time oi the Latin Ghmies, 

Jjudia Laiinis, 
time, for a long, dudum, ditt, Jamdu- 

dum,&c. See 420. > 

times, tw3 or three ( s several times),* 

btaterque. 
times, two or three ( =3 not more than),* 

bis terve, 
dmes. many times as great, mvlHs 

partibua major, 
timid, Hrmdus. 

tired: am — of, Uedet me {gen.'f. 
to death (after coTulemn), capihs, 
to no purpose, nequicquam, frus&a. 



to each other Rafter tonirary, compeared 

inter se, 
toga, toga, 

together (after to compare), inter se. 
to-morrow, eras, 
tongues: to hold their—, 299. 
too much, nimius {rUmius somnus, 01 



too dear, nimio, 

top o^ summus, (oc^. See 179). 

torch, Ueda, 

tortured: to be — in mind, difcruaan 



towards, adversus, erga, 470 : in, 281. 

treacheiy, prodiiio, 

treason, proditio, 

treaty, fcsdus, eris, 

tribune tribunus, 

triumph, triumphus, 

triumph in, per iriumpkum (ducere), 

triumph : ^in a — for a victory over 

the Gbuls, de GaUistrivmphare. 
troublesome, mole^us. 
Troy, l^oja, 

truen it is —but, ille quidem—aed, 383. 
truly, vere. 
trustworthy, fddis. 
truth. Veritas, 

turn back, reverters, reverti, 339. 
turn out, evadere, vas, 
turn it into a fault, vUio vertere, 242, 

Tuscan, Tuscus, 

two days, space of, biduum, 

V, 

Unacquainted witlL rudis (gen.). 
unbecoming, it is, aedecet {ace.)', 
unburied, inkumatus, 
under favour, bond tud venid^ 
under such an age, 306. 
understand, intelHgere, lex, led, 
undertake, suseipert: ( » engage to doj 

reetpere, 
undertake to corrupt, corrumpendum 



unexpectedly, ds improviso. 
unfriendly, inimicus, 
unless, nisi, 451. 
unless indeed, nisivero, or forte 
unless I am mistaken, nisimefaUiL 
unlike, dissimiUs (dot.), 
unmindful, immemor (gen,). 
unskilled in, imperitus (gen.). 
unteach, dedoeere; {two aocus,) 
unwilling, to be, nolle. 



* Bib TiBQim migtIbU, mimui bis tibvb notoAon. 



»48 



TKDBX I.— ENGLISH. 



onworthv, mdigmu {aU.)» 
' use, vii (usu8\ abl. 
use, make a bad — of^ maU vti {ahL), 
me, make a penrerse — of, wmtrt yiH 

{phi.). 
Tiseful, u/i2{f, 212. 
useless, tmi^ili*, 212. 
utter many fiidsehoods, mvUa meiSari 
{de), 33. 



V. 

Vaift, In, neequicquam; frvMlra (See 

33). 
Talue. tutimart^ 264. 
valuaJMe, pretumu, 
very (with auperl.)^ vd, 410. 
very manv, permiutu * 

very much, permulUi. 
very little, pcrpauca, 
very, to oe translated by magnvB or 

BummuB, when the a4j. after * very » 

is translated by a subst. * Is verv 

hanarabU^^ ' magna honori e^' 242. 
vice, vUium. 
violence, vit» 
virtue, 9irtu»t virhUia, 
virtuous. hontatuM, 
virtuously, koneaU. 
visit (on buaineaa), adires (as ti friend) 

viaereg (on buaineaaf or noQ con^ 

venire. See 249. 
voyage, to have a prosperous^ ear sen- 

tentid navigare. 

W. 

Wage, ^'crcrc, geaa^ geat. 

wait, TTianere. 

wait for, expadare, opperiri, prcutolarif 

See 229. 
wait upon, convenire (ace,). 
walk, avifmlare. 
wall, murua; fof a walled city) TTusnio, 

;?/. ; (of a house) paries, e/ie ; (of a 

garden, Ac.) maceria. 
wanting to be, deeaae {dot.), 
war, in, hello, 

warn, monere {ut, ne). Seep. 222^ note, 
washed, to be (of an ialaaid), arcumr 

fundi, fimta, 
watch over, cavere, can, eaui {dal,). 
water, aqua. 
Wave, Jfucfus^ iU. 
way, m each a, Ua{ui). 



welffbt, orms^ erta, 

well, 6cn« ; ( = rightly), recfe. 

whatever, quicquid, neut. as m^dsf. 

quieun^ue (adj.)» 
wheat, triitcum, 
when, ouvth, quando, 105. ( » as soon 

as)««,ti/,512. 
whence, tmde, 
where, ubt. 
where you are, iaHeifrom^ where yoa 

are, ti^nc ; to where, ^c. ithie. 
where in the world, ubi or ubinam 

gentium, 
whether— or (of two statements left 

doubtful), aive—aive : aeu^acuu 
whether (In double dependent ques- 
tions), see 118, 119; nicm(in»ui0is 

dependent questions), 
which {oftwoVuter. 
whip with rods, virgia eaderes cecid» 

eeet. 
white, aUma, 
whither, quo, 
why. cur, quare, 105. 
whole, totua, univeraua. (See 179.) 
will, against my, invUua. Against the 

wDl of Caius, incito Caio, 
willing to be, 9eU«. 
wind, veniua, 
wine, vinum^ 
winter (as adj.), fubemua, 
wisdom, aaptenHa, 
wise, aapiena, 
YdBh, veUe, 142. 
wish well to, cupere alicuu 
with, cum, 

with, after, Hodo^ de, 
with, after * to make a beginning,* a, db, 
[ in the house oi^ ^ 
in the mind of, 
withs 2 in the estimation 



t in the presence o^-J 



apfudiflec^ 

(and after 

muttiim 

vaJLtre^ 

without aine;'oTadj. ex^tra (^en.). 

without, to be, oorere (a5Z.). 

without bein^ heard, vnaudUu», a, urn. 

without : before partic, attbat, nan, or 
some other negative,, with parti- 
ciple, 363, c. Tuque, tU non, qum^ 

without, after nvnquam and before 
particip, aubat, qum with aut^^ 

wol^ lupua, 

wonder at, admirari, 

wonderful, mirua, 

wont,' to be, aoUre, aolitua sum, 

wooL kmn, 

word, verbum, 

word for word, ad verbum. 

worship, tO| a^e, eohi^ culL 



yorM, munduf: orhU terra or terra- 

rutn, 
world, in the (after tuperl.), velf 410. 
worthy, dignua (abl.). 
wouJd nave been (better), > fuU^ not 
would be (tediotti^ dc), ifuueeL 
wound, viumUf ene, 
wound, /eriref ieere, 200i 
y miliar, 0, vm. 



INDEX I. — ^ENGLISH. 

write (newB)| perteribeM, 



949 



Yesterday, Am. 
young, Juvenie, 
youth (» time of), Ju9entu»t Uitf Jtt- 



jQfath(mhodjoi\JitMntQ». StoeSaA 



INDEX II. 

LATIN, AND CRITICAL REMARKS. 



Words followed by (s) are dintingniahed from their synoiiTmes. 



A, ab, aba, 348. 

ED hinc : not wiih. ordinalM. Place qf^ 
abhinc, 305. 

a nobis stare ; facere ; aentire, 348. 

a manu servus, 348. 

abdlcare ma^tratum, or se xnagis- 
tratuL 306. 

abesse (s), 227. r. (propius). 

ac, atque (s), 4, d. 

accedit (hue — quod or ut), 613. 

accendere (s), 299. h. 

accidere (s), 374, a. 

accipere (s), 299, h. 

AccusATxva of the personal pronoun 
seldom omitted before the infin, ex- 
cept after /o^eri; cJicere, opmari^ dc. 
p. 55, s. 

ftcies (s), 348, t. 

actum est de, 69. 

adesse (s), 2^ q. 

adimere (s), 3a5. 

adire(8), 294, k. 

adjuvare (s), 222, Ic 

adspergere aliquid alicui, or aliquem 
aliquare,233. 

edes (s), 356, y. 

SBqualis, 212, x. 

equi boni faoere. 185*. 

SBtemus (s), p. 49, c. 

ait esse paratus, 149, c. 

ales (s),.480, u. 

aliud— aUud, 38. 
aliud alio (fertur), 4fl0, d. 
am are (s)^ p. 68, a. 
ambulatum est 296. 
amittere (s), 66, n. 
ainnis (s), 472, o. 
amoanus (s), 212, v. 



an, tfi oingU musHorUf 120, f. 
an non (s), 122, b. 
an quiaquam? p. 139, c 
anima, -us (s), §2, c. 
apparere (s), 150, w. 



ere (s), 150, w 
are (8), 61, i. 
(s).>i2. 



appellare ( 
aptus (s), : 
astrum (s), 51. 
audis seu Jane. 272, p. 
aut (s), 456. 
auzmari (s), 222, k. 
ave(8). 281, s. 
avere (s), 420. 
avis (s), 480, u. 



B. 

Beatus fs). 443. 
bibere (s), 278, k. 

bon& tu& yenid, 428. 
boni consulere, 186. 
BUT qfter nemo, nullus, &c. 4^1. 



C. 

cadere (s), 299, i. 

callere (s), 386. 

capere (s), 492. 

caput feritur alicui, 294 (b). 

carere (s). 273. h. 

caritas (s), 281. r. 

cave putes, 639. 

cavere alicui; aliquem; sibi; ab all 

quo, 233. 
censere (s), 257, x. 
certiorem facere, 187. 



t Bis tbbqvb augtlbUf minuet Bis tests notattmu 



INDEX II. — ^LATIN. 



361 



CHABGB in the ace, if expreaaed by a 

tuut, pron.j 194. 
circumdare urbem muro, > 909 
circumdue murum urbi, ) 
CI VITA8 in appoa, to the plural name of 

a people: Carmonensef, qtue est 

cimtaat 138, k. 
claudus altera pede, 276. 
coBpi (b), 150, z. 
CGBptus est, 150, z. 
comes (s), 185, z. 
eomissatio (s), 428^ b. 
committere u^ 479. 

COMPABATIYI ofojl ADVEBB, p. 37, V. 

eompilare, 257, g. 
componere (s), 222, r. 
Goncessum est (s), 124, d. 
CONDITIONAL jorms qf the infin.» p. 

160, X. 
conferre (s), 222, r. 
coNBEQUENCB in ptrf, aubj, for tm- 

perf 418.t 
censors (s), 185, z. 
consulere alicui : in aliquem, 233. 
contendere (s), 222, r. 
contingere (s), 374, d. 
convenire (s). 249, f. 
conviTiom (s), 428, b. 
creber (s), 410, n, 
crederes, 426. 
credor {when righi). 474, r. 
cruor,229,f. 

cuius es temperantiae, 56. 
culpa (s), 242. g. 
cuncti (s), 443. 
cupere (s), 420. 
cur (s), 106, f. 
curare aliquid faciendum, 351. 



D. 

damnare voti, votis. 201, s. 

damnare capitis, 201. 

damnor a noUnte esse homt. not Latixi^ 

152, y. 
dapes (s), 428, b. 
de facie nosse, ^ 
de improviso, > 521. 
de inaustrid, i 
debere (s), 126, f. 
deesse (s), 227, r. 
defendere, 374. 
delictum (s), 428, c. 
OBMONSTBATivB FBON. aomeUmee ex-- 

preaaed after quin, p. 30, note e. 

See 88, (a). 



d«8itas est, 150, y. 

desperatus, 229. 

deterlor (s). 410. 

dioere (aj, 177, q. 

diligere (s), p. 68, a. 

diu(s),M 

dolere (s), 521, a. 

dominus (s), 180. 

donodare, 242. (3). 

donum (si 242, h. 

dubito. See Questions, § 11 

dudum (■), 420. 

dulcis, 211, V. 

dum, 494. 

dummodo (ne), 494. 



E re mei est, 542. 

IcV !«».«• 

edere (s), 257. 

egere (s), 273, h. 

ego credor, when correct^ 474, r. 

eo insoIentiaB, 512. 

epulsB (s). 428, b. 

erg6, with ee7i,f 2fft. 

esse honon alicui, 242. 

est infinitum, 426. 

et is (idem, <ftc.), 385. 

eyenire, 374, d. 

EYEB, fiowtranalated, p. 141, k. 

ex pedibus laborare, 642. 

excedere urbe, urbem, 244, q. 

excipere (s), 299, a. 

eximere (s), 385. 

expilare (s), 257, g. 

exspectare (s), 227, z. 

lxSS!risl(«)»276,u. 



F. 

fac ut, 539. 

facere de, 291; facere noa posmm 

quin, 89. 
&cturos pollicentur, 149, c. 
fallere (s), 38, z. 
fallit me, 209. 
familiariter uti, 456. 
£uium (s), 356, y. 
fari (s), 177, q. 
&s est, 124, d. 
faustus (s), 443. 
feUx (s), 443. 



t Potius dixerim, ubi de re prsteritfi agatur, perfectum subjunctlvi magis 
nenltumfaeti spectare ; imperfectum mentem et conailium agentia. Gfinther. 



852 



XnOBX II.— UITIN* 



lestinare (b), 177, m 

fieri potest ut, 129. 

flagitare (s), 267. 

fluviua (s). 472, v. 

foraitan, 494. 

fortior quam prudentlor, 452; w. 

frequens (s), 410, n. 

fuffit me, 209. 
fuit utiliofl, Ac, 426. 
fundamental nila for the sequence of 
tenses, 40. 

rUTVBB SVBJVVCT., 41. 



gaudere (s), 521, a. 
gestire (s), 420. 
giatus (s), 212, ▼. 



hflBres ex drodante, &c., 556. 

haud (8), p. 70. h. 

haud Bcio an, 116. 

haud scio an nemoy ttronger than haud 
Bcio an quiaauam. Is (he hUer 
farm correct? See note on Diffi 
qfldionu 25. 

hems (s), 180. 

hie, 377, dto., relating to the more remote 
wordf 378, h: to idde quo potion- 
mum (^mu»t 378, h (3). 

homo (s), 38, y. 

hostis (s), 221, z. 



icere (s), 299, i. 

id, no< to be'uaed ao nam, to 'to 5e' 

when a eubet, fiUJUnDe^ hvJt to agru 

with thai ntbet,, p. 135, m. 
idetatlsl63,i9. 
ID QvoD/or quod onfy, add§ emphiaai$, 

p. 27, note*, 
idem (»a2«o). ^. 
idem est qui (or ac, atquflV 45, b. 
idoneus (s), 212* ; qui, 48o. 
fenoscerefs), 428, c. 
Itle, 49, 377, Ag, i with quidem In oar- 

tialeonceooionOf followed by a 'oui,* 

383. 
Imperare (s), 78, w. 
impertire aliquid jalicui ; or aliquem 

aliquAre, 
in ante diem. 
Indies, 69, t. 



faieendere (s). 299, h. 

incipere (s), 160, z. 

incolumis (s), 542. 

incumbere rei or in rem^ p. 6W. 

incusare (s), p. 72, m. 

faidigere (s), 267. 

indaere,2a3. 

inimicuB (s), 212, z. 

nrmnriTB, wiihpartie^le or ouhoL in 

the nom. fiy attractumt 54. 
Snquit, 177, q. 
inspeisere auquid alicui or aliquem aU- 

iquA re, p. 86, d. 
instar: when to be need, Tffl. 
inter se contraria, 26. 
interdum (s), 402.' 
interea (s), 402 ; In neg. oenteneee^'oee 

noteg, 
interesse (s), 227, q. 
interest Cicenmia esse doqutnHe, 

wrongs 152, z. 
interficere (s). 306. 
interim (s). 402. 
inyenire (s), 177, o. 
ip8e(»ex{u^y), 306. 
IPSB, withpers. pron., when in the nom., 

v)hen «n oblique caee^ 368. 
IP8B, hardly ever in the nom. {in Cic.) 

after appended met, p. 131, c. 
ira8Ci(8),a2. 
is sum oui, 483. 
is (ea, id), the uavAl pron, for the third 

person where thtre It no eitvpfuuU^ 

no dietinction to beinarked, 37, u. 
iste, that qf youre, 377 (c). 
iste, in lbttbbs, refere to the place 

where anie oorreepondent rekdee, 

382. 
istinc, 387. 
Ita justum, ei est, ^., 451. 



jampridem cupio. 413. 

JVBEUB (ace. with inf.; ut to&m U9ed 

abeMutely), p. 80, h. 
jucunde viyi non fH>te8t, 504. 
jucundus (b)j211, ▼. 
jttvare (s), 222, k. 



laetart, 521. 

latet me, or mihi Ptad^, 269, a. 

libenter( = 2iX:efo),492. 

libertinus > /„v k«i 

Ubertus jWioCl. 

Ucet (s), 124, d. % 

licetesse beatum, or beato, 169; h^ a 



rnnu n. — ^latiii. 



853 



ficet (aWumgh)j 461. 
iocare aliquid faciendum. 
Socare (s), 480, y. 
lootti (s), 177, g. 
ludis Latiiils, 311. 
Ingere (s), 521, a. 

M. 

macerla (s), 233. 

macte esto. Ac, 280, q. 

muor annui viginti, Ac, d. on 1 42. 

maJe audircL 492. 

mandare (s), 78, w. 

me (miserum) qui, 486, 1. 

mederi (s), ZSZ, I 

medicina } /^% nm0f t 

medi(»mentnm J Wi ''O'l »• 

memini (s), 62, q. 61, L 

memini I^ere, 426. 

mens (s), 92, c. 

metuere (ne, uQ, 95 ; s. 99, e. 

minari mortem alicui, 222. 

miserari ^ 

misereri > (a), 201, r. 

miaeret mej 

modo. 494. 

moBnia (a), 233. 

moBrere (s), 621, ^ 

monere f,ut;nef aee, with uif., 189, k. 

monere (a), 222, i. 

munuB (a), 242, h. 

muruB (a), 233. 



N. 
tamm>ended ioirUerrtgaii9e$f p. 140, 

no quia (furf, utl 

nemo), itheti a pnrpoae it 

ne quid (not^ ut I expressed vriihout 

nihil), r emphasU on the 

ne unquam {not, negative, 80. 

ut nunquam), J 
ne s that after verba of fear, 96. 
ne — quidem, 186. 
ne dicam. 443. 
necare (a), 308. 
necGBBeeat. 504. 
necne (a), 122, b. 
nedum (ut), 145. 
nemo pictor, 443: nemiais, nemine; 

ou note p. 129. 



neque, wUh verb » wUhmU, 620L 

nequicquam (a). 33, y. 

neacio quia. 394. 

neacio an, 116. 

nihil me terret, 443. 

nihil habeo quod, 477 

nihi aUud niai, 185. 

niliil aliud quam rident, 450. 

niai, 451. 

niai forte, or yero, 461. 

noli putare, 639. 

nolle » tDOukt not, 541. 

nomen eat mlhi Goio, 239. 

non (a), p. 70, lu 

non poaaum quin {forfafiert non pp» 
aum quin; or, non poaawn non 
wUk infn,) okmM not be imUaUd. 
[Cicero quote* non poaaum 
quin ezclamem, from Plautua.] 

non ouod, or quo— aed, 492. 

non deaunt qui putent, 477. 

non aolum — yerum (or aed) etiam, 267. 

non eat quod, 477. 

nonne, 102. 

nonnunquam (a), 402. 

noacere (a), 366. 

NoarauM, vestbum, cfler parttlweOf 
and tDtth omnium, 372, 

nullua dubito, 492. 

num, 102 

nuptam ease, 222, m. 

O. 

OB, in oberro, Ac. « amb, iii^), 248^ r. 

obedire (a), 222. 

obire mortem, Ac, (a), 249, u. 

obyiam ire. 612. 
occidere (a), 306. 
opens pretium eat 632. 
opitulari (a), 222, k. 
oportet (a), 126, t . 
oportet me lacere, > |oa 
oportet (eeo) &ciam, J ^^^ 
opperiri (a), 229, z. 
oppetere mortem (a), 249, n. 
oppidum (a), 63, z. 
opprobrium (a), 242,1. 
optare (b). 420, opto ut p. 214. 
opua eat (a), 126, f. 170, i. 
opua eat properato. 177. 
opua abaolutum habeo, 364. 



t Moneo, s to warn a peraon to do oometfung, aometimea takea infin. instead 
of ut with aubj.— Clc. hardly ever uaea the Infin. if any particular mUifoU is 
named s— ratio ^m momst, amkUia» ooxFAnAu. 



354 



TNDBX I. — LATIN. 



onie'(>), 257.* 

OBIOIir OF THB PlftFECT WITH * HAYS * 
nr MODEBN LAHGUAOBS, p. 130, a. 

DriimduB|^g^B51 



ortus 



pace tuA dixerinii 428. 
par (a), 212jX. 
pardre(8).222. 
parum (s), 402. 
pariea (s), 233. 

PABTICIPIAL SUBaTAMTITB, CantiOB 

26. See also p. 151,6. 

FABTZOIPLBS IV BUB AUD DV8, f 46, p. 

126. 
PABTXOIPLB8 of deponciit Tcrba, 366. 
paaci (8), 257, k. 
pati (b), 632.* 

pejor (a), 410. 

FBBF. 8UBJ. (for Imperf.) in a eon»§- 

quence with ut, 418 : in dbl, narr. 

p. 161, z. 

PEB80NAL PBON. EXPBB88ED, whM ffuTe 

i$ a diatifictum between two acHons 

qfthe aame p«r«on, p. 17, note, 
perauadere (s), 222, i. 
perauasum eat mihi, 291. 
perauaaiaaimam habeo (6ckQ, 291, z. 
petere (a), 257.* 
pietaa (a), 281, r. 
plerique: plerorumque plerarumque, 

not found, 291. 
poUlceri (fl), 17, 1. 
poUlceri, wUh infin. Jul. 15, a. 
ponere (a), 480, v. 
poacere (a), 257.* 
poaaum (a), 125, e. 
post — annoa quam ezceaserat ; or ez- 

ceaait, 310, a. 614. 
poathabere aliquid alicui, 227. 
postquam, 512. 
poatulare (a), 257.* 
potare. 257, k. 
potential /x 45, 
poteataa $ W» «*• 
poteatatem aul facere, 451. 

prsemium (a), 242. 
praesens, >227 a 

prsaentem ease, 5 **"»*«• 
oneatolarl (a), 227, z. 
prsBterit (non me}, 259. 
prehendere (a), 492. 
P8B8B:Brr qfUr el in connection wUhfut,t 
p. 14d;t 



PBBaBMT and ixpBBP. PABaiTB of Eng- 
li^ verb, 135, e. ^ 

PBBSEirr or fbbp. svbj. in eonfucHen 
with infin. whtre the general rtde 
would require imp^^'f, or plupcrf^ 

pridem (a), 420. 
prim-um, o (a), 83, a. 
probrum (a), 242, i. 
' pro re naU, 5 

provirill, 5542. 

pro 60 ac mereor, 3 
pro tvA temperantii, 56. 
proBlium (a), 348, t. 
profugua (a), 276, n. 
projicere ae ttUcui ad pedes; or ad 

alieujuc pedea, p. 89, note 1. 
promltto (s). 17- L 
properare (s), 177, m. 
propior, 211. 

prop! UB (dat. or ace), 512. 
propiua abease, 319. 
proaper (a), 443. 

prozime, 512. 

prozimua, 211. 

pugna (a), 34^ t. 

purgandl aui causfi, 334. 

putares (you would have thoughi), 426. 



quae rea, 36. 

quoB quum ita aint, 492. 

quae tua eat temperantia, 56. 

quam pro {(\fter compar.), 409, f. 

quam nullua, 492. 

quam ut ait, Ac, {after compar.), 486. 

quam breviasime, Ac, 410. 

quam omitted qfter ainpliua, Ac, 652; k. 

SS'S:'"'!^!- See note u. " 

quanta mazima potest esse, Ac., 410. 

quare, 105, f. 

quasi, 494. 

queo (a), 125, e. 

quid aetatis, 164, 0, 

quid facerem ? 427, c. 

quilibet (9), 390, u. 

quin, 44, 3. See note c^ p. 30^ and 

note d, p. 215. 
quin after verba of doabtinj, Ac, in 

negative aentencea, 85, 86. 
quippe (qui), 482, a. 
quia eat qui 7 477. 
quia sum qui 1 483. 
quiaquam, 389, 390, (7). 
si quisquam, 391, w. 
quisquam : an est** qui ? 477. 



INDEX I. LATIN. 



865 



qtiiaque : doctiialmuB quMque^ 399. 
quivis (s), 390, u. 
quo, 63, tDithout compar^ p. 216, e. 
quo amentise, 512. 
quoad ejus, i&c, 512. 
quod sciam. 56. 
quominuB, &4. 
quoniam, 492. 
quote8ti8.dc., 174. 
quotidie, 69, t. 

quotusquisqu6 est, qui (rabj.), 477. 
quum interrogaretur, not interrogatna 
esset, 4]& a. 



re = forth, 249. V. (=i^i7) 
recipere (s), 308, a. 
recordari,p 72: (s), 201, q. 
redire (s), 330, p. 

BELATIVB PRONOUN, wkefl U doCB DOt 

agree with its proper antecedent. 48. 
remeaum (s), 25^ 1. 
reminlsci (a). 201, q. 
reperire (s), 177, o. 
reperiuntur, &c., qui, 477. 
res ita se habet, 451. 
ream facere, 187. 
reus, its meaning, 188, f. 
revenire > .^v ««o ^ 
revert! j(«)»339,p. 

rlTua (s), 472, v. 
rogare (s), 267.* 



S. 

salutare (a), 249, f. 

salve (s), 281, s. 

salvus(8),542. 

sanare (a), 222. 1. 

sanguis (s), 299, f. 

sapientior Caio, \ At\rs. •« 

sapientior quam Caius, J *"^» ^ 

satis, 512. 

satius, ex. 34. 

■«lu«(8)j243,g. 

scire (s), 385. 

se o/Un inserted by Cie, qfUr veUe^ p. 

55. r. 
secundum aliquem decemere, 604. 
securus (s), 542. 
sempitemus (s), 123, c. 
sensit delapsus, 149, u. 
sententii (ez), 17. 
sisirAe^Aer, p. 158, t. 
si hoc dicas, p. 153, h. 
si (mood), 461, t. 



si quia, Jqoi « 

si quisquani, J *'^*» ^* 

sive, seu, 456, a. 

sidus (s), 51. 

silere (s), 299,-g. 

simUis tui, tibi, 212, w. (212, i.) 

simulac, iftc, 512. 

simulare, 15 (a) ; (s), 17, m. 

sin minus^ 1 

sin autem, I ^^i 

sin secus, f *^*- 

sin aliter, J 

sine aliquo or oMqu&y uiktn right^ 890,v 

sine omni curt, wrong, 391, w. 

sinere (s), 532.« 

spoliare (s), 273. 
Stella (s), 57. 
stipendium merer!, 308. 
suadere (s), 222, i. 
suavis (s), 212, v. 
sublevare >/^v 900 i. 
subvenire J W. ^-^^^i «• 
succendere (s), 299, h. 
succurrere (s), 222, k. 
sumere (s), 492. 
succens6re (s), 222. 
summus mons, 179. 
SUNT QUI putent, 45 and 477. 
svPBBLATivE and other adjj, placed in 
the relat, instead of in the principal 
63. 



T. 

tacere (s), 299, g. 

tanquam, 494. 

tantum abest ut — ut, 534. 

templum (s), 356, y. 

timere (s), 99, e. 

triplicem aciem instruere, 456. 

trucidare (s), 308. 

-to, -tote {janperaiioe forms i7iX480,x. 

tueri, 374. 

tutus (s), 542. 



U. 

ubi terrarum, ) g,, 

ubinam gentium, J ° '^ 

univers! (s), 443. 

unquam, 402. 

ut r= ew soon as; when, 512. 

Mi^ihainoty 95. 

ut omitted, 417, h. 

VT NB, when used for ne^ 77, note. 

ut quisque -^ Ita, 407. 

at ^lunt. 319. 



856 

nterlibet (a) . 390, u. 
^tervis (b). aSO, n. 
atinam, 494. 
utpote qui, 482. 



vacat mihi. 154 : 337. 
▼alere apua aliquein, 463. 
vapulare ab 291. 



INDEX I. — ^LATUI. 



lll*^ 



▼6iiai(«t)JDdicea,417 K 
yeS^mwndd, 641. 



TeUe8ibi.242. 
yeniam dare, 428^ c 
yerbi causa, 443. 
vereri (s), 99, e. 
vlderi, 150, V. 
▼ir(5).38,y. 
yis, dccL p. 69, note g. 
yisere (s), 249, b. 
vidum (s), 242, g. 
yitio yertere, Ac., 242. 
irix crediderim, 42a* 
yocare (b), 51, i. 
yolucres (b), 480. n. 
^jj8eeB8epriiiclpeni,>,^ 
( esBe princcpa. S 



THE END. 



2>. AJPPLSTON 4t CO:a PTJBUOATIONB. 

K Latin Grammar for Schools and Colleges. 

By A. HARKNESS, Fb.D., Frofouer In Broim Unireccdtj. 

To explain the general plan of the work, the Pobliaheni ask the attenlioii 
of ieadiera to the foUowing extracts from the F^raAMe: 

1. TUa Tohnne is dedgned to present a ajstematie anasgement of the 
great ikcts and laws of the Latin language; to exldbit not only grammatical 
forms and oonstnictions, but also those ffUd prineipleB which miderlie^ con 
tiol, and explam them. 

2« Designed at once as a text>book for the class-room, and a book of 
reference in stady, it ahns to introduce the begmner easily and pleasantly to 
the first prindples of the language, and yet to make adequate provision for 
the wants of the more adyanced student 

8. By brevity and conciseness in the choice of phraseology and compact- 
ness in the arrangement of fonns and topics, the anihor has endeavored to 
compress within the limits of a convenient manual an amount of carefully- 
selected grammatical &c^ which would otherwise fill a much larger volume. 

4. He has, moreover, ^deavored to present the whole subject in the 
light of modem scholarship. Without encumbering hi spages with any un- 
necessary discussions, he has umed to enrich them with ihepraeUeal rttulU 
of the recent labors in the field of philology. 

6. Syntax has recdved in every part special attention. An attempt has 
been made to exhibit, as dearly as possible, that beautiful system of laws 
which the genius of the language— that highest of aU grammatical authority 
—has created for itself. 

6. Topics which require extended illustration are first presented in thdr 
completeness in general outline, before the separate points are discussed in 
detail Thus a smgle page oftoi foreshadows aU the leadmg features of an 
extended discussion, imparting a completeness and vividness to tiie impress- 
ion of the learner, imposuble under any other treatment 

7. Special care has been tak^ to explam and illustrate with the requisite 
AxhiesB aU difficult and hitricate subjects. The Subjunctive Mood— that 
severest trial of the teacher's patience— has been presented, it is hoped, hi a 
form at once ample and comprehensiveL 



JD. ATPLBTON <fc CO:S PUBUCATIOlSrS. 



flarkuess's Latin Grammar. 

Frwn Bat. Prat J. J. Ownr, I>.I>^ Ntm York Fr&s Academy, 
**I have otreftilly examined HarkneM^a lAtin Grammar, and am ao wall ploaaad 

with ita plan, arrangement, and execution, that I ahall take the earliest opportunity off 

Introdudng it aa a text-book in the £^ee Academy." 

Fr<m Mr. Jomr B. Fmxasiac, Bupwlni^ndmU qf J*ubUc Sehoottt Boston^ Mam, 
** Thia work ia eyldently no hasty performance, nor the compilation of a mere boek 
naker, bat the well-ripened flrolt of matnre and accurate aoholatahip. It la eminently 
pnetiaa], becaoae it is truly philosophical" 

JVvfti Mr. O. N. BxaxLOW, Prinoipal (^StaU Norma* JBehool^ Framingham^ Mass, 
*> Uarkneaa^a Latin Orammar is the most satisfaotoiy text-book I haye ever used." 

Fr(»n Bey. 'Daxixl Lsaos, 8%vp«riiiU«ndMi PubUo Sohocli^ Providence^ B. I, 
** I am quite confident that it ia superior to any lAtin Orammar bef<ne the publia 
It has recently Iwen introduced into the High School, and all are much pleased with it" 

From Br. J. B. OiEArar, 8taU Commissioner qfPubHe Instruction in Ehode Island, 
■^The yltal principles of the language are dearly and beautifblly exhibited. The 
wotk needs no one^s commendation." 

From Mr. Anim J. Pbzpps, Superintendent <tfFubUo ScihooUt LovoeH, Mass. 

**The aim of the author seems to be Ailly realized in making this *a tM^W Book, 
snd as such I can cheerfully commend it The clear and admirable manner in which 
the intricacies of the Subjunctive Mood are unfolded, ia one of its marked features. 

**The evidence of ripe scholarship and of Huniliarity with the latest works of Ger« 
man and English philologists is manifest throughout the book." 

Fnm Dr. J. T. GnAMPLor, President qf WaterviUe College* 
**I like both the plan and the execution of the work very much. Its matter and 
manner are both admirable. I shall be groatly disappointed if it does not at once win 
the public &yor." ^ 

I^om Fn»f. A. S. Paokakd, Sowdoin CoUege^ Brunstoick^ Maine, 
"Harkness^s Latin Orammar exhibits throughout the results of thorough scholar 
■hip. I shall recommend it in our next catalogue." 

From FroC J. J. Btantoh, ScOes College. 
** We have introduced Harkness's Orammar into this Institution. It is much 'men 
uiglcal and condse than any of its rivals." 

JP^rom Mr. Wu, J. Boltb, Prinoipal Cambridge High School, 
** Notwithstanding all the inconveniences that must attend a change of Latin Giam- 
mars in a large school like mine, I shall endeavor to secure the adoption of Harkness*i 
Granmiar in phice of our present text-book as soon as possible." 

From Mr. I* B. WnxiSTon, Principal Ladies'' Seminary^ Cambridge^ Mass, 
**I think this work a decided advance upon the Onunmar now in use." 

From Mc B. B. Haosb, Princ JBUot Bigh School^ Jamaica Plain, Mass, 
•*This is, in my opinion, by far the best Latin Gramxnar eoer published. It It 
tdaodrably adapted to the use of learners, being remarkably condse, dear, cbmpr» 
tanilve, and philosophical. It will henoeforth be used as a text-book in this adiooL*' 



J>. APPLEION it VO:a PUBUCATIONa. 



Harkness^s Latin Grammar. 

From Vrot 0, 8. Habbdi(»to]| iind Tnl J. a Yak BxmoHOxsR, <^t^6 W^OtHfom 

** ThJB woik if dear, aodnntei and happy in its statement of pilndplee, if simple yel 
Mbolarlj, and emlvaees fbe latest researches in this department cf philological seleiiaak 
It will appear In our oatalogue.** 

JWfii Mr. EcBBiMB BxRB, Princflpdl Fres Acadrnvy^ ybtfcieh, Ct 
**Thls is not only the best Latin Grammar, but one of the most thoronghlj prepavsd 
•Bliool-books that I hare erer seen. I haye introduced the book into the Free Aeade 
Biy, and am much pLMsed with the results of a month^s experience in the olasa-room.* 

Uram Mr. H. A. FEAn^ Prinoipal Eigh School^ Rar^ord^ Ot, 
** I can heartily rvMMmmend Harkness^s new work to both teachers and scholars. It 
la, in my Judgment, the best lAtln Gnonmar oyer offered to oar schools.* 

iVom Mr. L F. Oadt, Frinelpca Eigh School^ Warren^ B, I. 
** The longer I use Harkness*s Grammar the more ftilly am I conyinoed of its saperioff 
•zoellence. Its merits most, secnre its adoption whereyer It becomes known." 

From Messrs^ 8. Thubbeb and T. B. Stookwkll, PiibUc Eigh Scfiool^ Providonoo, 
** An experience of seyeral weeks with Harkness^s Latin Grammar, enables ns to 
say with confidence, that it is an improyement on oor former text-book.** 

IHm Mr. 0. B. Goff, JPrUieipaZ Soys'* CUueical ffigh School, Providmoe, R, L 
*'The practical working of Harkness's Grammar is gratifying eyen beyond my ex- 



From Bey. Fro£ M. H. Bxtokham, XPnAnwniHy of Vermont 
<* Harknees*s Latin Grammar seems to me to supply the desideratam. It is philo- 
sophical in its method, and yet simple' and dear in its statements; and this, in my 
judgment, la the highest encomium whldi can be bestowed on a text-book." 

iVom Mr. E. T. Qitihbt, AppUton AoadMyy, ITew Ipmeidh, IT. Bi 
**I think the book much enpolor to any other I haye seen. I should be glad to 
Introduce it at once.** 

JPiwn Mr. H. OBonrr, Olonwood ZadUt* Semdnary^ W. Br€itaeboro\ Vt 
" I am pleased with Harkness^s Latin Grammar, and haye already introduced it inte 
this seminary.** 

From Mr. Chaslxs Jkwxtt, PrinoipcU ofFromkUn Aoadmn/y, 
~ **! deem it an admirable work, and think it will supersede all others now In usck 
In the diyidon and arrangement of topics, and 1^ its mechanical execution, it is snpe- 
itar to any Latin Grammar extant** 

From Mr. O. a OHAsa, Principal qfLowtU Eigh School, 
** Frofl Harkness*s Grammar is, in my opinion, admirably adapted to make the study 
of the Latin language agreeabld and interesting.** 

From Mr. J. Ktmbai.t., Bigh Sbhooly DordhetUr, Mass. 
* It meets my ideal cf what is desirable in eyery grammar, to wit : compressloa ol 
fsaeral piindples in terso definitions and statements, for ready sse; and ftOnossol 
detail, well arranged for reference.** 



D. APFLSTOHr A COJS PUBUCATIOKB. 

Amold^s Greek Course. 

Revised. Corrected, and Improyed, by the Bev. J. A. SPENCER, D J)l, 
late Frofessor of Latin and Oriental Langoages in Boriington Col* 
lege, N. J* 

niUrrGSEBK BOOK, on the Flan of tlM First lAtln Book ISrao, 964 pagMi 
rRAOnOAL IHTBODUOTION TO GBEBK PBOBB OOMFOSITIOBr. llm^ 



SBOOKD PAST TO THE ABOYB. Iftno, f48 pages. 

OBEBK BEADINQ BOOK. Oontalnlng the BQl>6tance of the Fracttcal Introdaetioii 
to Greek Oonstndng, and a OYeatlse on the Greek Particles; also, copious sdeo- 
tions from Greek Authors, with Gritieal and Eaplanatory English Notes, snd a 
Lexicon. ISmo, CIS pagesi 

A complete, thoron^^ praotloal and easy Greek course Is here presented. Tba 
beginner commences with the ** First Book," In which the elementaiy principles of 
the langoage are unfolded, not in abstract language, difflcnlt both to comprehend and 
to remember, but as practically applied in sentences. Throughout the whole, the 
pupil sees Just where he stands, and is tanght to use and apply what be learns. His 
progress is, therefore, as rapid as it is intelligent snd pleasant There is no unneces- 
sary Terbiage, nor is the pupil^s attention dlTcrted from what is .really important by 
a mass of minor details. It is the experience of teachers who use this book, that wttii 
li a gtren amount of Greek Grammar can be imparted to a pupil in a shorter time and 
with for less trouble than with any other text-book. 

The ** First Book** may with adyantage be followed by the ** Introduction to 
Greek Prose Composition.** The object of this work is to enable the student, as soon 
as he can decline and conjugate with tolerable ftdlity, to translate simple sentences 
after giren examples and with giren words; the principles employed being those of 
imitation and yery firequent repetition. It is at once a Syntax, a Vocabulary, and an 
Exercise book. The ** Second Part** carries the subject ftirther, unfolding the most 
complicated constructions, and the nicest points of Latin Syntax. A Key is proyided 
ftff the teaoher*s use. 

The ** Seader,** besides extracts Judiciously selected from the Greek classics, contains 
yaluable instructions to guide the learner in translating and construing, and a c<Huplete 
exposition of the partides, their signification and goyemment It is a fitting sequel to 
the earlier parts of the course, eyerywhere showing the hand of an acute critic, an 
aoQomplishad scholar, and an experienced teacher. 

From the Biy. Dn. Oolkuak, Prqfessor of Oreek and LcOin^ Frinceton, ^ J. 

** I can, from the most satisfkctory experience, boar testimony to the excellence of 
four series of Text-Books for Schools. I am in the daUy use of Amold*s Latin ana 
Greek Exerdses, and consider them deddedly superior to any other Elementary Works 
la those Languages.** 



standard. Classioal "W^orlsB, 

Arnold's Tint Greek Boole,* on the Plan of the Fint lAtin 
Book. ISmo. 897 page^ 



AmoldHi Praetleal Introduction to Greek Preoe 

Ckunpoeitlon.^ ISma 287 pages. 



Arnold's Second 



Part to the AlioTe.* 12ma 248 



Arnold's Greek Reading Book, Containing the Snb- 
stance of the Pmctlcal Introduction to Greek Constroiug and a 
Treatise on the Greek Partlclea; also, Coplona Selections lh>m 
Greek Anthers, with Critical and llzplanatory English Notes and 
a Lexicon. 12mo. 618 pages. 

Br. AmoM^s Greek Courses hare been carefhlly reTised, corrected, 
and improTed bv J. A. Bpehoxb, I>.D., making them a thorough, prac- 
tical, and easy Greek course. 

Boise's Bzerclses In Greek Prose Composition. 

Adapted to the First Book of Xenophon^s AnabasiB^ By JAins 
B. Bonn, Professor of Greek in Univendty of Michigan. ISma 
186 pages. 

OkampUn's Skort and Comprekenslve Greek 

Grammar. By J. T. CflAicPLnr, Professor of Greek and Latin 
in Waterrille College. 12mo. 808 pages. 

First Eiessons In Greek;* or, the Beginner's Companion- 
Book to Hadley's Grammar. By J axes Hobbis Whtton, rector 
of Hopkins Grammar School, New Haven, Ct (Becentlj pub- 
lished.) 12mo. 

Hadley's Greek Grammar,^ for Schools and Colleges. By - 
Jakxs Hadlbt, Professor in Yale College. (Eecently published.) 
12mo. 866 pages. 

Kerodotnsy Selections From; Comprising mainly such 
portions as give a Connected History of the East, to the Fall of 
Babylon and the Death of Cyrus the Great By Hxbhak M. 
JomrsoK, D.B., Professor of Philosophy and English Literature 
in Dickinson College. 12mo. 185 pages. 

Knliner's Greek Gralmmar. Translated by Professors 
Edwabds and Tatlob. Large 12mo. 620 pages. 



\ 



standard Classical ^W^orlcs. 



Kendrlek'B Gre€k Ollendorff.^ Being a Progressiye Ex- 
hibition of the Principles of the Oreek Grammar. By Araitbt. C. 
ExvDRiCK, Professor of Greek Language in the Uniyersity of 
Boohester. 12mo. 871 pages. . 

Plato's Apologrr BXLd Orlto.^ With Notes by W. S. Ttleb, 
Graves Professor of Greek in Amherst College. 12mo. 180 
pages. 

Xenoplion's memorabilia of Socrates. With Notes 
and Introduction by B. D. C. Bobbinb, Professor of Langnage in 
Middlebory College. 12mo. 421 pages. 

Xenoplion's AnalmalB. With Explanatory Notes for the nse 
of Schools and Colleges. By Jaxss B. Boibs, Professor of Greek 
in the Uniyersity of Michigan. 12mo. 898 pages. 

Sopliodea' CEdlpns Tyrannns. With Notes for the Use 
of Schools and Colleges. By Howard Cbobbt, Professor of Greek 
in the Uniyersity of New York. 12mo. 188 pages. 



Hebrew and Syriac. 

GesenliW Kebre-vr Grammar* Seyenteenth Edition, with 
Corrections and Additions, by Dr. E. Bodigxb. Translated by T. 
J. CovAKT, Professor of Hebrew in Bochester Theological Sem- 
inary, New York. Syo. 841 pages. 

Vlilemann'B Syriac Grammar. Translated from the Ger- 
man. By Ehooh HuTOHnfsov. With' a Course of Exerdses in 
Syriac Grammar, and a Chrestomathy and brief Lexicon prepared 
by the Translator. 8yo. 86T pages. 



3D. A.I>I>I*BTOIT Ss OO., 
448 A 446 BROADWAY, K. Y., 

PUBLISH TTPWABIM 07 

aOO SCHOOL TEXT-BOOKS, 

Indnding the departmenta of English, Latin, Greek, French, Spanish, 
Italian, Hebrew, and Syriac ; of which a complete 
33esoi?iptive Catalosize 
, WUl 7>6 aetUf fr^ <^po9Utgty to thote applying for it. 

A single copy for eooaminaHon^ of any of the works marked thus*, 
will be transmitted by mall, postage prepaid, {o any Teacher remitting 
one-half of its price. Any of the others will be sent by mail, postage 
prepaid, upon receipt of ftill retail price. 



r 



r\
Internet Archive Audio

Featured

Top

Images

Featured

Top

Software

Featured

Top

Books

Featured

Top

Video

Featured

Top

Mobile Apps

Browser Extensions

Archive-It Subscription

Save Page Now

Full text of "A Practical Introduction to Latin Prose Composition"

See other formats
